n Oass. Book. COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT ADVERTISEMENTS. I (published by mark H. NEW.AIAN ic CO., 199 BROADWAY, NEW-YORK.) R E C O M M E N D A T I O JS S . [Sio frete ^yreiTc, ^y^'itatelpbia.] iL>pobburi)'e Juvjgefa iJ tc ?>raEttfc{)e cirglifc^e (^ vamina t if. ^rteiv^^)*-'!"^' tfi 2Jiar! ^. DleiDinau u. (>cmp. (vine neiie ciit^Itfd)e (Srammatif liei^M^or un?, bie nd) fefbu befonbcrS fiir 'M- nisiijcr cnivfit.'l;ft, ivelcfce tie eii[ilifil}e vijpraite tit nu'ijltctift furjev ^dt \n eiier^ iini antiifdjen. 23ti: brauc^en faiint ju eriuabt^fn/ welften inibevec^'eubavai t'iii&fit biclS-vlernung etMei- fremteii ®vrad)e, befonbers aber ber englifc^en, tcv ''.iiiiibcsfpracfce beS Si^olfe», nnfer beni anu Icbeii, fiiv ben SJeutfcccit b.it; wie cr mir balb in einem ^antc lebt, beffcu gi-5stcit 2:betl feiner ^ctiiobttev f; niitr bfrilcbt, bcjfcn eitten, @ebrau(^c unb y^prjiige cr beBCviIb uicbt j]viinD= liclj einfe^cu f^mn, wepbalb er fo eft tl)ftls ilufio^ cm jcnen ntmmr, line er nn^cvu-iri benfclben eft anfti^Btt] n.nvb. 23tv bvanc^en ntd}t auf nocf) ar.beve niijal^liijf -iNOvrbciic unb ©eniiffc anfnterffani ja macben, roeld)e au§ bev Jlenuts nifj bcs (S'nfilifdjcn fiiv ben 5;:entfc^en in ^Imcrifa cntftefien, itm tie 91pti}rocn= bici^iiit !i»tev i^ebrbiicbev bar5ntbni;, n.'flctie tit ^Inetgnnng ber (gpraebe erieicfas Ici-n. llnifv bie i>iaffe bev iOovbanbeneu ift nun nod)' etus gciinn-fen, beffeu 3:trcl unr cben niittbeilteu, unb trp§ bev ^Sov^iige vnelev fvitbev bcveirg nnev= fanntcn. fi^nneu wix bpcb nid-.t nmbtn, iI3po?buri^'5 I'rafitfd'e ©vammattf aiS fine» bev am iitciften praftifc^en Sebvbucbcv jn empfeblfn, bie in biefem 3n-'ftge ber Citcrarur erfiticnen. ^•3 nn^ iDltS'gviffe bavin oevmieben, bie an rteien fvaf'evn laugu als STtviimel evfannt njnvben, unb has ?B(Uvzhin ber notbn^entigen gvammatifalifc^en 9xe= gelu mil bev 51nfjteUung ^aiTeubev in'a!rifd'.ev SSciunele, treUte jene cvlautevn, uut ifCii ginbvingen in bie viin-acbgebcinuiiiTe fo uncnbUrb cvleid^Rvn, ^evfti^vt i>it bci bev laiigiveilii]eu vein gvannnatifalifd^en (Srlernung bev -iprac^e ent= ftcbcnbe Unluft' bev Sd^iilev fcairbl, all Cs SUtjietcb bie oberi^ddilicb mange[= ha\u unb eiufeirige (^vlevnung bev Spvad^e aul gebved^feiten 33^vafen, iiac^ foflfUiinnrcn vrafrifdsen Sefebitctevn binbevt. ■Sas -:)ivaftif(^e unb bie 2;bcovie, beibe fcnncn a lie in ntd)t ben ^roiertbeu 2}Jttbm'ger, t»em .^aufmartu 23 o o b b u v i). 2Siv ^abeii ia§ Siicf) fergfaltig gepviift, unb bejeugen bemfelben, ia% cl in etiifad)ei-, gviinblicfcev S^arftellung, gniauer Cxt^ iiung inib ^larbeit, iibeu alie anbevu af)ultc^en 23erfe fteht, bte meiftenS a\lz mebr cbev a^enigev ungenau uiib iniflar tn ibrer 25vitftellung§roeife ftnb, nub in Seuig auf bte ^:j(iisfpracf)e maud)e 3rvtf)iimcr cnt^alten. Ser .^Fievv iBer= fr.ffcr ift boUfontmcu 2)ld}icr bev beutfi^en Spracije, iinb fonnte bvirum, n(5- gclebrrev ^ilnicrifaner, biefe auggejetcbuete (^prar^lebve fiiv feinc ilJJutrcrfvii-rtrtie, btc englifd)?, auf bte fiir beu ^eutfctieu fa^lic^fte Sijeife entirevfcu. 23ir glau= ben, heforc he meets with them in the reading lessons. Also, the diffi- cult words of each reading lesson, in ail the Readei's, are previously formed into spelling lessons. 3d. In the 3d and 4th Readers, the difficult words are defined in a general and literal sense. 4$h. The Primarj' books contain more lessons of easy reading than other works — there being about msety pages made up of monosyllablics. 5th. The progression from one book to another, is more regular, gradual, and philoso]jliical than usually found. 6th. The lessons are adapted to interest as well as instruct. 7th, The practical and judicious use of pictures is calculated to assist, and not to retard, the efforts of the teacher. 8th. The practical instructions in the Rhetorical principles of reading and speaking, contained in the 4t]i Reader, constitute a distinguishing characteristic of the work. 9lh. At the end of each lesson for reading, questions are asked, with reference to the proper inflections, emphasis, &:c., which should be adopted in reading the lesson with propriety. lOih. In connection with the questions, are references to the instructions in other parts of the work. 11th. Tue PRINT is large and distinct, gi-adually diminishing from the large prinl of the Primer to that of the ordinary size, contained in the 4th Reader. 12th. A greater variety, both in style and subject, is fotmd in this series than is usual in books of the kind. 13th. The Spelling and Pronunciation throughout the series are rmiformly in accordance with ihose of Br, Webster. 14th. The instructions in the sounds and power of letters, as well as the "Gen- eral Rules for Spelling," are more clearly presented in "Sanders' Spelling Book," than in any other work of the kind. It is, comparatively, an easy work to compile a reading book which shall contain many good selections -But to "produce a series fitted for the school-room, adapted to the growing capacities of the learner, and for all classes of scholars, is no idle task. The preparation of this series has required years of labor. Mr. Sanders brought to the task talents of the right kind ; but. relying not on himself alone, he collected sug- gestions from eminent instructors in aU sections. These suggestions were the results of their experience as teachers. These Mr. Sanders compared, and availing himself of aU the advantages of the present day, he has produced a series which may truly be said to be the result of more thought, experience, investigation, and practical obser- vation, than any other befure the American Public. No other series of Readers has ever received so extensive a circulation and world- wide popularity. They are extensively used, not only in every state in the union, but in every part of the globe, where'the English langiiage is spoken. Teachers everywhere have paid a willing tribute to their merit. We have space only for the following : State of Illinois. " We hereby certify that we have compared Sanders' Series of Reading Books with the Eclectic Series of Prof. Mc GuflFey. and we have very decided preference for tliose of Mr. Sanders, and recommend that they be adopted uniformly by the schools OF the state of Illinois. — City of Springfield. January 16. 1849. Hon. Newton Cloud, ") " Joseph Gillepsie, ' Committee of the " William Ticuenor, [- Senate on the sub " W. B. Plato. I ject of Education. " J. P. H.VRDY, J We cheerfullv and fully concur in the opinion expressed bv the Senate Committee on Education. — Springfield, 111., Jan. 20, 1849. Hon. Thomas M. Killpatrick, President, M. Brayman. of the Illinois Executive V State Educa- A.^c1m;belT^"^°' ( C.m«.,«.e, ^ tional Society. William McMurtry, Lt. Governor and President of the Senate. The above is concurred in by a large number whose names we have no space to give. Silas W. Robbiss, > KEW METHOD OF LEARNING THE GERMAIN LANGUAGE; EMBRAriNO BOTH THE Bnalptic anu ^^nti)etfc l^otjcs of instruction; K r L A I X AND r R A C T 1 C A L W A Y O F A C Q U I E I N G THE A E T RKADI^sG, SPEAKIXG, AND COMPOSING GERSA]^. W. H. VOODBUEY, r, ;thor of „.tlur;3cfiUlte itnb VfoWf^e cngtifi^e ©rammattf ntii ?efeC'U(i itnb iuiHrtanbtg^tt Slttmerfungen, Jc." SECOND EDITION. NEW-YORK: PUBLISHED BY MARK H. NEWMAN & CO. 199 BROADWAY CINCINNATI :— W. H. MOORE & Co. xiUBURN :— J. C. IVISON &: Co. CHICAGO:— S. C. GRIGGS b. Co. 1 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by W. H. WOODBURY, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southorn District of New York. li. LUnWIG .t CO., PRL\T£RS, 70 VESEY-ST., N. Y. TO JA3IES X. McELLIGOTT A. M^ ll^ VTHOra ARE FO^^-D HISH MORAL \rORTH, RARE PHILOLOGICAL ATTAIN-:\IE>'TSi EXTEAORDIXAEY SUCCESS AS A PRACTICAL EDUCATOR, AND AN ABLE AN'D ELOQUENT ADVOCATE OF THE CAUSE OF C-EXEEAL EDUCATION. THISVOLlUS IS MOST CORDIALLY DEDICATED BY HIS FEIEXD, THE AUTHOR. P K E F A C E. The German Language is now deservedly ranked among the leadini' studies in manv of our H'vrh Schools and Academies. Its treasures in every department of knowledge, in every variety of composition, are certainly among the wonders of literary achievement. Among European tongues it holds a decided superiority of rank ; surpassing them all in the abundance of its words, in the richness of its mternal resources, and in its wonderful flexibility. Hence the propriety of its place among hberal studies. But the motives to the study of this language reach far be- yond the circles of literary hfe. Celerity and cheapness of travel, growmg out of recent improvements in navigation, have imited in producing an easy intercourse between Germany and America. Besides, we have already in our midst an immense and daily augmenting German population. The language of this people is spoken extensively among us, and has hence come to have a high practical value. It is often set down as an indispensable ^qualification even for a common clerkship. Such being the character and importance of the German lan- guage, various attempts have been made, as was natural, to give greater facility in learning it. Some of these are un- questionably excellent works ; executed, according to the plan which they have adopted, in a manner skilful and judicious. But just here, in ^jZa?i, as it seems to the present writer, all of them are more or less lacking ; and out of this conviction has arisen the present volume. The grounds of this conviction may be briefly stated. Years ago, when the author, ^Wth something of enthusiasm, resolved, if possible, to master the language, and for that, among other purposes, resided for some time in Germany, he found his ar- dor not a little abated by the circumstance, that, in no one of the numerous grammars which he had collected about him, was he able to pursue his studies on what he deemed philoso- phical principles. The methods o£ the books were in one sense 1* ' 10 various ; but all were plainly divisible into two extremely op' posite classes. In one class theory held the sway ; in the other 'practice was supreme. The one seemed bent upon grounding the pupil in set rules and forms, and anxious chiefly to present and impress the language, as a thing of science, a systematic whole. The other appeared to deal almost exclu- sively in separate and independent facts ; intent only on exhi- biting and teaching the German tongue, as a thing of art, a medium of common communication. That such a knowledge of the language as he had proposed to himself to acquire, could never be obtained by either of these methods exclusively, was perfectly evident. That not only the surest, but even the shortest route to his object, might be found in the due com- bination of the two, seemed no less obvious. For art has her only just basis in the science that lies underneath; without which she is liable to frequent failure and perpetual uncertainty. The attempt, then, in this book is to unite and harmonize more fully two things, which, in teaching a language, ought never to be separated : the theoretical and the practical. This leading feature being announced, we now proceed to specify some details of the plan. It assumes in the outset, as ever afterwards, the position of the careful and considerate living teacher ; that is, introduces one by one the easier forms and usages of the language, and directs attention to the more obvious differences between the German and the English. It here seeks to avoid the error of frightening the beginner with a formidable array of rules, de- clensions and conjugations, which he is, as yet, in no wise pre- pared to entertain. After a certain amount of progress in these preliminary stepSy the pupil is put upon the exercise of composing in German. By this, however, is not meant, that he is forced thus early into the difficult and delicate business of translating certain specified English sentences into German. On the contrary, instead of requiring him to translate just such a thought, in just such a way, he is taught to regard every German sentence, given him for translation into English, as a model on which he is to build one of his own. He is in no wise trammeled as to 11 the thought : he is under no necessity of diverting it of some particular English dress, given it by the hand of another ; but is encouraged to take any thought which may suggest itself, iuidj under the guidance of his model sentence and vrhat other light he has received, to put it into a German garb. In this way, he comes gradually to feel the differences between the English and the Gei-man modes of expression, and thence de- rives accuracy and readiness in makmrj them. In this way alone comes facility in speaking a language. Yet it must not hence be inferred that the author would utterly discard the practice of assigning English sentences to be rendered into Gennan. That is often a useful exercise, and may be easily combined with the other, to any extent desirable. ■It supplies the learner throughotit all these various exercises •with the materials necessary to their due performance. Eveiy Lesson is headed with the statement and ilhistration of all new principles involved, an explanation of difficult words and phra- ses, and a vocabulaiy alphabetically arranged. Nothing, in- deed, is left imsupplied, which the student cannot readily ob- tain for himself. It does not, however, in regta*d to grammatical instiiiction, leave the learner here. For. although it embraces somewhere or other in the previous course, all the leading facts and fea- tures of the language, it piu'posely deals with them rather as indivkhj.o.U than as components of a grammatical system. It takes them analytically, not synthetically But now, having accomphshed its pm*pose in this respect, it invites the attention of the student to a nevv and more scientific aspect of them. They come before him now, not as netc things, but in new re- lations. He has all the advantage of an impressive review, and at the same time gives disciplme to his mmd, by giving order to its acquisitions. It furthermore, as is plain, adapts itself to all classes of teachers and learners. Those who insist upon the more pm'ely practical method, who regard everytliing beyond as super- fluous, if not pernicious, v^ill find the course contained in the first pai-t, all-sufficient, it is beheved, to answer their demands. To those, on the other hand, who can tolerate nothincr short of 12 a strictly systematic course, first and last, the second part will, it is hoped, be found no unacceptable offering. To those, finally, who sympathize with the author in the view that these two methods can and ought to be united in teaching a lan- guage, the entire work is presented with all the confidence of experienced success. To render it yet more complete in itself, and secure the pupil against the expense of purchasing other books, until he has made some considerable advances in his German studies, a care- fully selected series of Reading Lessons, from the best German writers, has been added, together with a full vocabulary. Throughout the volume, great care has been taken to furnish in every particular, however trivial it might seem, the most re- liable instruction. And in this respect, as in others, it is hoped, the work will be found especially acceptable to that large class of students, who aim at the acquisition of the language mainly without the aid of a teacher. Indeed, for their purposes, many features in the system will prove pecuharly serviceable. In the matter of declension and conjugation, — in the account of derivatives and compounds, — in the tabular views of verbs, regular and irregular, simple and compound, — in the illustra- tions of the powers and uses of the prepositions and other par- ticles, — in short, in all leading points, the author has sought to present those views only which are now recognized as the best and truest by the highest German authorities. To the la- bors of Kkceer and Heyse especially is he indebted ; though numerous are the works on German grammar, which have been consulted in view of this pubHcation. And now, with the sincere desire that this course of study may subserve the purpose of rendering the German language and lit- erature more easy of access, the work is respectfully submitted. Yet it must not be dismissed without a grateful acknowledg- ment of the friendly aid which has been received from several gentlemen of known ability in lingual science, and among these, especially, should be named Mr. James N. McElligott, of this city, to whom, by permission, this volume is dedicated. New-York, August 1st, 1850. W. H. W. GENERAL INDEX. 31, p, u, changed into a, p, ii in deri- vative forms, § 11. 1. Abbreviations, p. 'ifil. Qlbcr, ii 11 till, HMibcni, distinguished, § 15G. ':?. a. p. 24;J. "iihiX, in the sense, yet again, p. '234. ?lbtiet)cu, p. 204. 5lbKi!!3cu. p. 2!)7. Abstract nouns, § 5. 2. Accent, § 2. Id. p. 20. (Note ) Slcbrcii, p. 175. Accusative or dative after certain pre- positions, § 116. Rule for the use of, § lo2. Verbs requiring two, % 132. 2. Used to denote measure, distance or time, § 132. 3. Construed absolutely, ;§ 132. o. Adjectives, formed by suffixes, § 25. % 26. Predicative and attributive, p. 35. {Note). Declension of, jli 27. Old form of, § 28. $j 29. New form of, ^30 ^31.' Mixed fonn of, § 32. Comparison of, § 35. Used as nouns, § 34. 5. p 52, 53. Comparatives and superlatives, § 37. Irregular and defective forms of, § 39. Com- pared by means of adverbs, § 41. iheir agreement with nouns, >!S 135. p. 50. Repetition of, for different genders, § 135. 5. Requiring the gen., p. iil. Requiring the dat., T). 143. Aaverbs, § 100. Formed from nouns, § 101. From adjectives, § 102. From pronouns, § 103. From verbs, § 104. By composition, § 105. Comparison of, § 106. Nouns used as, § I2S. p 111. Syntax of, §151. QlUer, prefixed to superlatives, § 38. 2. Applied to number and quantity, § o.i. 3. p 124. Peculiar use of, § 134. 1. p. 123. 51U, alsbaip. 111,168,169,243. mio, p. 243. 3lm, with the positive of an adjective used for the superlative, § 38. 1. This form of superl. when used, § 42. . \^In, § 116. p. 160. 9inbci-, p. 105. 'iJltibeve, ber, instead of bev sroeitc, § 45. 3. 5lH^cvt()alL^ instead of jwettel)alt», § 49. {Note). 3liit^t^eri, p. 204. ?Itivtd)teii, p. 225. Sluftatt, § 110. 1. Before infinitive, p. 127. Apposition, rule fbr, § 133. § 123. 6. 7. Attributive adjective, p. 35. Articles, declension of, § 4. Contracted with prepositions, § 4. 2. Rule for the use of, § 1 20. Def art. in place of possess, pron., § 134. 7. With fold), § 120. 4. , Before f)alb and bei>?, § 120. 2. h. ^}Iud), answering to ever and even, p. 173. 5l»f, § 116. p. 160., with the force of an adjective, p. 226. 3iuf etiif ^Tierbimitg fe^en, p. 188. 3liifbalteii, p. 117. 5liiftvaaen, p. 224. ^Iiifipartcii, p. 197. 2iu§fpmnicii, p. 236. Auxiliary verbs, divided into two classes, §0. 1 . Those of the first class, babeti, fein and mevbeit, when and how used, § 70. § 71. Those of the second class, when and how used, |!,) 74. Infinitives of the second class in place of the participle, § 74. 3. Bar, suffix, § 25. i^c, prefix, § 97. 1. ^JBebciiteii traaen, p. 213. Q.^efinbi'n,p. 166. ^^iefiuMtd), p. 166. ^-yebalteii, p 137. ©ebiitcn, bcambren, p. 177. S3et, its use, § 112. 3. p. 161. With verbs of rest, p. 76. ^etbe, beibeg, p. 103, 104. iSentiiben, p 238. 13 14 m§, p. ir.i. S3ofe, auf, iibev, p. 20 >. Capitals, rules for, § 5. 2. (Note). Cardinal nimibers, !55 4-i. Gender of, taken merely as figures, § i-i- 7. Cases, § 3. A. 5. Of participles, § 147. ]. (Shell, diminutives in, § 10. p 182 Represented by pronouns masc. or fern., § 131. 2. Collective nouns, form of, § 11. 3. Pronouns, referring to them, § 134. 3. Collocation of words, § 158. Comparison of adjectives, §35. Eu- phonic changes in forming, § 30. Comparatives and superlatives, de- clension of, § 37. Irregular forms of; § 39. Comparison of adverb . ^. iOfi. Composingr German, Exercises in, p. 62. Models for, p. 249 Compounds, formation of, § 2. 6. 7. Accent of, § 2. 10. Compound verbs, § 80. Separable, § 90. Paradigm of a compound separable, § 92. Compounds in- separable, § 95. Conditional mood, obs. on the several uses of, § 144. 1. 2. :', ^c. Conjugation of verbs, § 75. Conjunctions, § 117. Syntax of, § 15fi. Examples, illustrating the use of, p. 243. Consonants, classification and pro- nunciation of, p. 21. 22. Correlatives, § 156. 2. g. 5Da, compounded with other words, § 103. p 90, 93. 5)«niv (iii*t§ bafiiv fonnen), p- 209. S^aniit, p. 200. ^M\n, p. 244. 1)06, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. § 134. 1. 2)a]R, its use, § 156. 2. h Instead of Ktt, p. 220. Dative, after certain prepositions, § 116. Peculiar uses of, s^ 129. 1. 2. 3, &c. § 134. 8. p 217. After verbs compounded with er, ber, &c. § 130 After adjectives, § 131. '3^av'0u(auff!t, p 217. Declension, of the article, § 4 Of nouns, § 12. Old form, § 13. New form, §14. Of adjectives, §27. Of comparatives and superlatives, § 37. Demonstrative pronouns, §61. § 62. 2)cnn, p. 245. Ter, (determinative) when absolute, its form in the gen. plural, § 63. 2. (relative) its use, § 65. 2. Derivation and composition of words, § 2. Derivatives, secondary, § 2. 3. 4. 5. 2:evo and 35vo, p. 312. {Note). Ziii (M]i^n). when used, §.(.2. 4. 5}cf;haib, bcBwegen, p. 133. Icfto, p. 9S. Determinative pronouns, § 63. 'Dtofer and jener distinguished, § 62. 2. 5^teff§, btee, pecuhar use of, § 62. 1 § 134. 1 Dimidiative numerals, how formed, § 49. Diminutives, § 10. Gender of pro- nouns referring to, § 1 34. 2. Distinctive numerals, how formed, §51. 1. 2. Diphthongs, sounds of, p. 20. Distributive numerals, how formed, §46. T^och, § 156. 2. c. p 132, 245. Srei ltl'^ ?iWei, when declined, § 44. 4. 2)uvd)Liebeti, p. 217. S^iirft'ti, conjugation of, § 83. 2. Re- marks on, § 83. 9. (Sben, before a demonstrative, § 62. 6. C^bcnrp. before an adjective, p. 104. C5'i, termination, § 10. (^i.jcii, p. 1S4. 6:in, one, how declined, § 44. 2. 3. (^iitanber, its use, §60. 3. (?tuen ^c^rttt, ettidi Sc^uf t^un, p. 222, 223. C^incii Xao, urn ten anbevn, p. 241. C^iiicr mciiter S-vcuube, p. 224. (vtnfallen, p. 204. (Stitbcleii, p. 232. C?iii!ijc, etltci)c, chvat\ § 53. eiutpreiten, p. 239, 240. (?mp and cut, § 97. 2. (^11, sufnx, forming adjectives, § 25. p, 39. rvutijcaen, § 112. 5. i5:v and »er, § 9/. 3. 4. tvvtmtcni, p. 137. 6-rft, p. 230. (?•?, peculiar use of, § 57. 8. § 134. 1. 5. Cfs falit or cS bait fcfcjver, p. 137. i^-3 ki bcim, p. 211. C^S ttntt itidjfS, &c., p. 177. &t\vaS. p. 124. Etymologv. § 1. Euphonicletters, § 2. 8. § 11. 2, ?Vabven, with Imbcu or fein, p. 95. ^cblnt, p. 199. Feminine nouns, indeclinable in the singular, § 12. 4. Exceptions to this, p. 277. (Note). 15 >\inbcn, p. 184. Foreign nouns, § Ifi. Old declension of, § 1 7. New declension of, § 1 8. Partly of the old and partly of the new, § 19. ?ioir, p. '^ill. ?^ioii, (^raulciii, p. 53, 5-1. Future tenses, obseiT. on the use of, § 141. 1. 2. @ani and ftalb, before names of pla- ces, § 53. 2. p. 123. ®nit5 inib i]ar, p. 45. Q)aui, \vi(, p. 104. ®e, prefix of nouns, § 2. 3. §11.3. Prefixed to the past participle, § 69. 4. Inserted between the prefix and the radical in compound verbs sepa- rable. <^ 9.3. 3. § 99. 3. Excluded from the perfect participle of com- pound verbs inseparable* ; 94. ®cben, p. 115. @cbiirtt>] and ttebcren, p. 187. ®cfviUni, p. 2i'5. ©cfaUigft, p. 200. @ef)en, p. 206. @cIhmi and ^iiijehen, p. 230. Wi'iren, p. 183. Gender, the natural and grammatical, § 6. 1. 2. Rules of, § 7. Gender of compounds and foreim words, ©einetrcn, p. 2'2G. Genitive, limiting a noun, § 123. Li- miting an adjective, § 124. With the verbs acbFCit, &c , § 125. After reflexive verbs, § 126. After the impersonal e^ geliiftet nitc^, &c., § 126. 1. After aufUi 13 eit, bdebreu. &c., § 127. Nouns in, used as ad- verbs, § 128. ®enug, p. 113. @eni, p. 132. @vo$e >Jlugcn madjeit, p. 229. «§at*en, when and how used as an auxiliary, § 70. 3. 4. § 71. 2. Pa- radigm of, § 72. 1. § 73. «$afr, sufl^x, § 25. •Salb, § 53. 2. >§a(beii or ^albev, § 110. 3. 4)^ilbett, iveqeii andi itm — n?tflen with the genitive of personal pronouns, § 57. 2. •^nrteii, p. 184. «5anbeln, p. 120. §ci§en, p. 107. feit, suffix, § 10. er and \)in, § 103. 3. 4. p. 90, 93. .f3evr, p. 53, 54. .<;)n-oor, p. 188. ^eiitc, bciit jii S^age, &c., p. 232. .f)tn, p. 222. .P)ttuetrfien, p. 225. Sod), form of, in the compa'-ative, §40. 1. i^olcn laffeit, p. 121. .§i.nen, p. 233. .Sunbcvt and laufenb as collectives, § 44. 6. p. 172. SbvD and ^cvp, p. 312 {Xote). Imperative mood, observations on the several uses of, § 145. 1. 2. Past participle, in place of, § 145. 3. Imperfect, observations on the use of, § 138. 1. 2. 3. Impersonal verbs, § 88. 3m Stttitbe feiit, p. 132. 3n or tini, feminine terminations, § 10. Indefinite numerals, how formed, § 53, Indefinite pronouns, § 59. 3n bei- Xhat, p. 226. Indicative mood, for the imperative, § 142. 2. rstt bie >6oi)e, p. 183. Infinitive mood, use of, in place of a past participle, § 74. 3. Without in, % 146. 1. With 511, § 146. 2. As a verbal substantive, § 146. 3. p. 127. Active form used passively, § 146. 4. Position of, § 158. 5. Answering after bleibcn, get)eii, &c., to our present participle, p. 127. Sit fo ftfvn, p. 204. Interjections, § 11^. § 157. Interrogative pronouns, § 66, 67. Irregular verbs, commonly so called, list of, § 78. 1. Those properly so called, §81, 82, 83, Sfrf), suffix, § 25. Iterative numerals, how formed, § 50. Scj, bo:b &c., p. 132. 3c. used in forming distributives, § 46. Before comparatives, § 156. 2. d. p. 98. 3e nadjbem, p. 204. p. 247. 3eber, § 53. p. 123. 5cbweber, § 53. ru'glirf)ev, § 53. 3emanbem (dative), remark on the use of, § 59. 3. fetter and biefer, distinguished, § 62. 2. 3ene§, pecuhar use of, § 62. 1. ^eiit, § 53. 3. JteineS won bctben, p. 104. 16 Mdt, suffix, ^ 10. ,R>uiien, p. 85. J?cnncii leincit, p. 202. Jlyiiiicti/ conjugation of, '^ 83. 3. Re- marks on, "^ 83. 10. p. 85. Sio\Un, p. 219. ^a!h]Citictle, fid) lantpveiltn, p. 227. !;?affcii, remarks upon, p 337 (Note). p. 121. ?i't, as in cincvici, p. 206. ^iit tbini, p. 19'J. ^etll, diminutives in, "Js 10 p. 182. Re- presented by a pronoun masculine or feminine, <5i 134. 2. Letters of union, % 2 7. 8. 0. Of eu- phony between suffix and radical, ^ Si M. -i- X!eure, p. o2. ^icb, § 25. \Jtcb fciii. p. 202. \;iu£, w-ith JUI-, p. 2J5. List, of (so called) irregular verbs, § 78. 1. ?o§ (in compounds), p. 179. 2)?an, its use, § 59. 2. p. 85. ?n^iiicber, § 53. p. 123. iD^•^l■, its two forms in plural, § 40. 2. 2)(e()r, iiict)rcve, § 53., p 104. mit, p. 76. Mixed conjugation, how produced, §81. Mixed declension of adjectives, § 32. Rule for the use of, ilj 3:5. SJtin^ci!, conjugation of, § 83. 4. Re- marks on, li^ 83. 1 1 . Moods, § b8. 5. Indicative, § 142. Subjunctive, § 143. Conditional, <5, 144. Imperative, § 145. Infinitive, § 146. Multiplicative numerals, how formed, § 47. Sjiiifff"/ conjugation of, § 83. 5. Re- marks on, § 83. 12. mad), § 112. 8. p. 162. 9Jact)ft, fiinfttfl, p. 230. 5^ab, form of in superl., § 40. 1. yhitiivlirb, p 211. yttrtjrs ^rtfiu■ fiunien, p 209. 9Jid)tu^cil)v? p. 196. ?i?ift)t ^nm ■il'orte fcmmcn, p. 197. mod), p. 104 ^hcmaiibcni, dative, remark on the use of, $ 59. 3. Nominative, the case of the subject, % 121. Seldom omitted, § 121. 1. moi\)ic\ i)ahin, p. 132. Nouns, common and proper, § 5. 1. Collective and abetract, §5. 2. Gen- der of, § 6. Derivation of, § 9. Declension of, § 12. Old foim of, § 13. New form of, § 14. Obs. on irregular, vS 15. Foreign, § 16. Proper, declension of, ^21), 21,22. Of measure, number 6. c , § 123. Numbers, <§, 3. 3. Numerals, ^ 43. Cardinals, § 44. Or- dinals, § 45. Distributives, *Ji 46. Multiplica lives, <^ 47. Variatives, vS 48. Dimidiatives, ^ 49. Iteratives, i 50. Distinctives, *^ 51. 1. 2. Parti- tives, »S 52. Indefinites, § 53. Obgdicf), obfitoii, obtDO^I. § 156. 2. c. Of)iic, followed by the infinitive, p. 127. Ordinal numbers, § 45. Rules for forming, § 45. 2. 4. Interrogative form, § 45. 5. Paradigms of babcn and fein, ^ 72. 1. 2. Of tveibctt, §72. 3. Of a verb of the Old form, (ji 78. Of irregular verbs, sS 83 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.8. Of a passive verb, § 85. Of a reflexive verb, ^S 87. Of a compound verb, (,92. Participles, their form and meaning, (J, 69. Dechned like adjectives, § 34. 4. Past participle for the im- perative, '^ 145. 3. Place of the past part, of the mood auxiliaries, supplied by the infinitive, § 74. 3. Cases of, t^N 147. 1. Uses of part, in German restricted, § 147. 2, 3. Pre- sent part, its agreement with its noun, *j\ 148. Usually attributive, V> 148. 1. With the article often used substantively, i^ 148. 2. Not, as in English, an abstract verbal noun, § 148. 3. Its position, § 148. 4. Adverbial power of, $ l48. 5. Pre- terite part., pecuhar uses of, § 149. 2. Used absolutely, § 149, 3. 'Future part , »S 150. Particles, p. 383 {Note) p. 87. 100. Partitive numerals, how formed, § 52. -Xuiffi'it, p. 164. Passive verb, mode of forming, § 84 1. Paradigm of, «^ 85. Advantage over the English, 122. List of ad- jectives, always used as, ^ 27. 2. Prefixes of verbs, simple separable, ^. iJO. Compound separable, C^ 31. When separated from the radical, ^ 93. Inseparable, § 9-1, 95. Com- poimd prehxes inseparable, *i 96. Separable and inseparable, «i S§. *J3i-ei!3 gcbeit p. 188 Prepositions, table of, ^ 108. Those construed with geniiive, (S 109, 110. p. 154. With dative, § I'M, 112. p. 156. With accusative, §113, 114. p. 1157. With the dat., or ace, >^ 115, J If), p. 158. Examples of the use of, p. 169. Syntax of, *i 452, 153, 154,155. Primitives, § 2. 2. I'ronouns, table of, § 55. Personal, v5H,57. Possessive, § 58. Indefinite, <: 59 Reflexive and reciprocal, § 69. Demonstrative, § 61, 62. Deter- minative, § 63. Relative, § 64, 65. Interrogative, § 66, 67. Syntax of, C 134. Proper names, declension of, § 20. In the plural, §21. Of countries &c., V 22, 23. Quantity, weight &c. , words of, when qualified by numerals, rarely in the plural, p. 279 {Nole) p. 171. .^ed)miui^, auf eiiic— fe^en, p. 188. lavd!t, with m; p. 215. V/ith (uibeit, p. 104. Reciprocal pronouns, § 69. Reflexive pronouns, § 60. Special form for, in the dat and ace , § 60. 4. Reflexive verbs, how produced, § 86. 1. Some with the dat. and some with the ace. of the recip pron. § 86. 2. Often equivalent to pas- sives, § 86. 4. Paradigm of a re- flexive, § 87. 3fietc& fcin, p. 236. ?licrfud;en, p. 219, S5ief, when declined, § 53- 3. QStelletdjt, p. 132. moit, p. 52. iBcn, § 112. 12. Before names, § 23. 3. With the dative instead of the genitive, § 123. 7. 93or, p. 163. Precedes words of time, p. 101. Often answers to "on," p. 213. Vowels, classification and pronuncia- tion of, p. 20. 3Sa5, § 67. 3. § 134. 1. ^a§. for marum, § 67. 3. 2Ba§ fill- ein. § 66. 4. 5. § 67. I. 2. 9[iiegen, p. 194. SBeb t^un, p. 198. SBctfc, in compounds, p. 180. SBelctcr (relative), genitive of, when used, § 65. 1. SSentg, when decUned, § 53. 3. iljev and rvaS (relatives), their use and position, % 65. 3. 4. 5. (As in- terrogatives), § 66. 3. Qi^erbeu, auxiliary of the first class, § 70. 2. Paradigm of, § 72. 3. § 73. SBevtl) felt!, p. 236. 3Bte bffinbeu (Sie ftc^, p. 166. ^lisie viel, § 45. rt, SBtffe It, conjugation of, §83. 7. Placed before an infinitive, p. 85. 3Bl\ compounded with other words, v; 103. p. 90. 93. 2:^3ohl bPd), &c , p. 132. ©ollett, conjugation of, § 83. 8. Re- marks on, §^83. 14. 23pibeu, for geraorben, § 84. 2. 3u, § 112. 9. 13. When between the parts of a compound verb, § 93. Bufotge, §110.8 Bu ©luube gebtn, vtc^teti, p. 234. 3u L^aitfe, p. 76. 3 It ^cnianb gepen, p. 76. 3» ©tanbe tn-ingen, p. 227. Bwar )>o(i), &.C , p. 132. Bwet and bvei, when declined, § 44. 4. WOODBURY^S NEW METHOD. LESSON 1. lection I. German Alphabet. ^eiitfcfjC a ^n^^a^et German. EiigUsh Pronunciation, Examples. % a a ah mt ^:b h b bay SSetcn. (5 c c tsay (Seber. 5) b d day 3)e^nen. ^ e* e e (as in prey) mm. ^- f f eff ^ttt. ® 9 g gay ©e^en. ^^ ^ h hah ^a^tt. 3 it i i (as in pique) S^nen. 3 it J yote 3ota. ^ t k kah ^af)l 1* I 1 ell am. 9}J m m emm ©m^or. 9? n n enn (Snbe. O oh O^x. ■$ i) P pay qjeter. C a q koo dual. -3^ r r err (as in error) (grretten. (S [ g (21. @.) s ess (Sffeiu ^ t t tay ^^ee. (See 18.^.) U u 11 (as in do) Ufer. Q} i? V fow (ov/ as in now] SSoIf. SS tu w vay 3Sefcn. X :c X ix ^tv 2) i) J ipsilon @59j!em. 3 s z tset Bettel * In German, eveiy letter, with the exception sometimes of e and 6, is pronounced. (See 3. t'., 9. tc and 18. i).) t The printed capitals of i and j, in German, are in form aUke. 20 DIPHTHONGS. UMLAUTS (12. %t, &C.) ai, aUf d, eu, an, a, 6, ii. COMPOUND CONSONANTS, ^, f4 ff, ft % |. LESSON II. fectton II. SOUNDS OF THE GERMAN LETTERS. Sounds of the Vowels. 1. 5(, a = a, as in far, father. Ex. 9}Zarft, market ; %0i\* eel ; S3a()n, road ; 33latt, leaf; QlBenb, evening. 2. (S, e = e, as in tete, ferry. Ex. leben, f to live ; 9J2eer, sea; (S^re, honor ; ^cffer, better ; 5)?effcr, knife. 3. 5, i = i, as in pique, pin. Ex. mir, to me ; mit, with ; i^n, him ; iriber, against ; Bitter, bitter. 4. O, = o, as in no, door. Ex. C)fert, stove; S[)?oog, moss; .Ec^le, coal ; ^crt, port ; ^oft post-office. 5. U, u ■= 00 or o, as in poor, do. Ex. 33Iut, blood ; ^Du, thou ; U^r, watch ; ^lut, hat ; gut, good. 6. §), I) = y, (mostly in words from the Greek). Ex. S)fo!p, hyssop ; 'Bi^X, Styx ; ^)?^xn, Ypres. Sounds of the Diijhthongs. 7. 5Ii, ai (sometimes , house ; ^(X\x^, mouse; laut, loud ; %a\\\i, fist ; ^raut, bride. 9. (Si, ei = i or ei, as in fine, eider. Ex. Stein, stone ; beln, thy; (ie ■=. ie, as in pier; never as in pie. Ex. i^iel, &c.) * The sound of a vowel when doubled, is thereby lengthened ; as, 5lal, ?Di?cr, iT^DOiS ; followed by a double consonant, the vowels are usually shor- tened'; as, ^.(att, ^vttt, ^tiut, ®ott, &c See, however, 18. .§. t Dissyllables, (See Vocabulary.) unless otherwise noted, are accented on the first; as, leten, (S'bre, &c. 21 10. du, eu = nearly oi or oy, as in boil, boy. Ex. 53cute, booty ; l^cute, people ; T)ciien, to hew. 11. Qtcu, ail = nearly cii. Ex. Qdnijjcrft, extreme; I;aufen, to hoard ; ^^ciufer, buyer ; ^aitoler, cottager. Sounds of the Umlauts (Umlaiite *). 12. Q(e, a = someAvhat (though shorter) like e, Ex. 5(erger, vexation ; Bat;vc, ferry. 13. Oe, 6, as in Del, f oil ; ^o6eI, populace ; tobten, to kill ; Oio^rc, pipe ; Jlo(;Ier, collier. 14. lie, ii, as in lletung, f practice ; niiibe, weary ; fii^ren, to guide ; ^KiUei*; miller. Sounds of the Consonants. 15. «, B; $D, b; ^, f; ^, !; ^, I; W, ni; m, tt; q}, ^ ; €l, (| ; $, X ] -g), i) = b, d, f, k, 1, m, n, p, q, x, y. 16. % c, before a consonant, at the end of a syllable, or before a, 0, u in the same syllable, sounds like our correspond- ing letter in like position. Otherwise it sounds like ts. Ex. (Seber, cedar ; Sigarre, cigar ; St)m6al, cymbal ; fpccial, special. 17. ®, g, sounds like our g in gild, foggy, &;c., but never as in gem, ginger, &c. When preceded by n in the same syllable, it sounds like our g hard in like position ; as in Qlngft, anxiety , fingen, to sing ; Brlngcn, to bring ; Otingel, ringlet, &c. When g, in the midst or at the end of a syllable, is preceded by any letter except n, its sound approaches that of the Greek }/, or the still more guttural d). (See 26. d^.) Ey. ^ag, rcgnen, 2}?agb; 3agb, moglid), &c. The learner should avoid confound- ing the pronunciation of 5}?agb, 3agb, &c., with that of m.a6)i, '^a^)t, &c. * Uinlnnt signifies changed or modified sound. The Umlauts are pro- duced by a union of c with a, o, ii (also nil) respectively. Except when they are capitals, the c is expressed by two dots ; thus, a o, u (and iiti). t Oi and lie have no corresponding sound in En^iiyh Dii and miibe, for example, might, perhaps, be generally understood, if pronovmced, ale meede, but this is by no means the correct pronunciation. Oe is pretty ac- curately given by the French eu in pcur, and it, by the French u in vu. 22 18. «^, f), in the midst and at the end of a syllable is silent, but serves to lengthen the preceding vowel. Ex. le^« reit, to teach ; o^ne, without ; %f)ti, tea. 19. 5, h sounds like y consonant. Ex. 3at;r, year ; Sanuar, January; jung, young. 20. Ot, X, is uttered with a trill or vibration of the tongue, and ^vith greater stress than our r. Ex. Otcf)r, reed : diaii), council ; i*eif ripe. 21. (Bf f, at the beginning of a syllable followed by a vowel, has a sound between that of z, and s soft. Ex. ^ofin, son ; fteBen, seven : otherwise it sounds like s soft ; as, in @a§, gas ; ©tront, stream. Note, that at the end of a syllable 6 is substituted for f : as above, ©aS, &c. 22. ^, t, sounds like t in tent. Ex. '^txt, text. In the posi- tion, Avhere in English, t sounds like sh, t has the sound of tS. Ex. (Station, station ; Olation, nation, &c. 23. 3}, ij, sounds like f, as in fife. Ex. 35ater, father ; ijer* get en, to forgive. It is only in words from the Latin and French that ij sounds like \v : as, in QSenu^, Ve- nus ; 3Serfaine0, Versailles, &c. 24. -2B, It, has a sound between that of our w and v. Ex. 5Be(t, world ; SBaffer, water, &c. 25. 3/ h sounds like ts. Ex. (5a(j, salt; Saf)n, tooth; 3wnge, tongue ; itijn, ten. Sounds of the Compound Consonants. 26. ©1&, 6), in primitive words when followed by f, §, has the sound of k. Ex. 5)acf)§, badger ; £)cf)0 or £)d)fe, ox. But if f, 6, be added by derivation, combination or in- flection, (f) has its guttural * sound ; as, in !^crf), no.6:i, * To aid in producing this sound, take for experiment the above word ^od) : pronounce I) o precisely like our word ho ; observing to give as full and distinct a breathing of the h at the close, as at the beginning ; thus, h-o-h = Boc^. Except when preceded by a, o or it, as will be perceived by experiment, a shght hissing sound of ?, or fcb naturally attaches to the <^ ; as, in red^t, tctd?, tc^, ©rtec^e, &c. 23 ma^t, md), &c. Ex. 0lad)frf)rift (from na^, after, and (Sd)rift, writing) ; nad)[inncn (from nacf) and finncn, to think), &c. In words from the Greek and French, dj retains its original sound'; as, in (Ei)axaiUx, character; 6I;arlatan, charlatan. 27. §unger, hunger; «§crijcTit, horizon; S^e()l, flour ; m^i)x, more. J. Simgting, youth ; ^nht, Jew ; ja, yes ; Scfe^f), Joseph ; 3uli, July ; Suvift, jurist. dt, Sieif, ripe; reidi, rich; Dtefl, rest; rar, rare; Sti'tcffidit, regard; Scrm, form; diati)\el, enigma. (B. ^attd, saddle ; @eget, sail ; (g^eer, spear ; (Sprop, sprout ; ftcirf, strong ; Strum^f, stocking ; (Sixb, south ; dldi, rice ; (gtrafe, street ; triffeit, to know. X, 3:;ifi.t, table ; 3: ar if, tariff; S^empet, temple ; Xxuli^'pi, ivooTp; Xitd, title ; 2)e»vaftaticii, devastation. 33. ffiam^^r)r, vampire ; ®vife, vase ; S3er0, verse ; iCicIinc, violin ; 33iltte, visit; ^abaticn, valuation. S3. ®crt, word; ®unn, worm ; SBunber, wonder; 2Bi((e, will ; 2Ba- gen, wagon ; CBaiiberer, wanderer. 3. 3int zink ; 3cit;(, number; ^ai)m, tame; 3eit, time; 3entner, hundred-weight ; -^clj, wood. (5f). gtacb^, flax; fpredieii, to speak ; trad) [am, watchful; Sfjcr, choir: (5{;au{fee, turn-pike. ed\ ©*aft, shaft; @d\itten, shadow; Sdinee, snow; frif6, fresh; (2dnlb, shield, sign. ^, if. ^'(ei^, diligence ; ^'licp. fleece ; Iviffen, to let ; Baffen, to hate ; -§a^, hatred; ()d^(idv ugly. |(j).c§i|e, heat; Mc^, log; fi^cln, to tickle; fdiwa^en, to prattle; fdraMl^eit, to perspire; furj," short ; fdwar^, black. SSier Sa^re 6Iei6t er aibS, (irft ivei^ toie (2*nee, !l)anu fcmmt er nadi ^au^, 2)ann griin trie ^(ee, Unb ^cigt ft* irieber 2)ann rct(; ivie Slut, 3nt u%ei^ feiner ^Briiber. 2)ami f*mecft e^ gut. // /y yA7^ /7 ,/ y/ >■ ^. A^./.^, M. M; c 25 LESSON IV. pctton IV. In German the definite Article has, in the Nominative sm- gular, a distinct form for each gender. Ex. : 3)er ^am, the man; ber 33rubcr, the brother; ^ic Srrau, the^roman; bie (Sc^trcj^cr, the sister; 5)ag ^au?, the house; bag ©lag, the glass. I. Some noims, denoting inanimate objects, are in German, as in most languages, called masculine ov feminine ; and some, denoting animate objects, are called neuter. Ex.: Masculine: iDer *il)3fe£, * the apple; ber 35aum, the tree ; Feminine: 3)ie 3:rau6e, the grape ; bie 9kbet, the needle; Neuter: 2)ag «^inb, the child ; bag ^ferb, the horse. CONJUGATION OF THE PRESENT TENSE SINGULAR OF !^aBett. Assertively. Interrogatively. ^d) ^aU, I have. ^aBc Id^ ? have I? (Sie i^abm, you have, i)dbtn 8ie ? have you ? dx ^atf he has. i^at er ? has he ? Observation, The pupil should invariably make himself so familiar with the definition of the words of the several Exercises, as to avoid the necessity of referi'ing to them while translating. Nothing is better adapted to fix a word m the memory than the process of transcribing it ; and, by doing this m the German character, the requisite familiarity with the word and the pecuhar chirography of the language, are both secured at the same time. Exercise 4. ^ufga^e 4. au*, also; ©er, ba«, the; 3*, I; Sdcfer, m. baker; (Sr, e6, he, ii ; 3a, yes; 93ter, n. beej; Sleifd^, n. meat; .taffee, m. coffee j 23raucr, m. brewer; i^teifd^er, 7n. butcher; ^inb, n. child; 99rcfc, n. bread ; >§aben, to have ; Rcxn, n. grain ; * Many words that are treated as masculine or feminine in one lan^age, are regarded as being of the opposite gender in another : thus, in French, apple, (la pomme is Jeminine, wmle grape le raisin is masculine. In Ger- man the word head (^er Jlopf) is masculine; in French (la tete) itis femi- nine ; and in Litin, caput) it is neuter. The word hand (bie «§a«b, la main, mflaus) is feminine in the three languages 2 26 2Jldbd)en, n. girl; fJlur, only; SBas? what? Sl'le^I, n. flour; Sie, you; SBaffer, 7i. water; !DZul(er, m. miller; %i)Zi, m. tea; aBeiii, m. wine; Sfiein, no; Unb, and; SBer? who? 5)er ^rauer l^at 25ein, cn unb nix^licb. The horseis beautiful and useful. Nominative and genitive. ^as SBaiTer beg Tlem$ i|i fat^ioj. The water of the sea is salt. S)er 33aum beg SBalbeg ift gro^. The tree of the forest is large. 3^ii j^iubeg * 53va([ ift ireicb. The child's ball is soft. * Whether in cases of this kind, where the genitive is used to denote pos- session we should say : btr --Ball ^e5 ,^tnbe§ (the ball of the child), or beg J?tnbe8 ^all I the child's ball), is a point regulated by no certain rule. The former mode is the more common in German. 30 Nominative and dative. 2)er S3vief ijl i?on bem 3Sater. The letter is from the father. JDer ^auer ift in bem §elbe. The peasant is in the field. (§x fcl}icft eg bem greunbe. He sends it to the friend. Nominative and accusative. 5Der «§unb beif t ben 2)ieB. The dog bites the thief 5)er ©dimieb t)dmmert bag (Stfen. The smith hammers the iron. 2)ag ^iiib lieBt «nb lobt ben S3ater. The child loves and praises the father. Nominative, genitive, dative and accusative. 3)et: 33ater beg ^inbeg gieBt bem The father of the child gives (to) ^ruber ben SSoget. the brother the bird. 2)er «^errfcber hc§ (Staateg fd^irf t The ruler of the state sends (to) bem ^rieger bag @cl)n)ert. the warrior the sword. Exercise 6. ^iifga^e 6. S(n, at; 3n, in; ©of)n, w. son; 5luf, on; ^orb, w. basket; n beg ©belmanng ? 8. 3a, unb er Icbt audi ben 93ater. 9. Stebt ber (Ebelmann "am (5a))itain ? 10. 3a, er tiebt unb ic^t i§n fefir. 11. 3ft biefer SWann ber 6ammer ift ein SSerfjeug. 5r)ag ©in'betrcrt 'ij^ ein 9ftebet6eil, JDet SZame etne^ Singed ill ein 5)ing)t>crt. 2)aa >Kinb lieBt ben ©rcp'oater. ^anfmann, t??. merchant : Safttf)ier, n. beast of burden ; Cbet^cf ricbter, m. judge of the su- perior court ; ^avier'Bdnbler, m. paper-dealer , ^fiug, 7n. plow; 51 u f g a B c 9. ©dnnteb, m. black- smith ; (gdm^'ert, n. sword; (Stocf, 772. stick, cane ; 3:ud3, n. cloth ; 2;u6'6anbler,7n.draper; SSagner, m. carriage- maker ; Sngtfiier, n. di^aught- animal. The wolf is a beast of prey. The carpenter is a mechanic. The hammer is a tool (an instru- ment). The conjunction is a part of speech. The name of a thing (substance) is a substantive. The cluld loves the grand-father. 1. ^at ein 2)Zann, cber ein .^inb ben 8tccf biefeg ^reunbeg ? 2. 2)iefer Spfiann hat ein Sdm^ert eine6 ^einbeg, unb biefeg ^inb 6at ben (Stccf eine3 ^reunbe^. 3. Sag l^at bet 3dger ? 4. @r bat etnen ^unb unb ein ©e* 36 XOiifX, 5. SBer ^at Itn ?P|Iug beg Sauer^ ? 6. 35cr S3ater biefeg Jlmbe« f)at ben ^fiug. 7. «§at bicfcr (Scbmicb ba«? ®elb be^ ^aufmann^ ? 8. Dtein, er Ijat nut (Sift-u vtcn eiiicm jilaiifmanne. 9. ^aBen @ie ben SOBagcn beg -iBvicfcrg ? 10. 9'tein, id) Ijahe biefcn SBvigen yon einem QBagner. 11. «&cibcn "Sic bag 53cinb bicfeg 2)ldbdicng? 12. S^kin, id) f;abe Xud) »on ciuent iXiutlidnbler. 13. ^akni @ic ben died bicfeg ^^reunbeg ? 14. S'lein, id) babe biefni Oicrf itcn einem ©dnieiber. 15. <^aben @ie bag ^a^ier beg Scl^rerg ? 16. Diein, idi ftabe bicfcg ^a^ter ten einem ^a^nev^ dnbler unb cinen (l'mvfcf)lnnggbricf iumi bem Scf)rer. 17. 3ft bag 5|]ferb ein 3ugt^ier? 18. 3a, unb eg ift ami) ein £afttl}ier. 19. 3ft bag ^ameel and) ein 3ug; tf)icv? 20. Diein, eg ift nnr ein Sa^t(;iev. 21. SBeffen ©efe^bud) ^at ber €ci)n beS (5-betmanng ? 22. (Sr ^at bag ©efc^bud) beg iDber^ofrid)terg. Questions. 1. What is said of the indefinite article compared ^vith the definite ? 2. Can you give any examples 1 3. Are nouns more frequently compounded in German than in English ? 4. And how is it often necessary to translate them ? 5. What are some examples ? LESSON X. ^t til an X. The adjective has thus far been employed only predica- tively *, in which use it is unvaried in form. Ex. : ©ta^I ift ^art, steel is hard ; 33Iei ift mi^, lead is soft. When used attributively/, the adjective is varied by the addition of suffixes. 1. When not affected by a preceding word, the adjective is inflected according to The old declension. Masculine. Neuter. ?fl. ®ut-er ©ta^I, good steel ; gut-eg ^ifen, good iron ; <5). @ut-e^ erg bag fdione ^ferb beg alten ^nediteg ? 12. ^f^etn, er bat bag $fevb beg retd^en (Jngldnberg. 13. -iQahm aben @ie bag Jiudi biefeg armenSOBeberg ? 16. D^ein, idi babe :Iud) i? o n bem ©eber. 17. ^]t alter altc ffiein ftarf ? 18. Sfiein, unb nidit aller neue SSein ijt f6»ad). 19. 2)er neue §racf ift sen f*a»arjem Xud^e. Questions. What is said of the adjective as a predicative ? 2. As an attributive? 3. What is the ending of the masculine nominative of the old declension] 4. What of the new? 5. What is the neuter nom. and ace. of the old declension] 6. W^hat of the new"? 7. Is the old fonn generally used in the genitive ? 8. What is used instead of it ] LESSON XI. §ttiiiin XL ■WHEN PRECEDED BY ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING WORDS , Masculir. le. Neuter. Masculine. Neuter. Sin, ein (a or an) ; trnfer, uttfer (our) ; 3??ein, tnein (my) ; 3^r, 3^r (your); ^dn, bcin (thy) ; euer, euer (your) ; etn, ?i. swine ; Sufrie' ben, contented, 3§r, your ; @ein, his ; satisfied, teller, m. cellar ; ©cpf)a, n. sofa ; II. ENDINGS OF ADJECTIVES, IN THE NOMINATIVE AFTER THE MIXED DECLENSION. Attributive. Predicative, (Sin It) a r m - e r S^lccf ift g 11 1. A warm- coat is good. (Sin ttjarm-e^ ^leib ift gut. A warm garment is good. 9)lein g u t - e r ^unb ift a 1 1. My good dog is old. SJiein a 1 1 - e ^ ^[erb ift gut. My old horse is good. 39 Tmx fit 11 - cr 3]ogel ifl tv e i p. Thy beautiful bird is white. 5)ciii ir e i f - e ^ ^^a)iim 1)1 f di o u. Thy white paper is beautiful, (gnu {] a 1 1- c r (2ta()I ift g u t. His hard steel is good, §unb ? 4. 9^ein, idi f)abe ein fd)cne^ groped jpferb. 5. ^at 3f)r Udm6 ^inb mein neueg 2}leffer ? 6. S^ein, aBer 3^r gutcr ©cBn bat 3f)veii neuen @tccf. 7. -^at ber ^teifdier ein fetter @d)af ? 8. 3a, unb fein giiter ©clnt fiat ein fd)cne^ toet^eg Samm. 9. 3ft unfer §remib, ber jnnge ^oddnber, veid) ober arm? 10. (Sr ift nidit veid), aber er ift jnfriebcn. 11. @in jufviebener Wlam ift au6) reidi. 12. @in reid)er SJlann ift nidit ftet^ ein jufriebener SJJami. 13. 3I)v grofeg ^aug l}at ein fteileg ®adi nnb einen tiefen JtcUer. 14. 93cn teem f)aben ©ie 3f)r nene^ @c^ba? 15. 3di i^aht e^ t)cn einem gutcn grennbe. 16. 3)ag ©dituein ift ein fauleg fetter %i)kx. 17. (Sin trcner grennb ift ein ftarfer <£d)n|. Questions. 1. Which cases in the mixed declension differ, in termination, from those of the new? 2. Which cases of the old and the mixed declension are alike ? 3. In which cases do the endings of the mixed declension differ from those of the old ? 4. Which are alike in all three declensions ? 5. What office is assumed by adjectives of the old and mixed declensions'? 6. What may v/e regard as an equivalent in the new ? LESSON XII. l^ectUn XII. Adjectives denoting the material of which, a thing is made, are formed by suffixing to nouns the letters e, ett or ertt. Ex. : £eber, lebern (leather, leathern) ; ®oIb, golbett (gold, golden) ; SBlei, blelertt (lead, leaden) &c. If the root vowal be a,o or u, it is frequently changed to its corresponding Utltlaut. Ex. : ©lag, gtcifern (glass ; made of glass) ; ^olj, ^oljettt (wood, wooden), (See Less. II. 12. ae & c) 40 Exercise 12. QlufgaBe 12. S9ed)er,»n. cup, beaker; ^od), m. cook ; S^leif, ripe ; ^teiern, leaden ; .Kupfern, copper ; (Silbern, silver. S3teijlift, m. pencil ; 3Jlarmorn, marble ; Xtn'tenfafi, n. inkstand ; ©tferu, iron ; 2Jlcin, my ; %\\&i, m. table ; ^af , n. barrel, cask ; SD^orfer, m. mortar ; 3:!iid)ier, m. joiner ; gleif tg, diligent ; £)b|i, n. fruit ; 33etter, m, cousin ; «§oI^ern, wooden ; Dbji'meffer, n. fruit- SBeber — nod), neither — Jleffel,7n. kettle, boiler; knife; nor. 3^r filberner goffel i|l fdion, unb Your silver spoon is beautiful, mein eiferne^ 2Jleffer i|i fd)trer. and my iron knife is heavy. 2)icfer fteinerne Xifd) i|^ fd^wer. ■ This stone table is heavy. 2)ajJ Seben bes^ .^inbe^ ij^ ein golb; The life of the child is a golden net S:raum. dream. 3ji nid)t ein eiferneg (Sd^if baucrl^aft? Is not an iron ship durable ? 1. -§abcn ©ie metn reifeg £)bfi? 2. 9^ein, id) ^abe 3^r filberne^ Obfi^ meffer, unb 3f)r alter greunb, ber Sefirer, l^at bag retfe Dbft. 3. «§aben @ie meinen ftlbernen 33leiftift ? 4. 9^ein, ber gute Sefirer feat i^n. 6. ^^i ber atte ^cdi meinen ^olgernen S^ifd) ? 6. 9'iein, ber S^ifdiler ^t i^n. aber ber ^od) f)at etnen marmornen %x\6^. 7. <§at er and) ein J)cljerneg Sa^ ? 8. 3a, unb biefer fieif Ige (Sd)iiier ^at ein fdione^ bleierne^ %\nit\\i faf. 9. ^at er aud) einen filbernen ®ed)er ? 10. 3a, unb er fiat aud) ehien fu^fernen JlefCel unb einen eifernen SJlorfer. 11. ^o^tw @ie "ba^ neue 2Jleffer meinen jungen ^reunbeg ? 12. 9^etn, id) §abe ein ncue^ SJlef; fer »on bent guten ^aufmanne. 13. ^^i biefer fieiftge @diii(er ba^ gute Sud) beg alten greunbeg, ober ben filbernen QBleijlift feineg guten 33etterg ? 14. @r ^!xi tneber ein guteg 93ud), ncd) einen ftlbernen S3teiftift — er bat nur einen f)otjernen 33leiftift. 15. 2Bo ift ber fupferne ^effel beg ^od)g ? 1 6. 2)er arme 9J?ann ^ai nur einen eifernen ^ef[eL Questions. 1. How are adjectives, denoting the material of which a thing is made, formed? 2. Can vou give an example of such an adjective ending in n ? 3. In en ? 4. In em ? 5. When do changes ia the radical vowel occurl LESSON XIII. j: t f 1 1 n XIII. THE FEMININE GENDER. The articles in the feminine singular are declined thus : 9^om. bte, * the ; (btefe) eine, * a ; (mcine). ®en. ber, of the ; (biefer) einer, of a ; (meiner). ^at. ber, to or for the ; (biefer) einer, to or for a ; (meiner). 5{cc. bte, the. (biefe) eine, a. (meine). * The pupil having now had in due course all the forms of the article m the singular, may note, that like biefer (which differs from the definite article only in having a 8 instead of e8, in the nom. and ace neuter, L. VII.) are dechned all the words in list II., Lesson X. ; and that hke c i n, are inflected all those in the list, ein, mein, fein, &c , Lesson XI. 41 Feminine nouns are in the singular indeclinable ; as, nom. bie ©eibc, (the silk) ; gen. ber SeiDc ; dat. ber Seibe ; ace. bie (Seibc. See, however, Note, p. 277. The adjective in the feminine singular has two forms. When it stands alone, or unaffected by a preceding word (§ 29.), the nominative and accusative end in c, the genitive and dative in cr. It is then said to be of THE OLD DECLENSION. 9?om. ®ut-e, good ; rot^-e, red. ®en. @ut-er, of good ; rot^-er, of red. 5Dat. ®ut-er, to or for good ; rot^-er, to or for red. Qtcc. ®ut-c, good ; rot^-e, red. When preceded by either of the articles, or by any one of the adjective pronouns (See Lists Less. X. and XL), the adjec- tive terminates in the nominative and accusative as in the Old declension, but in the genitive and dative in the letters en Thus : 91cm. bie gut-e, the good; meine alt-e, my old. ®en. ber gut-en, of the good ; nietner alt-en, of my old. ^at ber gut-en, to or for the good ; melner alt-en, to my old. 5lcc. bie gut-e, the good ; meine alt-e, my old. I. The personal pronoim (S i e Q/ou') is always written with a capital initial, w^hile f i e (she or her) is only thus written at the beginning of a sentence. Hence in writing, no ambiguity can arise. Ex.: 3d[) fe^e © i e, I see you; id) fe^e fie, I see her. When fte is used in the nominative, the for7n of the verb determines the person. Ex. : (S i e f e ^ e n i^n, you see him. "Sie fie^t i^n, she sees him. Whether, however, © i c (when in the accusative) stands for you or her, can only be determined by the context. The orthography of the pos- sessive pronouns 3f)r (your) and ii)X (her) is, also, identical, and, in speaking, is hable to equal ambiguity. Thus, '^f>x SBud^ i\t grcf , may signify, your book is large, or her book is large, and 3c^ ^aBe i f) x ^^ndj, may mean, I have your book, or I have her book. The significations of fie in the accusative, and of i^x, in all the cases, must of course, when spoken, be determined by the connection. (See Declension L. 18) 42 Exercise 13. QlufgaBc 13. Slmerlcvi, n, America ; mibUctijd',/. library; 3?vlUe,/. spechu'les; 5!)ame, /. lady ; iDic, the ; %cUx,f. pen, feather : %d\i, fine ; ?vrv"infreid\ n. France ; §rdul?iii, n. miss. yoimg kidy ; iSreunbiu,/. friend; ©Idferii, glass ; ©clbcn, golden ; 3fu-, her; (Seel.) jlcin, no, not any ; S\ctk,f. chain; Sampe,/ lamp ; £cimi\"inb,/. linen ; ??httter,/. mother; Cperiujfa^, ??. opera- glass ; «Sdu"cre,/. shears; (Sdhtpefier,/. sister ; (2cibe,/. silk; Ste, she; it. Siante,/. aunt; UBr,/. watch, clock ; Uliv'tafd^e, /. watch- pocket. ^er 33^l^cr f\it ha$ ^Budi ber The brother has the book of the (^d'iircficr. sister. 5Der 23atcr gtebt bcr JlcdUcr eiit The father gives the daughter a ©iidi. book. 5)er --^Mt mciner 2)^uttcr ill: fd^cn. The hat of my mother is beau- tiful. 2Bc (ft bie UBr 3fn"er S^'duleiu Where is your cousin's watch ? ©cufine ? iiz fdicne fcinc Setntixinb. 7. 5Ec ift 3(n'e violbene ^riUc ? 8. 3d"> BaK^ feine qolbene 33riU;'. 9. <6aben Sie eine filbcrne, cber eine gclbcne lUn- ? 10. 3di iiabe eine fit&ei'nc U&r. 11. 5ft fte cine gnfe U6r ? 12. 3a, abcr fte ift nidit feBr fdu"it. 13. 2So ift 3t>te IXbx ? 14. igie ift in niciuer Uf)vtafd-^e. 15. -^^ai 3Bre Sdnvefier eine gclbene Ufcc ? 16. 3vi, unb fte hat audi eine fdvne gclbcne .^dtc. 17. ©c ift mcine ncne Sd^eere ? 18. 3di Babe fte, aber jte ift nid^t fcBr fd^arf. 19. ©o ift 3Bre (gd^trefter ? 20. Sic ift bei ber (L. 17 III.) 3)cuttev in ber S3ibactBef. 21. 33o ift meine gidfeme Samve ? 22. 3cli hahc fie. 23. S>er Bat metn nenco Cp'-^'ntglas ? 24. 3c& Babe eo uub 3Bre neue 53rillc. Qt^ESTIO^^s. 1. What is the characteristic termination of adjective pronouns in the fejninine nominative ? 2. According to what two forms of declension ^xe feminine adjectives inflected ] 3. Which cases of the two declensions are alike? 4. What is said oi feminine nouns in the singular ? 5. How is 5 t c (you) always WTitten ? 6. When is fte (she or her^ WTitten with a capital letter 1 7. How can 5 i e be distinguished from fie in the nominative, when spoken ? 8. How, when in the accusative ? 9. How is 3 B r {your in writing, to be distinguished from t b r (her) 1 10. How is ft e in the accusative and ii)r in all its cases to be distinguished when spoken ? 43 LESSON XIV. fcctiou XIY. Nouns of the New Declension form their genitive by adding n or en to the nominative. Ex.: Nora. 5^er 2)?en[d), the man, the human being; ber ^err, the Lord, or Mr.; ber ^iitft, the prince; ber (Flcpbant, the elephant, etc. Gen. 5)cg 5DZcnfcf)en; be§ J^erni; be^ tyiivften; beo (S(c)?~^auteu jc. Nomis of this Declen- sion retain the form of the genitive in the dative and accusative. Nearly all masculine nouns that end in e belong to the New Declension. New declension of the xoux. 9h ^cr gute ^naBe, the boy ; ®. ^eS guten ^naBen, the boy's ; 2). ^em guten ^naBen, to the boy; \i ^m guten ^nahm, the boy ; ber OcBfe, the ox ; be3 Cdifen, of the ox ; bent £)cf)fen, to the ox; ben £)d)fen, the ox. Exercise 14. QUfgaBe 14. 2Iryiirengeub,fatiguing, toilsome : (Jiirift, m. Christian : S^eutfd^e, m. German : grcin^c'fe, ?n. French- man ; tjveif^eit, /. liberty freedom ; v^reiftaat, m. republic ; jNurft, m. prince ; ©cjtdr.t', n. counten- ance, face ; ©erpJiT'en, n. con- science ; ©raf, m. count ; @rted^e, m. Greek ; ^auptmaun, m. cap- tain; «6etter, brisk, lively ; Smmer, always, ever : 3ube, m. Jew: ..^ua6e, m. boy ; ?cinb, n. country : Sebeii, n. life; SJlcnarcbie', /. mo- narcliy ; D^vid^bar, 7n. neighbor , -DIeffe, m, nephew; D^icbte,/. niece; ^oU, m. Pole ; ^nwy m. prince: 9tuBty-(, quiet, peace- able : 9tuffe, 771. Russian ; (Edirci6tird\77z. writing- desk : 3c(bat', 772. soldier ; igcnbent, but: Zhxt^, m. Turk ; Uufer, our; Un'fid)er, unsafe, un- certain ; Seid^en, n. sicrn, token. ^art ber @rc^e ftarB in 'ttm 3ar)re beg ^errn ^6>^i ^unbcrt unb i?ier; ^efui. ^er tafv ere Ungar ijl bet geitxb beg Slii'Tcn. ^■ag buf'tenbe SSeild^eu iil ein fc&oneg (Sr^euq'm§ bes ^^riiBIiugo, SSerbten'teg 33rcb iU [up. Charlemagne died in the year of the Lord eight hundred and fourteen. The gallant Hungarian is the enemy of the Russian. The fragrant \-iolet is a beautiful production of the spring. Earned bread is sweet. 44 Qin guteg ©etDiff^cn ijl tin fanfte^ A good conscience is a soft ^ iff en. pillow. SJlancber fiei'pige Tlann ijl arm. Many an industrious man is poor. SfJctf) ift ber cerbten'te Sofin ber Want is the merited reward of gauUieit. idleness. 1. ^at ber gran^ofe ben 2Bein beg ^eutfd)en ? 2. 5a, unb ber 2)eutfd)e ^at ha^ Xnd) beg granjofen. 3. 2Bag ^at ber Sftuffe ? 4. dr §at bag £anb beg ^clen. 5. liefer @rted)e iji fein i^reunb beg S^iirfen. 6. 2Ber ):)at bag fcbarfe 2)leffer biefeg ^naben ? 7. 2)er §reunb biefeg ©riedben f)at eg. 8. >^aBen @ie ben ®d)reibttfd) S^reg S^leffen ? 9. D^ein, id) fjabe ben (Sdireibtifct) meineg 35aterg. 10. ^aben ©ie bag ^udi biefeg v^naben, ober bag ^a^ter feineg 3^effen? 11. 3i I)abe bag ®ud) beg ^naben, unb nieinc Olidite {)at bag ^a^ier beg Jfleffen. 12. 3ft unfer greunb, ber<§auptmann, ein ^ranjofe, cber ein @ried)e ? 13. @r ift ein ^ranjcfe unb ein greyer geinb hte 9h:ffen. 14. 3ft biefeg ^inb ein cl)n unferg 5la*barn, bee ^aufmanneg ? 15. S^lein, eg ift ber (Sc^n eineg 3uben unb fein 5Bater ijl ber 9lad)bar eineg (5t)riften. 16. (Sin f)eitereg ©efidU ift nidit immer bag 3eid)en eineg ru()igen ©eiriffeng. 17. >§aben aS" or „ntd^t0", it follows the Old Declension, and is written with a capital initial. Ex. : Sd^ ^aBe ttm^^ ©d^one^, I have something beautiful ; ^r fagt nidjtS ar* ge^. 17. ^at biefer 2«iiUet gutea md)l ? 18, 3a, unb biefer 33auer l^at 47 gute« ^crn, vjutcii vCxifcr, uub cjutc ®ei-|'^e. 19. 5)iefc^ 2)idbdieit I}at cine [cboue (Stimmc. 20. -l^iciii *-i3nibcr Ijat chvae ©duMie^ uiib idi ftabe nidU^ t^ciplidM^'^. 21. ®a^ licibcu 5ic 9icuci5 ? 22. ^d) f)abe gar nidito [l^cuctJ. 23. 5)iefer 2)uiiin t)at mir ciii iiteiiig @elb, uiib ber aubcve ijat gar fciug. Questions. 1. How are the absolute possessive pronouns declined. 2. Are eiii^ and uinS often contracted? 3. How? 4. In what two ways is ntctjtg rendered in EngHsh ? 5. How is ctum» rendered? 6. „Sottit!as"? 7 How is gar rendered? 8. ©anj unb flar? 9. How is an adjective declined, and how written after etwaS and nid)t.-? 10. How are German verbs conjugated negatively? 11. What analogy is noticed in the same tenses ] LESSON XVL Section XYI. The plural number. In the plural the adjective, when not preceded by a declin- able word, (the personal pronouns excepted) is inflected accord- ing to The old declension. ^om. ©ute, fc^one, alte, r^t:^e; @cn. ©uter, fd)Oner, alter, rof^er; ^at ©uten, fd^onen, alten. rot:^en; % c c. ©ute, fd)one, alte, xot^t. I. The definite article, the demonstrative and possessive pro- nouns have, in the Plural, the same form for all genders, and are inflected like adjectives of the Old Declension. Adjectives, when preceded by the definite article, a demon- strative, possessive, or relative pronoun, end, in all cases of the plural, in en, and are of the New Declension. Declension of the definite article, demonstrative and possessive pronouns in the plural. 2t. ^ie, the ; biefe, these ; meine, my ; ®. ^er, of the ; biefer, of these ; metner, of my ; 2). JDen, to, or for the ; biefen, to, or for these; meinen, to, or for my ; 51, ^ic, the; biefe, these ; metnc, my. 48 Inflection of adjectives according to the new declension in the plural. ^. 5ene gutcn, those good ; feme guten, liis good ; ®. Sener guten, of those good ; feiner guten, of his good ; 5D. Senen guten, to,or for those good; feinenguten,to,or for his good; Q(. 3ene guten, those good ; feine guten, his good. RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. Rule I. Nouns of the New Declension add n or en to the singular, and retain this ending in all the cases. Ex. : @raf^ count ; ©rafen, counts. Od)^, ox ; Ddfjfen, oxen. Stnabt, boy ; ^naBen, boys. Rule II. Masculine nouns, which in the singular end in ct, en, er have the same termination in the plural, and take the Umlaut*, if the radical vowel be capable of it. Ex.: 5(:^fel, apple; ^le^pfel, apples. Ofen, stove; Oefen, stoves. 35niv)er, brother ; SSrixber, brethern, or brothers f . Rule III. Masculine nouns of other terminations generally add e to the nominative singular. Ex. : 35 erg, mountain, SBerge, mountains ; a, o and u in the radical syllable generally assume the Umlaut. Ex. : -Saum, tree ; 33aume, trees. 33art, beard; 33arte, beards. c(fcn, basin ; 33etfen, basins. Tlittd, means ; 3}iittel, means. 2)?viDd)en, girl ; ajtabdjen, girls, ^^raulein, miss ; ^aulein, misses. Rule VII. Neuter nouns of other terminations generally add er to the nominative singular. Ex. : fjelb, field ; Shelter, fields, ^ilb, picture ; 33ilber, pictures ; a, o and u in the radical syllable generally assume the Umlaut. Ex. : 5Da^ £anb, bie !^anbcr; bag ^oru, bie Werner; 'i)a^ ^^nd), bie iBiicfjer. (Ex- ceptions §. 13. 1 Note.) Rule VIII. If the nominative plural terminate in ffXt", the other three cases will end in the same. Rule IX. The nominative, genitive and accusative of all nouns are in the plural number, the same in form. Rule X. The dative plural must always end in „tt". Observe, that rules VIII., IX. and X. are without exceptions and applicable to nouns of all genders. Old declensiois^ of the adjective ix the plural WITH NOUNS. (See L. 15.) Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Hfl om. ®ut-e SSein-e; ©elbe-n ; SBaffer; ©en. ©ut-erSSeiit-c; Seibe-n; 3Baffer; ^at @ut-en 5S}ein-en ; ©eibe-n; SBaffer-nj Qlcc. ®ut-e 2Bcirt-e; (Seibe-n; SBaffer. declension of THE ARTICLE, ADJECTIVE AND A NOUN OF EACH GENDER IN THE PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. ^. 2)ie guten ^^iit-e, f^au-en, «§auf-er, Rule III. ; Rule V. VIII. ; Rule VII. ; ®..^er gutcn ^itt-e; ^T^au-en; ^auf-tt; 2). 2)cn gutcn «§ut-cn, i^au-en; t^aiif-em, RuleX.; % 5)ie guten «§ut-e, ?Jrau-ett; '§auf-er. Rule IX. ; 3 50 DECLENSION OF A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN, ADJECTIVE AND NOUN OF EACH GENDER IN THE PLURAL. Masculine. 9l« ^dm guten 9^agel, Rule 11. ; ©. SD^einer guten £RageI; Feminine. 0ZabeI-n, Rule lY.; 9^abel-n; 5). 2)ieinen guten 9lageC-n; iUabel-n; % 3}Zemc guten ^Icigci; 9flabel-n; Neuter. 3J?effer, RuleVL; DJlcffer; 9J?e[fer-n,RuleX.; 3}?effer. When several consecutive adjectives precede and qualify the same noun, they must, in termination, be all alike. Ex. : Sr 'f^at guteS fetneS Btaue^ Xudj. dx ^at ba^ gute [eine Blaue 2'ud^. ir finb, we are ; 3^r (§. 57. 6) ^a^t, you have; i^r feib, you are ; ©ie ^aBen, they have ; fie ftnb, they are. 5tuf gaBe,/. exercise ; S5aum, m. tree; Setbe, both ; ^mie,/ pear; IBIatt, n. leaf; 2)eun, for, because ; ©^vlid), honest, honestly ; Exercise 16. 5lufgaBe 16. ?viit^gerl)iit, m. thimble ^ttnib e, /. j oy. delight ; f^ii^sclf, n. infantry; ®a&el,/. fork; @aft, m. guest; @elb, yellow ; ©emat'be, n. painting, picture ; ©leidi, like, equal; <§cch, high (predicate form) ; >§o^e, I)cl)er, 'i)ci}e6, at- tributive form ; .^anjel,/. pulpit; Jlaiijter, ni. chancellor • v^tvciie,/ church; 51 iloiiig, m. king; iJaiuv long; Safiiij, burdensome; !^iebltclV lovely ; iiicbliug, m, darling, favorite ; 2 off el, m. spoon; iiJinilfe,/. Louisa; -ilUavftfrau, /. market- woman ; S'uilcr, m. painter; aTJalevei', /. (art of) painting ; 2)Zcff erfitmicb, m. cut- ler; ^\\\\V\d)xzx,m. music- teacher ; Dhicb'baviu/.neighbor; ^^^vc^bigev, m. preacher; ^latte,/. rat ; Oic'genfdiirm, m. um- brella ; 9?eicbtf)um, m. v^^ealth, riches ; Stehilicb, neat, cleanly; Oieiteret', /. cavalry; ®dimacff)vTLft, pala- table ; (Soii'uenfd)irm, m. pa- rasol ; (Stclj, proud, haughty; Xcdncr,/. daughter; UntT?of)l, unwell ; aSolf, n. people ; 3u (pr. j to ; 3u (adv.) too. §el)ter finb uni^crmeib/Iut. @ie fuitcn auf ben Sdnffen ifive^ '^einbeg ©dt'tigung if)ver ^(x6:}i unb if)vci5 <§ungerg. CDiefcd fdicne ©cfdienf' ift i)on mei; ner @d)wej^ev*. SMcfe^ «§au^, 'i!k\z SBtefen itnb jene SBein'gdrten finb bag (5i gentium euieg reidien i?auf manner. Mistakes are unavoidable. They seek upon the ships of their enemy gratification (satiation) of their rage and of their hunger. This beautiful present is from my sister. This house, these meadows and those vineyards are the property of a rich merchant. 1. 2)tefe nenen ^ifdie finb grof. 2. 3^ie toeifen <§iite finb fdion. 3. i^iefe ©abeln ]i\\'ii i^cn ir Kiben fttbcrne. 6 2)te guten J^naBen §aben fdionc 53ivnen. 7. 'Slei^ige ediiiler 6aben lange 5(ufgaben. 8. 3)tefe alien @cl? baten babcn alte Q3iuter. 9. iDet SDIefferfdnnieb hOii fd^cue neue SOIeffer. 10. 3)ie gveuben biefeg 5)>anneg finb feine licblid^cn ^inber. 11. 2)ie ^an^eln in biefen Jtird^en finb ^c6. 12. 2)ie 9^tditen ber alien 3)ame finb fleifjig. 13. 33ie SJidbd^en be5 ^rebigevg finb gute ^iiebev. 14. 3)ie .§oli Idnbcr finb reinlidi nnb cl)rltdi. 15. 2)iefe 3)Zarftfrau i)irefter hixi m6.)i nur einen 5!Jlufiflef)rer, fonbcrn om6^ einen Sebrer ber aiealerci. 23. 3Ber i)^i bie -58u*er ^[)xzt, 33ruberg ? 24. 2)ie (2*tyeftcr feiner ^reunbin liat bie 53ii*er. 25. ipai bie Soditer 3l)rei3 alien Siad); bam bie gclbene Uljr metner jungen ^^reunbin ? 26. 5'^ein, fie l)at bie fil? berue Ui}r it)rer Dftadibarin. 27. Sie 331dtter biefer ^dume finb gelb, aber i^r €bft ift reif unb gut. 28. 3){e 9iatten finb Idfttge ©dfte. 29. iDtcfer alte ^aufmann l)^i gro^e Oleidiibiimer. 30. ©iefe Sleiterei unb jene^ ^uf ? »ol! finb beibe gleid) gut. 31. 2)er fleine @o^ beg ^anjterg ifl ber £ieb; ling beg ^onigg. 32. ©iefc grcunbin beg SD^alerg ^at febr fd)one @e; mdlbe. 62 Questions. 1. IIow is the adjective declined in the plural, when not in- fluenced by a preceding word 1 2. What is said of the definite article, the demonstrative and possessive pronouns in the Tplmall 3. How are they in- flected? 4. What is the ending of adjectives, when preceded by the definite article, a demonstrative, possessive, or personal pronoun ? 5. And of v/hat declension are they? 6. What is said of adjectives when consecutively pre- ceding and quahfying a noun? 7. Have adjectives and nouns of the New Declension the same form in the plural ? 8. What cases of nouns are aUke in the plural ? 9. What is the final letter of the dative plural ? LESSON XYII. §tct\ n XYIL The plural of Warm is 3)Jcmner ; except in compounds, where it is generally ?eutc (§. 15. Note). Ex : ^anbmann, country- man ; l^anbleitte, country-people. Bintmermann, carpenter ; Binimcrleute, carpenters. <§au^tmann, captain; ^au^tleute, captains, ^aufmatm, merchant ; ^aiifleute, merchants. 33clf corresponds mainly to our word people. Unlike this, however, it has different forms for the two numbers. Ex. : 5Die ^ranjcfen [inb ein leB^afteS 3? o If ; the French are a hvely people, ^le Siirften fc^iDelgen, unb ba6 33 o If leibet -, the prin- ces revel and the people suffer. 5IIle 33 I ! e r auf (Srben, 1. 9)?cfeg 18. 18 ; all the nations of the earth, Genesis 18. 18. The word one, as a pronoun, is, in English, often inserted af- ter an adjective, to avoid the repetition of the noun: in German, however, the adjective in such case, stands aloiie. Ex.: (Sr t)at einm giiten ^iit xmb id) ^aBe eincn fd)Ied)ten 5 he has a good hat and I have a bad (one). 3d^ I^aBe gute '^nU unb er ^at fc^Ied)te; I have good hats and he has bad (ones). Sr 'i)at guten SGeitt unb id) ^ate fd)tcd)tett; he has good wine and I have bad. The adjective and participle preceded by an article are often used substantively, as Avell in the singular as in the plural. Ex. : 5£)er Bwfriebene iji gliicflid) ; the contented (man) is happy. JBie 3ufriebene ift gliitflid) ; the contented (woman) is happy, ^k Bufriebenen finb gtiitflidi -, the contented are happy. (Em Bu* fciebencr ift gliicflid) ; a contented (man) is happy. 2)ev ©ter* 53 Bcnbe, bic ©terBcnbc ; the dying (man), the dying (woman). 5)ic ^ct3cnbcn ; the Hving. I. Adjectives in German are often, by means of the definite article, con\erted into abstract nomis. Ex. : ^r Derc^rt ba0 ©d^iJne ; he adores the beautiful. II. The use of the definite article before nouns taken in a general sense, is much more frequent than in English. Ex. : ^n 3 iger ift flinf ; the tiger is agile. 5)er 3)iaitiant ift cin (Sbet* ftehi ', the diamond is a precious stone. 5Da§ @oIb ift dn ebleS 3)2etall ; (the) gold is a precious metal, ^u !?uft ift dn Sle= ment ; the air is an element. 5)aS SBaffer ift ein ©fement ; (the) water is an element. 5Die ©eele ift unfterBUcf) ; the soul is, im- mortal. 5Der 9}Zenfd[) ift fterBIid) ; (the) man is mortal. 5Die Sraulbeit ifl: ein Rafter ; (the) idleness is a vice. The plural is used /in the same manner. Ex.: ^ie 3^iger ftnb fiinf; (the) tigers are agile. III. The definite article is sometimes used instead of the possessive pronouns. Ex. : dx l}at cin ^ud^ in b e r ^anb j he has a book in the (his) hand. 3)a0 ^inb ift Bei b e m 3Sater; the child is with the (its) father. lY. Proper names and titles are often preceded by the de- finite article. Ex. : 3Sd tft bcr ^einridf) ? where is (the) Henry? S)er ^aifcr ^einrid) -, the emperor Henry. ^Der ^onig <§cuirldf) ; (the) king Henry. The definite article likewise commonly precedes the adjective qualifying a proper name. Ex. : 51) ic fd)5ne ^^elcne ; the beau- tiful Helen. 3)er arme Diid)arb ; (the) poor Richard. The article is also generally used before the words Sdjulc, ^ird)C, maxh, dmUt :c. Ex. : (§x ift in ber ©c^ule ; he is (in) at (the) school, dx ift in ber Jltrd}e ; he is (in) at (the) church. (Sr ift auf bem 9)Zarft -, he is at the market. (§x ift in ber DJZii^le; he is in the mill. (§.x gef)t nad] ber dJlhtjU -, he is going to (the) mill. V. TJie word ^err, when placed before a proper name an- swers to our Mr. Ex. : 5ft ^ e r r 9?. :^ier ? is Mr. N. here ? ^- r a u in the like position signifies Mrs. Ex. : SBo ifi Srau 0^. ? where is Mrs. N. ? ^yrciulein thus placed answers to our word Miss. Ex. : ^'ta^Icin 9^. ift {)ier ; Miss N. is here. ©uten 9}?orgen ^err 9^., ^rau 9?., 'S^raulein 0?. ; good morning Mr. 1^., Mrs. N., Miss N. Instead of g'rau the French 9}Jabame is often used. Ex. : 9}?abamc m. ; Mrs. N. In address, when the name is omitted, the possessive pronoun precedes the words t^eiT and ^-raiilein. Ex. : Outen 9}?orgeu m e i n ^crr, m e i n ^Tciulein ; good morning Sir, Miss. In the phn-al the form of address is : 9JZeinc •^ertcn ! Gentle- men ! 9Jleitte Seamen ! Ladies ! Ttdm %x'duXmx ! Young ladies ! The word ^raiilein, when connected with the name, is used like its corresponding word in English. Ex. : Sinb bie i^'xan^ lein ^. lu ^aufe ? Are the misses N. at home ? In ceremonious address the word t§err is prefixed to titles. Ex.: ^crr ^rafibent; Mr. President, ^err (Svred}cr; Mr. Speaker, v^err ^aftor; (Mr.) Pastor, v^err £)&er[t; (Mr.) Co- lonel. ^eiT ^rofeffcr; (Mr.) Professor, ^crr .?el;rer; (Mr.) Teacher. <§err 9\tttcr ; Sir Knight. ^err, preceded by the definite article, is applied to these titles as well in the third person as in the second. Ex. : 2Bo ift ber t^err ^raftbcnt ? Where is the president ? SBiffen ^a gefcit'; lic^it ''^ia^, metne 2)ainen, meine i5rdu(ein cber meine ^erten, §rau Di, if)ve grduiein %cd)kx unb tftr ^evr (Bci^n finb m 3f)rem Simmer. The furnace-men have severe la- bor. (The) most nations of Asia have still idols. The father has a black hat and the son a white (one). The beautiful is lovely, but only the good (is) worthy of respect. The ambassador, with his lady consort, has just departed. Please, take seats upon the sofa, ladies, young ladies, or gentle- men. Madam N., her daughter, and her son are in your room. 1. 2)ie Bitnmetteufe, (Sdn'einer, ©dineiber unb S)Zanrer ftnb ^anbir»erfer. 2. 3Me S3erc\teute arbetten in ber Siefe bei* @rbe. 3. ©ie dngldnber ftnb €in ru(}igeg 2^olf. 4. 2)ie S)eutfd)en finb ein fleiptges 9}o(f. ^5. ^lei^tge ^aubwcvftjteute serbtenen in 5tmcrtca yiel ®e(b. 6. S>ir I^aben einen ijvc^en ®avten, unb ©ie (laben einen fleinen. 7. 3)er Oleidie f)at einen gn? ten Slccf, unb ber SSettler einen fdilediten. 8. 2)ev Xugenbl^afte fdieut ba§ £vtfter. 9. 2)cr @liicf(tdie bebauert ben Unglixcflidien. 10. 3)ie Ungelef)rte beneibet bie ©etebrte. 11. 2)ag ©elebrtc ift nicbt immer ia^ 9tii|tid)e. 12. 6err 9^. ift in bem Bimmer. 13. ferau 9^. ift in bem 2:f)eater. 14. (2ef)cn 2ie ben fd^onen SBagen bes ^ervn dl. ? 15. Olein, SZabam, id) febc i^n ni*t. 18. 3ci, ^rau 9^1., id) fc§e t^n. 17. S* gei)e mit 3f)nen, mein <6err. 18. 3di tt^iinfdie 3f)ncn einen guten SJlcrgen, mein <^rdulein. 19. 3d) war geftern in etner fDamcngefeUfd^aft. 20. ^rau D>. ift fe^v munter. 21. 3d) fe.y bie ^rau ©efanbtin ni*t. 22. 2)ev >§err aKtnifter ifl cbenfaUg bcvt. 23. 5)ie ^vau ^ofvdtr)in hat 2:rauev. 24. @uten 5ll)enb <^err ^prcfeffor, 25. 2Bo ift 3bve Qrau @emai)lin, 3t;r ^en (Boi)n 56 wnb Sl^re ^rdulein Jloditer ? 26. . S^nen, to, for them; %. ©ie, them; i^nen, to, for them ; i:^nen,to,for them; fie, them ; fie, them. I. The personal pronouns (in the 1st and 2(i persons) are often used reflexively ; and are to be rendered by our com- pounds, myself, thyself, ourselves, yourselves. Ex. : Sd^ loBe mid) ; I praise myself. 5Du loBft 5Did) ; thou praisest thyself. SBir loKni ung ; we praise ourselves. %^x loSt ®uc^ &c. II. The reflexive form of the personal pronouns, in the third person singular and iilural, is f i c^ (Latin se), and answers to our objective, himself, herself, itself, themselves ; its gender and number being determined by the subject of the verb. Ex. : @ r etkubt fid); he allows (to) himself. @ i e erIauBt f i d^ ; she allows (to) herself. 3)er ^yi, iuevbe geloBt ^aBen, I shall have praised. Conjugation of the regular verb loBen in the indicative. Infinitive. Participles. PREs. ^oBen, to praise ; prks. loBenb, praising; PERF. ©eluBt ^aBen, to have praised ; perf. gctoBt/ praised. Present tense. Singular Plural, 3d^ (oBc, I praise ; trir loBen, we praise ; 5)u ToBft thou praisest ; i^r loBet, you praise ; (Sr toBt, he praises ; fie toBen, they praise. 59 Singular. Plural Imperfect tense. 3cF| loB-te, I praised ; trir loB-tcn, we praised ; 5Du loh-U^, thou praisedst ; i^r lo^-Ut, you praised ; dt loB-tc, he praised ; fie loB-ten, they praised. Perfect tense. 3c^ ^abe gcIoBt, I have praised ; tvix ^dbm gcIoBt, we have p-ed ; 5Du ^a^t gelcBt, thou hast p-ed ; i^x 'i)ahd gefobt, you have p-ed ; (§x 'i^at Qtlo^t, he has praised; fie l^aBengelobt, they have p-ed. Pluperfect tense. Sd^ f)atU qdoU, I had praised ; h?tr^attengcIoBt, we had praised; JDu I;attcft geloBt, thou hadst i^r f)atkt geloBt, you had praised ; praised ; Qx f)atU QdoU, he had praised; fie fatten geIo:6t, they had p-ed. First future tense. ^d) ii?erbe loBen, I shall praise; irirtrerbcnloBen, we shall praise; 5Du txnrft loBen, thou wilt praise ; i:^r hjerbet loBcn, you will praise; (Sr irirb lohm, be will praise ; fie trerben lohtn, they will praise. Second future teivSE. 3cf| trerbe gelolBt f)abtn, 'tvix irerbett gelofit ^aBen, I shall have praised ; we shall have praised ; 5)u irirft geloBt f)abcn, i^r trerbet gelott ^aUn^ thou wilt have praised ; you will have praised ; (Sr irlrb getoBt ^aBcn, fie iijerben getoBt ^akn, he will have praised ; they will have praised. Imperative. ScBe bu, praise thou ; loBet or loBt i^r, praise you ; I^oBe er, let him praise ; loBen fie, let them praise. V. In compound tenses, the participle or infinitive is put at the end of the sentence, whether affirmative or interrogative. Ex. 5d) ^otte ben 33rief geloBt, I had praised the letter ; <^atU id) ben ^^ricf geloBt ? had I praised the letter ? SSen irerben ©ie lobeu ? whom will you praise ? SSerben @ic i^n geloBt ^abm ? will you have praised him ? VI. In Enghsh we have thi-ee forms for the present tense : he praises, he does praise, he is praising. The German has 60 for all these but one form : cr loBt The present, besides its ordinary use, is often used in relation to fast time, when the period referred to is still unfinished. Ex. 3rf) tfc^ne fc^on em ganged Sa^r in 33erlin, I reside (have resided) already a whole year in Berlin, ^d) f)aBc baS ^ferb nur eine 5Bo^e, I have (had) the horse only a Aveek. The present is moreover often used for the future. Ex. 9i)?orgen ge^^e id) nad) 2Slen, to morrow I am going to Vienna. 5d^ geBe S^ncit einen @u(ben fiir ba§ ^uc^, I {will) give you a florin for the book. VII. The imperfect is used to denote continuance of being, action or passion ; as, bie ©c^Iadjt Bei ^ei:^5ig bauerte brel ^age, the battle near Leipsic continued three days. Hence it comes, also, to be used in expressing what is customary or habitual ; as, 55)ie alten 5Deutfd)ett jiagten gern imb fii^rten oft Jtrieg mit ben JKomern, the ancient Germans v/ere fond of hunting, and often carried on war with the Romans. Kindred to this, is its use in cases where one action or event is to be represented as si- multaneous with another : as, er jlarB, aU er auf bem !^anbe toar, he died, while he was in the country ; er f:pielte, al0 ic^ arBeitete, he played, while I worked. (See § 138.) VIII. The perfect describes an action as finished without reference to another action, and unlike the same tense in Eng- lish, may be used with an adverb, that denotes past, as well as present time. Ex. : (Sr l^at i^n geloBt, he has praised him. (Sr ^ai i^n geftern geloBt, he (has) praised him yesterdaj^ (gr l^at il^n 'i^ituH gelcBt, he has praised him to-day. (See § 139.) IX. The second future is often used in reference to past time to indicate a probability. Ex. : (gr n>irb e6 gei^ort i^aBen, he lias probably heard it ; literally, he will have heard it. Exercise 18. ^ufgaBe 18. Sttg, as, than ; 2)ecf en, to cover ; @ra^, n. grass ; ^IrBeit,/ labor; 2)orf, n. \dllage; «§oren, to hear; 5|[u'fent§alt, m. resi- (Sf;e, before ; Sagen, to hunt ; dence; ©in'famfeit,/ solitude; Sugenb,/ youth; ;0auen, to build ; §elb, n. field ; Sunfer, m. young no- ;^eg{ei'ter, m- atten- i^ifdi, ra. fish ; bleman ; dant; grommigfeit,/ piety; R'6x)^zx, m. body; ;^etracl)'ten, to regard; ©ar.j, entire, whole ; .^rdnfen, to grieve; fdctz, rri. "messenger ; ©efc^i^t', skilful ; .^iif)t, cool ; 61 Sctitcn, to teach; ©dbc^en, to prize, es- S^apfer, brave, valiant; 2)^onb, m. moon ; teem ; Sdufclieu, to deceive, Oiad/niittag, m. after-@cbicfeii, to send ; disappoint ; noon ; @d)mcrj, 7n. pnin ; Xijau, m. dew ; -Sfiadit,/ nif^ht; (Sdiimmcr, m. glitter; S^rofier, w. comforter ; 9Mbe,/ vicinity; (Seek,/ soul ; 2;vunf, m. draught ; -^evfcn',/. person; (Sefjeii, to see ; Uu/geratf)en, ill-bred; ^jjfiiicfen, to pluck; @ommcv, m. summer; Ungliicf, 7i. misfortune; -^riifen, to test, prove ; ^iOiU,/. city; S3cr, before, from ; 9iel:i, pure; (Stdvfen,to strengthen; S^ov^ftditig, cautious; jRcfe,/. rose; @tvc^, 7?. strav/; Sffiadien, to v/atch ; 9lii(}m, 772. fame ; ©tube,/ room ; aSarnen, to warn ; (2d)eufeu, to present; ©iiiibe,/. sin; 2Bclf, withered. ©ine fdUMie ^^\\\iV ftimmt lo.^ -derj (A) sweet music (attunes) makes fret; inib I;elter. the heart glad and cheerful. 2)ie greunbe fiuttcu mid) in bem The friends sought me in the ©artcn. garden. 2)cr Jlaufinann ly^i ben (S'belftetn The merchant (has) prized the fef^r I;cdi gefdid^t'. precious stone very highly. S)le i^reiinbiu unrb biefen Sladymit? The friend will come to the city i^o^ nad) ber (Stvibt fcmmen. this afternoon. (5r roirb bie D^vidirtd^t fdion gebort' He will already have heard the f)aben. news. 1. 3cb tiebe bag iliub be5 DladibarsS. 2. 3)ev £el}rer fdieufte bem @diix? ler eiii |\tcne^ 53iidi. 3. 5)er Skater f;at mir biefeuSricf gefditcft. 4. @te liatte Vc)Xi j^reunbin getdufdit. 6. 3di trerbe ben ^reuiib tnarnen. 6. 2)te ^inbcv it»erben ben guten ^^ater gefrdnft f)aben. 7. 3d) i)abe bie ganje 9^a*t bei bem franfen Srnber geicad^t. 8. (Stu uugeratbeuei? ^tnb frdnft Sater nnb S)hitter. 9. ©ie 3dger jagten geftern S'Zorgen in bem 2BaIbe, unb roerben biefen Olvidimittag in bev 9Zdl}e be^ 3)orfeo jagen. 10. 3d) I}orte beine @timme m bei @tnbe. 11. 2)lein "Jrennb Itebte ben 9?nt)m unb ^r\\ ©dnmmer. 12. @r wirb ben 53oten gcpviift l)aben, ebe er ibn ju bem greunbe fdii(fte. 13. ©r I)at eine 9to[e geppcct nub fie feiner ^^venn? bin gefd:;cnft. 14. 2)er 93aner hat fein ^ane mit @trof) gebecft. 15. (Sin gefditcfter ?Jlaurev biefer ©tsibt b^^i biefeg fd)cne <§aiti3 gebaut. 16. ©iefe^ Ungliift nnrb ibn gele{)rt {)aben, ycvfidUig jn fein. 17. DlaVcIccn fdid^te ben tapferen (golbaten, unb nidit ben 3nnfer unb (Sbelmann. 18. 3di babi* in bem ^^hiffe )iKk (§ 53. 3.) ^ifdie gefe()en (L. 19.). 19. 2)ie Strbeiten in meiner 3ugenb i;aben meinen Jldrpcr geftdvft. 20. (5in fiUiier Srun! ftdrft in bem Sommer ben v^orper, it^ie bcr 3^§au bag toelfe ©rag beg %tU beg. 21. 5)ag ©eroiffeu Ujarnt bie 9Jlenfd)en i^cv (§ 116. List.) ber Siinbc. 22. 2)er (gdmterj liebt 'btw SO^cnb alg (L. 61.) einen S^rofter, bie (S'infam? feit (iebt ibn a(g einen 53egleiter mx'a bie grommigfeit a(g Im 2lnfent(;alt eincr veinen (2eete. QuESTioxs. 1. What peculiarities of the pronouns are stated in this Lesson \ 2. What is said of fid) '? 3. How is the root of a verb obtained 1 4. How are the participles formed 1 5. How are the several tenses formed ] 6. Can you form ihe several participles ai'd tenses of the -verb I b c n '? PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING GERMAN. Hitherto the attention of the student has been exclusively- directed to reading and translating : the main point being to secure the sounds of the letters in all their various combinations and to familiarize the mind with the forms and rules of Declen- sion, peculiar to each number and the different genders. He may now profitably begin to apply the principles derived from the previous instructions and exercises to the business of speaking and writing the language. In this the aim all along must be, as far as possible, to think in German; so as to avoid the common and natural error of merely turning English modes of thought and expression into strictly literal German. Having clearly before him the thought which he wishes to express, let him seek to give it that shape, so to speak, which it w^ould properly have in a German dress. In attempting this, he should enter upon a thorough review of the ground already traversed ; and, in order to furnish him with the additional stock of words requisite for the purpose, we have, in accordance with our plan, given at page 250 and following, groups of related terms arranged in alphabetical order under their distinctive heads: as, *'Profes- sions and Trades", "Parts of the human Body", "Articles of Dress", "Fruit-Trees", "Forest-Trees", "Flowers", "Grain and Vegetables", "Birds", "Quadrupeds", "Fishes", "Insects", &c. : all suggestive of the subjects of the various exercises. Thus 63 suppose him to be reviewing Lesson YI. In group I. opposite the corresponding Enghsh, he finds; ber ^ihtftler, ber ^a^ft, &c., and in group II, "i^a^ ■}[iUx, ber 5Bitth.>er, §aubfd^ube gcbabt? 4. 3di batte lie gejlern; aber beiite babe id^ fie ni6t gef)v"ibt. 5. SBir irerbcnincrgen eiiien angenebntcnS:ag baben. 6. SDcetu 3}iteriinrb meiucn iSrief :?cr fetuer Stbretfe gcbabt ^aben. T. 2)iefer arme 3.Uann gtug i^or? geftern ,^ii meiucnt Cnfel. 8. Qx q^^ ibm jiret S^afd^cntiuter uub einen neueii <§ut. 9. @iebft 5}ii cftmetnen ^Bniber uub fprid^ft ^u. ^uirciten mix i^m? 10. ^d) fab ibn geftern ; aber id'' bahz nicbt mtt ibm gefprcd^en. 11. ©angen (Sie beute SJtergen cber fang 3bre yrdufetu Xcd^ter ? 12. 3d^ Babe in meiner Sugeub gefungeu : aber fefet ftnge id^ ntdn mebr. 13. ^i- i^n (gie meine neue beutfd^e ©rvimntatif ? 14. dltin, tbm nt6t, aber id^ haii fte geficm gebabt. 15. Oliemaub i\t glucfli* als ber Bufriebene (L. 17.), iin'b Dtiemanb til; treife ale niir ber ?vrcmme. 16. ^^at ^bre f^rau ©emabltn einen 53rief an Sbreu -Serru 5>etter gefd^rieben ? 17. 9letn, ncd^ nidit, aber fte n.nrb mcrgen an ibu fdireiben. Gdfar fdmeh rtad' diem : „id3 fam, fab unD fiegte." Sd> c^ab bicfem armeu S'Linne mctue alien Sdntbe. Qn:sTio>'s. 1. In what respect do verbs of the Old Conjugation differ from those of the New ] 2. In what respect only do past participles of verbs of the Old Conjtigation frequently differ in form from those of the New ? 3. WTiat is said of some verbs of the Old Conjugarlon in the second and third persons singular ? 4. How do verbs of both Conjugations form their second and -third persons ? LESSON XX. ^ecti0tt XX. i'Oeld^er ? \vtl6>t ? rceldnv^ ? (which ?) as interrogative, is de- chned precisely like tiefer, c, ti (§. 61. 2). The genitive is seldom used. I. ^ c r, b i e, b a ^^ frequently stands independently; i. e. not belono'in^ to a noun. AVhen so used, it is called a substan- tive pronoun, and answers to oiu" demonstrative pronoun that. 67 Its inflection, as seen in thQ Declension following, differs from that of the article, and it is likewise commonly pronomaced with a stronger emphasis. Declension of the substantive pkonoun ber,bie, Da^. ShiguJar Plural Masc. Fern. ^^euL All genders. 01 c m. Xcx\ tie ; ta«, that: bie, those ; @en. fTefTen; tercn; beffen, of that; beren, of those ; ^at. 3^em: m; beni, to that: benen, to, for those; 51 c c. ^cn: tie; bas, that; bie, those. Examples of Ute use of the substantive pronouns. (Sein 2?LanteI ift frfiirar; unb r e r His cloak is black and tho.t of feinec^ ^rui^ere * ift 6lau. his brother is blue. iTic U^r meine» 3Satcr» ift grcB The watch of my father is unb b i e feines tyreunbes ift ![ch-. ^a§ ?eber bee 2d^u6madBcry ift fdiirar^ unb x^ o.^ bee Satt* Ict5 ift gelb. Seine ©anfe finb grau unb b t e feiney 0iad)5atn finb irei§. 3d) )>iht nteinen ^ut unb t e n mcines ^eunt^es. large and that of his friend is small. The leather of the shoemaker is black and that of the saddler is yellow. His o-eese are grrey and those of his neighbor are white. I have my hat and tha t of my friend. Sie^atiBrc -(yeter un? tie if^rer She has her pen and that of her friend. The boy has his book and that of his father. The boys have their balls and those of their friends. t^Teunbin. ^Tcr ^na6e 1:>ckt feiu -^ud) unb Xi a.^ feines -X^aters. 5Die .RnaBen BaBen if^re '23aQe tmb b i e iBrcr tyreunbe. Exercise 20. -^uf g a^ e 20. picture. -33rief, m. letter; 5lbclt6, m. Adolphus ; SBiffc, n Stmertca'tiifcb, Ameri- image ; -23ud^'Ba(ter, m. can (;. 5 Note ^TL.) ; 5Sil£'luuer,w. sculptor: keeper ; book- * Such elliptical form ai. "His cloak is black and his brother's is blue" («etn S3J'.nirel iu fc^marj siu^ ffi;ic9 ^Bruccv^ ift blauj is very seldom in German. 68 ^afeet,/. fable; ©eUert, m. Gellert ; «§etnrtcl), m. Henry; 91atf)§aug, n. city-hall, council-house ; gfJo'fenfarfeen,- pink- Sim'mermann, m. Zim- colored ; merman. %\niz,f. ink ; Soll'einne^mer, m. toll- SBann, when ; gatherer ; 2BeIct)er, which ; BiXJilUng, m. twin. Have you ever heard the song of the nightingale '? Yes, very often, but never that of the lark. The light of the sun is useful. Whose book is this ? To which of you does this book belong ? Which book do you mean 1 The new large book. Which is then the right name ? •^a^en (Sie je ben ©efang' ber 91ad) ; 3a, [e^r oft, aber nte ben ber Serctje. ^ag Sidit bev (Sonne iji nii^lid). SBeffen ©net) ift biefe^ ? aBeict)em tjon S^nen ge^ort' biefe^ S3ud)? 2Betd)e^ ©ud) metnen ©le? 5)ag nene gro^e 23uct). SSeldbeg ift benn ber xti^ik 3^ame ? 1. Seld)en Xtfd) l;aBen(Sie? 2.. 3c!) 'f)abe hzn meine^ greunbes!, be3 S;ifd)lev^. 3. aBetdie geber ^aben (Sie ? 4. 3d) f)abe bie meiner ^rcmtbtn, beg ^rdnletn SfJ. 5. aBeId]cg ^a^ier f)aben @ie ? 6. 3d) f)abe bag meineS i^Teunbeg, beg Seljrerg. 7. SBcIdier yon btefen ^naben fjat meine blaue 2;inte ? 8. Reiner yon tl)nen l)at 3^t:c ^tnte, aber einer "omx biefen ^naben I)at 3f)r fd)oneg rofenfarbencg ^^apier. 9. aSeldier "oon \i)mn l)§err Simmer; maun mcinen ©rief gefjabt ? 26. @r ^o^i i(;n yorgcftevn ge()abt unb fein ^reunb, ber SJlater, ):!jc(;l ate, as well @i'gent)ett, /. pecuHa- DZefjmen, to take ; £)B4ate,/. wafer; (Sctiirffat, tiny ; @d)lDffer, m. lock- smith ; §aben @ie meine (Sdieere ? 4. Siiein, icb §aBc bie metnige. 6. 2t5cr I)at meiuen (Stocf ? 6. ^err @. t)at if)n. 7. ^at m-etnc (Sditi^efter 3f)ren Sflcgenfdiirm ? 8. 91ein, fie ^<:[i ben ifirtgen. 9. ^^o^i ber (gdiloffer meiuen @6liiffel ? 10. CRein, er :^at ben fetnigen. 11. ^at bie 2Bafct)^ frau bie ^emben meincg 23ruberg unb ntciner 'Jreuube ? 12. @ie I}at [c^ tt)oty( bie fetnigen, alg bie i^ttgen. 13. Side 9}lcnfdien l^aben if)re Seller ixxdi (Sigcnl^eiten — id) l)abe bie mcinigen, (3te i^abcn bie 3ijvigcn iinb er ^$err 21. %)x ^aipier cber "ixx^ meinige? 17. @r ^at bag feintge. 18. 5Jlem ©ruber t)at mcin Sncb nnb id) {)abe bag feintge. 19. ^^ii er 3§re DBlatcn itnb ©tem^el ober bie fei:; * They may likewise refer fwhen the connection makes the appUcation eviw dent) to dependents, as ser\'ants, soldiers, subjects, &c. Whose watch has your mother ? She has hers (or her own). Have you my spectacles or yours? I have mine (or my own). Every man prizes his own (pro- perty). Does every man likewise love his family ? 71 nivjcn? 20. Qv Ijat bie mcinigcn. 21. fficfKii SBai^eu Ijat 3f^i" guter grcunb, Jpcrr @. 22. (§x ijat ben fcine^ CdciniiJ. 23. Unb weffcu $ferbe Ijat tr ? 24. Qx i)at bie meiuigen. 25. aiJeffen J^iUfclicr i)at ev 'f 26. g-r bat ben fcinigen. 27. ffieffcn Sd^aafe finb biefe in bcr 5lBiefe ? 28. *2ic finb bie uufvigen. 29. •fgabcn biefe -Dcutfdien i()re ^4>f£^be unb i[}ve 3Bagen, cber bie nnfvigeu ? 30. 3ie f)Ciben bie unfrigen. 31. ?i8effeix S3iidHn- (kiben biefe Sdniler? 32. '3ie Ijabcn Vie il)rigen. 33. 9cel;mcn <£ie immcr bai5 :^I)vi9e? 34. 3a, Sebermann nimmt ba6 Seine. 3.5. 2Bann I)aben i£ie bie 3Brigen gefel^en '? 36. 3di 'i)'), iraa (L. 10. II.) er adjUt-, he loves only that which he esteems. 3) e r i e n i g e is inflected like b e r m e i n t g e (L. 21), that is, its first component is declined like the definite article and its last like an adjective of the New Declension. Declensiox of b e r i e n i g e , singular and plural. Masculine. 9?. ^Derjentge, @. 5)egienigen, 2). ^enijenigen, 51 5)enienigen, Singular. Feminine. biejenige, berjenigen, berjemgen, biej.enige, Neuter. basienige, beyjentgen, bemjenigen, bagjenige, Plural. All genders. bieienigcn ; berieitigen ; benjenigen ; biejentgen. //. ^ti&jtx {relative) usually adopts the genitive of the stantive pronoun „b e r". (§65.1.2.) Declension of the relative h) c I c^ e r. ( lingular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. All genders. m. aBeld)cr, tiKld^e, U)eld)e0, h?eld)c, who, which, that ; @. 55)effen, beren, beffen, beren, whose, of whom, &c. 5). SBeldiem, it^elc^er, tretd;em, treld^en, to whom, &c. %. 3SeId)en, ircld)e, h?elcf)e§, iDelc^e, whom, which, that. Examples o/ ti^ e I en e r {interrogative and relative^ and b e r i e n t g e. -2BeId)cr 3D^ann ift !ranf ? 3)erientge, h?cld)cr im -^aufe ift. SBe(cf)e S'ebcr ^a6cn (2ie? 3d) I)a'6e biejenigc, ti^elc^e 6ie gei}aBt f;aBett. 55effen ^ud) ^n6en 6ie ? 3d) ^aBe ba6 beS 5?Zannea, beffen (gtcc! 6ie :&aBen. S[BcId)m ^nciBen ^aBen Sie baa ©elb gegeBen? 3d) :^aBe e6 benicnigcit gegeBen, tvel(^en ®ie ^rcb gaBen. Which man is sick ? The one who is in the house. Which pen have you ? I have the one that you have had. Whose book have you ? I have that of the man whose stick you have. To vrhich boys have you given the money ? I have given it to those to whom you have given bread. 73 ///. For both bcricnigc and the relative tt> c t rf| c r , the pronoun b c r may be siihstitated. Ex. : £)er 3)iann, b cr Iran? ifl ; the man that (who) is sick. Sffic(d)eS ^-Burf) \)i\htn (5ic ? Which book have you ? 5d) f;aBe bag (bagjeiilijc), b a S (trel* d)e§) Sie ijeljaBt (;al)en; I have that (the one) that (which) you have had. ® e r, when substituted for b e r j[ e n i g c , is in the genitive plural b e r c r (instead of b c r e n). Ex. : ^art ift ba§ 8(^itffat bcrcr (bcrienlijen), bie fid) nidjt crnafjren fonnen; hard is the fate of those, who cannot support themselves. The use of berjenige often corresponds to that of our personal pronoun, as loell in the singular as in the plural. Ex. : JDerjenige ben (Sic fudien, ifl nid}t ^ier; he that (whom) you seek is not here, ©iejenigen bie ©ie fudien, finb nid^t I;ier; they (those) Avhom you seek are not here. Exercise 22. 5(ufgaBc 22. 5tmtmann, ?n. magis- ^itlflog, helpless ; (Stirn, /. forehead ; strate; J^apeWc,/. chapel; 93ev(af'fen, forsaken, Str'beiter, m. laborer, ^aufeit, to buy ; left ; workman ; £af'ter()aft, vicious ; SSetiiBerg *, m. vine- Gin' fiebler, m. hermit; Se|t, last; yard; griebe, m. peace, tran- 8o()u, m. reward; 2Bof)n§au^, n. dwell- quiUty; S^avbe,/ sear; ing. ^,?i. heart; ©dieuue,/. shed, barn; 2Bir Ite&eu 2)ie*'|cntgcu, bie (wcldie) We love those, who (that) love uug lie&en. us. Sdi I)abe ben >^ut, ben id) geftevn I have the hat, that I (have) had ge()abt I}abc. yesterday, ©le ()abcn bie SteVfel bie reif finb, You have tiieapples, that are ripe, unb id) fiabe bk'imi^m, bie griin and I have those, that are finb. green, Scr'ieutqe, ben id^ fucbe, ift uidit ijkx. He, whom I seek, is not here, 5)et']eiiige, beffeu ©torf td) f)abe, ijl; He, whose stick I have, is sick. !cauf. Sie'jemge, ^u htx bk SJlutter ge'^t, She, to whom tlic mother is going, ift frauf. is sick« JDie'jeniqen, bie ftolj finb, ftnb and) They (or those) that are proud, ndtrifd). are likewise foolish. * Literally '"Wine-mountain"; so called because most vineyards in Germany are upon hills or smaller mountains: the sunny sides of these being much the more favorable to the growth of the vine, in that latitudes 4 74 1. ©ctif^eo .^iiib lieot berC^etm? 2. @r lieBt ba^jeni^e, toetdBeiS ei Icht 3. aBeUtea .^iiib liebt ben iD()eim ? 4. S^aqenige, tccU^c^ er Itc6t, lieBt if)n. 5. iStlduni >5ut Iiaben Ste ? 6. 3d^ bcibe benjenigen, ivelcben S^r <§evT (L. 17. V.) ^ruber geliabt f^at. 7. 33elcbeit ^naben liebt ber 9}ater? 8. (Sv liebt benjenivjen, treld>en bie Siluttcr Icbt. 9. SSeldiev ^nabe liebt bie 9}Ziittei- ? 10. iTerjeuige, ttjeKteu ber ^atex Icbt. 11. SSeUteo -5}}ftTb fktt 31h- Sniber gefauft? 12. (Sr I;at ba^jeuige gefauft, toeldie5 !2ie gefiern gcBabt ()aben (L. 18. VIIL). 13. SBeldH^n 'Mann Icben Sie ? 14. Sd:^ icbe beuienigeii, befTen ^cfni Sie licbeix. 15. 2Beldie S3ii*er f;aben 3ie gefauft? 16. 3d> habe bieieutgen aefaiift, treldie mein Srubet in ben (L. 17, III.) >§dnbeu gebabt (-at 17. ^cjTen 53udier (}abeu (Sie ? 18. Sd^ Kibe bie -^iid^er berjenigen Jtmiben, beren ^^ute 2ie Kiben. 19. 2)ieienigeu, treLte (afterftaft ftnb, iiaben feinen ^'^ieben bee ^dev^euo. 20. 3!)erjenige, r^eld^er bie 9larbe an ber Stirne Kit, tft ber vilte 5(mtinann. 21. 2)a^jenige ift a,nt. voa6 (§. 65. 5) nu|tid^ ift. 22. ^iefe Silldnncr finb biefelben, beren ed^eunen, Btaik nnb 2BcIinbaufer Sie geftern gefeben baben. 23. S)er 2(rbeiter in bem QBeinberge bcejenigen, iretd^er ben Icgren ^ci)n gibt, finb trenige. 24. 2)er dinftebler jener ^aveUe ift ein §reunb berer (ni.), bie isiililcv nni) rerkffen finb. 25. 25er (III.) ift rodi<:, ber tugenb? $aft i]^. QuESTioi^s. 1. In compound sentences -connected with a relative, where does the verb stand ? 2. Is the verb, in English, when used with a relative in the nominative, placed as in German ] 3. When is it so placed ? 4 In com- pound sentences what is the position of the main verb ? 5 AVhat of the auxil- iary? 6. Examples? 7. "WTiat is the position of the verb when the second of the two connected clauses is introduced by a conjunction or an adverb ? B. To what does ^el•ifn^le always point ? 9 Of what compounded and how de- clined? 10. Like what is the genitive of ivfid)cr, as a relative? 11. What is b e r in the genitive plural, when substituted for rcvjf nt^c ? 12. To what does the use of tci'ieitiije often correspond ? 13, Examples? LESSON XXIII. fefttoit XXIIL @ e t n , like the corresponding English yerb, is very irre= gular in conjugation ; its different parts having been derived from words now obsolete. It is used as the auxihary to many active intransitive verbs, such as fcmmen, gc^en, tfec, where ^ ah tn cannot (like have for be in English) be substituted. Ex. : dv ift gercmmen; he is come. (S'r ift gegangcn ; he is gone (§. 71. S. 4). @ e in is employed as the auxiliary in its own conjugation; as, 5cft Un geti^efen ; I have been ; literally, I am been. For complete conjugation-. See §. 72. 11. 75 Conjugation of the perfect tense of f e i n , f o m m c n AND g e 1; e n. 5cf) tnn ijeivcfcn, I have been; nnr finb gctrefcn, we haA^e been; 5)u Inft gcircKU, thou hast been; iijv fnb gctrcfcn, you have been; (Bx i[t gcircfen, he has been; ftc )in\) gcirefcn, they have been. 3cf) Un getommen, I have trir finb gefommen, we have come ; come ; 5Du Biji gefcmmen, thou hast i^r feib gcfommert, you have come ; come ; (§x i\t gefcmmen, he has fte finb gefommen, they have come; come. Sd) Bin gegangen, I have gone; trir finb gegangen, we have gone; 5^11 bi]l: gegangen, thou hast i^r feib gegvingen, you have gone ; gone ; ^r ifi gegangen, he has gone; fie finb gegangen, they have gone; EXERC ISE 2t ^iiifqali 23. Serl'in', n. Berlin ; S31eiBen, to remain ; 33rn^en, to hrmg ; ^a, there; SDresben, 7i. Dresden ; gliegen, to fly ; gviebri-i>,m.Frederiek ; ©lauben, to believe ; Semanb, somebody, anybody ; S)ic 0Ser!e ®ctk6 finb maii'uigfal' tig ; feinc Siebe ifi uiienb'n* unb an alien £)rten ft^tcar. 5cb tear in ber (Btait, aU ber Sic^ nig ba trar. 5)er jlrcnprin^ iji scr'geftern ^ier getre'fen. Ser lit mit ber Sdbtrefter auf iaS Sanb gcgan'gen ? !l;iefel'6e, bie s^ov'gefiern mit ibr I)ierl;er' gefcm^en ift. @e^en Sie heute auf ba^ Sanb ? Jfiein, trcit i(b foe'Ben yen bent Saube geJom'meu fcin. Jldjig, m. cage; ^enneu, to knovv^ to be acquainted with ; ^cmmen, to come ; Saufeu, to run ; ?jtarft, m. market; 9tadui6t,/ news; ^reu^en, 7i. Prussia ; Otinbfl^eifdi, n. beef; ei'^nee, m. snow; ^cbreiben, to write ; S^-red^en, to speak ; Sjcgel, m. bird; ©etier, ?2. weather; SBien, 7i. Vienna. SBiiTen, to know ; ©cbuen, to reside, to' dwell. The works of God are manifold ; his love is infinite and in all places \-isible. I y/as in the city, as the king was there. The crown-prince was here, day before yesterday. \Vho has gone to the coimtry "v\dth your (the) sister ? The same, that came here (hither) T^ith her day before yesterday. Do you go to the country to-day ? No, for I have just come from the oountry. 76 1. Sfi biefer junc^e S)lann Iran!? 2. S'tein, a6er er ifi ycrgeftern !rant gctre]>n (L. 18. VllL). 3. SSer i]\ in bent ©arten 3Brc^ 93aters getrcfen? 4. 5ticma:ib ift in bcm ©virten gcirefen, abev ^cnianb ift in fcinem <§aufe getDefen. 5. 2Bie lanvje tleibt ber aite ^auer ncdi in bcr igtabt ? 6. 3cb fenne ben alten '-Bauern nidit iinb tvet^ nidit, n?ie tangc er bleibt. 7. 3it 3f)i" alter ^-rennb, ber ^anfmanu, nad^ 2Bien gegangen? 8. 3d^ gkube, cr ift nad) ^Berlin in fcinem 53niber gegangen. 9. S)cn trem baben @ie- l^eute biefe- 9hidn-id't gebcrt? 10. Sd'* babe einen meiner "Jreunbe ges fprcd"!en, n:»eldier i^on 2)re^i>en gefcmmen iftiuib mir einen 33rief 'ocn meinem SSater gebradit iyat. 11. 3di trcbne bei meincnr £)beim nnb gef)e mit ibm nadi tern fleinen 5)orfe. 12. ^oldii fd^cner 3}cgel ift au^ bem jtcifig ge; flcgcn, unb mein fleiney -^ferb ift nadi bem SBalbe getaufen. 13. SSas Bat 3br <§err 23ater Sbnen gefdnieben ? 14. (Sr ijat mir einen langen S3rief gefdirieben. 15. 3Bann ftnb @ie auf bem ilJIarfte gelrefen ? 16. Sd) bin ycrgeilern ^ibeiib ba getrefen, nnb I^cibe 9tinbfieifdi gefauft. 17. SBir i^aben tiffen Siadnnittag fd^oness 23etter gebabt. 18. ^l^tefe Sd^iifer iinb faul unb jene fiei^ig gen>efen. 19. 2)er @dMtee ift ycrgeftern febr tlef gemefen. 20. 3cb bin nie h'vinf geir>efen. 21. ^^riebrid^ ber ©rc^e war ein ^entg tton ^renf en. Question's. 1. Whence are the different parts of fein derived? 2. With what verbs is the use of fciii and "be" analogous ? 3. Example? 4. In con- nection with such verbs, can bciben be substituted for fein, as "have" often is for "be" in English ? 5. Is not „fetu", unhke "be" in English^ used as an auxiliary in its own conjugation 1 6. Example ? LESSON XXIY. Section XXIY. The word ^ a u ^ , without the article, when preceded by n a d) , answers to our "home\ after verbs of motion. Ex. : (S'l* ge'bt n a cf) ^ a ii f e ; he is going home. Qu ^aufe answers to our ''at home". Ex.: (Er ifi §u ^aufe; he is a i^ home. 33 e i (with), is commcnly used with verbs of rest, and sig- nifies (with a pronoun follouTiig) at one's house or place of business. Ex. : (Sr trc^nt Bei uw^; he lives at our house. 3c^ faufte es Bei meinem 33etter; I bought it at my cousin's. 3}i i t (with), is chiefly used with verbs of motion. Ex. : 3d) ge^e mit iBm ; I am going with him. 3 u Semanbett Qe^ett, signifies, frequently, to go to the house or residence of some one. Ex. : 3d} gef;e gu meinem O^eim ; I am going to my uncle's. ©oUen @ie ^ute 5lBeiib §u un5 11 fommen ? Will you come to our house this evening? (§. 112. 3. 7. 8. 13.) /. 5DcrfeIBe Qhe same) is compounded of 'q tx and f e I* 6 e r. It is inflected precisely like b e t i e n i g c. felBe. Plural. All senders. Declension of b e r *, b i c *, b a Sin^/ular. Masculine. 97 m. 5)erfel&e, ©en. 5)effe(6en, 5D a t. S^cnifciecu, 5( c c. iDenfelBciL Feminine. bicfelOe, berfelBen, berfelBett, biefelBe, Neuter. bnffclBe, beffelBen, bemfe[6en, ba[feI6e, btefcIBen; berfel&en ; benfe(Ben; biefel&en. //. 5D e r f e I B e is often used in p)loi-ce of a personal i^onoun to avoid rep)etiiion or ambiguity. Ex. : ^atjen ©le biefe(6e (fte) gcfefien? Have you seen (the same) her? ©el 9}Zann lc6t ben .^naben, treit betfelBe feme 53tu{ter eBrt ; the man praises the boy because the same (he) honors his mother, ^x UeBt fetnen 33ru* bcr, a6er uicf)t bie ^inber be[feI6en; he loves his brother, but not his children (he loves his brother, but not the children of the same). The genitive of the substantive pronoun ber is also thus used. Ex.: ^r (leBt feinen 93ruber, aBer beffen Jlinber m(i)t- he loves his brother, but not (that one's) his children. Exercise 24. % U f g a B e 24. -58Iei, n. lead; 1;k\>t\\, m. shop, store; SafciVenufii*, /. watch; ^raud>eu, to require, Safiin, lame ; Xruppen, troop ; to need ; 9ting, m. ring ; Uii'banibar, unthank- ©Itcrn, parents; (Eiticfeit, to send ; ful ; ^rleg, m. war; ^q, so, as; 2So ift ber ^rembc.. ber nor'aeftern bei itns »ar ? @r ift gcftent nad) ©ten gereift'. '^\X biefes -Siidi baffePbe, n?e(d^.e^ (Sie gefieni ^{hzxdi gele'fen fiviBeii ? 3* Hebe biefeit ^diiiler, treil er fo flei^ig ift. 2)'leinc ^veunbin au6 Shr.c'rifa irar geftern ^ier ; Baben ®ie biefcl'be fdion gefe'fjen ? 3di I)abe bes Sefjrerg ©u*, abcr nid>t bad SJtefTer befi"cl'6en. 2Beit, because. Where is the strancrer wlio was at our house day before yesterday? He went yesterdciy to Vienna. Is this hook the same that you read last evening ? I love tliis scholar, because he is so diligent. My friend from America was here yesterday ; have vou seen her yet? I have the teacher's book, but not his knife. 78 1. So ift baa Stei, toeWieg ©ic gefauft :^aBen? 2. ®g ifJ no* im Sabeit, itto ich e^ gefauft f)a6e. 3. .§aben (Sie blefetbe ^ebev, tt^cldie id) cjelja&t l)abe? 4. 2Bem tiierben @ie biefe gclbene 3:;afcl)emu)r fcbicfen? 5. 3fb trerbe fie bemfelbcn 3)lanne fcbirfGii, »elct)er fte mtr gefcbtcft f)at. 6. aBie Die( ®ctb ferciucbt bicfer alte @olbai? 7. (Sr braudht yiel, tveil er immcr ftant tft. 8. 3ft eg berfclbe, trclcher gefteru Ijia wax. 9. dlt'm, jener ift l}cute fe§i" laljnx. 10. SBem fdittfeu (2ie beu fdioneu Oling? 11. 3di fdncfe i{)n bem Sianne, n^eldicn @ic fo fcf)r gelcBt ba&ni. 12. -§a&en @le bie y^reimbe meine^ 23ruberg Qclcht '? 13. Sa, idi l^abe fie geiobt. 14. «§a&en (Sie biefelben nidit gcliebt ? 15. 3di l)abc eine Heine ©diroefier, tucldie idi tiebe ; lieben § a U § , without the article, correspond to in English? 2. To what does ju ^nufc answer? 3. Example? 4. With what words is bet commonly used? 5. With what verbs is m 1 1 chiefly- used? 6. W^hat does the phrase sn Scmaiiben gchcu sig:nify? 7. Of what is bev=, bie=, baffctbe compounded, and like what declined? 8. In place of what is bcifelbe often used, and to avoid what? 9. Example? 10. Is the genitive of the substantive pronoun hex also thus used ? 11. Example ? LESSON XXy. ^tction XXV. 5E) it t f e n expresses a possibility dependent upon the loill of another, or upon a law. Ex.: %6) barf biefe ^lutnen ttid^t ^fliicfen ) I cannot (I am not allowed, permitted to) pluck these flowers. 5Der SSflXter barf ntd}t fifdjen ; the peasant is not al- lowed (by law) to fish. 3d) barf biefe ^Tiid^te effen, aber id} fann fie nid)t erreid)en ; I can (have the right to) eat these fruits, but I cannot obtain (get at) them. (§. 83. 1. 2.) Conjugation of the present and imperfect of b ii r f e tt. Present. Singular. Plural 3d| barf, I am permitted ; irir biirfen, we are permitted ; 5Du barfft, thou art permitted ; i^r biirfet, you are permitted ; (Sr barf, he is permitted; fte bitrfen, they are permitted. 79 Irti'perfect. Singular. Plural ^df) biirfte, I was permitted; trir burften^we were permitted ; 5^u biirfte|l, thou wast per- ifir burftct, you were per- mitted; mitted; Gr biirfte, he was permitted; fie burftcn, they were permitted, /. ^ n n e n corresjjonds in the i^resent and imperfect to the English "can". Ex. : ^er fyifd^ fanit fdjirinimen ; the fish can swim. (Sr fonnte nidit lefen; he could not read. Jl n n e n also sometimes answers to "may\ Ex.: ^a^ fann fcin ; that may be, ^r fann frf)cn ba fetit ; he may be al- ready there. (Sc fann regnen; it may rain (§. 83. 1. 3). COXJUGATIOX OF THE PRESENT AXD IMPERFECT OF f tt tt e It. Present. Singular. Plural. 5(^ fann, I can : text finnm, we can ; ©u fannft, thou canst ; i^r fonnl, you can ; Sr tan, he can ; fie fonnen, they can. Imperfect. 3d) fcnnte, I could; irir fcnnten, we oould; ^u fonntefl, thou couldst ; i6r fcnntet, you could ; (Sr fcnntc, he could; fte fonnten, they could. //. -5)Z g c n expresses a pjossihility dependent on the ivill of the subject or the speaker. Ex. : Gr mag gel^en ; he can (may, is at liberty to) go. (Sie mogen ge^en ; you may (have per- mission to) go. 3cf) mag irn nidit iVKnt; I do not wish to see hira. ^a^ mag \&\ nidit gfaubcn : I do not hke to believe that (§• 83. 4). ^ ^ ///. 2)1 gen, like "may'\ denotes a concession on the part of the speaker. Ex. : (Sr mag dn treuer tyteunb fnn ; he may be a tme friend, ete mogcn e6 get^an ^aBen; they may have done it (§. 83. 4). 80 Conjugation of the present and imperfect of m o g c n. Present. Singular. Plural, 3d^ mag, I may or am a]- irir mcgen, we may or are lowed ; allowed ; 5Du magfi, thou mayst or art iBr mcget, you may or are al- allowed ; lowed ; ^r mag, he may or is al- fie mcgen, they may or are lowed ; allowed. Imperfect. 3d^ mod[)tc, I was allowed ; irir mcd)tert, we were allowed ; ^u mcd)tefi, thou wast allowed ; if?r mcditet, you were allowed ; Sr mod)te, he was allowed ; fie mc(^ten, they were allowed. IV. 9)Ziiffen in those tenses in which its English equi- valent "musf\ is defective, is to be rendered, by 'Ho be obliged, forced, compellecV, dc. Ex. : S'r mu^te e0 t^un ; he was ob- liged to do it. See complete conjugation (§. 83. 5). Conjugation of the present and imperfect of mufferu Present. Singular. Plural. 3d^ mu§, I must ; irlr muffen, we must ; 5)u muft, thou must ; U;r muft, you must ; ^r muf, he must; fie muffen, they must. Impeyfect. Sd) muf te, I was obliged ; trir mu§tcn, we were obliged ; £)U muftefl, thou wast obhged ; ibx mu^tet, you were obliged ; (Sr muf te, he was obliged ; fie mii§ten, they were obliged. V. (S c n e n indicates ~necessit?j, dependant upon the will of another person ; thus correspoadAng in signification with the se- cond and third persons of our ivord "shall". Ex. : 5Du fcOft fter* Ben; thou shalt die. dx fell e6 fbun; he shall do it. (Bk fcK* ten ^ter tleiSen ; you should (ought to) remain here, 2Benn et fommen foUte ; if he should come (§. 83. 6). 81 Conjugation of the present and imperfect of folleit Present. Singular. Plural 3d) foil, I shall ; wix fotlen, we sliall ; 5Du fell ft, thou shalt ; i^r fctlct, you shall ; ®r fell, he shall ; fie foKcn, they shall. Lnperfect. 3d^ foUte, I should ; rvix foUten, we should ; ^11 fcUtcft, thou shouldst ; i^^r foEtet, you should ; dx fcllte, he should; fie foUten, they should. VI. 21: 1 1 e n expresses a desire, but not aj^ositive intention ^ and is rendered by "to ivish'\ Ex. : 2BaS trill er? What does he wish ? 5[Ba§ irilt er t^un ? What does he wish to do ? The imperfect often answers to our word ^^ going', luhen ex- pressive of purpose. Ex, : %6) tt^cllte fagen ; I was going to say (§. 83. 8). Conjugation of the present and imperfect of it) o U' e tt WITH AN ACTIVE VERB. Present. Singidar. Plural. 5d) iriir Qdnn, I wish to go ; irir ti^cllen gefien, we wish to go; ^u itnlift ge^en, thou wishest t^r WoUd gc^en, you wish to go ; to go ; (Sr triU ge^eu, he wishes to go; fie iroEen ge£)en, they wish to go. Imperfect. 3d^ h?otIte geBen, I wished trlr iroUten gc:^en, we wished to go; to go; 5DuirolIteftge()cn,thouwishedst i§r ircdtet ge^)en, you vrished to go ; to go ; @r irotlte get;cn, he wished fie WoUUn ge^en, they wished to go ; to go. VII The perfect and pluperfect tenses of these verbs, as also, q/" I a f f e tt , to permit, to cause, is formed by means of the in- finitive, instead of the ptctrticiijle (§. 74. III.). Ex. : ®r '^ai nidit ge^en fonnen. He has not been able to go. SSir ^a6en nie fd}iepen iiir* We have never been allowed fett to shoot. 4* 82 Sc^ l^aBe e0 ntd)t t^un mo gen. I have not wished to do it. 6ic ^a'hm [d)rei6en miiffen. They have been obhged to write, ©ie l;at lefen foil en. She ought to have read. ©ie ^aBen nid)t arBelten U)oI* You have not been wilhng to len. work. 3I;r i)abt i^n nidfjt get;en laffen. You have not caused him to go (have not sent him). YIII. In the future, therefore, these verbs (except in the tense auxiharies) are, in form, hke the perfect. Compare the following : 34) n.icrbe reben biirfen. I shall be allowed to speak. 3cf) l^al;e reben burden. I have been allowed to speak. ^\i tturft tl;u fel)en fonnen. You will be able to see him. 5)u Ija^t i^n [e^en fonnen. Thou hast been able to see him. (Er n>trb fctelBen niogen. He will wish to remain. (Er i)at btelBen mogen. He has wished to remain. IX. The phrase, 2Qie Diel U^r iff e§? like the correspond- ing one in English, is abbreviated ; the full form being 5Bie ijiel auf ber U(;r ift e§ ? What o'clock (literally, hoiv much upon the clock) is it 1 When a part or the whole of the last quarter of an hour is named, it is designated, as in English, by its distance from the hour following. Ex. : ^g fe^^len fiinf, ac^t ober je'^n It lacks five, eight, or ten min- 9}?inuten Biy (or an) i\vU\. utes to twelve. (E0 fel)lt etn QSiertel 6i§ jtrolf. It lacks a quarter to twelve. When a half hour is named, it is not measured, as in English, from the preceding hour, but from the one that follows. This is, likewise, commonly the case with any part or the whole of the first quarter, although it may, as in English, be referred to the hour preceding. Ex. : (S=§ ift I)aI6''' imil It is i (towards 12) past 11. (E^ ift i^jM DJIinuten auf It is 10 minutes (towards 12) gtrolf. past 11. ^0 ift ein 35tertel auf l\vU\. It is \ (towards 12) past 11. * In case of {)i\[h, the preposition n ii f is commonly omitted. 83 (50 ijt je^n SPZinuten nad) eittS. It is ten minutes past one. (5g ift ein ijicrtel nad) ein0. It is a quarter past one. X. The prepositions Bei, nad), mit, ijon, §u, &c. (§. Ill) go- vern no case but the dative, while an, auf, in, unter, &c. (§, 115) govern the dative only when used with a verb of rest^ or of motion ivlthin specified limits, 5)cr DJhnu arbeitet l^aBe !ehte 3ett. 3. QSann fcnnen Sie gc()en? 4. 3d) trerbe bie nddifie SBcdie ge6en, irenn (Sie fc lange trarten fenncn. 5. 23iU 36v SeBrer mit SBnen anf bag gel'b cbcr nad) ber (Stabt gekn? 6. Gr tiMlT nicbt aufS ^elb, imb fann nid^t nad) ber (2tabt gef}en. 7. 22ag ircden biefe .^inber? 8. vgie trcden 5(e^fel unb J\ivfd^eii, aber fie fbunen feine faufen, isnn fie f)aben fein @elb. 9. QBag ircKen (2te, mcin^^err? meiu^rdulein ? meine 2)ame? 10. SSclfen Sie bie ©lite balmi, mir ein ®IaS (L. 62) SBafTer (L. 26) §u geben ? 11. fcnnen (£ie mir fagen, toie i?iel Uijx es ift ? 12. 3d) fann es (L. 36. VI.) 3()nen nid^t fac^en, id) ijaU feine llbx hd mix. 13. 2i}ag tcoilk ber jlanfmaun Sfnien i^crfaufen ? 14. 3di fonnte nid^lg Bei ibm finben, trag id) faufen rMik. 15. Sir trcrben mcrgen fd^Ied)tcg Setter 6aben. 16. Qs fann fein, ^a$ eo ncd) Beute regnen irirb. 17. fcnnen Sie bie bentfd^e ^ambf.in-ift lefen? 18. OJein, id) bcibe genug mit ber 5^rucffd)rift ^u tf)un. 19. ^ex ?leibifd)e (L. 17.) hmU feinen Qreunb nid)t (cben. 20. (Sure ©elelirte ift nid^t immer eine gute ^auefran. 21. ©cbulb ift eine fd)irere j^unft ; S}land-e (§ 53. 1.) fcnnen jk le^ren, aber nid)t fernen. 22. (Sin gutcr Stirrer nnif ©ebu(b fs"i£en. 23. 3eber gute (Sd)iiter ^rtrb anfmcrffam fein. Questions. 1. \\liat does biivfca express? 2. i^ouiifu? 3. iDaHV"-'? 4. 3}?iifff«^ 5. ©oilen? 6. SoIIcn ? 7. How are the perfect and pluperfect of these verbs conjugated] 8- What is the full form ofii^if t>u'l llbr] 9 Is the mode of expressing the various parts of an hour the same as in English ? 10, Examples] 11. Can you repeat the list of prepositions governing the dative only? 12, When do an, auf, &c. govern the dative ? 13. Examples ? 85 LESSON XX VI. |:ccti0n XXVI. When not preceded by an auxiliary, the infinitive generally takes the preposition gu, (See, however, § 146.) before it. Ex. : 5rf) ijabt Belt 5 u lefen ; I have time to read. (Sr gelit in tie ^djiik, mil ju rcrncn; he goes to school, in order to learn. @r gel;t auf ben ^laxtt, urn 5'leifd) ju faufen; he goes to market, in order to buy meat, lint, in order, is as in English often omit- ted. Ex. : (Sr Qzbt auf bm ^yiaxtt, ^idfdj ju faufeu; he goes to market to buy meat. I. t^onnen often signifies to know, to have learned a thing, and may be followed by a noun in the accusative. Ex. : ^OW nen (Sie^^eutfc^ ? Do you know (understand) German ? Fol- lowed by a verb fonnen, signifies either to be able (See L. 25. 1.), or to know how; as, ^anu er frf)rei6en ? Can he write? or, does he know how to write, has he learned to write ? II. SSiffcn, to know, is frequently placed before an infinitive with ju, and corresponds to our phrase "to know how". Ex. : (Er \vd^ ju \d)xdbtn ; he knows (how) to write. (Sr ireif ^u leBen; he knows (hovf) to hve. (S'r mi^ fid) ju feelfen; he knows (how) to help himself. III. ^ennen also signifies to know, but only in the sense of to be acquainted with. Ex. : ^ennen otIte, a&er id) !onnte nidit, idi muf te §u ^aufc bleikni unb lefen. 9. SBirb ber ©d)nciber mtr einen Stocf madien iyoUcn? 10. dr roirb 3I)ncn cinen madden ir>oIIen, aber er n)irb eg nidit t^un fonnen. 11. SBarum vrivb er eg nidit tl)un fonnen ? 12. dr ii3trb morgen auf "hOi^ Sanb geljen miiffen, feinen franfen S3rubcr ju fefien. 13. 3Bag iDiIi ber ^naBe mit fetuem S)^effer? 14. dr tyill 33rDb nnb ^"dfe fdmeiben. 15. ^§abcn gie Beit in ben ©tall jn ge^en ? 16. 3di babe 3ett, aber idi rotll nidit gel)en, id) n^ilt jn -^^aufe biciben. 17. 2Bag baben (Sie ^u .§anfe ^u tl)nn ? " 18. 3d) I)abe 93viefe ^u lefen nnb ju fdireiben. 19. S^tiiffen (gie fie I)cnte fcbretben ? 20. 3d) mup fte ()ente fdireiben, ineil id) morgen nad) <^eibelberg gelien tuill. 21. Wlan mu§ in ber 2CaI;I feiner grennbe oorftditig fein. 22. 2)icfer Jlnabe l)^\.i ^ente gar nid)tg gelernt. 23. %^^ot\\ ©ie and) nid)tg gelernt ? 24. 3d) ij^h^ z{xo(x^ gelernt, aber nid)t yiel. Exercise 21. ?htfgaBe 27. Slug, out, of, from ; ®aier, m. Bavarian ; ©erg, m. mountain ; S36l)me, m. Bohemian; Q3runnen, w.. well; 2)ienft'mdbdien, n. ser- vant-girl ; '^enfter, n. window; ^linte, /. gun ; .^augfnedit, m. house- servant ; i^effe, m. Hessian ; ^raf an, n. Cracow ; S^eu'tgfeit,/. news; SchadUet,/. box; (Scblop, n. castle, palace. Ungarn, Hungary ; 9Barfd)au, w. War- saw. 87 1. .3" ii^nn grficii (2ic ? 2. 3^^ gcf^e 511 nicincm ©ruber. 3. ^Tat trem QtMu biefcr .^liuibe "? 4. (5'r vjcfU mit feincm )i>ater :iad> fcer Stvibt. 5. ^'cii ivcm iKibcii v£ie ticfe Oaniij^Fcitcn cjeficrt? 6. 3di {)abe fic I'^cii meu iicm altcii Avcuut-c ijcbcvt. 7. il"'tit uhmu cjcbeii Sie nadi bem il^crfc ? 8. Sd^ iiebc iiidU uadi bem T'erfe, idi geljc mit mducm Q?ater luidi ter .^rc^en Stvibt. 9. 2Bann iieluMi Sic aiiei ber v^tvibr ju unfevn ^reunbcn ? 10. SlMr C{cl}cn iiidn ^u Csfu-cii Jrcuubcii, ivtr fcmmcu nun-gen U'iebernadi ^aufc. 11. :idi gcfie fknite ivebcr ^11 nioinem -Jrcunbe, iiedMiadi bem 2)crfe, ncd) au«5 bem ^aufe. 12. 5^er @rvif bat ein grcf es gd^Icp mit Heinen §enftern. 13. fl'er -^lu^ fcmmt cius? beii ©ergen. 14. -6cit ^bv 23viter etiva^ "ocii feiiicm timber gcdcrt? 15. Sci, biefer S'tann ift ani Uugaru unb fiat meinem iBatcr cine Sd^aducl yen metncm OKnm tjcln*ad»t. 16. ®cbt er nad^Sien? 17. OJcin, er gebt nad^ SBarfd^an unb i"»cn 3Barf*au nad^ .^Irafau. 18. fI^er ©aier, ber -^ofime unb ber Soc^c fcmmen au^ 5^eutfdv lanh. 19. 3)er .^dger mit feiner g-rinte fcmmt auy bem SBvilbe. 20. 5)er ^ned^t ijef)t nad> ber etabt. 21. 3d^ 6uBe rcn meinen 53riibern gefscrt, fte gingen ^n ifirem ^"vreunbe. 22. 2)a» iDienfimabdH'n fcmmt rem ©run- nen, unb ber -§aut'!iiedu ge§t ^um 5-Iei|\tcr. QiTESTioxs. 1- When does the infinitive genei-ally take the preposition ju before it? 2. Examples] 3. What does finuieii often signify "? 4. When followed by a verb v.'hat does fi^Uiicu signifH'. 5. When iniffen is prefixed to an infinitive with \v., to what English plirase does it correspond ] 6. What is stated [in.) of !omtei! ] 7. Examples? 8 What can you say of the inde- finite pronoun man ? LESSOX XXVII. I' c f t i n XXYII. Separable particles. The particles ah, an, auf, au§, bn, mit, nicber, iim, tcraus; &:c. (§. 89. 1. 90. 92) are often compounded with verbs, and, as they may stand apart from the verb, they are called sejMrable particles. I. In principal sentences (§ 160) the particle is separated from the verb and placed at the end. In subordinate sentences, howeyer. introduced by a relative pronoun or some other con- nective word, the particle and the verb remain always in union. Ex. : Sr irirft ten SBagen u m ; he overturns the wagon. 2^er SBai^en, ben er u m irirft ; the wagon which he overtm-ns. 3cl^ 1) 06 ten Stein auf, I lifted the stone up. S)er Steirt, treld^en \6> an f I^oB, the stone which 1 lifted up. ©er ^anxi ge()t Gld}er auyge^t; the man who goes out. (?r [(^rieb ben Srief a B, he copied the letter, 2^er 53rief, ben er a b fc^rieb ; the letter which he copied. 88 Sr hxa^ bte ^Blunten al, he broke off the flowers, ©te t|l traurtg, ti^eit ev bie 33Iumen a B 6ra(^ ; she is sorry, because he broke off the flowers. In the above words " overtuni and uplift,"' it will be seen, that the usage of the two languages is similar. In nearly all other English compounds, however, this resemblance to the German does not exist ; thus, for, ,,id) tann ben SBagen um^ tuerfen," we may say, I can overturn the wagon, or I can turn the wagon over. The sentence : @r larttt an^ge^en, how- ever, we can only translate by placing the particle at the end of the sentence ; as, he can go out. II. In the Infinitive mood, the particle is never separated from the verb, except by g it, which, when used, stands be- tween the tAvo. Ex. : (?r mil au^gef;en, he will go out. ^ann fie aBfcBreikn? can she copy? <5r ift Bereit benSBagen umju^ trerfen, he is ready to overturn the wagon, III. In the past participle, the augment, g e, comes between the particle and the radical : the particle of course being al- ways prefixed. Ex. : (Sr '()at ben S3ricf aB g e fc^rieBen, he has copied the letter. Sr 'ijCii ben SSagen xtm g e roorfen, he has overturned the wagon. 3(^ ^^^^ i'^tt Srief, tT?eId)en er aB g e * f($rieBen l^at ; I have the letter which he has copied. Exercise 28. QCnfgaBe 28. ?ib'i:anfen, (to) dis- charge ; SiB'gefclneben, separa- ted; ?[B'fe|en,to dispose of; -SiB'ftei^eu, to descend, dismount ; $ln'^ellieII, to indicate, declare ; Sln'vteifen, to praise, extol ; Sln'fpcrtten, to incite ; Slr/treiben, to urge, drive ; $lri'wenbcit, to apply, employ ; §In'^eigen, to point out, show; Shi'jieBcn, to attract ; 5(uf'f)el)cu, to revoke, give up ; 5luf ricbteii, to elevate, support ; 5(uf fdvieBcn, to defer, put off; 5fuf[pei(bern,to garner, store np ; 5{iif' fietgeit, to ascend, mount ; 9(ue'brcf6cn, to thrash; 2(u? "ii d'lt,/. prospect; S3ecr/biyung, /. termi- nation ; ® elc[;'nung, /. reward ; Si6el,/. Bible; ^It^, m. lightning ; ®cit, yet ; 2^ro6uug, /. threaten- ing; ©riirfen, to afflict, op- press ; (Site,/, haste, speed; din'fammeln, to col- lect ; (Sir/fitltc^en, to shut up, confine ; (^'remit', ra. hermit: d-vfiil'Ien, to fill : gelbfrud't, / fruit of the field ; (l)eBet^ n. prayer ; ©e&trg', n. chain of mountains ; @runfi>an,?72.verdigrisj 89 ?|3cft, /. plnguc, pestil- ence ; D'iad'.'iuclUicj, revenge- ful ; Otciclilidv rich ; Oicitcv, m. rider ; 9tcttcu,to save, rescue; (2anft, mild, soft ; (gcniie,/. sun; (gpvidnvcvt, n. adage ; ©teiijeti, to rise; Si'ib, m. South ; des- go Um'tringcn, to troy ; Uu'tergefien, to down, set ; Uii'tcrirbifdi, subterra- nean ; 33er(}ei'pung, /. prom- ise; Sffieg'fliegen, to fly away ; ©elt,/. world; Bcifig, m. green-finch. The conscience is the voice of the soul, the passions are the voice of the body ; to which of these (both) voices shall one listen ? And they w^ent after Jonathan as he drew (forth) toward David. That does not concern me. The sun rises (goes u.p) at five o'clock. The sun has already risen. Jttaiife,/. cell; jl'uiibe, m. customer; Sidit, n. light ; Siebc, /. love; 2)^vic|net', VI. lode- stone ; SDiaojiict'nabcl, /. mag- neiic-needle ; S'ieljv, more ; 5Jiit'ge{ien, to go with; 2)tiibt% tired, weary ; 5iorb, m. North; 2)v"ii5 ©eUMf ftii ift bie Stimme ber (geele; bie Sei'cenfdMftcii [tub bic Stlmmen bc^ Jlcvper^ ; \x>d^cn ibren ^ferben oA. 21. 3Bol(eu (£ie micb mitneljmen, irenn Sie nad^ 2)eutfdnanb reifen? 22. '^-^ glaube nidit, ba^ Sie mitge[)en rooUen. Questions. 1. What words are often used compounded vdth verbs? 2. Why are separable particles so called % 3. Examples 1 4. Where does the particle stand in dependent sentences? 5. Examples? 6. Does the particle always precede the verb in compound tenses V 7. The augment? 8. Where 90 is i\\ placed when used with the infinitive? 9. Where does the augment gc of the past participle stand] 10. In simple tenses, where does the particle stand and with what exception? 11. Can you give an example of each? 12. What verbs in English resemble the separable Gennan verbs ; and in what does this resemblance consist ? 13. Examples ? LESSON XXVIII. gtctxon XXVIII. 2Bo refers to the 2Jlace where anything may be supposed to exist or transpire. Ex. : 5Bo tft mein 9}?effer ? Where is my knife ? ^o laufen bie Jltnber? Where (in what place) are the children running? 5Da is used in answer to 'wo -, that is, to designate some par- ticular place ; as, 5Da ift e§ ; b.a laufen fie. <§in denotes direction, or motion from the speaker; as, SBaruttt laufen bie Jlinber ^in ? Why are the children running thither ? «§er is the opposite, in signification, to l^in; denoting motion or direction toward the speaker ; as, 3Barum laufen bie ^^inber l^er? Why are the children running hither ? ^ier signifies "in this place"; as, SSorum BIei6en bie Jlinber l^ier ? Why do the children remain here ? These words are frequently compounded, one with the other ; thus, from iro and ^in, we have the compound iro^in; from h?o and I;er, lT»oI;er; from ba and !^in, ba^inj from ba and T^er, ba§er ; from Bier and :^in, I;ierl)in ; and from ^iev and ^er, ^ier^et (sometimes contracted to !^ie^er). §. 103. 3. Examples of the use of W o , ba, f)in, f) ^X and ^ i e r com- p)Ounded. 2Bo reifen nnfere ^reunbe I; in ? Where do our friends travel cber, to ? or, 9Bc^in reifen unfere i^^^eunbe ? Whither do our friends travel? ©ie reifen bal) in, Voo i^re SSer== They travel thither, where their tranbten it^ot;nen. relatives reside. SSo !ommenbiefe3wg^^9^^^^? Where do these birds of pas- cber, sage come from? or, SSo^er fommen biefe Bug- Whence do these bkds of pas- ijogel ? sage come ? 91 ©ic fennncn bat)cr, \vo eS jef^t ju fait fi'ir [ic ift. Cner()cr fcmmcn bic taipfcrcu Un- garn. Exercise 29. 93acf'iliiBe, /. bnke- house ; 33alb, soon ; Sjil'DevijaUerie, /. pic- ture-gallery. ^rofd), 771. frog ; ©aiu^,/. goose; ^iu'ijeticn, to go away; ^ixk, m. shepherd ; 3v'i]eubwo, some- where ; Se^t, now ; JvOpf, m. head ; Sie^cu, to lie ; S)Ziilj,e,/. cap; S'iivgcnbg, no-where; Obaleid)', although, notwithstanding ; £)'|?ernt;au^, n. opera- house ; 9^'ttev, m. knight ; (gduiu'fVMeler, ?n. actor ; ©duMt, already ; (gdnraner, m. brother- in-law ; @d:)roimmeu, to swim ; They come from (there) where it is now too cold for them. Hither come the valiant Hun- garians. 5(ufga6c 29. @ci(er, m. rope-maker; (Sijj,en, to sit; (gpviugen, to spring, leap; (£te()en, to stand ; %mb, m. pond ; 2Berf ftatt/ /. work- shop ; 2Bc()in'? whither? what way ? SucFerbdcfer, m. con- fectioner. 23o ift bag grof te ©tiicf, an bent ^§cfe ctneg tt)raii'uifdien Jlmiii^g, ober lit ber '§iitte eiueg gufvie'bes nen 2ac;'Ict)uero ? 25o i3el)en @le I)tn ? an ben -§cf ober in bie -^i'ltte ? 5)er gelbtjcvr ft|t auf bem $[erbe unb reitet rutjig tangg ben siettjen bcr 'eclba'ten tiin nub i)ev. SJtorgen reitet er niit feinen Sd\iaren auf bag SdV(a*tfetb. 3n bcr ^^cffnung jxnben bie Un'gliicf' listen 3;:rcft. 2)er ^ater ift ba, aBer ber 53ruber ift in ber @tabt. 3d> getic :^eute baBin, irc^iu id) fcbcn geftern gclien ti'dlte. ^ter unter bem ©ciume bcr §reif)eit tr>cl[en mi ung ^utten baucn. ^ier(}er bringt (§. 121, 2) ntdit bie ^Qi&'^ nnb ber gewe| 'it l:)cio^)iu ge^t Hiifer alter S^a*bar ? (§. 89. I.) 14. @r ift je^tjit bem fleinen ©arten, aber er gef)t 6alb in b^n grcfen ©arten. 15. ^eme ^rau tft in biefeni •^aufe, aber fein Setter ge^t in jene 33ilberga{Cerie. 16. Sd) fte(}e an bem (am) genfter, mih fte fcmmen an^ (§. 4. 2) ^enfter. 17. ®er S^iitter iiU fdionauf feinemguten ^ferbe, imb ber Jlnedit fpringt and) \o eben anf fein gnteg ^ferb. 18. 2)er mam ]i%t am (§. 4. 2) STifdie, xtnb ba^ Sudi Itcgt anf bem Xifih^. 19. Scb f)aBe feinen -^^nt anf bem i^c^^fe. 20. SBo gel)t ber (Solbat ^in? 21. 2)ie ©clbaten gekn aufg (§. 4. 2) getb ; fie finb fdicn anf bem g-elbe. 22. 3)er §rofd) f^njtngt in ben gln^ unb fdmMmmt in bem %ln\[i, nnb bie @ang fdmjtmmt in bem ^ieidie. 23. 3cb 6a6e biefe SSorte irgenblDc getefen. 24. 3di fann meine Tlu^t nirgenbg ftnben, cb^ Qkii) fie irgenbn^o in biefem Bintmer fein mn^. Exercise 30. $lng'wanberer, m. em- igrant ; Sebien'te, w. servant; 33efannt'e, ot. acquain- tance ; Si.U}men, n. Bohemia ; Bremen, n. Bremen; ®ai)tn'geBen, to go thither , 5)ai)in'reifen, to travel thither ; !r)ai;in'fdii(fen, to send thither ; 2)a^in jief)en, ceed, thither ; din'wanberer, m. im- migrant ; ©ngtifdi, English ; (Snrc'pa, n. Europe ; ^elb^err, m. comman- der-in-chief; i5ran^D''ftfdi, French ; ?5rembe, m. stranger ; •^atore, n. Havre ; ^ierfier'fommen, to come hither ; 5(ufgaBe 30. to pro- Statte'ner, m. Italian : Stalie'nifcb, Italian (adj.) ; 3lte, never ; (Spa'nien, n. Spain ; @panifdi, Spanish ; Jl'tietl, ??z. part ; 35cne'big, n. Venice ; 2Ste Dtcl? hovv^ much? how many ? 22of)l, well. 1. 2)ie Solbaten ftnb ^ter, unb ber ^etbf^err fcmmt audi Herder. 2. 3)er ^einb ift fdion ba, unb unfere ta^fern S3riiber miiffen hat/va jieben. 3. SBann gefien @te nadi (Spanicn ? 4. 3d) iinll gar (L. 15. III.) nidit bai)in gel)en, aber mein 93ater mil in nd*fter 3Bodie bai)tn retfen. 5. (2inb ■Sie fdion ha getrefen ? 6. ytein, aber einer meiner S3efannten trar ba unb trttt nie n^ieber bai)in gel^en. 7. 3Str getjen anf ben 33erg, rooden @ie mit img gei)en ? 8. SStK ber 9^nffe feinen ^Bebienten in bie @tabt fdiicfen ? 9. @r ^at itju fdion ba^tn gefdncft. 10. Serben hie XxnVX^en I)teri)er fern? men? 11. Sie trevben nid)t l)ier§er fommen. 12. 3So fcmmen biefe y^i-emben f)er ? 13. ©le finb ©imranberer unb fommen aut^ 53oi}men. 14. Sft btefeg @d]iff I'oii Bremen ober -^a^^xe ? 15. Q-3 ift treber »on 53re; men, ncd^ mm >6ayre, cs ift yon 23enebtg. 16. Oefien biefe frau^^cfifdien dintranberer na* STiiltraufee ? 17. dm Sbeit yen tbnen gel)t babin, bie anbern'bteiben in 9teroi9)orf. 18. 3)te dimranberer in Slmerica finb Ciu^? tyanberer au5 ©urcv^a unb auS anbern 3:'t)eileri ber altcn ffielt. 19. SBann woUen @ie anf bag ^elb get;en ? 20. 5di bin f*cn auf bem j^^elbe gewefen, unb fann nidit irieber bai)\n geben, aber id) mnf je^t balb in t:^n ©arten ge^en, benn mein Set)rer ift ba unb wiit midi feinen. 21. aSarnm trill bicfer Staliener nid)t engltfd) fpre^en ? 22, (Sv n^cate e^ trcM (L. 44. IV.) 93 fprcitcn, abcv er faint eg ncdi niitt; or fpriitt mir italienifdi iiiib fpanifd), 23. 5lL«ic i-icl epiMdicu foHiicii eie fprcdicii ? 24. 2>d) fprcd^e nur jtt>el, aber idi ivill iicdi anbcvc lenicn. QuESTiO-VS 1. What does luo refer to ? 2. Examples] 3. 1:a ? 4. Exam- ples ? 5. What does Init denote ? 6. .^cr? 7. Examples? 8. What does t)ter signify ? 9. Are these words frequently compounded ] 10 Can you give an example of the use of ii^obin ? 11. Of t-abiu ? 12. Of ivoherl 13. Of babcr? 14. Ofbabtn? 15. Of l)tevbtn and f)iei{)cr ? 16. To what is f)icv^et sometimes contracted ? LESSON XXIX. ^tction XXIX. 5So, ba, Inn, etc. , besides being compounded one with an- other (L. XXVIIl.) are also united with prepositions ; thus producing a separate class of adverbs. Ex, : SBcbon f;pre(f)en Bin auf bent ^aiife ; !cmmen Ste fierauf ! I am on the house; come up! 3d) fantt nirfjt ^iitauf ge^en; fcmmen Sie ^txabl I can not go up; you come do^vn ! «§iua5, ^inauf, ]6inau§, ^erat\ (fcc, when used with nouns, are translated by prepositions ; and the adverb, unlike its English equivalent, is placed after the noun. Ex. : 3d) Qf^e ben ^^erg 1) i n a u f ; I go ujj the mountain, .j^ommen 6ie ben 93erg ^ e r^ a b ; come down the mountain. I. The verb fommen, frequently answers to our "(/ef\ Ex, : S5}ie ift er in biefeu ©arten g c f o nt m e n ? How did he "(^ef' into this garden? (gr treif md)t trie er :^eraus ! o m m e n fcU; he does not know how to ''c/et" out. 3d) f o m m e mit biefem SDfanne fe^r gut fort ; I "^e^" along with this man very well. Exercise 31. QIufgaBe 31. (Saju'fe,/. cabin; ©erdiifd-/, ?i. roaring ; ^^eraujJ'fmtjen, to (Safer ne,/. barrack ; <§afe, m. hare; spring out; 2)am)?fBcct, n. steam- ^eraB'ftiirjen, to pre- ^ereivi'icmmen, to boat ; cipitate ; come in ; J^ieB, m. thief; ^^erailf'fcmtiten, to ^erein'ftuvmen, to (Si'fen'6ciBn,/.rail-road; come up ; rush in ; (5r f dire d'en, to terrify; ^eraue'fcmnten, to i^erii'bcrfa^ren,toeome ^elfen, m. rock ; come out ; over (in a veliicle) ; 04 t^etii^Berfcmmen, to come over ; ^^etuii'teietlen, to has- ten down ; <^erun'terfcmmen, to come clown ; «.§tnab'i3eben, to go down ; ^era6'ftii-uigeit, to leap dovv'n : •§inauf'Iaufcn, to run up: ■^'maus'o^zbm, to go out ; •^maus'fcmmen, to come out ; •§hieiu'ge^en, to go in ; to to ^tnii'6erfaf)ren, to pass over ; -§inu'6erfcmmen, go over : ^iiiii'&erfdiaueu, look over ; ^iuitn'terc5e(;eit, to go down ; &iiQ,d, m. hill, hillock ; ^ceu^iDeg, m. cross- way : Sauf, 771. course, cur- rent ; -?^vidna\iclie,/. watch ; 9teb, n. roe ; Scbtp'in-iicfe,/. bridge of boiits : •Sd^ioeijet, m. Swiss j (Strape,/. street; Strcm, m. stream; Stuube,/, hour; 2;t;iire,/. door ; S^reppe,/. stair; 2:reten, to tread, step ; Ueber, over, beyond ; 2^a'terlaiib, n. native- country ; 3Bd6reub, during ; agenn, if; 2i}!eber, again ; 3an'fcbenbccf, n. deck, (between-deck). Sk fcku mna6' in bai trilbe 3)Zesi'. 2)a ^ief t iineiib'Iidier Dtegeii fierciB'. 5)te^ua&en eilten ben-53er9 fjmauf, 2)er -53ergmann fietgt f^craiif an$ ber Xkfz beg Sdiadnco. 5)}etnig gtng Mnaiia^ uiib ti^einte bit'; ferlid^. Uttb fitnem' mit bebdd''tivjem Sd^ritt etn Scrae tritt. @r n^trft ft-di in bie brcin'fenbe Slutf). ©er -Sfitditer rief ben -Saner herein'. 5Da^ Ceben bee SJlenfd^en fdiiranit, trie ein D^ad'en, mnii'ber nnb ber? You look down into the wild sea. There pours dov/n interminable rain. The boys hastened up the moun- tain. The miner comes up out of the depth of the shaft. Peter went out and wept bit- terly. And thither (therem) with con. siderate step a lion strides. He throws himself into the roar- ing flood. The judge called the peasiint in. The life of man like the skiff, fluc- tuates hither and thither. 5)er Sadi'bccfer fiernn'ter. ]id ycm <§auft The tiler house. down from the 1. >§vT.ben 3ie mciiten ^reunb gefeben ? gegangen. 3. SBcKen (2te in bie QajKt. in fa.^ Si'ii'd^^'iL d 'nnunt^r - '^-'■ bei b r U I a iir^ t ' \U ^ ah, i in'T u r in f * ^ n' 3 Z ber <33ar b.. ^jn.itl i\ zuf.. - 9 ^ C :^eiau5, al6 b:i C)Cm':> m bie 3:abtbcic: 2 "svi, cr ift bie otraBe ^unab^ 1 M en? 4. OZfin, id) gebe Sie liente niit (§. 112. 7) bem irib biefen Wtumh werbe i* mit t ber bevubet fcmmen. 7. <5in; .^ ving \^^n Serg ()inab, iydbrenb i-n n finr^ten auv ber Saferne '(I ^lli^ bie -9>adu;--\id)e in bCi^ >6auo tiat, eilte ber eifaiotf.ne X •. . * ^i.ppe I^emnter. 11. 3c^ fann m bt aa5 ben jlier^n^eg.n ii.fcv (^iitAio binansfcmmen. 12. Siffen (gte nidit, tr^te biefer 35cgel tiereingefcmmen ill? 13. 3a, aber tr irei^ tiii^t, tec er wvihzv ^inau^fomrnen fann, 14. 2)er junge !Sd^a>ei§er fdiaute 95 ftimUer nad) ben Bfauen ©crgeii fciiie^ Q3atcrtanbej?. 15. ^ommeit er <6iinger ift ber 6c|ie ^cd). 5)ie 3:anne ift ber ^ci)]U S3aum. ^ei^f)eit ift met}r ^n fdid|cu, aU ^cid)t^um — aber am meiften !i;ugenb unb g-rommigfeit. ©tamin, 7n. trunk ; ©teru, 771. star ; Umgang, 7n. inter- course ; Unrein, impure ; Uu'amrbig, unworthy ; 93erdr/berung, /. change, alteration ; 33erfianb', m. under- standing; 23irqt{', m. Virgil ; 28of)tt(;at,/. benefit; SSiirbig, worthy ; Sinn, n. tin. to-day, The weather is colder than yesterday. The noblest man is not always the most fortunate and the richest not always the \visest. The wisest (man) is generally the most modest, the stupidest the most obstrusive. A good commander-in-chief must be more prudent than valiant. This cloth is better than that. (The) hunger is the best cook. The pine is the highest tree. Wisdom is more to be prized than riches, but virtue and devoutness the most. 1. T)kfex Sdgcr Ijat ehien fd)onen <§unb, meincr tfi fdioner, nnb ber eurige ijt ber fdionfte i^cn alien. 2. 5)te @rbe ift tteiner, alg bie Sonne, unb bie Sterne finb entfernter, aU ber SJlonb. 3. 93irgi( ift ein angenel)- merer vid)t. 10. ':X)k\ce 2}idbd)eu plciubert mel;r, alis ]u (g 134. 2.) arbeltet. 11. 3)le ^uft in ben Stdbten ift unreiner, a(^ bic Santluft. 12. grcinfreid) ift nidit fo fruditbar, ix)ie 5)eutfdilanb. 13. 2)iefei- ^iingliug ()at nidit fo oiel SSerftaub, toie fein *^ ruber, a&er er ijat and) nidit fo i^icl (S-itelfeit. 14. 2)ie Dtofc ift eine ber fd)oufteu Slu; men in ber 2BeU. 15. 5)iejenigen finb geix^oljulid) am vcenigften ftclj, beven ©cift am gcbi(beteften ift. 16. £)ie bitten bcrjenigen ftnb geii?c§u; lid) einflupreid) auf uue, mit benen roix Umgang f)aben. 17. S)ie ^oi)U tljakn, beren iuir iintrbig ftnb, ftnb iing angenef)mcr, aU beren ii>ir unttjiir^ big ftnb. 18. 5)ev]enige ift ber reid)fte, beffen tJlinber tugenbf)aft ftnb. 19. 3)er <§err I;at feiuen ©efaUen an benjenigen SD'ienfdien, hk feine Siebc ju il)ren 53riibern fmben. 20. 3)er Sl^felbaum i)at einen bicfen ©tamm, bie Q3udie tiat einen bitferu @tamm, luii bie @idie t)at ben bicfften @tamm. 21. 3)er ©tamm be^ 5(^?fcl&aum^ ift birf, ber ©tamm ber ^udie ijl bicfer, iinb ber @tamm ber (Sidie i^t am bicfften. 22. 3e me{)r er Ijat, beftc me()r tQiii er. Questions. 1. How are adjectives, in German, compared? 2. When the positive ends in el, en, or cv, what letter is omitted in the comparative? 3. Examples ? 4. In the comparison of adjectives, how are they commonly contracted ? 5. V/hat is stated in the note ? 6. Are adjectives, in the comparative and superlative degree, subject to the same inflections, as when in the positive ? 7. How are superlatives of the Old Declension used ? 8. Is the simple form of the superlative often used ? 9. And why ? 10. What is often used instead of the regular form? 11. How is this form, '§> 38. 1, ex- plained ? 12. Is the adverb nic!)r used in the comparison of adjectives ? 13. May adjectives be employed as adverbs, and if so, how ? 14. Are participles, when used as adjectives, compared ? 1 5. What can you say of it-it or jes befto? Examples] LESSON XXXIL §tct\on XXXII. Inseparable particles. Besides the separable particles, (L. 27.) there is another class (be, em^p, ent, er, mi5,Der, &c. § 94.) that, iinhke the former, are never used apart from the radical words to which they are prefixed, and hence are called inseparable particles ; thus, by the union of these particles Be, em:p, ettt, er, &c., with the radicals fet;len, &c., we have the compounds, fcefeC;ten, em^fin* ben, entBet)ren, er^olen, nuffaKen, ijer^oren, jermaljten, &c., cor- respondent in formation, to the English compounds, be-tray, de-rive, dis-may, mis-take, &c. With few exceptions, (as Be* 101 geijiem, Bcfccren,) however, German, unlike most English radicals^ may be used as well alone, as in combination with prefixes ; as, ftoren, to distm-b ; jerftorcn, to demolish, &c. Many particles in German, which are used to modify radical verbs, have their exact equivalents in English. Ex. : iTeutcn, to interpret; mi^'tcuten, to misinterpret ; [anftigcn, to calm; Be- fanftigcn, to becalm, (fee. (§ 97. 1. 2., &c.) In German, as in English, the inseparable particles never take the primary accent. I. 33 c r , which is often rendered by the English, " ago,'^ imlike the latter, always 'precedes the word of time to which it refers. Ex.: ©r irar i^ c r jtiici (5tunben f}ier ; he was here two hours ago, (literally, he was here before two hours). S e i t (since), when used with words denotmg time, often answers to ''for " or " during''. Ex. : @r ift feit eirtet QBccfje franr; he (is L. 18. VI.) has been sick for a week. 3d) f)a6e i'^n feit einem ganjen 3al)re rad)t gefe^en ; I have not seen him daring a whole year, (a whole year since). Exercise 34. 5(ufga6e 34. SXnt'trcrten, to answer ; Seaut'u-'crten, to reply ; rejoin. Sef'iiret'&en, to de- scribe ; ffietra'ojfit, to behave; @r!iu'l>en, to invent ; (Erliat'teu, to receive ; ©ifen, to eat : ©etpit'ter, n. tempest, thunder and hofht- ^^atteu, to hold ; DIeft, n. nest ; ^aar, n. pair ; 9teif?,/. journey; 9leiferi, to travel; ©dinjat&e,/. swallow; (Eicb, himself, &c. (L. 18. II.). Sttefet, m. hoot; igreren, to disturb, in- terrupt ; Xrav^e-u, to carry ; 2;rln!en, to drink ; 23erfpre'i.teiv to prom- ise; 3Serfic/Iien, to under- stand ; Seitiuuj,/. news-paper, gazette ; Berftc'ren, to destroy, demolish. 2)iefen fitcncn ^ana^-ienticgel f^vit mir meiu SSater t^eute ?0^crv3cii 2)te ^reiiabe h:[.U\\ jTcb in ben @ar; ten be^c'lvn. 2)ie feinblidie 2lrmee ^Cii \ii> ercjc'; ben. 2)er SeBrer r}Cit bent ^na&en yerge^- ben. My father gave me this beautiful canary-bird this morning. The friends have betaken them- selves to the garden. The hostile army has surrendered (itself). The teacher has pardoned the boy. 102 1. aSiU ^^x ^at has 5)ienftmdbd)en ba<^ W^uer fd)en angemad)t? 21. OZein, fie 'ijat e^ nod) nid)t angemad)t. 103 Exercise 36. QI u f g a B e 36. ^Wf)c\cn, to take away; •Oiu'fdnrif cu, to send to ; aBie'£)Cvne^mcn, to take ?lb'riifen, to depart ; 3cba!ln^ m. John ; again ; ?U"'|\1n-oibcit, to copy ; £uft,/. desire, wish ; 2Bil^elm, m. William ; (Slv-ivicv'iiiittnTiclH, ?/?. S'iit'bvhii]Cii, to bring Suviirf', back ; instruction on tlie or take with ; Suvi'tcf' foinmen, to piano ; 3)ti('i;5ct)eu, to go with ; come back ; ©artiicr, m. gardener ; @cit, since ; Suriicf 'j"ct)i(fcn, to send -S>cvitni', about, round ; (Spcijicv'ijcmg, m. walk ; back. 1. 2Bo fchicfcn ©ic 3ftven 33ebiciiten fjin? 2. (§v ift franker faittt nivj^enb*^ (^hiijetjcn. 3. ©cbreibcu (gie eineu 33rtef ab ? 4. Set) t}abe i^ti fdiou abv'(cfdn-iclHnL 5. ©lauBen @ie, bap ber 93ucbbhiber mir mcine 53iuiHn' jiivi'trffdMfft ? 6. -i^at 3()rc ©dmicftev bte S3tiimeu evljaUen, ble id) iin c^daujt Ijabe ? 7. 5)cr ©drtncv fommt mctiieu iinb luivb fie mitbvingen (L. 27. IL). 8. aBaim fdiifteu <£te ha6 33iut juriitf ? 9. 3* f)a&e es fdion inn- brci ^ageii ^iu'iicfi]cfdntft. 10. t e er ; she thinks pre- cisely as he (thinks), she thinks 2:>reciseJ7/ like him. VI. 9^cd), besides its signification as a disjunctive, (L. 12) is variously rendered by " still, some or 7/et more, another, besides,-' d'c. Ex. : (Sr fd)Iaft nod) ) he sleeps still. ®icB bcm ,^inbe ncd^ 33reb ; give the child some more bread. 5[Samt I;at etrittpd) citt ^ferb gcfauft ? when did he buy another horse ? (Slnen 5(:pfe( f;at baS ,^inb gcgeffen, aBcr e§ '^^i nc^ einen ; the child has eaten one apple, but it has one besides (or another). VII. S}?e^r, connected with a negative word, is used like its equivalent '' more.'^ Ex.: 3d) I)aBe fetii§ mef)r ; I have no more. 3d) ^aBe nid)t biel mc^r ; I have not much more. Used with a noun the adverb follows, wliile in English, it precedes 105 the noun. Ex. : 3rf; f)ah( !cm 33rob nu^r ; I have no more bread. YIII. Qtnber, with a noun denoting time, may be employed to designate as well a future as a past period ; but never, like the word " other,'' as in the phrase " the other day," to denote indefinite past time. Ex.: ^en anbern ^aq nad^ feiner 'JMiuift l^erlor er [einen 33atcr ; the " nexf' day after his arrival, he lost his father. 3}Jorgcn gel;e id) ncid) diem, xinb ben anberii 5:ag nad) 9iea:pet; to-morrow I go to Rome, and the " next" day to Naples. As in the above examples, auber, when similarly employed, is rendered by ^^ next." IX. The neuter anbereS, preceded by „eth? a Q/' (in conver- sation usually contracted to tva^) is rendered by the phrase " another thing" Ex. : ®aS ift etiraS 5(:ibereg, or bag ift ii^ag 5(nberey ; that is " another thing." X. The adverb a n b e r S is readily distinguished by its form, and is rendered by " otherivise, differently" d'c. Ex. : Qx fpridjt anber0 aU cr benft^ he speaks otherwise tlian he thinks. Exercise 37. Qlu fgaBe 37. Sil)'fc*3eln, to set sail ; ^^anbeln, to act, deal ; (Staat, m. state ; ?{nbev, other (VIII.) ; ?(ii^bereS, (See IX.) ; Slnbevs?, othermse, dif- ferently ; Siiie'f'fei&cn, to remain out ; ©eibe/both; S3cibGg, (See I.) ; -SelV*eu, to visit; JDvi'tleibcn, to remain (there) ; 5)anipffcbiff, n. steam- ship ; SrtS'ciefanimt, alto- gether ; Stren, to err : ^Df)Ie,/. coal'; Sieferu, to furnish ; S)lit^iei)men, to take with ; SJlittel, n. means ; 2}?itfter, n. pattern ; ^en!ifi)l5?a'ntcn, n. Pennsylvania ; ^flautne,/. plum; ikz&\i, n. right ; (S'&enfo, just as (IV.) ; S^cbeit, to speak, talk ; (S'i'nh]c, some, several ; Sliiiu-cu, to move, af- (E-n'f:^,/. Elisa; feet; (irian'ben, to allow; (gad^c,/. thing, affair ; ^rcu'fcentfirane,/. tears @or.'/merrocf, w. sum- ofjoy; mer-coat; ®cleert',vacant,empty; (Spa^ie'reuge^en, to ®ufta», ni. Gustavus; take a walk; 5* ^(later, m. thaler (a German coin) ; !J!renuen, to separate ; Uu'aiu-icbaut unculti- vated ; IXiimcy'ltcii, impossi- Me; Unvedit, n. wrong; SSevftdu'bii;, intelli- gent ; SBaare,/. ware, goods; 2Be9'uel}mcn, to take away ; " aBiii'tevrcct m. winter- coat ; SDcfclfeil, cheap ; Su'fu^aucr, 77Z. specta- tor ; Slt'ecf, m. aim, pose. pur- 106 @r I;at jtoei (So^ne, abet beibc jinb taiiftftumm. £)er dlicje fa^te tie ^eute mit bei- ben -^dnben. .^at biefer ^aufmann etn5]3ferb ctn einen SGagen ? 2)ie 2Ba^rI}eit unb bie Otofe ftnb fe^r fct)on, obex belbe ^aben JDor^ neu. ©in auf rtditiger 2)Zann seraB'fc^eut eine Siige. S^apereou :^atte ^t6)t, baf er ben tufii'fdiea jlalfev jiidi'tigeu wclltc, a6er er fjatte Unrecbt, ba^ er ben Selb^ug bi^ in ben -^erbft sev- fdicb'. gaft ieber SJJenfd) Ijai e'ben fo ijiet ilnmmer aU grcube; .H^cffutf) niar ganj fo ta^'>fer unb tia'^ tertanbgliebenb, trie 2Baff)ing; ton, aber nidit fo gliicflid). He has two sons, bnt both are deaf and dumb. The giant seized the club with both hands. Has this merchant a horse or a wagon ? He has both. The truth and the rose are very beautiful, but both have thorns. An upright man abhors a lie. Napoleon was right, that he wished to chastise the Russian Emperor ; but he was wrong that he deferred the campaign till late in autumn. Nearly every human being has quite as much sorrow as joy. Kossuth was just as valiant and patriotric as Washington, but not so fortunate. 1. SBoUen ©ie ein SO'lujler liQn btefem cber jenem Xudie l^aBen ? 2. 3d) iriU feineg i)on beiben 'ijabm. 3. ■^at ber SeL)rcr ha^ Sudi cber ha^ papier niegqcnommeu ? 4. (St f)at ^^ciheS ireggencmmen. 5. 2Btr geben iljm einen Xfjaler fiir jeben ber beiben 9}Mnncr. 6. Xrinfen ©ie SBein cber S3ier ? 7, 3d) trinfe ineber 2Dein nod) Q3icr (or idi trinfe feineg ticn beibeu). 8. ^aben ©te ncd) @elb? 3d) f)abe nid)t riel mef)r. 9. iefeg <^Cii\^ ift ju ijermiet^en; this house is to let. @inb biefe Qle^^fel gueffen? are these apples to eat? 2)iefe§ Staffer ift §u trinfen; this water is to drink. ^Dtefer ,^naBe ijl gii tabein ] this boy is to blame. II. i^eif en, signifies, to name, to call; also sometimes to command. In the sense of naming or calling, it is most generally used in a joassm signification. Ex.: SSie i^eifen (Sie? How are you called ? or, what is your name ? 3d) {;eif c t^Vi'^ bol^p^ ] my name is Ralph. Exercise 38, Q( U f g a c 38. Slu6'f)3ra&e,/ pronun- SraunfAlrctg, n. (5'in;^ig, single, only ; elation ; Brunswick ; ©rflim'men, to climb ; SSei'tragen, to contri- 2)ur*, through, by (Sriev'nen, to learn; but^; means of; 108 ©etuin'nen, to win, gain ; ©lucffe'Iigfeit, /. feli- city; «§el§en, to name (See II.); •§er'jte((en, to restore, re-establish ; .^Immcl, m. (the) heavens, sky ; 3a!ob, m. James; 3C'bej!c, or j|e;jc, the- the (L. 31. VI.); ^iinftitterf, n. work of art ; 9Jiii§e,/. pains, toil ; £)t)ne, without ; (2diueU, quick, rapid- ly; Uebung, /. practice, use; Ueberre'ben, to per- suade; Ue'bcrfdmf), m. over- shoe; llebevjeu'gen, to con- vince ; S^ermtt'tfjen, to let ; 3jerjei't}en, to pardon, excuse ; SScUfcm'men, perfect ; SSert^yoU, valuable. ©In Bofeg ©eirif fen i|i nid)t gu Be; rn'I)igen. ©In ®etef)i-^ter i|l leiciiter ju ii6er; jeu'gen, al^ ein Summer. 2Bet0f)elt Ift nidit wle eine 2Saare ju faufcn. 5)ie Dicfe I^el^t bie ^o'nigin fcer ©lumen. 2)er Sbwc fielpt ber ^cnlg bet S;§lere. An e\il conscience is not to be quieted. A learned man is easier to con- vince, than a stupid (one). Wisdom is not to be bought like wares. The rose is called the queen of flowers The lion is called the king of the beasts. ]. 2)iefe gvcfen fdicnen >§dufer finb aUe ju ttermietfien. 2. SviS eIne ^au^ ift i\x yevmietf)en, bvi^ anbere ju »er!aufen. 3. ©s ij^ nidit ju glau? ben, 'i^\!i'^ er ung serlaffen h.at 4. 2)lefc6 ®ud> Ift bet <§errn S^efiermann in ©raunfdnreig jn ^aben. 5. Jlein ein^iger crt au^jnfpred^en V 7. 5)ie Shipfpracbe frember SScrter ift nnr burdi Uebung ju erternen. 8. 5Co fiub bie U]itn (Sttefel, •®duif)e unb Uebevfdnif)e ^u fiubeu ? 9. 2)ie beften, ble idi gefc^en l)^hlii§e ju geirinnen. 12. S3cUfcmmene ©lacffeltgfeit ift In blefer '^di ntd^t ju ftnben. 13. Slilefer f)cf)e <5elfcn ift nutt §u erfltmmen. 14. 3}iefed alte ^^aug ift nicbt mei)r bcr^uflelien. 15. Snr* biefen SS>alb ift nid^t^n fcmmen. 16. (S"r ift ireber ju iibcrjcuaen, ncdi jn iiberreben. 17. (Sein S3etragen Ift gcir nidit ju rerjeiben. 18. (Sie fpred'en fo fd)ne([, baf Sie gar nid't ^u i^erfteben finb. 19. SBie bdtlt S[)Vgrennb? 20. @r l^.clpt 3afcb. 21. 2Die bei^t bag auf Seutfdr? 22. (5^ l)eipt eine Q3rt((e. 23. Gin ^unftwerf ift befto fdicuer, je »cl(; fommener eg ift, h\L^ ^-eipt, je met)r S^eile ed f)at unb |e mel;i* alie biefe %i)t[{t jnm 3»e(fe beitragen. Questions. Is the use of verbs active in form, but passive in signification common in German 1 2. Is tr;e infinitive more frequently used in this man- ner ? 3. Can you use English verbs to a gj-eat extent in the same way] 4. What examples can you repeat in English to illustrate the use of vtncn in the phrase : "Tteier 3}taun ift ju ebrcii ? 5 How is this phrase rendered in English] 6. Does not the use of the verbs, in the phrase, " the boy is to hlame, Hx ^mht ift ju tafcelu ;" correspond ] 7. How do you define beif en 1 109 8. When defined by to name, to call, ho^ is it rendered in English? 9. Examples ? 10. To what does bag IjntJt often correspond ? 11. Examples? LESSON XXXY. ^tction XXXV. SBerbeu is used as an auxiliary in forming the future of all German verbs ; and, in this use, is translated by our auxiliary, " shall " or " will " (§ 70. 6.). I. As an independent verb irerben signifies," to become, to grow, to get," &c. Ex. : (Sr iinrb ait; he is groiving old. 3)a^ SSetter linrb falter ; the weather is groiving colder. (S§ iturb buTifcI ; it is getting dark, ^er 9^a'6e iiurb fel;r aft ; the raven becomes very old (lives or attains to a great age). II. SSernen with the dative often denotes possession. Ex. : ^Mx tt'ii'b immer ba§ 5}^nnige ; I always obtain my own, (to me comes [5ci'ben, in the indicative. Infinitive. Participles. PREs. SGerbert, to become ; pres. $Berbenb, becoming ; PERF. ©etrcrben fein, to have perf. ©eirorben, become. become ; Present. Singular. Plural. Scf) trerbe, I become ; irir irerben, we become ; 55)u irirft, thou becomest ; i^r trcrbet, you become ; ^'r iintb, he becomes ; [ie irevbeu, they become. Imperfect. 5d) irurbe or irarb, I became ; irir Iruvben, we became ; 5Du h^urbeP: or n^arbft, thou i^r trurbet, you became ; becamest ; (Sr trurbe or trarb, he became ; fte iijurbcn, they became. 110 Perfect. Singular. Plural. 3df) Un geirorben, I have be- tuir ftnb gelijorbcn, we have be- come ; come ; 5Du U]t geivtorbeu, thou hast if>r feib geirorben, you have be- become ; come ; (Sr ift geiDorben, he has be- fie finb getrcrben, they have come ; become. Pluperfect. 3ci) Wax genjorbett, I had be- irir ix^areit geit»orben, we had come ; become ; £)u itmrft geirorbcn, thou hadst i^r traret geitorben, you had become ; become ; (Sr tvax geirorben, he had be- fie Warm getuorben, they had come ; become. First future. 2^ trerbe iretbett, I shall be- irtr i^erben tcerben, we shall come ; become ; 5)u itnrft hjerben, thou wilt i:^r i^erbet irerben, you will be- become; come; (Sr irirb JtJerben, he will be- fie n?erben irerben, they will be- come ; come. Second future. 3d) trerbe getrorben [etn, I shall tfir irerben geirorben fein, we have become • shall have become ; S)u trirft geh?orben fein, thou it^r ti^erbet getrorben fein, you wilt have become ; will have become ; (Bx trirb getrorben fein, he will fie toerben geu^orben fein, they liave become • will have become. Imperative , 5Berbe bu, become thou; irerbet i^r, become you; SBerbe er, let him become ; tcerben fie, let them become. Ill III. Often, when repeated or customary action is implied, the genitive of a noun is made to supply the place of an ad- verb. Ex. : 3)c3 9Jtergcn3 \d)la\% bea 3)attagg lieSt, imb bea 5l6enb6 fpielt or; he sleeps in the morning, reads at noon, and plays in the evening. (§101.) IV, -^lla (as) after foBalb, fo lucl, fo ire it, &c., is frequently omitted, but must be supplied in translating. Ex. : i[( eg benn nie Siagwerben?" unb ber S^aglo^ner nnter bem 2)fucfe feiner SlrBeit: „nnrb eg benn nidU balb 9^ad)t tcerben?" 20. ^a^ ^Bet- ter i\t fd)on jiemlid) fait getrorben. Questions. 1. In which use is lyevben translated, by shall or will? 2. As an independent verb, what does ttjevbeit signify '? 3. Can you give an example of UH'vben, translated by "to become?" 4. By "to grow?" 5. By "to get?" 6. With the dative denoting possession, what does merben signify? 7. Can you repeat the two examples ? 8. Can you form any sentence of the same kind ? LESSOIS" XXXVI. f f f t i n XXXVI. For "any" and "some," as generally used before a noun, the German has no corresponding word. Ex. : Have you some bread ? ^a^tn e I d) e § ; I have " some." For the genitive of WiU d^er, ive employ the personal pronoun preceded by "o/"." Ex.: ^aBen "Sie 'old QBaffev? have you much water? 3d} t)aht beffen inel; I have much of it (literally, I have of it much). ^aBeu ©ie Diel •^^iUe ? have you many hats ? 3d; l^aBe b e r c n t»iele ; I have many of the^n (I have of them many). From these examples it will be seen, that the par- titive word in German is placed after the pronoun, while in English it is placed before it. In this use it is declined like the relative it^eld^er. 113 Declension of h? c t dj e v as a partitive. Singular. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural of all genders, 91 m. 2BcIrf)er, tvddji, \vdd)(B, it^elrfje ; Q) e n. ^cffen, bercn, bcffiMt, beren ; S) a t. SQeIc{)em, ircld)cr, tucldjcm, ivcld^en ; 5( c c. 9Se(d)en, wddjc, wddjcQ, wddjt. II. ©eniig, like " enough," is indeclinable .and generally follows its noun, or stands independently, ^iel and irenig are frequently used without declension. (§ 53.) III. 5)a5, as also bieS (bie§ being a contraction of the neuter biefeo) is frequently used in referring to nouns of both numbers and all genders. Ex. : 5Ber ift ba6 ? ¥/ho is that ? ^'it^ ift mein ?yi^eunb ; this is my friend. 2)a0 finb S^ran^ofen ; those are Frenchmen. ©aS and bte§, however, never precede and qualify a noun, except of the neuter gender. (§ 134. I.) IV. (5"§, like its English equivalent, may refer to nouns of both numbers and all genders ; as, (B§ ift mein B'teunb ; it is my friend. When e6 refers to a noun in the plural, the verb must agree in number with the noim, while in English, it agrees vdth the pronoun. Ex. : (S3 finb bie ^uffen, bie Ungartt iiber*' irimben f;aBen ] it is (German, finb) the Russians who have over- powered (conquered) Hungary. (§ 57. 8.) Y. (S0, sometimes answers to our word " so" or " one." Ex. : (Er ift gefunb, cber fd)eint e § ju fein ] he is healthy, or ap- pears so to be. (Sr ift (Sclbat, abet ic^ Bin e6 nid)t ] he is (a) soldier, but I am not one. @y is likewise rendered by " there" (L. 37. III.). Ex. : (SS ftanb in alten Beiten ein Sd)rof fo I;cd) iinb ^el;r (U^lanb) ; " there" stood in ancient times a castle so lofty and fair, ^g trar ein Jlontg in 5'6ule ) " there" was a king in Thule. (§ 57. 8.) YI. SS is often so used as to have no equivalent in English. Ex. : ©S reben imb ti-aumen bie SDlenfd]en Diel i)on Seffcrn !iinftigen ^agen (®cf)il{er) ; men talk and dream much of better future days. 3d^ n>eif eg, baf er ba ii^ar ; I know (it) that he was there. (Sg teBcn bie S^rei^eitSfam^fer ; (long) live the champions of liberty. (SS leBe bie ^^e^uBIif j (long) live the republic. 114 Exercise 40. QTufgabe 40. Slrjt w^- physician; gleip, 771. diligence ; ®elc{)v'famfeit, /. eru- diuon, learning ; ©lixcf, 72. luck, fortune, happiness ; ©ram, m. gief, afflic- tion, sorrow ; ^lug, prudent, judi- cious ; ,Kod)iu,/. cook; .Summer, m. anxiety, distress ^mi, short ; a)Wd%/. milk; ^l^c^;iX, m. nail ; ^'uiiur, n. powder; @taf;I, m. steel ; ®tclj, pride. @r l^at mtr Ste^fel unb Sirnen ge^ ge'ben. SBoUm (2ie ^rob ober iluchen l^a- Ben? ^aben ©ie feineg fditcarje^ %u^ ? ^at er @elb genug', ober ^iel. 35. QSer t)at 2)Zild^ ? 36. 3)er S3auer ^at n)eld)e. 37. ^at er beren fel^r biel ? 38. @r ^at genug. 39. SSie sjiel^iitel;at ber .Snabe ? 40. @v ^at beren brei. 115 Questions. 1. Is there in German any correspondenls to any and some as commonly used before a noun 1 2. How is " some" as an indefinite adjective pronoun expressed in German? 3 For the genitive of aH-ld)ci- what do we employ? 4 Where is the ;)ar/t^re word placed ? 5 How does weliter as a partitive differ in declension from the relative uu'lftcvl 6 What can you say of flf tntg, fid and au-m^ ? 7. Of bas and bicS 1 8. Of e§ ^. 9. To what doefe ce sometimes answer 1 10. Is eS always to be rendered in EngUsh 1 LESSON XXXVII. f c c t i n XXXVII. IMPERSONAL VERBS. Impersonal verbs are confined to the third person singular, and have as their subject, or nominative only the pronoun e§. Ex.: ^grcgnct; it rains. (S'g bonnert; it thunders. (S§HU3t; it lightens. (§ 88. 1.) I. Besides those verbs that are merely impersonal, others may be thus employed; as, (S3 fd^eint, baf er haul tft; it ap- pears that he is sick, d^ fcfimerjt midb, baS ju^oreri; it pains me to>^ear that, &c. II. Many verbs, however, that, in German are used im- personally, have, in this respect, no correspondents in English. Ex. : (S0 Bflingt mir -, I succeed (it succeeds to me), &c. III. @eBen, " to give'' is often, with its proper case (the accusative)^ employed to denote existence in a manner general and indefinite, and is translated like fein, " to he." Ex. : (S^ gieBt (not c0 finb) S^tuU, bie alle i^age auf ben 9J2ar!t gc^en; there are (i. e. there exist) people who go to the market every day. (S^ finb ^eute (not c§ gieBt) ijtele l^eutc auf bent 2^arfte • there are many people to-day at the market. (S§ gieCt feine ^Q]i\\ c^nc 3)ornen; there are (there exist) no roses without thorns. (S§ ftnb (not 06 gicBt) inele .^inber in biefer (Sdjutej there are many children in this school. (S'§ gieBt (there exist) noc^ JHiefen in ber SGBelt; there are still giants in the world. 116 Exercise 41, 51 « f g o £ e 41 Sltmee',/. army ; ©m'Bred^en, to break 5{ufgani3, m. rising, ascent ; Si0, until, up to; Silken, to lighten ; 5)t:ig, n. thing, aiFair ; S)onneni, to thunder ; @bel, noble, magnan- imous ; in; (E't'^, n. ice ; @r!ld'ren, to explain; ^etubltcb, hostile ; giircbten, to fear ; @ecrg, m. George ; ^(xo^tln, to hail ; Setiibt, easy, easily ; Otei^enb, ravenous ; S^iucf^ug, m. return; Scbneim, to snow; ©tiirmen, to storm ; 2;ageTt, to dawn, be- come day ; ^(;auen, to thaw; 3Berge'ben, to forgive ; 9Balir, true ; 2BcIf, m, Vv'olf ; Supiucbt,/. refuge. @g ir»trb immer Seiite gcBen, bte fidb gegen bie t)ellften 2BaI)rI}eiten empc'ren, line s?iele giebt e^ beren 'i}^vii ju !I'age nicbt I @g irar einmal etn S?eifcr, lrelif,er 'h^\:j^Mi)>'tzitr 'i)(x^ eg fetn beffereiS ©lit gebe, al3 erne gefun'be 23er; mmft^ in einem gefitn'ben J!or; :per. ©i^nige befjait^'ten, ba^ eg ©in'? Wcbner im SJlcnbe ge6e. (fg ift fetn 93tenfch un'gliicclidier, alg jener, ber nie 2St'bevir»drttg; Idtzn erbuPbete. (s§ gieBt irenig ^elben, bte i(n*en dbcirac'ter bt» in {§r Sdter be? f)aup'ten. @g ift niditg lc'ben6»ert()cr, al3 anbere baS'jenige ju Ie§ren, toag man iretp. There \vill always be people, who exalt themselves against the clearest truths ; how many of those are there not at the present day ! There was once a sage, who maintained, that there was no better possession, than a sound understanding in a sound body. Some maintain, that there are inhabitants in the moon. There is no mortal mm-e un- fortunate than he, (that one) who never endured reverses of fortune. There are few heroes, w^ho main- tain their character till in their old age. There is nothing more praise- worthy, than to teach what one knows, to others. 1. @g giebt biefeg 3abr febt ml C^i. 2. @g ift beiite febr f*cneg SBetter. 3. (So giebt me^r cinne, alg reicbe Seute. 4. (Sg ift etn roabreg S3crgniigen, biefen SJforgen fpa^ieren ^u gefien. 5. ©tcbt eo in ^TentfdUanb C.'a6> relpenbe 2:t)tere? 6. ©» giebt ncdi siele 28clfe in "im ©ebirgen. 7. ®iebt eg tt?c^l etoag ©blereg, atg fetuen (§ 135. 4.) ^etnben ju yerge? bea? 8. (fg ift bie feinbltd^e SIrtnce auf ibrcm Otiicf^nge. 9. (Sg giebt »iele !Dtnge, bie nnr nid^t erft.iren icnnen. 10. ©tcbt eg ctti\ig (gd^cnereg, alg ben 9lufgang ber i£cnne ? 11. (?g bat 'tzw gan.^en S;ag gefdntett. 12. ©eljen @ie biefen O^adnnittag mit mir anf g Gig ? 13.' S^ein, eg i^^iini fdicn, nub bag (Sig faun letdU einbreduni. 14. ©enn eg taget, irerbe tdi Sic ju einein S^M^iergaug abbofcn. 15. (S'g fdmeit f)ente 'i^vA ganjen S!ag. 16. Olegnet eg \<^.'c\\'^. 17. Olein, aber eg UMVb batb anfangen gu regnen. 18. S©ie lange ho^i eg geregnet? 19. ©g \:jQii big oier U^r geregnet. 20. Scnnert t^i 21. 3a, eg bcnnert nnb bli^t, 117 unb i6 furdUe, baf csJ audi Ijao^dn irivb. 22. SSc traren (£ie, todl^renb e^ fd>iieitc ? 23. 3di fudnc in bcr (SavcUe ice St. ©ecvg Sujlu^t, benn c*^ fdnielte iiid^t iiiir, fcnbcrn ce ftuvmte unb haijelte audv 24. 3di [age Ijbiien iiur baejcuige, iva^ (L. 22. I.) idi geficvt l)abc. QiTESTiONS. 1. How do impersonal verbs differ from other verbs ? 2. What examples can you give 1 3. May other verbs be used impersonally ] 4. To all verbs, that, in German, are used impersonally, are there correspond- ing ones in English? 5. Will you give an example! 6. How is gcbeu, when used impersonally, translated 1 7. Is Ca ijt or f 3 nub, when thus used, translated in the same manner 1 8. Can you describe the difference pointed out between them ] LESSON XXXYIIL |:ccti0n XXXYIII. REFLEXIVE VERBS. Reflexive verbs (§ 86. 1,2., etc.) are those that represent the subject as acting upon itself; as, Sr Befimtt f tcb ; he be- thinks kimself. (tc. Verbs of this class are much more numerous than in Enghsh, and are variously translated. Ex. : (Sr mac^t fid) ii&er mi^ luftig ; he makes himself merry over me (i. e. he ridicules me.) (Sr fran!t ftdi u6er feinen -^erluji ; he mourns over (or an account of) his loss. (Sr frcut fief) liber fetn ©liicf ; he rejoices at his prosperity. @r trti)erfe|t fid) bom ?b^]it;i bcy Sr^rvtnnen ; he opposes (himself to) the command of the tyrant. xDviS Q3li^:^ f)at n^enfd)en eignen jtd) iible ©erocbnbeiten fc leibcnfdiaftUdi an, bap fie biefelben fi'ir 33ebiirf:; nif e ber OJatur (fatten. 15. (Sin j^ tub an ber ^aub feiner pten (Sltern fiivditet fid) nid)t, — fo ber 3)(enfd), ber Q]evtrauen ju @ctt ijat. 16. -Die Strmee 509 fid) jufammen, unb betr^egte fid) bem i^luffe j^u. 17. 2)er §einb lagerte fid) um bie Stabt. 18. (Bx 5eid)nete fid^ »cr ben anberu burd) fein tapferei^ 53etrat]en au^. 19. @r fiivd)tete ]ui) ycr Oliemanben. 20. Qx bait fid) iiber bie 3Borte meiucjJ 9^ad)barn auf. Questions. 1. What is a reflexive verb 1 2. Do you recollect, w^hat is stated in § 86. 1.? 3. What in § 86. 2 , with regard to reflexive verbs, strictly speaking 1 4. What is stated at No. 3 , in the same paragraph ? 5. What else can you say concerning reflxcxive verbs 1 6. What examples can you give of verbs, that are only reflexive, in EngUsh ? 7. Are there more such in German, than in Enghsh 1 8. What does auft)alten signify, when followed by fiit iibcr 1 9. Examples'? LESSON XXXIX. f ecttott XXXIX. Many verbs in German, as in other languages, especially ■when used as reflexives, acquire in certain phrases a figurative sense which deserves to be noted. Thus from fd)i(fen, to send, we have the reflexive fid^ fd^itfen, to send or throw one's self into, i. e. to adapt or conform to. Ex. : 5Der 9}?cnfc^ mu^ fid) in bie ^nt, in feine Umftanbe fd)itfen; man must adapt himself to the times, to his circumstances. (S0 fd)icft fic^ nidjt, baS ju t^uu ; it is not proper to do that. So from fragen, to ask, we have, fid) fragen, to he questionable, Ex. : (SS fwgt fic^, oB cr ba iuar ; it is questionable whether he 120 was there. 8ici^ juh-agen, fid) I;anbeln, &c., are of the same character ; as, (S» tragt ]id) juUHHien ju, baf an^attenber -3f?egen bie ganje (ixnU i)erbirBt ; it happens sometimes, that continued rain destroys the entu-e harvest, (gg t;anbeit fief) nidit uin v^Iei== nigfciten ; it is not a question (an affair) of trifles. (See also (§ ^^6. 6.) Exercise 43. 5UifgaBe 43. ©ruiVfiaft, serious; ^^cvbcru, to require ; §r6'fitlagen, to refuse ; 5ldUni, to respect ; dlu'iiclmicu, to adopt, accept ; ^ege'bcufteit, /. occur- rence ; ^egpvj'iicn, to meet, happen, befall ; ^cimVi)en, to fatigue, iVrcf), joyful, gladly ; weary; @el^c'rcu, to belonj ©eivvidi'miig, /. con- sideration, view; Setr-ufi'fein,n. con- sciousness ; ©in'lvifc-ung, /. invita- tion; earnest, 9tatf)en, to counsel; (gdH'tuen, to appear; demand, Sd^v^liaft, facetious, sportive ; to ask, (2cite,/. page; (See, above) ; Scnutvig, 7n. Sunday; gTi'mfcling,???, stranger, Un'gclicrfam, disobe- foreigner ; dient ; S3evtiieb'rcit, to in- crease ; to be fit; 33crmc'gen, n. wealth; @efd'>ci)eit, to happen. SBil^mcn, to devote ; take place ; 2i>irfl(d% really ; ^g>ct ligcu, to hallow ; SBif'fcufdiaft, /. sci- ^^fiidH,/. duty, obliga- ence ; tion ; ©^ tvtfft fid^ ^utt?e['ieu, ta^ untcr cincm im'fdunuttaren ^leibe tie fd^cnfteii ilalcu'te i:erBcryeit finb. @^ trdgt ftdi ^diifig ^t, ba^ bie Scanner, bie fidi nm bas5 Svi'rcr? lanb am mcifteu i^erbteut' ge? inad^t ijCihm, I^ei'nuatlilco uml)cv'; irrni. SDZeiiiem O^ejfcn tft m\ gvcfeo Un- gliicf gef*c'^en. (Bx erjdtil'te mir biefe;?, aU er mir Iieitte '!:'Cii uii'gcfdiir auf ber Strafe begcg'ncre. (B§ ift itiTu baifel'ce icc\Q^'nit, trau mir i^cx ctneni 3af)re fecgcg^nete. 2)lan fell iiHtiT alUni Hni'i'tduben fagen : 5}ein ©ille gefd"'Cl:;e. Su^fefienb^, \-isibly. It sometimes happens, that under an unsightly garb the most splendid talents are concealed. It often happens, that the men who have rendered themselves the most serviceable to their (the) native country, wander about homeless. A great misfortune has occurred to my nephew. He related this to me as he ac- cidentally met me to-day in the street. There has occurred the same to him, that occurred to me a year ago. We should under all circum- stances say : Thy will be done. 1. (E$ fragt ]id^, cb iinr mcrgen fd^.ciieii 23etter balm trerben. 2. '3^ ge^^crt fid\ ben Scimtag ^jU ^eifigen. 3. (Se fducft ftdi, ditcre Seiitc gu a*; ten. 4. aJian arbcitet »iel frcijer, toenn man hao S3eiDuf tfein ^at, ztaQ.6 121 ®ntt6 ju t§uu. 5. (Si fdMcft fid) uid)t, bie ©mtabung aBjufd)Iagctt. 6. 2)er wixtUA) thu-\c ^Mann mxb, [o yiet (L. 35. IV.) eg i()m moglid) 'i% (li) bcmiU;cn, fid) in bie Sett ju fdncfeu. 7. SJieiii ©ruber h)ibmete fid) fruber lucl^r beti 5li>i|yeufdH\ften, ali3 bcm 33crgimgen. 8. @g maiyt grof e ivreube, ba^^ ®ute ju forbeni. 9. (S'»J fd)i(tt fidi, ba^ eiii jeber ^^rembling rte guten, vibcr nidit bie iibUni Sitteii eiiie^ 93cKeg annimmt. 10. S)ai3 »25cvmogeu blofci^ iD^auue^ yermeltrt fid) jufet)cnbg (§ 101.). 11. (S6 fdiicft fid) nidU fiir iliuber uiigel^crfani ju fciii. 12. (B6 frdgt fid), ob. tiefer iDiauu feiiic ^flid)t geti^an l^at. 13. @g trdgt fidi julweiten ju, baf tie iBctraditmigen bei eiuer fdierjtjaften ®egefeen()eit fe^r eruftfiaft finb. 14. (S"i^ trdgt fid) Ijdufig ^u, ha^ fleiiie ^Ceranlaffungeu grcpe ©reigniffe l}er&eifiit)reu. 15. ^er ift (§ 71. 1.) 3i)neu f)eute 93lorgen begegnet ? 16. 2)leiu 5-rcuiib, ber (Ja^itdn, ift mir begcguet. 17. ^'(t i^m auf bev le^teii Olcife iiid^to Unangeue()iiieg begegnet ? 18. 3a, eg ift ibm eiit grcpeg Uugiucf begegnet. 19. SBag ift 3f)uen gefd)e§en? 20. '(§$ ift mir niditei gefdK^en. 21. @g gefditel;t ii}m biefe <£trafe red)t. 22. SSiffen Sie, incju (L. 29.) 3f)v§reunb gerat(;en fjat? 23. (Bx I}at baju gerat(}en, iucj?cn er geftern gefprodien ^at Questions. 1. Do many verbs, especially when used reflexively acquire a figurative signification 1 2. What is the first example 1 3. What does that verb signify, when not used reflexively '? 4. Can you give examples of the same verbs used impersonally also 1 5 Can you give a hteral rendering of e5 baitbelt ftc^ 1 6. Of, eg fvagt ftcb ? LESSON XL, §tctionXL, ^affen is often employed in the sense of causing or order- ing, like the English verbs, " have'' and '■'■ get.'' Ex. : (§x Icift [eine .^lelber in ^arig maclien ; (L. 34. I.) he gets his clothes made in Paris, @ie laffen ein ^aug Bauett; they are having a house built, I. ^olen, (L. 26.) signifies to go for. The phrase :^olctt laffen, signifies '-to cause to go for;" that is, '•' to send for^^ Ex. : 3c^ laffe Q(e^fel ^olen ; I send for apples. %6) ^abc fte \6.)^\\ l;oien (affen ; (L. 25. VII.) I have already sent for them. Exercise 44. ^ufgabe 44. 58at)n{)of, m. rail-road ?^ef)ten, to fail ; 9^uC)e,/. rest, repose ; depot; ^cffer, m. trunk ; 3luf)en, to rest; 2)iener, w. serv^ant; S:aiTen,to let, tocause; S^obt, dead; (5in taben, to in\dte ; SJlajcr', m. major ; 2Beg, m. way. (5reig ui^, n. event ; ^oft,/. post-office; 6 122 S)er 2;au(^er lf;oItc ben gol'benen The diver brought the king's ^edier bes ^onig^ au^ bcm golden beaker from the vvhirl- ©trubel. pool. 2)te .Koct)in Jjolt ©etnu'fe unb The cook is getting vegetables gleifct »on bem SD'lattte. and meat at market. 2)a^ ©erUtt' idpt ben SL^ert)re'd)er The court causes the criminal to entfiaiip'ten. be beheaded. JDlefev 2)^ann Idf t ben ^reunb im This man leaves his friend in ©tld:)e. the lurch. 1. S[Gag ^clt jene^ 2)ienftmdbcben ? 2. ©6 f)cU SBaffet an bem 58runnen, ^dIj aug bem SBalbe unb gleifdi tjom SDZarfte. 3. .§at ee fdicn mehien Coffer i>on bem ^al}nl)ofe ge(}cU? 4. 3a, gleid) nadi bem 51ufftef;en (L. 42. III.) ()at eg if)n gel^olt. 5. 2Bir tiepen bem franfen 5JZanne einen Strjt l)oten. 6. (S'r lie^ mid) ben 58rief abfd^reiben, nm ii)n auf bie ^oft ju tragen. 7. 3d) laffe eg an nid)tg fe[}len, (§ 146. 1. d.) nm 3t}ven (2ol)n anf einen Beffern 2Beg ju brtngen. 8. Safen inir luiS hux&i biefeg ©reignif nid)t tdufdien. 9. 3Jlan fcUte t>m Xchkn i^re 9^n[)e lajTcn. 10. (Bx lief mid) n?arten, unb idi laffe it)n nun rufien. 11. 2Barnm lit^fet 3§r @uern Heinen ^mber nidit fommen ? 12. SBeil er ben ganjen Qfladnnittag in bcr ©dnile tuar. 13. Saffen @ie 3i}te ^inber franjofifd) letnen ? 14. Slciu, n^eil id) bie englifdie (S^racbe fitr nu|lidier balk. (L. 69. 11.) 15. 3)er SD^ajor lief [einen iDieuer mir htn iBeg nadi bem 2)orfe jeigen. 16. 3)er <§err, nad) weUtem (Sie fragen, lief ben <^aupU mann auf has Sanb fal^ren. 17. giir trten laffen (£ie bie '-biidier l;clen? 18. 3d) laffe fie fiiv meine jiingfte (Sdncefter (;clen, um fie italieiiifdi §u te^ren. 19. @r lief midi einlaben, in ber nddiften 2Bcd)e mit il)m ju reifen. 20. S^eldien yon biefen lt>eiben Slerjten JDoUen Sie f)olen laffen ? 21. 3d) laffe f einen i>on hdbm ^clen. Questions. 1. What does (afftn often signify? 2. Do you recollect what peculiarity of Irtffen, &c. is mentioned L. 25 Vll. V 3. In regard to what particular is L. 34 L referred to? 4 What example can you give of the use of laffeii 1 5. How is ^olen laffen translated? 6. What is itsUteral mean- ing] 7. Examples'? LESSON XLI. it it ion XLI. 9Ba§ fur ein (§ 66. 5.) literally, what for a, answers to the English " what kind of," or simply, " lohaA ;" as, 25ag fiir tm S3ud) \)aUn @ie ? What kind of s. book have you ? 2Ba§ fur ein 9}?c[fer ift 'la^'^ What kind of a knife is that ? S:ur, in this connection, loses its prepositional character and may precede any case. Ex. : 2BaS fiir 5Ba(l)er finb biefe ? Sag fiir 33ud)cr ^aBen er'be/hardship; ^eft^'en, to possess ; S3erouu'berung, /. ad- miration ; SSitben, to form, con- stitute ; S3linb, blind ; 2)avu'Bev, thereon ; fDatJon', of it, there- of; ®enuodb, notwith- standing ; ©igcit, own, partic- ular ; (Stnau'bei*, one an- other ; (Slnmal, once; @tn/iuol)ner, m. in- habitant ; (S"i-fa[)'reu, to experi- ence ; (Srte'Beit, to live to see ; @vftau'nengtt)iirbtg, as- tonishing ; ©tlidier, several, some, a few ; %m\{)dt,f. delicacy; ^irmamcnt^ n. firma- ment; ^liicbteu, to flee ; @eber, m. giver, donor ; ©efiil)!', n. touch, feeling ; ©emiitt}', n. mind; @euu^', m. enjoy- ment ; 126 ©efitcnf', 71. present, gift ; ©cfoU'fitaft,/. society ; (Sctrdl; rcu, to grant, allow ; @c»ip'/ certain, cer- tainl}' ; ®rc^e,/. size, magni- tude ; v^ciuthing, /. action, procedure ; «§ev5cn, to cherish; ^ervlid"*, o-lorious ; ^en^ct'rufen, to call forth ; t^ncdben, m. bone ; SKacht,/. power ; SD'landier, many a ; S)Zenuing,/. opinion; 3[)^etf'tt>itrbig, remark- nble ; SJlufif', / music ; S^adnrcU, /. poster- ity ; 91idni5t£)ini, n. inac- tion ; Dtctb^wcnbuj, neces- sary ; !13unft, 771. point; Sccnfd\ m. fish of the sea ; iSettfam, strange ; SoldUT, such; (2td{}{en, to steel, temper ; Sturm, 772. storm ; %i:ji\U, partly ; Xficrf)eii/. folly; UeBerein'foiinncn, to agree, accord; 33crfamm%ug, /. meeting ; SScrftcin^blgen, to agree, to come to an ex- planation ; S3ertrcu'beu,to employ, apply ; 93ortrejf'tldi, excellent ; ©crjug, m. advantage ; SBag fiir, what kind of; SSerf, m. work; 2Bc()l''f)a&erib, opulent; Su^bringen, to spend, pass ; 3iu"iicf',^ief)en, to retire, withdraw. SBag fitr cincn (5'ainervVben tiaft -2Sa^ fiir etn Sanbyirtanit 6ift 2)u ? 2Beldi em Oiiefc ! @in 3eber ift bee (Seiuen irertC}. (B'm fcldiev 5Iuftrag fd^rccft midi iiid)t. ©men fcl^en (£turm fiaBe idi ncdi ni6t erIeBl'. (gel*' em .taifer fcriiiie fidi fo be'miit^tgen I (goto' f*onc3 SBetter fommt \zh ten. tSr \)?X0i6^ fo lelfe, "inx^ xi) i^ii nid^t serfte'Ben foimte. SD^latuter Xraum ber 3itgenb fd^ti^ht; "tti mit hvA 3af)Ten. STeaiut fd^cneo Siut Bcibe id^ fdicu gele'fen. 9Zad^ emigen aJZhm'tcn !e§rte er ^uriid'. 5)er ®le^}6ant' ift etea^ ftdrfer, alo bas 9^a5f)cm. ii)er im'erfvifirene .jlaufmann fanit Ietd)t viK fcin a3crmo geu i^er; lie'cen. d'r war bag gan^e 3a6r fran!. 3n gro^en <2tdbten ftefit man aUe 3:'age etwa^ D^eue^. What kind of a companion have you "? What country-man are you ? What a giant ! Every one is worthy of his own. Such a commission alarms me not. Such a storm I have not yet ex- perienced. Such an emperor could thus humhle himself. Such beautiful weather comes seldom. He spoke so softly, that I could not understand him. Many a dream of youth disap- pears with years. Many a beautiful book have I al- ready read. After some minutes he returned. The elephant is somewhat stronger, than the rhinoceros. The inexperienced merchant may easely lose all his fortune. He was sick all the year. In large cities one sees some- thing new every day. 126 1. Sag fur Setter iji^eute? 2. m ifl ijnik \6^^n^s Setter, aBer it^aB fatter a(^ geftcrn. 3. Sag fi'ir cine SJicinung f)egt er son biefer @a*e ? 4. (Seine 2Jleinung i\t ntd)t bie befte baucn (L. 29.). 5. £) tna5 fiir S[)orf)eiten beget^t ber SJienfd) in feinem SeOen! 6. Tlit luag fiir ©cfeltfcnaft {)aben ©ie Umgang ? 7. SKeine ©efeUfdiaft ift bie angcnet)m|te !ODU ber Sett. 8. Sag fiir gifcte ftnb bieg ? (L. 36. III.) 9. m finb (Seefi|\te. 10. Wit wag fiir Strbeiten befd^dftigt er fid) ? 11. ©r be; fduiftigt ft* tf)ctlg mit (Sdireiben, t^cilg mit Sefen. 12. Scid) einc -iDladU t^at bie iUlufif auf bag ©emiitt; hz^ aricnfd^en ! 13. Seldi cin I)oi)er ©enuf ijl eg, bie Sett ^u fefjen ! 14. Seld) einen l)errtid)en Sin? bticf geirid()rt bag firmament mit feinen un;^d{)tid)en (Steruen ! 15. Seber @tcrn am firmament bitbet eine eigene Selt. 16. 2)er wabre JIugenbs l^afte Berinenbet jeben Sag feineg Sebeng barauf, feine pettier immer me^r ab^ulegen. 17. '^at nidit jeber 3§rer ^reunbe einen foldien >§ut ? 18. ^Icin, ein Seber (lat einen anbern. 19. @ otdi e SJtdnner ftnb nct(}tt)enbig, urn bag iBaterlanb ju rettcn. 20. •^aimi (2ie jenen Stinben gefefjen, ber eine fotdie §ein^eit beg ®cfiif)(g hziii^t, bie erftaunengnmrbig ift? 21. 3a, id) I}abe i^n gcfef>en. 22. ^ex @eber eineg fctdien ©efdienfeg iji ju loben. 23. 2)ie *-8efd)n3erben einer fctdien dld]z ftd()fen ben ,^cr^er. 24. (2ctd)e ^anblungen irerben bie S3en?nnberung ber 9^ad)wett f)er»or; rnfeu. 25. @o angene^me ©tunben t;abe id) tange nidit ge^bt. 26. Unter ben (S"intr>o^ncrn finb mandie fef)r trc()tf)abenb. 27. 3di ^abe fdion mandic ^^reube getiabt. 28. >^aben (Sic nid)t audi fdion mandieg (Sett? fame ertebt? 29. O ja, id) ^ahz fdion mandieg ?0^erfn)urbige erfa^ren. 30. SJland) ta^ferer (Solbat mufte in ber (Sd^Iadit fein geben taffen. 31. ^at biefer ©diriftileder nidit mand) guteg Serf gefdn-ieben? 32. ®e; Jt*i^, mand)e bcrfelbcn finb t^crtreff[id). 33. '^ahzn fidi bie beiben greunbe uber biefe (Sadie ijerftdnbigt ? 34. 3a, in einigen ^unften finb fie mit^ einanbcr iibereinge!ommcn. 35. (Jinige englifdie (Sdiiffe gingen bei bic;* fern (Sturme unter. 36. ©tlidie Huge SJldnner jcgen fidi aug ber 33er; fammlung priid. 37. 2(Ue (Jintt>o.f)ner ber (S>tai)t ftiicbteten fid) bei ber Slnndberung ber ^einbe. 38. SJiandic SJlenfdien bringen ibr ganjeg ^ebzn mit 9f^iditgtf)un ju. 39. Sar bag 3^r ^ruber, ber geftcrn ben gan^en %a'^ in 3t)rer ©efeltfdiaft toav ? 40. S^iein, eg tt?ar mein 9leffe, ber mid) allc 3at)re einmal befudit. 41. Setd) eine @rcpe bat bie (5rbe, unb toie inet !Ieiner ijt fie benncrb atg bie (Sonne. 42. Setdie S3orjiige ^er; to com- mand is easy ; to obey, difficult. It is often preceded by the article. Ex. : 3d) IteBe ba§ Sd^reiBen, aBev ntd)t bag B^i^J^^^"; I like writing, but not drawing. IV. After BleiB en, gel) en, (§ 146.Le.)&c., the infonitive often answers to our present participle. Ex.: (Ex BUeB fi|cn; he remained sitting (literallj^, he continued to sit.). (Sr BleiBt jt e * ^en; he remsdns standing. (Sr ift fifd)en gegangen ; he has gone a fishing. In a sentence which is employed as the sub- ject of a verb, the infinitive frequently rejects the preposition 3u(§146.). Ex.: 2)en^einb i) erti; eib ig en ift ebel ; or, ben B^cinb 5 u ijert^cibigen ift cbel ; to defend an (the) enemy is noble. 3 u is generally omitted before such verbs as le^ren, to teach ; 128 lemen (§ 146. c.) to leam, . 5. ®ie SBurjeln 129 be^ 2Barbe^ travcn feine etnjige Dlal^rung. 6. 2)ag Sajfer f^at bci bicfer ©elev^entieit ble ^tcili^ bee 3i>Vincs5 certrcten. 7. (Bin (gdmler I^atte bie etelle bci? M)VixS m-txdm. 8. 5(iiftatt ber ^ebeni bcnii^te inaii S3Ieij fliftc. 9. 5)aiJ 9ieifeu niarfit mix \d)x i^'id SSerciuii^en. 10. SJleine jliii^ bei- Itateii baiJ €dn-ei6cii luib Sefcji i^oii miv ^elernt 11. ^ir tucdeu ge- l)(yi; bici^ (augc ^-IBartcn i|l miv unaiu3i>iu1;m. 12. 2)Zan ^ie(;t geirp(}ulidi bat^ Silken bcm Stcf^en ycv. 13. @r (^at bag Stvknten in fetner Su^eub ijclerut. 14. aBtr §aben pfammcn bag ©direibeii rjelernt. 15. 3di i^affe bag ^Sdn-cibcu, bagcgcii liebe idb bejio mc^r bag ff'talen. 16. (Sr oerfteI)t bag Seidnieu Beffer alg bag ^Mahn. 17. SiBtr fjorten bag (Sturmen ber ©(ecfen unb bag fScitiiern ber .^aiiouen. 18. ^a6 9Siberftef;ett ber ^cleti ivar lHu•5lvfiiiu!U]g^^oH ; fdn-ecftidi bag (£nigen U^reg ©Alad^tliebeg : „Dlcd) ift -^clcn iiidU i:>er(crciil" 19. fDag ^eulen beg ©turmeg unb has iinlbe 5;cbeii ber iOeUen erl^cfite ncd) ben ai^lutf) beg ta^fern (Sapitdng unb feiner braven a)iannf*aft, anftatt ii)n ju beu^^en, 20. ®ctt me^r giitig alg ge? vedit benfeii, ift ebeu fo i)iel, alg ©ott enteliren. ©ellert. 21. 33ieg nt*t ^u entfdntlbigenbe Setragen beg @dmlerg fvdnfte ben Se^rer. Questions. 1. What is a clause or sentence sometimes made to supply the place of? 2. Example? 3. To what does an\iatt correspond, and wherem? 4. Example? 5. What is stated of the infinitive when preceded by anftvttt ? 6. What, when preceded by the preposition ohiie ? 7. Example ? 8. Is the infinitive often used where we use the present participle ? 9. Example? 10. Is the infinitive used substantively ? 11. In what respect does it differ from the infinitive in Enghsh ? 12. After what verbs does the infini- tive answer to our present participle ? 13. Example ? 14. What is stated of the infinitive, when m a sentence employed as the subject of a verb ? 15. Ex- ample ? 16. Can you mention some verbs before which ju is omitted ? 17 Is the past participle sometimes used in German, where we use the present ? 18. Example ? 19. Have you consulted § 146, a, &c. ? LESSON XLIII. f £ c 1 1 c n XLIII. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. The subjunctive mood is employed to indicate a probability, with respect to which there exists or may be supposed to exist a greater or less degree of doubt, Ex. : (Sr iiieinte, [ein ^reunb fei * franf ; he thought his friend may be sick (i. e. that his friend was probably sick.) (Sr fragte mid), tvtx icf) fei ; he asked me Avho I was (who I might be.) d)tan fagt, ba§ er ein grof c0 ^Sermogen §a6e ; * it is said, that he has a great fortune. For further statement of the subjunctive, See § 143. * For conjugation of fiabeit and fein in the subjunctive, See § 72. I. 2. 6* 130 The subjunctive in German, is often translated hy the English indicative. Ex. : 9)?an fagt, er fei fe'^r reid^. (Sr meint, e^ fe* Beffcr i^icr gu eie \ii%im mix, a ircire mein ^sii) meinte, eg ircire ein S^^a^. 9}?au glauBte, er tiuTte auf bem (gi* fagt, ber ,tat[er ^aBe il/n fecgnabigt. 9)tan glau6t er fei gefallen. dreit in bev (Stabt geirefeu. 7. iDie (5ng; Idiiber jiub ber 9)Zetnuug, fie feien bie ^erreu beg SJleereg. 8. 3)iefer 9leifeube er^dijlte, er fei jtueimal tu dtom geroefen. 9. (Sx fjcfft, er tnerbe in ad^t S^agen in 2)regben fein. 10. ritten. 18. 3n bem cbem 3immer feienb, bcrte ^d^ (2ie nidUrufen. 19. 9)lvin er^dfjlt, berUngarf)abe Big 5um 2;obe fein 5Bvitert.inb treu viert[:^ctbiget. 20. %i) ^orte, biefer junge ^ran^efe ti^erbc ein gropeg @(acf fiaben. 21. 3d^ gkube, bap siele 2D'lenfd)en i^ier auf (Srben ii)x ®uteg geyabt fiaben ioerben. 132 Questions. 1. What is the subjunctive employed to indicate? 2. Can you repeat the first example? 3. Can you repeat the next example? 4 Can you give some idea of the statement referred to <5> 143.? 5. To what does § 72. 1. 2. refer? 6. Wherein does the subjunctive of ()aben, in the present tense, differ from that of the indicative present ? 7. Of the imper- fect? 8. Perfect? 9. Pluperfect? 10. First future? 11. Second future? 12. By what is the German subjunctive fi-equently rendered in EngUsh? 13. Examples? LESSON XLIV. gtctioii XLIY. I. ®ern, gladly, freely, fain, &c., (comparative UeBer, rather. See § 106. 1) with an appropriate verb, forms the equivalent of our phrase, " to be fond of, to like," &c. Ex. : % trinft g e r n 2Bein ; he is fond of (drinking) wine. (Sr raud^t g c r n ; he is fond o/" smoking • or, he likes to smoke. (Sr ttfigt g e rn fcf;one .^leiber; he likes (to wear) fine clothes, '^d) mod)te* gern it^iffen, cb mein ^eunb nod) hht; I would faiii know whether my friend is still living. 3ci^ mod)U t i c B e r ge^en, al0 BleiBen • I would rather go than to stay. With ^ a 6 e n, it may often be rendered by "-dear.'' Ex.: 5c^ ^a13e meine Sreunbe gern; I hold (have) my friends ^' dear. " II. 9?ot^ig ^aBen, signifies, to need, to have need of Ex. : •^aBen @ie biefeS ^ud^ noting ? Do you need (have you need of) this book ? (Sr S:}Cii @elb noting ; he needs money ; or, has need of money. III. 3nt Stanbe fein, signifies, to be able ; literally, to be in the position or situation. Ex. : ©inb ©ie im (Stanbe ju fdfjtet' Ben ? Are you able to Avrite ? In this constniction the verb dependent upon „im Stanbe fein'' is often omitted and the pronoun e ^, is introduced. (L. 36. VI.) Ex. : 3d^ Bin e nidf)t im (Stanbe; I am not able to. lY. Several words, as b o (^, ja, fcf)0n, i)ieKeicf)t, iro^f and l)XiOiX, &c. are often used with a signification diflferent from their primary one, or where no corresponding one is employed in English. Ex.: (5inb Sle i)iel[et(f;t fran!? Are you (per- *For conjugation of biirfen, foiuien, mo^en, &c. in the subjunctive See <5> 83, 2, &c. See also remarks connected with these conjugations 133 haps) sick? SCerben Sic ivol}l morgeu oBreifen? Shall you (probably) depart to morrow ? (5r irirt) un^ frf}Oit finbcn ; he will already (doubtless) find us. SfBcnn er txant i|l, fo fann cr nid)t fomnicn; if he is sick, (then) he can not come, (ix lieSt nirf)t unb iwav, ireil er fein 93ud^ ^at; he does not read, (and in- deed) because he has no book, ©el/cn (Sie ja md)t; do not go by any means. (Sg biirfte (Seenotep.132.) troM fofommen; it might indeed so happen (come.) SBoUen (Ste fd^on ge^enV Are you going already? Sairo^l; yes, (certainly) or, yes, indeed. 3(^ gtauSte, er fonnteunefd)CU ^eute Befitrf)en ; I thought he could (al- ready) visit us to-day. (Sr glauBte, er fonne ftd; ii^cl^t je|t an i^mrci* d)cn; he thought he could now (indeed) avenge himself upon him. V. The causative adverbs, be^6aI6 or be^rt^egen (therefore) baburd^, (thereby) &c., are frequently introduced into a leading sentence where the correspondmg English word is omitted. Ex. : dx ift bef^alB unjufriebert, nml fein 5'reunb nid)t Her ift ; he is (therefore) discontented because his friend is not here. VI. Sd^ulbig with fein, signifies "to be indebted, to owe;" the word denoting the amount, being put in the accusative. (§ 132. 3.) Ex.: (Bx ift mir nur einen ©niben fcf)nlbig ; he owes me but a florin, ^^erj-anfen also signifies to owe, but only in the sense of ''to be obliged for, to ascribe to." Ex. : 3d^ Jjerbanfe mcinc ©enefung ber reinen l^uft ber Sc^ireij; I owe my recovery to the pure air of Switzerland. Exercise 48. 5{nfga6e 48. Stt'geBen, to deliver ; ^iud 'iubxen, to carry out; SefefiP, m. com- mand ; -Sefcerr'fd'eu, to go- vern, rule; (S'i)uarb, m. Edward ; (S'rfaVoinv^, /. expe- rience, knowledge; S'rfld'ruug, /. expla- nation ; %a^i3,, able : gami'Ite,/. family; Sct^en, to follow ; "^iinrcn, to conduct, guide ; , ©e'v-icnftcinb, m. sub- ject ; ©erii, willingly, (I.) : ©mub, m. ground ; >5eilen, to heal ; §ei'benfd)aft, /. pas- sion; Seifien, to lend ; 9la6en, m. boat, skiff; ?lctf)ig, necessary ; 3lun, now ; diavLl), rough ; cSi'Jher, safe, safely; Stcinb, m. position, (in.); Stubt'ven, to study ; Iteberfe'lieu, to trans- late;' Itngeru, unvdilingly ; Uuuiig, useless, fruit- less; S]c([en'ben, to fimsh, complete ; Scrfitlag, 7n. propo- sal; 2Barm, warm; SBuube,/. wound; 3etdnu:ng,/. drawing. 134 (§x fcmmt nid)t, unb jtoar trcil er !ranf ift. fSJldn OiiM jxfdU imb metn D^effe jagt geru. Sdi mcdUe gevu unffen, teie inct Uijr e5 Ift. grei(;ett, ©ercdi'ti^feit imb 2Bat)vv fjeit fcUteii aUe 3}Zenfd)en gern S5ieiMeF bin idi ^i)nm fdmlbig? S'r ticvban!t' fein Scben ber (2d)ueP; ligfeit feine^ ^ferbe^. (SS ift Oliemanb im @tcinbe, bte 2)auer- feines Sebeu^ »orau^ ju beftiir/men. 2Bol)l Id^t ber ^feit [idi aud bem •^evjen jiel)en, bcdi nte irirb ber SSerle^'te mel)r gefun'ben. SBcI;t bcffre 9JJdnner t'i)ixn'S bem !lca mcu fcineu Steifeu unb feineu drfai^rurigen. 9. SSenu (Bit bie 33uduT uctt)tg i;aberi, fo leif^e idi 3i;neu biefelbeu i-^cu ^^evjeu geru. 10. (Sr treimt fid) ungern )^cn feiuer ^amilie. 11. 3d) fjabe geru ein trarmeg Biinmer. 12. 93er tocUk uidU geru bie 3Suubeu eiueg fraufen «§er§eug f)ei(en? 13. ©inb @ie ini ©taube, cim ba^'ere (Svfldrung iiber biefen ©egenftaub abju? gebeu? 14. 3d) ir^dre e^^ iuel;! im Btaniz, aber idi ^labe jegit fetne ^dt, eg ju t6un. 15. ^cnnt ibr uu3 ftdier uber biefen 3att, /. pre- sence ; <&etm'fi!*cn, to visit; •^kx'bhlhnx, to remair here ; S)Ut't§etIen, to impart ; (gditueigen, to be silent ; Sd;ir>erlidi, hardly ; (gd^trie'rigfeit, /. dif- ficulty ; (gtranb, ?n. strand, sliore ; Un'annefimlidifeit, / disagreeableness ; 33erbru^', m. vexation; 93crfd^6'nern, to em- bellish, improve ; 2^ev^3fltdi'ten, to oblige; ^evfdnrin'ben, to vanish ; 5Bibcrfpre'd)ett, to con- tradict; 3cUiicr, m. toll- gatherer. 136 3d) tourbe ba^ 33uct) ncd) l^afeen I should still have the book, if I itJenn id) eg nidbt tierlo'ren ^dtte. had not lost it. ©u tinirbeft jc^t ^reube I^aben, Thou wouldst now have com- tu?nn X>n iDehie (2d]ul'bigfett fort, if thou hadst done thy ^dljan' I;dtteft. duty. (Jr iDi'irbe bef'fere ^reimbe Ijabm, He would have better friends, if timxn cr auf'rid)tiger tndre. he were more upright. SBtr iinh'bcn ®elb ijabm, toenn \v\x We should have money, if we fpar'fanuu* rtdven. were more economical. 3f)r Wiirbct 3:!rauet |!att i^reube You would have sorrow, instead f)aben, lv»emt bag «^inb geftcr'Beii of joy, if the child had died. tudre. (Sie trijrbcn mef}V Jtlugl^ctt ijabm, They would have more prudence, Wiwn fte me()r 93erftanb fatten. if they had more understand- ing. (Sx iinirbe ein gvof eg @(iicf ge^abt He would have had a gi-eat l^aben, inenn ev ti^e^niger trdge fortune, if he had been less getoe'feu todre. slothful. 1. 3d) f)dtte niir \ii)on mamhm ©erbvuf (Syn.) erfiparen fonnen, mini id), ftatt jit )r>iberfvredien, gefdinjtegen Bdtte. 2. 3di mcdite it)iffen, trag (£te gett^cin ()dtten, ixmm @ie an metner @te([e getvefen ti?dveu. 3. ffi}enn bag @d)icffal mid) nid)t fieimgefiidit fjdtte, tri'trbe id) fcbtt»erlidi ^u biefen ?(nftditen gcfcmmen fetn. 4. "@v Ijaik gliicHid) fein fonnen, \vmn er bie ©etegen^eit ju benit^en ttei-ftanben ^dtk. 5. -^dtte bag Staffer bie Q3rucfe mit foi-tgeriffen, fo trdve bev Bcitner i^evloren gewefen. 6. ^dtte id) ju JDiv fonimeu fonnen, fo iinivbe id) geii>tf nidit I;ier geblieben fein. 7. (|g tinivben nie grc^e SDldnner aufgctreten fein, tt^enn fte fid) bnrd) (2din?ierig; feitcn nnb UnanneT;m{i*feiten I)dtten anfljalten taffen (§ 74. 3.) 8. 2Cenn idi bag I)dtte erveid)en ircKen, tuag id] tininfdite, fo I}dtte id) fieif iger luib anfiattenber arbeiten miiffen. 9. StBdre ber ^rennb nidit innric()l ge? itcrbcn, fo 'tidtte er getinf bag §eft bnrdi feine ©egemvavt i^ei-fd)onevt. 10. Sffienn er gerufeu I;dtte, iriirbe id) il)n gefjovt ^aBcn. 11. SSir irollen nid)t anggcf)en, eg mod)te regnen. 12. Semt @ie niir etwag ^d^^x^6 iiBcr biefc Slngelegen'fieit mittfjeilen (Syn.) mod)ten, fo iinirben (2ie mid) fe^r ter:p|i[iditen. 13. @g ivdre meine grcftc ?5"reube, aUe ilOlenfd)en gliicf? lid) jn fetjen. 14. 3d) I^dtte of^ne 33erftanb (Syn.) fein miiffen, ti^enn idi mid] anf biefe (Sadie f;dtte einlaffen iroKcn. 15. Qjerfd^wnnben ift ber (gtranb in ber ^erne, c Yok gerne, \ydr' xd\ nodi im 2]aterlanb ! 16. SBenn er irdre, \rie id) iC)n rttfinfdie, nnb it^enn er aikn meinen ^tnforbcrnn? gen entf^n-od^en f;dtte, )a.v;irbe id) i^n be^alten hahm. Questions. 1. Can you explain the difference between the conditional mood, and the subjunctive V 2. Can you give some idea of what is stated § 144. 1., &c. ? .3. Can you repeat the first example in tiiis lesson? 4. Can you repeat the example where the conditional mood is used in exclamation? 5. The interrogative form ? 137 LESSON XLVL fccti0n XLVL er, fidi bem ©ctiicffal gebut ; submit patiently to their des- big ju uuterwer fen. tiny. 1. ^cnnen (Ste [tcb bee 2;age^ meiner Slnfunft nidit mef)r erinnern ? 2. D ja, idi erinncvc midi beffelben no* fe{)r gut. 3. (S"ti giebt stele 2)Zcn; fdien, bte iUi) licbcr tl)rer fdile*ten, al^ tf)rer guten @igen[*aften erinnern. 4. @g t)iett fd)ttier, ii)n i^on ber SBa^rfiett btefer (Srjdblnug ^u iiberjeugen. 6. (S6 ^ait jmr^eilen fditvcr dwaS jn glauben, lua^ mx nidit fcegreifen !onnen. 6. (§6 fdUt bem armen, aber fieif tgen ?Jlanne fditner, bte -Oiilfe frcmber ZmU in Slnfprud^ ne{)men jn miiffen. 7. 2)ie engllfdie <2pradie fdUt mir fditrerer, aU bie fran^ofifd^e. 8. S3et feineni @elbe, feinen S]er; lioanbten unb feincn .ftenntuiffen, fiel eg i()m nidU fdwer, etne ^hcn fo gute, aU angene()me (gteUe ju finben. 9. SBarum lernt 3f)r 53ntber fo ml fdmet? ler, aU (2te ? 10. iffieit cr etu beffereg ®^'i)ad)tn\^ (j-at unb bte 2B6rter beffer be!)alten !aun. 11. Jlonnen @te fid) nidit metjr erinnern, tt?em (Sie bte ^iidier unb bas papier gegeben baben ? 12. 3* fann midi beffen nid)t mebr erinnern. 13. 3^er ^aulenjer bel)dlt bie 9tegetu nidn, teeil er bie? felben ntdU griinbltdi lernt unb lieber fpielt a(g arbettet. 14. 2)er 2)iebftaf)l ift etn S3erbred^en. 15. (§x brixcfte bem armen JDZanne einen 2;i)aler in bte >§anb. 16. 3n ber §erne erinnern tcix nng gern ber greunbe. 17. 3nnge Sente tragen junjeilen Written, urn gelefjrt au^jufe? Questions. 1. To what does „ ft c^ evtnnevn" correspond? 2. Examples? 3. What particular is referred to § VlQ. ? 4. What is the hteral translation of „er eriniievt fid) iiu^incv?" 5. When is the verb behalten employed? 6. Examples? 7. Instead of what is the dative of a personal pronoun used? 8. Examples? 9. Did you consult § 1'29. Obs. ? 10. What does the phrase „e3 falit fc^iuer^or „e» t)alt fc^itn" signify? 11. Examples? LESSON XL VII. gtctxon XLVIL VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. Some verbs in German govern the genitive, (§ 125.) while those in English of corresponding signification, require the ob- jective. Ex. : ©ebenfe meiner; remember me (or, think of me.) 3d^ a, at length; (3"iuBet;'ren, to be in want of, dispense with : (S'r\rd^/uen, to men- tion ; ©cfdi'Iiyfcit, /. com- plaisance, kind- ness ; ^virren, to hope, wait for ; ^tevfiir', for this, for it; 3ammern, to distress, grieve : Sdnc^ft, long since (ago) ; Seib, 71. pain, sorrow ; Scf)iten, to reward ; 91a dVldtTiv3!e it./, n egli- gence, remissness ; ^lefce, /. speech, harangue ; Sftcgie'reii, to govern, rule ; 91eyiiment', r?. regi- ment ; (2ei)nfud:)t,/. longing; ©dicncn, to spare ; Si-'cttea, to mock, f coff at ; Stcrben, to die; Strenge, severely; Uekrfte'ben, to over- come, endure ; Uuentbe^i'Ii6, indis- pensable; UnteiuVltdi, insuffer- able; XXn^vafsrlieit, /. false- hood , CGertrei'fen, to repri- mand ; ffi]a{)i'ne[)meu, to ob- serve ; Sulefet', at last. SBebur'feu t fommt. 15. Sdngft fdicn Barrte idi 3^ver mtt SeBnfudn, ais id:) 'Sic enbtidi fcmmen faB. 16. Sammert iid^ mdH ie6 ^inbco, bao yer; laffen auf ber Strafe Iduft ? 17. 33enn beu g-iirftcn ba^ ®clf jammern irfirbe, fc triirbe er anberS regieren. 18. S(Ber ha§ 3}clf trirb iBn Bier; fur nocB Ic^nen unb bann feiner nid^t fdicnen. 19. Q$ fcnntc trcBl ber aJliiBe IcBnen, nad^ dalifcrnieu ^u reifen. 20. 3di iin"trbe gem biefe jllei; ber fd^cnen, trenn id^ anbere f^attt. 21, 3d> iriinfdie fcineo anbern Xc'tzS §u tterBen, al^ im Xch ber -SKterSfditrdd^e. 22. S3ergiB meine 2Qcrte ntdit. 23. S3ergi^ ber uBerftanbenen Seiben, aBer rcrgi^ nid^t bie gencifc; nen ^reuben. 24. SBenn bie yiirften fcnnten, fc fd^cnten ne teeber ber ^rciBeit, nc* fcnft eine» Sied^te^ iBrer ©clfer. 25. 3^er SeBrcr barf ber 9^ad>fdfngfe{t unb Unit>aBrBeit eineg Sdnller^ ni*t fd^ciien, fcnbern muf fte ftrenge iterireifen, );veiin er fie tcal)rnimmt. 26. (Jr pffegte feineS -33aterg in feinem 2(lter unb pjiegte mi6, ba id) bie @l)clcra Batte. 27. dv fpcttete metner unb bemerfte nidit, tote He 9(nberen iiBer ii}n fpctteten. QuESTioxs. 1. Do verbs, in both languages, of Hke significations, govern the hke cases 1 2 Can you repeat the first example 1 3. How is. " he needs or wants money" expressed ia German 1 4. How the phrase " he thinks of me'"? 5. "What case do some verbs of the above class more commonly take ? 6. Examples '? 141 LESSON XLVIII. Section XLVIII ADJECTIVES REQUIRING THE GENITIVE. Adjectives, in German, that require the genitive^ generally, ansAver to our adjectives /o//o?^ec? by the preposition "o/"." (§ 124.). Ex.: Scf) Bin bcr egcS funbig -, he is acquainted with (has knowledge of) the road. Sie ift be6 ©djteiSens gert)c^nt ; she is accustomed to (in the habit of) writing. Some of these adjectives are also used with the accusative (§ 124. 2. Obs. ). Ex.: ^d) Bin baS @e^en nicfjt geii^o^nt; lam not accustomed to walking. (Sr ift e§ miibe ; he is tired of it. Exercise 52. 5(ufgaBe 52. 5lcf'ev6au, ???. agricul- grcmm. devout, (Sdnilb, /. fault, of- ture ; pious ; fense ; Sln'fla^en, to accuse ; ®et^tg, covetous ; (Sdmlbig, guilty ; S3dr, 7?i. bear ; ®ef6n3d^^ rz. gossip ; (Summe,/. sum; -33ebiirf'tig, wanting, ©cftdii'big, confess- Zi}at,f. deed; needy; ing; S^tcn, w. throne ; iBe^Iei'teu, to accom- <§anbirerf, n. handi- Ue'&erbrii^tg, weary, pany, guide ; craft, trade ; disgusted ; S5cuo't6lo(t, necessary; ^aut, /. skin, hide ; XXii's^ctrcfint, unae- 53eute, /. booty, prey ; <£>elfen, to help ; customed ; ^evcr', before ; funbig (feiii) (to be) Un'tunbig, unacquain- S3eRnift', conscious acquainted (with) ; ted with ; (of) ; I'anbgut, n. farm ; Un'wnti), unworthy ; 93cben,7w.gi'ound,soil ; ^anb'Ieben, w. country- SSerbdd^'tig, suspect- 33cfe,?n. v.dcked (per- life; ed; son) ; 9tddifte, m. neighbor ; 33ertrin'fen, to spend S^ienft, m. assistance, Dlieraalg, never, at no (for drink) ; serdce ; time; 93erii'beu, to commit; i^reunbfd^aft,/. friend- Olid^ter, m. judge ; SCertt), worthy ; ship; Sdne^eu, to shoot; Bu'funft,/. future. 2)ie ber.Ke|erei an'geHagten The persons accused of heresy, ^erfc'neu mu^tett in ber SScrjeit were compelled in (the) former ben 'ich bes geuerg crlei'teu. tunes to suffer death by fire. 5)er Stvme, bcr eiiier ^acf)n1td) au§cd)yerrat^g fdnilbig. SD'laudier Sdeufd) yerbringt' fein Se^ ben iin'eingebenf feiner e'roigen 5Seftim^mung. Scnn er nur feiner (Sd)ulb geftdn'; big trdre, ict) woiik it|m gem »er; jei'fjen. If the horse were conscious of his strength, none could con- trol him Only he (the one) who is master (capable) of his calling, can (be glad of) enjoy his life. I am sure of my cause, and ac- quainted with the road. Accustomed to ride, I am soon tired of walking. Guilty or not guilty of a crime, every one was condemned. The hunter is sure of his aim. I am now weary of my life. A thief is guilty of (the) theft, a murderer of (the) murder, and, in a despoiic country, a liberty-loving soul, of high treason. Many a man wastes his life un- mindful of his eternal destiny. If he would only confess (were confessive, &c.) his guilt, I would gladly pardon him. 1. 2Jiandier ftefit eineg 93erbredieng angefkgt tocr feinen 9flid^tern, unb ift fid) ciuer fleinern ©diulb ben.mf t, aU biefe eg (L. 36. VI.) fein Wuxi ben, trenn ba^3 ^l^olt itjrer ^anblungen funbig, ober \u fdhft bnfiWen ge? jidnbig wdrett. 2. 3di hin einer fold)en Slrbeit ungen)ot)nt nnb tui'irbe fte ni6t tbnu, roenn id) nid)t beg ©elbeg bebiirftig ludrc. 3. %t hin einer gtcfen eg f)erjtid} miibe. 12. ®ut, \ioenn ©te meiner liberbriifftg ftnb, iuerbe id) ge^en. 13. 9Ziemalg irerbe id) mid) einer S§at fd^ulbig mad)en, n-cldu mid) S^rer ?5reimbfdiaft unroiirtig mad)eu ti*iirbe. 14. 3d) hi\i%z eiii Sanbgut, aber ungeiDc[)nt ber Slrbeit, unb unfunbig 'i:z^ 3((fcvbaueg, bin id) beffelben uberbriiffig. 15. diner ift \jt^ Slnbern tr^ertf), aber aud) oft diner beg %nf bern unwert^. 16. (Jin ^onig, ber bag S3oIf nid)t liebt, ift beg %i)xomi unWtttbig. 17. 2Beiw iiw mid) aud) (L, 63.) beg '^\^^t(ii^U eerbddjtig 143 Jidltft, fcinii idi bicfer Xbat bccb uidit iicftdnbi^^ foiii, UhmI i* ftc \nd)t Dev; ubt babe. 18. ©iitbe Ktuc>3 iJebcitei ftirbt ber ^^vomme, fohicv bcfeit Xijat bmvuHt, iinb fiol) Kiiu'cs S^cbcc* ; bod) bev '-Bcfe, eiiuicbenf foiiiev 3:i)vitcn uiib binviij;t fniiev iva-bvcdion, fi'ivd^tct bcii :Jcb iiub bie3nfuitft. 19. ijes bfr iPtnifd) i)'t fdiicii ilcbC'^ (\cm^, abcv uiifuiibt;^ bcr 3i'it boffclbcu. 20. SSeiiii bio iDtcni'dieu imnicr bco :Icbc^ ciiii^cbcitf jvdven, unirbeii fie eft uidit fc bcfcr ;IlKitcii fd"u(tiv^ ivcibcii. 21. J^llf bciiiem lUddiftcn iiiib fi\ii^c uidit, cb ci- bcincr -^iilfe l^ul•^io| ift, ircnn cv bcvcu bebuvftig i|"t. 22. 'jdi iimU Sic beglciten, idi bin bcs^ SBcgeg ganj funbig ; idi fcl)e e^, (£ie fiub bcffeii unhiubig. 23. 3di baufe 31)nen, mciu >.6cvr I i6 biu 3()vci? 2)ien; fic^ nid^t bcuctbigt; benn ba idi be^ @el)eng mi'ibe uub beg ^-aljreug iiberbriiffig biu, uu^rbe idi ^icr bleiben. 24. SBag t(}ut eiu ^TZauu in I'lme; fitci, ber feine?^ ^paiibivcvfi^ fuubig unb ber Spmdie uufnnbig ift V 25. (Sr mu^ jcbe XHrbeit t()uu, beven er fd[)ig ift, nub eingebeuf beg 3pndnv>crtg feiu, irei- (L. 70.) nidU arbcitet, fell nidit effen. Questions. 1. How are adjectives, that iii German, require the genitive, generally translated in EngUsh ? 2 How do you render „3rt) bin ber 5ad)e geiiMB?" 3 Do we sometimes employ in their translation, adjectives fol- lowed by with or to ? 4. How do you translate „(Sv i\t i)e§ iCn^gr^ hn\irc'd)en, promis- ed; 2Baii'berer, m. traveler (on foot) ; ffian^e,/. bug; 2Bc()I'gefdUig, wbII- pleasing. Seber red^t'lidie 9Jtann ift bem ®u; ten geiieigt' mx'b bem Q3ofeu ab'- geneigt. SPflir ift niditg me^r an'gelegen, farai. 5)er ^uub ift fetnem ^ervu gef)ci*'; fcim imb banfbar ; if arum tin(( ber 2}Zenfdi i{im nidit gleid^ fetii ? ©em (gditffer finb jene v^lippen bie gefd(}r'itdiften, ireldie i(;m ni*t l&emcrf'bar ftub. ^et beincn greunben ergc'ben unb betneix getnben gcfdt'Iig. S!Bag bem (Siiien nulj,Iidi ift, ift oft bem Stubern fdidblt*. S* bin .5[}nen fiir 3§re ©iite fe{)r ycrBunben. 9JJan6e ^Renfd^en finb ben ftlKen SCdffcrn gleidi, an'genetjm bem Stnge, aber nntreu bem'jentgen, ber fid) il)nen an'5?ertrant. Every upright man is inclined to good, and disinclined to evil. There is nothing more important than to be serviceable to' my friends, where I can. The dog is obedient to his master, and thankful ; why will man not resemble him ? To the sailor, those rocks (cliffs) are the most dangerous which are not perceptible to him. Be devoted to thy friends, and obliging to thy enemies. What is useful to one, is often injurious to another. I am very much obliged to you for your kindness. Many men are like the quiet waters, agreeable to the eye, but unfaithful to him who entrusts himself to them. 1. (2ie finb 3f)fem 33ater fef;r dt)ntidi, benn erirar, gleid) 3f)nen, aBgc^ neigt bem 9taud>en unb abi;cfb bem !lvinfen. 2. 2Bag mir ange^ortg ift, laffe \i^ mir audi angelegen feln. 3. 5(ngene()m irdre eg mir, trenn xdre. 4. SCenn €ie mir audi i^etiranbt finb, fo ift mir bcdi 3{)r 33etragen burdiang nid^t anftdn^ big, unb idi umvbc benfen, e5 irdre 3t)nen felbft bemerfbar, bap Seute, benen 3^r 33etragen befaunt ift, 3t}nen nidit ge^ogen finb. 5. Sebem ben!enbeu 2)lanne ift ee^ bemerfbav, baf ci3 gixtjien nid)t Ieid)t Ift, ein a}ctf 145 fidi cv{|cben ju mad\en. 6. 3* will 3f)ncn t^cvn bcljutfiid) fein, cine Sin;; \tclln]\0{ 5u crl)v-iUcn. 7. S)ceiiicm -iiater ift bie Ic^te ill^cuerutuj nod) fe^r cviuiierlldi. 8. ©er fonute ciiicm .Kiiibc felnb felii ? 9. ®cfd()rUd) ift tern '^iHiubcrcv |ciicv -^'fvib. 10. @ci ^cfd^^ij} bciiicm 9tdd^ften, gel^cvfam bcincv Ctn-u^fcit, baiiii wivb biv bicfc cjeiicioit uiib jcuer gcirc^cu fcln. 11. :i;^ft ci^ "Mmcn v^encfim, cineii (S^ajicrj^ciiiij ju madnni ? 12. SftSfjnen bci6 iHU-fprcdicito ©clb gcuMp ? 13. xDap bev giivft iiidit gleidigefiiiut mit bem a3clfe, unb ba^J ^df bcm g-uvften gletdi^uUlcj ift, niadit bem ©rfteru bag Otcvveveu fdnrcr, nub ift bem ^el^tevu l;iuber(idi an fcincm ©ti'icfe. 14. 2)ic (£tcvue ftnb miv ^iinftiij, leidit luivb mir meiu Unterncl)men fein. 15. aSenn bie aSan^eu beni a)lcnfdien audi nid)t fdidblidi finb, fo finb fic i^m bed) Idftivj. 16. a)lir ift e^J fel^r licb, ba^ id) biv in biefer @adie nii^lid) bin. 17. ^alt ju tvinfcn, ift bem evfjil^ten Jlovpev fdidblid). 18. ^cU ncm 5"veunbc tvav 3f)v 8cb fel;r fd)meidielf)aft. 19. @ut §u toerben, tfi bcm SafterKiften fdnx^er, benn er bteibt genu^t^nlidi feinen Dleigungen treu. 20. a.1iandiev ©dnrad^e ift bem ©tavfen an ®eift iibeiiegen. 21. SOSeld) sin Unterfdiicb liegt bavin : cin S)tenfd) ift bem anbevn ungteidi, unb eiti 3)ienfd^ ift bem anbevn und^nlidi ? 22. 2Bie ftef)t ba^ @piel ? 23. Tlix \cl}x ungunftig. 24. @o unlieb eg miv ijl, muf id) biv evHdven, ba^ miv bein @efdm>d§ unleib(idi ift. 25. 31>ev modite n?cf)l ben ©vnnbfa^ gtauben : „rcsx feinem^onig nidit untevtl)dnig, ift untveu feinemSSatevlanbe." 26. (Se ift miv eUMg unoevgep(id), n)ie fet)v id;) biv i^evhrnben bin. 27. Ulid^t jebev, bcr mir yeinrtanbt ift, i\i mix ami) irto()lgefdUig. Questions. 1. What do adjectives in German that require the dative usually answer to in English 1 2. How is „(5§ ift miv unangeiiel)m/' rendered in English'! 3. How would you say in German, he is similar to his father 1 4. How do you English the phrase, eS ift i^m etn IdfiigeS ©e? fc^aft? LESSON L. ^tcUonL. VERBS REQUIRING THE DATIVE. Many verbs compounded with the particles, ah, an, auf, 6ei, cut, er, nadj, i)er, i)cr, ju, and txnber ; as, also, baitfen^to thank; brc()en, to threaten; folgeii, to follow; ge^orcf)ett, to obey; fd)meid)ern, to flatter, &c., (§ 129. 4.) govern the dative. Ex. : (§,x mtk^U bem ©littf unb ber ^offnung ; he resigned (the) happiness and (the) hope, ^en Beften 9)Zenfd)eit KeBett ^tf)Ux an ; faults cleave to the best of men, 2)er ^-elbr^err ger;otd}te bein ^efe^le beg ^aiferS ; the commander-in-chief hearkened to the command of the emperor, mux eitt ©clabe fc^mei*elt bem <^errn, -- fein fyreier bem greien; only a slave flatters the master— no freeman a freeman. 7 146 Exercise 54. 5tb'fagen,to renounce; ®cBrcd)'en, 5tcbt, /. outlawry, ban ; Sln'gcfjoren, to belong; 5ln'f)angen, to adhere ; StuffDVi:;eru, to sum- mon ; S3a^ ern, n. Bavaria; ^eeVreu, to honor ; ^ei'fommen, to get at ; S3eKfief)en, to assist : Sei't^imnten, to as- sent; ^ei'rcol^nen, to be present at; ^efud)', m. visit ; Sraten, m, roast- meat; 2)rcf)en, to threaten; (Sf)re,/. honor ; (Sntfa'gen, to resign ; (SvUe'gen, to succumb; (Srroei'fen, to render ; i^lieben, to flee ; §tu*en, to execrate ; giigen, to submit, conform : need ; @ebiif)'rcn, to be due ; ©efal'Ien, to please, like; ©elten, to be of value ; ©enii^gen, to suffice ; @(eidien, to be like ; ^evjog, m. duke ; «^ei'^cg0l)ut m. ducal coronet ; <6ci|nung;/. hope ; v^aifer, m. emperor ; jllingeln, to ring (the bell) ; .frieggjug, m. warlike expedition ; Rxcm,f. crown; Sduten, to toll, ring; Seucbten, to light ; Sotre, m. lion ; 5J^agb,/. servant-girl ; 5Jlif lin'geu, to foil ; S'iaditem', after that ; Ort, m. place, region ; 2)er'jentge, toeUter einer feofen ®e; fell^fd^aft nidit ab'fagcn fami, fann feiner guten an'gehoren. 3§t §reuub begcg nete mtr gejiern, aber e^ fiel mir tiid)t Bei, tuie fein 9Zame ift. giirfteu entfvi'geu nidit [o letAt bem 2:!^rcne. Sag nii|t eg bem 2)ietifd^en, bem \2d)icf'fale 511 nnberftre'beu ? — jietg muf er ber 3)ladit beffcl'beu iinterlie gen. %xam nid>t jebem 2}lenf6en imb am aUerirenig'fteit ben'jenigeri, bie bir fd'TTtetdiern. 2)ie ©rma^'nung eineg t5^eiinbeg gilt mir ind, unb id^ felge ibr gcrn. 5(ufgaBc 54. to want, 9tat^, m. council ; Sd^merfen, to taste, relish ; (Sdimeldu^In, to flatter; 'edirceben, to wave ; S^ro^en, to dare, defy ; !triibe, gloomy ; Ue'belrocUen, to wish ill; Ueberjie'^en, to in- vade ; Ur' fa dH\/. cause ; Serlan^jen, n. demand ; SSernunft^ /. reason sense ; SSeg'fcmmcu, to get away ; SBiberftrc'ben, to strug- gle against; 2Gunfdi, m. wish ; 3u'ge§dven, to belong to; SiH'uen, to be angry at one; 3ut»ci-'fcmmen, to an- ticipate. He who cannot renounce an e\ii company, can belong to no good one. Your friend met me yesterday, but it did not occur to me, what (how) his name is. Princes do not resign the throne so easily. What avails it for man to struggle against (ihe) liis des- tiny ? — he must always suc- cumb to its power. Trust not every one ; and least of all, those who flatter thee. The admonitioa of a friend is of much value to me, and I fol- low it gladly. 1. SBenn in aikri Seiteii ein SJIdditiger bem anbern feiiib trar, fo fagte er bemfetbeu '^b. 2. 2fuo a((en Orten, bie i^m ange^orteu, fammelte biei fer mddittge ^^err ^\i 2}Zdnni?r, bie ifttn anrnngen. 3. Dl^adJbem fte feinem ' 147 33crf)atcn bcii^efiimmt l^attcii, scr^flirfiteten fie fi*, ii)m bci^uftcf>cii, uub bem Jlricc^e bci^iwctiiien. 4. @c(di ein (L. 41. VI.) mddnkjer ^ert wax J^eiuridi ber Sciih\ •^er^oij ihmi -i\-i>)crn, UHndnnn i]vcpc Sanbev jiu3c()crten uni> Xciufciibc iHMi .Rrte^crn ^ehordUcn. 5. 2)odi bie Sixcue ehuS ^ai\n6 fd^U'cbfe Ibm immcr s:>er ^^Iiicjni. 6. S)cr Jj>eqcv^!j(mt ctfJiiiij^e i^*-'^ nii^i. 7. (Sx traiirc fcincr eij^enen J^vaft uub trc^te bem JSaifer. 8. 5)cr ^aU fcr fcrberte ibu auf, ftdi fciiieu Q3cfcfHeu ^u ^i^ni, uub fcvcMe il-ra mit ber SldH. 9. 5>od^ bem >^^cv^0v5e, ber ciuem Soireu c^i'ii), cjvitt ivcber 93cruunft, ucd^ i^uter Oivirb. 10. ^bin geficl uur feiuc civjene SJicinuui:;, uub erbadUe ber Jtraft, bie ii}m gebrad^ 11. (Sx nnberftrebte bem a3erlaugcn, bem ^viifer ciue (Sbre ^u eviveifeu, bie bemfclbcu 9ebuf)rte. 12. Ser .f^aifer, ber bem -pcrjcge fd^cu feit lauger ^dt ubel trcUte uub i(}m, tuegeu feiueo litdje^, jfirnte, fam ifnn ^ur'cr, uub uber^cg itiu mit jlrieg. 13. 2)er Jt^ie^ejui) mip(aui5 '^^"^ ^ciifa- uidit. 14. ®er -Ser^cg fcuute ber feiub; lid^eu !i)iv"idu uidn uMberfiebcu uub eriag bem Jlaifer iu ber iSd^tad^t. 15. @r mupte Uvidi Gua.laub fJebeu, unb uur feiue ^amilie uub etui^e ^-reuube fclgtcu if)m. 16. -^icr eutfvigte er jeber ^offnuug uub fiudite bem StcI^e, aU ber Urfvid^e feiueg Sleubt^. 17. 3f'rem 23uufd">e entfr'red'cub, iverbe iA ^imen beim eud^eu bea $ferbes5 belfeu, bvis? 3biteu tregcjefcmmeu ijl:. 18. 3di fd^meid^le mir, ba^ 3ie mid^ mit ,3brem -23efud>e beebreu irerbeu. 19. (Sr mixii mir cictinf fd^abeu, roenu er mir bcifcmmeu !cmite. 20. 3* Idutete meiuem 33ebieuteu uub flin(3c(te mciner Tlaa^i, aber z6 balf mir uidH'j, feiuce fvim. 21. ©er Steru ber ^dcffnuug leud^tet bem 2)Jeu^ i&^en felbfi iu triibfier DIadH. 22. xDiefer SBrateu fdnnecft (L. 87. T.) mir uidu. Q■c^E:sTIO^'S■ 1. ^\^lat case do many verbs compounded v,-ith er, tjer, &c. govern 1 2. Can you repeat the rest of these panicles ^ 3 ^\Tiat case do baiifcii, broben, &,c govern! 4 Can you repeat the entire list"? 5. Can you repeat the substance of § 129. 4. 1 6. Can you give an example of a verb compounded with „a w" govering the dative ''. 7. How would you ex press in German : " the scholar obeys the teacher 1" LESSON LI. CttiionU. VERBS REQUIRING AN ACCUSATIVE OF A PERSON, AND A GENITIVE OF A THING. Verbs signifying to accuse, to acquit, and some others (§ 126. § 127.) govern the accusative oi ?i person, and the genitive of a thing. Ex. : @r li^Q^i feitten 5^iener be» ^TieBfta^^Io an; he ac- cuses his sen-ant of theft. 3)er ?5ctnb B'emad)tii3te fid) ber ^efiung; the enemy took possession of (mastered) the fortress. 3ie Be* rau6tcn mic^ nieiney @e(be6 unb meiner @bre ; they robbed me of my money and of my honor, ©ie Oiic^tcr fprac^en i^n bc3 2)?or* 148 M lo^ unfe entlebigten i^n fomit etncr grofen ^nxd^t-j the judges declared him (spoke him free) innocent of the murder, and, therefore, released him from (a) great fear. 2)er I^anbmanrt riil^me fid) be5 ^^flugS ; the husbandman may pride himself of the plow. 3Sof)( bem, ber fid) beS ^iirftigen amiimmt, ^f. 41. 2.; blessed is he that considereth the poor (needy), Ps. 41. 2. Exercise 55. Ql u f g a 6 e 55. §(n'fdnttbigen, to ac- cuse of; Sln'wefeiib, present ; Stu'geubltcflid^, instant- aneously ; ^ab, 72. bath; ^eflei'peit, to be stu- dious of; 53ec^c''&pn, to resign, divest one's self of ; 53e(ei}'rcu, to teach, instruct ; Seniacl/tiv]cu, to over- power ; S3erar/bea, to rob, de- prive of; Scrotto', already ; 53efcbuI'i:)ii]eu,to accuse of; S3ct'teln, to beg ; 93c5iid)'ttcjen, to charge with ; S3itten, to beseech ; (Sutblof t', destitute ; enn bit fannft. @ie bemdcb tigten ftd) be^ S^lduber^, ber ben jlaufmann feine^ @elbe^ Beraubt' fjatte. Accused of high treason, he esca- ped the dungeon, only by flight. The Emperor Charles V. resig- ned (divested himself of) all his crowns, and went into a cloister. Teach (convince) me of a better, if you can. They possessed themselves of the robber, who had robbed the merchant of his money. 149 (Sx Befaiiu' fid^ cinet^ ©fffcvii, urn iiuiH ciiicv Uu'ival}vf)clt bcjudi'tlijt ju ivcvbni. aiZcin @e(ni Kit micb a(fci3 ©clbct^ ciuilejjt'. 5iUcv mchuv ©cfdidf'tc uuu'be id^ mid^ cntlc'bii]cn nub mUb ciuco vub'uicii ^>?cIhm;!? fveuen. ©ntbc't^et niidi btcfcr tvau'ficscn -^>'Iidit ! :Dcr @crt\t/te cvtarmt' fid) feineg (Jrin'nerc bidi ber inclen SSc^I't^a; ten, bie idi blr envied'. ©eben'fe beiiieg ^rcunbc^ felB]! in irelter %cxm ! ®cun idi feiiic^ SBetra'gen^ au^riege, bercti er ftch mil Siedit riibmen fann. 10. ^reiiet endi fei- He bethought himself of a better (course) in order not to be ac- cused of an untruth. M}^ son has stripped me of all (my) money. I will relieve myself of all my business, and enjoy a quiet life. Relieve me of (from) this sad duty. The righteous (man) is merciful to his beast. Remember the many goods deeds (favors) that I have shown you. Remember thy friend, even in remote distance. Even if I would be silent con- cerning his behavior, I must blame his talk. Threaten as thou wilt, I ^vill laugh at thee. After completed (taken place) toil, we can cherish (the) re- pose. Many boast themselves of such deeds as they have never ac- complished. Exempt me from the necessity of punishing thee. Before I was aware of a blow, I lay stretched upon the earth. He w^as so proud that he deigned me not (no) a glance. 150 net Smf:pred)ung unb icurbiget i"^!! eurcr ^reunbf^aft. 11. (B'potkt \tU ner nidbt, treil er im ^'erfet n?ar, fonbern erfcarmt eud) t)ielmel)r feiuer unb gebenFet feiner ^eiben. 12. Seber, ber feiner ladit, fcbdme ftdi [eiiie^ eige; nen ^etragen^. 13. Sttte 5(ntt)efenben freuten fid) biefer 9^ebe, uiib man entlcbigte augcnbltcflid) ben 2lngef*ulbigten feiner i^t'ffctn. 14. 33ete^re ung betner 2Bege, o ^err ! unb berauBe un^ nidU behier ®nabe ! 15. 3n fruf;eren 3eiten tetnten bie Seute nidit einnial lefen, gefd^roeige fdireiben. 16. 3d) bin SBideng (§ 128.), im ndd)ften ©ommcr ein 53ab ju befud)en. 17. 3d) fann burd)au^ nid)t ber Stnfid)t fein, baft junge Sente ju fe()r if)rer @ett)cbn§citen ^fiegen follen. 18. (S^ jlef)t etnem SJlanne fd)dner, ]i(i) fd)oner <0>cinblungen ju befieif en, alg leerer 3Bcrte ju ruf)men. 19. SSer fid) beg £ebeng freut, foU and) be^ (gterbeng fid) erinnern. 20. fioui^ ^f)ili:pp, ^onig ber ^ranjofen, be^ ^i)roneg entfe|t, begab fid) felbft ber Stegiernng. 21. S3eibe ^^i'trften fjaben trenig Urfa*e, fidi ii)rer Stegicrung ju rii^men. 22. Sllg ©eneral 3:iili9 fid) ber (Btaht SJlagbeburg bemdd)tiget |atte, lad)te er ber §lei)enben, it>etd)e baten, fid) ii)rer ju erbarmen. Questions. 1. What cases do verbs signifying to accuse, to acquit, &c., govern 1 2. How do you express in German : "He accuses his servant of theft ?" 3. To what does <$> 126 refer? 4. What is the subject of the appended ob- servation 1 5. Can you give a Uteral translation of the example, Ps. 41. 2. ? LESSOJSr LII. gtction LII. VERBS REQUIRING THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. Some verbs govern the dative or accusative; and often with- out a difference of signification. Ex. : ^id^ raft ber «§err gu cinem anbern ©efdicift, ((SdjiUer) ; the Lord calls thee to another employment. 5lug (§^Q't)pkn f)aBe idj meinen ©oI;n gerufen; out of Egypt have I called my son. (Er ijcrfic^erte miv feine un* tranbclBare ^reunbfdjaft, (SBielanb) ; he assured me of his im- mutable friendship. (Sr i)erf{d)erte midfi beffen; he assured me of it (thereof). Exercise 56. Qt u f g a B e 56. Stb'fd)ti36ren, to abjure, forswear ; 5ln'fef;en, to behold, look at, perceive ; Stuf'geben, to give up, (with dat.) to im- pose a task " S3efie gen, to van- quish ; @ib, m. oath ; galfd), false; Soften, to taste, cost; gdugnen, to deny ; Seib^ n. affliction, pain; Srtutt)ig, courageous; ^aAVai)xmn, to imi- tate ; 0iafe,/. nose; ^affi'ten, to pass ^ilct', m. pilot; (gad^fc, m. Srtxon; S:d>afceu,?n- loss, hurt ; eclUccb'tu^feit, /. bad- ness, vileness ; ScUcii, seldom ; ©Oi^lcidV, immediate- ly; (Stavfe,/. sti-Qngth; 161 (Stcucvu, to steer, (with dut.) to check ; Uc^belftanb, m. misfor- tune, iticonvenience ; Um'fef)reu, to tarn about ; Uii'avticj, ill-behaved, rude, naughty ; Uujlerb'tidifeit, /. im- mortality ; S^cvuunfttg, discreet, judicious; 93evft di'ern, to assure ; 51>D(['ftdubivj,complete- ly; 3Bie'Dev[el;cn, to see The general abjured his faith and became (turned) Mussulman. Before the judge asked me con- cerning anything, I was obliged to take an oath. I will come in order to look at your new painting. Does one see by my appearance, that I was sick ? He is a lost son : I give him up. What you enjoined on me I have done. Good men thou must seek to imitate. He imitates the Frenchman, and wears mustaches. As the king passed this city, it was illuminated. Many streets of the city are very filthy ; this nuisance the police should put a stop to. He steered the ship fortunately through the reefs of rocks, 1. !Die alteii ©adifeu fd^woren i^ren ©ottern ab, nadibem fie\^virt ber ®rci^e ticUftanbig bcfiegt Ijatte. 2. Subem cr biefe %^ajieren (L. 65.), 14. Unter^alb hki feg 3!)crfeg liegt eine fd^cne 2Ciefe, 15. tlngeadifet beg 33eibcteg [eineg 93aterg befu*te er bag X()eater. 16. Untneit biefeg SBalbeg fab idi zimn grc^en SScgel. 17. SSermbge feineg 9ieiditfjumeg fann er bie Sirmeu un? terftii|en. 18. ©dbrenb ber te^ten 3eit fab er febr Bleidi aug. 19. 2Be; gen beg .Kriegeg fikben tk veidien ©inirobner. 20. Siefer 3ufage j^u; fclge teijxtc er juriicf. QuESTioxs. 1. What case do the prepositions oberbalb. iiiiijcacifet, &,c., govern? 2. Have you consulted the list § 109? 3 Of what does § 110 treat] 4. Have you consuhed the observations!, 2, 3, &c.? 5. Can you form a sentence exemphf)dng the use of laut as a preposition ? 6. Slu^cvbalb, &c. 1 156 LESSON LV. |'Mtt0n LV. PREPOSITIOXS REQUIRING THE DATIVE. The prepositions, entgegen, gemci^, ne6ft, feit, &c., (§ 111. § 112.) goTern the dative. Ex. : S)em (Strome entgegcn [d)linm* men iji nicf)t leidit 3 to swim against the stream is not easy. (Sr er^a^It J^ie ^adji ber 3Ba^r&eit gemci^' ; he relates the affair conformably to the truth, dx, mh\t feinen Beiben (So^nen, ift in Q(meri!a ; he, together with both his sons, is in America. (5eit bent ^age, ^a^ er feine ^eimat^ i^erlief, i]l aUt f^renbe i^on i^m geiric^en; since the day that he left his coimtry, (home) has all gladness farsaken him. Exercise 59. Q( u f g a 6 e 59. Sluf'Icfuiig, /. dissolu- tion; 9tuf'[cbauen,to look up ; 5Iu^er,except,out side; Scgen, m. bow; (Jartfici^gc, 71. Carthage: ©ntgc't^engefien, to go to meet ; ©utge'geiiriicfen, to approach towards : (S-rit, first : S-all, m. fall ; j^crbern, to demand, call for ; ©egeniVBernien, to sit over opposite; ®emdf', conformably to; Snbta'ner, m. Indian ; 3avjb,/. Imnt, chase ; ^amvf/ m. battle ; SlfteB'rere, several ; Otaut. naked, bare ; ?tebi"i, together with ; Cberft, m. colonel ; ^^feiI, 77}. arrow : 9lcmifd\ Roman ; dtiitii, n. (a mountain in Switzerland) ; t auf bem 3?utli jufammen. 7. 167 ^yiad> bem ?faUe (^artljcigc'^ ging bat? rcmlfdie Dicicf^ feincr Stuflofung irm mer mel)r entgcijcn. 8. Otditft bcm ©ciieral fcmmt bcr Dberfi. 9. 3».t (jabe ^5>etvnO?., ncbft feinen Jdinbern, ^um (S'lTcii eingelaben. 10. QBir ircrben 'Bic ill ben crftcn 'Xao^cn fammt uitfcrcm ^^Tcuube bcfudicn. 11. ^Dtit bem ^V'kiI liub ^^ccj^cn ^cht bcr ^nbivincr auf bie Sagb. 12. Scit bem brei^ig? iahri;^Mi ^xkc\e hat cs iiidn dbiilidu^ Sceiien gegeben. 13. 25on miv biir; feu v^ie 5(Ue5 forbevn. 14. ,3u bem ^immel auffdHiueiib o^ab ber .^Iraufe feineti ®eift auf. 15. 3i)m juudd^ft jtanb ber jlculg. 16. ^as ©efid^t biefesj S)ieufd^cu tji mir ^utrlber. QuESTioxs. 1. What case do the prepositions fiit^egcn, nema^, &c., govern? 2. How many prepositions of this class do you find^ 111. ? 3. How many ol them can you repeat ? 4. Can you give some statement concerning iiuS ^ 112. 1.? 5. Of au§cr, § 112. 2. ? 6. Of bet, Innncn, &c. V LESSON LYI. ^ c f t i n LYI. PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE ACCUSATRT]. The prepositions, burd^, cntlang *, Qfgen, fonber, urn, (fee, (§ 113. § 114.) govern the accusative. Ex. : 3ie bahm nxicf> burd) 3^re ©rcfmutf; Befiegt ; you have vanquished me by your magnanimity. 3db ging mit iimi ben b'tu§ enrfang ; T went with him along the river. 5^a5 Sditcffal ^at ftc^ gegeu nilcf) emt^ort; (the) Destiny has risen up against me. Wz •fic^eit ber (5rbe fcnter f^cr^lidie ^klit ift ^tauh ; all the grandeur of the world without heart-felt love is dust. Scf) ^a^e btefen 9)^orgen einen (SlM^iergang urn bie (2tabt gemacBt; I have taken (made) a promenade about the town this morning. Exercise 60. Q( u f g a B e 60. -5ln'fteUeu, to contrive ; ?Ir^;iet',/. medicine ; SuifcrfcnT, to sacri- fice : §iue^nafimi\ / ex- ception ; Sereit', ready.prompt ; S3eu^', 77?. possession; 5Betfci\3'ui§, / fear, apprehension din'tveifen, to come in, £^eftreid^, n. Anstria arrive ; (5ntlani^', along; (SrfdMe'Ben, to shoot, (to kill by shoot- uig) ; ©efan'^en, caught, captured, (as noun, prisoner) ; ^af^fevin,/. empress: fitiditcn, to direct ; 9tfiftuug, /. prepara- tion, arming; SdMmmeni, to glitter, glimmer : Sd">te'itcn, n. Silesia; Scuber, ^^■ithout; (gti'icf, n. part, piece ; -Safjt/bcit,/. truth; 31>iber, against ; Bweifel, m. doubt. Seflro-'fen, to punish; ^ran!l)eit,/. sickness; ^a^trifd^'enhinft,/ in- SRari'e,/. Mary ; terposition; Cfi'en, open, franli; * (fu.Moni] however sometimes requires the genitive ; as : 2Str fatten bett gan^cu ^fl3 sejagt, cntlang tc§ ^Balbgebirgefi. (edjtUer.) 158 2)urd) blefe tjo^le ®affe mu^ et Through this hollow way must he fommen. (@cbi(Ier.) come. Q^ giebt feinen fcbo'neren %ch, aU There is not a nobler death than bcu fiir's^ SSa'tertanb. that for (the) one's country. Df;)ue bie ^iilfe @otte^ yermo'gen Without the help of God we are tvir nl&iU §u tb,u\i. able to do nothing, ©cgeu unfer ci'geuet? -^evj ju fdm? To combat against our own heart ^feu ift fdiwer. is ditficult. 1. 3)ur* btcfeu 2Batb ifx nidit jit fommcu. 2. -^tefc 33vtcfe ^xijitU id) I)eute SJlcrgcn burdi eineu giiteu Q3efannten. 3. 3)en *^erg entlang fa^ man bie [diimmeriiben Oliiftuiigen ber geiube. 4. ^itr etnen gnumb mup man SlUeS auf^iicVf'-'^'^ 'bzx^it fein. 5. ^iir biefeg 93ctragen bcftrafte ber abater bcu Jtnaben. 6. SRan rtd)tete btc jlanonen gegcn bie @tabt. 7. 2)u bift in nencrer 3eit nidit mel^r fo cffcn gegcn midi, aU biefes fiiif)ev ber gail roar, 8. 2)ie ^einbe erfdicffen bie ©efangnen aUe ol)ne Shie^nafime. 9. Dl)ne bie S^ajtoifdienfunft beg a}aterg l)dtten bie ^tnbet cin gro^e^ Un^ gliirf anfteUen fcuncn. 10. (Scnber 3^t?eifci roirb bev ^reunb ijmte Ijin eintreffen. 11. Urn bie ^eforgnifj'e ber ^Jhittcv nidit nod) mef)t ju erf)o; Ificn, fagtc er iijv nid)t in alien ©ti'icfen bie 2Baf)dicit. 12. Urn ben 93efi| @dV(efteui3 fiiiirte 9)larie ;i;[)erefta, ^aiferin you Oefterreicb, fteben Salute lang ilrieg mit ^riebridi II., jvcnig Xion ^reupen. 13. 9Bii)er bicfe ^ranf^ hQit gibt e^ fetue ^-Irjeuei. Questions. 1. What case do the prepositions, buvc^, entlang, &c., govern? 2. Examples ? 3. How many prepositions of this class are contained in the list ^ 113? 4 Canyon repeat them? 5. What is stated in the note re- spectmg entlang? 6. What is the subject of§ 114? 7. What is stated of buvcf) &c. y LESSON LYII. lection LVII. PREPOSITIONS REQUmiXG THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. The prepositions auf, ^Inter, iiBer, &c. (§115. § 116.) are construed with the dative or accusative. Ex. : 2Bir tro^neit auf bem ?anbe ; we reside in the country, ^er 3}?atrofe fUU tcrt auf t?ic (S^i|e ber 5DZaftBciunie ; the sailor climbs up the pinnacle of the mast OBgteic^ et biefe dianU ^nUx meinem dlMm fd)miebcte, fo fam id) benrtcd) Balb fainter blefelben unb l'»erelteltc fie ; although he fabricated (forged) this trick behind my back, I soon got (came) (L. 29. I.) behind it (the same) and frustrated it. ^in @etintter ^angt uBcr ber ^tiM ] a thunder- storm is hanging over the town. UeBer biefen ©egenftanb modjU id) gem eine Otebc ^alten ; upon this subject I would fain make (hold) a speech. 169 Exercise 61. 5tn'fvanucn, to harness ClueU (to) ; 5lrm, m. arm ; Winter, behind ; Sriucjer, m. disciple ; Jt 11 iipf cu, to unite, join closely; SIcb, dear, beloved ; SDZafdu'ne,/. machine ; 2)Zaucr,/. wall; 9lcbcn, by, near ; 9l[cbt an Uw SSortcn, foubevn an ben 2;i)atcn crfennt' man 'i^m 3}lenf*en. Snfvic'bniiHnt unb ^reu bigfett fniipfen ficb Ciw 'i)(x^ 53ciini^t')'ein red)t getjan'bclt jn ^oAm. SKeine Sditvefter \\t in bcv birdie, unb mein ©ruber gelitfe c&en in bie Stabt. 3wei eble ro'mifd^e Si'mg'Iinge fpanntcn jidi, in (Jrmang'Iun^ ber £)difen, felbft ttcr ben Sagen, urn if)re SJlutter nad) bem fernen 3;empel ber 2)ia'na ju fal;ren. /• spring source ; 9lab, n. wheel; @diladitfelb, n. battle field ; (2c|en (fid^), to (one's self) ; (gpannen, (See fpannen) ; (2teUen, to place, set seat an; Qhifgabc 61. ©tii^en, to lean, repose ; Sircffen, to hit, strike ; Ur'tfjeilen, to judge, decide ; 33evfdmn'jen, to en- trench, fortify ; 23ovfa(t, m. event, in- cident ; BermaCmen, to bruise, crush. Not by the words, but by the deeds ^ye recognize the man. Contentment and joyousness unite themselves to the con- sciousness of having rightly acted. My sister is at church, and my brother is just going to the city. Two noble Roman youths, for the want of oxen, harnessed themselves before ihe w^agon in order to draw their mother to the distant temple of Diana. 1. S(n ber DueUe faf ber JlnaBe. (©duller.) 2. §tn biefen SScrfall fiuipfcn nil inele (fveiijniffe. 3. 5tuf 't^n -23etgen tft bte Suft reiner ales in ben iJbdtern. 4. 5luf bie ?n(>enfdien fc(i uxq^m ficb nid^t ju inel ftii^en. 5. -§hiter jencn S)Zanern yerfdianjte fid^ ber §einb. 6. >§inier midi fieUte fid> ber >5reunb. 7. 3n biefem >§an[e finb luele Simmer. 8. (Sin jeber 2)lenfd> felt in fein eigeneS ^tx^ fe()en. 9. Dleben bem ^aufe ]tz^i bte (Sduntne. 10. Sie D^ltdite fe|te fidi neBen mid). 11. Ueber invi erblicfen unr ben ^immeL 12. Ueber bie SSorjiige biefe^ SJlanneo fann tduiid^t iirtbcKen. 13. Unter alien i^reunben ift mir bicfer ber liebfte. 14. Se- fu-3 ftellte unter feine Sitnqer ein Jlinb. 15. 3}or meinen 'Jreunben hoAz idi feine (5K'lunmniiTe. 16. -Der jtutfd^er \X!(X'xnt bie ^ferbe i^cr ben aCa; c^en. 17. 2)er SJlcnb !cmmt eft ^tvifdien @cnne unb @rbe, unb bie (vrbe guufdien (2cnne unb ©Icnb i^u ftelien. 18. $Der Slrm beg Ungliicf; lite-.! fan ^"■»if.ben bie ^ermalmeuben Oiiber ber SJZafdiine. 19. (2dnrert traf anf Sdmvert, ;^um S*lad^tfelb tinirb' bie @tabt. 20. (gpannet 'Sio\yt an, unb laffet 9ieitcr anffi^en. (3eremia, 46, 4.) Questions. 1. Can you repeat the list of prepositions <5i 115.? 2. With what cases are they construed ? 3. Can you repeat the first example in this lesson? 4. The second example? 5. What is remarked, % ll6.,conoem- ing these prepositions ? 160 LESSON LYIII. l-fftionLVIII. EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATIXCt THE VARIOUS USES OF THE PREPOSI- TIONS. 21 n. 3m 3nncrn 2)eutf6Ianb^ ^efdHif/, irat^ ^:cn jeBer ijefdvil)', irenn e^ bem Slfiroiic an einem Jilaifer, cber bem Jlaifer an eiuem Mai'i fevfimie fehlte. (vScbiUer.) 2Bir fttijm wnt i^cn ciiiati'ber ab an Sal^reit, an gelpriif tern SBertfi. (@ct§e.) dx ift an ber Slus'jeftrung cjeilcr'; Ben. 2yiuf id) and) an betnev iicU ^wet; fein? (edn((er.) 2)le ivrcnnbe ivcrben irr' an bir ! ((5dnaer.) 5tn bie Stngfi ber 2)httter benfft bu ntd>t. dx fdn-teb cinen Srtef an mtd\ (@r fdn-ieb mir cinen 53rief.) 2J^an fennt ben 33cgel an ben ge^ bem. !Die Otad^'fcmmcnf^aft beg fo ge; fiirdi'teten ^arl V. [dnrcbre in @efa§l■^ cinen Jfteil i^rer 33e; fi^'ungen an bie iliirfen, hen an? bem an bie $vcteftan'tcn §u t>er? lie'ren. (ed^iaer.) ^aite un-.tcrbri'u-b'Iidi feft an bem Olaubcn an ®ctt, ben 3}ater nn; fer 2U(cr. 3( n f. (Sin (Btuxm, ber ^nr Un^cit cin (gcbiff anf einer ir>enig befnd^'tcn ^aijxt etoa5 nnfanft' beirilC? fcmmt, fann anbem Sec'fabrcrn eft anf ein ^albe^ 3af!r()nn'bcrt bie Snft ^u nenen 33erfndVen be; neb'mcn. (®. ^^crfter.) 2)er Q3iiv'gemteiftev ift anf bem 9kt()'baufe, nnb fein 3cbn ift anf ber Unir^erfttdt'. Sir tiviren gejlern anf ber 3agb, imb ge^en ^eute auf eine ^o*jeit. In the interior of Germany events took place which have ever occurred before, when the throne was without an Em- peror, or the Emperor with- out an imperial soul. We stand far from each other in years and recognized worth: He (has) died of the consump- tion. Must I like\\1se doubt of thy love ? (The) thy friends are becoming perplexed about thee. Of the anxiety of the mother thou dost not think. He wrote a letter to me. (He wrote [to] me a letter.) One knows the bird by its (the) feathers. The descendants of the formi- dable Charles V. were in danger of losing one part of their territories to the Turks, and the other to the Protes- tants. Hold inviolably fast to thy (the) faith in God, the Father of us all. A storm with which a ship has been rather unseasonably vi- sited on a rarely frequented passage, may even for half a century deprive other navi- gators of all wisli to make new attempts. The burgomaster is at the coun- cil-house, and his son is at the university. We were yesterday at the chase, and are going to-day to a wedding. 161 @lnb @ic bofe auf mict) ? 9Uif *Scn'nciif6cin folgt 9flegen. iBcl. @d I;angt v>ou miv ah,'ch er bas3 tf)un barf. 33el jebcm 5}ibfdncb jittevt miv bas? <§eq. (vgdMller.) 53ci ailer feincr ^lugljcit iap er |idh jur itfjcrfjeit ijerlei'tcn. et; tern bcdi uber unferm >§aupte jiebn. The father is going (joura eying) to America. The knight grasps (after) his sword. The poor orphans cry for bread. In vain 1 look for an eye that feels. Let us meet according to the ancient custom of the land. Do what before thee no woman has done ;— after thee no woman \\-ill do. Since the arrival of his father he appears to be contented. He has been (is) here a week. Since yesterday I have not seen him. The sluggard dies over his ^^ishes. That is (goes) beyond my com- prehension. You are (have been) here already more than a year. He receives letter upon letter. She drew the veil over her (the) face. He was perfectly indignant at this reply. He has not yet decided concern- ing this point. Cook's companions were silent respecting the minerals of New Holland, and appear, amidst the charms of the Flora of that country, to have forgotten, that the soil over which they hurried, was like- wise deserving of the scrutiny of the philosopher. Let the autumn in dark storms sweep high above our heads. 168 Urn. Urn feiii Scben ju rcttcn, ycmctf)/ er foiiien '^•rmmt). 2)ie 9iUter fc^tcii fidi urn bcii run; beii :Itfdn 5)tT ^2ti\^ci- (uitto cijicii ,i?vau5 uin bae! «»)auvt. iDev Jstnub la'j^erte lut um bit @tabt hcvum'. (£ic rcnucii um btc 23i'ttc. aDas? tlntt nuiii nicbt um (^db ? 5)le 3 '.'it ift u m. (adverb.) G'u ift um Ijaib 5:v»ci aui^cfommcu. 2)iv\u fiat ibu um fciu ^43enuo'c|Cu, (um fein (^elb) r^ebvadit'. (§3 nuiB um eiiuni 3i-^it (ducjer fein. 2)cr iBaum ift um'vjcfaUeu. (Sie fiimmerii f(di mcf)r um ben ^xna,, aU um bcu Jlvieg. (©diit; lev.) In order to save his life he be- trayed his friend. The knig-hts seated themselves about the round table. The victor had a wreath around the head. The enemy encamped (himself) jiround the city. Tliey run for a wager. What does one not, for money ] The time is up. He arrived at half past one. They have deprived him of (" got away ") his property. It must be about an inch longer. The tree has fallen down. They concern themselves more about the wine (jug) than the war. U u t e r. Jr)ie Sclba'tcn finb uuter SSaffeu. ^a§ QCiw^f^ t*aub \td}t uutcr aSaffer. ©J ift utiter fciucr SBiirbe, fc ju ^viubelu. Qx ift imtcr eiucm aubevu Olameii gu uu^ gefcm'men. Sft fciuer uutcr uu^, bev biefc ©d^mad) rdd^ic ? (S$ ift nnkx invS tdn ©elicim'ni^. The soldiers are under arms. The whole land is (stands) under water. It is beneath his dignity so to conduct. He came (L. 18. VIII.) to us under another name. Is there no one among us, who may avenge this outrage ? There is no secret amono- us. 35 c r. @ie f^eBen for i{)\i. ®er §hnmel gelm. (iBur^er.) He travels by land, and I by water. He is still (Ipng) in bed. I (\^ill) stand at your side (i. e. to aid). I should not like (to have) this man as a neighbor. He takes my coat as a pattern. He has gone quite too far in this matter. We have Abraham to (our) father. Pray, go to my brother. The witnesses of thy grief will rise to heaven. LESSOX LIX. gtaion LIX. (5te"^en, when referring to articles of dress, answers to our word '-become" or ••suit;" as, 2)er <§ut fte^t if)m nicbt; the hat does not become him ; whereas :paffen signifies, more pro- perly, " to fit " or " set ;" as, 5Diefe ©tiefeln jie^^en i^m fe^r gut, aUeinfie ^ a ff en i"^m nid^t; fie finb ju fleiit; these boots become him very well; but they do not fit him; they are too small, ^dtpviffeit (as also vtitprcbtren) signifies " to try on ;" as, er Ipajt (or x^ X ob irt) benOlocf an; he is " frying on" the coat. I. *2eirL is sometimes used instead of geboren, to belong. Ex. : 2Bem tft btefeo '^ud) ? to whom bebngs (is) this book ? II. „0^^'4'^'/" ^^'hen employed to denote the order in which any thing is to be obtained or done, answers to our word ^'^ turn ;" as, an h.'>em ip: bieOtei^e? (on whom is the turn?) wliose turn is it ? III. .^ag fi'ir .lag = day by day ; as, ^ag fiir ^ag rii^men it»ir 5Dicf) ] day by day we praise Thee. Exercise 62. Q( u f g a B e 62. SlebnTtd^feit,/. resem- 2)cctcr, wi. doctor ; ^eftun^, /. fortress, blanee. similarity ; (E'iittre'ber^ober, either- fort ; ^etrubt', sorrowful, or; ©a^el'le, /. gazelle, desolate; ^^avbe,/. paint, color ; antilope ; 165 ©ernfe,/. goat of the Alps ; ©ejlalt',/. figure, form, stature ; Jlappe,/. cap; ^Icibuiig, /. suit, dress ; JDJautd, m. cloak ; 2)Jv-irfUi3, m. Mark ; 2)laulti)tcr, n. mule ; 9)^ebict Iter, vi. physi- cian, medical stu- dent ; 9Idf)cii, to sew ; ^^aiitpff'el, m. slip- per ; ^aJTcu, to fit ; ^Iftc'Ie,/. pistol; ^la§, m. room, space, place ; ^crtrdt', n. portrait, picture ; Saal, m. assembly- room, saloon; <£diteier, m veil ; ©tvicfen, to knit ; JCerftcr'Ben, deceased; aBefte,/. vest; Scgeu, to wave, float; Sierttdi, elegant, neat. ©ilbclm Vvi^t fc ctcii eiuen &iccf ^d bem ^ituciber an. Der 0lccf ftcl)t ilnn \d)x gut, allein er )?Ci^i iiiitt gaiij ; cr ift t(}m ciu iveuig ^u fletu. 2Bem ift biefet? ^^ferb ? ^'m auf merffamer edm(ev lyeif, tranii Die 9teil}e an ibm ift ju lefen. 5)er Sileufdi irtrb 2:ag fiir Sag alter. S)ie ©ei'jtgen ftnb "i^tn (S'feln g(eid\ ireldie @elb tvagen unb iDiftcln freffen. 2)er ^of)n gtetdit bent S3ater tuie etn @t bem anbern. ^cr ©ruber fielit felner cBditrefter felir dftnlid^. William is just trying on a coat at the tailor's. The coat becomes him very well, but it does not quite fit him ; it is a little too small for him. To whom does this horse belong ? An attentive scholar knows when it is his turn to read. Man becomes day by day older. (The) misers are like the don- keys that carry gold and eat thistles. The son resembles the ftither as one egg (the other) another. The brother looks very much like his sister. 1. 3:^iefem 9}lanne ipa^t feitt 9tccf ntdit. 2. 5* unb mcin a3niber, ber SJflebiciner, gcfeen Sag fiir Sag an '^^^\ gtu^. 3. 2)iefe beiben (L. 33.) ©ditreftern ndften nnb ftricfen Sag fiir Sag. 4. 2)iefeg Silb gefiorte meinem yerficrBenen greunbc. 5. ®iefe §arBe ift bem SJlaler. 6. 5)iefc <^i^'ti i):ii grcfe ?(elinli*Eett mit einer ^eftung. 7. §inben (Sie in hkf fern -^^crtrdt feine Sle^nUd^feit mit meinem 93ater ? 8. 9^ein, eg gletdit met)r 3f)rcm 33cttev. 9. SBte fcmmt ee, mein i^rennb, 'b6anbfd)uBc ^a^en 3f)nen nid^t. 15. 3)lefe filer trev; ben mir beffer V^ffen, benn yit finb ctn.\ig grower. 16. 'i^k\t j?leibnng ^3apt bem .^Inaben fetir gut. 17. @tebt mir biefe cber |ene ^appe beffer ? 18. (§5 \6.'\i\ni, beine 0autcffe(n ijaffeu bir nidit gut. 19. (gie faufen nur v^teiber, n^eld^e 3t)nen gut ftef)en. 20. SBem gefiort biefe^ ^aug ? 21. @s ge()crt entweber ifir cber ibm. 22. SBem ftnb jenc ^anbfdiube V 23. Sie gelicren biefer ^rau. 24. SBeldiem 2)^dbdien geC;crt biefer (gdvieicr ? 25. 3u trcldiem (2*ife gefjcrcn biefe 3Jlatrcfen ? 26. SSef^ fen SJlaultfiiere finb btefe ? 27. Sie gc^cren mir. 28. SSefen «§ut ij^ biefer auf bem Sifdie ? 29. @6 ifl enttoeber ber meinige cber ber fei- 166 mc{C. 30. ^^cuncn Ste mtr fagert, toem btefe ^^ificlen geBcrcn ? 31. (So i)iel (L. 35. IV.) ido iceif, gei;i?ren fie bem 2)cctcr. 32. 9tn teem ifl ^eute ?ladu bie 9iei£)e ^u n?acben? 33. ^k SteK^e ift an mir. 34. 3)te S^ctfie fcmmt jegt an midj. 35. 2)er et. 2)larfu^ ■'IJL-ig in S^enebig ill fo rein iinb ^ietlt*, ha^ eu cinem grc^en (Baaif gleid^t. 36. 2:ie ®a; jeKe f;at an (Seftvilt unb @rc^e 3(el}nlidifeit mil ber Oenife. 37. ^a6 iihni bes iDlcnfdien ift gkidi einem Sdnffe, ba6 auf rccvjenber @ee ge^t. w Questions. 1. To what does ftehcn answer, when referring to dress 1 2. Example] 3. How does paffcii differ from ftebtn 1 4. Example 1 5. ^Vhat does anpaffeu signify ? 6. Example ? 7. Instead of what is Kin sometimes used? 8. Example! 9. When does jReiiie answer to our word " f urn .<"' 10. Example 1 11. How do yoa say day by day in German 1 LESSON LX. ^tction LX. 3Sic Beflnben (Sie ficfi ? (literally ho^v do you find yourself ?) answers to our phrase, how do you do ? 2tunbe. 53to ciuf eiii illcinc^ i)0})^ idi ben -33vttf becu'bigt. (Be tl;ut mil- tinrfltdi in ber ©fele ircb. Sl'lcrgen alfo rcifcn irir ab. !l)vi3 33anb gc^crt' um im ^^ut. fDarum ift ev audi fc traurtg. 2Sie befxn'ben Sie iid)"^. 3* banfe S^nen, Id) befin'be mtdi 1. 2)ag in ber Beitimg angefiinbigte (Soiicevt ^r*irb l)eute 5(benb ni*t Statt jiuben. 2. 3n ber SSerfammlung, n^eldye gefrern^ ®tatt fanb, fprad'cn eintge Otebner mtt greyer SSegctftenmg. 3. SScIlen @ie meine ^itk ^tatt jinben laffen ? 4. 3di n^erbe ju '^tatt finben (aifen, irenn (2ie son mm an ycrfid^tigcr finb. 5. 2)!C fDemuti) !auu nidU ctjnc ®e? fubt ber Siebe bc^ Sdicpfcr^ (Btatt jinben. 6. Sc:h nun an ]ixchk ex nad) grc^erem Oiufjme. 7, SSon mm an irarb bie ©cgenb innner reijcnbcr. 8. 2Sir n>of(en »cn nun an jiifrieb?n fein. 9. 2)a^^er tarn e6, ta^ fo mk part. The ribbon belongs around the hat. Therefore he is likewise so sor- rowful. How do you do ? I am very well, I thank you. 168 Unternefjmimgen miptaiigeu. 10. (§x evgtiff baljex hk Qo^UQ,ml)^it, ttjtn 'SSorftelluugen ^u macbcii. 11. ^{jx feib fetbft (gdhutb baran, fonnt eud) bal)ev ntcbt Bcflageu. 12. ^arUernt ftetg ffei^iq, be^iregen Icbeu if)n feiue Sefjver. 13. ^ie bvaiidieu befweijeu (L. 44. V.) nicbt bcfe ju feiii, ttjeit icb 31)ve §eber gebvaucbt i)abe. 14. ©er flei^tgc @diu(er iibeninnbet bie ©dwicrtgfeiten, iretdie ehie jebe frembe Spradie Ijat 15. Scfcpf) H. tuar ein aufcjt^fldrter ^iirft unb bcr SSater feiiieg 3ScIEeg, befiuegeii fprtdit man ticdi ftets mit mln 5iditung ecu if)m. 16. 3di f)abc big (}cute ncdi feine 9lad)rid)t yon if)m erl)a(tcn. 17. @r ftieg big anf (L. 58.) bie (g^i^e beg ®eVi3eg. 18. ®cv 8leaen l}at nns big anf hie ^aut burdindft, tne^fjalb ioiv unferc -J)ieife big I}eutc Slbcnb tjcrfdiieben inoUen. 19. 2BoUen (Ste nidU tiiarten, big @ie Slntocrt f)abcn ? 20. 9]ein, idi fann nidit Idnger iiHivten. 21. 5)vi er nidit babteiben tucUte, big bap idi mcinen 33rief ge:; fdivieben f)atte, fc nmpte id) alfo glauben, baf er mil* biefen ©efallen nid)t tfjun- tuc{(e. 22. 5tleranbev beftegte bei [einem Sftevjierunggantritt i)iele 336(fer unb bcgaun alfo [cine 5^aufbal)n mit friegerifdien Zijakn. 23. ^iad) biefer Oladividit fanu er alfo <§cffnuug ijahm, feinen 33ater nodi ein^ mal ju fef)en. 24. 5^iefe Oieife ge(}oren urn jene gaffer. 25. 3d) n?erbe '^i)mn 5U(eg ^nmfllid) beforgen, i^ahcn (2ie barum feine ©ovgen. 26. @r tvar nidit ju >§aufe, bcp(;alb fonnte icb hen 33rief nid)tfelbft an ii)n abge; ben. 27. DIadibem ber Dberft bie §af)ne aufgepfianjt i^atte, fdiaarten fid) feine (Sclbaten barnm. 28. ^efinbet fid) |)erv 91. wcl/l ? 29. 3a, er befinbet ficb anggcjcidmet n)cf)l 30. @iebt eg and) ein 3)enfmal beg ®u; tenberg, beg drftubevg bcr 53ndibrncferfuuft ? 31. 3a, eg gibt beren ^xctx, von benen fid) bag eine in SCRainj, unb ha^ anbere in (gtraPnrg befinbet 32. Oiebt eg an* unartige jlinber in 3^rer (Sd)nle ? 33. D ja, eg beftn> ben ftd) beren viele in berfclben. Questions. 1. To what does the phrase, mie beft'nten Ste fi(^ ? answer in English? 2. V/hat is its hterai translation ? 3. Is ftd) bcfinten likewise ap- plied to inanimate objects ? 4. And how is it then translated ? 5. How is the adjective btfiiibltd) often translated? 6. Example? 7. How do you express ftartftiibeit, in English? 8^d)u(b feiii? 9. Examples? LESSON LXr. fectiOtt LXL QH0, when it follows the comparative, is translated by " than.'" Ex. : 5Die didje ift ^o^er a U bie S3ud)e -, the oak is higher than the beech. Sometimes, instead of a single word, a H is made to refer to a whole clatise introduced by b a f? ; as, @r bettett lieBer, a I ^ baf er arBeitet; he begs rather than work; (literally than that he should work.) 51 IS, following the negatives fetn, tttd)t§, &c., is best trans . 169 latcd by *' hut,'' (except) though the succeeding word may stand in the nominative. Ex. : OUcmanb a I ^ bu faun i^rt utjcrtinnbeitj no one, but thce^ can overcome him. The same is also ti-iie of interrogative sentences when tlie hke negatives are implied in the answer. Ex. : 2Ba§ ^aX er fonft^ a H einen Icercn :^itcl? What has he (else) but an empty title ? In other positions, atS often answers to om- " ci6\" Ex.: 3cf) «rfenne feincit 5}?cnfci)en a { 6 meincn ^errn ; I acknowledge no human being as my master. Sd) tetrad)te i(;n al§ etnen^^reunb; I regard him as a friend. (§r i3erlan<]t eS a I ^ ein 3fJecf)t; he demands it a6-a right, ^r jte(;t au^ a (0 oh er franf rt^cire; he looks as though he were sick. Q( I g er biefe^ S^i^^^tt fr^? fl^f er 511 3?cben; as (when) he saw this sign, he fell to the ground. I. SS ie also, often signifies "as." Ex. : (Eg ifi f;eute iDie gcftcrn ; it is to day as yesterday. tSr ^anbelt ir i e zixi rec^t* frf)ajfuer 53hinn ■^anbetn mu^ ; he acts as an upright man must act. 5B i e answers also to our word " like.''' Ex, : (S§ glattjt uue ©clbj it glitters like gold, Sr Betragt ftd; tpte ein QSa^nfinuigcr ; he behaves himself like a maniac, ©ocrateg 6Iuf^te a I § Si'mgltng, to i e eine 3?ofe, {el;rte a I § S3?ann, to t c ein Sngel unb ftar£ a I S ®reig, ir i e ein ^erBredjer ; Socrates bloomed as youth, (young man) like a rose, (as a rose blooms) taught as man, like an angel, (as an angel teaches) and died as old- man, like a criminal, (as a criminal dies.) Exercise 64. ^ufgaBe 64. 9(6''reife, /. departure ; '^auart, /. architec- ture ; ^envicb'ijcirt, neighbor- ing ; Seirof) n^r, ra. inlia- bitant ; -Dciucrub, enduring ; ;Ser ivie cicCfte, (§ 45. 5.); (gf}r'j3eijti3, ambitious, aspiring , Q?ntbed'en,to discover ; ©rlan'tjen, to attain, reach ; 8 drnten, to reap, har- vest ; (I"rfdiei'iien,to appear; l5e[t^■!efe|t, appointed, fixed ; %xWVmdi, f. joyful- ness; ©etfttc?, intellectual, spiritual ; @elv"iu''9en, to arrive to; ©ewatt^/. force; ©raufam, cruel; >^ab'fiutttC5,avaricious; >&dlftc,/ half; to ^[er^er^fommen, come hither ; Sanbfdiaft, /. iand= scape ; ^^WQt, /. multitude ; ^Jionat, 171. month ; Dbfcbon , although ; $artei^/, party ; Olegiiin',/. region; (gumlidi, sentient, sensual ; Ue'bvi;]b(eiben, to re- main over; Unban!, m. unthank- fulness ; 170 Un'gebutbig, impatient; S^erbienft'ooU, service- able ; SSort^eil, tage ; 9Beit, far, distant; advan- Sertfi, m. wortli ; SBirfen, to work, ef- fectuate ; S3ei bem OJegen fuditen bie ^dh'an Better in bem beuact)'barteri 2Ba(be 5)er wte»iel']le iji l^eute ? 2)er 24tc 2luguiV. SBov bret 3af)reii ttjar em grofes? ©rb'beBen. IDbgleidi' ber @turm nadi'getaffen i)d, fo gef)en bie SBogen bod) ncd) fe^r c)od). Untev ben Siirgetn fetbji fic^t man nid3tg alg bleid)e ®efid)'tcr. ^Zur in ber @tunbe beg Slb'fditebe^ tdei^ man, n^eld) einen gvcfen @d3a^ bev Stebe unfer S3u[eu ■fiegt. Dbfdicn' bie 3agb nur tin an'ftren; genbeg unb barba'rifdieg SSergnii'; gen ift, fo luirb iie bennod) oft bei 2Jland^cn ^ur Sei'benfdiaft. SSon SBeitem ftetit eiue Sanbfdmft fdiiJner au^, ai$ in ber 5Mbe. In the rain the field-laborers sought protection in a neigh- boring forest. What day of the month is to- day? The 24th of August. Three years ago there was a great earth-quake. Although the storm has abated, the billows, notwithstanding, still run very high. Among the citizens themselves one sees nothing but pallid countenances. Only in the hour of separation, does one know how great a trea- sure of (the) love our bosom cherishes. Although the chase is only a toilsome and barbarous plea- sure, nevertheless, with many a one, it becomes a passion. From afar, a landscape appears more beautiful, than near at hand. 1. @in geifttger @enuf i^ bauember, at^ etn ftnntiAer. 2. 2)er .^ab- fiiditige ertangt nie fo siel aU er ijaben xt>iiL 3. 3e Idnget ev bei iijm blieb, befio (L. 31. VI.) imgebulbtger tnurbe er. 4. 3e t;ober man in bie vUnn S^iegionen gelangt hzfto falter \rirb e^. 5* 3e meb;r i()n bie eine ^^artci ^a^k> befto meln- liebte t^n bie anbere. 6. 3e i]b\)cx SfJvipcleou ftieg, befto efjrgei^iget Vourbe er. 7. 2)er nafie ^lu^ gemdi)tt t^n benadibarten ^e:^ tt)oI}nern oiele 3}ci-ti)eile. 8. 2)en' trieyielfteii Xl)eil 3i)reg SSermogenS t)aben (Sie i^erlcreu? 9. Sit l^ab? metjr aU bie -^dlfte yeiioren. 10. 2)en nneinetfteu reifen ®ie yon fjitv ah"? 11. SJleiue ?lbveife ijt auf hen jvoclften biefeg SJZonat^ feftgcfe^t. 12. iDen n)ie\)ielfteu twirb 3^r ^:rc ^rahit fei^er fommen ? 13. 3d) em?artete il>u fd)on Bor (L. 32. I.) brei 2:agen. 14. ®ot einem 3ai;.re mar idi nod) in 2)eutfdilanb. 15. Sn ©ttmar battm yor ivenigen Saiiren bie getetir:: teften unb gcfducfteften Scanner iiire iQot)nimg. 16. ©ag (Sifeu ift nii^^ M.er, aiKi- am uiii5 l!evuni. 2G. Csct^ I^abc iiidUi: aU meiii Scbcu, unb bao mu^ idi bcni Jtcuiv^e v^cbeii. 27. iBciin bev S'lciifdi audi nidu^ aU eiii rubiv^o^ ©tnvifKn h<:\i^i, fc ift cr bcmicdi ii^Iucflidi ^u fdial^cn. 28. 9Beim if)r audi niduei ills cuer Scbcn gcrettet habt, fo feib bcdi ^ufriebeii. 29. ^k i^er^ btcnft'oellucii 2)tdnncr frntcii eft nidU^ aU Uubauf. 30. Xiefes 3di(cf }ul]t man i\-bcu rcn 3l^eitcm. 31. 3n ber ?^dlie betrad''tct, unrb man bie Riinii bcr Q3auart fcgleidi entbecfen. 32. 3Beun (Eie biefeg ©emalbe i-tcn SBeitcm tctrad>ten, fo feben Sie e^ beifer. 33. 2Blr trcden biefen 2Bcj; gebeu. um bie Sadie in ber -?^dbe \ehen ^u fcunen. 34. (§:uw SviubfdMft erfdH-iut, i^cn 3I?eitcm betraditet sitt fdicuer, aU in ber S'idf)?. Questions. 1. When is a IS translated by than? 2. Example 1 3. Is rtl« sometimes made to refer to a whole clause 1 4. Example 1 5. When is al§ translated by but ? 6. Can you give some examples of aH answering toasi 7. What does »vie often signify 1 8. Examples? LESSOX LXII. icction LXIL Words denoting quantity, weight or measure, are seldom put in the plural, though connected with numerals signifying more than one ; as, cin CJ^funb, one pound ; ^e^n >+5funb, ten pound(s) ; brei Qltfer, three acre(s) ; ^trolf t3'«§, twelve feet (foot.) Feminine nouns, however, are usually excepted from this rule ; as. ferfi3 (i.lim, six ells ; ficBert S^teiten, seven miles, &c. When, between the term of quantity and the thing whose quantity or measure is specified, there intervenes no qualifying word, both nouns stand in the same case ; as, eirt 3)fimb 3i^d^x, one pound (of ) sugar ; jiiiel Cj}funb 3ucfer, two pounds (of) sugar; crei ^^aax 'Sctiiifie, three pan* (of) shoes; neiiit^tg Stiicf -JKittbuiel;, ninety head (of) cattle. (§ 15. 2.e. § 123.) I. Adjectives are formed by suffixing the word ja^'rtg, from 3a§r, to the cardinal numbers. Ex. : @g ijt einiaf)rig; it is a year old. iTiefeS -^ferb ift i:ierj.a^rtg ; this is a four year old horse, din I)unbert j.a^riger ^lanu. ; a hundred year old man (a centennarian.) Xouns are formed by adding cr to the cardinals (§51. 2.) Ex. : (Sin 5)reiBiger (etu 5)Zanu ^^on breif ig Sal^ren) ; a man of 30 years of age. (Sin ^Icfjt^igerj an octogenarian. ^Der Qlrfit imb jman^igcr (SKein) ; the wine of the vintage of 1828. 1T2 •^unbert, (a hundred) and 3^aufenb, (a thousand) when placed before a noiin, do not generally take the article before them Ex : dx ^at ^unbert 8(^afe unb tteun^ig Oc^fen; he has (a) hundred sheep and ninety oxen. Used without a noun, they, as in English, assume the plural. Ex. : ^unbertc i)t)n 5J?enfd)en ftcroen yor hunger ; hundreds of men die of hunger, ^au* feube fallen in ber (3(f)lad^t ; thousands fall in (the) battle. Exercise 65. Sl^riP, m. April ; (5a^ital', n. capital ; JDrcifaeb, (§ 47.) ; 2)vei'|dfiiiv7, triennial, three years old ; !l)u|enb, n. dozen ; @in''(aben, to invite, to bid; (Siic, f. ell; yard; (24 inches.) ©lU-ilaiib, n. England, Britain ; (S'utbed'er, m. discov- erer, descryer ; hand- lover. ©eburt^'tacj, m. day ; .§alb,half; ^iibfcb, pretty, some, fair ; 3unt, m. June ; ikh'i)ahcv, m. friend ; ^ctl), n, half an ounce; Subtriij, m. Lewis ; maU n. (§ 50. and Note) ; 2)Ziuu'te, /. minute ; Cd, n. oi] : Q( u f g a B e 65 birth ^fuiib, n. pound ; Cprccent', n. per cent ; (gedi'jtijer, m. one sixty years of age ; Un'ijefd^r, about, near ; 33ev^ei'ratf)en, to mar- ry ; 33er^tii'ien, to pay in- terest ; 93tertcl, n. quarter; 9Bcrun'tcr, under which, among which. 2)cv ©lep^ant' ivirb (L. 35. I.) mx'-^ gcfdiir (lunbert 3a()re alt. IDiefer Snnmeii ift jtDvinjfg 'fsv^ tief. JDiefer S?latrc'[e i^ai brei ^acir <8ttefel unb etn ^aar Scbu^e ge; dx »ar i^cv'gcftcrn 511m erjieu 3}Zal? im -l(}ea^tcr, !Dic %xerIa|Tt'ii. 4. (Si^tunibiu-^ wax im 3a(}re (1492) iMin-^cfm buiibcvt vann iiiib ucun^i^| bcv (S-iitbecfcv ihmi ^tiucvifci. 5. (Sin ^^uijnii) bvit ^ivclf etiicf, uiib ciii i>fuub ()at j^rci itnb bvcif,!^ SeK;. G. iLUr K-iiifteii tvd ^pa$ i^el, jwci ^^aar Sdnihc iiub ficbcn ©Ueii 3^ud). 7. iciufnibc iHMi^l'outfdKMi \ranbcni nad^ ^(nicvifa and. 8. 3cb ijabt l)uubevt iVebevii fill- fineii balben 3:i)atcr ycvfaiift. 9. 3^cr brci imb jUHii^i.jjle SIvvil ift Sbaft^vcan^i^ ©cbiivttnaij. 10. Subwig ber 33icr5c()nte ti^ar ein ^,iiobbabcv ihmi j^itnUcii lutb aL'iiTenfdHifteu. 11. SiiH-injig SDlimiteu uad) cilf ilbv ftavb bcv .^taifev. 12. 3cl) ivar crft jwci Sflal in 3(nierifa, abev ba-? incite 2)ial in Giuitunb. 13. S)ic ©eutfdien IjatUn jii yerfdilebenen -2»ia(cii Stxica, mit ben '^Tanjcfen. 14. S)ie a3icr unb Oleun ()abeu breb fadi oiewonnen. 15. 5^cn ad^t^el^nten 3uni 1815 tiuir bie @dV[a*t bet ^^iHitevIcc. 16. aSiffen (2ie, trie alt jenev 2)tanu ijl? 17. (§x ift ein ^ed^jt^iev. 18. ^ii\tS Iiiibfdie $ferb ift brei|d(;vig unb jeneS grij^ere ift fedHMdbrig. 19. aGag ift bie^ filv 9Bein ? 20. (S6 ift mx unb breifiger (1834). ^^1. 3d) yevjinfe biefe^ QaxMal ^u funf ^vocent. 22. ©iebt e^ ^ivfdie in biefcm aSalbe ? 23. ,3a, bev 3dger ^at i^orgeftern einen (2ed)? jebner gefdicffen, QuESTio^-s. 1. Are words denoting quantity, weight, or measure, generally put in the plural or singular? 2. Example? 3. Do feminine nouns follow the same rule? 4. Example? 5. When does the noun whose quantity or measure is specified, stand in the accusative ? 6. Example ? 7. How are ad- jectives from 3 «i)r formed"? 8. Example? 9. When do tjunbevt, &c., gene- rally omit the article ? 10. Example ? LESSON LXIl [. Section LXIII. Qlud^ (also) often corresponds to our word ez,'£'r in compounds Ex. : i. victor; (Scgar^ even, Xai']cxhit, f. valor; Sicn, m. strain, mel- ody ; Xxm, faithful ; Vi\\haut,n. weed, tare ; Unterftu^'ung, /. sup- port, assistance; 2Gad)feu, to grow ; Sln'f;attenb faU'enbe Saff'ertropfen 'ijbi^hn mit ber 3eit fogat' etnen (Stein au^. (go fdiiuer aud) bte ^riifung fiir iftn tuar, fo i)Cit cr fie bcd^ bej^an'ben. SBenn aud) bie SBelt un'tergeBen foUte, [d tt)ilt id) bennodi auf bett ^errn ttauen. SBer er audi fein mag, unb \va6 er audi fein mag, id) fiirdite mid) nidit 'OCX if)m. (So i^iel audi bie Seute ii&er ifin f^rad^en, fo muf ten fie hc^:) alle feine ^^anb'hingen bill'igen. Perpetually falling water-drops, in time, hollow out even a stone. Severe as the trial was for him, he has nevertheless endured it. Even if the world should perish, I will still trust on (in) the Lord. Whoever he may be, and what- ever he may be, I do not fear him. However much people spoke of (about) him, they were yet obliged to approve his actions. 1. ^ogat bie (Sieger ^riefen bie 2;a^fct!eit ber Seftegten. 2. ^n ®e* fang ri:()rte fcgar bie ^rtetlen ®emixtf)er. 3. 3}ie ^ijne ber SJtufif bran; gen fcgar 6i9 an unfere Cloven. 4. 2}lan fann fogar I)ier ba§ frdi)lid^e £ad^eu ber ^inber l]Dxm. 5. 2Bie fann man i^cn Slnbcrn yerlangen, )coai man felbil nidit tftnn mag ? 6. 2)ian mu^ fidi felbft aditen. 7. ^a6 Unfrant tr'ddift 'ocn fet&ft, c[)ne baf man eg fact unb '^^iO,t 8. 3)ie 5(r; miiti) fclbft fed midi nidit abftalten, veblidi jn fianbcln. 9 SBenn audi (Sie midi i^erlaffen, bann fiabe idi feinen ?5"^-*ennb mef)r. 10. £), irenn and) biefe Beit fdicn ba tt)dre! 11. QBenn er audi eine tanfie 5ui^enfeite I)at, fc i}cit cr bcdi ein gefiifjisclteg <§er^. 12. 2Benn ii)x audi biefee tl)ut, bann iciil idi eudi gut belofjnen. 13. SJieiue ^reuube i3f[egeu beg Slcrgeng SBaffer ju trinfen. 9. @r pflegt fei; neg .Kovperg mel)v, als feineg ©eifteg. 10. ©eg SO^crgeng unb beg Slbenbg !pftegt er bev S^ulje. 11, 2Bir pfl'egen, auftatt beg 2;i)eeg, ^affee §u trinfen. 12. @einer ®cfunbt}eit ju ipflegen ift if;in eine grc^e ©orge. 13. (Bx pflegt beg 2)1crgeng gu arbeiten unb beg OZadimittagg §u lefeu. 14. 5)erjenige, iceldier beg -2)liiffiggangg ^jlegt, ^jlegt auch ber *Siinbe. 15. ^fieget ber Jlugenb unb ntdit beg Safterg. 16. (ix ^fiegt nidit 'ocx ad^t Uf)r auf^uftes ^eu. 17. SRau vflegt nidit in Slmerifa, irie in S)eutfdilanb, ju fagen : „3di ipiinfd^e 3l)nen einen guten Stppetit.'" 18. 2)er 2)lenfdi forgt eft mefir alg noting ift, um feinen Sebeiiguntcrbait ju gennnnen. 19. 3)if Sdneife fcrgt fdion iin Somrner fitr ibre 9laf)rung auf ben ©inter. 20. ^er beulfd^e.^'ai^: fer SJlarimilian I. Ivug gleidi bei feinem kegierunggantritt ecrge, bie innere 9luf)e 5)eutfdilanbg ixjieber Ijer^ufteUen. 21. ^abH 5(*t auf bie @efu:ib? l^eit eureg ©eifteg unb ^X'r^erg, benn bag ift bag ebelfte @ui beg SZenfdien unb fein !f)ervlid)fteg Jlleinob. 22. ^lei^'ige ©d^iiler geben C'Idit auf 'i^ae^ ):oa^ i()i-e Sebrer yortragen, iim eg m ©ebdditiiiffe ?jU bel)atten. 23. 2Ber (L. 70.) bag (geinige in 2ldit nimmt, braud^t uidit ^u barbm. 24. ^ti)^ men Sie fidi in ^iM »or einem @d)niei*ler. 25. CJv nimmt feiiie @e; funblieit in 5W^t. 26. 5jer ©din^adie muf ftdi »or bcm Starfen hi Sld^t ue^men. 27. 3di toiii izn SdUiifi'cI in 9ldU nel^men. Questions. 1. How does the use of ?>fli'i]fi', as noticed in lesson 47, differ from its use here V 2. What example in the former lesson V 3. How vv'ould you express, in German, " I used to think ? " 4. How in English, the phrase, Sc^ pti(g,( cilU 3}(0rgen ju fitrcibcti ? 5. Can you give an example of rtd)teu followed by audi ? 177 LESSON LXV. i: f f 1 1 n LXV. llml;in (around there) is used only in connection with foil* nen. Ex. : 3d) fcnnte nid)t umt;iu c^ i(;m ju fagcn ; I could not (get) around^ i. e., I could not help or avoid, telling it to him. 3d) Bate nidir uiiilnn gefoimt c5 511 tf;im ; I could not help doing it. I. ,,^V^i^if^"fn" (to take a walk, to take an airing) signities, in union with gcl>cn, fatiren, reiten, fii(>ren, to take a walk, to take the air in a coach, to ride out, or take the air on horse- back, to lead about, or on a walk. Ex. : ©inc Stunbe t>e§ i^'vigc^ viU'^gencmtncn, in irc[d)cr er fcine Sd)ireftcr [pvi^iercu fii^^rt, fi^t er bcina(>e immev (iw feiucm Sd^relBtifdje imb ftubirt, irciiH'cnb fein jimgercr 33ruber lieter fpagieren ge^t, fpajiercn reitet, obcr in ®efeUfd}aft einiger Sreunbe ll^ajiereu fci^rt ; one hour of the day excepted, in which he conducts his sister on a walk, he is almost always sitting at his writing-desk and studying, while his younger brother prefers to go a walking, to ride on horse- back, or to take a drive in company with a few friends. II. „$l'(mn''' (to do) is in some phrases used impersonally. Ex. : ^'y tf^ut nid)ts ; it does or effects nothing ; i. e. it is no matter, do Xijui ^loiij ; it is necessary. III. -^clnite, and Bett^nBre, or, ®i:it Befnite, ©ott 6cira6re, are often used, especially in conversation, to denote aversion, abhorrence, fear, ko,., and may commonly be rendered, '•' God forbid." Gntjlie'^eii, escape ; dnttren^bcn, loin; turn Exercise 31^3, bad ; Stuo'bilbuno;,/. cultiva- tion ; ©cijv-inb'htiKi, /. treat- ment ; -33e(ei'b{j.Tien, to offend ; 33emcr'!en, to observe: 33cirei'fen, to prove ; CBeroet'ben, to sue for; 33licf, m. look, glance ; Srfiftcu, to be proud, Jlcnntnip, / to show airs: ledge; durgafi, m. guest Dlic'berjinfen, to sink (under cure) ; down ; 2)an!en, to thank ; dm'mdcbttg, weak, swoonino-, fainting ; 8* QlufgaBe 68. to flee, vpanjcrit, to arm with a coat of mail ; to pur- ^^Isxik. f. plate. croA\Ti (top) ; @rcf tbun, to boast, Otcnutlncr, n. reindeer; brag ^^in'ivenbeit, to to; 3iTbeiu', in that, while; ^Wim\,n. Italy; know- Sd'.titten, m. sled, sleigh ; Scbnel'tigfcit, /. rapid- ity ; S'abcl, m. blame, cen- sure ; ^J'au'nuogc&irg, n. a mountain near the Rhine ; Um6in'founeii, (See above) ; 178 Ungraub'Iid% incredi- ble; S}evfa'.]fc-n, to refuse ; S3DV'i"d§{iclv intention- ally; SBanb, m. wall (of a house) ; SBenben, to turn, change ; 2BipfenfdiaftU6, scien- tifical : Su'Btingen, to spend, pass away ; Su'trdytidi, advan- tageous, conducive to. (B6 i\t erne iicrtreff'lidie (Ba6:\e, feiue S3eburf'uiffe ju liciben; cber, treun man nun einmal ntdit mnl;in' faun, ei'ntge ju tj0.h^n, bcdi ti^eni(3''fteni5 ntdit mef)r ju Ijcihm, aU man fd}(ed>'terbinc]^ l)aluni mu^. @g ti)iit freiltdi fitr ben 3Iu'genBlirf We6e, etne Siut'tiijung ju er^aP:; tm, hk tuir nidit yerbient' tjabeti; abev inbem' iinr uuo unfrcr Vln? fd)ulb cvtn'nevn, ternen tinr fdineK bag (S'vlit'tene yergeff'ni. Snbem' er obex alio Q,(.ha(i)'k, ftefje, ba erfdiien' iljin ein (Sngel It is an excellent affair to have no necessities ; or, if now one cannot once avoid having some, nevertheless, at least, not to have more than one is abso- lutely obliged to have. It causes pain, indeed, for the moment, to receive a correc- tion, that we have not merited ; but while we remember our innocence, we soon learn to forget, what we have suffered. While he thus thought, however, behold there appeared an angel unto him. 1. ©iejenigen, tr»ef6e ju »iel f!pa,^teren gef)en, geirelmcn fidi enblld) an ben S}iiifftggang. 2. dine halhc @tunbc nacb bem (F:ffen fpa^iercn gel)en, ift ber ©cfunbfiett fef^v jutrdgltdi. 3. 3n Stalien faf^ren 33iele mit 2}lauU6ieren fpajieren. 4. Jvonige inib ^iirfien 'pii^'.yn eft mit fed)g ^fevben fpajicren ju faf^ren. 5. ^JRan fief)t (^etDcliiiIid) me()r ^^erren iX'a.^ giercn gel)cn, aU f^^ajievcn reiten. 6. ^/te (^^Srgcifte in QBieoliaben xdkn eft auf 9JianItf)(cven auf bie ^latte bei^ J'auuuegelMvge^. 7. -9Jeifen ju %n^ fuib eft angene()mer, ai6 ju SBagen obcv ^u $ferb. 8. 2)ie Sa^^^? Idnbcv faf)ven auf ©d^ditten unb bebieneu ftdi ber -9ZenntMcre anftatt bev ^^fcvbe. 9. 2Bcnn bie alien Uitin in bie @d)[adit ritten, tuarcn fcgar bie ^4>ferbe gcvan^crt. 10. ^'k 5(raber reiten mit nagtaublidier (Sd)nc(itg? hit. li. Sa!^ <-§cl^ trtrb jum 53renncn nub 53auen yerii^enbet. 12. (Sr tteviixinbte {)cina()e feiu Sluge iton feinen 3}cnr>anbten, bie ev in fo langer 3eit nidit gefe(ieipl)atte, unh freute fidi il)rer ©r^dl^lungen. 13. (S'r ijat htn gvcpten 'Xijnl fdvsv Sngenb auf feine iiMffenfd-^aftlidie 9(ugbilbung yerti^enbet. 14. ^iir hicym jungen ©ctbaten ^abm fidh bie meiften D^fi' cire Im hmx ©eucral tenrenbct. 15. 3di tuanbte mid) in meiner dlot^ an mciiie 'i^rennbe; allein n^c idi mid^ f)iuwanbte, fai) id) nur gleidvgiUtige S;'Iicff. 16. @r entroanbte mir (§ 129. Obs.) meine Uhx unb cinige ani'cxc ©egenftdnbe, e()ne bap idi e^ bemerfte. 17. 2)evjenige, treldier mit feiiieu .ftdintniffcn gvcj3 t{)ut, bcwcift bamit ba^ cv ircniger roeip, aU er i'ai) hx\x\tn unb anbere glauben madien iinlL 18. ®iefe jtaufleute tijun mit if)ren ^ieid^tbiimevn grc^. 19. @ie tocfben bod) nidit (L. 44. IV.) glauben, baB idV^ie ycvfvi^lidi fceleibigt Bdttc? 20. @ctt kl;ute ! tc^ T^abc nie fe ^h\\v5 SlracS (1^. 1.5. IV.") von 3f)nen geglaubt unb glauben 179 wcITen. 21. ©ie tperben Ui bicfem fdhcncn SBettcr iicd) ni*t 511 J^aufc hleikcn ircUcii? 22. £) bcivcitjre I id) l)abe nidit 8uft, eiiien fo fdionen Sa^j ^irifdHMi bcii t>ier S©dubeii meiiicv (Stubc jujiibvliujcn. 23. (SS Ijaben fidi ^JLltcl}vcre um biefcs^ 5?{mt bcircvbcu, uiib jn^ac (L. 44. IV.) fclt^enbe. 24. :jdi fvinu nidit iimbiu ^Imn ju fvi^cii, ba^ mir biefe 93ef;aubhing nidit gefdllt. 25. (ix fonnte nidU um(}in, fcincit Zabd audjufpredien. 26. 3d) fann nidit iim()iu, Sftucn rcdit Ijer^Iidi 511 bcinfcn. 27. 3nbcm er biefeg favjte, fauf er cfiumdditig uieber. 28. 3nbem er entii[ief)eii trciUe, ucrfacjten if)ni bte jlrdfte. 29. ^iU idi aiif ben Self fd)ie^cn iDcHte, perfagre * mir bk '^I'mk. Questions. 1. What is the literal signification ofitinI}in? 2. How is it rendered in connection with fiMiucii? 3. What does t>rt!,icieu in union with Qcbcn signify ! 4. With fal^reu? 5. Withrctteu? 6. Withfiibrcn? 7. Can you give an example of ti)un used impersonally ? 8. How may bef^iite, &c., commonly be rendered ? LESSON LXYI. ^tciion LXVL I?O0 (loose, apart, &c.) when combined with verbs, has a variety of significations. Its exact force in any given place, is best determined by the context, as, losbinben, to imbind ; lo^* geBen, to break out; loereiBeU; to tear asunder, (girt ©en?e"^r lo^brennettj to fire (off) a gun, ^a§ ©etrel^r ift loegegangen; the gun (went off) discharged (accidentally). 5Der (Etreit get't triebcr loS ; the contest is beginning again. Exercise 69. 5lufga6e 69. 5luf^mevffamfeit, /. at- tention ; ©crgen, to lend; (Smi'Iie,/. Emily; (5'rrc'gen, to excite, raise ; ©epddE', n. baggage, luggage : «§abc,/. property ; il;er 2)raug, fret uttb felbft'ftaubtg ju fetn, \\i einem jcben SJtenfd^en an'gebcrcn,intb em Seber bcrtrcbt' jTdi, bicfcn 2)rang fo ticl irie mogttdi 5U befrie'bigen. ^eer, n. host, army; .^alf, 771. lime ; £c6'gef)eH, (See [03 above) ; 2cg'irerben,to free, dis- engage one's self; SJ^oglldi, possible ; Spa^, m. sport : Srautig, sorrowful ; Uebrig, over, remain ing; Ue-'brtgbleiben, left: Un'befdidftigt, ployed : ^khiw, to draw- be The desire to be free and inde- pendent is innate in every hu- man being; and this desire, every one endeavors as much as possible to satisfy. Would not go off, i. e. missed fire. 180 3n be^to'ttfcben Sdnbcrn HetBt frei'? In despotic countries there re- fiuntL(en S)Mnnern nicbtg Slu'tie? mains to free-minded men no- res iifcrig, aU cnlroc'ber if;rc ®c^ thin^r else, than either to con- fin'nungcn gn Serfeer'^en iinb ihre ceal their sentiments and snp- @?]vdyk jit untcrbritct'en, ober bie press their feelings, or the 2BaI;l jrolfdieu Jlctten unb^hutt. choice between chains and flight. 2)er Bufrie-'bene bvandit ntir o,aixi The contented (man) needs but toenicj, urn gliitflicb ju fein. very little in order to be happy. ^Jtadj Slbjuij aikx Stcftcn bikh i!)m After deduction of all costs, there ni&jU ii&rig, aU einige ©rofct^en. remained for him nothing but a few groats. SD^lan it)itb ba^ @elb fdhneU'er lo^, One gets rid of money faster aU man e^ t^erbieat^ than one acquires it. 1. S)er Slr^t Ijat mix Q^xafijm, fo iyenig irie moglidh ait^jugel^en. 2. (Smilie arfieitet fo \*oeuig \Die moglicb, um bie geinl^eit if)rer ^dnbe ju er? l^atten. 3. 5)te ^hiber fcKtcii jeber Beit fo ttjenig uue moglidi imbcfdbdf' tlgt fein. 4. (§x fpi-ldU \o wenig, um fcine 5tnfmerffamfcit ju crvegen. 5. gerbinanb ifi ji^f^i ganj it^cnig ju ^aufe. 6. 5luf ber Ic^ten O^^ife batte id) gciii^ tticnig ©epdrf tn mix. 7. SOcllen (2ie Htt^ai S'letfdi ftaben ? 8. 3a, aber mtr gang irenig. 9. (§e blei&t il)m ntdit^ iibrtg, alg ju betteln^. ober gu arbeiten. 10. (5'«5 bleiBt nkhis Slnbereg iibrig, ©ie mii^m je^t tianbcln. 11. 33cn ad fciner <§abe blieb if)m nidit^ iibvig, aU ein ©tiiif Sanb. 12. Siefe Olofe biteb aUein »cn alien S3Iumen i'lklg. 13. Qx Hicb aKein t>on bem ganjen O^egimente iibvig. 14. 3di fann biefe tranrigcn @cban!en ntd)t leg trerben. 15. Um feine falfdien ^reunbe teg gu U'er; ben, mn^ man ifjnen @elb bcrgon. 16. @ett>df)ren @ie inm feine 33 itte, bamit c()ner biefe^ fcanbci^ fdileppte man getualtfam ^in; \iu'g. 4. Svcin »evt)iubevte il)u gewaltfam ait fciuer giudit. 5. SO^iit alter WladH fonnte er niditg aueviditen. 6. 2)ie ©vted^eu \)ertt)etbigten fidi mit alter 2>Zadit gegeu bie ^erfer. 7. 2)er (Sdnodd^.ere miip nott)tt)enbiger SBeife bcm (Stdvfereu get)crcben. 8. Q3eiuak gaiij Stften get)ordite bem 28i((eu ber Dlomer. 9. Urn fein Sebeu ju frifteii, mu^te er not(;tDenbiger aSeife ar&etten. 10. 2:f)emigftcdeg fiutte nottjgebrimgeuer 3Beife eine 3utiiud)ts.^ftdtte am \>erfifd)en ^ofe. 11. S^ein ?^reunb i?ertraute mir ge; ftcrn 9t6enb iiuter mx 5htgen ein ividitigeg @et)eim.nif an. 12. S'Zad)^ bem bie (Sdnile au^ vrar, fpiclten bie .^Itnber iiad) 8nft unter ben ^dumen beg ©arteng. 13. ?tUe Slutrefenben fleibeten fidi nad) ber Scobe eon ftebenjef^n t}unbert neun nnb adit^ig. 14. SBegeu feiner Simtsgefrf^dfte Ijatk er wcnig SJlu^e jn 35ergniigiingen i'lBrig. 15. ©diitter fonnte fid) nun nadi 2)hipe in S^anui^eim titerarifdien Sefdidftigungen roibmen. 16. 3d) t)abe an6 ^^erfe{}en einen anbern Oiegenfd)irm mitgenommen. 17. 3rs rungen entftet)en anS S'lift^erftdnbniffen nnb ©erfekn. 18. ©liirflidier Seife fonnte er fid) yermittelft feineg -^affeg tegitsmiren. 19. ©liirfti' dier 2iietfe ijatk id) nod) jur red)ten Beit bie @efai)r snth^dt 20. ©liitfs Itd)er 2Beife traf id) lijn auf ber ©trape. 21. @g ift bei biefer gro^en ?Venev£i6runft glitcffidierSBeife fein SlenfdienleBen terungti'icft. 22. fear, useful, em- ployable ; -S^vii'te-atcn, n. little brother ; ^^iipfen, to hop, jump, skip ; ^lltd^^u, ji. little hat ; Jld^^dien, n. pussy ; Jlet^ueefaitS/in no wise; S^^ctV^efiatt, in such a .§dui?i,i)en. 3. (§6 ge()crt jtuei atten £cut*en, tx^elcbe id) fenne. 4. 2Ba^ [tub bag fi'ir uieblictie 2!(;ievd:ieu ? 5. Qs fiub in bem @avtc;i eiue S)Zenge gaiij lunger ^dmnidien. 6. 2)lcfc"^ 2)^dbdien fViclt mtt fdiicm ^riiberdien. 7. Molten Ste- mir jeueg jlii'tcben gebeii? 8. SEcUen Sic bicfc^ aiif bem Jifdidien ()ci&en? 9. Sefjcu (£ie, ircld) eiu i)uiii'*eg ^putdv'n I 10. 2)ag j?'inb ()atte grope ^reube an feinem ^ii^^ d'eu imb an feinem ©dn^du'n. 11. 9liditeu (Sie cs fo ein, ba^ Sie bis? ©amftag ^"Jlcrgcu in meinem -^aufe fein fcnnen. 12. SZadien roir esS ber? Qtitait, ba^ eg fi'ir 6eibe Sii^ccfe braud)bar ift. 13. @r fo(( eo fo madden, ba^ ex [cine iSIidier mttnef)men faun. 14. 3d) ridUe eg jebeufaltg [o ein, ba^ id) big ^djn XUu* 6ei ,3^nen bin. 15. ®ir madden eg fo, ba^ irir fei; negfadg jn fv^dt fcmrnen. 16. @agen @ie 3^rem -iBruber, cr mtntte eg bergeftalt eiiitiditen, ba^ eg fiir Sebcrnurnu ^u yei-ftel;en ift. 17. 3d^ (loffe, 'Sie irerben eg fo einrid)ten, ba^ @ie init bem Ie|ten IDam^ffdnffe ciufcm? men. 18. (5'in ^ropBet gilt nirgenbg iucniger, benn in feinem 93aterlaube imb in feinem <§aufe. 19. Seine ©timme gi(t mi im dlatbe. 20. SSag gilt'g, in Jliviniig Sa^teu ift ber gvbpte .^i)eil ©urcpa'g republifanifd^ ? 21. Sag fo{( biefeg ^aug gelten? 22. (gg gilt me{;V, alg 'Sic glaufeen. 23. 5)er 2^rie6 pm ^Bijfeu ift yiel ftdrfer in ung, atg ber jum @nten. 24. 2)ie Stnerfenumig iinfercr Seifinngen ift ein mddUiger ?(ntvieb ^uni %ki^e. 25. J^er ^etvicb feiner gaBrifen tr^ivb you 3a^r ^u iai;r grof er. 26. (Ir ridiiete feinc 5iugen in bie <§ot)e. 27. @r fprang yov ^^veuben in bie 6ofie unb tfatfdite in bie 6dnbe. 28. 2)ie ^inber ^ii^ftcn in bie -§ol'e. QuESTIO^^s. 1. What effect have c^en and letn suffixed to nouns 1 2. Of what gender are such nouns 1 3 Example ? 4. May most nouns take these suffixes ? 5. Are they ever used otherv/ise than as diminutives ? 6. Example ? 7. "What does in tie .§i.>6e denote? 8. Example ? 9 What does (\eitcu sig- niiy ? 10. How many examples of its various uses can you give ? LESSON LXIX. Section LXIX. The word eigen, (oivn) is often used with an article, as also with a pronorin preceding. Ex. : (Sr ijat ein eigeneS -^ferb ; he has (an own horse) a horse of his own. (E'igen has also the kindred signification, ^''peculiar, singular. ^^ Ex. : (5r ift ettt etgener 9}?enfd) ; he is a ''•peculiar " man, &c. I. ^'inbeiT, (to fiad), often answers to our verbs '* fo think'^ or " consider J' Ex. : Sd} finbe ben -^ein fe^^r gut ; I (find) think the wine very good. Sdi) flnbe eS unrcd)t^ 'Da^ er 'x^^^ ge* i^ixa1:i(xi', I think or consider it wrong, that he has done that. II. ^alten^ (to hold) with its proper case, followed by fi'ir, has, like ftnben, the sense " to think " or " consider ;" as, er ^cilt mic^ fiir feinen ^ycinb; he thinks me (literally, holds me 185 for) his enemy. Followed by a u f, fatten, also, means, " to esteem, regard;" as, id) I;alte inel auf ifjn; I think much of him. For -^{uf^alten, to hinder, See L. 38. Exercise 72. 51 u f g a B e 12. Slb'ivei^en, to deviate, Srcij^c,/. question; 5(*t /. care; fid) in *^tdU netnnen, to hewai-e of; ■Befom'men, to get, receive, obtain ; S ere i' fen, to travel over ; (Sben, fo eben, even, just ; l^idit!5 \\i \c fe(;r unfer eiyeu, aid uufre ©cbcin'fen ; alleo -vtu'Dere ift an^er un«. ^je meifteu S)^enfdien finb ■x>cn ©ni; pfin'bmic' I(}re0 eicsnen 2DertI)^ auf'yefclafen, ircil fte iiid^t n.nf' fen, iTvis ber iraijre SSerfn beo SJlenfd^.cn ift. 23er h:d jc ben fjerbcn S^ranf bco SdMcffviIiS gern imb trlKii] ge? noni :ncu ? ^er ®raf f cmmt fo e6en nrit [eiuem dJcfclge iH-n ber Sagb. J^aite |a feft an bem @(au6en an ©ctt, ben ^criter beiueS Sdncf- faU^. ii}ir knt't6eilen bie SJlcnfdien in cielcn gdilcn nur Hvtdi bem Sdiein, nnb hiirbtg!eit n3tU io) ja fe()en. 29. .§aft 5)u bie 2;^{ire ja gutgefdiloffen ? 30. '9te()men ©ie fid) »or biefen Scutcn ja in Sldit. 31. ©laufcen ©ie ja nidit 5Ilie3, ft)ag man 3^nen fagt. 32. Xlnterfdiciben ©ie ja bag 2Bat)te t'om galfd)en. 33. 3d) ^abe mid) Idngeve 3cit in 23ct(in unb Seipjig aufgef;altcn. 34. @r ^at mid) iiber eine ^atbe ©tunbe an meinev Sivbeit aufgc!;.alten. 35. SReine i^reunbe tialten md auf mid), Veeil idi mid) iiber Diiemanben anf^alte. Questions. 1. Howls etgen in respect to an article or pronoun placed *? 2. Example ] 3. Can you give examples illustrating the different significa- tions of etijeit? 4 To what does finben, often answer in English? 5. Example? 6. What does t;alten (no. II.) denote? 7. Example, of halUn followed by fiiv ? 8. Example followed by auf ? LESSON LXX. fertion LXX. 2Ser, as a relative, stands at the head of its clause ; the word which it represents always coming after. Ex. : 2Ber gufrtcben x% ,,b e x" ift glucflid) ; he who is contented, is hap- py. Sometimes, however, To^X, like who in English, is em- ployed as a double relative. Ex. : 2Qer auf bem SBege ber ^ugenb iranbelt, ift gliicfltd) ; Vv^ho (or he who) walks in the path of virtue, is happy. 3Ber bi(^ genau fennt, mu§ bid) ijer* laffen ; who knows thee well, must quit thee. (Byron.) I. 2Sa§, is employed like the corresponding English word. Ex. : 28a§ fc^on ift, fann aud) fd)(ed^t fetn ; what is beautiful, can also be bad. (Sr ift, Wa^ id) fetn mod)te ; he is what I would (wish to) be. XL After an antecedent used in a general and indefinite sense, \va§> is often employed as a simple relative. Ex. : Sr gtaubt -^Itleg, h) a g er :^ort; he believes all ^AaHie hears. 3d) i:^ue Allies, )m a§> id) fann; I do all that I can. dt glaitbt nurbag, yv a § er fte^t ; he believes only that which he sees. When, how- 187 ever, the antecedent is particularly specified, ir»ctdf)e6 (not Wa^) is to be employed ; jis, ba0 SBiid), tr c t d; e S @ie mir gclie^en Ijabdi', the book which you have lent me. III. SBaS is, likewise, sometimes used instead of irariim. Ex. : 5B a S Iad)en 8ie ? Why (irarum) do you laugh ? or, what are you laughing ^t •? IV. ©ebiirtig, and geBorcn, correspond commonly to our words " native " and "born." Ex. : (§x ift ein gcBorncr 2)eut= [d}er ; he is a native German. 5Bo ftnb @ic gefciirtig ? Where were you born ? 3d) Bin au§ 'Berlin gcBiirtig ; I was born in Berlin. (S:x ift ein geBorncr ?yiirft ; he is a prince by birth. Btviu Cu. wax dm gcBoruc @. ; Mrs. N. was a Miss G. Exercise. 73 -5tn!erlfa'uerin, / (See J,14. 1.): S3ei!taub, vi, assist- ance, succor, sup- port ; S^aviii', therein, in it; (i'viMl'lIt', n, image, exact likeness ; (Srfod/tcn, to win in fight, conquer ; (Vl•(ci^^en, to suffer; ^•i-tftcv, dpirk ; ©cK'vfn, born ; Siufg ©tin'tr'ttg, native (See IV.); ©ottltit, divine ; il(ci/iuivfeit, /. trifle, small matter; Suftia, merry, spor- tive ; 3iarr, m. fool ; SZie'berlage, /. discom- fiture, defect ; 9£ovbaine'rtfa,?2. North America ; (2'ptc.''e[, m. looldng- o-lass, mirror : aBe 73. (gtcf)tcu, to steal ; (gtenunen, to resist, oppose, stem; (gtceitcii, to fight, combat ; llm'f emmeii, to perish ; Un'bebeiitenb, unim- portant ; Unf tug, imprudently ; Uuterbriid'en, to op- press ; SSerjWci'feln, to de- spair, despond ; S^oeifchi, to doubt. 2Ber bau ®ute lieBt, ber lieBt aud) Ci5ctt imb »era*^^et 5tUc6, xoa^ iijn nid^t jur Sellfcm'inciilieit iH^fer'cevt. „2I^ao qitdhTi Sie mid^ mit Sfirer QMebi'mmtV (©eUcrt.) 5}er a)^cu[d^ cjaitbt tctdit, wa6 er ticp, uwb ]Ui)t imbt, \vai er fe^ ^en triU. 2)ao (^rof;: -OviusS, ireldieg (not iva^') Bk bcrt fcBcn, ift (L. 59. I.) iinfer. (Si'dio^Q -■■■^ Aron::bc iinb awS 2)reSben gcbiir ttg. 5)iefer SRaun ift ein gebor^uer 5ime; He that loves goodness, also loves God, and contemns all that does not advance him towards perfection. Why do you torment me with your erudition ? Man easily believes what he hopes, and sees easily, what he wishes to see. The large house, that you see yonder, belongs to us. Some of my friends are natives of Dresden. This man is a native American. 188 1. SBer ftdi ha§ ®cttn*e tuiK, unb ba^ «§cdhftc im SeBen erfediten, fcteue ni*t Slrbett unb ^ampf. (Werner.) 2. 23er gcwinncit irill, mu^ toageii. 3. Siefcy Q3udi ifi mir lieb, wer eo ftieMt, ber ift eiu 5)ie6. 4. -2Ber itidUo tie&eii irill al^ fein ©benbilb, ^at anf er fid^ iiidit^ ju lieben. 5. SSer ^treifelt sev^tveifdt. 6. 2Ser gevjen bay -35atcrlanb ftrciter, ift einS}aTdtt)ei'. 7. SBer fi* in ©efalir Begiebt, fcnimt barin um. 8. 33er bem Unterbri'icften nidU betfief;.:, t^erbient an* feinen 53eiftanb. 9. iBer fid) gegen ias ed^icffal ftemmen triU, ift ein St)cr. 10. (2inb Sie ein gebcrncr ©ngldnirer cber Slmcrifaner ? 11. 3di bin feing I'cn beiben, (L. 33. II) id) bin ein gebcrner 5)eutfdier. 12. ffier ift 3bre ?>renubin? 13. Sie ifi eine Slmeritanevin, gebiirtig aii3 dhroi^^oxt 14. ^^<e; nig. 25. 3di freue rnid^ iiber meinen artigen DIeffen. 26. S'er rcmifd-^e ^aifer vluguftu^ frdnfte ii(b (L, 38.) iiber bie D^ieberlage, roeLte 33arud l^cn ben 35eutfdien erlitten batte. 27. (sx Isat midi iiber hie]in ©egen^ ftanb gefprcd^en. "28. 9Ber au3 l^iebe ju ®ctt ber 2)lenfd^beit ^sflictAten entfaget — ft|t im ginftem unb bdtt immer ben ©^-iegel yor fid). Questions. 1. What is tlie position of roer as a relative 1 2. Example 1 3. Can you give an example of iya§, employed like the corresponding word in English ? 4. An example of ma§ as a simple relative ] 5. An example of nms used instead of umnim ? 6. To what do gebiivttg and geboven often correspond 1 7. Examples '1 LESSO^^ LXXI §tct\on LXXI. 5Iuf eine 3^ed)tiunv3 feBcn, answers to our '• place to an ac- count'"'; as, bicfe -^iiuier toimen ©ie auf meine O^edBtiung fe|en ; these books you may place or charge to my account. So also : Sr madjte fief) auf mctite Oxei^nung luftig ; he made himself meny at my expense. I. ^rei6 ge13en, literally to give as a prize, and hence to ex- pose, to give at discretion, is compounded of ^rei§, ^jr/^'e and geSen, to give. Ex. : dr i^at niicf) berlaffett unb mic^ meinen (yeinDen ^reie gege'ben; he has deserted me, and exposed me to my enemies. II. ^eri^or (forth, out), is compounded with many verbs and often expresses mere prominence ; as, (Sr ^t biefen ^unft 6efcnber^3 Berijorge^oBen ; he has given this point especial im- portance. 189 Exercise 74. ^(iifgabe 74. Slbiutt'tidi, purposely ; Jtb'ivcfciib, absent; $lubrucl\ 711. brenk, be- ginning ; Slrrivi, kind, well-be- haved ; 53efvci'eu, to set free; •iBeljaup'tuu^, / asser- tion, stateuient ; SeiT'fvuiuj,/ improve- ment. S3upeii, to atone for, suffer for ; (Siitfdnit'biijen, to ex- cuse, exculpate ; S'vbit'tcvii,to embitter; (S'vftirf'cu, to suffocate; .^enHn-/beben,(See II.); ^i^e,/. heat ; Sci'iuKir, ?n. January ; ^ci'uc'otrecjs, in no wise, by no means ; 9ta'incntlidi,especially; Dcffentlidv openly ; ^^fian^e,/. plant; ^preis'gebeu, (See I.) ; (Sr Hep 5n(e^, trag er l)clk, auf meine 9ted>muis5 fe|en ; aKcin vfo Vrevbe nur ba^ bes ' fe(bft gebclt' Babe.' (Bx fucbte StUeo, was er i^eriibt^ i^atti, yen fi* acfev, valiant, gal- lant. 3cirt, tender, frail. He had every thing that he went for, placed to my account, but I shall only pay (for) what I went for ("got") myself. All that he had committed, he sought to remove from him- self, and bring to my charge. I wish neither to scoff at the ex- pense of another, nor expose myself to (the) ridicule. I have done the work, and nov^^ demand my pay. From now on, (this time for- ward) life had lost all attrac- tion for him. Finally the promised aid arrived. 1. (Snifd^uibigen Sie midi, metn -pert, eg ifi nidit t)orfd|Itd^ gef^efeen. 2. 2Benn er zS abftditlid) getbau bat, fo ift er feinesiriegS ^u entfcbulbigen. 3. Dbgleidi Sic eg nidit mit 3(bftdit getf)an baben, fo ift eg bed) firafbar. 4. >5dtten 'Sie eg ycrfd^lidi get£)an, fo miiften @ie jid) frndnien. 5. 3)en ©efangcnen hat man abftd^tli^ befteit. 6. Siefer Tlann hat nidit ab^ ndididi bicfe Ser^cgerung I)erbetgefii^rt. 7. @o iange nctrb, tacikn tvir in ber ^to.H bleibcn. 23. Der jiaufmann fe|,te 5(Ueg auf eine Sfteciinnncj. 24. ^Bao i^Sr get^an ^labt, fcmmt je|t auf meine Otccb-nung, unb icb mu^ bii^en, trtag ibx i^erfdiutbet bvibt. 25. (i'io ift i)(]ik eine erfticfenbe -^ile. 26. 3)ev Ungli'icflidie cvUicfte in bem O^audn-. 27. 3^a5 Unfraut erfiicfi bie jarten '^i!au^en. 28. 2:ie Stabt rourbe ben evbitterten cSclbaten %t', 71. judgment; '^eibiiifcb, heathenish, heathen, pagan ; ^cf fcntlidi, it is to be hoped, as I hope ; 3e naitbcm, as, ac- cording as ; ^cftbar, costly, ex- pensive ; S^lil^avrfunc^, /. co- operation ; -^riefrer, m. priest ; Steditlid^, honest, up- right ; 'SdUageu, to beat, strike ; fg aB e 75. @dimiebcn, to bind with chains; ©dnuiicfcn, to adorn, attire ; 3;abelu, to blame, east a blame upon one ; Un'beiiuF,t, not used, not availed of; Uufdnilb,/. innocence ; ^er(cum/Dcn, to back- bite, calumniate; 93er|-am'melit, to as- semble, meet : iBerut'tiieiIen,to doom, condemn; ®ixfte, /, desert, wil- derness. I8iele 2Jieiifd>en roetben ii)teg 9tetd^; tbu:iu", iiidit i^rer 3}erb[on'|te tregen ijecid^/tct. 5lm ^\\H 'i-:x Sdiladit trurben bie 3:aV'Ki--ftcu mit ^orbcer befrdit^t'. 2:a3 -iBiut bes Sd--icffal0 ift "cow @ctre» <§anb serfcMciT'eit wcrbeu, unb fctn Sterb'lidiex ttermaii'.ct* nen -23iicf in feiue ge(;eim'ui^yclj lint ^(dttev 5U tbiin. 2)eTn reid\ni (irofuy n?ar tcit bent Cra'fel bcio (iw'i^^ feiiiec Terr's li^Fcit i;erfirn bigt iucrbeit. (So Icinge 3rcieirad^,t uttb SBi'ber; t>rudi unier bcit S^enfcbsn berrf^t, (§ 136. 3.) fo (auge trerben bie undytiqften SBabr'; beitett befdmtft' irerbcn. xRxi^t unb ^riebe roerbeu erfl banu ni biefe Sfjdfer jurud'febren, tt?emt bcr '^cittb v3anjlid:) gefd^l'a'; gen topwen fein rtirb. Many persons are honored on account of their riches, not on account of their merits. At the end of the battle the most valiant were crowned with laurels. The book of fate has been closed by the hand of God, and no mortal is able to cast a look upon (into) its miste- rioas pages (leaves.) To the rich Croesus, the end of his splendor had been an- nounced by the oracle. So long as discord and contra- diction reign among mankind, so long will the most weighty truths be contested. Repose and peace will first re- turn to these valleys when the enemy shall have been utterly defeated. 1. ^er Server Uebt unb Icbt beti f!ei^tgeit (Sd^iiler. = iSer jleigige ®diit(ci- irirb i^cn bem Secret geliebt unb gelcbt. 2. 2)ev 3dger fd^ie^t v.ii:ti nut 2BoIfe unb 53dreru, fcnberit aud) Seg-cl. = Otid'^r nut Sdlfe unb 192 ©dven, fcnbern audi $BcgeI ireiben i^cn bem 3dget gcfcbcfTcn. 3. ^k 2Jtutter riMruic i^n Scbn. = 2^er igchn iruvbe i)cu bev S^iutter gcirarnt. 4. 2)er r^riciti-dger bvadUe einen Sricf. = Xcx 33rief luurbe >?cu "bem 33rief; trdgcr gebradu. 5. 3)er 3ube i)at bae ^4>ft'i^^ '^f'^ armeii 2Rainte^ ge^ fauft. = ^as ^ferb beg armen a)ivinne0 ift s^ou bem ^ubeii gefauft tocn ben. 6. iDcr Sdnrei^er hat bte -SUpeulicber fdu^n gefungen. = 3^ic Sil? peultcber finb t>cn bem Sdnrei^er fd^cn gefungen ivcrben. 7. 2)ay ^inb l)atte baa '-Bud^ tergeJTen. = ^aS 33udi n.\ir »cn bem v^iube nevgeffen rocrben. 8. 3)er i'te^ger hatU has jlalb gefdUa*tet. = ^a6 '^aib niar vcn bem -2)h|.ger gefdUviciUet ircrbeu. 9. j}er '5elbl)etr trirb feiite iSclbaten Ichsn. =^ 2)ie igctoatcn tcerben )^cn bem ^elbfierrn gelcbt irer* ben. 10. ®ctt trirb bao ©ute beld^-nen. = ^ae @ute rcixh bcu ®ott belcl}nt trerben. 11. 2;ev 9i;a*bar trivi) bem grcunbe gcfjclfen hahm.= 2)em greunbe tinvb i?cn bem ?tadibar gebclfen n^crben [ein. 12. 3^er ^etbnlfd^e ^priefter n^irb ba§ anne 2)ldbd^en gecpfcrt f)aben. = ®a^ arme Slldbdien n>irb i^cn bem i^etbnlfdien 5>nefter geci.nert ircrben fein. 13. ©dfcir tft uuter S-iitrcirfnug fehieo ^reunbcg Snitus ermcrbet njorben. 14. 5^te ftcilften Selfen irerben sen ben ©emfenjdgern etflettert. 15. 2)er giinftige Shigenblicf 'coixh ecu bem >^(ugcn crgriffeu. 16. @g trurbe in eincv i)cilben (gtunbe metir getbau, benn [cnft in einer gan^en. 17. 5)er ^gtrctt unirbe ciuf beiben Sciten mit greyer (Srbitteruug gefubtt. 18. rcmett)eug trar r>cn ^npttcr an einen %d\m gefdnniebet ircrben. 25. iTie ead^c ivitb fel)r iutereffaut irerbcn. 26. ^dcffeutiidi irirb ber tyeinb gefdilageu ircrben fein. 27. So irirb bereinft ein ernftee ©eridu gel)alten irerbeu, nadibem alle fficlfer irerben rerfammcit ircrben fein. 28. S3iele toerben gelcbt irerben, u^etee 3:abel erirarteten, unbQ3ie(e getabett ircrben fein, iretdie ein Scb erirartet batten. 29. 3)iefer bungling a^ar rerteum;: hd rccrben. 30. 2)ic Uufdiuib beffelbcn irirb erfvtnnt ircrben, na*bem [cine reditlidien >5anblungen irerben erfanut n^crben fein. 31. JT'em Sie^ ger irar ber «put mit Slumcn gefdnnucft n.-»crben. 32. 5)ic 3;:apferften beg >6eereo irerben belcbnt irerben, je nad^tcm ibre S^baten irerben anet; fannt ircrben fein. Questions. 1. How is the passive formed 1 3. In what tenses does the paiticiple ircrceit reject the augment g e ? 3- And how is it rendered ? 4. Is the verb feiii used in these tenses 1 5. And witn what signification ? 6. Are many intransitive verbs used impersonally in the passi%^e ? 7. Examples 1 8. What is the passive form of „ber I'ebrev Itvbt mi (ebt bni fleigit^eu 5d)ii= lev?" 9. What is the passive of „tcv ^cicsx [rt)titt nidit nnr QBoIfe nub ^viren, foubcrii au^ 930;]el?" 10. On hearing sentences 3 and 4 in the ac- tive, can you give the passive form? 11. Sentences 5 and 6 1 12. Sentences 7 and Si' 13. Sentences 9 and 10 ] 14. Sentences 11 and 12 1 103 LESSON LXXIII. Section LXXIII. PASSIVE VERBS IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. (§ 85.) Exercise 76. Ql u f g a B c 76. 510'brcitcu,to break off, crop, pluck ; Cluf'faUciit', startling-, striking-, remark- able ; 5(uL^'nifen, to call out ; Slcu'pere, n. coun- tenance, exterior; i8efi'ud>'tcu,to fear, ap- prehend ; 93evvu-i'£'ivjeii, to par- don, favor ; Seif en, to bite ; ^Sefaiyuug./. garrison; ^efteit'iuioj, /. corrup- tion, bribery ; (Sartl^vVvjc, ?!,Carthage; 5)ar^blctcn to present, offer ; ©afiii' batten, to be of opinion, to deem; @()veii, to honor, re- spect, esteem ; @in'ncl)meu,to occupy, take possession of; ^orffdUep^jeu, to drag, pull along; ©vviben, to dig, grub, ditch ; ©riednfd), Greek, Hel- lenic ; <§tntet'ge§en, to de- ceive, delude ; •^irfct), m. stag, hart, deer; Elagen, to complain, lament; So fen, to solve, un- riddle ; Dra'feC, n. oracle ; 5)tatl}fel, n. riddle, enig- ma; (S^iel, n. game, play; 3^rcja, n. Troy; Ue'bermaf, n. excess, superfluity ; Ue^brt^en^, as for the rest, besides ; 33erfrui't)tgen, to an- nounce, predict; SSermu't^en, to sup- pose, presume, tliink. Qx tveUtc nidit ertau^ben, "bo^^ jencr SD^anu geru^fcn Jt^evbe. ^ie flatten ser^c^ben^ %^^)^'^^> baf 'bk i^ieten ileinen J^er^^c^tf^iimer in $roinn'§en etn^i^et()eiltaiurben. SJZan glaiibt, ba^ "cti biefem U^im ©tnrme ctele Sdiiffe »erfdi(a^geu njcrbcn feien. (5r erjdt}Kte mir, ba^ meine 5tb^; Iianfcluncjcn iiber biefen ©e'geu; jtanb ]d)x gctobf n."»orben trdven. 5)a ble fiiriVn*e t^ami^lte ge^^en? ludvtti^ ift, fc ycrnm^tf)et man, 'aoi^ biefen Qtbenb eiu grcfe^ Son; cert' n?erbe gcge'beu tr>erben. 3di fjofe, bap m fuvjer 3ett cn ifyx gegra? kn werben. 11. 3di modite wiffen, cb fie ibn werben geel)rt {)aben.= 3 IBeftediung, nidit burd) ©etralt ber 3Gaffen, beftegt tt>crben. 20. SD^lein 91adibar fagte mir, bag Slen^ere biefeg SJZanneg bote niditg StuffaUenbe^ bar, aber feine @eele wiirbc ge^icrt burdi eine -2JJenge trefftid^er digenfdmfi ten. 21. 2)er aite (5ato fdVlcf cine iebe Otebe mit ben ffiorten : Uebr»i geng ijaik id) bafiir, bafi @artf)ago gerftbrt irerbc. 22. dJlan »ermnttiet bie '^eftung ]d »cn hm ^einben eingenommen toorben, aitein bi^ Sefa|>ung toerbe begnabigt trorben fein. 23. 2)er Si'mgling fagte, eg werbe no* SSieleg ticn iijm getban inerben. 24. ;Der betrnbte Sater glaubt, fein (Bc^n toerbe son bem erbitterten ^einbe erfdioffen trorbcn fein. 25. 2)ie ^reun- bin bef)an^tete, ha^ ha^ Ungliicf bnrd) bie Sdmlb beg 91a*barg ()crbeige^ fiibrt worben trdre. 26. 3)er 2(rme flagte, ha^ er gctraltfam fortgefd)le))pt tDorben iDvire. 27. 3m Uebermafe feineg (Sdnnerjeg rief er ang : „D^ iudre id) nie gcboren worben. " Questions. 1. Can you give the passive fi-om of „(§^ nnr'D flefagt. ia^ bev (5(^aufvtel€r eine -Boffteliuitg i]ebe1" 2. The passive of, ber ^Jlad)bar glaubt, ba§ ber .fnabe, &c.? .3. Of, bie J^inber fagteii, bci Siigev, Scc.l 4. Wcm bc= fiirrbtet, ber .giimb, &c. ? 5. Of, man oermiitbet, ^er ?5'reiinb I)«bc, &c. ? 6. Of, ber Sebrev glaubte, ber Sd^iiler \)abt, &c. LESSOiST LXXI Y. §tctio\\ LXXI V. The preposition ^.ircgen" is often compounded with the geni- tive of personal pronouns (§ 5T. 2.), which in this connecticm 195 substitute „t" or „ct" for the final „r". Ex. : 9}2einetrpegett (instead of mciitcrlvcgcu), on my account, for my sake (literally on account of me.) egcn nur feiu id) gefommcn ; on his account only have I come. I. The preposition ju is often used after certain verbs (as, nuid^cn, ircvtcn, Btaud)en, (fee.,) to mark the result of an action, or the end or destination of a thing. Ex. : Sie Ija^m i(;n §um §eint> gemad)t; you have made him (to) an enemy, or, you have made an enemy of him. 5Da§ (Si0 ttnrb ju SSaffer; the ice becomes (to) water. (Sr ]6raud}t fihtf (Slleii ^iid) §u einem 9}iantel ; he needs five ells of cloth for a cloak. II. 3}erbad)t auf Sentaub ^aBen, or Semcmb in 3[?erbad)t (;a* ten (literally, to have suspicion upon one, or, to hold one in suspicion,) answers to our " to suspect." Ex. : ^d) ^a6e ^er* bac^t auf iijn, or, id) ^aBe if)n in 3]erbad)t ; I suspect him, or, I have suspicion of (upon) him. Exercise 77. 5( u f g c 6 e 77. Stn'Hctben, to dress, jvvan!l)eit, /. sickness, ^erbadU', m. suspi- nttire : illness ; cion ; -?(uf'iT>avterin, /. fe- S/littacj, m. noon, mid- 2l'eitev, farther ; male-servant, wait- day ; 2.1)er|en, to throw, ing-woman ; S)?it'ternadit, /. mid- cast; Shic'^eBnnu], /. con- night: SScrauf, whereupon, sumption; ^:peifen, to eat; ^u on which; -^vibeii, to bathe ; !OZIttag fpeifen, to 3uerft, at first, for t^riit.'itiicfen, to break- dine ; the first. fast ; ^aben@ie geticrt', an wa^ fiir ei; Have you heard what disease the ner .^raiiff)eit ber Diet'fenbe ge- traveler (has) died of? ftcr'ben if^ ? eo mi (L. 35. IV.) lit Ujeip, ift As far as I konw, he (has) died er an ber (3'l)c'(eva geftcv'ben. of the cholera. 5(leran'ber ber ®ro^e jtarb an einer Alexander the great died of (a) .^vanftiett ^n Q?a'bttlon im bret sickness at Babylon in the unb brei'pigften ;jal}re feine^ Se; thirty-third year of his life. bens. Stitf n^en habm Sie Sevbadit'? Whom do you suspect? (Upon whom have you suspicion ?) ^d) i^abe i^n in 33ei-bad}t', mid) be* I suspect him of having robbed raubt' ju Ijaben. me. (I have him in suspicion to have robbed me^.) 196 Diad)bem' idb ju 9Zad^t gcfpcift' fja^ After I shall have supped I shall ben irerbe, getie idi ciU!^. - go out. (After I shall have eaten at night, I go out.) @r i\t iiaA^ jeliii Xlhx ^xi mtr gcfcm'^ He came to me after ten o'clock, men. (He is come to me after ten o'clock.) (Bx ift trc^en feiuer ^ranf()eit nidit On account of his illness he did geyan'yen. not go. (He is on account of Ms illness not gone.) 1. SDiffen evtad)t babeii denote ? 8. Can you give an example of each form of its use 1 LESSON LXXY. faction LXXV. 9?id^t h.ia(;r ? literally, not true ? (is it not true), answers to our phrases " is n't it V was n't it ? don't they ? " kc, after an assertion; as, @g ift faltcS SSetter, ttidit ira^r? It is cold weather, is n"t it ? (2ie fentiett i^n, md)t Voahx ? You know him, don't you? Sometimes „in^t ira^r?'' precedes the asser- tion ; as. dTid)t Wabt, 6ie fittb miibe ? You are th-ed, are you not? ' 191 I. Qluflimrten (compounded of the j^ar^/cZe aiif and irartcn. § 90.), signifies to wait upon, to serve, and governs the dative. ^d) WaxU ^i^iun auf ; I wait upon you. 5)arf id] 3I;nen niit a- ncr 3:'ajyc 5{)ce aiifirarten ? May I serve you with a cup of tea? 3cf) bullae 3f)ncn, sometimes abbreviated to ^d) banfe, is the usual reply ansv>-ering to our, '' No : I thank you." Sd) Bin ]0 jtei (literally, I am so free), is the usual, equivalent to our "If you please." Sd) mad}e i^m meine ^luflrartimg ; I wait upon him, literiilly, make my waiting upon him. SSartett, when fol- lowed by the ptrposition „Oiif' signifies '• to wait for." Ex.; 3d} trarte auf i^n ; I am waiting for him. II. SoUen (See § 83. 6. Bern?} with an infinitive is often answered, in English, by the infinitive only, preceded by the preposition " to;" as, 3d) ireif ntc^t, tr»a§ id) t^un foil; I do not know what to do. III. 9?i(f)t jum SScrte, or ju SBorte fommen, signifies literally, not to come to the word, or to words, that is, not effectually^ not in a manner to be heard and understood. Exercise 78, 5(ufgaSe 78. Slaiteu, 72. Aix-la-Cha- pelle ; Sln'fld-^er, m. accuser, impleader ; Sluf^■rclr ten, (Seel.) ; ©efcbul'i)tgun^,/. accu- sation, imputation ; (S'benfalU, also, too, likewise : Gntfcbiil'bt^ung, /. ex- cuse, apology ; A'elhter, m. waiter, bar-keeper ; ^rcnuug, /.coronation; Crbiini, to regulate, order ; Safft?,/. cup, dish ; Unifeujl', in vain, vain- Serge'beng, in vain, vainly : Q3erguiigt', cheerful, merry, delighted ; Sevtre'ter, m. repre- sentative ; 9Biberfva()'reti, to hap- pen, befall; Suiige,/. tongue. 3^r ^err iSater ifi franf, ntd^t tt^aBr ? 3di tt»artete etue @tunbe auf (£ie, banii ging iit iinb madite bent ^remben nieine -2{uj^i^artung. dr nuidite midi bvirauf auf'merf; fam, bap bie 3eit oorbei' war. @i- UHt^te nid^t, unis ev tliun fcUte. S)ie meiften SZonac'dien laffen if-,.- rem 2QiiIen freien Sauf. 2)cr Sdrm lie^ mid) nid^t jum Sorte fommen. Your father is sick ; is n't he ? I v/aited an hour for you ; then I went and waited upon (called upon) the stranger. He reminded me (made me ob- servant) that the time was past. He did not know what to do. (The) most monurchs allow their wills free scope (course)^ The noise did not permit me to be understood (See III.). 198 1. as tear etne fc&one (Stunbe, tttd)t lual^t, tnctn ^^reunb ? 2. 3a, bag tear [ie, uiib ntdit fo balb tuerbe idb fie toergeffen. 3. S^licbt u^aljr, bet S^achbav lt>ar ebenfaUg auf bem ^efte ? 4. 3a, er irar bcvt unb fei)r »er; gniigt. 5. Olicbt irat^r, eg ift fdion fe(}r fpdt ? 6. DZein, eg ift ncdi jiem; ltd) friif). 7. 9iidit tt)af)r, eg ift ntd)t 5lUeg tca()r, trag bie Scute fagen ? 8. Dleiu, nidit SlUeg barf man if)ueit glauben. 9. 3di f)abe fd)cn eine ©tuiibe auf i^n gewartet, unb tmnier Idf t er ftdi no* nid^t fel)eu. 10. SBir warten auf ben aufwartenben ^ellner. 11. 2Benn (Sie eg eriauben, toerbe icb 3f)nen biefen Sf^adnnittag meine Slufwartung ma6en. 12. 2)arf idi 3I)nen mit einer Piaffe 2;^ee cber ^affee aufwarten ? 13. 3di banfe fiir 2^l}ee, aber id^ bin fo fret, eine Xaffe^affee aujunel}men. 14. Sei ber jlronung ber beutfdien ^aifer ju 5(adien irarteten bie antt?efenben ^^iirften auf. 15. Umfonft ^abt idi if)n barauf aufmerffam gemadit, er fclgt nur feinem .Fvo^fe. 16. S)er Sel^rer madite bie (Sdiiiler barauf aufmerffam, it)ie \vci)l unb gut ®oit 2l(kg in ber 2Belt georbnet {)abe. 17. 2)er g^tid^ter fragte ilm t>ergebeng, irarum er biefeg S}erbvedien begangen ijaU ; ber Sin? gef*utbigt i)atk ntditg barauf p antt»orten. 18. 3di ftabe bag (Sdireiben ert)aiten; altein id) wti^ nidit, trag idi barauf antn>crten foU. 19. 3d) t»u^te fc^on, tuag idi barauf anttrorten iriirbe, n?enn idi an3^ter (gtetle tDdre. 20. ®ie ffl'ldnner, i?on benen @ie fpredien, finb eben nidit bie beftcn SSertreter beg Sanbeg. 21. 3d) lit^ meiner 3unge freieu Sauf unb erjd^Ite bag mir t»iberfat)rene Uured)t. 22. (Sx lief feiner Stebe freien Sauf unb fagte in feiner ^egeifterung mef)r, alg er ^ixtk tijun foUen. 23. 2)er Sin? fidger lief ben 5lngeflagten nidit ju 3©orte fommen, fonbern ful)r immer mit feinen 33efd)ulbigungen fort, c^ne auf bie (5ntfd)ulbigungen ju l)oren. 24. S)er Sdrm iibertonte bie ©timme beg Otebenben unb lief iijn nidit ju 2Borte fommen. Questions. 1. To what does nic^t \val)v answer in English 1 2. Example 1 3. What does aufitiarten signify ] 4- Example 1 5. How do you render, ic^ mai1)e ibm meine 9lufwartung ? 6. What does ivavten, when followed by the preposition auf, signify ? 7. How is foUcii with an infinitive often rendered 1 8. Example 1 9. What does iitc^t ju 2Bovte fommen imply? LESSON LXXVI. gtci\(^n LXXYI. @cf)mer,^en, to pain, is used like the corresponding English word. Ex. : ®er ®ebatt!e fc^mcrjt ntid^ ; the thought pains me. 3)ie 2Bunbe fdjmerjt i^n; the wound pains him. I. 5BeB, (pain) joined with tf)m\, (to do, to make) forms the phrase, ^t^ t^un, to pain, to grieve ; literally, to make, or cause pain. Ex. : JDaS i^ui mir n?el^ ; that grieves me (it causes me pain.) (Sr ^^i bem ^inbe n^cl; get^an ; he has hurt the cliild. ^ie ^anb t^ut i:^m ire^ ; the hand pains him. 5)a0 ^inb ^ai fief) toc^ getl)an ; the child has hurt itself. 199 II. l^cib rt;im, (literally, to make, or cause pain,) is em- ployed to denote mental suffering ; sorrow ; as, (S3 t(;ut i^m leit", baf cr eg qdtjan t)at', he is sorry, that he has done it. Qo tl;ut mir IciD, iijii nid|t gefef;eu §u I;a6eit ; I am sorry not to have seen him. III. Bei)tf«, to fail,, to miss, to lack, is often used imper- sonally. Ex. : @3 fefVltc i^ni an SScrftanb ; he was lacking in understanding. So also, traS fel^lt bem ^Unm ? What ails the man ? ^a3 fe^tt 'iijmn ? What ails you ? or what is the matter with you ? Exercise 79. 5tufgaBe YO. 9l'bcrinal^, again, once more ; dxwcx belt, to earn, get, obtain; j^etjl'geBeii, to go wrong, to miss the way ; ©ereu'en, to cause to repent ; ^iiiju'fiigen, to add to, to jom, adjoin; edb, (See II.); SD^ciben, to avoid, shun, to abstain from ; 91ie'!>erf*tageu, to de- ject, discourage,dis- hearten ; @d^eiben, to part from another ; (gitmerjen, (See above) ; (£ee'{ciiruf)e, /. tran- quillity, peace of mind ; (gtreit, m. contest, contention ; 9}erfen^uen, to mistake, to take for another; 33erfttmmt^ out of humor, out of tune ; S}clfelteb, 71. national song; 9]or'faUeu, to happen, to come to pass ; 38ef), (See I.) ; 3ufvte'beuf)eit, /. con- tentedness ; 3u'fugen, to cause, to inflict. (B6 fiel niisti 'ocn Sebeu'tung 'oox. (S^ [dvnier^t wi&^ts Idiiger unb tiefer, al^ bag SeaniiVfuhi, feine (§ 135. 4.) Sugeiib in Xi)oiH}nkn x>m geu'bet ju fiabcn. ©cigeu (Bk mir, Jrag Sfinen fef)U, imb tcai bie Ur'facbe 36ver 2;f}rduen ifl, (Ss fcf)U mir au ©ebulb , bae @nbe meiuer Seiben ab'^jutuarten. (Sill Scbf^'rudh, beii i&\ mix nidU jii''; cigneii fauii, tliut mir wdyix, aU till i^erbten^tcr 5Berroeie^ 9)lir ti)ut bag fdicu tocf), was an-^ bcrn nur leib tbut. Nothing important happened. Nothing pains longer and moi deeply, than the conscious- ness of having spent one's (his) youth in folly. Tell me what ails you, and what is the cause of your tears. I lack patience to await the end of my sufferings. A eulogium, that I cannot ap- propriate, pains me more than a merited reproof. That already pains me which makes others onlv sorrv. 1. (§6 fdMitcv^t midv fo inele 2)leuf6cit uugh"idfltdi ^u fc^eu. 2. !Dte Shntbe fd^merjt if)u mtt jebem Xacic mcbr. 3. (fg fdimer^t ntditg mebt, aU »oii icntni ■otxiannt ju feiu, beveii Siebe uiib §td)tuug man fid) gem 200 ettoerben mocbtc. 4. de t^ut mir teib, i^n beleibigt ju l^aBen. 5. ©diei? ben unb SOZeiben t^ut irel), fayt ein altc-J beutfcbeg SclfsHeb. 6. 2)lcin ^cpf tMit mir iref). 7. @» t^ut mir in ber Seele wef), i^m nicbt f^effen gu fonncn. 8. ©as? fcf)It, mein greuiib, irarum fo trciurig ? 9. (5^ fel)lt mir treiter niditg, al^ ba^ v± ein trenig i^erftimmt bin. 10. er; fprocben i^atten ^u !cmmen, ttaren ba. nur diner fe(>Ite. 17. 5(Ue 2)ien; fchen feBlen. 18. 2)Zein SSruber iji abermal^ feBlgegangen; ftatt in mein «^,au^, il^ er in ba^ meine^ Df^adibarg gefcmmen. 19. Seine SScrte ge? teuten i()n, unb er serfpradi biefelben nie irieber fagen ju wcllen. 20. 5lt^ biefe^ ijcrfiel, n>ar idi nidU ju >Oanfe. 21. 3)iefer (gtreit fiel in ber 9id§e meiner 2Bc{)nung »cr. 22. 3di (/abe bem bereit^ ®efagten nur ncd^ n?e; nig f)in§ujufiigen. 23. 2)iefem ©efd'enfe fugte fie ein ftciue^ Sriefd^en bin* ju. 24. ©r fi'igte mir i)orfa^(id) biefe^ 2dh ju ; he^^alb fann id) if)m ntdit i?erjeif)en. Questions. 1. How is ff^merjen usedl 2. Example"? 3. What does 9Bel) tl)un signify 1 4. Example 1 5. How does Setb tbun differ from ^eb t^un ? 6. Example 1 7. Is fe 5 (en often used impersonally ? 8. Can you re- peat the first example of fef) leu? 9. What does XtiaS fe^lt answer to in English 1 10. Example 1 LESSON LXXVIL I* e c t i n LXXYII. S)amtt (therewith) is often to be rendered by "in order to, in order that, to that, &c." Ex. : Sc^ mu§ ellen, bamit id) nic^t §u fpat anfcmme ; I must hasten, in order not to ari-ive too late. 5c^ xvoUU Bitten, ba^ @ie ba§ t^aten, bamit i^ eS nid)t t:^un miifte. (©ellert.) I would beg you to do that, in order that I might not be obliged to do it. I. (2eitbem = since, since then, since the or that time. Ex. : Seitbem fie in ^eutfd)lanb irar, fpridit fie nid)t^ aU 5)eutfc^ ; since she was in Germany, she speaks notliing but German, ©eitbem iji er glucfUd) ; since then (or that time) he is happy. II. ©efatligft, an adverb m the superlative degree from the adjective gefallig, pleasing, agreeable, answers to our phrase, please ; u you please. Ex. : SSoUen crtcr ftellte ben ^aifer »cv. My cousin represented (persona- ted) tlie emperor, ©elit ^Bruber fiedte mir vcv, bap e^ His brother represented to me, iinredu fci. that it was wrong. QS \]t ii)m }cbx Ikh, i>a^ @ie tretjen He is very glad, that you are not bicfei* ^Cid)ii nidbt bofe auf itin angry at him on account of fiiib. this affair. Uebcv wa»5 jtnb 3ie \c bcfe ? At what are you so angry I 3di J)abe Jj)ervu ^. i?c'rioieg Satjr I have become acquainted with feuneu 9t-lcrllt^ Mr. K. (during) the past year. 1. (i6 i\i mix lieb, ha^ idb (Sie l^ler axtreffe, idb f)abe 3:^ixen 2Bi£t)tige^ mit^utbeilen. 2. (S^ ift mir lieb, (2ie fc irof)! ju fe^en. 3. @s? tcdre mir lieb, eie ba(b foicber ^u feben. 4. @r ift bofe iiber hai JBetragen feineg S^ejfeu. 5. (Sr ift bofe iiber haS S(u5bleibeu fetneg (2c()ucg. 6, §auff 36fer i^rau 2;ante fennen geternt. 12. 3* lerne ii)n mit jebem S^age mebrfennen. 13. SD^iau Icmt 3ebcrmann e^er fennen, aU tnie ftdi felbft. 14. SBc jinb @ie mit biefem ^errn befannt gewcrben? 15. SSir fennen uns son 3ugenb auf, unb lenien uns mit jebem Siage mel>r fennen. 16. j^ennen @te §raus lein 53. ? 17. Olein, aber id) bcjte, nodi mit i^r Idaniit jn luerben. 18. 2)iefer 3Jlann wirb buv* feine trefjiidien SSerfe balb befannt rc»erben. 19. 'Scr 91. fielUe midi biefer gamiiie »or. 20. (Sr tt>urbe ber ®t]eliid)aft burd^ feinen ©ruber iicrgefiellt. 21. ^a§ Sleufere bicfzS SD^anne^ ftelit nidit^ lu^r. 22. 2)iefer Sd^aufpieler ftelXte Staxi XII. sor. 23. ^iixdj tren n^uvben Sie eingefiibrt ? 24. 3* ttcrbanfe (L. 44. VI.) biefe (Sfjre ber D^id^te be^ reid^en ^aufmanne^. 25. 2)er ^reunb fiiiirte midi in bte @efeUf*aft ein. 26. 2)er ^ran^cfe fiibrte biefe neue ^cie eiu. 27. 2)er (Sd^muggler fiibrte oerbcrene SBaaren cin. 28. 2)ie Otegierung ful)rtneue @efe|,e ein. 29. @r fudne ibm bie llnmegUd^feit eineg gliidfiidien @rfot; gee i^crjuftelten. Questions. 1. How may lieb, when applied to persons, be rendered ? 2. Example y 3. How with fein, when applied to things? 4. Example 1 5. How does bofe aitf, differ in signiiication and use, from bofe iiber ? 6. ElxampleV 7. What does !enne:i Icrnc it signify? 8. Example 1 LESSON LXXIX. Section LXXIX. 5)cr Sd)lag, " the blow, the stroke " (commonly connected with riibren) often denotes palsy, apoplexy. Ex. : (Sr ift toon bem 8c^tag geriifcrt irorbenj he has been struck with the palsy. (§r ^atU einen Qlnfall Dom ^djia^t ; he had an apoplectic fit. 204 I. QtBgel^en = to go away, to leave. Ex. : 5Der 3u9 i{i fd^on aBgegangenj the train has aheady left (started.) (gg c^tt}t gut ah = it sells well ; as, ber 3Sein ge'^t gut ah -, tlie wine sells well (goes off well.) IL (Sr laft fid) riid)t0 aBge:^en = he lets nothing (advan- tageous , go from him, that is, he stints himself in nothing. III. 3e nad)bem ■=: even after, or according as. Ex. : 3e nad^bem icB 2)?uf e ^aht, trerbe id) @ie Befud^cn ; as, or accord- ing as I have leisure I will visit you, (fee. IV. (Sinfallen signifies, literally, to fall in, or into ; hence to fall down, or to ruin, to decay, &c. With tlie dative it signi- fies, to come into the mind, to occur. Ex. : (B^ ift mir nie eingcfoden, fo ettcaS ^u t^^un ; it never occurred to me to do such a thing. V. ©0 fern, or in fo fern = in so far as, if, in case. Ex. : 3d^ erIauBe e§ bir in fo fern e§ ^on mir aB^angt ; I will per- mit it, so far as it depends upon me. 5n fo fern e6 bie Qdt ertauBt; if, or m case the time permit, &c. VI. 5lngcl)en used intransitively, signifies to begin. Ex. : 'T)ie ^ir^en m ^'eutfd^Ianb ge^en gen?5(?nUd^ beg 9}?orgeng \un Ain U^r axi ; the churches in Germany generally comm^ence, .a the mormng, at nine o'clock. Used transitively, it signifies " to concern, to be of consequence." Ex. : ^a^ ge^t i^n an ; that is his concern, or that concerns him. 53)00 ge^t mid) nid)i^ an; that does not concern me (is of no consequence to me.) Exercise 82. 5( u f g a B c 82. 5lbganc|, m. sale, market ('' run ") ; Stb'fiifiten, to cool ; 5In'i]c()en, (See VI.) ; ^^hat'k,/. debate; @infa((, m. idea, thought ; @ln'fa({en, to fall in, occur ; QxUVttn. to taKe cold; ©elaunt'. disposed, humored; 3n \o fern, (See V.) ; jliimmern, to concern, trouble ; Seibltcb, tolerable, supportable ; 0lafdi, quick, swift ; ©dilai^, m. (See above) ; (Scbnupfcn, m. cold, (in the head) ; @inn, m. mind, sense; ©i^iimg, /. session, sitting ; Un'Dertrdgtt*, unsoci- able, intolerant ; Su'nebmen, to in- crease ; 3ufam'menfaKen, to tumble, or fall to- gether, to fall to ruin. 205 TiT Sitfag xnbxk i^n auf bcr lim The palsy struck him on the feu 5cite. left side. (St ftviub ba trie ccm (Sitlag tjCi He stood there as if struck with riiljrt'. the palsy, So giug ber Streit aii ? Where did the contest begin? Sag c{d)n mid) bciiie ^^rcuben an ? How do thv pleasures concern (©ctbe.) me? 2)a3 2)ampffitif gel^t urn v>ier Uf)r The steam-boat leaves at four al\ o'clock. 2)icfe ©aare getit gut ah. This ware sells well. (See I.) !5!;icfcm SJ^anue gef)t nicbt^ ab. This man does not stint himself. (See II.) 5^ie Unterre'bimg ging niBig ab. The conference passed off quietly. 3e nadii:em' bie Uuterl^ai'tung i|% According, as the entertainment ift audi bie Stimmung. is, so also is the humor. 3n ]o fern mir ber S^ame etnfdUt, In case the name occurs to me I tterbe id) bir if;n fagen, will mention it to you. 1. Tldn fleiner Sniber bat i^en ednuii3fen ; cr bat iii^ auf bem CJife t^arf crfditet. 2. 2Ber erfiifet ift unb fidi ^u rafdi abtiibit, faun fid) [ei*t erfdlten. 3. 23ir fcUen uiio ntd^t uni Twinge fiimniern, ineldie uuo nidU^ angeCien. 4. .3n fc rcdt mi* biefe @ad>e angeijt, ijabi ii^ bie not&igen Sd^ritte geti)an. 5. 5)icfeg ge^t (Sud) nidUi^ an. 6. ffiei biefer ilunbe fianh er trie torn (gd'Iag gerii&rt. 7. Sen aitni ^axin f)at ber (g*(ag ges riibrt. 8. !l)er S)iann i]t ycm iSd'Iag geriif)rt n?orben. 9. 2Bie I'lom ^Sd'Iag geriii;rf fant fie nieber. 10. 2)iefe 2Baare ge^t gut ab. 11. Sann gefit ba>3 nddifte iDampffdiiff ab'i 12. 3d)' fe^e nid)t, ia^ jid) biefer SZann ettra» abgelieu Id^t. 13. 3ft bie Stiimg ru^ig at)- gegangen? 14. Sf^ein, fie ift iiid)t rucjig abgegangen, — bie ^i:baxte u\ir fci)r ftiirmifd). 15. ®iefe^ ^\ii) i)ait^ einen fiarfen 2(bgang. 16. -Dor junge vKaufmanu ei^d^Ite mir, baf bcr Sibgang bebeutenb j^uge? ncmmen tfaBe. 17. Se nau^bem es mir in ben Sinn fcmmt, reife id) r»cu bier ab. 18. 3e nad'bem er gelaunt ift, faun er ber leiblidifte, aber audi ber uuyertrdglidifte SJlenfdi fein. 19. 3e nadibem er e^ anfdngt, UMrb ber S'rfclg fein. 20. 3n fc fern has Setter fdiou Keibt, tv^erbe iii bidi mcrgeu t-efudien. 21. 3n fo fern esj bir angenefim ift, ti^erbe id) meinen timber mitbringcn. 22. 3n fc fern e6 meine @Uern jufriebeu finb, trerbe idi bid) begleiten. 23. So etiivi^ ift mir nie eiugefallen. 24. ^aS ScHcert gebt urn hatb neben an. 25. S)tetn ^reuub Batte einen berr(id-en @infa(L 26. Qc ift bei bem frcblidien 2)eutfd>en ein (Sinfall fdicner als ber anbere. 21. Sluf bie ?^rage \va6 ein (S'iiifail ^.rdre, ant? wcrtete diner: „iiienn ein --^au^ einfdUt.'-' Questions. 1. What does Scbla;.^ (with viihven) often denote ( 2. Ex- ample ? 3. Can you repeat the several si;gnifi cations of nbgebn ? 4. Can you repeat the 2d and 3d examples? 5. Howls je iiadjbem exemplified ? 6 What does fiufaih-n signify 1 7. So fern or in fo fern? 8. "V\Tiat does an9e[)cn signify, used intransitively? 9. What when used transitively? 10. Can you form any sentence exemplifying the use of Scblvtg ? 11. Of a^(iei)en? 12. 3enad?fccm? 13. {5-ntr\iUfn? 14. So fern ? 15. ^luge^eu? 206 LESSON LXXX. fecti0ttLXXX. The obsolete word lei {sort, kind,) still remains in combina- tion with the numerals, forming what are called the variatives ; thus, (Elnertei; of one kind, the same; ^Drcierlei, of three kinds. (§ 48.) Ex. : 5£)reierlei Bringe id) ju bir, emci^le bir eineS ; three (sorts of) things I bring (to) thee : choose thee one. ©3 ift \f)\\\ einerlet, cS ev gcl}t cber Bleibt -, it is the same to him whether he goes or stays. , I. @e(;en, with the preposition iiBer, is often used with the signijfication " to transcend, to surpass." Ex. : 3iifj^i^t>en^eit gef^t uBer ^eidit^um ] contentment surpasses wealth. Exercise 83. ^ufgaBe 83. ©"i'nevtet, of one kind, the same ; (S'rjte'tnmg,/ bringing up, educalion; i5"iiufdien, n. sparklet; @an9, m. direction, course ; ©ebui'bij.], patiently ; ©cfdidft', n. affair, business ; ©i^ttina'fium, n. gym- nasium ; Sitgnev, m. liar ; 9lartitf)cit, m. disad- vantage ; ^ht^lcg, useless; $fetfcbeit, n. little pipe ; @(tiaiji, m. treasure ; ©d^tafen, to sleep ; ©dutl'blg!elt, /. obli- gation, duty ; Unige^buiig,/. environs, neighborhood ; Uii'befummert, uncon- cerned, careless ; Uniyerfttdt',/. univer- sity ; ®ei-l}dlt'nif, n. rela- tion, circumstance, situation ; 2Qcf)tfaf)tt,/. wellfare. SBie eg bem S^ogel nidit ei'ncttet ift, ch er fid) in bem .f dfi'ge obcr hi ber fveten 8uft beftu'bet, fo barf eg einem 33clfe audi iitd)t eing fciii, ot> eg m ©cta^erei', cber in §vei(?eit ift. 2)ieg get}t bei mir itber SiUeg. ®cni 9hif'rtdittgen ge{)t ntd)tg itfcev bie 9i\"il)rlf)eit. ajJauduMi SDIenfdien gel)t nid^tg iiber 33ccfuem'hdifeit unb ^\x\)z. 2Bir gtngen iiber SRcgfau nadi ^e'^ tergbuvg. S)er §einb ging bei SSten iibev bie 5)onau. @g ift imredU, bie 3eit feiueg £e; 'btwi in §I6'gefd)iebeuf)elt son ben u'brigen 2Renfdien ju jubringcn. As -it is not the same to the bird, whether it is (finds itself) in the cage, or in the open air, so likewise can it not be the same to a nation, whether it is in slavery or in freedom. This with me excels everything. To the upright nothing is better than tlie truth. With many persons, nothing goes beyond convenience and re- pose. We went by way of Moscow to Petersburgh. The enemy went over the Danube, at Vienna. It is wrong to pass one's life in seclusion from the rest of mankind. 207 1. (5rbrtni^tfcine3citmit O^idU^tfnm ^i. ($ 93. 2.) 2. ©r bra*te ben ^rojjtcu 5l)cil feiucv Siiiiciib auf ben ©nnuiafiru (§ 19.) uub Unit>evfitdten ]cu\c6 iiaubei^ ju. 3. j)ic incifte 3cit briiu]t cv mit iiu|lofen 93efdidftt? i|uiuini JU. 4. 93lclc S)lcn[clH'ii Bviiu^cn iijxc 3cit mit 6"|Teii, Sirhifen unb eel lafcu JU. 5. (Slucm jeben 3L)ienfclien, ber nur eiu ^i'lufcben @efu(;I hat. iicM ui6tt? iibev felu 'iHitcvlaub unb iiber bie ai'olilfaftvt beffelben. 6. iSi (\Qi)t iud)t3 fiber bie dlnije ber (Seele, unb hai 33ewu^tfein, feinc SdMilbii-^fcit oietf)au ju (jabcu. G. @r \a(\U, [eine grijpte <5reubc uub [ein iircijtcr Scba| feieu feine ^inbcr, unb niciU^ gefie iljm liber bicfelbeu. 8. (S'in 3}iatrcfe facjte, e^ get}e i^m uidit^ iiber ein ^feifdien. 9. 2)em ©leidn-jiUtigcn ift jluar 33ielc2i eincrlei, tver aber fagt eg fet t{)m QUleg einertci, i)l ein Siigner. 10. S©ai3 man t>crf5)rcdien i)at, foil man batteu, cinerln, cb 9u-idnf}eit ober S^crtbeil bavang cnti"ic()t. 11. 2)em @clbaten mn§ im Jtriege ?U(c^ eint? fein. 12. (Jin rediter SDZann f*icft fidi gebul^^ big in alie ^crbdltniiJe ; e^ ijl t()m ?((icd ein^ tiia^ er tf)ut, ni*t aber UM e er eiS tbut. 13. Seit bem !Icbe feiner ^iuber ift i^nt 5(Ueg eius? ; er ift gl'eid^guttig gegcn feine Umgebuug unb unbefiimmert um ben ®aug feiiun- @cfd)dfte. 14. Qui jeber aJZcnfdi I)at feinen freieu ®i(lcn ; hep ijaih gebt eg mid) niditg an, irte cr feinc 3eit vserwenbct. 15. 3* reijlte iiber 9?ctrerbam unb Scnbcu uadi Slmerifa. 16. 2)er greunb ging fo; ebin iiber bie (gtrape. 17. 2)er armc ^naht bauerte ifm, bep^alb ua^^m er iim ju \u^ in fein •^an^ unb liep ibm eine crbentlid^e (Srjief)ung geben. 18. 2Ben bag 23ieb nidit bauert unb toer uubarm()erjtg gegeu balfplbe ift, hm bavsvt aui\ i'm SJienfdi nid^t. Questions. 1. How are the variatives formed 1 2. Can you repeat the German of the first example, Jii-eterlei, &c.? 3. The second example, "it is the same," &c. '? 4. In what signification is geben with the preposition iiber often used 1 5. Example 1 LESSON LXXXI. feet i Ott LXXXI. 33erlaffen, when used reflexively, signifies " to depend upon, to rely upon." Ex. : 3d) i^ertaffe mid) auf 3f;r QBort; I depend upon your word (I leave myself upon your word.) I. v!(bf)angcn, likewise, signifies to depend upon, to be de- pendent upon. Ex. : dQ ijhxqt i)on Umftanben ab ; it depends upon circumstances. Thence is derived the adjective ahhari'' Qlq, dependent. Ex.: (gr fit^tt ein ab^cingigeg ?cBctt; he leads a dependent life, ^ie ^ereinigten Staatert txKaxtm ftd| aU ein nnabBcingiges 35o{i; the United States declared them- selves (as) an independent people. 208 Exercise 84 Slb'pngen, (See above) ; Slfe'l)dni3tg, dependent ; Sebin'gung, /. condi- tion, stipulation ; 3)areiu'it)iUtgcn, to consent ; dnti^ivn'm, to dis- unite, fall out, quarrel ; ^d'tjigfett, /. ability ; g^olge, /. sequel, con- sequence ; ^Tufg ^rud)t,/. fruit; ©ebcv'bcn, to behave ; @emdd/Iid% comfort- able, easy ; ®era'be, exactly ; ®era't()en, to turn out, prove ; ^iiiattiS'', out, out there ; ^inan^'uhn, to hasten out; .ginau^'Jtjerfen, to throw out ; aBe 84. £)effuen, to open ; Umftanb, m. circum- stance ; Un'abf)dngtg, inde- pendent ; 3Sevfcb:nd t)en, to dis- dain, despise ; 2Bof)t'mehien, to mean well, wish well ; 3u'bringltd), obtru- sive. Sd) fanit ntd)t barein'ttJtdigen. (Er tt>it Itgte uuvetjiig'ltd) barein^ 3)iefe Seute ftcKen fid) al^ oB fie t)on ©tuneti it*dren. (§§ iDibevfd^rt' mi§ in unferm 2e; ben (§ 15. 2. paufe trdrc. 16. 5)cr 2)Zatrcfe fteltte ild\ alg 06 er t>on Simien irdve. 17. (Sr yckvbet fid% a((? cb il;m bai^ i^fi'^te Unvedit tDiberfalireii fei. 18. 2)iefer S^uinn jieUt fidv aliJ cb er beteibigt waxi. 19. ©r fieUt fid^ trie ein Jlinb yen fiinf ^afireu. 20. S)er Oiad^bar rt^arf ben Su- brin^Udien ^jiir :l(}iire l)inau^. 21. 2)er jlnabe eilte jiir ^(}iire (}inaug, alo 'idi biefelbc cjfncte. 22. 3nr X()iive l)inciiiu, ii^er iii-\ eutjtreit ! (©ct6e.) 23. (S^ bdncjt C|anj »cn Umftdnben ah, ch id) fdicn nddifte^ 3a{)r iiadi ?tmcrifa veife cbcr nidU. 24. (Ss ^dngt fef)r yen Umftdnben a6, roat^ er tbnn unvb. 25. G'in fc abf}dm]ic^c3 2eben bie iBauern in S)entfdilvinb fiioren, ein cbcn fo unabndngit^es fiif)ren fie in 5lmcrifa. 26. ©anj uiiabf)dn9i*5 ycrmag fein iDtcufdi auf (Srben ju irerben. Questions. 1. What does verUiffen, when reflexively used, signify '? 2. Can you repeat in German, the example, I depend upon his, her. their word 1 3. What does a bf) (in gen signify] 4. Example? 5. Whence is derived the adjective abt)sini]i!] ? 6. Can you give an example of its use 1 LESSOR LXXXII. §tci\0n LXXXII. 0(trf)t6 or nlrfit bafiir fcnncn, signifies "not to be in fault, or to blame, (fee. ; as, id} !ann iiiditS bafiir; it is not my fault, or I cannot help it ; literally, I cannot, or can nothing therefor. (Sr fann md)t§ bafiir, baf er fo arm ift ; he can not help it, i. e. he is not to blame that he is so poor. So also interrogatively ; as, !annbie QBcIt etn^as bafiir, ba^ ]id) ein greyer @eift in un fd)lcrf)« tc§ ^Icib i)erflecft V (S^aBener.) Is the world to blame, that a great soul conceals itself in a plaui dress ? That is, bie SQelt fann nid)t§ bafiir. Exercise 85 pe ^lufgaBe 85. Stn'gcben, to give, cify ; Sln'ftvengiing, / exer- tion, effort, labour ; 33cruf', ???. calling, vo- cation ; SSeuim'nten, to fix, de- termine ; SJ^afiir, therefore ; 5Danf, m. thanks, ac- knowledgment ; ©rret^ten, to save, res- cue, deliver; ?Vurdit,/. fear, dread ; Mxn, m. kernel ; Drbnung, /. order, re- gulation ; Sd^ale,/. shell : Sdin?ddiling, m. weak- ling, weakly person; Umf^Iie'^en, to in- close, surround ; Un'orbeutlijb, disorder- ly, irregular, con- fused ; Unterlafi"'en, to leave off, omit, fail ; Un'roiirbicifeit, / un- worthiness, indig- nity ; 93erbev'ben, to spoil, corrupt, destroy ; S3er5id>/ten (auf db 210 was), to resign, i. e. S3ot gcl;en, (See Sefcn, /. being, exis as a privilege or a above) ; tence ; claim on anything; SKei^fjeit,/. wisdom; SetbredVen, to break (in pieces). 3cti faun iiidite* bafiir , baf idi mein It is not my fault, that I have @elb tievlo'ren l)abc. lost my money. 2)iefe Xlijx Qeijt 'ocr (or, ju fdineE), This watch goes too fast and Hiib jene gel;t nad), (or, ju lang; that (one) goes teo slow. fam). «§at man metii 3nnmer inOvbnung Has my room been put in order ? gcbradif ? 3n ber Oleifie feiner ©dimeld^Ier t)at In the ranks of his flatterers he er feivien irafjreu 'Jvcunb. has not a true friend. (Ss giebt 23iele, bie glauben, baf in There are many who believe, that im ineiften '^dUen bag ©liic! ober in (the) most cases, the fortune Ungliicf eincg SJenfdien Dont 3u';= or misfortune of a man de- faU ab'Bdnge. pends on chance. £eben ©te iitcl)i, mcin^^err, unb em- Farewell, sir, and please remem- )3fe()'l'en ©ie mid) gutigft S^rer ber me kindly to your lady. gran @emal)'ltn. 1. ©ie Bnnen ntdit^ bafi'tr, ba^ ©ie fo ungliicflid) finb, 2. @r fonnfc nicbtiS bafur, biefeg ©lag §erbvcdien gu ^aben. 3. 3d) fann nid)tg bafiir geben, aU metncn 2)an!. 4. S)ie ©ri'inbe bafiir n^erbe id) angeben, tremi eg t^erlangt mcrben foUte. 5. Jl'onncn ©ie mtr fagen, (L. 83. I.) line i)iel lll)r (L. 25. IX.) eg ift ? 6. 5lein, hmn mente U^r ift fte()cn gebltcben. 7. (Stel)t 31}re U()r fdion lange ? 8. 3a, beinal)e eine ©tunbe. 9. 3Jleine Ui}x gcb;t ju fdined, fte geljt beinal)c eine Ijalhe (Stnnbe lun-. 10. 2)ic U()r mctneg grcunbeg geijt fiinf 9}linuten »or. 11. Seben @ie tt*o()(, nnb ijer? geffen <£ic nt6t, micb batb trteber gn befudien. 12. Seben @ie tt)oI)l, mein »§ctr ! 13. 2Bann U^oUcn roir gufammen <^crrn 91. bcfudien? 14. @g l^'dnat ganj )^on 3l)uen ab (L. 81. L), iceldie 3eit @ie baju beftimmen luol? len, idi bin ju jeber 3eit bereit, mtt^ugef)en. 15. @g bdngt t>on3l)nen ab, btcfe gamilie ju ertcttcn cber ju i?erberben. 16. (Sg bdngt 5lUcg 'ocn ®ott ab, ©li'tcf nub Ungliicf, Sefcen nnb Xcb, 5irmnt§ imb S'^eiditf^nm. 17. 2)er S^ad'ibar axhdkt in feiuem ©arten nnb fudit benfelben in Drbnnng ju bringen. 18. 33ei aiier 5ln|lrengung bringt er biefe Sadie nidit in £)rb; nnng. 19. (Sr fud'te mich in bie Stdi)z feincr J?:ameraben ju bringen. 20. @g tidlt fd)»er (L. 46. II.), eincn nncrbentlidien S)^cnfdien an Drbnung ju getDofjncn. 23. 9tadi i^ieler Mui)t fiat er bie Stednuing in Drbnnng ge^; hxacht 24. 9Ber an bcm ^^u^c eineg fteilen 53ergeg ftebcn bleibi nnb au5 %nxd-)t "OCX Slnftrengung benfelben ju erflimmen unterldf t nnb liebcr auf bie fdibne Slngfidit serjiditet, ber ;,dc{t hamit an, ha'^ er ein ©d^njad^ling unb eineg fold^en ®ennffeg unlvertl) ift, — nnb iDer ang eigner ©dmlb in ber Tliik feincr geiftigcn Slugbilbnng ftel)en bleibt, nnb hm fii^en ^ern ber SBeigfjeit entbe{)ren roiii, \ucil eine ranl)e nnb l)arte ©d^ale benfelben nm? fd^lief t, ber gcigt ebenfallg nidU nur feine Unwiirbigfeit, benfelben jn genie; ^en, an, fcnbern andi, umc trenig er ben ffiernf unb bie ^flid^t beg '2Jleii? fd)en, alg eineg geifiigen 2Befcng, erfannt f|at. 211 QUESTION'S. 1. What does the phrase nldUS or itic^t bafiir fonncn signify? 2. How lio you rentier it literally? 3 Can you repeat the German of the interrogative sentence, faun bic iiiclt etroas, &.c. ? 4. Can you repeat the entire sentence assertively ? LESSON LXXXIIL ^ r c t i jj n LXXXIIT. ^id) i''tx\td}in, (to understand one's self) with auf signifies to be a judge of, to be skilled in. Ex. : (Er berftef^t fid) auf ^lU Ie6 ; he is skilled in every thing, &c. ®3 ijerfief^t ftd^, (literally, it understands itself, i. e. it is understood, is self-evident,) answers to our phrase, "of course," or, " as a matter of course." Ex. : (S-§ ijerfte^t fid), or eS t)er* ftcdt fic^ )ion felBft, baf id) meineu (§.ikvn gcBord)cit muf ; of course, or as a matter of course I must obey my parents. The Avord ,,naturUd)/' naturally, is often used in the same manner ; as, natiirlid) muf e0 fo fein -, of course, it must be so. I. (Sagen answers to the English sa)?- or tell : to tell or narrate, however, is often expressed in German by crjci^ten. Ex. : SSa§ fagte cr ? What did he say ? 5Sa§ ^at er rt)mn gefagt ? AVhat has he told, or said to you ? 5)er alte 3)?a* trofe erjahlte elite rii^renbe @efd)id)te ; the old sailor told, or re- lated a moving (affecting) story. II. ^-ort is often answered in English by " gone, off," &c. Ex. : 3ft er fd)cn langc fort ? Has he already been ^ane long ? III. (5y feibenn, bci§= unless, except, &c. Ex. : 5Der9J?enfd) faun iud)t Jrabr(;aft gliicfhd) fein, e^ fei benn, ba^ er tugenb[;aft fei ; man can not be truly happy, unless he be virtuous. SSaftrlid), tra^rlid), idj fage bir : (S§ fei benn, baf 3emanb ^on 9f?eueni ge6creu ii^crbe, fann er ba^ D^teic^ ©otteS nidjt fe^en. Exercise 86. 5IufgaBe 86. §luwalt, m. attorney, ^iu'fommeu, to come, (2d)erj, m. jest, sport ; defender ; get to ; ©toren, to trouble, 93alinen, to open (as ^arf, w. park; disturb; a path), facilitate ; ^fivin^e, /. plant, ve- it^itrfifdi, Turkish ; (Snie. 71. end : getable ; 33L'rfdwen'berlfct),prod- gort'aet)en, to go (Sitetii, m. shine, igal, lavish, pro- away ; light ; fuse. 212 SfBiffen @ie, irie iveit ^k in bet (2acbe 511 ^eBen fcaben ? (5'iiien tfle langen (§ 120. 4.) igpa; jter'ritr fiaben 'Sic gcma^i^t ? @5 i^eriient f^di \}cn felbfi, ha^ ein fauler Sdmlcr !eine ^crt'fitrtttc •ntadien faiin. liefer 3talie^ncr reriicBt' iii' auf -pen: 2?i. ift 6eitte iitcrgcu fcrt na^i^ 'Sc n?cit er aud) »cn Her ircfint unb fc tange id^ audi ^u geBen Iiabe, fc befu'd^e id^ iBn benncdi aHe Xao^t. fBoijin' dim '2te fc fd^uel'l ? 56 geBe ^u bent 3^&u'ar^te. iT'ie >2adie fet nun trie jxe trcli:, t* trerbe iBm nidit ser^ei/Ben, ee fet benn, ba^ er mid^ urn ©ntfdiuP; btgnng Bitte. Do you know how far you have to go in the matter ? (how far you are at liberty to go.) How long a (pleiisure) ride have you taken ? It is self-eWdent 'that a lazy scholar can make no advance- ment. This Italian is a judge of music. Mr. M. left (is off) this moring for North-America. As far as he resides from here, and so great a distance as 1 have to walk, I, nevertheless, \isit him every day. Vvliither are you hastening so rcpidly. I am going to the dentist. Well, be it (the thing) as it may, I shall not forgive him, unless he ask my pardon. 1. ^ix 2)ieb iit feinec SBerBred^en^ iiberfu^rt ircrben unb C3 i?erfie^t iiii^ )>cn felbft, baB er beftraft n^erben n?irb. 2. Qs i^eritefU fid^ i?cn felbft, ia^ cBne -S^anrung bie 2}ten|\teu, Xbiere unb -^ila:uen uidit kbm fcnnen. 3. l^tx 5!}atcr tii feit btefem ?Jtcrgen fort unD He ji^t ncd) nidn iriebcr ^uriicfgtfchn. 4. ^ao -^nd^ in fcrt unb fei:icr tiefer 2dm; (er triU (§ 83. 8. Rem.) iriffen, tro e^ bingefcmmen ift. 5. 3)lcine -DIefeu nub f crtgegangen, cBue 5u fagcn \rcfim lie gcBen irarbeu, 6. Uiu fer Cbft ill atle. (L. 41. III.) 7. 5(u* nab )c viikS @elb n?irb all, irenn man yerfdi^enbertfdi ift. 8. ^ex tiirftfd^e ^aifer Scliman 11. fac^te hix^ tcx feinem Xcbe : „meine ^rafte ftnb alle, nidii aber mcin ^l^ut^." 9. SBie i»eit ge^en ©te fpa^ieteu? 10. 3d^ gehe bi5 ba^ id) miibe trerbe, gettcbnlid) U^ an (L. 58. Note) itn ^arf. 11. Tltin jvreuub ireif red^t gut, tt>ie trelt er in biefer Sad^e ^u gcften i^at 12. -Svan rauf fetbft \m edierae iriifen, trie treit man ^u geben hat : benn aui) ini eAer^e faun man beletbigen. 13. SBc geben Sie inn'^. 14. 3d) gene nadi meinem -5lnit»alt. 15. 2i>te ti^eit Baben Sie ^u geben? 16. 23i3 an ba3 @nbe ber etabt. 17. Sie lange baben Sie ^u geben ? 18. Uebcr einr Stiinbe. 19. dincn tt?ie ireiten -Spajiergang baben Sie gemad^t? 20. 5d) bin hh3 in ber dlahe bc5 gluffeg gewefen. 21. (Sinen n^ie langen 'Spajiergaug baben v2ie geniadit? 22. 3* bin uber eine balbe (Stuube fpajieren gegangen. 23. 21>ie lauge jtnb ^Sie au^ bein >6aufe gewefen Y 24. trar brei ijiertel (Stunben au» bemfelben. 25. SQaren <:;ie n.HUt "ccn bemfelben entfernt ? 26. 3* bin beiuabe cine balbe 2tunbe rceit i^cn bemfelben entfernt getrefen. 27. 3* bcffe eud> trieber^ufebeu, fei e^ nun auf biefer, cber fet e-.^ in fener ilGelt. 28. @r ijlaubte. es fei nun 'bie 21S Seit Cjctcmmen, fid) fcincn eigncn SBcg burd) biefc^ Ccben ju baf)nen. 29. 3)tT ©efamjeiic meiiite, e^ fci nun Icin.je ijenuc;, bap cr ben warnien @diein bcr 5enne uub bic frifdie Cnft l)abc cntbel^rcu miiffen. 30. 3di fann nicvvjeu nidn ju bir fommcn, esJ fci benn, bap mciu 33vuber bi-J bat^in wiebcr ijanj gcfuub un'ivbc. 31. 3di faun lunitc nnmccjlidi bicfcn 5>3rief bcenbigcii, et^ fei bcnn, iia^ idi ..blefen Dtadnnittag tucuigcr geftovt werbe. 32. (5-t? wirb Dliemanb in bie (Stabt eiugelaijen, e^ fci benn, baf ev eincn ^>ap I)abc. QuESTio.vs. 1- What does ft di •ocvflcf^en with auf, signityl 2. Example 1 3. What is llie hteral meaning of „f§ vcvfiebr fid)?" 4. How do j'ou render it ? 5. How is luitiivlid) often rendered ? 6. Example 1 7. To what does fagcn answer^ 8. How is the phrase, "What did he say," expressed in German 1 9. How, " What has lie told you 1 " 10. How is tell, or relate often expressed in German'? 11. Example 1 12. Can you repeat the ex- amples of, „^S fei" ? &;c. LESSON LXXXIV. I'f c t i n LXXXIV. ^^ebenfen tragen (to bear or have hesitation) may be ren- dered, '-to hesitate, to doubt." Ex. : 3d) trage 33ebenfen, e0 ju tf)uit ; I hesitate to do it. (Bv trug 33eben!en, e§ mir anjui^er* trauen ; he hesitated to entrust it to me. I. 3}er compounded with verbs commonly expresses the idea of, awa.M, a loss, lurong, (tc, (§ 97. 3. 4.); as, treiBen, to drive; yertreiBen, to drive away, ©^ielen, \o ijlay ; ber* f:pielen, to lose at play, ^eiten, to guide, ^ e r leiten, to ^/u'sguide, (to guide ivrong). Ex. : *iBie fd)nell ijerfiieft cine frc^e gliitf^ Iid)C <3tunbe ; how quickly a joyful happy hour passes away, 3rf) Ba6e micft yert^ort 3 I have heard wrong, (misunderstood), (fee. Certain uses however, of this and many others of the same class (§ 95,, (fee.) are best illustrated by examples j thus, fe^cn signifies to see, and ijcvfe^en, to pro^ade. 2egen, to lay, and ijer« Icgen, to mislay : also figuratively, to furnish, and hence to publish (a book) that is, to furnish the necessary means for producing the book, &c. II. -^cr frequently answers to our "on." Ex. : 2Ca^ ge^t tiler i?or? What is going on here ? Exercise 87, QlufgaBe 87. 2(eu'fetung, /. utter- S(nfprud>, m. requisi- 58 i (tarb, n. billiards | ance, expression ; tlon, claim, demand; 5Blafen,to blow, soundi 2l4 5)iui/I)cinbIer, m. book- seller, stationer; (Svra'tbcn, to guess, divine ; gaiTuiU3, /. self-com- mand, countenance; %lotcJ. flute ; (Sjciqe,/. violin ; ©efdnrf'licbfctt,/. skil- f ulness, cleverness ; -Cioru, n. horn ; Snjirument', n. instru- ment; j?lat)ier,7i. harpsichord; ^artle',/. game ; dictlje,/. redness, red ; @d)act% n. chess ; (gchaitmatt, check- mate ; ©cl)ndien, n. little son; ©ptelcr, m, player ; (Sttmmung, /. disposi- tion, frame of mind, humor ; Un'bdannt, unknown ; 33erlai30'bud)I)anblung, /. publishing firm. 93erle^gen, (See above) ; 2i5e0ire'i3cn, wherefore, for what reason. The ambassador hesitated to con- fide in all the words of the mi- nister. This book-seller has published the collective works of Goethe. I have mislaid my keys. The young man may get into dif- ficulty by this question. This gentleman wishes to play tenpins with him, but he has (a) greater desire to take a game of billiards. My brother plays the piano, blows (plays) the flute, and under- stands beating (striking) the drum. Does your sister play any in- strument. She played upon the guitar once, but now she plays upon it no more. This Gentleman blows the bugle- horn very finely. I divined in an instant what had brought him thus out of (his) self-possession. 1. (Srtrug 53cbenfen, bem j^vemben bie aclbene Uf^r anjusertrauen. 2. S)er ^-Batcr trug 33ebeiifen, 2lf(eg ju ^Iciuben, icag if)m fein @ct)n erjd^tte. 3. SCcr ju t>iel ^Bebcnfen tracjt, getinunt iventg. 4. (Ste l^ielten lf)ii fiir ei? ncn cvbeutlidien SZeufd^en. 5. M) f}ielt t()n fiir ben Siircjermeifter bicfcr ©tabt. 6. aBir f)ielten if)n fiir ci\\^a^ ganj §lubevek3. 7. 2)er junge 33ud); ftdiibler l)at ein ncue^ 2Berf lu'vlegt. 8. 3ft bit' ncue ©vammatif be^ '^erru tfl. fd^on 'oixUo^t wcvben ? 9. (Sie Ift fo ebeu in ber 9}ev(ag0bud)f)anblung be^ mm ^t;alev befi'mmcn modite, 1 3. . @ie ift in 5Berlt;* !X)er ©efanb'te trug Q3eben^fen, aUen 3Borten beg 9Jlini'fterg jn tcauen. S)iefer 58ud)'()dnbler ijat ®otf)e'g fdmnit'lidie 3Bcrfe toerlegt'. 3d) liabe metne ©diliiffel scrtegt'. 5)er junge Tlann fonnte bei biefer ^rage in 9Serle'gcnf)ett fcmmen. 2)tefer ^^err tttiU jTeget mit i()m fple? Icn ; alletn er l^at gro'f ere ^uft, cine ^^artie' 53 il larb ju niad}en. !Slm\ ^ruber fpielt bag ^crtepia'no, I)Iaft (fpielt) bie -Jfote unb »er^ jleftt' bie Srcnnnel ju fcblagen (riii^ren). C^iett 3f)re ^rdulein (£d)»cftcr ir; genb ein 3nftrument' ? (2ic fpielte einmal auf ber ©uitar're, jclpt aber fpielt fie nicbt mc§r barviuf. 5)icfer ^err bldft baS ffialb^orn fcf)r fd)i3n. 3cl) erriett/ beuSlu'genblicf, irasS i^n fo au^er i^affung gebradit' kMe. 215 gen^cit liber ba« vto^lid)c (frfdieincn einc^ Unbefannten. 14. aBoUeii voit eine ^i^Jartie (gdmdi ober 33iUarb fpiclen? 15. Sd) uc()me lieber einc ^civ- tic »Sd)adi an, ha bei biefcm -Spide mcf)r hex 33eritaub, al^ ble ©efdndlidii feit in 5lnfprudi c^ciicmmcn ivirb. 16. \2))ieteu @ie ©duid^ gem (L. 44. 1.) ? 17. C jvi ; iiur l)abe idi ju ireuii] ©etegenl^eit, e^ ju fpleleu, ttjepivtcc^eu id) bei ^cfdMcficn igpiclcru ]'d)x eft fdiadimatt werbc. 18. ©pieleii ©ie ci:i Snftrument ? 19. ."sci, idi fvicle Jtlvifier uub (;abe feit einigeu Zac\cn am gefaui^eu, @cige ju fpieleu. 20. ©pielcu @ie ©ei^e lieber alg JlUitiier ? 21. Diein, id> fpielc ba^ eine 3nftrnment fo gern, »ie hai anbcre. 22. 33lafen (^ie '^lote ? 23. Oiein, abcr idi {}abe yov, ba^ 4pcrn bUifen ju ler? nen. 24. 'iBie lange blafen Sic %lotc ? 25. Seit nngefd()r einem Tlc^ nate. 26. 3di babe jene *]>apiere i^erlegt ; idi iveip nidit, too fie ^u finben ftnb. 27. iDic Sdiwcfier bat it)re ^§anbfdiu()e nub ibr 33n* iter{cc|t. 28. S3ei biefer 'i^vage fant er anpev ^^vilTung nnb iuuptc nidit, n?a6 er baranf antn:>crteu foltte. 29. 5)en fonft fo rul)igen 9Jiann bradite ein fcKtej? 53e; tragcn a,an;, anper gaffung, nnb feine fnujen Slutworten nub bie dtotlji fei? ner SBangen licp erratben, rcas in fcinem 3nnern oorging. 30. ^d) er^ ttctb angenblicftid) bie Urfadie, bie hk)i ©timmnng in bem ©emixtfie mei^ ne^ j^rcnube^ bcryorgevnfen l}atk nnb tiep e^ and) jcnen erratf)en, bamit er »cvfidUiger in feincu 5(enperungen fein modite. Questions. 1. What does --Bebenfen tragen signify iiterally? 2. Example ? 3. What is the first signification noticed of 5icr? 4. What is the second ? 5. The third V 6. Can you give some idea of what is stated § 97. 3. 4 ? 7. Can you define the three words, tveibcn, rv^tclen and leiten with and without the particle verV 8. How are some uses of some of tiie particles best illustrated 1 *J. What examples can you give ? 10 To what does »ot frequently answer 1 11. Example V LESSON LXXXV. pinion LXXXV. 3fted)t (right) and tin! (left) are often used with „inv;" as, gur 9fiec{)ten, jur ^iu!en, for ju bcr ndjUn ^anb : to the right hand ; ju ber linfen ^an^ ; to the left hand. I. ©efatlen, literally, to fall, or happen (acceptably,) i. e. to be pleasing, or agreeable. Ex. : 5r)iefeg -^iid) gefatlt niir ; this book pleases me. ©efatteu laffen = to submit to, " to put up with." E\-. : 3rf) famt mir biefe 33e^anblung nlrf)t ge=* fallen laffen ; I cannot submit to this treatment, i. e. can not let this treatment please me. Exercise. 88. 5lufgabc 88. Stuf fteden, to post, 33clei'bigung, / of- JBefAlie'fen, conclude, draw up, fence, injury : resolve, determine ; 216 ^eu'etgtorfe, /, fire- bell; ©e^o^rig, suitable, proper ; ©ei'viienfpicC n. violin- mu^ic ; ©iiirai're,/. guitar; £-iei), n. song, air ; Siiif, adj. (See above); Stnf g, adv. to the left ; 9Jlcjart, m. Mozart; 9Zatiit'Iicb, natural, naturally ; Sleciit, adj. (See above) ; ^RedUe, «c?r. to the right ; (Sttlt'fdDiueigen, to be silent, to hold one's peace ; Untcvfu'cbung, /. ex« amination ; Untewer^fen, to sub- ject, submit ; 35crtt)uu'berung, /. as- tonishment, sur- prise. dg tft ©cbabe, bajj M ttielen ^Jten^ fdieit bie guteri 5(ii'(agen itnb 3:'a(en'te nid)t bcffer aue'gebilbet iuerbcri. <5g tft ©dmbe, baf er nicbt ba ti^ar. jDag tft mir gaitj redit. 5)em fi-Dinmeu S^cbi'as? irsav 5(I(eg redit, tiiae @ott iiber i()u »er; I)dng^te. (Sin SiJerleitm^bev mu^ eg ftdi ge;: fal'Ien taffeit, ticii feinen ^ie'beui menfdien t>eradytet ju trerbeit. 3n bem @tii6dien biefer armen al- ten ^rau faf ^ur 9?editen bic 9>otf) lutb jur £iufen ba^ @"leub, OieditS fiei)t man I'xt ©diafe in ber SStefe tt»etben unb linU bie Bie- gen an bem 33erge Hettcvn, 2)lorgen iifeer ad)t Xage reifen toir \)on f)iev ab. (5r beglei'tete feinen ©efang^ mit ber -^avfe. ^le 33eglei'tung btefe^ (Stiicfe<3 ifi t)on bem bevitfjm'ten .^'art SJiavi^a '■OQn 2Gebev. Unter foldien llm^ftdnben tcnrbe boi^ 33erfpred)'en natiir'(idi ge? bro'dien. 1. @g ift ©diabe, ba^ @ie ni&t eine @tunbe frii^er gefcmmen ftnb. 2. SJladit eg wte 3^r itjodt, mir ift SlUeg redit. 3. !Dlir ift StUeg redit, wag bie Serfailtmlung befdilcffen (;at. 4. S'r mu^te fid) biefe ©elcibi? gung ftiUfdiivcigenb gefaUen laffen. 6. (5'r mupte fid) SSieleg gcfaKen laffen, tuag er fid) unter anbern 3^er{)altniffcn nid^t t)atte gefaUen laffen. 6. (Sie mn^te eg ftd) gefallen laffen. »erleumbet toorben ju fetn. 7. Zwt 9led)ten l^atten mir bag ©ebirge unb ^ur Stulen ben %Vl% 8. Oied)tg MtCi> It is (a) pity that vv^ith many men (the) good endowments and talents are not better de- veloped. It is (a) pity that he v^^as not there. That just suits me (is just as I 'd have it.) To the devout Tobias, all w^as right that God ordained con- cerning him. A calumniator must submit to be despised by his fellow-men. In the little room of this poor old woman sat distress at the right hand, and wretchedness at the left. At the right are seen the sheep pasturing in the meadow, and at the left the goats clamber- ing upon the mountain. A week from to-morrow we de- part from here. He accompanied his song with the harp. The accompaniment of this piece is by the celebrated Charles Maria von Weber. Under such circumstances the promise was of course broken. 217 VmU iraren fembtidie S^tu^^V^cn aufiiclleflt 9. 3f)r buvfet tvebcr jut JRt\-t'tou nodi jiiv 2infen ihmi bicfcm iLn'i^e abwcidheii. 10. ®:r ift (Sdiulb (L. 60. II.) ail bicfcm Uiu]liutc ? 11. Unfcr Oiad^Hiv ift Sdnilb bavan. rj. ^a- ^dnitcv ift Sdml'b bavan, \>afi ev bcftraft iinvb. 13. ffiiv fclbjl fuib Sd-ulb bavau r^oan^fni. 14. ailcwjeti iiber adU Xac^c fommt ein CDamvffv-iujf ivmi OKniv-^])orf au. 15. lOici-jv^u iiber incr§e{)ii Sacjen wirb cs? eiii C>>i!n-, l>.^^ id) it;ii (3efcl)en babe. 16. ©efierii »ov adH tai^on ijl (ei!i 53atcv (]cftorbeu. 17. 2)vV^ junge SZciDdicu bccjlcitete ifjreii ©efang mit eiiicv ©iiitarrc. 18. !5)fr ^vrcunb beqlcitctc mit bcm <5ortepiano bag ©oii^cnfvMcl beg 5taliener3. 19. !Die ^-Begleituug biefer Sieber ift t>cn 2}iqavt. 20. 35tcley n^iirbe ititg naturlidi^erf*etiien, trenn wir eg einer C}cl)oriiieii Uiitcrfud^uuvj itntevwerfcn tviirbcn. 21, SQBir fanbcit eg fcf)r iiatfulid>, baf ev gcftcvn nidu fam. 22. (Sin natiirlidieg <^veiguip erregt fciuv^ iBevnMinbevuug. 23. ^aben Sie Ijeute SJlorgen bie ^euerglorfcn ge; ftcvt ? 24. [Jlaturlidi, (L. 83.) bemi i* ttjar fclbil bei bent ^euer. 25. S'g ift natuvlidi, ba^ tuir fterben miilTen. 26. 3d) bcglcitete meine jungen greunbc nadi «§aiife. Questions. I. With what are rec^t and I ttiE often used? 2. What does jur rocbreit and ^ur linfen signify? 3. Do you see any analogy between the German and the English in these phrases'? 4. What does gefalien signify 1 5. Can you vary the example and say in German : John's new book pleases him much i 6. What does c^efafien laffen signify ] 7. Example? LESSON LXXXVI. §tctiott LXXXVI. The dative of the personal pronoun of the first and second person (seldom translatable) is often employed in familiar style, to intimate in a wholly indefinite manner, a participation or interest on the part of the speaker or the person addressed. Ex. : 5ci) loBe mirben ^naBctx; I praise (for myself) the boy. @cfie mir ntcfit auf ^ (ii§> ; do not go upon the ice. 3n ber Blut'* gen (2d)Iadit bei ?u§eii ritt er (Surf) imter beS ?yeuerg ^ligen auf unb niebcr luit fu^fem 33Iut. (Sd)i[Ier.) In the bloody battle at Liitzen he rode amid the lightnings of the firing, up and down, in cool blood. 1. 2)ai?cnlaufen = to run off, to run away; as, @r ijt 6ei Ulad)t xtnb ^tbd bat)Ott getaufen; he has rim away by night and fog. 2)urd^ge'^en has sometimes a like signification ; as, 2)er 3)tt* ner ift mit bem ®elbc burc^gegangen ; the servant has run away with the money. 10 218 Exercise 89. 5latfga:6e 89. Stn'mcrfen, to perceive; 93et»tr'tf)ung, /. enter- tainment, reception; ^reuiibiidh, friendly ; ©ejie'meit, to become, beseem ; Sleu'giertg, inquisitive, curious ; 9tettuTig,/.deliverance; (Bdheu, shy, skittish ; @omit, consequently, therefore ; (Storung, /. distur- bance ; Um'fe^en, to look about ; SSerbric'pen, to grieve, vex, trouble. 3)ag ^an§en madit mir hin SSet; gnii'gen. 3d) merfe e^ ^^mn an, bap ®ie nidit jufrie'ben ftnb. 2)a^ i|l eme serbriep^lidic ©ad)e. 2)te Stebe fiat bie Su'^orer ^erbrof';: fen. @r ift bat) en getaufen. t 'bk f*onen Simmer uiib btc freunblid^e ^ewirti)ung. 22. 2)ie ^ferbe murben fdieu nnb gingen mit an6 burdi. QtrESTiONS. 1. How is the dative of the first and second persons of the persona! pronouns often employed ? 2. Is such dative usually tranela table 1^ 219 3 Can you give an example ? 4. Can you repeat the last example 1 5, What does t'avoiilaiifvn signify ? 6. Has bimt)i]t'^cn, sometimes a like signification 1 7. Can you give an example of babcnlaufen? 8. Of burd)gcl)e» ? LESSON LXXXVII. Section LXXXVIL ^cjiciv when used transitively signifies " to test, or try by tasting." Ex. : (Sr fo^d ben 5©ein; he tastes the wine. 3Serfud)en has sometimes the same signification ; as, er ber* fucfjt belt 3Bcin ; he tries the wine (that is by tasting.) I. (Bc^mccfcU/ to relish ; denotes properly the impres- sion made by tasting. Ex. : 5Der SBein [d^merft gut ; the wine tastes good. @S frf)mectt mirmd)t; it does not relish (tome,) I do not relish it. 3)ie @^eife fdjmecft na^ diaxi^ -, the food tastes of smoke (smoky.) Exercise 90. 5t u f g a B e 9tenbern, to alter, change ; S3ittcr, bitter ; ©mpfan'gen, to re- ceive ; ©emii'fe, n. vegeta- bles; Se^ig, present ; jler'fermeifier, m. jail- er; ^udien, m. cake ; fic^'v^efien, to set free, release ; Wli^hvau'&jnx, to mis- use ; (£e{ig,blissful, blessed, happy ; 90. ©tettung,/ situation!, SSerfcbaff'en, to pro- cure; SSitnber, n. wondei , mu-acle, prodigy ; Biicti'tt^ung, /. chas.. tisement, correc- tion. 2)ie Xf)at ill gef6e'6cn unb aUe 9lcicb'tf)iimer biefev (5rbe fcnnen file ni*t ungefd}e'f)en madim. 2)et JStdge toei§ nid)t tras et tf)un fell (L.75. II.) um ji&i ble Sanger trei'le ^u »ertrei'6eii. iDiefer 9fiinbg%aten fdimecft mix beffcr, a(^ jeneg ©efiii/gel. (Be tuar ber 5>a'pagei, ber fc eben gefprcd)'en f)at. 2)et Siingling fiU)Ue ftdi iiber hen SSerbadit', ben man auf i^nl^atte, tief gefrdn!t'. The deed has transpired and al? (the) riches of this earth can- not make it otherwise. {Exer- cise 43. S}leincm S^effen, &c.) The slothful (man) knows nol what to do in order to drive away (the) tediousness. This roast-beef relishes (to me) better than that poultry. It was the parrot, that has just spoken. The youth felt (himself) deeply mortified, on account of the suspicion, which rested upon him. 1. 2)a6 UngludE ill gefdieften unb nidit me^r ^u dnbem. 2. 9Bann ifl if»m bieffg Ungliicf begcgnet? 3. (Se gef*at; oor ciner @tnnbe. 4. ©a^ gefc^e^en fann foU gefd)e^en, um biefen £cuten einc bejfere ©tellung 220 ju yetfdiaffca. 6. ©6 l|^ fcticn eft ber '^all geiuefen, ba^ bag Scrtrauen ml^brauclit wcrten i\t. 6. (SiJ fanbeu in frufjerer 3eit mel)r aBunoer imb Seidien (gtatt (L. 60. I.) at^ in ber ie^igen. 7. @5 gcfcbaf) t^m tcct^t, ciuiuvil eiue 3ud)ti9ung empfangen ju ijahm. 8. (5'g gc[clne(;t iiidU^ c^ne ®ctt^ ©iffcu unb iGiUen. 9. 2)er SJlupiggdnger Uhm^ nidit u^a^ er tf)un fell. (L. 75. 11) 10. 2)er ficipige Jtnabe imipte nidit, irag er xciter tl)im fcUte. 11. 2)cr ilerfevmeifier fvagte iva^ er tl}uii fclte, urn felig ju iveriien. 12. SBte fdimecft 3t}ncn biefe^ ©t^miife ? 13. Q^ fdmierft mtr iuH-treffIid% 14. (2d)mc(ft ^finen btefcr .!^udu'u nid^t? 15. £) ja, ev fdimecft niir fef)r Qut 16. ©dimccf t 3l;ucu bag (Sffen ? 17. dliin ^evr 2)cctcr ; — eg fdnnecft tnir 9Ule^ bitter. 18. 3d) bin e^, ber biefeg fprid)t unb gefprcd^en Bat. 19. (§x i|l e^, ber biefe iBorte ju fpvedien tvagte. 20. ifltdit n?af)r, (Sie finb e^, ber gefprccben (;at, man moge bie ©efaugeneu lc6 gebeu. 21. 3a, unb Sie ftnb eg, ber mir wi^ berfprodien fiat. 22. Siefe aBorte t;aben unfern jungen greunb tief ge? frdn!t. 23. (5ie fdieint gefrdnft n)orben ju feln. 24. 2Raii barf ftd) ntd)t uBcr jebe Jllcinigfcit gefrdnft fii^Ien. 25. SJJan barf ben ©ebaufen, gefrdnft tucrbcn ju fcin, nicbt lange 9laum in bem -§erjen geben. — 26. 2Bag foftet @ie 3f)r neuer aCagcn ? 27. -^aben @ie fd)on biefeg Dbft gefcj|et? 28. 3a,'idi l)abe ce fcebcn «erfud}t. Questions. 1. What does f often used transitively signify 1 2. How do you express in German, he tastes the wine 1 3. What signification has »ers fiidieii sometimes 1 4. Example 1 5. What does fc^metfcn denote 1 6. Can you give more than one example '? LESSON LXXXVIII. f ectton LXXXVIII. SSerfe^en (from ijer, against, t, plain, homely; <2pctteln, to jeer, jibe, banter ; (8tdbter,m. townsman, resident of the city; J'veibcn, to drive ; ^vvrdtt;crei',/. treach- ery ; 93erfe^'cu, (See above); 33cr'mttta9, m, fore- noon; • ^dXti)dU m. part of the world or globe j ©cvii'Ser, of what, whereof, whereat. 2;er f>eim'tucfif*e 5DZenfd) i^erfc^'te mir liin'tin-lifti^er SBeif^ ehicii (gdilaoi in ben Sftiicfeii. 2)er ^Catcr ^c^t bicfen 9^ad)'mittag fiber g-clb. (E'r ii>eip ni6t, irie er ju biefem 9ie'; geiifdMvm gefem'meu ift. @r cjebt bei'uafie al(e Xage auf^ Saiib mib crfrifdU' ftd^ an 2)ttid^ iinb Oh^. 9lapc'lecu n^uvbc t:cn ben @ng'idn; b^ni gcfan'ojen gencm'men. 3)a^ 33evbre*'en biefem S)lanneg ift :i\\ ben S^ag gefcm'men. (Sv iti tange nidit id uno getre'fen. @r ift iiid^t lange Bei nng gette'fen. The malicious man gave me, in a deceitful manner, a blow upon the back. The father goes this afternoon over the country. He does not know how he came by this umbrella. He goes nearly every day into the country and refreshes him- self with milk and fruit. Napoleon was taken prisoner by the English. The crime of this man has come to light. He has not for a long time been at our house. He has not been long at our house. 1. @r i^erfe^te iftm einen Sdilag in bas ©ejtd^t. 2. 8dierjtoeife ijer^ fe|te mir bie Sdircefter einen Sd^lag mit ber jiadien .§anb. 3, ^-o fdiicft fidi nid''t fuY ^ftnabeji, einaubcr ^u f^lagen. 4. 2)er S5ater ift fiber §elb gegangen unb rcirb erft gegen 5lbenb ^uriicffcmmen. 5. 2^er -33rnber war biefen 93ormittag in bem ^elbe, um bie ^^riidite ^u befe^en, unb btefen ^l^&^i mittag getU er fiber ?^e(b, um einen franfen ^Better ju befudicn. 6. 9Bie finb «gie \\x bicfcm @c(bftiicfc gcfcmmen? 7. 3d) \)§aufc entftiefjen incllte. 13. SSl^w iru^te lange n^d^t, »er bie §remben n>aven, bi^ ti enblidi an ben Xag !am, ba§ ea^ sometimes employed 1 9, Example 1 LESSON LXXXIX. f t f t i n LXXXIX. <§m (L. 28.) applied to time, may refer as well to the fu- ture, as to the past. Ex. : 3318 §u bent jtran^igPien Sa^r^unbert l^in, fonncn nod) Diele Umtraljungen, in ber alten SSelt \owd% ii?ie in ber neuen, 'Btatt flnbcn ; up to (between this and) the twentieth century (thither) there may yet, in the old world, as well as in the new, many revolutions take place, ^andjtx fiagt nad) einem leidjtftnnicj iJcrleBten SiinglingS alter, ba^ nun bie gitnftigfte B^it nm ^enntniffe ju ertrerBen ^in fei ; many a one complains, after a frivolously spent youth, that (now) the most favorable period for acquiring knowledge is past (lost, or gone.) In this latter sense ba^in is likewise employed; as, „bie (Srntc ijl; bergangen, ber Sommer ift ba^^in." I. @incn @(^ritt t^un = to take a step ; as, tretd^e (Sd^ritte ntitffcn get^an n?erben ? What steps must be taken ? Sdjritt fatten = to keep step, to keep pace ; as, biefer ^mU ijerfud^t glcid)en <2d)ritt nut bem 33ater gu :^alten ; this boy tries to keep step with his (the) father, ^einrid) ift nid)t fleigig genug, um gleic^en 6d)ritt mit Srnji Beim ©riernen ber beutfdjen 8^rac^e :&alten gu f onnen ; Henry is not diligent enough (in order) to 223 enable him to keep pace with Ernest in learning the German language. 11. Sineu ©c^uf tl;utt = to make a shot, to shoot ; as, Bi0 §u bicfcm -XaQt fjat tmi iDZenfd^ euicn [o Berii:^mten to freeze, chill ; ®udl>lg, gracious, clement ; ^aber, m. quarrel, brawl ; Segen, to lay ; (fid) le- geii, to abate ;) 5Pla'|cftdt, /. majesty; ^iiiiftltdi, punctual, punctually ; @dnif, m. shot; •Sdnrortflreidi, m. stroke with the sword ; Uebevge'ben, to sur- render, deliver ; 93erfef)'len, to miss, fail: fgaBe 92. S3erfdieu'd)en, to scare, frighten ; 33erfoi'ger, m. provi- der, sustainer ; 93orbei'gef)en, to pass one (unnoticed) ; S3orii'berge()en, to pass by; SBe^en," to blow ; 2Bilbbteb, m. poacher, deer-stealer. We honor a man no longer than we respect him — if (the) re- spect is gone, so also is (the) love. He who has taken the first step to a crime, also easily takes the second. He has made a good shot. He has just passed by the win- dow; He will not go out, because the wind blows so hard (strong.) We shall probably yet have (get) snow. There is a strong wind blovdng. Of whom is the speech (conver- sation ?) 1. ^k beiben ^reunbe vnaren eg (L. 36. VI.) miibe Idnger mit einan? bcr ju ftreiteit. 2. ©er^oiug unb btc ^aifcrin bc^ langeii ^aberg mi'ibe, fie maditen enblidi '^riebe. CSixrger.) 3. ©a bev 2Biub i^iemn* ftarf unb au^aUenb tt»ef)te, fo erbHcften ft)ir fdicn nadi wierj^cbn Xaci^en 8anb. 4. (Ss \vei)t fieute ein [e^v falter 28inb, unb idi befiird)te, ba^ tt>ir ^n jwetten. (5v i)at einen guten @dntf getftan'. (§r ift foeben an bem ^enfter i)or; iVber or tiorbei' gegan'gcn. (5*r ttjUt nidit aue'gef)en, tt»eit ber iOinb fo itaxt xodji. SSiv ftcrben \vci)l nod) @d)nee be; !om'men. m gef)t ein fiarfer 28ntb. 23 on to em ift ble dteh^ ? 224 funf SJlinnten Mhe ^anbc etfror. 7. SeBt mein 2>afer nodi ? 8. 3a, ei lebt nod% aber unfer junge (^J^eunb ift nidit mefir. 9. SBciyi ifjm, er ill Ilingegangen, wo fcin ©dmee me(}r ift. 10. (^r, ber 33erfcrger fc mkx Slrmen, ift uidit me(}r. 11. SBoyon (L. 29) lebt biefe avme gamilie? 12. aSoyou trirb gefprodien ? 13. SSoii tijem fprl'i)t man ? 14. 3)ai^ ift et^ tca^, tccoon @ie ntdit^ oerftel^en 15. a^cttcn ift bie O'Jebe ? 16. 33ou iwem 'i)abm ©ie ba^ gefjovt? 17. ^cn tvem i^aft bu biefee! artige @cs fdienf erfjalten? 18. ®er ffiiibbiefe fdicp nad) bcm Siiger, aUdu bie »^ugel i)erfei)lte i^r Biet, unb ei}c er nodi einen anbcnt @diu^ t()un fonnte^. [anf ei" feibft, getrcffen wn bem 33Iei be^ 3dger^. 19. £)i;ne @diuf unb ©diwertftreidi icuvbe bie ^eftung iibergeben. 20. @r t^at einige (Sdiiiffe in bem ©arten, um bie Q3cge( ju »erfdieudien. 21. ®er junge ^ngtdnber ging fceben an unfever S^iire »oriiber. 22. ®r ift an mir yorbei gegan? gen, of)ne mid) jn erblicfen. 23. ©iefer ^ann hat bie giinftigfte Beit feU mS Sebeng unbenii^t iocrbeigefjen laffnt. 24. ?ll0 ^riebridi ber ©rcf e einen |ungen Dfjxcier nadi einer @di(adit fefjr au^jeidinete unb ijffentlid) lebte, fo anttt)ortete biefer : „(lw. (§ 58. Note) SJ^ajeftdt befd^dmen mid^ burd) biefe @()re." 25. Srag' er (§ 57. 7.) mir biefen ^rief auf bie ^c]t, 3ci)ann, unh (ap er mir bk\e gclbene lU)r au^beffern. 26. 3ft er fdion hd hem -^errn 3)^iulfter gewefen, unb ijat er metne Stuftrdge ipiinft? iidi beforgt ? 27. 3a gndbigcr ^crr, id) ^abe fie aui3geriditct. 28. 3d) l^abe f)eute feincn @diritt au^ bem ^^aufe getc)an. 29. Obgleidi idi hen erften ©diritt ju einer SSerfobnung getfjan l)abe, fo f)dlt eg i()m bod) fdilt»er, ben jn^eiten ju tl)nn. 30. 3n feinem fed^je^nten 3af)re t^at er ben erften Sdiritt in bie ^rembe. 31. 2)iefer junge or elnent 33iertelja^re in Qlnierifa. I. -^luftragen with the accusative, signifies to put on (as colors,) or serve up (as food ;) as, man ^at aufgetragen; they have served up (the meal.) With the dative, it means to com- mission, enjoin, instruct, &c, ; as, er I6at mir aufgetragen S^nen. 226 ju fagen, baf tx €ie morgcn ertrartet ; he has instructed me to say, that he awaits, or expects you to-morrow. II. Qdiridjten (hterally, to make right, or ready for,) signi- fies to get in readiness ; to prepare (as victuals ;) so Unveil anrid)tcn ; to prepare, produce, do mischief. Ex : 0iad[)bem bic .^od)iu bie '^^unfen angerid)tet ijatk, txnq fie bicfelBen auf ; after the cook had prepared the food, she served it up. 5)er @eij ^at ]d)oxi bid Unveil angerid^tet. III. *§inreid)en, when transitive, signifies "to hand, to pass." Ex. : (Sr reid)te bem ^Teunbe bag ^^ud) ^in ; he handed (reached) his friend the book ; when intransitive it means " to suffice, to be sufficient." Ex. : (Set;r irenig reid)t ^in, eincn flu- gen 9)2cnfd)en gliicflid^ ju mac^en ; very httle is sufficient to make a wise man happy. 93. Exercise Stn'ridi ten, (See 11.) ; Stuf'tra^en, (See I.) ; ©eftve'ben, to endeav- or, strive, exert one's self; 5)eepc'tifcb, despotic, despotical ; 2)onau,/. Danube; (Siner [etuer greunbe twurbe in Sa? ben erfdicffen. Tlan hat mir bie Xlntetfu'd)ung biefcr ©acbe ciuf getragen. SJlan tritg auf, was jlii*e unb ^el;: ler i^ermccb'te. ^er 3cni xid:>kt nur Sijfeg an. Qe ift in fl)eut|'cblanb iroM'feilcr leben aU in Slme'rifa. (Ss gcniigt mir nidit if)n ju [efjen, id) will i^n and) fpred)en. 3d) toill eg iijm fiin'retdien. 3d) troUte if;n hqa^'inh abcr ba5 ®elb reid)te nid^t i)hx. @t arfceitet mit gvc^em gleipe (fet)v fteipig.) (Sr ftat eg mit gleif get^an . 10* (irbul'ben, to endure, bear ; (Bxtxin'kn, to drown ; ©riifen, to greet, salute ; .^in'retdien, (See III.) ; (Su^-i^e,/. soup; 5IufgaBe 93. suffer, 23a'tettanbgfrennb, m. patriot, friend of one's country ; 2}ei-fudVen, to try, taste ; 33ern?ir'rung, /. per- plexity, confusion. A friend of his was shot in Baden. They have enjoined on me the investigation of this matter. They served up what kitchen and cellar afforded. Anger produces only mischief. It is cheaper living in Germany, than in America. It does not satisfy (suffice) me to see him ; I wish to speak to him also. I will reach it (forth) to him. I was going to pay him, but the money did not hold out (suf- fice.) He labors with great industry (very industriously.) He has done it (with intention) intentionally. 226 1. ©in 95atcrlanbgfreuttb flirBt lieBer, aU baf (L. 61.) er jwm S3er? tdtl)et irlrb. 2. 2)te erften Sfiriftcn evbulbeten UeUx bie t;drteften 93er; folijuTigcu, aU ba^ fie i§reu ©laubeu tevlie^en. ' 3. (So etwas la^t man ftdl nid)t jtt)etmal fagen. 4. Sinen meiiier 33ruber f)abe id) in brei 3af); ren nidit gefef)en. 6. (Sin ^reuub son mtr ift sot eiuigen Sa^ren bei SBieu in ber 5)onau ertrnnfen. 6. (Itirdte ge^t unx l;al& elf beg SDlcrgeng an (L. 79. Vl.) unb urn §alb jn^clf irirb fie ge; trofjnlidi gefdilcffen. 6. (Sr madite ifin ju feinem eertrauteften ^veunbe, cl;ne i^n ocrf)er ge^riift jii ^aben, cber fonft em Seugni^ iibet feine Xxim unb Q3erf*miegen()eit ^u f)abcn. 7. DZidit tioaijk jum iBevtrauten elnen Seben bu, bag Iccre -§aug ift cffen, bag rcidie ^u ; ircil)!' ©inen bir unb fu*e nidit ben Stnbern, halh trirb, wag 2)reie nnffen, ju Slifen tiHinbern. 8. J^cmmen (2te yieUei*t biefen Sf^adnuittag cin n)entg ^u mir? 9. jlcmmen (Bk ijteUetdit biefen Slbenb in bag Concert ? 10. @r l)dngt »on DZiemaus bem ab (L. 81. I.), er lebt, trie eg il)m gefdUtg ift. 11. ©r ftcigt beg SRcrgeng auf, trann eg if)m gefdUtg ift, bag eine S)Zal fviif; unb anbere dJlai fpdt. 12. @r fpridit unb ijanhdt, tyle eg lf)m gefdUt, of)ne fidi an ehi lUv t^eif ber £eute ju fe()ren. 13. 3d) {)abe il^n jufdUig ju ^aufe angetroffen. 14. Siifdllig traf id) if)n im 2;f)eater. 15. @g ift in ber X^at nidit fo leidit, ftdi in ai(e Sagen beg Sebeng gebulbig gu fdiidPen. 16. (5'g ift in ber Zi)at »a()r, trag biefe §rau gefprod'.en i^at. 17. QBag ftdi Jteiner getraute, Ijat 2)tefer ju (Stanbe gebrad^t. 18. (Sx f)at bie (Ba&is ju ©tanbe gebradU. 19. S)ie meifren 3uf)orer ftnb n)dt}rcnb fetner langen 9tebe elngefd^lafen. 20. 5)ag ^inb fdilief aug SJliibigfeit ein. 21. 3)ie ©efeUfdiaft langtr-eiae fid) fet;r unb ging fri'tl; augfinanber. 22. @r langir>eilte nid)t nur mid), fonbern and) metne greunbe. Questions. 1. What does gentc^en signify? 2. Example'? 3. What is the force of auf, frequently 1 4 Example ? 5. Is this likewise the case with 5U ? 6. Example ? 7. To what does „tu ber Xbat" answer in English 1 8. Example ? 9. What does the phrase ^u Stanbe brtngcn signify V 10. Ex- ample? 11. What does Ian grociU-u signify ? 12. Example 1 13. ©tc^ lang=, jvetlen? 14. Example? 15. Saitgannle V 16. Example 7 LESSON XCII. I'cctton XCII. ^augeit, answers to the English phrase, " to be good, or fit for." Ex. : SBo^v^ *^"3^ ^^^f^^^ • ^^^^^^ i^ this good for ? or, more literally, whereto serves this ? 3)a§ taugt niditS ; that is good for nothing. From this is derived the noun „3;'augc* nic^tS/' worthless fellow ; as, ein I'anger (Sc^treif i)cn ^eud)Ieri* fc^ctt ^augenid^tfen (SBietanb) ; a long train of good-for-nothing fellows. 229 I. ®rof e Qlugcn marfjen, (literally, to make big eyes,) is a phrase signifying, " to appear surprised, or astonished." Exercise 5tn'&leten, to offer, protTer. tender ; Stu'fiibriiug,/. leading, conduct, command ; Sltujrijf, m. attack, as- sault ; SBatterie',/. battery; Seja^'len, to pay ; IDvn'bictcn, to ojfer; S)ra:|c'iier, m. dra- goon ; (iiii'treten, to enter, step in ; ©rfcbovft', exhausted, spent ; (5^ ftnb ii)rer itci) eininal fo X)\zi aU unftT ; 5d) t)aBe [[)m @t4b an'gr&oten. ®clb tau^t nidit ^ii ©d-!nei'r)en)erf? jeugen, roeit e^ ju wetd) ift. ©r Tnad)te grc^e ^ivi^^zn, ol^ ev midi nacb lancjer Xrennmig tt>ie? ber erBlicf'te, ©ri^iiv'tncn by storm ; ^iti^rer, m. leader, commander; ©utben, m. florin, guilder ; ^cirte, /. harshness, unkindness ; ^iiiaiiis'fprengen, to spring out, rush out; ^reu^cr, m. a small coin ; *^reuf ifd), Prussian ; -^lufgaBc 95. to take Sciugen, (See above) ; Uu'CilUgftnt, /. un- reasonableness, in- justice ; Uii'garifdvHungarian ; S3cnveidi'Itd)eii, to ef- feminate ; 33er5et)''ren, to con- sume, eat ; SSor'fc^en, to place be- fore, put before ; 2Birtf), m. host, land- lord, inn-keeper. There are twice as many of them as of us. I have offered him money. Gold is good for nothing for edge-tools, because it is too soft. He seemed surprised, as he saw me again, after (a) long se- paration. 1. ©ie ^idiiber fefeten jtd^ inn em groped geuev, irieldieg fte in ber2}?itte tizi 21>.ilbeg angevi'mbet f)vitteu. 2. (Sr \i^\t \i&\ an ben %\\<^. 3. @r fe|,te fid^ auf fein ^ferb unb fprengte bie @tabt fjinviug. 4. 2)te 2)ras gcner fa^en ^iit ^u ^fcrbe unb triavteten nur nc6:\ auf i§ten ^iUjter urn ttM 5tngtiff ju begtnncn. 5. @r faf auf feinem SBrone fo finfier unb fo blei6. (Ul)[anb.) 6. 2Bir trafen iBn uuter einem 33aume fi^enb. 7. !J)er ®aft fragte ben anbern (L 33. Vlll.) DJlorgen ben SBIrt^, mag er fdiulbig fci. (L. 44. VI.) 8. @r \:j§in'Idttgnd^, sufficient- Uii'iibexlegt, inconsid- @rft, rSee I.) ; ly, enough ; erate, rash ; ©elin'^gen, to succeed, ^in'fe^en, to sit down; SSerfcr'gen, to pro\'ide; prosper, speed ; 3rbifd^, terrestrial, 33crbei', past, gone ; ©efd^df'tig, busy, bu- earthy, earthly ; Seitltdi, temporal, sied, active ; ,Kiiiifttg, (See H.) ; earthly, timely ; •^dn^ltdb, domestic ; 3u'ge:^en,(See above). ^ £94 ^0 gel^t ee in bet 3BeU ju. @^ 9e()t feit toierjefjn Ha^en fccffcr mit il}m. ©rft fiber'^ 3a(>r fanii e{eiter ijt cine tuid)'tiv3c The lightning-rod is an important amerila'nifdie (Srfin'bung. American invention. 1. 3di nninf*e Sf^nen einen gnten 3Jlorgen. 2. 3* ^cifee bic @^re, Sf}? nen einen guten Slorgen ju h?iinfdien. 3. 3d) gebenfe (L. 47.) meiner grennbe niit inniger Siebe. 4. 3n ben 3eiten beg ©liiifeg gebadite er fei; ner nidit, xooiji aber in ben @tiuiben ber 5(ngft nub ber ^)lot^. 5. 3d) gebenfe gu r*errcifen. 6. 3di gebenfe balb nneber ju fommen. 7. ®ir gebenfen aik alt jn trerben. 8.' 5f)r gebadUet eg bofe mit mir gu madien. 9. Ser 23atei* ift gefonnen batein ju unlligen. 10. 3d) it>ar nid)t gefonnen icdjin jn gt'i)en. 11. 3d) ^ucfe mcinen ^'cffer, treil id) gefonnen bin, in ben erften Sagen jn i^erreifen. 12. 3di fte^e im Segriffe abjureifen. 13. 3di hn im 53egriffe augjngeften. 14. ^lan fiif;rte hm 9}erbredier jum Siidit^'tfale. 15. 2)er @ot)n beg --^erjcgg fii^rte bie Srn^:pen felbft jnm ©turme. 16. (§x fiibrte fte gnm Slngriffe. 17. ^u^tanb fiitrte itrieg mit ^^ckn. 18. 2)er Jtanfmann fiif^rt SBaaven jnm SZarfte. 19. ©in fleineg ,^inb leitete ben blinben S)^ann. 20. Sltarid) tontbe Don ben ®o? ■tbitn in bem Snfento begraben, nad)bem fie jni^cr bie @iromung abgeleitet Batten. 21. (Sx leitet einen 3eben nad) feinem dlati). 22. 2Ber ftdi ni*t Bon ber 93ernnnft leiten la^t, ber Idnft ®efaf)r, ba^ i[}n feine Seibenfdiaf? tin iu'g SSerberben fiU^ren. 23. fSer flei^tge (Sd)iiler ijolk feine (Camera? ben lii ber ©rlenmng ber englifd^en (£prad)e nod) ein, cbgleid) fte beinafje sier 2Bodien e[}er angefangen l;'Citten, biefelbe jn lernen. 24. ffiir f)olten bie (^i^eunbe anf i^rcm 5lBcge nod) ein, obgleid) fte eine I)albe ©tuube frit; ber fortgegangen iraven. 25. ^^ent jn stage erreidien bic ^D^cnfd^en fcin fo f)obeg 5Utcr mefjr, al6 in friibcren Sciten. 26. Ttan fiort fjent ju Sage son niditg Slnberem fpred^en, alg Bon J?rieg. 27. Tlan ^oxt Jjeuti- geg llageg siet flagen iiber fd)Iedite Bdkn. Questions. 1. What does einBoIett signify 1 2. Can you repeat the ex- ample, bie -Det^ufatton, &c. 1 3. Can you repeat in German the example, " after three days," &c. '? 4. How is beute sometimes best rendered '? 5. Can you repeat more than one example 1 LESSON XC V. f e f t i n XC V. v^oren (to hear) followed by auf wdth an accusative, signi- fies, to listen to ; as, cr ^^ort auf ba6, \vaQ id) if)m [age j lie listens to what I tell him. <§oren, however, when connected with auf, as a mere prejix, signifies, to cease, to discontinue ; as, (E^ Ijbxt auf ju i:egnen ; 234 it stops raining (ceases to rain.) 3)er Olegctt ^oxt auf ; the rain ceases. I. Qlber, in the phrase, ^unberte utrb ahtx ^unberte, ^au* fenbc unb dbn ^aufenbe, &c., signifies, " yet again, yet more, still other." So, also, £) m^ unb aber m^ bem Wann ; wo and yet again wo to the man. II. Bit ©runbc ge^en, to go to the ground, or to the bottom, i. €S. to sink ; to founder, has hence the general signification, to go to ruin, or be destroyed. So, also, ju ©runbe ricf)ten, to destroy, to ruin, &c. Ex.: 5Da6 ©d)iff ifi mit SOiann unb ^au^ lu ©runbc gegangen, (©prid^irort) ; the ship with man and mouse has perished (gone to the bottom.) Uni)or[tc^tigc @!pe* culationen f)ahm ben ^^aufmann gu ©runbe geric^tet; imprudent speculations have effected the ruin of the merchant. Exercise 98. Qiufgafce 98. 5l'benbbrob, n. supper ; perial family of Oieidigtag, m. imperial §(uf fjoren, (See Austria) ; diet, diet ; <§afen, m. harbor, port; Sdd)eln, to smile ; Sanben, to land, come to shore ; Sinbe, /. linden-tree ; 2Rit'tag^mat)t, n. din- ner ; Dften, m. East ; Ste'^en^burg, n, Ratis- bon; above) S3reg(au, n. Breslau ; 3!)ulben, to bear, suffer, tolerate ; ©rle'gen, to slay, kill ; §aaftredht, n. club-law, sword-law ; ©ebraudi', m. usage, custom, ftishion ; ©etei'cben, to lend, turn to, conduce ; ©rab, n. grave ; ^aboburg, n. (original house of the im- (Sdianbe, /. shame, disgrace, infamy ; (Segel, n. sail ; Xa'ge^gefcbdft, n. busi- ness of the day ; Ufev, n. bank, shore ; 33erricb'ten, to do, per- form ; SSer jtn'fen, to sink ; ^erjva'gen, to faint, lose courage ; 9fte{6, n. empire, realm, 3tt>ift'igfett, /. discord, kingdom ; dissension, quarrel. ^oret auf beg Sebend S'e^^td) »or micb aiis'jubreiten, id) hin elenb unb gefan^geu. (igdiitlev.) @obatb' er biefeg faf), f)6rte er auf ju fpielcn. Siebig gef)crt' ju ben gctcf)i"'tc|!en SWdmiern Seutfdblanb^. dr ging nidit efjer aug, aU big er einc '^tunbe gelc'fen (;atte. 2)er rupjtf^e feftbjug rid^'tctc bte " Grande Armee " (\ok man jic ju nennen ^fifegte) ju ©runbe. Cease to spread life's carpet out before me ; I am miserable and imprisoned. As soon as he saw this, he ceased to play (stopped playing.) Liebig belongs to (is among) the most learned men of Germany. He did not go out before (till) he had read an hour. The Russian campaign ruined (destroyed) the " Grand Army," (as it used to be called.) 295 53ei bcm ntf fifcben ?5clbjug ging bic In the Russian campaign the " Grande Armee " ,^u 0kiiiibc. " Grand Army" was destroyed. ilau'fcnbc unb abcr S^au'fonbe ia- Thousands upon thousands lost incu iini it;i- ^cbcn. their lives. 5lIo \A) aufvim, la^ cr cbcn mciiicn As I arrived he was just reading 23vlef. my letter. 2)0^ gerei*t' linn jur gro^cn @()ve. That redounds greatly to his honor. 1. 9ttg atubolv^l) »cn ^abgburg Gaffer »cn !Deutf*(anb ge\corbeu tear, l^ovteu hk iunerii Btfiftigfeitcn unb bag fcgeiiaunte ^auftvedU in biefcm Dieid^e auf. 2. O^adibem jie ehiic^e ^ivfd^e eviegt ijatkn, Ijbxkn fie auf ju jvigcu. 3. (S^^ t)6vt auf ju regnen, unb tinr fomten nun unfere Olelfe ireitcv fcvtfe^en. 4. 2)lcin ^rubcv ift ju -Oaufe, cr Ikci^t fdicn ad^t S^age ju iBcttc. 5. 3n ©eutfdUanb fuib anbeve (Sitten imb ©cbvdudic al^ m Slmcrifa. 6. ^u Oiegcneburg iruvben in ber te|,ten Beit bie Oteid^eitagc gcl;alten. 7. 2)ie I)c()c iSdiule ;5U 33reglau ge(;ort ju ben beften in ©eutfd)? lanb. 8. Sll5 trir I}nifamen fpet^ten jt^ geva'be juDJlittag. 9. (£ie pficg; ten nidit c()er i§r $lbenbbrcb ju effen, af^ big fie al(e Xagcggefdmfte »er? ridiict fjatten. 10. Unter einer alien Stnbe, tt)eldie in bem <§Dfe ftanb, ftieltcn fie im @cmmev, bet fdionem SBctter, i§v 2)iittaggma()l. 11. ^lU bie (?C)oIera in ^avig fievrfdite, ftarben ^aufenbe unb abcr Saufcnbe an bcrfelben. 12. 3)ie ©oibatcn i^icl^cn ju ^etbe. 13. 33ei bem Ict^ten ©tnrme finb mel^rere (gdiiffe ju ©runbe gegangen. 14. 2)er ^Bcttterge^t »cn 3:i)iir gu 3:i)iir unb »on Serf ju Scif. 15. ©ag gcveidit mtr jur ©i)re, ibm jur @dianbe. 16. Wix ju ©efallcn fijnnten @ie eg t^un. 17. 5)sr ^einb fteuert mit alien Segcln na* Dften jn. 18. 3)ag ift fur i§n ju out. 19. 3di bin nur ^u gen.n§^ba^ eg fo fcmmen tv»tvb. 20. ii3erjagc nidn, weun bir bag &lud nidit Iddielt unb bn in (Slcnb yerfunfen bift — eg unvb beiner fdion dlatl) racrben, unh el)e bu eg glaubft, tinrft bu bciner £eibcn ent()cben fein. 21. @g faun aud) baju ?fiati) tnerben, wenn tnir evfi unfere eigcnen 5(ngclpgcni)etten georbnet l)abeu tnerben. 22. Sag Se? ben ift, ivteunb, ein ernfteg @efdidft, — bulbe fein Ungemad) ; — fo nur trirb bir bie Sieife fanft. 23. S'nblid) lanbeft bu bodv fidier am Ufer, in beincm >^afcn ; er i)eipt ha6 @rab. 24. (Bx Ijat fein unb feiner grennbe a^crmiJgen ^u ©runbe geriditet. 25. (Sx ijat Ui biefen Slrbeiten fctne @efunbi)eit ^u ©runbe geridUet. 26. DIetfon riditete bie franjojifdie ^•lotte ^n ©runbe. 27. iQnm er nidit yorfid)tig ift, fo fann in furjer 3eit fein ganjer 9teidit()um jn ©runbe gefieu. Questions. 1 What does ^i>ren, when followed by auf with an accusative siguify ? 2. How do you express, in German, the sentence, I listen to what you tell xne ? 3. What is the German example, he listens, &c. '? 4. What does horcii, when connected with auf as a prefix signify'? 5. Example 1 G. Can you exampiify the use of abcr as noticed in this lesson] 7. What does ju (i)nint'C gel^eii signify ? 8. Examples! 236 LESSON XCVI. f f c t ! n XC VI. 5Sert^ (worth) like its equivalent in our language, is used in designating the value of things ; as, ^it]t^ ^ferb tft brei^unbcrt @uli)en nrert^j this horse is worth three hundred florins. When, however, the amount of one's wealth is refeiTed to, x-ddj is employed ; as, @r ifl je^n taiifenb ©ulben reic^ : he is worth ten thousand florins (literally, he is ten thousand florins rich). I. Qluafommen (a comming or getting out) with BaBen, forms the phrase, (Sin Qluyfontmen ^aben, to have a competency or subsistence ; as, 5n biefem Sanbe 'bat 'Dtx QlrBeiter ein gute§ Qlu^fommen, tBa^renb er in ben meiften ?anbern Surc^a'g mir ein not^biirftigcS i)at ; in this country the laborer has a good sub- sistence, while in (the) most countries of Europe, he has only a scanty (one). II. Unterfcmmen= coming under, i. e. a lodging, a shelter j also, an employment. Ex. : 2Bir fud^ten in irgenb etuem ber Dielen ©afi^aufer biefer ^BtaU i^ergefcen^ ein Unterfomnten; we sought in vain, in any one of the many inns of this town, a shelter, ^er bleiBig^ ftitbet i'lBeraK ein Unterfommen -, the in- dustrious finds every where employment. Exercise 99. -^(ufgaBe 99. 2)^enfd)Itd% human, Un'ierfcmmen, to find founded in human nature ; 9^1 ad^ ft 6 1, /. forbear- ance, indulgence ; -31cti)'i)iirftig, scanty, necessitous, needy; 3luo'fcminen, (See I.) ; @iu^,one, (one thing); (Sr&c'lung, /, refresh- ment, recreation ; ©cnnen, to grant, fa- vor, permit ; ^rei^, 7n. circle, sphere; 2)flandimal,often.some- times, frequently ; din finger ^^elbfterr gcttnt feinen Scba'ten jutcei'Ien eine @rf)c - lung. (Sinmal Bat ber Sd^ifer eine ru'- l;tge, bann toieber eiiie ftur'mtfd^e Oieife. (Sx i}at !ein SSemtc^^en ba^u', um biefen Siuftranb lange 3eit be; ]lrei Un ju foiinen. emplovment, shel- ter, &c. (See II.) f 33ei"ie'ben, to live, pass, spend ; SSer^ci^imng,/. pardon, forgiveness ; A judicious general sometimes grants his soldiers (a) recrea- tion. At one time the mariner has a quiet, (pleasant) then again a stormy voyage. He has no fortune by which (thereto) to he able (for a) long time to afford this expen- diture. 237 2Bci^Iieit ifl met;r Wtxtl) aU 9leid)? Wisdom is more valuable (worth tijnm. ' more) than riches. 3n bet ©d^ttidj hat ber ©auer ein In (the) Switzerland the peasant bcfy'crcjJ ?Iut?'fcinmeu, al^ hi bem has a better subsistence than circ'pcrcn XlmU tsta'iieni?. in the greater part of Italy. 33ei (Siiibnut bcr DKidit fucbte ev in On the approach (invasion) of eiiiciu fli'ijicu Dcvtcheu ehi Un'; the night, he sought shelter in tcvfcmmeu. a little hamlet (liUle "place")- 5)er .^autmaim t)at bcm (5a^>itdu' The merchant has already paid bcvcite' bie %ai}xt i'r^aljlt . the captain (for) the passage.^ 2)ii* Ijat l}erjlidi i^erlangt', bag I have heartily desired to eat this Cfterlamm mit eud) ju cffen. passover with you. (Marginal Suca^ 22. 15. reading.) 5)a0 s^crlaf'fcnc Jitiub t)ev(angt' nad) The forsaken child longs for fciner SJliittcr. (after) its mother. Tlan fcU nidit urn ettua^ bitten. One should not ask for any thing, trag mail bag 9ied)t lf)at, ju »cr; that one has a right to demand. lan'^cn. 1. @g gicbt im menfdili*en SeBcn ^uineilen tnUe SlugcnBItcfe. 2. SD^an tnu§ jiureileu bem ©elftc etnc (S'rliclung gomtcn. 3. @v tft fdicn maud); mat ^ier gcwefen. 4. (Sdicn mand^;mai f)abe tdi bipfeg gefagt. 5. 9)land); mat mi^lingt eg audi. 6. (S"g ift ic1?>t fetnc 3ett baju, fpajiereit jii ge^en. 7. @r ^at ftinlditglidi Bdt baju, biefe 5(tbeit nodi fjeute ju t»otIenben. 8. Qx f)at emeit anbern ^ag xmijx ^dt ba^u, bidi ju befud^en. 9. 2)iefe5 ^aiig ift taufcub 2:6aler ircrt^. 10. ^dn Dtocf ift ;^e^n 2::§aler ^ext^. 11. Sencr Stanu ift fi'mf ^unbert 3:!f)aler reidi. 12. (§x Ift jefjn taufcub 2:iiater reidi. 13. S^iefe ^amitie fiat ifir guteg Stugfom.men. 14. Sener arme !tag(cf)ner ijat nur etu nctfibixrfttgeg 5tugfemmen. 15. @g famen fc tide vclitifd^e g-Uuttlinge an, ba^ fie nl*t atle unter!cmmen fcnnten. 16. 2)ie (Sclbaten fauben In hsn @d)eunen uub @td((eu ber S3auern eIn XInterfcmmen. 17. ©eftern ftabe id) bem v^aufmanne feinc 9led)nung be; jal^It. 18. (Sr Ht bcm (gdniclber ucdi nIdU ben Slccf beja^It. 19. @r t>erga^, bem (5*ul)ma6er ble ©tiefein ju h^ai)Un. 20. S)er Jlranfe set; langt eIn (Slag 2Baifcr. 21. dJlid) tocrlaugt ju ioiffen, it>ag axi ber (Sad>e ift. 22. 2Jlldi cevlangt, eine beltere (Stinibe Im .^telg ber Ileben 3)hlnen ju »erleben. 23. 3d) »ctlange bag S3udi, bag bcrt Ilegt. 24. (5lng bitte i* bl* : fel tocrfiduig In ber ffia^I belner gveunbc. 25. 2)er 50^ann bat um ©ebulb unb 9iad^iid>t. 26. 2)a er ll^n um 5Bcr5elf)ung bat, fo fcnnte er nid^t lauger jiiruen. 27. 34) bitte <£le um ein ©lag 2Belu. QxjESTiONS. 1. When does icertl) answer to worth"? 2. When is reic^ instead of jvertl) employed ? 3. Can you exemplify the use of trcrt^ ? 4. Of teiffe? 5. What does 5hi8Eommeti signify 1 6. Can you exempHfy its use with baben ? 7. What is the literal signification of Uuterfommeul 8. How is it rendered in English 1 9. Example "? 238 LESSON XC VII. gttiion XC VII. SSemu^en = to trouble. (Sicf) urn (Etrt)a0, or fiir Scmanb Be*' ittu^en, to give one's self trouble about, to take pains, strive about any thing, or for any one. Ex. : 5I)arf id) The Leipsic fair is one of the most beu'tcnbjien in gan§ 2)eutfd}ianb. important in all Germany. 239 1. y3ei bcm Slus^&rudbe ber JRefclution in 93erlin irurbe bii in bte UtaA\t f)inein gefoAten. 2. @r gab ii)m ba^ S3ud) mit ber Scmerfung, c^ rein ju Ijalten. 3. 6"^ ifi ifim gejlern cin 53rief juijcfcbicft ivorben. 4. 3* jci.3te \\}m bie nciten ©cnidlbe, bie idi auf ber ii3erfieigerung gefauft Ijatte. 6. SJiufif ifl fcin liebfter Seibevtrcib. 6. (§x fingt, fdicrjt uub lacbt jum 3eiti^ertretb, anfiatt fidi mit eruften it^ingen ju befdidftigen. 7. jiDe^ 3}iorgen^, (L. 35. III.) 2)littag^ nub $lbenbg geljc idi oft fpajie=: ten. 8. (iie rerfclgtcn ben ^geiub bi-J an (L. 58. Note) bie ©rcngcn bc^ £anbcg. 9. 33i^ an biefe (BMk i)Me fte bag 33ud) bnrdigelefcn. 10. S3ie! an biffen Drt ft^agtcn fie fid) »cr, aber nnnter nidit. 11. @r be; miifite fid) t?ergebend bie ^rage ju Icfen. 12. (2ie bemiif)ten jidi urn bie @unft ibreg ^errn. 13. (Sr bemu^t fid) 9leidit^iimer ju crwerben. 14. 3d) bin' etn)a fiiuf Sabre ^ier {in biefer (BtaU). 15. 3d) bin feit ciner l^alben (Stunbe bier (in bent 3immer). 16. 3ft Semanb n}d&renb meiner 5lbwefcn()eit l)ier ge^refen? 17. «^err ^. trar l)ier nub ttjctite (2ie fpre; cben. 18. (Sin Berliner ©latt madit nn^ fctgenbe intereffvinte Ttittimf lung. 19. ^ie Dliirnberger (§ ll.Note)8ebfudien ftnb burd) gan;^ !Deutfd}i lanb beriibmt. 20. 2)ag ^eibelberger %a^ ijt iregen feiner ©rope be; fannt. 21. ^5asre reifeu ? Sdi lube nidn? bagc^gen, treun Ste ee tcr'jtekn. 2Bir ^iefien eo ycr ^u -iQauK ^u bUU Ben. i£)et ^Ici'^ige madn befT'erc ^cxt'i fdnitte, aU bcr ^auU. Otuptanb, £)efirei* iinb -^reiiB^n riffen fid"* urn bvio un'v^tiidlidH' 1. Xxci}. ber SOcii^e, irehte ft* bcr SeBrev gab, trcUtcn bie ^inber !einc red'ten ^J-crrfdn-itie madden. 2. @r ma*te btebeuteube ycttfdH'itte in ber beutfd'^eu Si'Vvtd^e, iiad^bem er evft bte SinfanM^griinbe iibevtvunbeu bvitte. 3. Qx entbebrt bcr notbigfteii -33iid:ier. eft bei- Tictba^enbigfien ^v"iu»gerdtf)e. (2tdt!e me bem ^geiruBtfein bcberer ©iiter, aU bte ftiib, ircld^e irtr cnt- Bebren. 6. -Der Gapitdu er^dt)[te itiui gefterti, io.^ fui^ ber juiige ^ta^ lieuer einc J^uget brivdi im ,^cpf gefdicfTen bahi. 7. (S*r ii^c$ bem CBdren eine ^ugel bur* ben ^cvf. 8. 3di jicbe ?e per, fiber -^Bremen cber ^dam; burg, auftatr ubcr .§arre ^u retfen. 9.' 3di ^iefje ia6 Oteitcn bem ®cf)en un& bvi-3 ^^abren bem 3teiten per. 10. (s6 m mir in einer n:avmen (5tube bebaglid^er, als in einer falten. 11. (|5 ifl i§m am bebaglicbiten, wcnn er na* bem (fiTen fcine (Eigarre vaud^en !aun. 12. ^uabeu in ea am be* ^aglidiften unb and) am gefunbcfren, ivenn fic na* b:m (yffen eine balbe 6tunbe fpa^ieren gefjen. 13. 3* fjatte ben ganjen Bergen iiber cin um Bef)agn*eo Oefubl. 14. ^ie Biirfien SeutfdUanbg ^aben t^cu C^euem bie ^errfduft an fid^ gerifien. 15. 2)er Dbeim wu^te nad^ unb na* haS SSermogcn feiuer Otef en an nd) §u reiBen. 16. (J« tjt fd)on tan^e, fca$ The industrious (man) makes better progress than the idle. Russia, Austria and Prussia con- tended about (the) unhappy Poland. 4. (Sine arme gamilie entbebrt 5. 2^te ©claiTenbeit ^iebt ibre 241 idi i!)n QcfcBcn l^aBc. 17. 3)^ tS lange, ba^ er franf ifl. 18. 3a, ^B fiiib fdiou m'cfir aU^ bvei 3SodHMt.— 19. ©teibe ju ^aufe, big ba^ i* ju fcir fcmmc ; idi irevbc bidi ju cincm (S^ajicvgauge abrufen. 20. 3)er Scb vuft uidU iiuv ben @rci^, fonbcru aud) gar oft ben Wlann in feinen Uitcn tsaimn, ben SungOng, unb ba5 ^inb in bev SBiegc ab. 21. 2)a id) wn^tc, \>,\$ mcin g-veuub niit bent ©anHjfboctc aiifcmmcn iin'irbe, fo ^oUc idi Ibii ail bcm 'sJanbungt^pla^e ah. 22. 3d) f)abe biefen Svief r^euteaJlov; qeii yon bcr ^4>oft abgclfolt. 23. 3di fpradi anf meiner Dieife in »erfd)ie:: bcucn ©irtfunKinfevn ein — abev icb fann fcincg bcrfeiben befonber^ loben. 24. 3di fvvcdK getv6(;nlid) bci meinen gvennben etn, wenn id) in bie ©tabt QiTESTioxs. 1. What does vet§en signify'? 2. 2In ft4> reipen? 3. Can you give an example of vei^eit ? 4. Of ftc^ rclBen? 5. What does ein= fprect)cit signify literally? 6. Can you repeat in German, "the valiant general visited," &c. 1 LESSON XCIX. I" c c 4 i tt XCIX. (Sinen ^ag urn ben anbern, literally, one day about the other, i. e. every other day. Ex. : (Bx ge^t einen 'XaQ urn ben anbem in bie Stabt; he goes every other day into towa ^inen ^ag urn ben anbern ^abe id^ Unterridbt in ber beutfdfjen 6;pradf)e. I. 3Sergteid}en = to equal, to compare to or with ; as, «§tetm ift i^r D^iemanb ^u t)ergreid)en ; in this there is no one to be com- pared to her. a)?it ®ctt, bent 35olI!ommenen, fonnen \vix fdjrtja* dnn, gebrerfjUdjen 3.T^-iTfd]eri un§ nid)t i)ergleid)en. QSem ift 'oa^ Tfidd) ®otte§ gfeld}, unb n?em foil id) e§ i)er^(eid)en ? ^uc. 13. 18. 33ergleid)en (Bk gefalUgft biefe ^roBeblatter mit bent 5!)?anufcrt^te -, please to compare these proof-sheets with the manuscript. ^Sergleidjen, sometimes signifies, to accord, come to an agree- ment; as, 33eibe ^arteien I;aBen fid) fd)on l^erglic^en; both par- ties have already compounded. 3)ie ©(ciubiger I;abett ftd) mit bent Sd)ulbner l^ergtid^en ; the creditors have compounded with the debtor. Exercise 102. ^lufgaBe 102. ^uf'f*tagen, to rise; through, "get ©Idu'biger, m. credit- ^etrdAt'Iid), consider- through", survive ; or; ably; ®aft()au^, n. hotel, ^dnbet, 7;/. quarrel ; (^onfect',7z.comfit,com- inn; ^§etb, m. hero, champ- fiture ; @ebie'ten,to command, ion ; 2?urd)'fomiTien,to come bid. ^elbin,/, heroine; 11 242 .^crein'bringen^to bring in; £eict)t'fmn{g,light,light- minded; 9'ladb'ttfd), m, desert ; @d)reien, to cry; @d)iilbner, m. debtor ; ^t)urni, m. tower ; 33erblu'^en, to fade, decay ; 3Sergtei'd)en, (See I.) ; Serfjeug, n. imple- ment, tool ; 2Bieberl^o'len,to repeat; SBunbern, to wonder, ^e surprised; S)er ^aufmann iuar nid)t im @tan^^ be, ftdi auf tnel^r at^ fiinfunb jtoanjig ^recent' mit feinem @d)itlbner p i)ergtei'dien. ©g trunbert mid), baf er biefeg 3af)r, Ci^ne ©chulben ju inad)eit, burd)'gefoTnmen ift. 5Der ^Prei^ einer 2Baare ipjiegt nad) Um'ftdnben auf^ unb aB'^ufd^la; gen. (Sinen 3^ag um ben anbern Ijatk id) I)ei nietnem franfen S3niber §u h3ad)en. SJZan mnp fid) njunbern, baf [o et? iva^ nod) im neun'jef)nten 3at)r? fjun'bert ge[d)e'(}en fann. 2)er ©cfanb'te i)klt eine lange 9^ebe an bie SQerfamm'lung. Tiie merchant was not able to settle with his debtor at more than twenty five per cent. It surprises mc that he has come (got) through this year with- out making (any) debts. The price of wares is accustomed to rise and fall according to circumstances. Every other day I had to watch with my sick brother. One must be surprised that such a thing can happen in the nine- teenth century. The minister delivered (held) a long address to the assembly. 1. !5)ie ©Idubiger ^aben jtd) mit bem ©d)utbner auf fiinfjig ^recent ijerglid)en. 2. ^ie Betben ^aufCeute fonnteu ftdi vuegen beig ^reifesS nicbt t)ergleid)en. 3. 3id) f)a6e ^etbe^ mit einanber loerglidien. 4. (i"r ijat if)m ha^ '^aug auf fiinf Salute iiermictl)et. 5. 2)cv junge !?laun »ermie; tijtk ftd) aU ^niH-bt. 6. siyian muf fid) tminbern, baij fo d)Ka6 nod) in unfern Seiten gefdiel)eu fann. 7. (S^ jrunbert mid), ba^ ev burd)gefom? men unb nid)t geftorben ift 8. (Siceto t)telt eine dich^ gegen (Jatitina. 9. 3)erfelbe !^ielt audi ebenfatl^ 9teben iiber bie ?^reunbfd)aft, iiber has ©rei^ fenaftev unb iiber t>erfd)iebene anbere ©egenftdnbe. 10. (Sdfar i)ielt eine gtebe an feine ©olbaten. 11. 2)er ©d)iiler tt)iebcvf)oIte ju ^aufe nodi eim mal bag, n^a^ er in bet (Sdntte gefjort f)atte, um fid) baffelbe itiieber in'g ®ebdd)tnip ^u rufen. 12. 2Bir Ijbxkn ein ir»iebevf)clteg @d)veien. 13. 3)er ^veig biefer 9Baare i|l bebeutenb aufgefd^Iagen. 14. ^ie gvii d)te fin b burd) ben ilticg betvdditlid) aufgefd)lagcn. 15. ^te j^lugfjeit gcbtctet ju- iveiien and) bem ta^fern 3}iaune, einen ^einb, ber ^dnbci an ii)m fud)t, ju meiben. 16. 2)er ^clitifd)e §(itd)tling muf fetn 93aterlanb meiben. 17- Jl)ie ®efellfd)aft eine^ i^evborbenen 9JZenfd)en foK man meiben. 18. ^ev 5lrjt befudit ben Jlranfen einen 3:ag um ben anbern. 19. @inen Sag um ben anbern c,i'l)t er auf bie 3agb. 20. (Sr I)anbelte nod) aU Tlaim fo leid'itfinni;^, tvie ev ahs Siiugling gcfjanbelt Ijatk. 21. S3ei ber Qtnfunft ber ungarifd)en ^clbin Sageiio unb anberer uugatifdien <§e(ben in 9lett)? S)ov! inurbe, aU fie in bem ®aftl)aufc, mo fie einge!ef}rt ivaren, bei bem 9^ad)tifd)e fa^en, ein aui^gejeidi.iict fd)oner X()urm mit fvicgcrifd)en aBerf- jeugen, auS CS^cnfect geniadu, ()eveincicbi-adit,. )itorauf in beutfd)er @^jrad}e 243 bic QBorte ilvinbcn : „(§i lefeen bie un^arlfdhen ^elbcn imb «§elbinnen !'* 2± iH'affne bid) Zao, fur Iciii (L. 69. III.) mit inef)r Sei^ficit, Sungting, bie i>liunc ber ^Us^ciib t^erbliUit. Questions. 1. What is the literal signification of din Zaq urn ben an= bcni? 2. How do you render it in English? 3. How do you define ocr= glcicficn? 4. Can you repeat the first example '? 5. Can you repeat an ex- ample signifying to accord, &c. ? LESSON C. I'ection C. EXMAPLES ILLUSTRATING THE VARIOUS USES OF THE COX- JUNCTIONS. 9t b e r, a H e i n, [ c n b e r n. d^ ift haib c\(}'^xcdVm, afcer fdm^er get^an'. ((Sdnder.) ^c&\ ift er nidit ba, afeer fcmmen wirb er geivip'. 2)ie Seidien iiuTben gege'Ben, ba^ ia6 ^eil gecn'bet fei ; aUetn ire? ber 2Sagen, nod) a}Za0fen, ncd) Bu'fdiauer tt>etdien anS ber ©telle. (@Ct()C.) Diidn bic (gpradic an unb fiir ftdi ift ridUig, tiiditig unh ^ierlidi, fcnbem ber @eift ift eg, ber fidi barin i^erfcr'pcrt. (@ctlje.) 21 U. !S^cuife ift mein Siebling, benn fie i)0.t ein eb''Iereg ©emiitV inib einen feft'eren (5f)araPter, a i § 53iele junge !Damen ; nid^t^ alg (Sanft^ niutf) fpridit auS ii)xm Stugen. Sllfc. ®u* alfo fed id) trauen, 3f)r niditmir? (©diiKer.) (5r hat eg felbjl getban' unb fann atfc niemanb tabetn. (£ie jinb bapon' fteute DZadit, bie Sdger au*. ((5d)iUer.) af)re ift eine gacfet, aber eine nn'geljeure ; b e f ' ir e g e n fudien unr Sllle nnr blin^^enb fc baran' t)ovbci/jnfcmmen. (@etf)e.) 3)er ^a^ ift ein ac'tis?eg SOii^ i^er; gniigen, bet 9leib cin :paf'fii^ci5 ; i) c ^ f) a I b barf man ftd) nidit Umnbern, ivenn ber Oleib fo fdmett in ^a^ ii'berg£f)t. (®otl;e.) 3)af. (Sg ijt !ein 3tt*eifel metjr, b a p er nn^ ktro'gen ^tit All these princes grew up with no higher expectation than that of governing a republic, and none of their states could af- ford them any other experience; besides, these princes possess- ed nothing, but what the Netherlands gave them. Since you are here, I will go out with you. As the wind conies from the west, it will rain. The greatest probability of (the) accomplishment (still) admits of (a) doubt : therefore it is, that hope when it becomes a reality, always surprises. Warm the room immediately, that we may take off our (the) wet clothes, and put on dry (ones.) First pray, then work. He calls nothing his, but a knight's cloak : he, therefore, (or on that account) looks upon every honest man's for- tune with envy. (The) truth is a torch, but an im- mense one: therefore, we all attempt, only blinking at it, to pass by. (The) hatred is an active dis- pleasure, (the) envy a passive one; therefore, one must not be surprised, if (the) envy readily passes over into hatred. There is no longer any doubt, that he has cheated us. ^46 2) c m n a di. 9Clr fiiib fdnni fihif ©tuiibeii c^a o^an ijcn, uiib muiTen b e m n vi d) balb an ber ©telle fein. 5) e n n. 3di fauuSfineiiuidU'^ Ui^^t/ b enn \d) treif fcin SBort bviveu'. SBie fanii Seniaub in (Siiiei? Starfeii S^anS \\cijcn, uub ihm feiuen^aiis^; Vvitb vaubcii, eg fci ben n, ba^ er jiiocr ben @tarfen fcinbe, nnb alebann' il)m fein Jpaug berau'be? 3d) fd^d^e i^n 'ijcijex aU gelbljerr, b e n n aU ^taatSmarm. 2) e n n c dv b e f f e n u n g e a d); t e t n i d) t g b e ft » e n i g e r. ^p^ilip)) ber ©ii'tige tear ju fef)t ffierfdnren/cer^im !2did|e ju fam? mein ; b e n n c di f^""^ ^^^'^ ^f^' ^ii^ne in fetner 9]erlaf'fcnfdiaft an ^a'felgefdMvren, Sittre'len, Siid^ern, 3ia)?e'ten unb Seiniranb einen grc'peven 33ctrvitl) auf'gc; ^duft, aU brei rcidie ^i'tr'ften? tfiiimet bamalg jufam'nien be; fa^'en. (Stiller.) ^fjvift'ian ber 93ierte 'i)atk fid) in bem 93ertra gc yon ^c^enl)a'gen uerbinb'lidi gemadit', cf)ne Sn'- jieljnng (gdncebeng feinen cin'fet; tigen §rieben mit bem j^aifer ^u fd")lie§en , b e f f e n n n ' g e a di; t e t trurbe ber Slntrag, ben ®al'; lenftein ii)m tljat, mit 33ereit'aMli ligfeit an'gencmmen. (Sdiiller.) 5)c* uerfpredi e er ilinen anf bad «§ei'ligfte, baf biefe 2aft fte ni*t uber iner SJlc'nate mebr brucfen fclle; n i * tg b eft n)R' n i; ger blieben biefe Xru^3pen ftatt biefer i?ier SRc'nate, ncdi ad>tjef)n im Sanbe. (©driller.) 2)0*. (§x ^at mi* pvax oft betei'btgt, bod) fann id) il)m nid)t bofe fein. We have already walked five hours, and, accordingly, we must soon be at the place. I cannot tell you any thing, for I do not know a word about it. How can one enter into a strong man's house, and spoil his goods, except he first bind the strong man ? and then he \vill spoil his house. I estimate him higher as a gene- ral, than as a statesman. Philip the Kind, was too great a prodigal to gather treasures; nevertheless, Charles the Bold found in his inheritance a greater store of table-service, jewels, books, carpets and linen, hoarded up, than three principalities together, pos- sessed at that time. Christian the IV. had obliged himself in the treaty of Copen- hagen, not to conclude a par- tial peace with the emperor, Avithout the advice of Sweden ; nevertheless, the offer which Wallenstein made him, was accepted with the greatest readiness. Although he promised them, in the most sacred manner, that this burden should not op- press them more than four months ; nevertheless, these troops remained in the land eighteen months instead of four. It is true, he has often offended me, yet I can not be aagry with him. 246 @ ^ e icfi nach <§aufe ge^e, tyerbe id) ju 3f)neu fcmmen. ©nblid). 9^ad)bcm id) lange getoar'tet f;atte, Jam ei* e n b I i d^. @ntiuebet-ober. iDie Ue'brigen toaren e n t it* e ' b e r bei bem geu'ft[6en Sdif'ftanbe mit ben SSajfeii in bev ^anb ge? fan'gen, c b e r iregen i^ree e'^e; maligen Slnt&eit^ an ber 93itt; f*rift beg 5lbelg, al^ >5od)'»er; rather ein'ge^cgen unb i^erut'tfjeilt tDorben, (Sd^iUer.) % all6 e6 regnen foKte, fcmme id^ Tiidit. d t ft ; b a n n, f e v n e r ; e n b^^ lid), J u t e 1 1. @ r ji famen brei Sleiter, b a n n (f e r n e r) fclgte ein ftn'genber (St)cx, unb jule|,t (enb; lid^) auf sergcl'betem ^agen tie ^raut xmb bie @afte. Solgli*. (St iji mein 35ater, f c I g I i * ^a^ Be id) ein Otedit auf feine £iefce imb [ein SSermo'gen. @ I e i di to ^ t 2Bir gingen sc'rige 51ad)t erjl nad^ jtDoIf U6r ju S9ett ; g I e i di; tt) ^ I ioaren tint mctgen^ um fed)g Uf)t tt)ie bet auf. 3e- beilo. SSetgef'fen (Sie nid)t 3^t SSetfpte; d)'en ju etfiil'Ien ; j e e^et b e; fl Beifei^. Sd) etttat'tefe S^ten affen, nod) ijerfol'gen ; » i e I m e :^ r' eriangt' ber SRenfd) leicbt einen gro'feren 35ort^eil, toenn er bie 3Sor'jiige feiner SBi'berfad)er getoa^r' toer; ben fann. SO&eb er-no d). SB e ber serlei ten h?iU id) @ud) jn einem falfd)en (Sd)ritte, nod) toon einem falfdien jnriirf'^atten. (®ot§e.) 2Beit 3^ toifl nid)tg mit biefem 9)Zenfd)en ju t§un ^abm, tt> e i I er ein S3o'fett3id)t ill 28enn, toenn nid)t. 3d) triitbe mit SSergnii'gen ju S)ir fommen, tt) enn id) ^cffen fonn^ te, 2)id) ju -^aufe an^jutreff'en. 3d) fann eg nid)t t^nn, to e n n @ie mir nic^t ^elfen. 2Bie. ^ SB i e bie 2tr&eit, fo ber So^n. 2Bag 'i)a\t hn tote meine (Sonne, to i e meinen «§immel, to i e mei; ne §(nren, to i e mein gefd)df' ti- geg, rafi'Iofeg Seben ? (^erber>) Thou hast not done it, and that is so much the more agreeable to me. He caused the fortifications of the capital to he repaired in the greatest haste, furnished it with all that enabled it to stand a long siege, and besides this took two thousand Span- iards within its walls. One cannot live with every one, neither can one live for every- one ; he who rightly perceives this will highly appreciate his friends, and neither hate, nor persecute his enemies : much rather do men obtain with facility a greater advantage, when aware of the qualities of their adversaries. Neither will I persuade you to a false step, nor keep back from a false one» I will have nothing to do with this man, because he is a vil- lain. I would eome to you (L. 24.) with pleasure, if I could hope to find you at home. I cannot do it, if you do not help me. As the work, so the reward. What hast thou like my sun, like my sky, like my meadows, like my busy, restless life 1 249 Exercises in speaking & writing German. The manner in which the words in the following lists (See p. 62.) are to be used for the purpose of exercising the pupil in speaking and writing German, is at once simple and interesting. The Teacher, in the outset, selects some particular word, say, ber (Sd)ncibcr, and requires each member of the class to pro- duce in German a sentence constructed according to the prin- ciples embraced in any given lesson. Thus (lesson xi.) '^\)x i^Tcunb, ber (2d}ncit>er, f;at ba§ fd}One neue 'Xnd:j beg, &c. ; or, bev (Sd)nciber ge^t, &c.; or, ber (Sd^neiber mad)t, (fee; or, 3fi ber (Sdjneitier nod) ? (fee. As the pupil advances, he may in- corporate two, three, four or any given number of these words in an exercise. As a model for an exercise containing several diflferent terms, something like the following (lesson xvi.) may be given : 1. ®nU dwM [tub bie ?^'reube be3 ®rof i^aterg unb ber ©ro^mutter. 2. 5Deu guten 33orfa|en folgen gute 3:f)aten. 3. 93?eine fd)Oiien 33tumen Blii^en. 4. ^iefe rctl;en O^ofcn ried^en. 5. dx f)at ^tx^ei gro^e (Sci^ranfe, brei ,^iften unb fcdjg JliiBel. 6. 3n bem Saale ber ?yutfteu ftnb i^iele Jtrcnieudjter, .^amJpen unb ^er^en. 7. 5Diefe ffeinen runben ^iitten ftnb fd)on. 8. @ute, treue unb waijxt ^reunbe ftnb ein grof eg ©efdien! eineS guten unb giitigen ©ctteS. 9. 5)ie (5id)en unb *^ud;en ftnb ^c^e unb bicfe ^ciume. Model exercises after lesson xxvi. 1. ^ie .^inber ge^en in ben ©arten, um xRoftn, ^tlUn unb ^i* lien ju Brec^en. 2. ^ie (Sulen unb S-tebcrmaufe fonnen bag ^icl^t ber (Sonne nid)t leiben. 3. 5(ufmerffame (Sc^iiler fonnen Ieid)t bie beutfc^e ^)>xad)c lernen. 4. .^ennen Sie jene 3ii»iiterleute unb 9)iaurer ? 5. 3fl, fie f;aBen toon nietnem 33ater ^crn,- 2Bei,^en unb ©erfte gefauft. 6. SOZan fagt, baf ^abaf, SDZaig unb -9^eig in 9(orb=Q(merifa gut gebei^en. 7. Sener QBunbarjt n?ei^ ^u leBen unb }\d} bag ^e6en angenef)m ju inad)en. 8. (Sin gofd)icftcr 5(rjt fennt bie X^eile beg menfd)tid)en Jlor:perg. 9. 5}er CRiicfgrat, bie SfJi^^^jeu, bie (Bd)uiUxn unb ijiele anbere ^:^eile ftnb im\ v^nod)cn, unb bie Sin^ge, bie ^unge, bag ^erj, bie lOeBer u.f.ir. i>on ^leifd). Besides the stock of words already acquired and acquirable 11* 250 from the following lists, the vocabulary at the end of the work may also be made available. The following connected view of the different declensions of the adjectives and nouns will be found convenient for ready reference. Terminations of adjectives. Old Declension (§ 28. 29.) New Decl. (§ 30. 31.) Mixed Decl. (§ 32 33.) s J\Iasc. INGUI Fem. AR. J^eut. PLTJR all g-ends. sn Masc. reuLA Fem. R. .Yeut. PLUR. all gends. SIN&ULAR. Masc. Fem. J^eut. 1 1 PLUR. all gends. N. - er - e - eg - e - e - e - e - en - cr - e - eg - en G. - e^ - er - eg - er - en - en - en - en - en - en - en - en D. - em -er - em - en - en - en - en - en - en - en - en - en A. - en - e -eg - e - en - en - en - en - en - e -eg - en Terminations op nouns. Old Declension. New Declension. Singular. Plural. (lesson XVI ) Singular. Plural. Page29. 1. RULE III. 2. IRXTLE n. 3. RULE VII. 4.RULE IV.V. Page 43. 5. RULE I. N.— — e — — er — en, — n — —en — e G.— eg, g — e — — er — en, — n — en, — n — en — e D.-e — en — e — evn — en, — n — en, — n —en — n A.— — e — — er — en, — n — en, — n — en,— n I. Professions and trades. <§anbn?erfe unb ©ehjerBe. 9(pctf)c'fer, m. -g, * pi-, apothe- (Jliirurg', m. -en,pL-en, surgeon. caiy. !Dv"idVbecfer, m. -g, pi -. slater. 53arbtcr', m. -g, ^Z. -e, barber. gdrber, m. -g, pi -, dyer. 53ciu'meifter, 771. -g, _p/. -, architect, gifcb'pnbter, m. -g, jsZ. -, fish- Sttb'ftauer, ?n. -g, ?;Z. -, sculptor. monger, ^ifttof, m. -g, pi 58ifdicfe, bishop, i^leifdier, -m. -g, pZ. - butcher. 33ctt*ev, m. -g, pZ. -, cooper. ^n^rmann, m. -eg, -g, pZ. S3raucr, m. -g, _pZ. -, brewer. -leute, carrier, wagoner. S3ndVBiubev, m. -g, pi -, book- ©etft'ddie, m. -n, pZ. -n, clerg}^- binder. man. S3udi'bntcfer, 7n. -g, pi -, printer, ©erber, m. -g, ^Z. - currier. (iavetlan', m. -g, pZ. -e, chaplain. ®(afer, m. -g, _pZ. -, glazier. * The letter, or If) ters set off by a hyphen (thus-§, or-e§) is that used in forming the genitive Where the genitive singular is like that ofthe nommative, and where the plural is like the singular, no note is made of it. Where, how- ever, the plural differs from the singular either in termination, or otJierwiae,' the difference is dulv marked. 251 @clb'f*micb, 7)1. -ti, -i, pi. -c, goldsmith. t^anb'fdMihmadAer, m. -6, pi -, glover. jQixt, m. -en, pi. -en, herdman. i^uffdimieb, m. -eg, -g, pi. -e, farrier. Suirelier', m. -qS, -6, pi. -e, jeweler. ,Ko;^Icr, m. -g, pi. -, coal-man. .Riifer, m. -g, pi. (See 93cttdier.) ^linftler, m. -6, pL -, artist. ^up'fcrfdimieb, m. -z^, -B, ph -e, brazier. ^up'ferfted^er, m. -B, pi, -, en- graver, Wliii}tx, m. -6, pi. mower. 2llarft'fdireter, m. -6, pi -, quack. 2Jlaurer, m. -g, pi. -, mason. 2}leif'erfd^mieb, m. -tS, -6, pi. -e, cutler. SDie^ger, m. -i, pi. -, (See %hii f*er.) SHufitant' , m. -en, pL -en, musi- cian, fiddler. S'iadit'rodcbter, m. -B, pi -, watch- man. ^Q.'bmn, f. -, pi -nen, seams- tress. 9iatni'fcrf6er, tti, -g, pi. -, natur- alist. Cbft'ftdnblerin, / -, pi -nen, fruitwoman. ^avft, m. -eg, pi ^^dpfte, pope. ^eniicf'enmadier, rn. -6, pi-, hair- dresser. ^^farrer, m. -g, pi -, vicar. ^fer'befidnbter, m. -6, pi -, horse- dealer. ^f}Uofop(}', 77?. -en, pi -en, philo- sopher. ^re'biger, m. -g, pi -, priest. ^viejler, 771. -g, pi. -, priest. Olebner, m. -6, pi -, orator. ©attter, 772. -g, pi -, saddler. (Sd'au'fpteler, 771. -g, pi -, actor. (£d>Icifer, tti. -g, j)Z. -, locksmith. (Sdimieb, m. -eg, -g, pi -e, smith. (Sdinttter, tti. -g, pi -, reaper. ©dTcrn'fteinfegcr, ttz. -g, pZ. -, chimney-sweeper. (£du-ift'fteUer, m. -^, pi -, author. ©d}uf)'fiicfer, tti. -g, pi. -, cobbler. @*ul'lei}ver, 771. -g, pi -, school- master. (Seller, m. -g, jjZ. -, rope-maker. ©pecevei'f)dnbler, rru -g, _pZ. -, grocer. ©ticf'erhT, / -, pZ. -nen, embroi- deress. 2!ag'(c§ner, 77?. -g, pi -, day-la- borer. S^ape^i^rer, 777. -B,pl -, wpholsterer. S^robler, 77?. -g, pi -, fripperer. S^udi'fldnbler, 771. -g, _pZ. -, draper. Uf)r'mad)ev, ttz. -g, pi -, watch- maker. SSdfdi^ertn,/ -, pi -nen, washer- woman, 23eBer, m. -g, pi -, weaver. 23cdigler, m. -g, pi -, money- changer. aBnnbarjt, tti. -eg, pi -dr^te, (See Sf)irurg.) Sa&nar^t, in. -eg, _pZ. -drjte, dentist. 3ucf'er6dcfer, ttt. -g, ^/. -, con- fectioner. II. Max. Snter, 77. -g, old age. Sdnme,/ -, j?/. -n, nurse. ©raut,/ -, _pZ. ffirdnte, bride. ^rdu'tigam, 777. -g, pi -e, bride- groom. (S'lefrau,/. - , jjZ. -en, \vife. (S'^emann, 771 -eg, -g, pi -mdnner, husband. (Snfel, 777. -g, _pZ. -, grand son. (JnTcIin, / -, pi -nen, grand daughter. jVami'lie,/ -, pi. -n, family, ©efcurt',/-, birth. @emaf)l', tti. -eg, -g, «Z. -e, ) ®emaf)'an, / -, pi -nen, 5 ^^^" sort 262 ©rof'mutter, / -, fl -mutter, grandmother. ©ro^'satcr, m. -e, pi -»dter, grandfather. Sugenb,/ -, youth, Sungfrau,/ -, pi -en, virgin. Sungling, m. -e, pi -t, young- man. .Kinb^eit,/ -, childhood, infancy. D^acii'fommen, pi descendants. ^ati)e, m. -n, pi -w, godfather. ^patl^e,/ — , pi —\\, godmother. $|le'3et)ater, m. -^, pi -odter, fosterfather. "SdmMe'germutter,/ -, pi. -miitter, mother-in-law. (gcbtrie'getfc^n, m. -e^, -g, pi -; fo^ne, son-in-law. (Sd)h)ie'ger»ater, m. -3, pt -sdter father-in-law. (Stief mutter, /. -, pi -miitter, stepmother. SdniUer,/. -, pi -n, shoulder. (Seite,/. -,pl -n, side, ©tirn,/ - ;)Z. -en, forehead. aSabe,/. -, j?Z. -n, calf. aBanc^e,/. -, pi. -n, cheek. 3af)ufleifdv n. -e^, gum. 3el)e,/. -, pi -11, toe. -Bunge,/. -, pi -n, tongue. lY. Maladies and infirmities, ^ranf^eiten unb®c«» B r e cf) c n. 3tnfatl, 771. -eg, -t^ |)Z. -fdUe, fit. ©alfam, wi. -g, pi -e, balm, ©tattern, ^Z. the small pox. 3?linbl)eit,/. -, blindness. SvcdVmittel, n. -6, pi -, vomitive. gieK't, n. -S, fever. ©efdmmliV, /. -, pi. ©efd^triilile, swelling. ®efdw^^^^ n. -t'S,-6, pi -e, ulcer. ®idu,/. -, gout, ^eitung, /. -, pi -en, cure. «§ei'fcrfeit,/. -, hoarseness. jQuftcn, m. -6, cough. Mclit,f. -, colic, ^rampf, 7n. -e^, -6, pi. Rxh\\\^\^, cramp, ^veB^, m. -e^, pi -e, cancer. SD^iafern, pi. measles. 3)iittel, n. -6, pi -, remedy. 9larBe, /. -, pi. -n, scar. Oiev'oenfteBer, n. -6, nervous-fever. £)f)nmadit,/. -, fainting. ^cdm,pl. (See Slattern.) V. Articles of dress. 9{ermel, m. -6, pi -, sleeve. Slrmbanb, n. -eg, -g, pi -bdnber, bracelet. Slttag, m. -fifeg, pZ. -p, satin. a3ardient, m. -g, pi -e, dimity. 93atift', 7M. -eg, _pZ. -e, cambric. a3ciitm'irc(re,/. -, cotton. Sein'fleiber, pi pantaloons. S9efa|,', m.-eg, ;)Z. -fd^e, trimming. ^eutel, m. -g, joZ. -, purse, bag. 93ril(e,/. -, pi -n, spectacles. Srufi'nabel,/. -, pi -n, broach. ©Htjie,/. -, pZ. -n, brush. 0uetfdmug, /. -, pi -en, contu- sion. Olece^t', n. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, prescrip- tion. a§ ^(X\X%. Salfen, m. -g, pi. -, beam. 93anf,/. -, pi. -en, bank. SSaum'gatten, w. -g, pZ. -gdrten, orchard. ^aum'fd)nle,/ -, pi. -n, nursery. ©ibltct()ef',/ -, pi. -en, library. 936tfe,/ -, pi. -w, exchange. 93rett, n. -eg, -g, pi. -er, plank, ©riicfe,/. -, pi. -n, bridge. Srunnen, m. -g, |;Z. -, well, (Sat»ct'(e,/. -, 7:)Z. -n, chapel. (S^afer^ne,/ -, jdZ. -n, barrack, IDadi, 72. -eg, pi. ©ddbcr, roof 2)ad)'rinne, / -, pi. -n, gutter, spout, !De(fe,/ -, _pZ. -n, ceiling. 2)or[, n, -eg, -g, _pZ, fDcrfer, vil- lage. (Svb'gefd)cf,n.-ffeg, ^Z— ffe,grouhd- floor. i^en'ftetlaben, m. -g, pZ. -Idben, window-shutters. 255 ^fedfen, m. -6, pi -, borough. ^•ii§'bc>bcii, m. -e, pi -boben, floor. ©atjc,/. - pL -n, lane. ©cfduij^nip, n, -e^, pi. -e, pri- son. ®en>diti5'()aui^, n. -e^, pi -f;dufev, green-house. ©eiuclbc, n. -^, pi -, vault. ®Iecfc,/-,;pZ.-n, bell. ©loffeiifpiet, n. -eS, -e, pi -e, chime. ©ofCe,/. -, pi -n, kennel. J^viuptftv-ibt,/ -, pi -ftdbte, metro- polis. ^ecfc,/ -, pi -n, hedge. •^cf, 771. -t'3, -6, pi ^ofe, court, yard. «§iittc,/ -, pi -n, cottage, hut. ^alt, m. -eg, -0; lime. J^amin', n. -c^, -i, pi -e, chim- ney. .K^ammer,/ -, pi -n, chamber. JleKer, m. -^, pi -, cellar. .^ird^^cf, m. -ee, -g, pi -f)cfe, burying-place. ^irdhfptcl, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, parish. .KirdU{}uvm, m.-zi, -g,^Z.-tl^iirme, tower, bellry of a church. ^lofter, n. -S, pi jtlojter, convent, cloister. .R:iid^e,/ -, pi -n, kitchen. Sanbljaug, n. -eg, pi -f)dufer, country-house. Sanb'ftva^e,/ -, pi -n, highway. aJiviuer, / -, pi -n, wall. Tld'ni)c], 7n.-eg,-g,jDZ.-f)cfe, farm. [Oicbeln, pi furniture. 3UcvtcI, V2. -g, mortar. SJtun^e,/. -, pi -n, mint, coin. Cfcii, 771. -g, _p/. C^efen, stove. ^alvift, m. -eg, pi ^aldfte, palace. ?Bf[aftei-, 77. -g, pavement. $oft,/ -, j?/. -en, post-office. i^umpe,/ -, pi -en, pump. 9latf)^aug, 71. -eg, pi -^ckifet town-house, council-house. Dtieget, m. -g, pi - , bolt. @aat, 7n. -ed, -g, pi ©die, saloon. @acvtfiei^/ -, pi -en, vestry. @dian')>iel§aug, n. -eg, jsZ. -^du? fev, theater. @dieUe,/ -, pi -n, bell (small.) @dieime, /. -, pi -n, granary, barn. (Sdilaf jimmev, tz, -g, pi -, bed- room. (5d)lop, 77. -ffeg, _pZ. @d)tojfer, castle, lock. @dnefer, 777. -g, pi -, slate. (Sdiornftein, tti. -eg,-g, pi -e, (See .S^amin.) ©peidier, m. -g, pi -, loft, garret. (£)5ital', n. -eg, -g, ^i -tdler, hos- pital. @tvibttf}or, 77. -eg, -g, pi -e, gate (of a walled town.) @tabt'»ierte(, 77. -g, pi -, quarter of (the) town. @tat(, m. -eg, -g, ^Z. ©tdlTe, stable. (Stocfirerf, 77. -eg, -g, fl -e, story. ©tube,/ -, pi -n, chamber. ;j!reibl)aug, 77. -eg, ^Z. -pufer, hot- house. S^rep-'pen^etdnber, 77. -g, _pZ. -, stair-case-rail. 5;burm, 771. -eg, -g, j^Z. X^iirme, tower, steeple. Umc^e'bungen, pi environs. SScr'jimmer, 77. -g, pi -, anti- chamber. 33orftabt,/ -, pi -j^dbte, suburb. SBanb,/. -, ^Z. SBdnbe, wall (of a house.) Weinberg, 777. -eg, -g, jsZ. -e, vine- yard. 2Btefe, /. -, pi -n, meadow. Seugbaug, ti. -eg, pi -^-ufet, ar- senal. 3tec;el, 77?. -g, pi -, tile. Bie'gelftein, m- -eg, -g, pZ. -e, brick. 3oll§aug, 77. -eg, pi -^dufer, cus tom-house. 256 YII. FURNITURE. 9)^ fc i 1 1 e It. ^edier, m. -^, ^l -, tumbler, cup. S3ett, n. -eg, -g, jpl -en, bed. S3ett'i:)ecfe,/. -, pi -n, coverlet. ©ett'Iabe,/ -,j9Z. -n, bedstead. Setttudi, 71. -eg, -0, pi. -tiidbcr, sheet. ^la'feKilg, m. -eg, -g, _pZ. -Bdlge, bellows. ^iiMievbrett, n. -eg, -g, pi. -er, book-shelf. 33u'dierfdiranf, w?. -eg, -g, pZ. -^ fdirdnfe, book-case. ^ii'geleifen, n. -g, ^Z.-, smoothmg- h'on. (Safferol', n. -g, pi. -e, sauce-pan. 2)e(f el, ;?i. -g, pi. -, cover. S'tmer, m- -g, jo?. -, bucket. gap, n. -ffeg, pZ. gdiTer, cask. ge'ber&ett, n. -eg, -g, 'pl -en, fea- ther-bed. §eu'erftaf)l, m. -eg, -g, j??. -ftd(;le, steel. i^eu'erftein, m. -eg, -g, pl. -e, flint, gen'erjange,/. -, pl -n, tongs. gcn'erjeng, ?i. -eg, -&,pl. -e, tinder- box. yupanf, /. -, pl -Mnfe, foot- stool. ©ebecf', n. -eg, -g, pl -e, cover. ©emdi'be, n. -g, jjZ. -, picture. t^anbtudi, n. -eg, -g, _pZ. -tiid)ev. towei. «§erb, m. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, hearth. ^^cl^'fcl^Ie,/ -, pl -n, charcoal. ^dftdien, n. -g, j^Z. -, box. ^effel, m. -g, ^Z. -, kettle. .Kerje, / -, joZ. -n, taper, candle. ^tfte,/ -, pl -n, chest. ^omo'be, / -, pl -n, chest ol drawers. Jtcpf fiffen, n. -g, pl -, pillow. ^Gxh, m. -eg, -g, _pZ. ^orbe, basket. ^ron'Ieud^ter, m. -g, _pZ. -, chande- lier. ^rug, m. -eg, -g, _pZ. ^riige, jug, pitcher. ^ubel, TTU -g, ;?Z. -, pail, tub. ^iidVengefdiirr, n. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, kitchen utensil. Sam^^e, / -, pZ. -n, lamp. Sater'ne,/. -, joZ. -n, lantern. fit*t, 71. -eg, -g, fl -er, (See Jler* Stdit'pu|e,/. -,^Z. -n, snuffers. SDIcrfer, m. -g, ^Z. -, mortar. ^fvinne, /. -, pl. -n, pan. 5J}fef' ferbiidife, / -, pl -n, pepper- box. ^fvcpfen, m. -g, pl. -, cork. ^frc)3'fenjie^er, m. -g, ^Z. -, cork- screw. ^\m, m. -eg, -g, pl qjfu^Ie, bol- ster. ^clfter, n. -g, jjZ. -, bolster. 5|}ult, 71. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, desk. 9taf)nien, 7n. -g, pZ. -, frame. Saijfaf, 71. -ffeg, ;)Z. -fdjfer, salt- cellar. (2duiditel, /. -, pl. -n, (See Jtdfi? du'u.) (Sd)anfel,/. -, pl -w, shovel. (Sdiauni^Ioffel, 772. -g, pl -, skim- mer. iSdnvm, 7?7. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, screen. ©diranf, ?7i. -eg, -g, pl (Sd)rdn!e, cupboard. ©dmb'labe,/. -, pl. -n, drawer. Sdiiir'eifen, ti. -i,pl. -, poker. (2dwe'felf)cl5d}en, 7i. -g, _pZ. -, match. (geife, /. -, pl. -n, soap. @enftc|)f, m. -eg, -g, jaZ. -topfe, mustard-pot. (Serinet'te, /. -, pl. -n, napkin. (£te&, ?z. -eg, -g, ^Z. -e, sieve. (2cp[)a, 77. -g, _pZ. -g, sofa. *2tetu/fcf)Ie,/. -, _pZ. -ii, coal. (iu).i'penfdmffel, /. -, pl. -n, ter- reen. 3:epvi^r ^^- -^, pl- -^/ carpet. ^ieget, m. -g, joZ, -, skillet. S^ifdHndi, n. -eg, -g, pZ. -tud)er, table-cloth. ^fcpf, 777. -eg, -g, j?Z. Jlo^fe, pot. 257 J'riditer, m. -^, pi. -, funnel. ^Sanb'Ieudhtcr, m. -^,pL -, sconce. liHuni'jiafclie, /. -, pi. -n, warm- in gpan. VIII. DISHES (Scnfecf, n. -t^, -g, comfit, sweat- meats. ©i, n. -H, -$, pi. -er, egg. (B\'cxtn&\c\\, m. -^, pi. -, omelet. (Srfrifdi'un^,/ -, pi-, -en, refresh- ment. 5leifcti'bru:^e,/ -, pi. -n, broth. ©aftma^t, n. -zi, -i, pi -md(;ler, banquet. .^ain'mcljieifdi, n. -ti, mutton. Jpam'nuifeule, / -, p/. -n, leg of mutton. ^albfieifdv ru -eg, veal. IX. GRAIN AND VEGETABLES. 53Iu'nien!c^I, m. -e^, -g, cauli- flower. ffic^ne,/. -, pi. -n, bean. (Srbfe,/ -, pi -n, pea. ©erfte,/. -, barley. ©urfe,/ -, pi -11, cucumber. <§afer, m. -S, oats. >§trfe, m. -n, millet. ilnoblauA, m. -eg, -6, garlic. Mci)i, m. -i§, -6, cabbage. ^crn, n. -eg, pi. Werner, corn, grain. ^raut, 7u -eg, -6, pi ^rduter, herb. ^rejTe,/ -, cress. I^infe, / -, pi -It, lentil. SPZaig, n. -eg, maize. 2'teer'rettig, m. —eg, -g, pi -e, horse-radish. ^aUiua'fe,/ -, pi -n, parsnip. 5[}eterfi'Iie,/ -, parsley. $ flange,/ -, pi -n, plant. X. FRUITS AND FRUIT-TREES, 5('iianag,/. -, jjZ. -fe, pine-apple. ii'f:Ibaum, m. -eg, -g,^/. -bdiime, apple-tree. Stpfelfx'ne, /. -, ;?Z. -n, sweet- orange. ^afd)'be(fen,n.-g, j)Z.-, washbowl. 5j|iciic, /. -, pi. -11, cradle. Suct'erbofe,/. -, pi. -ii, sugar-box. 3nuber, m. -g, tinder. 1. ® c r i d; t e. v^albg'cctelet'te,/ cutlet. Jl(of , 771. -eg, j?Z, .^lo^e, dumpling. DlubcC/ -, pi -11, vermicelli. £;di'fenBraten, m. -g, «/. -, roast- beef Cdi'fenji'eifd\ n. -eg, beef ^fanii'fudien, m. -g, j3Z. -, pan- cake. Z. -n, thistle, ©eipblatt, ?i. -eg, -g, _pZ. -bldttev, honey-suckle. Sagmiii^ m. -eg, -g, jessamine. £eiifc'je,/ -, pZ. -ii, gillyflower, l&i'lie, / -, pi -n, lily. ^Ola^'liebc,/ -, pi -n, daisy. aJicbn'bhime,/ -, pi -n, poppy. 9Jit)rtf;)e,/ - pi -n, myrtle. Sfielfe, / -, pi -n, pink. Dceffei,/. pi -n, nettle. Sltt'terf^crn, t/z. -eg, -g, lark-spur. 3^ofe,/ -, pi -n, rose. ®d)(iiff'etblume, / -, pi -n, cow- slip. ©cu'nenblume, / -, pi -n, sun- flower. !l!ulpe,/ -, ^Z. -n, tulip. Uufraut, n. -eg, -g, weed. SScildien, ??. -g,|)Z. -, violet. 33evgi^'mein?ni4t, n. -eg, -g,forget- me-not. XIII. BIRDS. 33 6 gel. 5tbter, m. -g, pi -, eagle. 9(mfel,/ -, pZ. -n, blackbird. SSadb'ftelje,/ -, jjZ. -n, wagtail. 23iutfin!, m. -en, ^Z. -en, chaffinch. ©iptctftn!, w. -en, pi -en, gold- finch. 2)c!)le,/ -, pi -n, jackdaw. 2)rcffel,/ -, pi -n, thrush. (Slider,/ -, pi -n, magpie. (Jntc,/ -, pi -n, duck, d'ufe,/ -, pi -n, owl. ^vilfc, m. -n, pZ. -n, falcon. 259 gafan', nu -en, pi -cii, pheasant. jVle'bcrmau^,/ -, pi- -maufe, bat. (Vlu^cl, in. -i, pi -, wing. ^^wi'.f. -, pi (Ddufe, goose ^abidU, 17U -ti, -'$, pi -e, hawk. ^dujiini|, 771. -e^, -g, pi -e, linnet. Jpuf)n, n. -e^, -'J, pi J3u^ner, hen. ^aiuViieirjcciel, m. -$, pi -yc^el, canary-bird. ^rdije,/ -, pi -n, crow. ^udilein, n. -$, pi —, chicken. jlucfucf, m. -^, pi -e, cuckoo. 'ttxi>t,f. ~, pi -n, hirk. -Diad'/ti^afl,/ - *pl -eu, night- ingale. -^apaijei', vi. -Cv, -o, pi -z, parrot. ^fau, m. -en, ;?Z. -en, peacock. 9tabe, tti. -n, ^Z. -n, raven. Olaub'oc^cl, m. -e, pi -sccjel, bird of prey. dlibi}ui)n, n- -c?, -^, /)Z. -fmfiner, partridge. 9tcifun-, m. -^, pi -, heron. 9tctiyfe()tdien, n,-^,pl -, redbreast. Sdniabel, ;n. -^, pZ. Sdnidbel, bill. Sdnralbc,/. -, pi -n, swallow. (Sdnvcin, m. -e^, -6, pi 3d)!vdne, swan. i£v-vliu^, 771. -eg, -s5, pZ. -e, sparrow. Sterdi, 771. -e^,-g, pZ. Z. -, squii-rel. ?5rettdieu^ 77. -g, pi -, ferret, ^ud^g, 777. -ti, pL §ii*fe, fox. SuUeu, 71. -g, jtjZ. -, colt, ©ernfe,/. -, jjZ. -n, chamois, ^afe, 777. -n, pi -n, hare. <§irfdi, 777. -c^, j9Z. -e, stag, deer. Si^el, m. -t?, pi -, hedge-hog. ^anin'd^en, 77. -^, _pZ. -, rabbit. Samm, 7?. -t6, -y, _p/. Sdmmer, lamb. Scire, 777. -n, ^Z. -n, lion. 5?iarter, 777. -§, pi -, pole-cat. 5?taul'efe(, 777. -0, pi. -, mule. 2)Zauhrurf, ???. -eo, -», _pZ. -iriirfe, mole. Oleb, 77. -eg, -§, pi -e, roe. Sdnrein, 77. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, hog. Xij^er, r77. -g, pZ. -, tiger. aSclf, 777. -eg -g, pi ®olfe, wolf. Stevje,/ -, pi -n, goat. XY . FISHES. ?y i f d^ e. 9(al, 777. -eg, -g, ^Z. -e, eel. Stufter,/ -,pl -n, oyster. S3arfdi, tti. -eg, pi. -e, perch. S3iicfting, 777. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, red- herring, ^cret'te,/ -, ;;Z. -u, trout, ©arnc'le,/ -, j^Z- -n, shrimp. .§ai, 777. -eg, -g, ^Z. -e, shark. ^dring, tti. -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, herring. •Qid'^t, m. -eg, -g, pl-t, pike. »6umnter, 777. -g, pi -n, lobster, ^a'belfau, 777. -eg, -g, ^Z. -c, had- dock, ^arrfen, 777. -g, joZ. -, carp. Jlvebg, 777. -eg, pi -e, craw-fish. Sad^g, 777. -eg, pi -e, salmon. 2)lufd^el,/. -, pi -n. shell. Salm,777.-eg,-g,j3Z. -e,(See 8ad}g). 260 ©dieltfifd), m. dock. (Scl)ilb'!r6te,/. -eg, -g, jil had- -, pi. -n, turtle. XVI. INSECTS. S( meife,/. -, jsZ. -n, ant. S3tene, /. -, pi. -n, bee. Q3tut'egel, m. -g, jpl. -, leech. (Si bedife,/. -,^1. -w, lizard. §liege,/. -, pi. -n, fly. glcf), m. -t^, -^, pi- %'o^^, flea. ?frofdi, w. -eg, p/. ?5rdfd)e, frog, ©riile,/. -, jjZ. -n, grasshopper, •^eu'fdirecfe,/. -, pZ. -n, locust. h^\x^ Q^iiie, /. -, pi. -n, cricket. ^dfer, m. -^, pi. -, beetle, ^vote,/ -, pi. -n, toad. SJlotte,/ -,pl. -n, moth. XYII. TOOLS. 9(!^te,/. -,J5Z- -n, awl. Stmbofi, m. -ffeg, ^Z. -e, anvil. S(ngel,/. -, ^i. -n, fish-hook. S(n'gelrutf)e, / -, pi. ~n, fishing- rod. 9(n'gclfd)nur,/ -, pi. -en, fish-line. 9txt,/. -, _pZ. 9(erte, ax. Seit, n. -eg, -g, _p/. -e, hatchet. 93red)'eifcu, lu -g, _pZ. -, crow-bar. Siidife,/ -, pi, -n, rifle. 5)ref*'j!eget, m. -g, pi. -, flail. @gge,/ -, pi. -it, harrow. §eite, / -, pi. -n, file. gltnte, /. -, pi. -n, gun. ©eriift, ?z. -eg, -g, ^Z. -e, scaffold. ^aue,/. -, joZ. -n, hoe. .§cbei, w. -g, pi. -, plane. ^ede, /. -, pi. -n, trowel. Sa'befioff, m. -eg, -g, joZ. -ftorfe, ramrod. I&eim, m. -eg, -g, glue, Setter, /. -, pi. -n, ladder, SRei^el, m. -g, pi. -, chisel. £)b'Iate,/ -, pi. -n, wafer. ^etfd)aft, n. -eg, -g, jpZ. -e, seal. n^iirbtg, (benf e n, to think, and iriirbig, worthy;) worthy of thought. (10) In all compounds, finall}^ the main accent falls upon the first component which, also, always quahfies or defines the second, as containing the fundamental idea. § 3. Parts of speech. ( 1 ) The parts of speech in German are usually reckoned ten : Articles, Verbs, Nouns, or Substantives, Adverbs, Adjectives, Prepositions, Numerals, Conjunctions, Pronouns, Interjections. (2) Of these, six, namely. Articles, Nouns, Adjectives. Numerals, Pronouns and Verbs, are capable of inflection ; that is, admit of various changes of termination by which various modifications of meaning are expressed: the other /cwr, namely, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections, are in form invaj'iahle. (3) All parts of speech capable of inflection have two numbers : the sing l'lar, which denotes but one, and the plu- ral, which denotes more than one. (4) All parts of speech capable of inflection, except the verb, have four cases; namely the nominative, genitive, 12 266 THE ARTICLE. § 4. DATIVE and ACCUSATIVE : also, three genders ; namely, the mas- culine, the FEMININE and the neuter. (5) Cases are variations made in the form of a word, to in- dicate its several relations to other words : the nominative being that form which denotes the subject of a verb; the genitive that which is chiefly used in signifying source or 2^ossession ; the dative that which indicates the person or thing /or or to whom or which any thing is directed ; and the accusative that which points to the immediate or direct object of an action. The cases in German correspond Avell to those in the Latin language. The Vocative, however, is never counted, because it is the same exactly in form with the nominative ; while the Ablative (as in Greek,) is wholly wanting: its place being ge- nerally supplied by the Dative (with a suitable preposition). § 4. The article. (1) There are two articles in German : the Definite, bcr, the; and the Indefinite, ein, a, or an. They are inflected thus : Singular. Plural. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. For all genders. Nom. 5Der, bie, ba?, the ; Nom. 5Die, the ; Gen. ^e6, ber, be§, of the ; Gen. 3)er, of the ; Dat. ^em, ber, bent, to, or for the; Dat. ^en, to, or for the; Ace. 3)en, bie, ba§, the. Ace. ®ic, the. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. Nom. ^in, cute, ein, an, or a ; N. ") Gen. ^ine§, einer, eineg, of an, or a ; G.J w^ntino- Dat. (Sinetn,einer, einciit, to, or for an, or a; D. { ' °* Ace. (Eineit, eine, ein, an, or a. A. J (2) In familiar style, certain prepositions are frequently contracted with the dative and accusative of the definite article into one word. examples. D. am, for an bem, as, ant Sreiier, at the fire ; A. ntt§, for att bn§, as, ati§ ?irf)t, to the light; NOUNS. § 5. 267 D. aufm, A. aufy, D. teim, A. burd)y, A. fiir'J, D. Inn term, for auf bem, as, aufm 5^iirm, on the tower; for auf baS, as, auf^o ^aii?, upon the house ; for Ui bem, as, Beini CBatcr, with the father ; for burd) bvi^, as, burrf)i? QBaffcr, through the water ; for fiiv ba?\ as, fury ®clb, for the money ; for I^iutcr beni, as, f)interni ^aufe, behmd the house ; D. im, A. iu§, D. i^om, A. ))ox^, D. i>orm, D. iiberm, A. libera, D. uuterm for m bcm, for in ba6, for i^on bem, for i>cr ba0, for i>or bem, for ii6er bem, for ii6er X)aS\ sum, lux. as, im ^immef, in (the) heaven; as, iny ^^au'3, into the house ; as, l^cm Ue6el, from (the) evil ; as, i^orS ?yeufter, before the window ; as, i^orm ^T)ore, before the door ; as, xiOerm ^'euer, upon the fire; as, u6er§ ^anb, over (the) land ; for unter bem, as, unterm QSaffer, under (the) water ; for 5u bem, as, jum i^Iuffe, to the river ; for 5U ber, as, ^ur S'fjre, to the honor. § 5. Nouns. (1) In German, as in English, tlie nouns, that is, the names of persons and things, are divided into two great classes : viz : Common nouns, which designate sorts, kinds, or classes of objects ; and Proper nouns, which are peculiar to indi- viduals. (2) Under the head of common nouns ^ arc commonly * I. hi German a\\ Nouns, as also all pa rts^ of speech when used as nouns hepn with a capital letter. Ex. : 1. "Tiv Sohii, the son ; bie Xorl)ter, the clauanter. L I)cv ®utc, the good (man) ; tie ©lite, the good (woman). 3. ^a§ ift bliiib, bo§ atibcvc ift iat)m, the one horse is blind, the other is lame. VII. Adjectives derived from names of persons. Ex : ^a3 (ScfctHerfcbc i6nuS. Observe that adjectives derived from the names of countries do not begin with a capital. Ex.": rev beuifdie '43iuib, the German confederacy. 3);c fvaiijoftfc^e (§|)vac^e, the French language. GENDER. S 7. 269 by the meaning ; by the form. (1) To the MASCULINE be- (1) To the MASCULINE ig names of long either way : suggesting only, as the best mode of learning the exceptions (which are numerous and here purposely omit- ted.) the custom of constantly and carefully noting them in reading and speaking. ^ 1. Rules for determining gender be- a. Those primary derivatives (See § 2. 3.) ending in e r, el, en; {without meaning ;) and those also that are with- out affixes of any kind. b. Those secondary deri- vatives formed by means of male beings ; * as, ber 3)Zann ; ber ^cti^e ] (fee. days; as, ber SDZontag; ber '5r)ienftag ; (fee. months ; as, ber Samiar ; ber 5'ebruar; (fee. seasons ; as, ber fyrii^Ung ; ber ^yy ^''y» ^^l/y ^^y /] ii^dicates the act, practice, or place of business ; ung [ing, ure, ion ;] signifies the act, or the continuing to act ; e ness, ity^ th ; ) Beit ness, ity, th ; V d^QTioiQ qualities, 01' attributes; feit ness, ity, th ; ) frf)aft ship, hood, ity , [ express rank, grade, office ; t^uni dom, hood, ity , also, anumberof things taken collectively; often, merely the quality; fat ude, cy ; \ denote the state, or condi- fel "ude, cy ; \ tion ; also, the quality ; niB ness, cy ; y sometimes the result ; rf)en Icin kin, ule, et, let ; 'kin, ule, et, let ; ! indicate diminutiveness. § 11. Examples. ' Sanger, a singer ; -SSiirger, a citizen ; Sager, a saw)'er er <( Srf)neiber, a tailor ; O^omer, * a Roman ; .?ei^jiger,t a resident of Leipzig ; .SSiener, a Viennese : * Appellatives derived from the names of people often have the termina- tion f ; as bev .SpffK. the Hessian ; ber .^iitfe, the Turk ; &c. t Nouns derived from the name of a city or town, are often used indech- nably as adjectives. Ex. : 2)a§ ^eipjijjer sGter, the Leipzic tear. Gen. ^eS Setp^tgec ^tcr§. 272 EXAMPLES. $11. ling S^id^terling, ^anfiing, .©rf) oping, rOrafin, 1 v^etbin, in or inn -{ ^onigin, {^ieBerei, ^eucf)elci, ^ifd)erei, 93rauerci, ' 33ete()rung, img l^eit fd)aft fat fet nif lein ^en (SrBauung, ^ronung, (5i|ung, ©lite, ©tarfe, vKranf^eit, 5)umm'^eit, *§eilig!eit, _?^-eud)tigfeit, ^reunbfc^aft, ^riefterfci)aft, S3ereitfrf)aft, «§eibentt)um, ^"^rlftentl^um, ^igent^m, 93eburfni^ ©leid^nij, ' 93u(i)Iein, ^ (Sid) en, a captain ; a fugitive ; a hireling ; a poetaster; a linnet; a sboot, or sprig ; a countess ; a heroine ; a queen ; a professor's wife ; a lioness ; thievery ; hypocrisy ; fishery ; brewery ; teaching, i.e. theac^ of teaching; the building, or erecting; the crowning, or coronation ; the sitting, or session ; goodness ; strength ; sickness ; stupidity ; holiness ; humidity ; friendship ; priesthood, that is, the bodi/ of the priests ; readiness ; heathendom ; heathenism ; Christendom; Christianity; property ; the state of being in trouble; dis- tress ; that which has resulted from hacking and cutting ; i. e. cuttings ; the state of being in want ; necessity ; quality, or state of being like ; like- ness ; a little book* a little boy ; a little stool ; a little egg. - DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. § 12. 273 (1) It should be observed, in forming derivatives of the order illustrated above, that when a, c, or u, is contained in the radical part, it is modified into ci, o, or ii, upon receiving any one of the suffixes e r, ling, t n, d) e n, lei n, e, n i f and f el; as, in the case of l^angcr, (from '^anq,) Siivger, (from i8urg,) and others of the like kind. (2) Often, moreover, in forming secondary derivatives certain euphonic letters are inserted between the suffix and the word to which it is added ; as, i g in tVeurfjtigfeit, humidity. Other letters employed in this way, are e n, n and t. These euphonic parts are easily distinguished from those ha^-ing an influence on the meanino-. bv merely resolvino- the derivative o - » .. o into its elements. (3) Here, too, may be noted the particle g e, which being prefixed to certain primary words, forms a class of nouns denoting either frequency of action, or a collection of things. These words, also, most commonly suffix the letter e ; ©ercbe, constant talk; ©e^eul, frequent crying; ©cBirge, a range of hills, are examples. § 12. Declexsiox of common nouns. (1) In German there are two declensions, distinguished as the Old and the New. The characteristic of each is the termi- nation of the genitive singular. In the former, the genitive is formed from the nominative by addmg e 5 or 5 ; when other- ^vise formed, the noun is of the new declension. (2) To the old declension belong almost all masculine and neuter nouns ; that is, by far the greater part of all the nouns in the language. (3) In both declensions, the nominative, genitive and accu- sative plui-al are, in form, alike ; while the dative termmates always in the letter n. Unless, therefore, the word under de- clension already ends in that letter, it is, in the dative, uni- formly assumed. (4) All feminine nouns are invariable in the singular ; in the plural, they are, for the most part, inflected according to the new declension. 12* 274 THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. (5) In compounds, the last word only is subjected to the variations of declension. § 13. The old declension, terminations. Singular, Plural. Nom. . e. Gen. e§ or 0. * e. Dat. e (orlikeNom.). en. Ace. . e. Singular. N. ber 33evg, the mountain. G. be0 ^erge§, of the mountain. D. bent SSerge, to the mountain. A. ben -^erg, the mountain. Plural. bie S3 erg e, the mountains, bcr SSerge, of the mountains, ben Bergen, to the mountains, bie 33 erg e, the mountains. (1) Some nouns of this declension take the letter r after c in all cases of the plural, and assume the Umlaut, if the radi- cal vowel be capable of it. (L.II. 12. Qle, &c.) Thus : Singular. G. be§ 3)prfe0, D. bem 53)crfc, A. baS 5Dorf, Plural. bie 5Dorfer, ber ^orfer. ben .^orfern. bie 5Dorfer. Singular. bflg £ieb, beg .^iebe^, bem £ieb, bas .^leb, Plural. bie ?ieber. f bcr ^ieber. ben ^iebern. bie £ieber. * The omission or retention of the e in the genitive singular, is a matter ta be settled by euphony alone. In nouns of two or more syllables, unless the last one be under the full accent, c is commonly omitted in the genitive, and sometimes also in the dative. Thus: ^onii], ki/ig; Gen. J^pitia^ (not J?5iu= gee); Dat. Jliniig (not Jloiitgc). t The nouns of this form (e -]- x) in the plural, among which are all sub- stantives ending in thum, as, bev 3^ctc^t^iim, riches, are, for the most part, neuters : as. •51 ao, can-ion. 51 nil, office. 53ab, bath. matt, leaf. S:^udi, book. '3: (lib, roof 2)ovf, village. (S't. egg. ^a§, vat, tub. gfl^, field. @clD, money. ©einiitf), mind. ©ef^Iecftt, species, ©ff^enft, spectre. ©laS, glass. (Silted, member, ©rab, grave. ®rao, grass. (5)uf, good. Jpanvf, head. ^au§, house. .Oubn, hen. ^aih, calf .^inb, child. Mid'i>, dress. .^orn, com. Jlraut, herb. Samnt, lamb. ?ti"b, song. \!odi, hole. ^yflanl, mouth. 3Re)i, nest. 5)ifanb, pawn. tficit. wneel. 9iciS, twig. 9Rinb, cattle. (S(f)[p§ castle. Scfcwevt, sword. 3?pI!, people. -- 'il'eib, woman. THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 275 (2) Most nouns of this declension, whose radical vowel is a, 0, u, or an, '^' assume, in the plural, the Umlaut. Thus : t^anb, +t, \-illaiii. ©ott, God. Dit, place. Seib, body. Sfianb, margin. 2^ cm, thorn, ©eifl, spirit. SBalb, forest SBuvm, worm. -Duinii, man. 3?orinuub, guardian. * The words in which the Umlaut thus occurs, are chiefly 1. primitive nouns of the masculine gender ; 2. feminines which have their plural in e ; as also, ilUurter and -iocfetcv ; 3. neuter primitives having their plurals in (e -f- r) er; 4. and lastly, nouns adding the diminutive terminations 6^n\ and lein. 276 THE OLD DECLENSION. Singular. N. ber SSitrger, the citizen ; G. beS 33urgcr6, of the citizen; D. bem ^^iirger, to the citizen; A. ben 33urger, the citizen. N. bag 33iici^lein, the Httle book ; G. beg33ud)tein§,ofthel.book; D. bem^Siid^tein, tothel. book; A. baa 33ucf)tein, the Httle book. N. bag (Sc^ndfjen, the httle son ; G. be6(So:^ndE)eng, ofthel.son; D. bcm<3o^nd^en, tothel. son; A. bag e ; ron or a.if Sciten. on the part of: -Sciten, from 5;ctte. The ending of the Genitive is sometimes, also, retained, when the word is under the government of a noun succeeding. Thus, '5)ie8 ift meinec ?$rauen vicbiueftev, tms is my wife's .si«ter. 278 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION, 40. § 15. IST. bie '^ixt'in, the shepherdess ; bie ^irtinnen, the sheperdesses ; G. ber ^ixtin, of the shepher- ber ^trtimten, of the shepher- dess; desses; D. ber ^irtm, to the shepher- ben ^irthmen, to the shepher- dess ; desses ; A. bie^irtin, the shepherdess, bie ^irtinnen, the shepherdesses. §15. Observations on the declension of common nouns. (1) Some have no singular : as, 5(eltern ((Eltern), parents. ^iijmn, ancestors. Qir^en, alps. Qlnnateit, first fruits. 33einfleiber, small- clothes. SSlatteru, small-pox. S3rte!Trf)aften, letters, papers, ^infiiufte, revenue, ^•afteu, Lent, fasts. ?yerien, Holidays, ^'uffta^feit, footsteps. ©eBriiber, brothers. ©efaHe, rents. @efci)h.^ifter, brothers and sisters, ©liebntaf en, the limbs, v-^iinbel, quarrels, ^efeit, dregs, yeast. J^cfen, trovrsers. Snftgnicn, marks, badges, .^albaunen, entrails. ^^cften and Unfofien, costs. .Rriegglaufte, events of war. !Ocute, * people, folks. 2'^afern and O^ot^eln, measles. ^olhn, whey. Oftern, Easter. ^fingften, Whitsuntide. SfJanfc, tricks. DfJelpreffalien, reprisals. (2d)ranfen, bounds. @:pefert, expenses. (2:portefn, fees. SiJolien, spoils. (Stubien, studies. ^IrciBer or ^reljer, husks, lees, ^riimmer, ruins. S'ruipipen, troops. 5Sei^nad^ten, Christmas. 3eitlnufte, events of the times. Binfen, interest of money. * Sente merely expresses plurality of persons. Li this it differs from 2)?eiis fd)eti, {human beings) which has regard to the kind or species, as also from 9)Kinnev iinen) which denotes particularly the sex. Those compounds, how- ever, of which, in the singular, >D^^llll forms the last part, take generally, in the plural, '^eu'e instead of iDidniier ; thus, Singular. *}lvLH'it^ntviuii, workman ; ^"behnann, nobleman ; .^aufnianu, merchant ; Sanbminat countryman; The distinctive difference between Sourc and 'lUtiinm-r may be forcibly shown by reference to the words (Sfcelfiiie and ^1)emdnner: (St)eleiite means married people ; (Shcmdmtev signifies married men, i. e. husbands. Plural 5Ivbeitt^Ieiire. workpeople. dbcHcure, noblemen, .^aufloiitt', merchants. Satibleute, countrj'people- OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION, «tC. § 15. 279 (2) Some have no plural. These are, a. Generic names of material substances; as, ba^ ®oIb, gold; ©ilBer, silver ; Sifcn, iron ; (fee. b. General terms and those expressive of abstract ideas ; as, fRawh, pillage : OiuI;in, glory ; bag 3Sie^, cattle ; 33eniunft, rea- son ; (Stclj, pride ; Jlcilte, cold ; tfec. c. Some names of plants ; as, ber Roi)i, the cabbage ; ^§0* J) fen, hops ; Jtreffe, cresses ; (fee. d. All infinitives employed as nouns, as also all neuter ad- jectives so employed; as, .^eBen, life; Q3erlangen, wish; ba^ SScip, white; cfec. e. Nouns, for the most part, denoting quantity, number, weight or measure ; '^ as, ^unb, bundle ; 5£)u|enb, dozen ; @rab, degree ; ^funb, pomid ; 3otI, an inch ; (fee. (3) Some, in the plural, have two forms ; conveying, however, in general, different, though kindred significations ; as, Singular. Plurals. ber 33anb, -^anbe, bonds, fetters; 33anber, f ribbons. bie SSanf, 33anfe, benches; ^^anfen, banks (of com- merce), ber 33 c gen, ^cgen, sheets of paper; ^ogen, arches, bows. ba§ S^ing, SMnge, things in general ; 5)inger, little creatures, ber 5^0 rn, Socmen, kinds of thorn ; S^orner, thorns (more than one), ber %^X^, ^ii^e, feet ; ?yuf e, feet (as meas- ures), bas ©effect, @eftd)te, visions, sights ; @eftd)ter, faces. ba§ «§onT, .§ erne, sorts of horn; Corner, horns (more than one). baS •^cU, ^ol^e, sorts of wood ; '^ofjer, pieces of wood. * It should be noted that words expres-siag quantity, number, weight or measure, even if quahfied by numerals signifying more than one, are rarely found in the plural. Thus, in German, we say, iicmi Jllarlcr, nine fathojns ; buiiffit (Sh■a^, a hundred degrees; &c., where, though the numeral expresses more than one, the noun of measure is still in the singular number. Note, however, that feminines ending in f and words denoting periods of time, as also the nam.es of coins, are, in general, excepted from the rule given in the note precedhig t The singular of tliis is baa {neuter) Q3anb. From ber 33rtnb, we have an- other form ; •-8au?e volumes. 280 FOREIGN NOUNS OP THE OLD DECLENSION. § 16. §17. ber !?abett, !?aben, shutters ; !?aben, shops. ba§ ?anb, $^anbe, regions ; Scinber, states, ba^ 9}?ai){, ^Jtaf)U, marks, seasons; ^JlaijUv, meals, ber 9J?ann, SJZcinncr, men; 5J?anncn, vassals, ber 9}ZDnb, 9}Zcnben, months ; SO^cnbe, planets, ber Dxt, OxU, places (any) ; Oertcr, places (parti- cular), bie ; as, ba§ ^afftr*; gen. ^afftDS; plur. ^offtoen; — secondly, titles of males in or; as, doctor; gen. ^octor^; plur. ^octoren; — thirdly, neuters ending in a I, i I and u m, which, also, often have i before the en of the plural; as, ^"a:pitnl, plm\ .Ra)?italien ; %o\]\i, plur. groffilien; ^tubium, plur. 6tubien; — fourthly, the following masculines, ^]kxM, 5)iamant, S'afan, ^apauit, Sm^ort, ^onful, 2)?ugfer, ^antcffel, ^rafeft, ^falm, gjuBin, ^U^at, %^ox, %xaltai, 3ing • to which add Snfeft, %imx, ^ronom, § e r r is used with a proper noun, it ig declined ; as; ^ixxxi ©c^Iegeli? ®cbict)te, not >§evr ^4)Iegelg ©etiic^te. EXAMPLES. § 25. § 26. 285 § 25. Suffixes used in forming adjectives. SUFFIXES. English equivalents. ^ixt [able, ible, He ;] implies ability; sometimes, dis- position. en [^^;] points to something ma^e q/" that expressed by the radical. l()aft \ive,ish;'\ denotes tendenc?/, or inclination ; also resemblance. i g [y, ful ;] represents a thing as being full of that denoted by the radical. id)t [y, ous, isk;^ marks similarity/ of nature, or character. I i d^ [ly, ish, able ;] implies likeness or sameness either of manner or degree ; also, ability. i f (^ \ish^ some, al ;] represents something as pertain- ing, or belonging to. fam [some, able ;] exTpresses inclination ; sometimes ability. h ax en ^aft id)t j 3)ienft6ar ; ( eglid) ; § 26. Examples. serviceable ; tributary, that can be seen ; visible. made of gold. leaden. inclined to virtue ; virtuous. resembling a master ; masterly. full of flowers ; abounding in flowers. flowery, that is, like flowers, woody, i. e. abounding in woods, saltish ; somewhat like salt. brotherly, or like a brother. sickly. sweetish ; somewhat sweet. movable. * The letters e v in tliis word are simply euphonic; while the e of e n ip dropped, also, for euphony {% 2. (8).) 286 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 27. {' 5tbif(^ ; earthly ; belonging to earth, tfrf) -! -^oetifd); poetical. ( 3«n!ifd^ ; * quarrelsome, r j QlrBeitfam ; incUiied io viork', diligent. ( i^olgfam ; inchned to follow (orders), i. e. obe- dient. § 27. Declension of adjectives. (1) Whether an adjective is to be inflected at all or not, depends wholly upon the way in which it is used ; for, when employed as a predicate, it is never declined ; f when as an at- tributive, almost always. Be the noun, therefore, masculine, feminine or neuter ; be it singular or plural ; if the adjective, to which it is applied, be used as i\ predicate (L. X. Note.), its form remains unchanged : thus, 3)er 5S}tann ift gut; the man is good. ^ie ^rau ift QUi) the woman is good. ^a§ »^inb ift ^\ii] the child is good. ^ie 93?amier ftnb gut; the men are good. ^le S^rauen ftnb g it t ; the women are good. 3(^ nenne ba§ ^inb f d) o tt ; I call the child beautiful. 3c^ nenne bie ^inber f d) o n ; I call the children beautiful. 5Der Rnalt, flug unb arttg -, J the boy prudent and polite. (2 ) The following adjectives (and a few others) are never used otherwise than as predicates, and are, of course, indeclinable ; atj^plb, averse. fetnb, hostile, angft, anxious. gf^a^t, hating, hated. an^eifd[)ig, bound by promise. gar, done ; cooked enough. 6creit, ready. gcing unb ge6e, current ; usual. Brad^, fallow. eingebent, mindful. * This is the ending commonly added to names of places pointing to things belonging to them ; as, enqlifdi, ffbu'ebtfd:) {% 5. Note VII ),_&c. If, however, a name be a compound, the suffix c v is used in place of i f c^ ; as, baS iL)(Cvfc&nrti,er i^ev; the Merseburg beer. t For the fonn of the adjective substantively employed after nic^tS or etma§, see Lesson 15. IV. X In this last example, the predicative use of the adjectives may be made more obvious, by completing the structure, thus, bcv Jliiabe, ivelcbec flag iiiib arttg ift; the boy who is prudent and poHte ; so, also, ^nfav, flttg nnb tci'\^Ux. RULE. § 28. § 29. 287 gch'oj^, cheerfui. geircirttg, aware. gram, grudge-bearing. l^aB^aft, possessing, or possessed of. l^anbgemein, skirmishing. irre, \\Tong ; erring. !unb, known. leib, distressing ; sorry. nvti), needful. nu|e, useful, quer^ crosswise, quitt, rid of. t^ei(f>aft, sharing. un:pa§, ill ; sick, ijertuftig, forfeiting. § 28. Declinable adjectives. (1) There are two declensions of adjectives, as there are two declensions of nouns : the Old and the New. In either of these, according to circumstances, are attributive adjectives declined. The followino- are the terminations of THE OLD DECLENSION. Singular. Plural Masc. Fern. NeuL For all genders. Nom. er. * e. e§.t Nom. e. Gen. e§ (en J), er. eg (en J). Gen. er. Dat. em. er. em. Dat. en. Ace. en. e. e§.t Ace. e. § 29. Rule. When the adjective stands either entirely alone before its substantive, or preceded and restricted by a word that is un- * Adjectives ending in e I, suffix ; as, ebel, noble ; ebrit, even ; Irtiitcv, pure ; c I', commonly drop the e upon receiving a eblev (not ebctcr) ^lami ; ebnev (not cbcnev) ^Q<:{\ ; huttreS (not laiiteveS) ®olb. Upon adding c n, the e of the termination (en) is dropped, while that of the root is retained ; as, ten ^eitevn (instead of (leitvcn) iUiorgen ; the serene morning. t In these two places {nom. and ace neut.) the termination e ^ is often omitted, when the adjective is under no special emphasis; as, fvtlt (for fal= US) aBaffev ; cold water. t Note that here (gen. sing. masc. and neut) it is now the common custom to adopt the vev\ instead of the old form; en, for the sake of euphony, being substituted for ee; as, nil ©nicf fvi''fbeu (not efi) '^robeS; apiece of fn^sh bread. In a few adverbial phrases, however, the old form is still generally used ; as, QUtcS iWutbo ; of good courage. 288 Rule. § 30. § 31. declined or indeclinable, it follows the Old form of declension thus, N. G. D. A. N. G. D. A. Masc. Sing. guter SSater, guteg (en) QSaterS, gutem 3Satcr, guten 3Sater. Plural. gutc 3Sater, guter ^aUx, guten SSatern, gute SSater. Fem. Sing. gute Mnikx, guter 9)?utter, guter DJiutter, gute 2)Zutter. Plural. gute SD'Ziitter, guter 9)?iitter, guten SWuttern, gute 3}iutter. iV«w?. Sing. gute 3 ©etb, guteS (en) Oetbea, gutem ©etbe, gute0 ®elb. Plural. gute ©etber, guter ©etber, guten ©elbern, gute ©elber. (1) The following are examples, in which the adjective in each instance is preceded by a word, either undeclined or in- declinable : (Etoa0 guter 2Bein, some good wine. ^id frlfd)e mi^, much fresh milk. 5Senig falteg Staffer, a little cold water. ©e^r gute 3??enfd)en, very good men. @enug rott)er 5Bein, enough red wine. %m\ lange 3a^re, five long years. 5iaerlei fiif e ^xnS^m^w/ar. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. For all genders. Nom. e. e. e. en. Gen. en. en. en. en. Dat. en. en. en. en. Ace. en. e. e. en. § 31. Rule. (1) When immediately preceded and restricted by the de- finite article, by a relative or demonstrative pronoun, or by an RULE. § 31. ^m indefinitB numeral (declined after the ancient form *), the ad- jective follows the new form of declension : thus, Masc. Sing. Fern, Siyig. bie gutc ^rau, G. &c^ gutcn ^?JZanne^, ber guten i^tau, D. bcm gutcn 5}Janue, bcr gutcn i^au, A. bcu giitcu 3}ianu. Plural. N. bie guten 9}Zanuer, G. ber guten -Il?anner, bie gute ^tau. Plural. bie guten S^rauen, bev guten ?yrauen, D. ben guten 5}?annern, ben guten g'vauen, ben guten .^inbent, A. bie guten 0}?itnner. bie guten S'rauen, bie guten ^inber. Neut. Sing. ba6 gute beS guten ,^inbe0, beni guten v^inbe, ba§ gute ^inb. Plural. bie guten v^inber, ber guten ^inber, N. G. D. A. Singular. biefer fd)One @arten, biefeg fd]onen @arten§ biefem fcl)Onen ©arten, biefen fdjonen ©arten, K. tre(d[)e fdione -^lume, G. n.^eld)er fdionen ^fume, D. ireld)er fd]Onen 33(ume, A. h^eld)e fd)One 33{ume^ Plural, Masculine. biefe fc^onen @arten. : biefer fd)Onen ©drten, biefen fd]onen ©cirten, biefe fc^onen ©cirten. Feminine. tioelc^e fd)Onen f SSIumen, roelc^er fd)onen ^Sfumen. tpelc^en fd)onen 33lumen. trelc^e fd)Onen f SSlumen, * 5) a §, however, the neuter of the definite article, differs from the old form, ill having the ending a §, instead of c s ; so also in compounds ; as, bvtsfelbe, the same ; tasjcuii^e, that. The other words referred to in the rule, are biefer, this. alter, ereiy ; all. jeiiev, that. etiiujcv, some; several, ivelrfjcr, who ; which. etiidiev, some ; several. folc^ev, such. ntnnc^er, many a, jebev, jeiiltc^ier, each. Three of these, it may further be noticed, viz. tt-Trcfjcv, ii^elcfte, melc&eg, which ; fp((^er, fold)c, fo!d)c§, such; and mand)er, maiut;e, maiicheS, many a ; some- times appear without the terminations of declension : in v^'hich case the ad- jective assumes the suffixes denoting gender, &.c. Thus, manct) f4)Dite6 ^Bilb, many a beautiful picture. t With many authors it is the custom to reject the final n of the nom. and ace. plural of adjectives preceded by ftuti^e, etltcbe, mebrere, mand?e, cicie, die, iveldje, foldse and n-entgc; as, einige b eutf c^c Jtaiier ; some Germau emperors. 13 290 MIXED DECLENSION. § 32. Singular. Plural. Neuter. K mand^eg fd^one i^elb, mand)e fd^oncn ?^elber. G. mand)eS fd^onen ?^elbeS, mand)er fd)onen ^^elber. D. mand)cm fdjoneit i5^elbe, mand)eu fd)onen g^elbern. A. mandje^ fdjone ?5'elb, manege fdjonen ^elber. § 32. Mixed declension. (1) We have seen that an adjective, when standing alone before its noun, is varied according to the ancient declension ; and this, because the gender, number and case of the noun being very imperfectly indicated by the form of the noun it- self, the terminations of the old declension, which, in this re- spect, are more complete, seem necessary in order the more fully to point out these particulars : thus, gut e r 9D?ann, good man ; gut e %xdufern. A. unfer gutee <$au6. unfre guten ^aufer. 292 FURTHER OBSERVATIONS ON ADJECTIVES. § 34. Singular. Plural. N. bit gutc 5)tuttcr, if)x gutcn Tlutkx. G. bciner (ber*) gutcn 5)Ziitter, euer giiten 5}Zatter. D. bir guten ?}Zuttcr, end) giitcit 9)^"ittern. A. bid) gute 53hittcr, m6:) guten 9}?utter. § 34:. Further observatioxs on adjectives. (1) When several consecutive adjectives come before and qualify the same noun, each has the same form, which accord- ing to the preceding rules, it would have, if standing alone; as, guter, xotijn, lautrer SBein, good, red, pure wine ; bie reife, fd)Onc, gute B^Tud)t, the ripe, beautiful, good fruit. (2) But when of two adjectives which relate to the same noun, the second forms with the noun an expression for a single idea, which the frst qualifies as a whole, the second adjective takes (except in the nom. sing, and in nom. and ace. plural) the new form of declension ; as, mit trctfn e m li^ei^ e n ©anb, with dry white sand ; where u'hite sand, that is, sand which is white, is said also to be dry. (3) When two or more adjectives terminating alike, precede and qualify the same noun, the ending of the former is occa- sionally omitted ; such omission being marked by a hyphen ; as, ein vctf)= (for rctl^eo) unb rt.>eif e^ ®eficf)t, a red and white face; bie fdjiuar^^rctli^gclbene S^-at;ne, the black red golden banner. (4) Participles are declined after the manner of adjectives : thus, bcr gelleBte -^ruber, the beloved brother ; gen. be0 gelieB* ten -^rubevy, (fee (5) Adjectives, in German, as in other languages, are, by ellipsis, often made to serve in place of nouns. They then be- gin with a capital letter, and, excepting that they retain the forms of declension peculiar to adjectives, are in all respects treated as nouns. Their gender is made apparent either by their terminations or by the presence of an article or other defini- tive ; as, ein 2)eutfc^er, a German ; biefer 5Deutfdje, this Ger- * Note that after the personal pronouns, in the genitive case, the article • must be ueed ; as, bettier, ber guten -UZutter ; of thee, the good mother. EUPHONIC CHANGES. § 35. § 30. 293 man; bic ^cutfrfje, the Gonnan woman ; ba'3 (Sdjonc, the beauti- ful ; fcaS ©lite, the good; that is, that ivhich is beautiful ; that which is good. So, also, ba§ 5Beif, the white ; bag ©rfut, the green ; ba§ S^ctf), the red ; &c. (G) When of two adjectives preceding a noun, the first is employed as an adverb to qualify the second, the former is not declined : thus, ciu g a n l iteueS ^auS, a house entirely new : not cin g a n 3 e § neueS >§aug, which would mean, an en- tire, neiv house. % 35. Comparison of adjectives. (1) In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are commonly expressed by means of the suffixes e t and e ft : thus. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. tiy i I b, wald ; if i I b e r, wilder ; ti;) i T b e ft, wildest. f c ft, firm ; f e ft e r, firmer ; f e ft e ft, firmest, b r e i ft, bold ; b r e i ft e r, bolder ; b r e i ft e ft, boldest. I D §, loose ; 1 f e r, looser ; iG\t ft, loosest. n a ^, w^et ; n a f f e r, wetter ; n a f f e ft, w^ettest. r a f cf), quick ; r a f cf} e r, quicker ; r a f d) e ft, quickest, ft r §, proud ; ft 1 J e r, prouder ; ft 1 5 e ft, proudest. § 36. Euphonic changes. (1) When the positive does not end in b, t, jl, 0, f, \^. or I, the e of the superlative suffix (e ft) is omitted ; as, B t a n f, bright ; B I a n f e r, brighter ; hianl% brightest. n a r, clear ; flare v, clearer ; f I a r ft, clearest, rein, pure ; r e i n e r, purer ; r c i n ft, purest, f d^ n, fine ; f df) n e r, finer ; f cf) n ft, finest. (2) AVhen the posirive ends in e, the e of the comparative suffix (e r) is dropped ; urs, W e i f e, wise ; ir c i f c r, wiser ; ixu i f e ft, wisest. m ii b c, w^eary ; m ii b c r, more weary ; m i'l b e ft, most weary. 294 DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. § 37. (3) When the positive ends in el, en or er, the e of these terminations is commonly omitted, upon adding the com- parative or superlative suffix ( e r or ft) ; as, c b e I, noble ; c b I e r (not ebeter), nobler ; e b e 1 fl, noblest. Ire cf en, dry; trocfner (nottrocfener), drier; trocf en ft, driest. t a ^ f e r, b rave ; t a ^ f r e r (not ta^ferer), braver ; t a ^ f e r ft, bravest. (4) When the positive is a monosyllable, the vowel (if it be capable of it) commonly takes the Umlaut, in the compara- tive and superlative ; as, a 1 1, old ; alter, older ; a 1 1 e ft, oldest, g r B, coarse ; grower, coarser ; g r o B jl, coarsest, flag, wise ; H ii g e r, wiser ; H u g ft, wisest. (o) Exceptions. From this last rule, however, must be excepted nearly all those adjectives containing the diphthong a u : as, laut (loud), tauter, I a n t e ft ; rau^ (rough), r au^ er, V a u B e ft. So, also, the following : Bunt, variegated. fnci^^, tight. fatt, satisfied, fabe, insipid. la^m, lame. f^Iaff^ loose. faf;l, fallow. la^, weary. fc^lanf, slender. faI6, fallow. Io§, loose. fi^i^off, rugged. ftad), flat. matt, tired. ftarr, stiff, fro^, glad. nadt, naked. ftotj, proud, gerabe, straight. l^latt, flat. ft^flff^ stiff; tight. Qlatt, smooth. !ptum:p, clumsy. ftumnt, dumb. f)o% hollow. ro^, raw. ftum^^f, blunt, l^olb, amiable. runb, round. toll, mad. fa^l, bald. fad^t, slow. i?oK, full, farg, stingy. fanft, gentle. So^nx, tame. § 37. Declension of comparatives and superlatives. (1) Comparatives and superlatives are subject to the same laws of declension, that regulate adjectives in the positive. Thus, after adding to fdjon, fair, the suffix (er), we get the comparative form ^d^onn, fairer ; which is inflected in the three ways : thus, UECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. § 37. 295 a. OLD FORM. ; Sinffidar Plural Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. N. frf)Oncrcr, C, e^v fd)6ner e. G. frf)Oncr c § (en), cr, eS (en). fd)onerer. D. fd)Oucr c m, ct, em, fd)oner e n. A. fd) oner en, f/ eg. fd;oner e. h. NEW FORM. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. N. bcr frf)oneve, (bie) -^, {^.\^:>) -e. bie fdjoneren. G. bc§ fd)6ner e n, (Der) -e n, (be§) -en. ber fd) oner en. D. bem fd) oner en, (ber) -en, (bem) -en, ben fd) oner en. A. ben fd;oner e n, (bie) -^, (ba§) -e. bie fd)oner e n. c. MIXED FORM. Masc. Sing. Fern. Smo-. Neut. Sing. N. unfer * fd)oner e r, (unfere) -e, (nnfer) -c g. G. nnfere§ fdioner e n, (nnferer) -e n, (unfereS) -e n. D. unferem fd)Oner e n, (unferer) -e n, (unferem) -e n. A. unferen fd^oner c n, (unfere) -e, (unfer) -e S. Plural for all N". unfer e fd)oner e n. G. unfer e r fd)6ner e n. D. unfer en fd^oner e n. A. unfer e fd)oner e n. (2) So likewise the superlative. In the superlative of the old form, however, the vocative case only is used. Thus we have in the a. OLD FORM. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. G. D. A. V. lieBjl e r 33ater ! f t^euerft e ©d^irefter ! 3 J ^ fd;onjl e § Jtinb ! * Sometimes the e in the endings of pronouns and comparatives, is omitted, or transposed : thus instead of unfti-e5 Kroner e ii, we may say uiifcv g f(.to= nev n, or iitifre-^, Kbijiifin. t Heretofore the vocative has not been set do%vn in the paradigms, because it is, in form, always like the nominative. 296 OBSERVATIONS. § 38. Plural G. D. A. V. Mfl e mux I Plural. 6. NEW FORM, Plural. ^ Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. JST. ber fd^onfl e^ (bic) -e, (ba^) --e, G. bc§ fcf)onft e n, (ber) -e n, (beg) -e n, D. bcm fd)onft e n, (ber) -e n, (bem) -e n, A. ben fd^onft e n, (bie) -e, {^Oi^) -t. fdf^onjl e t^inb e r ? Plural, For all genders^ bie fd^onft e n. ber fc^onft e n. ben fc^onft e n. bie fd^onft e n. Masc. Sing. N. unfer fdjonfi e r, G. imfereg frf)onft e n, D. xtnferem fdjonfl e n, A. unferen fd^onft e n, (unfer) -e 0. (unfere^) -e n. (unferem) -e n. (unfer) -e g. MIXED FORM. i^ew. Sing. (unfere) -e, (unferer) -e n, (unfer er) -e n, (unfere) -e, Plural for all genders. iN". unfere fd)onP: e n. G. unferer fd^onft e n. D. unferen fd^onfi e n. A. unfere fd)onji e n. § 38. Observations. (1) In place of the regular form of the superlative, prece- ded by the article and agreeing with the noun in gender, num- ber and case, we often find a circumlocution employed ; which consists in the dative case singular of the new form preceded by the particle a m : thus, bie %aqt ftnb ini SSinter am fiirje* fien, the days are shortest in the winter. The explanation is easy : a m, compounded of an (at), and bem, the dative of ber (the)., signifies at the. Translated literally, therefore, the sentence above will be : The days in winter are at the shortest; that is, at the shortest (limit) : where, in the German, fi'irje* IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE FORMS. § 39. 297 flen agrees with some noun in the dative understood, which is governed by a n. But the phrase is used and treated just as any reguhir superlative form would be under the same circum- stances. In like manner, auf (upon) and ^u (to) combined respectively with the article (auf b a f> and 5 u be ni), and producing the forms aufo and jum, are employed with adjec- tives in the superlative : thus, auf§ fdjonfte cmgerid}tet, arranged upon the finest {plan) ; jum fcf)onften, to, or according to the finest {manner). These latter forms, however, are chiefly em- ployed to denote eminence, rather than to express comparimn. Freely rendered, therefore, aufy fd)Onfte and jum fd)Ouften will be : very finely, most heautifuUy or the like. (2) Sometimes a\itx (of all) is found prefixed to superla- tives to give intensity of meaning : as, ber aller6e]le, the best of all, i. e. the very best ; bie atlerfdicnfte, the handsomest of all, i. e. the very handsomest, (3) When mere eminence, and not comparison, is to be ex- pressed, the words auf erji (^extremely) and t?od)ft {highest) are employed : as, biei ift eine auf erfl frf)Cne *^Iume, this is a very beautiful flower. § 39. Irregular and defective forms. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. gut, good; Beffer, better; cejl or am Beftcrt, best. ^odf), high; ^O^er, higher ; :^od)ft or am ^odiften, highest. naf?e, near ; nal)er, nearer ; nad)ft or am nadijicn, nearest. i)iel, much ; me^r, more ; meift or am mcijicn, most. n?emg, little ; ; niinber, less ; minbeft or am minbejlen, least. grof, great: grof er, greater : grof t or am gri)f ten, greatest !6atb, early ; e^er, earlier ; erft or am erften, earhcst. wanting. tcanting. Ie|t or am Ie|ten, latest. y> auf ere, outer ; auferjl, uttermost. n inner, inner ; innerft, innermost. jj ijorber, fore ; Dcrberft, foremost. jj Winter, hinder; ^intcrft, hindermost. »> D:6er, upper; cSerft, uppermost. n unter, under : 13* unterjl, undermost. 298 ADJ12CTIVES COMPARED BY MEANS OF ADVERBS. § 40. § 41. § 40. Observations. (1) Note that f)od) [high), in the comparative, drops^ while na^ {near), in the superlative, assumes the letter c : thus, ^od), comp. :^o^er; nai), comp. nailer, sup. ncic^fi (2) That nie^r (more), the comparative of i)iel, has two forms in the plural, me^r e or md)X ere; and that the latter (nie^rere) is the more common one. It has the use and mean- ing of the English word several : as, 3ii) \af) me^rere 6oIbaten, I saw several soldiers. (3) That the superlative of gro^ (great) is contracted into QXO^t (4) That erft, the superlative of e^er (earlier), is a con- traction for el; eft. (5) That from ber erfte (the eoj-Uest or first) and ber Ie|te (the latest or last), are formed the correlative terms erfterer, the foi^mer, and le^terer, the latter. (6) That the last six words in the. hsl (§ 39) are formed from adverbs, and are comparatives in form rather than in fact. § 41. Adjectives compared by means of adverbs. (1) When the degrees of comparison are not expressed by suffixes, the adverbs nie^r {more) and am meiften (jnost) are employed for that purpose : thus, Positive . Comparative. Superlative. angft, anxious ; mz^x angft ) am meiften angfi. ■Dereit, ready ; me^r Bereit ; am meiften Bereit. eingebenf, mindful ; me^r eingebenf ; am meiften etnge* ben!, feinb, hostile ; me^r feinb ; am meiften feinb. gcingunb geBe, aerre?2^; mcBr gang unb geBe; am meiften gcing unb geBe. gar, done ; cooked ; mii-x gar ; am meiften gar. gram, averse ; me^r gram.; am meiften gram, irre, astray ; me^r trre ; am meiften irre. funb, pnhlic ; me^r funb ; am meiften funb. THE CARDINAL NUMDERS. § 42, § 43. § 44. 299 leib, sorrij ; md)x leib - am mcifien (cib. nu|, useful ; ine^r mi| ; am melften nu|. red)t, n'^A? ; mt^x red)t ; am meiften red}t. t^eiU;aft, partaking ; me^r ti)eUf)aft ; am meiften tl;el(* ^aft. § 42. Observations. The above method of comparison, -which is commonly called the compound foi'tn, is chiefly used in cases : (1) Where a comparison is instituted between two different qualities of the same person or thing : as, er ift me^r liiftig aU traurig, he is more merry than sad ; er ii^ar me^r glutflid) aU ta)3 fer, he was more fortunate than brave. (2) Where the adjectives, like those in the list above, are never used otherwise than as predicates. (3) Where the addition of the suffixes of comparison would oflFend against euphony, as in the superlative of adjectives end- ing in \\d); thus, BarBarifd). § 43. THE I^UMERALS. In German, as in other languages, the numerals are classi- fied according to their signification. Among the classes thus produced, the first, in order, is § 44. The cardinal numbers. The cardinal numbers, whence all the others are derived, are those answering definitely to the question : '■'■How many ? " They are Gin0 (ein, eine, ein) 1. It^xi 10. potx 2. elf 11. bvei 3. 2ti>oIf 12. uier 4. breijel^n 13. fiinf 5. Sikxiiijxi 14. fed)3 6. fiinfje^rt 15. fieBen 7. fed)5er;n 16. a^t 8. fteben,^e:^n or fteBje^^n 17. ttCWtt 9. ad^tje^^n 18. 300 THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. § 44. mmitf^n 19. ^unbert 100. jhjan^ig 20. :^unbert unb einS 101. ein unb jtranjig 21. '^unbert unb gn?ei 102. iwt'i unb §h)an§ig jc. 22. ^unbert unb brei jc. 103. breiftg 30. jtrei ^unbert 200. ein unb brei^ig 31. brei ^unbert 300. git?el unb bteif ig :c. 32. taufenb 1000. ijierjig 40. Itvd taufenb 2000. funfgig 50. brei taufenb 3000. fed)3ig (not fcd^a^tg) 60. ge^ taufenb 10,000. ftebengig or fiefijig 70. ^unbert taufenb 100,000. ac^ytjlg 80. eine mmon 1,000,000. ncunjig 90. imi Miiidmn 2,000,000. (1) Observe that the cardinals are, for the most part, indeclinable. (2) @in, (one) however, is dechned throughout Hke the indefinite article. It is, in fact, the same word with a different use ; and is distinguished from it, in speaking and writing, only by a stronger emphasis and by being usually written with a capital initial. This is the form which it has, when immediately before a noun, or before an adjective quahfying a noun. Thus : Masculine. Feminine. •j^ j (Sin SO^ann, (Sine S^rau, ' ( Sin guter 9}?ann, (Sine gute f^rau, ^ j (BimB SD^anneg, Siner O'rau, * ] SineS guten ^anm§, (Siner guten ^^an^ Neuter. (Sin ^inb. (Sin gutea ^inb. eineS ^inbeg. S'ineg guten^in* beS; &c. (3) In other situations, ein follows the ordinary rules of declension : thus in the a. Old Form. N. einer, cine, eineS, one. G. eineg, einer, eineS, b. New Form. of one, &c. N. ber eine, bie eine, ba§ eine. the one. G. be0 einen, ber einen, be0 einen, of the one, cfec, ORDINAL NUMBERS. § 45. 301 c. Mixed Form. N mcitt elner, mcinc cine, niein eineS, my one. * G. nieineS einen, nulner elnen, nteineg einen, of my one, &c. (4) Qwd {two) and brei (three), when the cases are not sufficiently pointed out by other words in the context, are decHned : thus, N. Q)vd, f two, bret, three. G. Bi'P^'i^^*/ of two, breier, of three. D. B^^^fif", to or for tAvo, breien, to or for three. A. Qwd, two, brei, three. (5) All the rest of the cardinals, when employed substan- tively, take en in the dative : except such as already end in these letters; as, idf) ^a6e e0 ^i'mfen gefagt, I have told it to five (persons). (6 ) c§ u n b e r t and 5' a u f e n b are often employed as col- lective (neuter) nouns, and regularly inflected ; as, nom. baS »§unbert/ gen. beg ^unbert^, plm-al (nom.) bie ^^unberte. 9)? iU I i n is, in like manner, made a noun (feminine,) and is, in the singular always preceded by the article ; as, ^ine ^^tinton, a milhon. (7) In speaking of the cardinals, merely as figures or cha- racters, they are all regarded as being in the feminine gender : as, bie (StnS, the one, bie 3^d, the two, bie 3)rei, the three ; where, in each case, the word, 3af)l, (number) is supposed to be understood : thus bie (_3<'S]i) brei, the (number) three. § 45. Ordinal Numbers. (1) The ordinal numbers are those, which answer to the question: " Which one of the series?'' They are given below, ■ * In relation to the numeral e i n note, further, these three things : 1. That in merely counting, it has the termination of the neuter, with c, however, omitted ; as c i u §, ^ w e t, b v c i, one, two, three, &c. 2. That e i ii may be used in the plural, when the desi^r is to distmguish classes of indi\adual3 ; as, bie 6"inen, the ones, bev (Jincn, 0/ the ones, 6jc. just as, in English, we say, the ones, the others. 3. That e i 11, unlike the English one, cannot be employed in a suppletoiy way, to hll the place of a noun: thus, we cannot say, in German, a new one, a good one, b^c. In such cases, tue adjective stands alone. t In place of B \i^ e i, bnbc {both which is declined like an adjective in the plural, is often employed ; as ^ct^e ■Jliuien, both eyes; bie betben -^-'Viiticv, botln the brothers The neuter b c u c I never refers to persons. L. 33 I. 302 ORDINAL NUMBERS. § 45. for tlie purposes of comparison, side by side with the cardinals, and in the form required, by the definite article preceding ; for the ordinal numbers are regularly inflected according to the rules already given for the declension of adjectives. CARDINALS. ORDINALS. (Sin5 (ein^ eitte, ein) 1. ber crfte (not ber einte), the first. imi 2. „ jtreite (also ber anbere), the second. brei 3. „ britte (not brelte), the third. iner 4. „ ijierte, the fourth. fiinf - 5. „ fi'mfte, the fifth. fe^§ 6. „ fed)6te, the sixth. fteBen 7. „ fteBente, the seventh. a&!t 8. „ ad-)U (not ad)tte), the eighth. neun 9. „ neunte, the ninth. jef)n 10. f, ^cBnte, the tenth. elf 11. „ elfte, the eleventh. iwUf 12. „ jn^olfte, the twelfth. brei5e(;n 13. „ breije'^nte, the thirteenth. inerje^n 14. ,, inerje^nte, the fourteenth. funf^eBn 15. „ fiinf^c^nte, the fifteenth. fedj^e^n 16. „ fed)^e:^nte, the sixteenth ; &c f{eBen^ef)n or fteBjefm 17. „ fieBenje^ntc or fieB3e"^nte. adjtje^n 18. „ aditjeBnte. neunje^n 19. „ neunjeBnte. ^tran^ig 20. „ S^anjtgfte. ein unb ^rt^anJig 21. „ ein unb jn^anjtgfie. ^it^ci unb wan^tg :c. 22. „ i\im unb jn^an^igfte ic. breimg 30. „ breifigjie. ein unb brei^ig 31. „ ein unb breipgfie. ^irei unb brei^ig k. 32. „ 5rt?ei unb breif igjle jc. iHcr^ig 40. „ luev^igfte. fiinnig 50. ,/ funftigjle. fedi^ig (not fedj^jig^ €0. „ ffd)5tgfte. fteBenjig or fieBug 70. „ fteBen^igfte or fieBjigjle. ad)t5ig 80. „ acBty.gfte. neunjig 90. „ neuttjigfte. NUMERALS. § 46. 303 l^unbert 100. tcr t^unbcrtj^e. l^unbcrt unb eln§ 101. „ Inmtcrt iiub erjie. I;unbcrt unb jlret 102. „ fjiutbert unb jtinnte. ^unbcrt unb brci k. 103. „ l^unbert unb britte. iwd (nln^^c^•t 200. „ jtinnlnnibcrtfte. brci (Mint^ert 300. „ brci(;unbert[te. taufcnb 1000. „ taufcnbfte. ixvd taufenb 2000. „ ^ireitaufenbfie. brei taufenb 3000. „ breitaufenbfte. l^hi taufenb 10,000. „ geBntaufenbfte. ^unbcrt taufenb 100,000. „ :^unberttaufenbfte :c. (2) Observe that, in the formation of the ordinals from the cardinals, a certain law is observed : viz. from jirei (two) to neun5cf)n {nineteen) the corresponding ordinal, in each case (britte and a6.)ii excepted), is made by adding the letters tc; as, p^d, two ; jft^ei t c, second ; i?ier, four ; i)ier t e, fourth, &c. Beyond that number (nineteen), the same effect is pro- duced by adding ft c ; as, jiranjig, twenty ; jtranjig ft e, twen- tieth ; &c. (Srfte is from e^er {before). (3) Note, also, that ber anbere {the other') is often used in place of ber jit^eite ] but only in cases Avhere two objects only are referred to. (4) In compou^-id numbers, it must be observed that the last one only, as in English, bears the suffix {it or \h] ; but in this case, the units usually precede the tens : thus, ber i^ier unb Jit^an^iv] jl; e, the four and twentie^A. (5) We have, also, a sort of interrogative ordinal, formed from irie {hoiv) and Diel {much), which is used when we wish to put the question : Wliich of the number ? as, ber itnetiielftc ijl ^eute ? what day of the month is to-day ? 5)a6 triel>ielfte ijl e§ ? how many does that make ? § 46. Distributive I^umerals. The distributives, which answer to the question : ''How many at a time ? " are formed, as in English, by coupling car- dinals by the conjunction unb ; or by using before them the particle j e {ever : at a time) ; thus, 304 NUMERALS. § 47. § 48. § 49. gtrei unb jtrei, two and two, or je pizx, two at a time ; brei uub brei, three and three, or jc bret, three at a time, &c. § 47. Multiplicative Numerals, The multiplicatives, which answer to the question : '•'■How mamj fold ? " are formed from the cardinals by adding the suffix fad^ {fold) or fcilttg (having folds) ; thus, einfad) or etnfalttg, * onefold or single ; jtreifad^ or jireifciltig, twofold or having two folds ; breifadi or breifalttg, threefold or treble ; iJierfad^ or inerfciaig, fourfold or having fom- folds, &c. § 48. Variative Numerals. Variatives, which answer to the question ; "0/ how many kinds ? " are formed from the cardinals by affixing t e i (a sort or kind)^ the syllable e r being inserted for the sake of eupho- ny; thus, einerlei, of one kind ; iJiererlei, of four kinds ; ^ireierlei, of two kinds ; fiinferlei, of five kinds ; breierlei, of three kinds ; mand)erlei, of many kinds ; &c. § 49. DiMiDiATivE Numerals. The dimidiatives, which answer to the question : " Which (i. e. which of the numbers) is hut a half^ " are formed from the ordinals by annexing the word ^alB {half) ; thus, gtDclte^alB, f the second a half, that is, one whole and a half; 11^ britte^aI6, third a half, i. e. two wholes and a half ; 2-|-. t)ierte^alB, the fourth a half i. e. three ivholes and a half ; 31; &c. * Ginfcilticj is applied to what is simple, artless or silly. t Instead of ^weitelmfb, the word in common use is atibertbalt: the part rt u b e r t being from b e v a u b e v c, the second. The word would be an= bcr e ^alb ; but the final c is exchanged for a t, probably, for the sake of as- similating it, in form, to the rest of the words of this class NUMERALS. § 50. § 51. 305 § 50. IxEnATivE Numerals. The iteratives, which answer to the question : *' Hoiu often or how many times ? " are formed from cardinals and from in- definite numerals, by the addition of the word mal * {time') ; thus, e i It m a t, one time ; once ; D i e r ni a I, four times ; fit It f ni a I, five times ; S i^'' ^ i nt a I, two times ; twice ; b r c i 111 a I, three times ; f e cf} § tit a I, six times ; i e b e nt a I, each time ; i; i c I m a I, many times ; A"c. § 51. DiSTIXCTIVES. (1) The name, distinctives, has been applied to a class of ordinal adverbs, which answer to the question : " In what j^lcice in the series ? " and which are formed by alBfixing e it § to the ordinal numbers : thus, e r ft e n §, first or in the first f it it f t e n §, fifthly ; place ; 5 lr> e 1 1 e n §, secondly ; f e c^ § t e n C\ sixthly ; b r i 1 1 c n S, thirdly ; f i e B t c it 6, seventhly ; t) i e r t e n §, fourthly ; a d^ t e n S^ eighthly ; &c. (2) Under the name, distinctives, ma}^, also, be set down a class of numeral nouns, formed from the cardinals by the addi- tion of the sufiaxes e r, i it and ling, which are used to desig- nate one arrived at, belonOTcor to, or valued at a certain num- ber : thus, art ^ " which are formed by affixing to the ordinals the suffix t e I f (part) : thus, 5) r i 1 1 e r, a third ; © i e B e n t e I, a seventh , 35 i c r t e I, a fourth ; %d)tt I, an eight ; i^ u n f t e I, a fifth ; 0? e u it t e I, a ninth ; e n i g e r, less ; j however, see above. g e n u g, enough ; sufficient ; never declined ; @etb genug, mo- ney enough. I a u t e r. merely ; only; never declined ; lauter ^u^fcr, copper only or nothing but copper. n i cE) t ^, nothing, % 54. PRONOUNS. ^ In German, as in other languages, will be found a number of those words, which, for the sake of convenience, are em- ployed as the direct representatives of nouns. These are the pronouns. They are divided, according to the particular offices which they perform, into six different classes : viz. : Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Determinative, Relative and Inter- rogative. § 55. Table of the Pronoun's. Personal Pronouns, Possessive Pronouns. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural 3d), I. aSir, We. ^zm, My. Itnfer, Our. 3)u, Thou. 5^r, Ye. £)ein, Thy. Suer, Your. dx, He. ©ie, They. ©eln, His. 3^r, Theh. @ie, She. (Sie, They. 3^r, Her. (gg, It. eie, They. (Biin, Its. Indefinite Pronouns. Reflexive and Pecijjrocal ^a\\, one ; a certain one. Pronouns. Semanb, some one ; somebody. ©id), Himself, Herself, O^iemanb, no one ; nobody. Itself, Themselves. 3ebermann, every one ; everybody. ©inanber, one another. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 56. 309 Demonstrative Pronouns. Determinative Pronouns. 3)iefcr, This. 3)ev, That, That one, He. Scner, That. iDcrjcnige, That, That person. S^cr, This or That. 3)erfelbe, The same. (SelBlger, The same. (Soldier, Such. Relative Pronouns. Interrogative Pronouns. aBctrf)cr, Who, Which. SBer, Who ? n?og ? What ? ^cr, That. aSeld^er, Who ? Which ? SKcr, Who, He or she, who 3BaS fiir, What sort of ? or that. § 56. Personal pronouns. There are five personal pronouns; namely, td>, (/) which represents the sjpeaker and is, therefore, of the jirst person ; bu, [thou) which represents the hearer or person addressed, and is therefore, of the second person ; and cr, {he) \xt, (she) and e6, (if) representing the person or thing merely spoken of, and, therefore, of the third person. They are declined thus Singular. Plural First person. isr. idi, I. \c\x, we. G. meiner, mein, of me. unfer, of us. D. niir, to me. ung, to us. A. mid|, me. Second person. un§, us. N. bu, thou. i:^r, ye or you. G. beiner, bein of thee. eucr, of you. D. bir, to thee. tui^, to you. A. bid), thee. cud^, you. Third person, Masc. N. cr, he. fte, they. G. feincr, fein, of him. i^rer, of them. D. i^m, to him. t^ttcit, to them. A i^n, him. fte, them. 310 REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 57. Singular. Plural. Third person. Fe m. Is. fte, she. fte, they. G. i^rer, of her. if}rer, of them. D. i^r, to her. i^nen, to them, A. fie, her. fte, them. Third person, Neul. N. e§, it. fie, they. G. fe liter, of it. t^rer, of them. D. i^m, to it. i^nen, to them, A. eg, it. fie, them. § 57. Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. (1) The genitives, mein, beln, fein, are the earher forms. The others (meiner, betner, feiuer) are the ones now commonly used. (2) When construed with the prepositions §aI6en, tregen, and um-irillen, (signifying for the sake of, on account of) these genitives are united with the preposition by the euphonic letters, et, or (in case of iinfer and euer) simply t. Thus : ntetitettregeit, on account of me ; uiii iinferettrillen, on account of us, d:c. (3) The personal pronouns of the third person, when they represent things without life, are seldom, if ever, used in the dative, and never in the genitive. In such instances, the corres- ponding case of the demonstrative ber, bie, ba§, is employed : thus, beffen, (of this,) instead of fettter; and bereit, {of these,) instead of i^rer. (4) The word felBfl: or felBer {self, selves) may, also, for the greater clearness or emphasis, be added not only to the pro- nouns, but even to nouns. Thus ; 3cf) felBft, / myself \ bie ^^vX% fe[5ft, the people themselves. (5) Here, too, observe, that the personal pronouns have, also in the plural, a reciprocal force. Thus : fte Ite&en fid), they love one another. But as fie UeBcu ndi, for example, might REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 57. oil signify, tlicy love themselves, the Germans, also, use the word cinanbcr, {one another) about which there can be no mistake : as, fie (IcBen einanber. (§ 60.) (6) In polite conversation, the Germans use the third per- son idural, where we use the second. Thus: ^d) l;at)e ®ie go* fc^en, I have seen you. To prevent misconception, the pronouns thus used are written with a capital letter ; as, idf) banfe 3(;nen, I thank [them) you. A similar sacrifice of Grammar to (sup- posed) courtesy, may be found in our own language. For we constantly use the 'plural for the singular ; thus : "' How are you'V^ instead of " How art thou?'' The Germans proceed just one step beyond this, and besides taking the plural for the singular, take the third person for the second. With them, our famihar salutation "How do you do ?" would be, " How do they do ?" (7) It must be observed, however, that the second person singular, $5)u, is always as in English, used in addressing the Supreme Being. It is, also, the proper mode of address among warm friends and near relatives. But it is, also, used in angry disputes, Avhere little regard is paid to points of politeness. The second person plural is employed by superiors to their inferiors. The third person singular er, fie, is used in the like manner, that is, by masters to servants, &c. (8) The neuter pronoun (c§) of the third person singular, like the words it and there in English, is often employed, as a nominative, both before and after verbs, singular , and plural, as a mere expletive ; that is, more for the purpose of aiding the sound than the sense of the sentence. In this use, moreover, it is construed with words of ail genders. Thus: (S§ ift ber 2)?ann, it is the man ; (Ss ift ble B^rau, it is the woman ; (S§ ftnb 9}?anner, they are men ; (Ss boniicrt ; it thunders ; ©g folgtcn inele, tliere followed many, &c. iliMJefiat, her majesty, &c. (Juer was formerly written eiver, and the syllable (5m. as an abbreviation is used in address to persons of high rank, with the verb in the plural. Ex. ©10. vDJajeficit knh?n befoMen, your majesty has ordered. t Note that in decUning unfer and ciier, the i, before v, is often struck out: thus, unfrev (for imfcrcr), unfre (for uiifevt). unfrc§ (for unfeveS), &,c eurer (for fucrei), e«tf (for euere>, fvttt^ (for euereS), Sui POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 58. 813 Singular. Plural Masc. Fern. Neui. For all genders. N. me in, meine, mcin 3 meine. G. meiue^3, meiner, meineS ; meiner. D. lucinem, meiner, meinem ; meincn. A. me in en, meine, mein • meine. (4) When, however, these pronouns are absolute^ that is, when they stand alone, agreeing with a noun understood and demanding a special emphasis, the terminations proper to the three places noted above, are of course affixed : thus, biefer ^nt ifi mein e x, nid)t bein c r, this hat is mine^ not thine ; bie*' fe^ -^xid) ift mein e &, this book is mine. (o) But when a possessive pronoun absolute is preceded by the definite article, it then follows the New form of declen- sion : thus, Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neui. For ail genders. N. ber meine, bie meine, "i^a^ meine j bie meinen. G. be§ meinen, ber meinen, be§ meinen • ber meinen. D. bent meinen, ber meinen, bent meinen; ben meinen. A. ben meinen, bie meine, ba§ meine ; bie meinen. is inserted, but Plural. For all genders. bie meini^en. ber meinigctt. ben meinigen. bie meinigen. (7) When, finally, a possessive pronoun is employed as a predicate, and merely denotes possession, without special em- phasis, it is not inflected at all ; thus, ber ©arten ifl mein, the garden is mine ; bie Btxbt ijt bein, the room is thine ; ba0 <^au§ iji fein, the house is his. (6) Often, too, in this case, without any change of meaning Singular. Masc. Fern. N. ber meinige, bie meinige, G. be6 meinigen, ber meinigen, D. bent meinigen, ber meinigen, A. ben meinigen, bie meinige, Neui. "i^a^ meine ; be§ meinen • bent meinen ; ba§ meine ; the syllable i g J : thus, Neut. bas meinige J beS meinigen; bent meinigen ; 'aa^ meinige ; 314 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 59. (8) It sliould be added that the Germans, when no ol m- rity is likely to grow out of it, often omit the possessive pro- noun, where in English it would bo used : the definite article seeming sufficiently tc supply its place ; as, 3c^ ^a&e eg in ben «§anben, I have it in the hands ; that is, I have it in niy hands ; @r nal;m eg auf bie 3cf)ultern, he took it upon the (his) shoul- ders ; ©r 1;:iiki "i^iw %xm geBroc^en, he has broken (the) an arm or his arm § 59. Indefinite Pronouns. (1) Pronouns employed to represent persons and things in a general way, without reference to particular individuals, are called indefinite pronouns. Such are these, ^an, one ; a certain one. Semanb, some one ; somebody. 9]iemanb, no one ; nobody. 3ebermann, * every one ; everybody. (2) The German man (like the French on) is used to in- dicate persons in the most general manner : thus, ntan fagt, one says ; that is, they say, people say, it is said, &c. It is in- dechnable, and is found only in the nc ninative ; when, there- fore, any other case would be called for, the corresponding oblique case of e i n is employed : thus, er irlll e i n e n nie ^Oren, he will never listen to one, i. e. to any one. (3) Semanb and 9]ieinanb are declined in the following manner : Singular. N. Semanb, somebody. 0?icmanb. nobody. G. Semanbo or ^emanbeg. D^iemanbe or -9?iemanDe6» D. Semanb or ^emnnbem. 3^temanb or SQiemanbem. A. Semanb or 3emanben. CJciemanb or -D^iemanben. * The following, wh ch also belong to this list of indefinites, have already Deen. treated of under the head of indefinite numerals: viz. ©tivias, sometliing. ofA^'^'^'*-"i'- each; everyone. 9i;d't?, nothing. ivtnij^e, somewhat; some. Jficiner, no one ; none. (5rlutc, some ; many. ©incr, one; someone, ?ii(fr, everyone; all. 3f &er, each ; every one. 2JZaiidjer, many a ; many ; several. 3cl!J»SvJer, each ; every one REFLKXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PROXOUNS. § 60. 315 Scbcrmann is declined thus : N. SeDermaim, everybody. G. 3ct»ernianny, of everybody. D. Sebenuann, to everybody. A. Sebermaun, everybody. (4) Note that the second form of the dative (^emanbcm, Ociemanbcm) is seldom employed except when the other form would leave the meaning ambiguous. Thus, e6 ift O^lemanbem nu|ticf|, it is useful to nobody ; whei-e, were „5)(iemanb" used, the sense might be, nobody is useful. This remark applies, also, to the accusative : as, fte liebt 9?lemauben, she loves no- body : in which mstance, were the other form (Oiiemaiib) sub- stituted, it might mean, nobody loves her. § 60. Reflexive axd Reciprocal Pronouns. (1) When the subject and the object of a verb are iden- tical, the latter being a personal pronoun, the pronoun is said to be reflexive ; because the action is thereby represented as reverting upon the actor : thus, er rii^mt ftcf), he praises him- self. (2) When, however, in such case, the design is to represent the individuals constituting a plural subject as acting one upon another, the pronoun is said to be recii^rocal : thus, fie iBefd^im* !pfen fid), they disgrace one another. (3) But, as (for example) fie l6efd^itnlpfen fief) may equally mean, they disgrace themselves, the reciprocal word elnanber (one another) is added to or substituted for fid^, wherever there is danger of mistake ; as, fie i^crfte^cn fid) einanber or fie l3erficf)en einanber, they understand one another. (4) In the dative and accusative (singular and plural) the German affords a special form for the reflexives ; viz. fid), him- self herself, itself, themselves. The personal pronouns, there- fore, in all the oblique * cases, are used in a reflexive sense ; except in the dative and accusative {third person), where, in- stead of i^^tn, i^n, i^r k., the word f i ^ is employed. Re- * All cases, except the nominative, are called oblique cases- 316 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 61. garded as rejlexives, the personal pronouns are declined thus : Singular. Plural. First person. K. Hone. JVone. G. meiner, of myself unfer, of ourselves. D. inir, to myself. un^, to ourselves. A. mid), myself. luxQ, ourselves. Second person. N. J^one. jy^one. G. fceiner, of thyself. euer, of yourselves. D. bir, to thyself. eud), to yourselves. A. bid), thyself. eud^, yourselves. Third person masc. N. Xone, Xone. G. feiner, of himself, it)rer, of themselves. D. fid), to himself. fid|, to themselves. A. ftd^, himself. ftd|, themselves. T liird person fern. N. None. None. G. t^rer, of herself. i()rer, of themselves. D. fid], to herself. fid)> to themselves. A. f t ^, herself. f i d}, themselves. Third person neuter. N. None. Xone. G. feiner, of itself. i^rer, of themselves. D. fidi, to itself. fid), to themselves. A. f i d), itself. f i d), themselves. § 61. Demonstrative Pronouns. (1) The peculiar office of a demonstrative pronoun is to point out the relative position of the object to which it refers. Of these there are three : biefer, this (pointing to something near at havd) ; jener, that (indicating something remote^ ; ter, this or that (referrmg to things in either position). OBSERVATIONS OK THE DEMONSTRATIVES. § 62. 3l7 (2) 2^iefcr and jener are declined after the Old form of ad- jectives : thus, Slnr/ular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Xeut. For all genders. N. bicUT, biefe, biefey (tie§), this : blefe, these. G. tiefec, biefcr, bicfe^, of this ; tiefcr, of these. D. biefem, biefcr, biefem, to this ; blcfcn, to these. A. biefen, bicfe, biefee (ricc), this ; biefe, these. Masc. FeiP. yeut Js'. ber, bic. bas, this or that ; G. be§, bcr, be§, of this or that ; D. bem, bt% bem, to this or that ; A. ben, bte, la^, this" or that ; (3) ^Ter, Tvhen used in connection Tvith a noim, is iiiiiected (like the definite article) thus : Singular. Plural. For all genders. bie, these or those, bcr, of these or those. ben, to these or those. rie, these or those. (4) AVhen used absolutely, that is. to represent a substan- tive, it stands thtis : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Xeut. For all genders. X. ber, bie, ba5 ; bte. G. beffen (be^), beren (ber), reiTen (te^) ; beren. D. bem, ber, b?ni ; benen. A. ben, bie, baa ; bie. § 62. 0ESERVATI0^-S ON THE DEMONSTRATH-EP. (1) The neuters biefec (contract form btes), jenec and ba§, are, like ea (§134. 1.) employed with verbs, without distinc- tion of gender or number : thus, biel ift ein 2)tann, this is a man ; bieg ]lnb 'I'Zenfdien, these are men ; jmi§ iH eine ^xaii, that is a woman ; 6zc. (2) 5^iefer, when denoting immediate proximity, signifies "this ;" as, in bicfer 5BeIt ift nlles i^erganghcfi, in this world all is transitoiy. More generally, however, it answers in use to ^•tkat." ^ener always denotes greater remoteness than biefet, 318 DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. § 63. and signifies '-'thoA^' '•'yon'' '•'yonder ;" as, jener en ? Who among you is his equal 1 520 OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. % 65. SQeld^er, who, which. 5Der, that. 5Ber, who, he who, or that, or she who. (go, * which, (nearly obsolete, and indechnable.) (2) SSetd^er is declined after the Old form ; thus, Singular. PluraL Masc. Fern. Neuf. For all genders. N. trefc^er, tcd^t, trelc^eS; n^et^e, who, which. G. tt>elc!)e6, trelcher, h:>elc^e6 ; ireldjer, of whom, whose. D. ipelc^em, ireld)er, ri>etd)cm ; trelc^em, to whom, to which. A. ti?elcf;en, treld^e, rrelcf^e^ ; ii^eld^e, whom, which. (3) 5)er is declined, thus : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. N. ber, bie, ba§ ; bte, that, who, which. G. beffen, beren, bcffen; bercn, of whom, or which, whose. D. bem, ber, bem ; benen, to whom, or which. A. ben, ble, ba0 ; bie, that, who, which. (4) SSer stands thus : Singular, Plural, Masc. Fern. Neut. N. trer,t ^er, tra§; ^-1 ^ G. ireffen (or h?ef,) treffen (or hjcf ,) h^ef; ^- y s D. ix^em, trem, wanting-^ D. j ?3\ A. men, iren, ttaB-, A.J --§ § 65. Observations on the Relatives. (1) Of the pronouns declined above, trelc^er, h:>el(!)e^ h?elrf;c§, is the only one that can be used in conjunction with a noun, after the manner of an adjective : thus, wddjtx dJlann^ * © is really an adverb xised as a relative. t QScv has no plural, but like " o-?, '' is sometimes used before plural verbs. Example : 3Scr fln^ M'efc *2cure y Who are this people 1 t This dative is supphed by an adverbial compound ; as, n.u'^jit. (ivo-f- ui) whereto, or to which. SBoniir, where-with; with v^rhat, njosoii, whereof/of what, &LC. OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. § 65. 321 which man ; (not tctx D}2auu ;) and, except ^vhen so joined with a noun, the genitive (both Sing, and Plural) of irelcfjer is never used, but, in place of it, the corresponding parts of ber; that is, beiJen, bercn, beffcn, for the Singular, and bcrcn, for the plural; as, ber 'DLtuu, bcffeu (not irc(dice) S^reinib id) bin, the man, whose friend I am ; bie --Baume, beren (not n?eld)er) '-Bli'it^cn a6* gcfadcn |inb, the trees whose blossoms have fallen off. (2) ^tx, bie, "QCiQ, as a relative, like the English Avord that, is used as a sort of substitute for the regular relative. Thus (See obs. next above) its genitive is employed in place of that of tr cl d) e r, because the genitive of the latter, (h.^eIc^eS, meld}er, tv>dd)iQ,) being the same in form as the nominative masc. and neuter, might occasion mistake. So after the pronouns of the first and second person, (and of the third, when used for the second.,) tretc^er is never employed, but ber, thus: 5d), ber id)* t6n fa^, I, who saw him, ^\i, ber bu * KUy fegnejl, thou, who blessest us. 5Sir, bie vo'xx ^ ^ter ijerfammert finb, we, who are here as- sembled. 36r, bie i^r* euer Q^atcrfanb lie6t, ye, who love your country. Sie, bie 3ie* mir 6ctftimmten, ye, who agreed with me. 3)er, bie, '\iO,%, after fold^er, is equivalent to the English *'a.s" : thus, fold)e, bie an SSaunien ti^adifl, such as grows on trees. (3) 2B er, Vo, is an indefinite relative employed where- over anv uncertainty exists about the antecedent : thus, f ounen (Bie mir fagen, trer biefeS getban t^at ? Can you tell me, luho has done this? 3c^ nnnB rtidit, n?a5 er fagte, I do not know, vjhat he said. (4) Often n:er, rcas, has at once the force of both a rela- tive and an antecedent ; as, tuer auf bem 2Bege ber ^iitgenb irau* * In each case, it will be noted, the personal pronoun is repeated after the relative. In translating, of course the pronoun repeated, is to be omitted ; or the order of the words being reversed xi) fvv, instead of ^a• i* the rendering may be : I, I who saw, &c. It must be added, that, when the pronoun is not repeated, the verb will be in the third person and in agreement with the re- lative: as, tu trarjl e^, ter es irrir ^aq,ti. thou wast the one, that told me so. 322 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 66. belt, ift glucflic^, he that walks in the path of virtue, is happy; Un:§ gered)t ift, i?erbient ?c0, ivhat, or that which is right, de- serves praise. (5) 5Ber always begins a clause or sentence and never comes after the word which it represents ; it> a § nia}^, or may not begin a clause, and may or may not come after its proper antecedent : thus, irer tti^t ^oren iriU, bcr rnuj^ fuf)ten, he who will not hear, must feel ; id) fage, \va^ ic^ treif, I say what I know ; alleS, ti^aS id) gefe^en ^aBe, all that I have seen ; ira0 gered)t ift, l^erbicnt £oB, what is right, deserves praise. The form \v e f occurs in the compounds IxieJVDegen, tre^fjalB, on which or what account. (6) SBelc^er, -c, -e§, is often employed as an indefinite adjective pronoun. See Lesson 36. I. § QQ. Interrogative Pronouns. (1) The interrogative pronouns, that is, those used in ask- mg questions, are irer, tt)aS ? who ? what ? treld^er ? Avho ? which ? hjaS fiir ein ? what sort of a ? (2) They are the same in form, as the relatives ; or rather the relatives themselves employed in a different w:ay. QSer, tt)a§, and iretc^er, irelc^c, ireld)e§, are dechned just as when they are relatives, except that it?eld)er, -e, -e§, when interrogative never adopts the genitive of ber. (3) 2Bcr and U^aS {ivho ? what ?) can never be joined with a noun. They are used when the question is put in a manner general and indefinite. SSeld^er, li>eld)e, Ircld^eS, on the other hand, has a more definite reference, and may be employed ad- jectively : thus, ireldjer ^Jlawn ? which man ? &c. (4) 5Sa§ fiir cin (literally, what for a?) is a form used in inquiring as to the Jcind, quality or species of a thing : as, tra0 fiir ein OJJann ? what sort of a man ? ira^ fiir eine i^rau ? what sort of a woman ? ti^aS fiir ein .^inb ? what kind of a child ? (5) The only part of tra^ fiir cin, capable of inflection, is ein ; which, when the thing referred to in the question, is ex- Masc. Fern. Neut. K iraS fur ein, cine, t'm-^ G. lva§ fur eineS, einer, eineg ; D. li\"i5 fiir eincni, einer, einem : A. IT a 5 fiir em en, eine, ein ; VERBS. § G7. § 68. 323 pressed, takes the form of the indefinite article : when it is left understood, cin is inflected like an adjective of the Old form. The plural, in both cases, omits the article, and stands simply thus, ft? a 5 fiir. (6) 33a0 fiir ein, loith a substantive. Singular. Plural, For all genders, h?a^ fiir, what sort of ? ft^a§ fiir, of what sort of? ira§ fur, to what sort of? n?a0 fiir, what sort of ? (7) 2Ba0 fiir cin ivithout a substantive. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern, Neut. For all genders. N. nm§ fiir einer, eine, dm§) ; ira§ fiir. G. ft)a§ fiir eine^, einer, eine^ ; tDae fiir. D. traS fiir einem, einer, einem ; n?a6 fiir. A. ft)a§ fiir einen, eine, eine§ ; tra§ fiir. § 67. Observations. (1) Observe further that ein, in traS fur ein, is sometimes omitted in the singular, especially before words denoting ma- terials as, n?a§ fiir ^tVi%, what sort of stuff ? n?ag fiir 5Bein, what kind of wine ? (2) That ft?a§ fiir ein, and also irelrf) (that is, h^etc^er, with- out the terminations of declension) are occasionally employed in expressions of surprise or wonder ; as, ft)a§ fiir ein 9)?ann, or, ftjeld) ein 9i)Zann ! what a man ! (3) That ira^ is sometimes used for trarum : thus, ira3 fd^Icigft bu micf) ? why strikest thou me ? § 68. VERBS. (1) A verb is that part of speech which defines the condi- dition of a subject ; that is, shows whether it acts, is acted upon or merely exists. 824 PARTICIPLES. § 69. (2) In respect to form, verbs are either regular or irregu- lar ; simple or compound ; all which will be more fully explained hereafter. (3) In respect to meaning, verbs are active transitive, active intransitive, passive, neuter, reflexive, or impersonal. These terms have in German the same general signification which they have in English. Their application will, however, more large- ly appear in subsequent sections. (4) The German, like the English verb, has its moods, ten- ses, numbers, persons and participles. (5) There are five moods : viz : the Indicative, the Sub- junctive, the Conditional *, the Imperative and the Infinitive. (6) There are six tenses : viz : the Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, the first Future and the second Future. (7) These names (the names both of the moods and tenses) designate in German, just the same things as do the correspon- ding ones in English. For their general signification, see the paradigms on the pages following ; for more particular expla- nation of their uses, see the Syntax. § 69. Participles. (1) There are three Participles : viz : the Present, which terminates in enb and answers in signification to the English participle in ing; as, Io6 e n b , praism^. (2) The Perfect, which, besides prefixing in most cases the augment ge ends in verbs of the Old Form, in en or n, and in those of the New Form, in et or t ; and has a meaning cor- respondent to our participle in eel ; as, getragen (ge + tcag-f-vU) Qdixned; gelobct (ge+ioB-j-et) praiseti. * This (the Conditional) is made up of the Imperfect Subjunctive of the auxiliary verb iv e v ^ c it, (which see) and the Present and Perfect Infinitive of another verb. It is used to denote what is, also often denoted by the Sub- junctive, (Imperfect and Pluperfect) namely, a sujyposed condition of things, i. e. possibility without actuality By some it is treated as a distinct mood : by others, it is made to consist of two tenses : its tise (which see more at large in the Syntax) is the same in both views. AUXILIARY VERBS. § 70. 325 (3) The Future^ which is produced by prefixing the par- ticle i\\ (to) to the form of the Present Participle, (Io6cnb) thus, ju tcbcnb, which means to-be-jjraised, that is praisewortJuj . (4) The Particle ® e mentioned above, as being generally prefixed to the perfect participle, was originally designed, it would seem, to indicate comjjleted action. It is commonly accounted merely euphonic, or at most intensive. The instan- ces in which it is altogether omitted, are these : First : in the case of all verbs compounded with inseparable prefixes ; (See § 94.) as, tjele^rt, (not geBele(;rt) informed : Second : in the case of verbs from foreign languages, which make the infinitive in irett or icren: as, ftiibirt, (from j^u* biren), studied ; instead of geftubirt : Third: in the case of the verb ir crbert, when joined as an auxiliary to another verb: as, id) Vin geloBt irorbett, (not gcirorbcn) I have been praised. § 70. Auxiliary Verbs. (1) In German the auxiliary verbs are usually divided into two classes. (2) The first class consists of three verbs, without which no complete conjugation can be formed. They are i)abm, to have, fein, to be, and irerben, to become. These verbs, though chiefly employed as auxiliaries, are often themselves in the con- dition of principal verbs. In that case, they aid one another in the formation of the compound tenses. A glance at the paradigms will show, how this is done. (3) As auxiliaries, these three verbs enter into the composi- tion of the compound tenses, active and passive, of all classes of verbs. (4) t§ a 6 e n is used in forming the perfect, plupeifect and second future tenses in the active voice: thus, from JeBen, to praise, we have Perf. icE) I) a 6 e geloBt, I have praised. Plup. id) i^jOiiit gelobt, I had praised. 2. Fut. idb trerbe geloSt ^ aB e n, I shall have praised. 326 REMARKS ON THE USE OF i^obtTX AND feiU. § 71. (5) Sein is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and second future tenses, both in the active and passive ; thus, from loBen, to praise and tvad)\m, to grow. Active. Passive. Perf. id^ ]& i n geirac()fen, id^ B t n geloBt irorben, I have * grown. I have * been praised. Plup. id) tr^ ax geiradjfen, id) \Dax gelobt tforben, I had grown. I had been praised. 2. Fut. id) tperbe getcac^fen fetn, id) trerbe gelc6t ii^orben f ein, I shall have grown. I shall have been praised. (6) 5S erben is used in forming the future tenses and the conditionals f : thus, from loBen, to praise, we have Futures. Conditionals. 1 . id) it? e r b e loBcn, id) to ii r b e toBcn, I shall praise. I would praise. 2. id> ixurbc getoBt ^aBen, id)tx)itrbe geloBt ^aBen, I shall have praised. I should have praised. § 71. Remarks on the use of ^aBen and fein. (1) As the Perfect and Pluperfect tenses of verbs must be conjugated, sometimes Avith '^ a^ t\\ and sometimes with fein, it becomes important to know lohen to use the one and when the other. The determination of this question depends chiefly upon the signification of the main verb. The general rules are these : (2) «§aBctt is to be used in conjugating all active transitive verbs, all reflective verbs, all impersonal verbs, all the auxiliaries * It will be noticed here, that wherever, in the formation of these tenses, any part of f c i n occurs, it is Englished by the corresponding part of the verb \) a b c 11 : thus, id) b i ii gen)ac{)fen, I have grown, &c. This grows out of the necessity of suiting the translation to our language, which in these places re- quires the verb have. t It is, also, employed with the perfect participle of a principal verb, to form the Passive voice ; (See §84). Note, also, above that n)cr^e and Juiirbc. are rendered by their equivalents 'shall and should) in the conjugation of the Enghsh verb. REMARKS ON THE USE OF f)ahm AND fclu. § '71. 327 of tlie second class (viz. bitrfeii, fonnen, luogcn, n^cllen, foUen, inuffcn and uiffcn), and mani/ intramitives. (3) (Sciit is to be used in conjugating all intransitives, sig- jpifying a change of the condition of the subject ; as, gebei^en, to prosper ; gcnefen, to recover ; reifen, to ripen ; fdjUnnben, to dwindle ; fterBen, to die ; all those indicating motion towards or from a place ; eilen, to hasten ; gef)en, to go ; reiten, to ride ; finfen, to sink ; and, also, all verbs in the passive voice. (4) Some verbs take, in the formation of these tenses, either Ijabtn or fein, according as they are employed in one sense or in another. This, however, will be best understood by practice in reading and speaking. The following are ex- amples : ^r ift in feincm neucii 2Bagcn fortgefa^ren. ^yidn ^ruber tjat fortgefa^ren beiitfrf; 511 lefen. 5Dag 3Baffer ift gefrcrcn. 5Den armen Tlann ^at e§ in bem fatten 3inuuer gefroren. ®ie S^I^rcinen [tub iikr bte 2Qan= gen geronnen. ©aS @efn|5 'i)at geronnen. 5Da6 (5(f)iff ift auf einen j^'d^ fen geftofen. ©a§ ^ScU ijat ben ^onlg l^om Sftrcne geftcfen. Xa§ Sd)iff ift an§ Ufer ge* trieOen. ^er ^aum hat mm 3it)eige gettie6en. He has driven off in his new carriage. My brother has proceeded to read German. The water is (has) frozen. It has chilled the poor man in the cold room. The tears have flowed over the cheeks. The vessel has leaked. The ship has struck upon a rock. The people have thrust the king from the throne. The ship has been driven up- on the shore. The tree has shot forth new branches. 328 PAEADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES 72. PAEADIGMS OF THE AUX- (1) 6>abcn, IXDICATIYE. PEESEXT T id) bo.bc, ei- bat, mv baSfu, tnr baber, fte tjabeii, I have, thou hast, he has. we have, you have, they have. ^u battcfi, er battc, iviv barren, ibr baiter, fte barren, DIPERFECT TE^'SE. I had. thou hadst. he had. we had, you had. thev had. PERFEC: id) babe ^ Ml bafl i _. ci- bat I -^ roiv babcn \% :b;- babct i ^ Uf babeii J : TENSE. I have had. thou hast had. he has had. we have had. you have had. thev have had. PLUPERFECT TEXSE. tit batte 1 Ml battefl i er batre iviv Datteii ibv baitet ne bartfii y^ I had had. thou hadst had. he had had. we had had. you had had. thev had had. FIRST FUTURE TEXSE. Du uuril I ^ er an lb \^ ibv irerbet j "" ne iverteu J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. ic^ went ^1 = Ml ivirft i -5 er anii? {^ trir ifcrben ; :s ibr ffercet : ^ fte rcerten ) ^ I shall 1 _ thou wilt ; s he x^-ill ( - we will ' « you will ' ^ they will J "^ SUBJUXCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE id) b<-\be, Dii babeft, er babe, luir babeu, idr babet, m bao^w, I may have, thou mayst have, he may have, we may have. you may have. they mav have. niPERFECT TENSE. id) ba tte, I might have. ::u batreft, thou^mightst have. er rarre, he migh^ have, ivtr b.irteii, we might have. ibr barret, you might have. ]k barren, they might have. ieb babe Ml babeft er babe iinr babcn tor babcr ne t:aben PERFECT TENSE. ") I may have had, PLUPERFECT TENSE. I raisht have had, I shall have, thou will have, he will have, we shall have, you will have, they ^vill have. id) bcitte "1 Ml l>.itteil I _- er haire I « v^nv batten \-^ ibr batten | "= ne batten J FLRST FUTTJEE TENSE. (if) I shall have. tcfc rocibe 1 bn irerbefl | _~ er iuerbe ij u'ir luevbeK ; ^ ibr iivrbct I lie a'rr^en J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. , id) WixH 1 = j fn merbejl \ >| i er ivert'e I ^ ! tvir annben f :S ! ibr n?erbet ] ^ ; ite luerben J 5= (if) I shall have had, &c. OF THE FIRST CLASS. § 72. ILIARIES OF THE FIRST CLASS. to hayc. 329 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. FIRST FUTXniE. t(^ iviirbe "^ ^ bu HM'irbcfl I _. rt ev jviivte ( ^ ^ o unr luiirbcu (^ 's^ tbr tuiirbct | "^ ^ fte roih-ben J ^ SECO^^D FUTURE. trf) unUbe 1 = > bii univbeft I ^ ^ p cv UMirbe l-= 2^ xi>i\- njiirbeit is s-T tbr iinivbft I S, J^ fie n)iUben J o iJ PRESENT TENSE 1. loanting I. btibc Ml, have thou. 3. luibe cv, let him have. 1. l-abeii ivii-, let us have. 2. baber itu-, have ye or you. 3. luibeii fte, let them have. PRESENT TENSE. [)abcn, to have. PRESENT. babeiib, having. PERFECT TENSE, geljabt baben, to have had FIRST FUTURE. f)abeu n,^crbcn, to be about to have. PERFECT. s^e^abl", had. 330 PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. (2) (^eitt, INDICATIVE. tc^ bill, Ml bi]i, ev tft, mx ft lib, {it ftnt', PRESENT TENSE. I am. thou art. he is. we are. you are. they are. tci) ttjar, cu itnivf^, er aniv, iiMV amren tbr luaver, \it tt)areu. IMPERFECT TENSE. I was. thou wast, he was. we were, you were, they were. PERFECT TENSE. t(^ bill bu btft ev tft im'r fiiib tbr feib fie finb 1 I have been, thou hast been, he has been, we have been, you have been, they have been. PLUPERFECT TENSE. id) tttav Ml luavfi ev n.mv luiv univcii ibv HHivet fie Jvaveii >f I had been, thou hadst been, he had been, we had been, you had been, they had been. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. I shall be. thou wilt be. he will be. we shall be. you will be. they will be. ict) n.Kvbe 1 bii iinvft i ev wiib J 3 unv a>erbcn f e 1 _= bu aKVbeft I 'S. ev a^evbe '1 jj anv a^evben \S. ibv a^evbet | 2 fie asevben J «, (if) I should have been, &c. OF THE FIRST CLASS. § 72. 331 to be. CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. FIRST FUTURE. td) triivbe "] oT bu uuivbefi .o ev univbe iviivbeii j ^ c 2c3 n?u t> o -"^ tbr tvitrbet 'm fte unirben J ^ SECOND FUTURE. tcb tinivbc ) -- iivben ( ■^ 5 r tt)i «)UVt>ft 1 ^ -=« PRESENT TENSE. 1. wanting. ■>. hi bii, be thou. 3. fet ev, let him be. 1. feieii mx, let us be. 2. fcib tt)r, be ye.^ 3. fticit fte, let them be. PRESENT TENSE. fetn, to be. PRESENT. fetenb, being. PERFECT TENSE, geraefcn fetn, to have been. PERFECT, geiwefen. FIRST FUTURE. 'eiii ivcvben, to be about to be. fie ivuvbeu } % Z"^ 332 PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. " (3) ^iJcr&cu, li INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. Mt tvtrft, Ci: UMlb, ivir lucrben, tl)i lvel^et, fie luevbeu, I become, thou becomest. he becomes, we become, you become, they become. tcfe tinube, cu univbeft, wii- luurben, it)v tinubet, fte tDuvbeii, IMPERFECT TENSE. I became, thou becamest. he became, we became, you became, they became. i(^ bin Ml bift n- ift lutr ft'iib ibi" feib fte fiiib PERFECT TENSE ^t I have become, thou hast become, he has become, we have become, you have become, they have become. PLUPERFECT TENSE. er tvav ! t: ii'ir luaven f ^ it)v ivai'ct %, }it loaven J I had 1 thou hadst | evbeii ibv UHVbet, fie mtrben, I may become, thou mayst become, he may become, we may become, you may become, they may become. IMPERFECT TENSE. i6) ittiirbe, bii luurbcfl, er roiivbe, iwinDiivbeit, ibr tviivcet, fie wuvben, I might become, thou mightst become, he might become, we might become, you might become, they might become. PERFECT TENSE. id) fet bu felfi er fei ivir fcien ibr fetet ]u feien I may have be- come, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. tc| ivore Ml wdrefi er ivdre \uir ludren tt)r luciret fU ivdren I might have be- come, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. iDtv tinivbeii f S § ^ tbc n5iirbet | ^ -S g fie wiirben J „ SECOND FUTURE. tcfe n)iirbe ) = ^ ^ bu ttjiirbefi \ 3. ^^-H er ttjiirbe I S ts oT trti* roiirbtn | t: "3 | t^i* wiivbet I I .£ « fie tDiirben J ^ ^-^ IMPERATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. 1. wanting. >. Jvev^c tu, become thou. 3. Jucvbe ev, let him become. 1. JDcvben mv, let us become. 2. n.un-bet t^r, become ye. 3. Jvevten fte, let them become. INFINITIVE. PRESENT TENSE. ivcrbeii, to be- PERFECT TENSE. gctuorben fetn, to have become. FIRST FUTURE. mevben roerben, to be about to become. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. wcrbcnb, becom- ing. PERFECT. geiuorbcu, become. S34 SYNOPTICAL VIEW, &C. § 73. § 13. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF THE THREE TENSE AUXILIARIES. © e i U; to be. I) a b c u, to have. ro e r b e n, to become. INDICATIVE MOOD Present Tense. I am, / have, / become. tc& hin bu bifi cr ifl tvir ftnb ibr Ui^ fte ftnb. icb bite in baft cr bat tt)ir baben ibr babet or iiaht fie (jaben. Imperfect Tense. ii% twerbe in luirft cr wirb tvir luprben ibr xoniit fte njerbcn. I was, I had, / became. id) tuar in n.nuefi (or warfi) er n.Htr ttJtr luaren ibr luaret (or wart) fte n^arcn. id) ^atU bu battefl er batte \v\v batten ibr battet fie batten. Perfect Tense. ic|) iintrbe bu ivuvbefl er Jvuvbc tt>ir wurben ibr unirbet fie njurbcn. / have been, I have had, I have become. id) bin "] bu bifl j tbv feib fte ftnb j id) lahz 1 bu baft ibr bibet | fte l)aben J Pluperfect Tense. id) hin -] bu bift er tft^ I Qchjorbert or luir ftnb r worben. ibr feib fte finb. I had been, I had had, / had become. \6) n?ar ^ bu niareft I er u^ar ' j^g^g„. ivtr umrcu [ ^ ibr ivaret j fte jvaren j i(b batte ' in batteft er batte ! ^»<.«t,* t«ir batten I' fl'^'^^^- ibrbrtttet fte f)atten J id) xoav bu tuarefi er n^ar tt>ir waren ibr linnet fte waren gcttorben or njorben. First Future Tense. / shall be, / shall have. I shall become. icb a^erbe bu ivirft er tinvb tt)tr iuerben tbr ttjerben fie njerben ■ feita. id) merbe bu wivft er iviib , iT)ir wcvSeu f b^iren. i^r njerbet fte iveiben id) ttjcrbe bu unrft er ivirb tvir rotvii ibr ujerbe fte njcrbeti n t • J • twcvbcn. ' SYNOPTICAL VIEW, (fec. § 73. 335 /shall have been. ict) uu-vt'e Ml R>tlft fv ivivt ivii iverbcu tbv wevi'et fie tucifccii gcwefeti ft ill. Second Future Tense. / shall have had. id) tvin-be 1 bii u^tvft eriuivt- ! []d)abt wix tvcrbcn ,' f)aben. tbv nnnbot | fie wtxitn J I shall have become, id) roei'bc 1 tbv merbet fie njevben fein. / may be, id) \(i bii fctcll (or feifl) ev fei tttv Ktcii (or fein) tt)r fttef fie feieii (or fein.) I might be, id) ivcire bu tviive)! (or luavfi) er roiire 11' iv iViireu ibr tmiret (or tuart) fie iiudvcti. / 7nay have been, id) fci 1 bu fci)'^ I er fci t tvtr feien j ^ tbr fetet | fie feieii J ijewefen. 1 might have been, id) tinv.e ^ bu tinHvefl er miire , mx iravcn ^ fl^^^^f*^"- ibr jvnrct fie lunreii ti J (//) I shall be id) a'fvbe bu iverb?ft cr lvel^e ivit n3?rbe» i^r werbet fie wetben j ■ fein. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I may have, ic^ t)abc bu babefi er babe tinv baben ibr biibet fie b^iben. Imperfect Tense. I might have, ii) batte bu barteft er biittc iriv batten ibr bSttet fie Bafieu. Perfect Tense. I may have had, id) brtbc bu babeft er biibe wir b^ben ibr babet fie brtben gebabt. Pluperfect Tense. / might have had, id) bcitte ~) bu battcft 1 er bcifte f , . , itnv bcitten ,!- S^^-"*^^- ibr battet mr iHiiu'i 1 fie bvitteu J First Future Tense. (If) I shall have, id) u^erbe bu werbcft cr werbe toir ivcrbeu ibr \rerbet fie werben babeu. Imay become, i^ iverbe iw werbefl cr raerbe tnir werben ibr luerbet fie luerben. 7 might become. id) unirbe bu jviirbeft er luiirbe tinr it^tivoen t_bv iyiivbet fie roiirbeit. Imay have become, id) [ei bu fetft er fci mir fci en tl)r feiet fie feien gen^orten, or worben. I might have become, id) rciive i\\ lucirefi er n?are wix tvciren ibr uuiret fie lucireu getvorben, (ivovben.) {If) I shall become. id) U'erbe bu wcrbefi er tucrbe roir tvcrben ibr n)er^et fie njcvben. j Werben, 336 SY>-OPTICAL VIEW, (fec. § 73. Seco>T) FuTrRE Tense. (//) I shall have been, (//) I shall have had, {Iflsh^U have become id) IV err e 1 Ui) tvet'fe ^ id) n^crbe ^ bu mert>eft bu ivevbeft 1 bu iverbeft ev iverfe 1 gftvefen ev mmz \ gebabt ev ivevte geivorb., roil- ivcrt'eii r fetn. rviv I'oerben } {)aben. ivic luerbeii f-'.ivorben} tbr U'crret t[}i- lucrbet j ikx wertet i feiu. [ie aevteii ^ fie iDfibeii J fte a^eibeu J / should be, id) n.nivbe 1 bu iviivbefi | er itjiivf e j IV 1 1- iviirbeu } tbr iviirbet j fie iviivben J fein. 1 should have been, tit iviivbe ^ bu rviubefi { er iviirbe I irtv rviirbeu \ tbr jviivbet i fte Jvuvben j gen.-'fieu fein. CONDITIONAL. First Coneitional 7 should have, tc6 tviivbe \ bab. bu iviivbevi ev rciirbe tvir O'iirbcu ibr wiivbet | fte wiivben J Second Co>-ditional I should have had. tc& jviivbe ^ bu rviirbeji ev nnivbe y ibr tviirtct ', fte iviirbfu J beu. / should become id) univbe bu ivurbcji er wiirbe jvir iviirben ibr iviivbft fie wiirben , trerbeiu I should have become id) U-nirbf ^ bu iviirbeft j er witrbe ( tvir UM'irbfU ,' ibr iviivbet j fie wiivbeu J qeivorben (n? or ben) feitt. DIPERATIVE 3I00D. Be thou, wanting, fci bu fet, er, fte or C? feieu ivir feib ibr feieu fte. PRESE^^: Tense. Have thou, wanting, ho.hi bu Ijabi cr, fte or ei baben roir haUt ibr l^abm fie. Becoine thou, wanting. iverte bu iverbe er, fte or c« ivctbeu tvic jverbct ibr t»erbeu fie. to be, fein. to have been, gettefenfetiL to be about to be, fetn iBetben, INFINITIVE MOOD. Prese^'t Te^-se. to have, !)abeii. Perfect TE^'SE. to have had, gef)abt l)ah(P.. FuTrRE Tense. to be about to hat>e, habm mcrbett. to become. trerben. to have become. genjovben fein. to be about to lecomt- mctben tticrbett. JLUXIUARIES OF THE SECOND CLASS. § T4. 337 being, (jewefen. PARTICIPLES. Present. having, becoming, aecbent). Perfect. had, Qef)abt. become, gctworDcn. S 74. AUXILIAKIES OF THE SECOND CLASS. (1) The second Class of auxiliaries embraces the following: 5* mag, I am allowed ; (may :) 3di barf, I am permitted ; I dare. 3cb trill, I will ; (purpose ;) ^(b mup, I am obliged; (must) 3ct> fcU, I am obliged ; (shall ;)' 3* tajfe, I let, 3d^ fann, I am able ; (can ;) (2) These verbs are, for the most part, very irregular in conjuga- tion, and serve simply the purpose of modifying with the ideas of liberty, possibility, or necessity, other verbs ; which latter are in that case required to be in the infinitive mood ; thus er mag lact^^n, he may (has permission to) laugh ; icb fann fu?Tei6en, I can (am able to) write ; where lactvn and fcbreiteu are both in the infinitive, governed respectively by mag and ! a n it. (3) In the perfect and pluperfect tenses, however, the past par- ticiple of these verbs is used only, when the principal verb is not ex- pressed. Its place is supplied, in such cases, by the infinitive, the translation of course being the same in either case, as : 3* ^a6e ii)n febeii tcnmn (instead of gefcunt) ; I have been able to see him. (Sr fjat irarten miiiTen (instead of gemupt) ; he was obliged to wait. SDlan 6atte iibcv if)ti lacbeu mcgen (instead of gemccfct) ; one might have laughed at him. Qx i)CLt bem 93efef)le nid^t gef^crd^en ircEen (instead of getooUt) ; he has not been willing to obey the command. 3d) haht fein ©efieimnin aMiTen biirfen (instead of geburft) ; I have been allowed to know his secret. 3 _ .S' e =s" ( 1 — i en =t ^ 2 - ^ et, t ^h - en — en (3 — 1 ^ — g en — ^ ct, t — en — ea PARTICIPLES. PARTICIPLES Present. Perfect. Present. Perfect. — enb ge— en —enb ge— et or t Remark. The sigii -f in ihe table above is used as in Arithmetic, i. e. to indicate that the parts et -f e are to be united : as, ete. 340 VERBS OF THE OLD CO^^JUGATION. § ^7. B&ERVATIONS ON THE PRECEDING TABLE. (1) Observe, in the table above, that the terminations in all pla- ces, except the Imperfect of the New form, are to be added directly to the root. In the place excepted (Imperfect of the New form), there comes between the root and the personal ending, a sort of tense-sign (et or t), which is not necessary to verbs of the Old form : because in them the Imperfect is made by means of a change in the radical vowel. (2) It may, also, be noticed that a characteristic difference in form, between the Indicative and the Subjunctive (3d person sing ) is that the former ends in et or t, the latter always in e ; and that the personal ending in the first and third person sing, of the Imper- fect of the Old form, is wholly omitted. (3) It may farther be observed, that the e in the terminations ejl and et, of the Indicative, is retained or omitted just according to what is demanded by euphony. In the Subjunctive, for the most part, the full termination is preserved. (4) For the same reason, also, that is, for the sake of euphony, when the root of a verb ends in d or er, the vowel c of any termi- mation beginning with that letter, is commonly omitted ; as, {jdm^ merii (not Mmmer e ii), to hammer ; fammeln (not fammel e n), to col- lect. Sometimes, however, the e of the root is rejected : as, ic^ fammte (not [amm e le), I collect. § 77. Verbs of the Old Conjugation {commonly called irregular verbs). (1) In the Old Conjugation, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle are distinguished from the Present, chiefly by a change of the radical vowels. Thus, in some verbs, a different radical vowel is found in each of these three parts : Present. Imperfect. Perfect Participle. ^Bitten, beg, S3at, * begged. ®e6eten, begged. ^Oelfen, help. ^atf, helped. ®ef)c(fen, helped. (Stmien, reflect. @ann, reflected. ©cfciinen. reflected. Slrinfeu, drink. %vant drank. ©etruiifen, drunk. * When in the course of the changes noted in the text above, a long vowel or diphthong becomes short, the final consonant of the root is doubled, as : Oteiten, to ride. ^itt, rode. ©evitteti, ridden. Seiben, tosnfler. ?itt, suffered. ©clittcu, suffered. ' In the case of ^ciben, note also, that ^ is changed into its cognate t VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 77. 341 (2) In some, the vowel or diphthonn; in the Imperfect and the Participle, is the same, but is diiferent from that in the present : as, Present. ©limmcii, glimmer. ^ihtw, lift, ^llmmcu, climb, jliiren (fii()ren), choose. §cibtMi, suffer. Sviiujeu, suck. @dMcbcn, shove. (gdUctdHMi, sneak. (Sdinaiibeii, snort. (2du-tnben, write. \x Icfeii, we read, ihx U\\:t, you read, fie lofen, they read. tit bolfe, I help, bii b i I f ft, thou helpest, cv t} i ( f t, he helps, wix §elfen, we help, iijx ^elfet, you help, fie klfen, they help. Imperative. (efeu irir, let us read, lefet i()r, read ye or you. lefen fie, let them read. wanii7igy ^ i t f bu (for l^Kfc)/ help thou. fietfe er, let him help, ijelfen toix, let us help. ^etfet ii)X, help ye or you. ^elfen fie, let them help. d. The final e, of the first and tJiird persons singular of the Im- perfect Indicative, is always omitted, and in this tense the radical vowel, if it be capable of it assumes the Umlaut in the Subjunctive thus : Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. id\ fpradh, (for f^racbe,) I spoke, tc& f|)rdd)e, I might speak bu fprachft, thou didst speak, er fpradb, (for fpradie,) he spoke trir fpradien, we spoke, ihx fpradiet, you spoke, fie f^rad^en, they spoke, bu f^rddbcft, thou mightst speak, er fprddie, he might speak. \T3ir fpvd4)€n, we might speak, t^r fprdAet, you might speak, fte fprd(i)en, they might speak. idi fcbfug, I struck, bu fcMucjft, thou didst strike, er fd^lug, he struck, triv fd'^Iugeu, we struck, lf)r fdiluget, you struck, ^e fd^Iugen, they struck, id) fdituge, I might strike, bu fditiigeft, thou mightst strike, er fditi'tge, he might strike, trir fdifixgeu, we might strike. if)r fdiluget, you might strike, fie fd)liigeu, they might strike. * See Note page 342. ^44 PARADIGM OF A VERB § Y8. § 78. PARADIGM OF A i\ II INDICATIVE. ivlv f.tlagen, PRESENT TENSE. I Strike thou strikest. he strikes. we strike, you strike, they strike. IMPERFECT TENSE. Dll fcfclugft, tr fit 1 113, \ luiv fcblugen, t^r fcblu^cf, lie fdplugeu, I struck, thou didst strike, he struck, we struck, you struck, they struck. PERFECT TENSE. tc& l)aht 1 ^ fu t)aft I g er i)at I J' fte l}abm J "^ I have ^ thou hast I . he has V "o we have ; S you have | ^ they have J PLUPERFECT TENSE. t* tatte ^ . in ^attffi | S ev ^atte ',3 jvtv batten ,' ^ ibr battet '% ftc ^vtttcu J I had 1 thou hadst | . he had '1 "o we had / S you had | ■» they had J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. III tc^ werbe 1 n iinrfl c er n.>ivb ( |: wiv iverben ( ;g, fte iverben J I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. ic^ n?erbe "1 ^ bu ivtvfl I ^ er tutrb I ^g" wix iiH'rben ( S^ ibr werbet | g; fte Jverbeii J Si thou wilt he will I we shall f you will they will J , SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. ut fitlaiic, t»u fcblagef^/ cr fcfelage, luir fd)liigen, tt)r fcblvtj^er, fie fc^laijen, I may strike, thou mayst strike, he may strike. we may strike. you may strike. they may strike. IMPERFECT TENSE. ic^ f4)nige, bu f4)liiflefl, cr fcbliige, mv fcbliigen, ibr fitliiaet, fie f4)liigeir. I might strike, thou mightst strike. he might strike. we might strike. you might strike, they might strike. PERFECT TENSE. i(^ f)abe bH t)abcfl ev babe wir baben ibr biibet fie b«ben "j ^.. I may have struck. 16) WU bu battefl er ^alte luir batten Ibr batten fie I)atten PLUPERFECT TENSE 1 I might have struck, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. (if) I shall strike, &c. i^ tyevbe 1 bu weibefi j c ev werbe I 1= a>ir Wfrb?n 13. tf)c rocrbct I S. fte werbeii J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. id) roerbe ") « Ml jrcrbefi | ^ er iuerbe [ « = ivir jvcrbeu f ^.o ibr iDerbet | g fie iDerbcn J ^ (if) I shall have struck, &c. OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. VERB OF THE OLD FORM. to strike. 346 COXDITIOXAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE FIRST FUTURE. tc^ nnivbe 1 ^ t)U JDurbeil € ^M er wiirbe ^ 5 .- wix mihben f JB ^ i t^v miirbef •i^ 1— I'S fie iviivi-en , aj SECOND FUTURE. tci jviivbo " =£ ^ . bu wiivbeft e Jj er roiirbe I -»■ rs - rott roiirben ( = "s-^ tf)r roiirbet 1 1 .a 2 fte wiirben , ^^Z'" PRESENT TENSE I. wanting i. fithlijl Ml, Strike thou 3. fitlaije cr, let him strike. I. fc^hii^eu wi\\ let us strike. I. fc^)lajjet it)i-, strike ye. 3. frblageu fte, let them strike. PRESENT TENSE. fd;Iaijen, to strike. fci)lai]cub, striking. PERFECT TENSE. 9ef(f)Iagen f)abeti, to have struck FIRST FUTURE. fc^lagcn luerbcn, to be about to strike. PERFECT. rtefc^Iagen, struck. 16* 346 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ 78. (1) ALPHABETICAL LIST OF {commonly called Note that in the following list many compound forms are not set down. INFINJTIYE. aSnrfcn a), to bake, ^ebingen 6), to bargain, S3etuif>n, to need, Sefe[)Ien, to command, ^Beflftpeii (ftc|) c). to apply one's self. 53ei]inne'ii d). to'begin, ^ei^nt, to bite, 53cflemmeil e) to pincb, press (by anxiety), Serpen, to conceal, 53effteii, to burst, i^cftillien (ft4)), to think of, SSefi^eu, to possess, 33etrugell, to deceive, -^eiuci^eil /), to induce, move, 5i3tei]e!l, to bend, PRESENT INDICATIVE. ^ieteil g), to offer, to bid, ^illbtll, to bind, ^Bitten, to entreat, to beg, Sl3iafen, to blow, 53lnbeit, to remain, ^Ueirt)en A), to fade, U^Vilten, to roast, 5U-od)en, to break, ^VClineil z), to burn, Sl^l-tlli]eU, to bring, ^cnfcn, to tbink, ^ in gen k), to bargain 2)rffvtClt, to tliresli. tc^ bacfe, fcu bad fi, er bd(ft, tcf) Sebinc^e, k. \fnnb id entrann id entfdUcf ' OF THE OLD 1- UKM. S78. 347 VERBS OF THE OLD FOEM irregular verbs). In such case, the student has only to look for the verb in its simple form. IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. i^ biife bacfe gebacfen. a) Resularwhen active; as, er h&xoi buf. i(t bcbiiii^e bctingc bcbungen. 6) Regular when it means, to ic^ bebiirtte beburft. add a condition, to modify. 58cblngt, conditional, ia re- «^ befphle bcfiebl bcfoblen. gular. i4 befltffe beflci^ bcflifien. c) sBertetBtgcn (fid)), to apply one's self; is regular. ic^ bec^anne begiimc begciinen. d) In the imperf. subj begOHltC id) bifie beip or beipe gebtffen. is also used. ii) beflemmcte beflemme befloinmett or e) 53eflemmt is not frequently beflemmt. used, and is employed, only id) bcirge tcb biirfte btrg ber^e or btrfl gebovgcti. gebpvften. in the sense of compre.ssed. tcft befanne befiiinc befpnnen. td) before befi^e bffeffen. id) betipgc berriige betrogen. id) bemoge bciueqc betDpgen. /f^rregular when it means, to icfc boge btege gebogeu. induce; regular when it means, to move a body or affect the sensibilities. td) bote btetc gebotfti. g) Seutfi and beut, in the id) bciiibc biube gcbuubeti. present, are poetical. id) bate bitte gebetea. ic^ bltefe blafe geblafcu. t* bltebe bleibe or bteib geblteben. gebltcfeen. tc6 bUc^c bUic^e h) S3leic^eil, to bleach in the ic6 bviete brate gebraten. sun, active, is regular. tcfe brad)c bvid) gebrpc^eii. i^) breiin«te brenne gebraunt. i) Often regular when active: ic^ brdc^te briuge gebrrtc^t. 3d)bvennte.§oIs, weileS beffer branute al8 Sorf. icb biic^te benfe gebac^t. id) biiiigc binge gebungen. k) ^ingte is sometimes used in ic^ brdfdje or brifd) gfbrofc^en. the imperfect, in the sense of bvefdJe hire. t(^ briinge bringe gcbrungen. /) For brang, brung was for- t4 fciirfte — gcburft. merly in use. ic^ em^nnge empfrtiigc empfangen. i4> empfo^Ic empfiebl cmpfof)kn. ic^ emvfdnbe empnnbe emvfunben. t(^ entrditue entriune eutvonnen. itfc entf(^liefe entfc^Iafc or eut= ciitfc^lafen. d48 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. INFINITIVE. PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMP. INDIC. ©ntj>ye(ten, to answer, (^I'blcidjeil m), to turn pale, ©ifl'lcren, to freeze, (Srijvetfen, to seize, to catch, (^vtteftil n), to select, Hifii^reu o), to choose, (?ilcfc^enp), to extinguish, (Jvfaufen, to be drowned, (?vfci?alle», to resound, (f ifcbftlKU, to appear, ^vfc^vecfen q). to be frightened, ^rtvinfeu, to be drowned, (Jrivagcn r), to consider, (fffcn, to eat, ^of)Cn 5), ^obsolete,) to catch ?5c»^VCU t). to drive a carriage, fallen, to fall, Salteii u), to fold ^angen tj), to catch, ^ec^ten, to fight, ^tnteii, to find, ^^ledbteii, to twist, ^^liegeit w), to fly, ^lleben x), to flee, glte^en y). to flow, ^ragen, to ask, ^veffen, to devour, l^vievcn, to freeze, @al)rcn z), to ferment, ©cbaven, to bring forth, ©ebeii a), to give, ©ebieten 6), to command, (Sktetben c), to prosper, ©efalklt, to please, ©eben d). to go, ©elincien, to succeed, ©eltfil e), to be worth, valid ©enefcn, to recover, Ic^ eiitfiH-ecftc, 2c. t(^ entfprac^ ii-^ erbleidK, jc. tc^ erfalt^ id? erfrieie, jc. i* erfrot: id) ergveife, ^c. tc^ evQviff tcfe evficfe, K. id) ctfif ft? icb erfiil)ve (evfiivc), ic. ic^ tvlof)t (evfor) id) erfanfe, bu evfaufeji, n erfiiuft if^ evfoff id) evfcfealle, k. id) cifd)ofI ic^ evfitfiiie, jc. id) crfd)iert i^ evfdjiecfe, bu erfd)ri(ffl, cv er= ic^ erfc^rci! fd)ricft id) evrvinfe, jc. icfc ertran! iit cvixnige, k. icfe cvroog ic^ effe, bu iffefi, er iffet or iff ic^ o^ ic^ fafie, bu fa^eft, cr fa^et id) faf)ve, bu fabrfi, er fa^vt id> fu^t id) faUe, bu fdUjl, erfciUt id) fiel ic^ falte, K. id) faltete ic^ fangc, bu faugft, cr fcingt i^ fine [(if fer^te, t>\i fic^tft, cf ftd)t id) fo(^t id) ftnbe, :c. icfe fanb icft flec^tc, bu flt(|til, er flic^t ic^ floc^t id) fliege, bu ^iegft, cr flicgt ic^ flog i6^ flicbc, :c. id) flie^e, n*. t(^ ffo^ ic6 frage, bu frcigfi, er fragt idi fruc id) freffe, bu friffeft or fri^t id) fvaf id) fricve, jc. id) fror icfe gcibve, ic. ic^ go^r ic^ gfbave, bu gebarfi (gebievft) ic^ gebar er gebdvt (gebievt) I gebe, bu gibft, er gibt 'tc^ gnb id) gebicte, jc. id) gebot id) gebeitie, jc. ltd) gebie^ ic^ gcfaUe, bu gefallfl, cr gefallt jic^ geftcl {c6 gebe, jc. \id) ging e§ geliugt c« gelaug ic^ gelte, bu giltfi, er gilt jtcfe gait id) gencfe, jc \id) gcnai OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 849 IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE REMARKS. iii) cuti>iaci}e tit crl.iltct)c icbtc id) fa lib e id) flo(tte i^ pij^c id) fIoff« id) fviii3c ic^ frdge ict frove id) flof)vc id) flcbdre (^e^ bovf) id) ijdbe ict flcOote id) Qebicbe ict flefi*.'lc ict flinge eS oeldnge ict gdlte ict gencife futfpvid) cvblftcbe cvfvifie :vgvdfeorergvcif afiefc aiui)xt (evfiire) frfaufe evi'd)alle en"d)eine crfc^vicf cvtvinf enudge faf)i'e faUe falte fange fid)t fiiibe riic^t picgc flicfie or flief) flie^e fvage fi-tp fviere gd()ve ijebdve Cgcbiev) gib gcbicte gebeib gefalle gebc or ge^ gelinge gcnefe fntfpvod)cit. ci-bltit J^'iiliren s). to choose, id) fiit}ve, jc. tc^ fo^r Sobcn, to load. id) fabe, bu labefi or labfl, ev Ia= bet or Idbt ic^ lub Saffen t). to let. id) laffe, t>i\ laffefl, ev laffet (!a^n idi ttc^ ^aufen, to run. id) laufe, bu liiuffi, ev Iciuft tc^ htt ^(itiXl M), to suffer, id) leibe, jc. ^etben, to lend, id) leibe, jc. id) lic^ Sefcn, to read. id) lefe, bu liefefl, «v liefet (lieSt) icft las Siegen, to lie down. id) liege, jc i* Irtg Siigen, to lie, id) liige, jc. t(t) tog OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. Jol IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. tdj gcitpffe ijetiicfie rtctioffcn. /) @cneu§efl, geneufr, and nil i^cricthe gcrarhe (]erarhcu. iiriperative gciieup, poetical ; ti tje)"cl,nit)e i^cfd)ct)e i]eii-t)obcn. seldom used. iff) rtewiinne (ijc; jcwiiinc gewonneit. ivoiim-) i^ ijoiyc tjieie gctjpffen. g) ©CU^efl, gen§t, and impe- rative gcu9. See geniepen. t(t fllid^c ijleidie geglicften. k) Regular as an active verb, to make similar, to compare. 33evglcic^en, although active, is irregular. tc^ flltttC ijleite ijeglitteit. i) @e(ctten and begleiten are not derived from gleiteil, but from lei ten, and tberefore re- id) glcmmc c]Itmmc gof^lommeit. gular. k) Now more frequently regular. ic^ ijviibe ijvabe geijvaben. trf) flrtrre gveife aegvijTcn. i^ ^attc ftabe ge^abf. I) >.§anb^abcn is regular. tcfc l}ieUe halte gebalten. id? i)iiigc t)ait9e gct)aiigen. m) >§ieng, bienge are old forms. This verb must not be mis- taken for baiigen, to suspend, which is active and regular. icfe ^teOe ^flue or ^an ge^auen. n) ^aute (regular) is used when ^ebe gebcben. cutting wood, carving stone,&.c.. l)ei§e or l)fi^ Qii)dm- are meant. t4) t)iUfcorbalfe hilf geiiolfen. i(h fiffe Eeife or feif cjffiffeii. o) This verb is sometimes used id) h'lmete Eeniie gefatint. as a regular verb. id) flobe fltebe i^efloben. id) flbmme flimme i^cElommen. p) Sometimes regular, f limmte. id) Elviitiie fltuije fiieife or fneipe geflniu^en. id) fiiiffe or gefniffen or ge= q) .^neiptc, gefncipt is more fiiipve fiiippeti. frequently used. id) fame fomm gefonimen. id) foitntc gefonnt. id) fii3d)e fi-ied)C or fried) gefvoc^en. r) J^reu^fl, freud)t, freud), ob- solete. Only poetically used. id) foBve fii^re gefofjven. s) Jliibven is entirely antiqua- ted, njiibleu having taken its place. ic^ liite labe gelaten. ic^ lic9e (affe or lap gelaffen. t) SSeranlaffen is regular. id) liffe laiife or lauf gelaufeti. id) litle letbe gelitten. u) ^erleiben, to disgust, is re- ifb liel)e leibe gelie^en. gular if^ liife ties gclefen. i^ IciflC (iege geleflen; i^Iofle lUflC aelofiftti 352 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § ^B. INFINITIVE. ?!Jlaf)Icil V), to grind, 3}^eiben, to avoid, fDielfen w), to milk, 9}Jeffen, to measure, lUiipfallen, to displease, 2}it§Ultgen, to go amiss, SJJogeu, to be able, 2)^uffen, to be obliged, Stcljmcu, to take, 9h'nnen, to name, <»5feifcn, to whistle, -i* fie gen x), to cherish, ^reiieil, to praise, ^ueQen y), to gush, ffiad^in z), to avenge, ^C[t\)(tt, to advise, Oietben, to rub, Sfiet^cn, to tear, dUitm a), to ride, SReniicn 6), to run, 9ttect)en, to smell, 3fiiugeu, to wrestle, 9ftiliuen, to run (of fluids), 3ftuf?n c), to call, ®aljen d), to salt, ©aufeit, to drink, to tipple, (Sauget: e), to suck, @^affen/\ to create, ©(^eiben g), to separate, ®(^eincR to appear, PRESENT INDICATIVE. i6) )Hn|)le, bu maMefl (mdfjift), ev ma\)[t (ma^lt) cfe metbe, 2C. c^ melEe, bn melffl or niilffi, er melft or milft tc^ meffe, bu mtffefi, ev miffet or mift id) mi^falle, bu migfallft, ev mtw= fa at e§ mt^Iliijit id) maij, bu magfl, ev mag, wix inogen, jc. id) miip, bu mu|t, ev mup, mx miiffen, tl)r miiffet or mii^t, k. id) ne^me, bu utmmft, ev ntmmt tc^ neune, jc. i(^ pfftfC, 2C. i^ pflege, jc. id) iJveife, jc. id) quelle, iiu quillfi, ev qutUt tc^ va(^C; ic. id) vat^c, bu Vrttf)fi, er rat^ id) viibi, JC. ict) veife, jc. i^ xtiti, JC. id) vcnne, jc. tc^ vicc^e, JC. tcb vinge, jc. id) xiimt, JC. i(^ vufe, JC. id) faljc, JC. ic^ faufc, bu fdiiffi, ev fduft id) fangc, jc. id) fc^afe, jc. lid) fc^eibe, jc. I i(^ fc^eine, ac. IMP. INDIC. id) maf)Itc (mubl) id) mieb id; molf id) ma^ id) mifefiel e3 nii^lnng id) moc^te ic^ mu^tc id) naf)m ic^ nanntc icftvfiff id)^)fiog ic|) pries ic^ quoH i^ vacate (voc ic^ xiit\) id) rieb icfe vi§ id) xitt id) tatinte or veuute id) rod) id) vang id) xanxi id) vief ic^ faljtc icfefoff t(^ fcfeuf id) fc^ieb t^ f4)ien OP THE OLD FORM. § 78. 353 IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. iit niablcte mai)k ijemablen. v) E.xcept the past participle ge= (iniiMf) mal)leil, no irregular form is t'cfc mtefe meibe s^emietcn. in use. id) inolfe melfe I^cmolfen, w) Soinelimes regular. 3Kilffl, &c , rarely used. id) ma^c mip I'jemeffen. id) mi^ficle mijsfalie nu^faricn. ti mi^langc miiHiiiQe miflungen. tc^ nio(t)te' — ijemoc^t. id) miiite - i^emu^t. tc^ nci^me ntmm genommen. tc^ ucnncte iieiiue genannf. id) vnffe Vfeifc or Vfetf gevnifeu. tcb vfliJ^c pflege gepftogen. X) When it signifies, to wait tc^ priefc Vveife gevviefen. upon, or to be accustomed, it ia tc^ qiiolie ciuette geqiioUeu. r(;gular. y) GucUen, to swell, is regular. i(i rcic^te (roc^e) rac^c 9erad)t (gero= z) The irregular form is no long- d)itt). er used. Where it occurs in id) rtct^e rat^e geratben. former writers it must not be ic^ viebe reibe ijerieben. confounded with the same tc^ rtffe reiec geriffen. forms finni vied)en. tc^ vitte rette gerttten. a) SSeveiten, to ride to, like all the compounds of letteil, is irregular ; but bcvcitcil, to make ready, from bevett, rea- dy, is regular, like all deriva- tives. tc!) rcnncte venne geramit or ge? b) 0Jcnnte and gevemit, not vennt. often used. id) roc^c riec^e or xitd) gevod)en. id) vanqc riiigc gerungen. id) ramie (ronne; rtnnc gtroiineii. icfc vtffe rufe gcnifen. c) Regular in some writers, but improperly so. ic^ faljctc falje gefatjen. d) Irregular only in the parti- ciple, and in that when used i(^ foffe faufe gcfoffcn. adjectively: as, gefaljone "5t= fd}e ; cr i)<[t jit gffaljt. t^ fofle fauge gefogen. e) €iillgll and failgt are not supported by jjood usage, but faugeil, to suckle, is regular. ic^ fc^iife fc^affe gef^nffcn. /) In the signification of to pro- cure, to get. it is regular, as also anfd)affeil, to purchase, to buy ; abfc^affeil to part with, to dismiss. id) fc^tebe fc^etbc gef^iebcn. g) The active verb fitftben, to i^ fc^icu« fc^eine gef4»tenen. part, to disjoin, to divide, la regular. 354 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. INFINITIVE. Sc^elten, to scold, (Sob even, to shear, (Sd)ieben, to shove, (5cbie|3en, to shoot, <^c^)hi^en, to flay. ©cl)lafen, to sleep, Sct)la[ieu h), to beat, (Sct)U-ic^en, to sneak, 'Sc^leifeU f\ to sharpen, to whet, (5i^lei§eit, to slit, (2d)ltefett, to slip, vSd)lte^en, to shut, (5(i)liit0eii, to sling, (Sc6inei§en, to flmg, (Sd^mel^fu ku to melt, (2ct)uaiiben, to snort, ©cf)neiben, to cut, (Sc^raubeii Z), "to screw, <2c^vetbeii, to write, Scfcveieii, to cry, Sd^rciteil, to stride, (5c|roten, to bruise, to gnaw. (g(tn?aven m), to suppurate, (gcfeivetgcn, to be silent, ©4ireUen n). to swell, (Scbwimmen, to swim, ©fbivinben, to vanish, (fccbiinngeii o), to swing, (5ci)tU0ren, to swear, lte^c, 2C. id) [(tlln^e, :c. id) fc^met^e, 2C. id) fd)melie, bu fc^metjefi (f^mil= neft), ev fc^meht (f*mil5t) id) fcfeniebe or fc^naubc t(^ fd)netbc, JC. tc^ fc^vau&c, 2c. tc^ frf)veibe, jc. id) fd)veie, 2c. icfe fd)veite, jc. ic^ fc^vete, :c. ic& fd)ttiave, jc. id) fd)n)eige, ic. id) fcijiDelle, bu fc^twillfi, er fd)TOiUt id) fc^n.nmmc, 2C. ic^ fc^tvinbe, :c. id) fd)iwin9e, 2C. ic^ fc^tUDve, 2C. id) febe, bu fte^fi, er fte^t ic^ bin 2C. i^ fenbe, 2C. id) ftcbe, 2C. id) ftnge, 2C. id) ftnfe, 2c. id) ftnne, 2c. id) ft|e, 2C. id) foU, bu foUfi, « foU id) fpalte, 2c. iti fpeie, 2c. id) fpinne, 2f. IMP. INDIC. td)fd)alt(fc6olt) id) fd)ov id) fd)ob id) fd)D^ ic^ f4)uiib i(^ fd)Iief ic| fcl;luc^ id; fcfclid) i^ fc^Itff t(^ \d>\i% i&i fd)Iof id) fd)lo^ idi fd)[an9 icb fc^mi^ id) fc^mols id) fd)nob id) fcbuitt id) fd^vaubte (fcfevob) id) fd)vieb idi fd)vic ic^ fcfevitt ic^ fc^votcte id) fcfetvor ic^ fd)tvieg id) fcbwoU ic^ f(^v»amm icfe fd)\t>anb id) fd))vang or f^tininn tcfc fitiwov or fdMDUV tcb fab id) wav, 2c. id) fanbte and feiibete tc^ fott id) fana t(^ fan! |t4> f«nn jtcfe fa^ id) foUtc \\d) fvaltcte |ic^ fpte :i4 fpaun OF THE OLD FORM. §78. 355 IMl'. SLBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. ttt fitalrc fd)ilt ,iefi1)oltcn. (Titoltc) id) fit ore fd)cre or fd)ici- 9cfd)oreit, ict) fcbobe fd)icbe cjcutobcn. id) i"d)offe fd)tft5C i^cfd)pffcii. ict) fd)lllI^c fd)iiife lJefc^ulli^en. id) fd)[icfc fd)lafe rtcfd)(afcn. id) fd) I lii^e fc^la^e gcfd)laiieti. h) 3fiatbfd)tagcn and Berates id) fd)li(tc fc^ Icicle i]cfc^lid)en. fd)lagcil, to consult, are re giilar. id} fd)liffc fd)Ieife or fd)lcif ijofd;liffni. i) Regular in all other significa- tions, as, to demolish,, or to id) fd)iirTe feticide iU-fitliffeii. drag. id) I'd^lofff fitiiefe (■;cutlpfffit. icb idiioffe fttltcge gifdilcff^tt. id) fcfclaiifle Ktliiuje i3efd)(un9en. i>t fit m iff e fdimci^c 3ffd)nnfffn. iit fd)mDlje fitmil^ or 9cfd)moljen. k) As an cutive verb it is regu- fd)mcl5 lar. id) fd'.tii>bc fitnaube gefitucbeit. id) fduiitte fitneite gcfdjiitrffu. id) ''d)iaubetc fc^raubc gcfdjraubt /) Commonly regular, fc^vaubte. (U-bviH'e) (gefitrcben). gefd)vaiibt. id) fd)vicbe fd)vcibe (]cfd)viebcti. ' id^ fd)vtee fd) vcie i]efd)rifcn. id) fitrirte fd)rfite gefd)vittfn. id) fdivotete fd)vote gefd)rpteii. Regular now except in the parti- ciple, and this is frequently gei'd)votet. id) fd))vcve fcfctvave gef(tn.H)ven. m> Sd)irievfi JC. in the present id) rd)ii'ifi^e fd)iveti]c gefd)unegen. is provincial. id) fd)aiDlic fd)roill or fd)weUe 9efd)Jt>oIieit. n) Regular, when active. id) fd) ir iim 111 c fd)!vimine gefd)a>oninien. id) fitusiiite fd)5viut'e l:}efd)llmn^fn. id) fcbivaiitje fc^iuinac 9efd)aningfn. 0) Scanning is less in usage than fci)n)ang. id) fdiaun'c nr fd)n?5vc gefitivcrcn. fd)ii.Mive id) fai^e iTcbe gefeben. id) jvare ffi gemefen. id) feiibete ffiibe gefiitlbt and gffent-cr. iii) fofte ficbe gefptteii. p) When active it is mostly re- id) faille fitigc finfc gefungcn. gular. id) riiife gcfuitfeii. id) fiiiine fiinie gefonnen. (fi>uiie) id) fafie ftfee giffffett. id) foUfe — gcfollt. id) fiMlteN fualfe gefl>a(ten. q) Irregular only in the parti- id) fvMee fyeie gofpieen. ciple, and this is sometimes id) fpamie fpinne gefponnen. gefpaltet when the verb is (fpi>nnc) active. 356 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. INFINITIVE. Svleigeu, to split, <5pred)en, to speak, Spvie^en r), to sprout, (Sprtngen, to spring, (2ted)en, to sting, to prick, (Stetfen s), to stick, to be fast- ened. ^Sre^eti, to stand, (gte^Ien, to steal, @teiaen, to ascend, (Stevoen, to die Sttfben t). to fly (as dust), ©tinfen, to stink, igtoBeu, to push, (Stveicben, to stroke, Streireu, to contend, SI)itn, to do, Xragen, to bear, 2:veffeu, to hit, ^reiben, to drive, 2;reten, to tread, Sriefen, to drop, to trickle, Xrinfeu, to drink, 2;rugen, to deceive, JSerbcrgcn, to conceal, 23erbteten, to forbid, U3erb[eiben, to remain, -Serbletcfceit, to grow pale, iBertevbeit u). to perish, SScvbrie^cn, to offend, SSergeffen, to forget, 93evbeblen, to conceal, iBerltfren, to loose, SSerlbfcfcen, to extinguisli, 23erfcJ^aUen w", to die away sound. 33evfc{)n.Mtlben, to disappear, Qieraitrren, to perplex, SScrjci^en, to pardon, PRESENT INDICATIVE. IMP. INDie. id) ]>Iei^e, :c. !c^ fpredie, in fpxid)% er fpvtcbt icf) ^pxiiii, :c. tci) fijringc, :c. idi ftecfee, bit fttc^ji, er fiicfjt ic^ ftecfe, :c. id) fre§e, :c. id) ^ii)k, bu ftteblft, er fttebit id) fteige, :c. t* ficrbe, bu fiirbfi, er ftirbt id) ftiebe, 2C. id) ftinfe, 2C. id) floie, bu fiofeft, er flb^t id) ftreicie, :c. id) firette, k. t^ tbue, bu tf)uf!, er t!)ut id) trcige, bu trcigft, er trngt icb trcire, bu triffft, er trtffr, id) rretbe, :c. tc^ trete, bu txittyt, er txitt tc6 txat id) li'iefe, :c. licfe rroff tc^ trinfe, :c. lict tranf id) trlige, bu rritgil, er triigt jic^ trog id) »:erberge, bu berbirgil, er 'ozx- id) oerbarg •id) rerbtete, 2C. id) cerbleibe, :c. id) verbletdie, :c. id) vcvberbe, tn verbirbfi, er !:?er: i btrbt eg scrbrte^t \\d) oergeffe, bu oergiffeji, er i^er= ' gi§t id) verbeble, :c. id) fpltefj or fpHB id) ]\ixad) \id)mo^ jid) fprang lid) \tad) jic^ ftetfte orfiaf. jid) ftanb (fhinb) id) \tahl iiiobl) id) ftieg tc^ ftarb ic^ ftoS icfc ftan! id} ftteg id) jiric^ ic6 ftritt i!i) that id) tru0 id) rrar tc^ tvieb tdi berliere, :c. idi oevlf)t"dif, tu rerlofc^'eftorser; lii\teft, er serlbfcfet or berllfc^r in id) v^evfcfcaIle, :c. id) vevfd)wiuce, :c. ,t4> sern^ivre, ic. I tci i^erjei^e, ;c id) yevBct id) oerBlieb id) c>erbli4> id3 vtxMxb e§ serbroi id) berga^ id) »er§e^Ite id) serlcr id) xiixloid) id) verf^oll t^ berfd)n.Hinb tc^ 'jerrDirrtc id) serjte^ OF THE OLD FORM. S'78. 957 IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. iit fpliffc fVlciK gcfpliffcji. ict) fpriidjc fpvid) gefpvpd)eii. tit fpvoffe fpvic^c gefpvoffeii. r) This must not be confounded ict) fpraiiflc fpvinae gefpvuitgcn. (in the imperfect) with the re- id) jlacbe Hid) qeftodjen. gular verb fproffen. id) ftcrfte or itedEc ijcftcdt. s) This verb is commonly regu- mt lar ; when active it is always td> Itaiibe mt gefianbeu. so. (ftiiiite) id) (tabic ftic^l ijefioblen. (ftoble) id) itifijc fietgc gefticgen. id) ftarbe ilirb gefioi-ben. (fliivbe) tc^ ftobe fitebe geftcben. t) So 3erfiieben, to be scattered icb fivinfe ftinfe gcftuitteu. as dust. id) fttc^e tlD^C 9c[to^en. id^ firid)C llreic^c gcttv{d)cn. x^ flrittc firdte geftritten. id) tbate tbiif getbau. i6) triigc traac ijctragen. id) trafe trifr gerroffcn. gttiieben. id) trtebe tretbc id) trafe tritt getveten. ic^ ticffe tricf or tricfe getroffeu. t(^ tranfe trtiife getvunfen. i* tioge trugc getrogen. t(^ beibarge verbirg bevborgen. tc^ t>evbi^te oerbietc t)crboten. id) rievbliebe bevbleibc oerblieben. tc^ yevbUd)e »crbletc^e berblicfeen. id) revbarbe rerbivb cerbovben. V) aScrberbctt, to destroy (acti (yevbiivbk") ve), is regular. eS oerbrpffe verbvicfe werbroffen. V) 23evbreu$t, JC, nearly obso i(fc vcrgafe oevgi^ oergeffen. lete. ic^ »erf)e^Ictc aer^e^Ie ber^e^tt or cerbo^Ien. id) feerlore yevlieve aetloven. ic^ fcevlofdjc yerlofd)e or serlifc^ oerlofc^en. i* »crf(^oIIc sevfc^aUe yeifc^oUeu. to) But little used, except in the imperfect and participle. id) berfc^njiinbe t>erfd)iDinbe oerfdiraunben. ic^ bermirvte betairre DertDtvrt or bernjorven. id) feetite^e oerjei^e fteriie^en. 'S5B ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. INFINITIVE. 3Bad)fcti, to grow, SBiiijcn or ^JSiegeu x), to weigh, SBafc^en y), to wash, 2Be.ben z), to weave, SJBeii'^eu a), to yield, 2Seifeit, to show, SBenben 6), to turn, SBerben, to sue for, 2Berben, to become, 2Berfcu, to throw, SBtnben, to wind, SGBiffen, to know, SQJoIIen, to will, 3f if)cn, to accuse of, 3le^cn c), to draw, Swingcn, to force, PRESENT INDICATIVE, ic^ wad)U. bu wact)fefl, ev itnicf)ft ic^ wiigc or tviege, bu tudgfi or tviegft, ei- tvagt or raiegt ic^ Webe, jc. i^ \mi(i)i, 2C. i6) wetfe, jc. tc^ tvenbc, k. id) werbe, bu wtvbfl, ev mvU ici) tvevbe, bu wivfl, ev t»trb \6} toerfe, bu wivffl, erwtvft t(^ tvtnbe, ic. t^ weti, bn tvet^t, cr wet'f td^ will, bu wilift, ei' mU. id) hiii)i, JC. id) jie^e, jc. t:^ jroingc, JC. IMP. INDIC. id) woQ id) wufd) id) wob icb void) id) wies ic^ ttjenbcte or ttjanbte id) \va):h i(i^ n?arb or njurbe, bu iDUvbeft, cr IDrtVb or TOUVbe, n)ii*n)ui-ben,jc. c^ warf d) tuanb d) wu§tc c^ woUte d^Stc^ d) jmang § 79. Verbs of the New Conjugation {commonly called ''regular verbs'^), (1) In verbs of the New, or simpler form, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle are not produced, as in the Old conjuga- tion, by a change of the radical vowels ; but by means of the suffi:^ c t or t, which serves as a tense cliaracieristic : thus, taking the rad- OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 359 IMP. SUBJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. REMARKS. id) jvii^jfc Wrtcbfc flcumcfifen. id) wogc w'd^t or iviege geivogcn. x) SSiigen is active, and lias lUfigc in the imperf. subj. • tviet3eu is neuter, and lias iviege. iBiegen, to rock ; is resjular. t4> wiifc^e tVrtfc^C Qemafcf)en. y) SBafc^cfi and Wiifitf are also used. id) mbi webe geiBoben. z) Regular except with the poets, or when used figuratively. id) ivici)e mctcl)c genjtc^en. a) SBetc^cn, to soften, to tnoli- fy, is regular. id) iviefe ivetfc gewiefcu. tc^ tveukte njenbe gewcnbet or geti^anbt. b) Regular when active. tc^ mixU mvb geivorbeH. id) wiirbc tuevbe gewovbcn ; (and as an auxiliary) ivorbcn. id) iravfe roivf gcivorfen. (miirfe) id) ttjciiibe aniibc gewunben. id) xvii^U rutffe (jevru^t. ic^ \v»Utt - geroollt. id) jie^e Sei^c gejtcf)en. tc^ jbgc 5ie{)e gejogen. c) SfW^fi 2C- antiquated, and only in poetical usage. tc^ Jtviingc iwinge gejTOUugen. ical part (IcB) of toben, to praise, and affixing thereto et or t, we g-et icb e t or Icb t ; to which add the personal endings and we have Icbete or (cbte (lob -{- ^ -{- c), I praised ; lobcteft or tobteft, thou didst praise, &c. (2) The verbs of the New form diifer again from those of the Old, in that the former have in the Perfect Participle the termination et or t, instead of en : as, gelob e t or getob t, praised. See the table of terrainatiojis § 76. 360 PARADIGM OF A VERB § 80. § 80. PAEADIOM OF A « 1 1 ^ (3 in INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. d) lobe, a lobt, anr loben, i|)i' lobet, ftc loben, I praise, thou praisest. he praises, we praise, you praise, they praise. IMPERFECT TENSE. lobte. Ml lobtefl, ei- lobte, iv»ir lobten, ibr Tobtet, fie lobten. I praised, thou didst praise, he did praise, we did praise, you did praise, they did praise. ix l)at ivii- babcn tbr babft fte brtbcn PERFECT TENSE. I have thou hast he has we have you have [i J they have J PLUPERFECT TENSE. I had 1 thou hadst | ^^ he had \ | we had ("a you had i ^ they had J id) batte 1 i>u battefl 1 ^- ev battc ', •» mix batten f^ i\)x battet | « fie fatten J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. id) iverbe c>u tuivfl et ivirb tviv tvevben i*" ibv lver^et j ]it luerbcn j I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will '.■i SECOND FUTURE TENSE. tc^ rcevbe 1 ^ bu ^Dtvft I -I er njivb I >» mt tvevben [ ^ ibiv ttjerbet | 3 fie wecbeu J ^ I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. id) lobe, bu lobefl, er lobe, mix loben, tbr lobet, fie loben, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may li IMPERFECT TENSE. id) lobete, bu lobeteft, er lobete, luir lobcten, tbr lobetct, fie lobeten, I might 1 thou mightst | ^ he might I .3 we might f 2^ you might they might J PERFECT TENSE. bu babefl er ^abe roir ^aben tbr b«bet fie i)ab(n Is may have praised, &,c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. id) haiU_ 1 I might have 1 I _ bu brtttefl 1 ^ praised, &,c. ev ^citte I >g tuir biitten \-z tbv battet '== fte f)dtten j FIRST FUTURE TENSE. tc^ njerbe ") (if) I shall praise, bu wevbefl | _- &c. er loerbe 1 S mtr wfvben f o ibf tuevbet fie tverbeu j SECOND FUTURE TENSE. id) ttjerbe 1 = (if) I shall have bu n)crbefl er tt^erbe luir roerben tbr werbet fte werben J praised, &c. OF THE NEW FORM. § 80. VERB OF THE NEW FORM. to praise. 361 CONDITIOXAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE FIRST FUTURE. id) JtMirbe 1 bU IVMivt'Cft I , 2 er xsnxH [ S § rvix wiiiteu iifx tviirbet fte miivben SECOND FUTURE, tu rciivbefi | ev wiirbe I ^ -a^-> mix tDiirben f ^ g » tt)r toiirbet I » J"3 ^c wiitbett M< a- PRESENT TENSE 1. wanting. L Unn- Ml, praise thou. 3. lobe cr, let him praise I. ipbeii iinr, let us praise. I. lobct tin-, praise ye. 3. I ebon fte, let them praise. PRESENT TENSE, lobeit, to praise. PERFECT TENSE. gelcbt bahtn. to have praised. FIRST FUTURE. loben wcrben, to be about to praise. PRESENT. lobeiib. praising. PERFECT. gelobt, praised. 362 LIST OF VERBS OF THE MIXED CONJUGATION. § 81. § 82. § 81. The Mixed Conjugation {emhracijig the irregular verhs lyro'perly so called). There are a few verbs (sixteen in all), which have a sort of mixed conjugation: partaking of the Old Form, in that tliey change their radical vowels to form the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Parti- ciple ; and at the same time, partaking of the New Form, in that they assume, in the same parts, the tense-sign te and tiie participial ending t. These are they wliich, strictly speaking, are the irregular verbs of the language, and accordingly, they are here so classed. They will be found, also, in the general List of (so called) "irregular*' verbs (page 346), which, for the sake of convenience, we have there inserted. § 82. LIST OF VERBS OF THE MIXED CONJUGATION, > PRESENT ISrPERFECT. PAST INFINTnVE, of the indicative. PAPvTI- CIPLE. -< Indicat. Subjunct. g SSrennen, to burn, id) brannte id) ttennte jebmnrt. breiine. SBtinijen, to bring, id) brr.d)ie id) bt.id)re .]ebrad)f. — S Ciirfie .jerurft. .^aben, to have, id; habe, tu I'afr, it tat \\A\ fmtte idy 1 lirte jehnbr. !-abf. J^fnnfn, to know, — — jid) fannte :d) fennte lefiinnr. — fil^nnen, to be able, can, id) fr.nn, tu fannll, er fann irti fonntt id) fonnte jffonnr. l^i^jen, to be allowed, id; mag, tu inaall, ct iitai) id) Hicd;te ll^ ll!0d}tf .jfniod)t. may, 1 ■??:iin?n, to be obliged, id; iiiup, tu iiiiiBt, er mup iid) niufite id) iiitipre aeuuifit. must, 1 ?iennen, to name, — — ;id) nannto ;d) iifnnte unonnt. — ^•.■fnnen, to ran, — — 'id) rannie (d) tfnnff ijer.innt. — €entc;i, to send, — — id; fnncte id; fenfete .jfl'ontr. — ecflv-n, to be obliged, id) foil, ^^ follil, er foil ] — — — shall, 21'fnffn, to turn. — — id) iiMnjre id) irentcte ■loirontt. SyifT^n, to know. id) m'\%, fu iveiftr, er lijeip id; ampre id; iviipte geivupt. inffe. ffioCen, to be willing, \ir a^'cvben f =3 tbr ivevbft I ^ fie wevben J I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will 1 ^ SECOND FUTURE TENSE. icf) tt)evbe 1 g ^u n)ivii | -g cv irivb '1 >=^ iinv werbeii f -^ ii}V njerbet = ftc wcti»en J ^ I shall thou -wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. ic^ biirfc, bu biivfefl, er biirfe, anr biirfen, ibr biivfet, fie biirfen, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may 1-^ IMPERFECT TENSE. i6) biirfte, bu biirftefl, er biirfte, luirbiirften, ibr biirftet, fte biirften; I might 1 -6 thou mightst 1 2 he might I 'g we might ; Jj you might | "^ they might J ^ PERFECT TENSE. id) b» been permitted, er iverbe _ voiv a^evben Ttr ibr rocrbet j fie rocrben J &c. PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. to dare. (See Remark 9.) 365 COXDITIOXAL. FIRST FUTURE. id) tti'trbe ") _^ o bu rofirbefi j _. 4 er ivurbc I ^ — ^ voiv iviirbeu \,^ o-S t^r iviirbet | -^ "S § fie wurbfu J ^ g. SECOND FUTURE. tc^ miirbe 1 = ^t: bu iDiirtefi I •= ^ p cr murbe I ^ -a t tint H) fir ben [ i^ 3 c tjr ttiirbet I | | § fte teiirben j ^ Z^ IMPERATIVE. Wanting. INFINITIVE. I PARTICIPLE. PRESENT TENSE. biirfeti, to be per- mitted. PERFECT TENSE. gebiirft ^aBen, to have been permitted. PERFECT, geburft, permitted. PRESENT. ^iu•fenb, being permitted. 366 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. (3) ^onnat, I^^DICATIVE. \ fatin, Ml faimfi, er fann, rch- foiiuen, ibr fomiet, fte fonuen, PRESENT TENSE. 1 am thou art he is we are you are they are tc^ fontite, :>u fouiiteft, ev foiir.te, wix fonnteit; ihr fountet, fte fottiiteu, IMPERFECT TENSE. I was thou wast he was we were you w^ere they were PERFECT TENSE. id) Kite Ml ha\t ei- hat iinr bvtbeu tbv l)abet ]h t'v^beu I have "1 thou hast i he has '■ we have [ you have j they have j PLUPERFECT TENSE. id) hattz bu barteil er batte 111 tv batten ibr bnttct fte f)attctt 1 I had thou hadst he had we had ! ^ you had J they had j «■ D FIRST FUTURE TENSE. !(t5 tVCVbe ^ Ml nnrft I er ivivb [ ivir aievbcn f ibr jrevbet I lie nievben J I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE, i:b jyerbe 1 S bit wtrfi I "2 er_ VDtvb I ^ iiuv merben ; H ibr tuevbet ^ ]"te luciben J ^ I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIA^E. PRESENT TENSE. tri) fi.Mine, bu foiniefi, er foniie, luir foniien, it}r f5uuet, fte fijnncn, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. tc£ fi?itnte, I might "] bu fouutef}, er fc>iiiite, wtr fonnten, ibr fimittef, fte fonnten, thou mightst | j5 he migM I -g w^e might f ^ you might | -^ they might j PERFECT TENSE. icf) bahz Ml b^ibeft er i)aht anr baben ibr ^abet fte |aben I may have been able, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. k- I might have been able, &c. icf) bii tte bu i}atteii er biitte wix fatten ibr battel fte ijattiii FIRST FUTURE TENSE, tcf) weibe 1 (if) I shall be tu irerbefi | er poerbe anr juerbeu . ibr U'^erbet j fte rcerbeu J able, &c. 1^5 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. ic^ ttjerbe 1 = bu un-rbeft | ^ er iferbe [-^ ivir iverben f" 5 ibi jverbet j ^ fte rcerbeu J cj (if) I shall have been able, &c. -PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERB8. § 83. 367 to be able. (See Remark 10.) CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting- PRESENT TENSE. EoiUlflt, to be able. finmenb, being able. PERFECT TENSE. gefonut fiaben, to have been able. PERFECT, been able. FIRST FUTURE. id) iviivbe ] ^ bit tviirbefl | _•■ _ luiv a^il\■ben [ _S o ibv iviii-MU i ■'^ "S- \ii luuvbfii j HH SECOND FUTURE. lit wi'mz ) ^ '^ 6 bii wiivbejl i -i J '^^ er wi'irbe I ^ -^J nnv roiirbeit [ = ^"^ tfer roiiibet I o ^ g fte iviirbeii j "E ^^ 368 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. % 83. (4) ^Id^m, to be allowed, '^ f 3 ^ (3 INDICATIVE. i^ mag, er mag, wiv mogcn l^r m&ijet, fie mijgen, PRESENT TENSE. I am thou art he is we are you are they are ic^ moc^tc, cii mocbtefl, er mocj^te, anr moc^ten, \i)x niDc^tet, lie mocijten, IMPERFECT TENSE. I was thou wast he was we were you were they were J" PERFECT TENSE. i(^ ^abe ev f)at roir ^abcn tbr babet fte ^aben !« I have thou hast he has we have you have they have J PLrPERFECT TENSE. ic^ iiCittt Ml ^attefl er ^atte luiv batten ibr baftet fte botteii I had 1 -d thou hadst I | he had I ^ we had [H you had | g they had J ^ FIRST FUTURE TENSE. i(^ wcrbe 1 cu ivirfl er luirb _ ivir Jvcrben f-2 ihr werfet j fte iverbeu j !l I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 1-^ tc^ rvevbe 1 S Ml tuirfi I ^ er wirt 1^ ivtr ttjerben [ -S^ ibr werbet | fte werbeu j is I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. t^ moge, fu mogefi, cr moge, ■ivir mogen, \l)t moj^et, fie mogen, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. tc^ mD(|te, t'li mi3cbtefi, er nioc^te, u)ir moitten. ibv niDcbtet, fte moc^ten, I might thou mightst he might we might you might they might PERFECT TENSE. tc^ brtbe bu brtbefl er babe roir \)abtn ibr babet fte baben I may have been allowed, &,c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. I might have been allowed, &c. bu battefl | er battc I luir batten f ibc b«tf«t fie batten J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. t(^ njerbe ^ vif ) I shall be al- bu irerbeji | ^ lowed, &c. er werbe 1 ^ iinr iverben f -2 ibc iDtrbcl ^ lie werbeii j SECOND FUTURE TENSE. i(^ ttjerbe 1 S (if) I shall have fu njerbefl [ •§ been allowed, er tuerbe I :2^ &c. twir roerben f "g- Ibr werfcet | s fte mxitn J s> PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 369 to have liberty. (See Remark 11.) CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. PRESENT TENSE. PRESENT. mcflen, to be allowed. moijenb, being allowed. % PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT. to have been al- lowed. gemocfet, allowed. FIRST FUTURE. ^ tc^ njiirbe ' bu wiirbcfl cr tuiirbc tt)tr anirben ii)x jviirbet fte njurben . I should be allowed, &c. SECOND FUTURE. t* miirbe ^ bu wiirbefl er roiirbe wir miirben t^t wiirbet fit toiirben , 370 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. (5) S^lnffcn, to be obliged; IIs^DICATIVE. SUBJUXCTIYE. g^ iMi mu^t, '^ ( cr mu5, ^>3 itnr miijjen, fif niiiffen, PRESEZx'T TENSE. I am thou art he. is we are you are they are \-6 I Hi 3 ir.IPERFECT TENSE. ti^ multe, bit nni^tefl, \x>\x mn§feu, tfn- mu^tet, )"te mirpreu, I was thou wast he was we were you were | they were j V. M PERFECT TENSE, Ml l)afi cv hat mt I)aBcn fte baben KS I have thou hast he has we have you have they have j I a Y PLUPERFECT TENS! Ml battcft I ^ ev I)atte {"^ mx batten f S i6v ^a(tet I « I had ■) ^3 thou hadst I w; he had I 2 we had ( ° you had 1 g they had J ^ FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 1 tit ttjcrbe Ml nnrft er ttjtrb mil- lyerben ; == ihr u^erbct I = fte iverbeii J I shall thou v^dlt he will we shall you wall they will I SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 1 tct ffierbe ^ <'i bit lyirfi "^ (3 & ■? 2 1^^ er iinvb ii^iv ifcrben '' '^ ibv tvcrbet | B fte trerbeii j i; I shall thou ■wilt he \\'ill we shall you will PRESENT TENSE. d) miiffe, bu iiiiiffcft, er nuijjfe, roil- muffcn, itjx iniifjet, fte miiffen, I may thou mayst he may we may you may they may niPERFECT TENSE. i^ mii^te, bu miii^tefi, er mii^te, rotv mii^tcn, t^r mij^tet, fte miiften. I might 1 . thou mightst | a> he miglrt y^ wc might ; -§ you might | o they might j -^ PERFECT TENSE. tc^ !)abe Du I)abcft er habt rotr bah?n tbr iidbfit fte babeii 5- 5 I may have been obhged, &c. PLUPERFECT TENSE. I might have been obhged, &LC. id) hatU 1 m f)atteft i -- er batte it anr biitteii f S ibr hattft ! « lie patten J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. (if) I shall be obhged, &c. ici) ircrbe ^ Ml n^evbefl | j^ er ii?eri>e 1 jE roil- roevben [ --= ibr roevbet I - fie roerbcu J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. ^ g jtc^ roevbe 1 g (if) I shall have I g^;bu roerbefi |^ been obliged, I -^ O'er roevbe '. -^ &c. ■g,iinr roerben „ o:tbr roerbct | they will J -^ |ftc roerben j PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. must. (See Remark 12.) 371 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE. Wantir.f FIRST FUTURE. id) ttMtrbe ^ ^ , bit tlM'ivbefl I :i- _^«i ev unirbc { }E "^ anv triivbeii f == ibv tviirbet | ^ fie wiirbt-n J hh"® o ^ bit iriirbej^ | -g JJ^ ev ttjiivbe I :f~ ^ ? nnr UMivben \<^ s c tf)r tiMubet I H fte ttjiirben IS J; c PRESENT TENSE. miiffcii, to be obliged. PRESENT. miiffenb, being obliged. PERFECT TENSE. gtmii^t fiabeu, to have been obliged PERFECT, gemiiR obliged. 372 FARAJ^IG^XS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83. (6) (SoUcit, to be INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. i ; 2 t>u foUfi, « ^ 3 cr foil, J ( 1 anr foUen, 1^2 ibr fuUet, p3 ^ 3 lie follen, !! I am thou art he is we are you are they are y bit IMPERFECT TENSE. Ic^ follte, tn foUtefl, cv follte, mv foil ten, ifei- fo (I tet, fte foUrcn, I was ^ thou wast ! -d he was ', g^ we were (3 you were | o they were J Ml ftrtfl er bflt mix l)aben tbr ^abet fte ^abeii PERFECT TENSE. 1 1 I have thou hast he has (3 we have f ® you have i § they have J ^ PLUPERFECT TENSE. ic^ fiatte Ml hrtttefl ev {)atte unv batten tbr ^attet fte batten I had 1 -d thou hadst j tjo he had 12 we had f ° you had ! S they had J ^ FIRST FUTURE TENSE. icb tverbc fu irtrfl ev xvix'i} ) 2 ibr n?erben f ^ ivcrbet i "^ tte wevbcn J I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will ! ^ SECOND FUTURE TENSE. icf) ivevbe 1 = bu iDtvft I >| ev nsivb 1 -»- luiv merben f ^ ibr wevbet £. fie werben J «, I shall thou wait he will we shall you will they will PRESENT TENSE. Ic^ folle, DU foUefi, er folk, luiv foUen, ibr foUet, fte foUen, I may thou maysl he may we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. * foUte, bu foUtej^, ev follte, anv follten, bv foUtet, fte follten, I might 1 ^ thou mightst I o he might 1 ;a we might f "o you might | « they might J -^ PERFECT TENSE. tC^ i)Ciht fu bobefl ev i)abt lutv baben Ibv b^^bet fte baben 1 I may have been I ^ obhged, &c. ^1 PLUPERFECT TENSE. id) biitte 1 bu bcittcfi I ^. er biitte (a wtr fatten \'zr ibr biittet | ** fte fatten J I might have been obUged, &c. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 1 (if) I shall be tc6 a>erbe bn roerbefi er iverbe 1 anv rcevben f ibr a'ierbet | fte n?erben J obUged, &c. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. iicft jvevbe 1 I ^ \ g.-3iba ttterbeil | .» I o^'anr a^crben j'^ I ^ ojibr roetbet £. J -« I fte roerben J ^ (if) I shall have been obliged, &c. PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. obliged. (See Remark 13.) 373 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. PRESENT TENSE, folien, to be obliged. foUenb, being obliged. PERFECT TENSE. gefoUt f)at)cn, to have been obliged. PERFECT, obliged. FIRST FUTURE. id) wiirbe ) ^ ^3 cr iriir^c (^ l-T njtv tviivbeii ( o 2 w ft? n^iirbni J _ o SECOND FUTURE. td) roiivbc 1 = Ml n.niit'etl i -§ cr njiirbe I .0 ^^ ? ttjtr TOiirben \ ^ go t&c tufirbet Ki. -« S fie tBiirben J ^ ^^ 374 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. (7) 3»tffctt, to) mcip, Ml unnf.v eu wtip. anv iini'fen, tt)v anijer, fte unffen, '^ (3 INDICATIVE. PRESENT TE^SE. I know, thou knowest. he knows. we know. you know, they know. id) iinifte, ev timbre, mix nniften, it)v n?ub'tct jie raii^ten, mPERFECT TENSE. I knew, thou didsi he laiew. we knew. know. you knew, they knew. PERFECT TENSE. i(i) f)^ht bu l)a!t cv ^at mix babcn it)x ^cibit fte ftaben tc^ t-atte >u l)atU\t ev t)ntte iviv tjattcn ilii- 5'iif^t ne batten PLUPERF] 1 y% 1 have thou hast he has we have you have they have 2CT TENSE. I had 1 thou hadst j ^ he had [ ^ we had j g you had -^ they had J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. tc^ tv?rbe ~1 pu nnvft I - er ivivb I ^ anv ivevbeu f ^ il)r roevbet 1 " ft? iverben J I shall __ thou wilt he wdll we shall you will they will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. id) Jvevbe ^ g bu wirft ! >| er n>ivb [^ xoix ircvbcu ; fvben \^ tbr anrbft | " fte jverben J SECOND FUTURE TENSE. icb wcrbe 1 s (if) I shall have i>u aterbefi | >= known, &c. cv a->evbe i ^^ anv unn'beu [ RESENT TENSE . 1. wanting 2. iiMffe MI, know thou. 3. lytffe cv, let him know. iiniTeii ivir, let us know, iiu ffct ibx, know ye. n.>ifKii ftc, let them know. FIRST FUTURE. ^d) nnivbe 1 Ml IVlilbt" er 'anirte I ,H 2 - IV tr iviivt'en f -g" '^ ^ ftc '.luivcru J -^ SECOND FUTURE, id) UiflVbC "1 Si ^ j3 tii univbefl ! -5 _g -^ fi* tviirt'e i -^ ^ s iviv itjuvt-en [ iv ivoUten, we might f ^ ihr It) lite t, you might aj fte tvoUten, they might J "^ PERFECT TENSE. i 1 2 3 1 2 3 i^ t)abc 1 I have Ml t)aft 1 *-r thou hast ev \)^t 1 ^ he has mx Nbcn f S we have ibv fenbet | «= you have fte babea J they have ^ PLUPERFECT TENSE. 1 tc^ ^abe 1 I may have been bu b'ibefl ^-T willing, &c. er babe 1 ^ rctr b^iben ' 2 tbr briber «= fte baben ^ PLUPERFECT TENSE. 1 2 3 1 2 (3 tc^ ^atte 1 I had Ml t)attefl 1 *> thou hadst ev ^fltte I ^ he had \X)ix batten '2 we had ibr ^attet « you had fte b«tteu J they had FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 1 tdb b^ittc 1 I might have been bu battefl *--^ wuling, &c. er biitte I ^ luir b'Ttten f g ibr b«ff«t '^ fie biitten FIRST FUTURE TENSE. M II \6) vrerbc ~\ I shall Dii tvirft ^ thou vidlt er iDivb I j§ he vdll iviv \X!Z\'tii\\ 1 g we shall il)v werbet ^ you will fie irterbeii J they will ^ SECOND FUTURE TENSE .1 ic^ njevbc 1 (if) I shall be wil- bu roevbefl j j^- Hng, &c. er njerbe 1 ^ luir roevben ' g \^x werbet ^ fie werben _ SECOND FUTURE TENSE. i (1 2 (3 ( 1 \l t^ wevbe 1 s I shall bu tvirfl ^ thou wilt ev roivb i ^ he will it»ir werben f S we shall ibv iDerbet 1 g you will fte werben J ^ they will , i(i) tt»evbe "] s (if) I shall have bu wevbefl >» been willing, &c. ev luevbe i ^ it)ir juevbeu [a tbr roevbet g fte werbcn J ^ PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. willing. (See Remark 14.) 311 COXDITIO^"AL. IMPERATIVE. IXFIXITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Wanting. PRESENT TENSE. icoUen, to be willing. PERFECT TENSE. presj;nt. TOoUenb, willijig. PERFECT, getnoUt i^ciUn, jgctvoUt, to have willed, i willed. FIRST FUTURE. i4> tviirbe ^ v ^ tu luiirbefl | .j- ;f t toun? bern, he must hot or should not wonder at that. When used without an infinitive after it, one must be supplied to complete the construction: thus, (Bx barf nicbt hi ha§ •^auS (fommen), he ventures not (to come) into the house. (10) Bemarks on fonntn. The original signification of fijnnen was to know, or to know how ; hence the present sense, to be at liberty to do a thing, to be able ; as, id) fann lefen nnh fd)reiBen, I can (know how to) read and write. Its chief power now, is to indicate bare possibility, and hence it is often aptly translated by the English, may: as, ©r faun eg soerftanben IjaBen, he may (possibly) have understood it. It differs, therefore, from biitfen, when it (biirfen) is used (in the Imperfect Subjunctive) to express possibility ; for biirfen not only signifies that the thing 7nay be, but that it probably is or will be. ^omten like biirfen, has sometimes an infinitive understood after it, to complete the con- struction. (11) Be?narks on m g e n. SJlcgcn marks possibility under allowance or concession from an- other : as, (§x inag lad'ien, he may laugh ; that is, he has permission to laugh, no one hinders him. (Bx mag eiii fcrat>er SJlann fein, he may (I grant) be a brave man ; where the possibility of his being a brave man, is a thing conceded. Kindred to this are the other significa- tions (chance, inclination, loish, &c.) usually attributed to this verb : thus, eg mbd^Az tcgnen, it might rain ; that is, the causes that seem to forbid, are likely not to operate ; \i^ niod)te eg Be5\tseifcl]i, I am dis- posed or inclined to doubt it, that is, I might doubt it altogether, but for certain circumstances seeming to forbid : mijgc eg ber «>^immel ge? ben, may heaven grant it ; idi mag eg nidit t^un, I do not like to do it, that is, I am not permitted by ray feelings to do it cheerfully, &c. REMARKS OX mujfen, follcn and troHen. § 83. 379 (12) Bemarks on mil f fen. The German miiffcn and the English must, are very near equiva^ lents. The predominant power of the word is everywhere that of obligation or necessity, and this being kept in mind, it will often be convenient to employ in translating it, such words, as, be obliged, am to, liaie medio SLiiAlhelikfi. Often an infinitive is understood with it : as, idi nui^ jiiriidf, I must {go) back. (13) He marks on foil en. The prime and prevalent use of fcileu is to indicate obligation or necessity. What particular ^vord or phrase shall be employed to translate it, in any given case, must be determined by circumstances. It is only necessary always to adhere to the primary idea ; for in whatever way expressed, that primary sense must be kept in view. The following examples will be sufficient to show this: Su fcUft bvig tf)uu, thou art to (i. e. art obliged to) do that : (Sr fcU %dm\, he is to (i. e. is bidden to) go: @cU idi eg fjabeu ? am I to (i. e. am I bound or am I permitted id) have it ? 2)ic ^-lette ]c\[ gcfdilaoen tecrben feiii, the fleet is said or reported to (i. e. must, according to report) be beaten. Sie fcUen i§n nidit fctleibigt f;aben, you are supposed ov admitted not to (that is, you could not of necessity, in my opinion) have offended him. 32ao fcU ber >§ut ? what means the (i. e. v^hat must be the meaning of the) hat ? 23enn er fcmmen fettte, [o irtitt id:t e§ i^m fagen, if he should come (i. e. should be obligedhy circumstances to come) I will tell him so. So with an infinitive understood : ir»as3 fed idi ? what am I to (do) 1 tt>ag fcU 'i::x§'^. what signifies that? (i.e. supplying fehi, wliat is that to be ?) (Sr ir»eip nidit irasa er tiiuu fell, he does not know what to do. (14) Remarks on tD D 11 e n. SBoKcn implies ivi'vaxo, purpose : thus, icb trtU geljen, I will (to) go, i. e. my purpose is to go. The expression of mere futurity w^ould be, id) tr»erbc gcfien. Kindred to this is another signification of troUeii : as, er iniU hid) o,c]d)m Ijabcn, he wills to have seen you, that is, he will have it or affirms, that he saw you. 380 BxAMPLEs ON THE USE OF butfctt, founen, mogen, &c. ^ (15) Examples, further illustrating the uses of the preceding verbs. Set) barf eg tijun. @g burfte »ie((eict)t ir>a§r fein. (Be biirfte ico^l gefd)e^en. 2)u barf]l eg nur forbern. (£r faun iceber lefen nod) fd)reiben. 3d) faun mid) irren. 3d) fonnte ifjn nid)t uerjie^en. ^onnen @ie l^eute ju mir fommen ? 3d) mag bag nid)t. 3c^ mod)te gerne tt)i|fen, i»iet>iel U^r eg t|i. 3c^ mod)te tool^t etwag ba»on :^a; ben. (ig mag fein. 3d) mod)te lieber. SPflogc er tange tefeen ! 3d) mup eg tf)un. (Sx mixf te fid) feineg SBetrageng fd)d; men. S?luf te eg nid)t fo fommen ? 2Benn id) jlevben mii^te^ fo tuurbe i&l eg nid)t t^un. 3d) iuollte gerne gef)en. 3d) tuill ju ^u^e ge'^en. 3d) tt)oUte, baf tvit ge^en foUten. a\' "] :£ bu }yavfi | ^ ci- wax . g wtv tuaveii (^ i[)x wa\zt ^ fte ivavcii J "i^ I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had I.I Jl id) ware "^ g I might have been bu liniveft | -5 praised, &,c. er voave 1 g ivtir uniren [ ^ i()r uniret j ^ fte luareu J ^ FIRST FUTURE TENSE. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. i i { 1 f 3 ' 2 (3 id) lyevbe ^ s Mi unrft 1 -e er uuvb i p luir a'eibeii [ ^ tbr wevbet | o fte UH'Vbeit J ^ I shall thou wilt he will we shall you will they will ■1 iit lucrbe "^ g (if) I shall be bu werbeft | ^ praised, &c. er werbe 1 » 10 ir ivfvbeu j ^ ibr wfvbct ne ivevbeu J ^ SECOND FUTURE TENSE SECOND FUTURE TENSE. s ( 1 1 9 [3 f 1 2 (3 id) iDerbc ^ bu lytrfi et wirb wir tyerbeii ibv lyevbet fti" \yevben I shall 1 thou wilt 1 he will I we shall f you will 1 they will J 1^ iii) a)cvbf ^ Du ivcvbefl er lyerbc wir tpcrbeu ibr ajcrbet fie tyevben g (if) I shall have ^ been praised. PARADIGM OF A PASSIVE VERB. § 85. 383 A PASSIVE VEKB. to be praised. CONDITIONAL. FIRST FUTURE. ic^ anil-be ] ^ bii wiivbf|: | -g ^ ct luiirte ( p iuiv iinivbcii f ^ If tt)r iviivter \ o -^•s fie juiivfcfU J ^ HH^ SECOND FUTURE. t4> mnH 1 S ec roiirbe ls.5 2 ir tDiirbtu f-f " ihr xonvhit ! » nt roiirben j ?■- IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE PRESENT TENSE. 1. wanting- ■>. UH■v^e Ml ") 3. irevte cf 1 ;^ I. ivevt-cn luiv y^ 'I. ivevbet tbr | « 3. \ijevbcn fte J be thou praised, &c. PRESENT TENSE. gelobt werbeii, to be praised, PERFECT TENSE. (jelobtu'ovbcn feiti, to have been praised. FUTURE TENSE. racrben getobt tvcr; ben, to be about to be praised. PARTIC. gefobt, praised. 384 eeflexive verbs. § 86. § 86. Reflexive Verbs. (1) A verb is said to be reflexive^ when it represents the subject as acting upon itself. We have several such in English : he deports himself well ; he bethought himself; they betook themselves to the woods; where the subject and the object, in each case, being identi- cal, the verb is made reflexive. It is manifest, that any active transi- tive verb may thus become a reflexive verb. (2) Strictly speaking, however, those only are accounted reflex- ives, that can not otherwise be used. The number of these, in German, is much larger than in English. Some of them require the reciprocal pronoun to be in. the Dative, but most of them govern the Accusative : thus, (with the Dative,) id) bitbe mir nict)t ein, I do not imagine ; (with the Accusative,) id) fd:)dme mid), I am ashamed. Further examples are the following : WITH THE DATIVE. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. ICATIYE. P.PwESE^'T TENSE. 1 I'c^ freue nucf^, ■^pu ]r ibf Ktbet eit«1) [ ^ you have p^ / 3 ]i^ fjabcn fic^ J they have SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TEKSE. ic^ freue mic^, bu fveufftbicp, er freue fid), rotr freuen mxS, ibt freuer end), l"te freuen ]h%, I may thou mayst he maj' we may you may they may IMPERFECT TENSE. tc^ freuete micfc, I might 1 bu fveneteft bic^, thou mightst | ^ er freuete fici), he might ! .s nnr freucten uu§, we mjght f -j inr freuetet eucft, you might ' ik frenetcu fic^, they might J PERFECT TENSE. ic^ BaBe mid) 1 t'U B/abift bid) I PLLTERFECT TENSE. ic^ ()atte mid) 1 I had 1 ^u battefi bic^ | ^ thou hadst | er ^atte fid) ' I S he liad I ivir batten nn§ f ^ we had j ibr bartet emi) | '^ you had | ]k fatten fi(^ J they had j ■IRS-T FUTURE TENSE. 1 ii^ werfe mid)"] I shaU '2 cu irir^ ii'i) \ ^ thou wilt 3 er ivirb fi-t t I he Vvdll 1 'wir a^evbeu nuS f ^ vve shall "2 tl^^ a^cl■^er end) j "^ you will S ik roerbeu fid) J they vail er babe ltd) I may have re- joiced, &c* iinr brtben m\§ \ ibr B^ber euc^ | fie t)aben fic^ J >^ PLUPERFECT TENSE. ic^ b)atU mid) 'j I might have t-u bdtteil bid) { ^ rejoiced, &lc, er ^atte fic^ I g nnr batten nn§ f ^ ibv I)atret end) | <= fie f)dtten fic^ J FIRST FUTURE TENSE. i(^ ir^erbc mid)"] ^if) I shall re- bu wevbefl bic^ | ^^ joice, &c. er n^erbe fic^ I S .-^''unrn.Hn-ben un-o f S ^ iibf wetbet endi | "^ fie irerbeu fic^J SECCyND FUTURE TENSE. { iverbe mic^l s i slrall 1 j'2!bu nurft bid) | •^ thou wilt '^ ( 3 er )rivb fid) I ^ he ^^dil ^ ? 1 hvir iverbeu un-3 f "^ we shall B } '2 ihr u■•ev^ef n\(ii \ ^ you will 2 ( 3l|lv tuevteu fid) ) '^. Thfv will SECOND FUTURE TENSE. ')y ici) trerbe micB^ ^ (if) I shall have 1 .o !j>u iverbefi bid) | ^ rejoiced, &c. I .2:'er rjcvbe ii 1 ^ ( t. iipiran^rbeu uus f "^ I >'ibr roerbetcud) | ^ I ^ifi? ivevt?u ftcti 1 ^ PARADIGM OF A REFLEXIVE VERB. §87. 387 REFLEXIVE VERB. to rejoice, COXDITIOXAL. FIRST FUTURE . ic& tyiirbe mid) ^ i cr tfiivfie net) ! S 3^ unr iriirbeii un^ f S 5 oT tf)r n?nri>et euc^ '*^ 'S'S fie triirbcn fic^ J „"^ SECOND FUTURE. tct n^uvbc num ^ =r ^ 6 bit ttnlrbcfl bid) 1 ^ _g=<' cr roiirbe fid; 1 ^^ -^-^ tvir n.n^r^clt iui§ [ "5 ^ "^ thr rciirbet eiic^ LS. -§'.2 fte njurbcti fic^ J ^ h^b' IMPERATIVE. INFIIS'ITIVE. PARTIC PRESENT TENSE, li'anting. fveiie {n\) bid), rejoice thou,&c. frciie (fv) fid), freueii (ivir) un3. frtniet(i{^r)cud), freucil (ftc) ftc^. PRESENT TENSE. fid) fveiifn, to rejoice. PERFECT TENSE. ficft i^efvcut ^aBen, to have rejoiced. fic^ freuetib, rejoicincr. PERFECT. Wanting. 388 COMPOUND VERBS. § 88. § 89. § 88. Impersonal Verbs. (1) The impersonal verb, properly so called, is one destitute of the ^rs^ and seco7id -persons : being confined to the third person sin- gular, and having for its grammatical subject the pronoun e^, without definite reference to any antecedent, as, e^ vegnet, it rains ; ee bli^t, it lightens ; cS ffbiieit, it snows; zS friert, it freezes; e^ boimert, it thunders ; eg tl)aut, it thaws ; eg fjagelt, it hails; e^ tagt, it dawns. (2) It must immediately appear, that a verb may be impersonali and yet belong to any of the classes of verbs described in preceding sections. Thus some are transitive : some are intransitive ; some are passive ; some are reflexive ; &c. Examples. (Be dvgert !utd% it vexes me, i. e. I am vexed; eg frtert il)n, it chills him, i. e. he is chilled or frozen; eg ()ungert niidi, it hungers me, i. e. I am hungry; eg veift, there is a hoar frost ; eg (}eipt, it is said ; eg tinrb t»tc( bascii gerebct, it is much talked about; eg »erftef)et fid), it understands itself, i. e. it is understood ; &;c. eg fragt ftdi, it asks itself, i. e. it is asked, it is the question ; eg gte&t SJleufd^eu, it gives or yields men, i. e. there are men. % 89. Compound Verbs. (1) Various derivative verbs in German are produced by the union of simple words with prefixes. * Most of these prefixes are separable^ that is, may stand apart from the radicals ; some, however, are found to be inseparable; some are either separable or inseparable, according to circumstances. (2) The prefixes are themselves, also, either simple or compound ; as, {) e r f ommcn, to come here or hither ; f) e r ii b e r f ommen, to come * Under the name of Prefixes are here comprehended all those invariable words, (as adverbs and prepositions,) which are combined with other words to vary or modify their signification They are, also, often called Particles. The simple words with which they are united, are generally verbs ; but often nouns and adjectives are, by prefixes, converted into verbs. SIMPLE PREFIXES SEPARABLE. §. 90. 389 over here, or hilher. In most instances, the prefixes may be trans- lated severally as above ; but often they are found to be merely in- tensive or euphonic. ••'= 90. Simple Prefixes separable. 9US 5luf, 51 III, Qin, ©c.jca, 3"/ -pel"/ ti'lit, Cb, from, off, down ; to, at, in, on, towards; on, upon, up ; out, out of, from ; hy, near, with ; there, at ; there, at ; ill, into ; up, upward, on high ; onward, away, forward ; towards, against ; in, within ; home, at liome ; hither, here ; thither, there, away ; Vv-itii ; — after ; down, downwards, under on, over, on account of: for, before ; away, off; to, towards Slbff^cn, to set or put down ; to depose. 5lnfan;]en, to catch at, i. e. to begin. 5lnfi3et)eit, to go up ; to rise. 5lu^nehmei!, to take out; to choose. 23eifief)eii, to stand by ; to assist. 2)abletbeit, to remain there, or at, to stay ; to persist- SJantic^cu, to reach there, i. e. to offer, ^"tiifaufen, to buy in ; to purchase. Gmpovbebeii, to hft up. bovlfabven, to drive or bear on ; to continue, ©egen^vtltcn, to hold against ; to resist ; to compare. 3u»?Dbafn, to dwell in, i^cimfebveii, to turn homewards ; to return. 45crbriU;]cii, to bring hither, or along, ^f^ttij^eben, to go thither, or away. SJitnebineii, to take with, or along. ?lac^fo(gcit, to follow after; to succeed. 5f^icberreipeii to pull down. Cbliegeu, to lie on, i. e. to apply one's self to ; to be incum- bent on. CSonjeheii, to go before ; to sur- pass. 2i?iCi]blfibcii, to stay away. Suocbcii, to give to ; to grant. * This is likewise often the case in Engh^-h : thus, ex (which hterally signi- fies out or out of,) has, in some words the signification very, exceedingly or the like ; as, exas/^/ra/e, to make very ans;\j: so a, (Mtei-nlly, to. at ;) in the word ameliorate is merely euphonic ; the derivative form (ameliorate) m-;an- iii? nothing more than the =imple one, meliorate. 390 COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. § 91, § 91. Compound Prefixes separable. 5Inf)c(m (an + £)t'tm, to-home) ; "S^al^d (ba -]- bci, tliere-by) ; 5)abn' (ba -h iu-v, there-hither) ; S)at)tu (brt 4- {)tti, there-thither) ; 5)ai]ot3in (ba -f flcgtii, there agahist) ; ©aiticbev (?vx -f iitcbcv, there-below, ; 2)avun (c-av -}- nu, there-to) ; 2)avauf (bar + auf, there-on) ; 2)aveiit (bar + fin, there-in ; 2)aloon (ba -}- t»on, there-frorn) ; 5)aypr Coa -}- vor, tiiere-before) ; 3)a»»tbfr i^Oi^ -|- triibov, there-against) ; 3)aju (ba + ju, there-to) ; ©a5tiufd)en (ba -{- janfitcn, there-between) 6{nl)er (cin -f- l)ev, into-hilher) ; (Suttjc^cu (tnt -1- fifi^cu, apart-tovvards) ; (iut^roct (ci'.t -{- ^niei, apart-two) ; .§erab ([)er -{- ali, hither-down) ; •^vcan (her -j- an, hither-to) ; .^evauf (iicr + anf, hither-ou) ; .P)fraug (hcv -'r a\\§, hither-out) ; jQtxhd (her -{- bd, hither-along) ; .^eretn ([)er -[- cin hither-into ; ^erntcbcv (5fv + nicber, hither-down) ^criibfv (ber -f- iiocr, hither-over) ; igerum (l)er -l- mv,, hlther-around) : 4pevnnfec (fifr -f- inUcr, hither-underh ^evoDi" (her -|- lun', hither-forward) ; .gtevjitt (hev -f- ju, hither-to ; cgftnab (htu + ab, thither-down); ^inan (bin -f ait, thither-to) ; i^tnauf (bin -f- auf, hither-on or up) ; ^tnauS (bin -f (in§, thither-out) ; §ttieiri (^tn + ein, thither-into) ; -pintail (^inUen) + an, behind-to) ; ^labetmfteUen, to put home to, i. e. to refer to. ^abdftehen, to stand close by. T'abcvfitlfidjen, to sneak alonj?. 2)abinnton, to hasten away, "S^ai^eijcnfein, to be against. 2)auiebcvfd)lat-iCn, to beat down. I)aranfc^en, to put or lay there- to, i. e. to risk, to stake. 2)aTanfgfben, to give there-on, i. e. to give an earnest ; 5}avcinveben, to talk there-in, i. e. to interrupt. T^auonlaufen, to run off or away. S)auovlie)]en, to lie before. 2;aluibevbaben, to have (^objections) against. 5?ajutbun, to do (in addition) thereto ; to add. T^ajnnffbcnveben, to speak there in the midst. ^'iubci'jiebeU/ to draw along. (SntQetjenfjCben, to go towards; to go to meet. (5"ut5U'>eibred)cn, to break or burst asunder. .!^evabfct^cn, to put down; to lower. ,§eranfubrcn, to bring on or along, ^erauffabven, to drive or urge on. ifieraugfabven, to drive out. .r>erbeivnff n, to call by or towards. .P»erftnfabren, to drive in or into, ^frniebcibltcfen, to look under. lOcviibcrfonunen, to come over. «^irumnebcn, to give or hand around. .^frunti'vfal)rcn, to drive down. 45ci'VHM"fveten, to step forward, .^ev^utreten, to step towards. J^inabtreten, to step down. ^^inantvctfit, to step up to. .Oinanf^te^en, to pull up. cgjtnau^iucrfen, to throw out. «g)tneingie^en, to pour into, i^intanfe^en, to put behind; to undervalue. COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. §01. 381 Jptntcrl)cr (f)intcv + lu-r, arter-liither) ; ^^iniibcv ((utt + iibcr, thither-over' ; .g>inum (()tu + uni, ihither-around) ; .2>imuitcr {i)'ui -f uiitci', thither- under) ; x^iiniH-g ([}tu + njcg, diither-away) ; ^injit (()tn -j- 5U, thither-towards) ; Ucbcictn (ilbcv -f eiu, over-into) ; limber (urn + t)fv, around-hither) ; Um>)in (urn + l)in, around-thither) ; S3ciraii (ooi- -f (in, before-to) ; ^'orauf (oov + auf, before-on or up) 23i>vau§ (uov -|- a\x?, before-out) ; 23ott)et intci()cvf';()c!i, to sec afterwards. v^piin'ibrvtrafleit, to carry over. .^^iiiuniflattcni, to flutter there about. v^iuiiutcifpviui^cii, to leap down there. i^tuwcguchinen, to take away. i^ptujiKtlcii, to hasten awiiy. UebcietufDinmcii, to come over int<3, i. e. to agree. Itmbcvfcijaiicii, to gaze around. nMtl)iiif5n;!en, to be able there- about ; to forbear. Qjcvailftelleu, to place before. ^liciaiifftoirtcn, to mount on be- fore ; to ascend. SSorauefeI)cu, to see or spy out before hand ; to anticipate. S3ovI)eirc'itcu, to ride along before; to ride past. 2>orl)cifebcu, to foresee. ^oriibcrfahreu, to drive along past in a coach. Scnrej]net)men, to take away be- fore ; to anticipate. 3utioitbint, to do before ; to excel, 3m'iuffel)rcn, to return. 3u[ammenfc|fit, to put together. S92 PARADIGM OF A COMPOUND VERB SEPARABLE. § 92. § 92. PAEADIOM OF A COM- INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT TENSE. PRESENT TENSE. 6 i : 1 1^ id) fange an, ^u faugft an^ cr fangt an, mv fangen an, it)v fauflet an, fte fangeu an, I begin, thou beginnest. he begins, we begin, you begin, they begin. id) faui^e an, I may bu fangefi an, thoumayst er fange an, he may mir fangeu an, we may tf)r fanijet an, you may fte faugen an, they may J IMPERFECT TENSE. IMPERFECT TENSE. i let fing an, bu ftn^ift an, er ftng an, mt ftnp,fn an, if)i' ftnget an, fte fingen an, I began, thou didst begin, he began, vv-e began, you began, they began. id) ftnge an, I might bu fiiiBcfi an, thou mightst cr_ finge an, he might tutr fingen an, we might ibr ftUijct an, you might fte fi'iigen an, they might 1 PERFECI TENSE. PERFECT TENSE. (A ID < ici) fiaBe 1 ^- bu ^.ift s er ^at ! g 110 ir t)aben 'tr tt^r t)abct S= fie b^ah^n J *=* I have ^ thou hast ^ he has I 5 v/e have f £^ you have | ■^ they have J id^ l)ahi ^ bu babefi er i)abe tyir t)abeu ibr \)abtt fte habm ^ ^ I may have % gun, &c. ■f be- PLUPERFE 3T TENSE. PLUPERFECT TENSE. PS i ic!) l)atit ] „- bu battcil i §3 er ^atU [ c iinr hatfen ['£■ ibx ^aftrt i §= fie .fatten j « I had 1 thou hadst | ^• he had 1 5 we had f ?f you had i ^ they had j id) batte 1^1 might have be- ^u ptteft 1 I3 gun, &c. er batte I « iDir batten f '£- ibr battet 1 ^ fie |)dtten J "^ FIRST FUTURE TENSE. FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 3 i id) n;cvbe '] MI U'trft i 2"^ cr^ irivb i ^ wiv roerbcn ' ,E tbr iverbet i g fte tycvben J I shall 1 thou wilt he %vill |.S we shall f qj you v/ill 1 they will J tit u^evbe^ 1 ^ (if) I shall ru wert'efi l g gin, k.c. er wer^e i g= lyir werben j ^ tbr uierbet | 5 fte iserbcn J be- SECOND FUTURE TENSE. SECOND FUTURE TENSE. i icf) wevbe "] s bu tinrf5 1 ^ er_ n.nvb !-§- nnv roerben f,^ ihv werbet « fte juerben J 5 I shall 1 ^ thou wilt 1 ?„ he will i f we shall ^ you will > they will J ^ i-d) iverbe ' bn rjfvbefi er werbe irir ivevben ibr werbet fte inerben j ^ (if) I shall ^ begun, &c s <3 have PARADIGM OF A COMPOUND VEUB SEPARABLE. § 92. 393 POUND VEEB SEPxVBABLE. t'd begin. COXDITIOXAL. IMPERATIVE. INFIXITIYE. PARTICIPLE FIRST FUTUKE. ^^ rilESE.NT TENSE. !. loaiuivg- I. rviti>ic i^i^) 'Tit, begin thou, &.C. 3. faiuje (a) an. 1. faiu]cii(anr)aii. 2. fvin|]ft (ibv) »iu. 3. fanijeu (fii) an. id) iviirbe 1 Ml roiirtcfi | cr mwH i unr iinivben [ thr tuiivtet | ne voiirbeu J SECOND FUTURE. ' id) wiivbc ^ c ^ .. Ml wiirbe)! | «2 ^<^ er iwiirbe l^ 3 •> iwtr roiivben 1,^ = § i t^r iviirbet | ^ ^ ^| f!e ttiirbett J 5 ^-^j PRESENT TENSE. aiif.i Illicit, or aiijiifaitjieu, to betrin. PERFECT TENSE. angefattijen ba= ten, to have begun, FIRST FUTURE. aiigefangeu iuer= ben, to be about to begin. PRESENT. aiifaUiieiib, beginning. an^efangen, begun. 394 INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. § 93. § 94. § 93. Observations on the Paradigm. (1) An inspection of tlie Paradigm above will show, that the se- paration of the prefix from the radical part of the verb, takes place in the Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive (when preceded by ju,) and the Perfect Participle. In the Indicative and Subjunc- tive, however, the separation is not. made, when, in dependent sen- tences, the verb is placed at the end of a clause or period : thus, alo bie (Soiiiie btcfen S'lorgeu aufgtng, fo yerfd)tt)anb ber S'Jebel, wiien the sun rose (aufging) this morning, the fog disappeared. (2) In regard to the position of the particle when separated, it must be noted that, in the Indicative, Subjunctive and Imperative, it stands ofier the radical ; often, also, after the several words depen- dent upon it : thus, id) fauge ha6 53ud) an, (where an belonging to f an g e, comes after the object,) I begin the book. (3) In the Infiniiive and the Perfect Participle, on the contrary, the particle comes before the radical : being separated from it, in the Infinitive, by j u , (when that preposition is employed,) and, in the Participle, by the augment g e , which is peculiar to that part of the verb : thus, anjnfangen, (an-f-ju-f-fcingen) to begin ; to commence ; UorgcfielU, (yor-j-ge+ftellt) placed before one; represented. (4) It remains to be added, that particles, when separated from the radicals, receive the full or principal accent; and, that the radicals (if verbs) have the same form of conjugation, old or new, regular or irregular, as when employed without prefixes. § 94. Inseparable Prefixes. The Prefixes of this class, as the name implies, are always found in close union with tl>eir radicals. They allow not even the augment syllable ge, in the Perfect Participle, to intervene; but reject it altogether : * as, bebecft (not bcgcberft) covered, from Bebecfen, to cover. Neither is j n (when used) allowed to come between the prefix and the Infinitive; but stands before the two combined into one word: as, ju emVfangen, (not emlpjnfangen,) to receive: except in case of compound prefixes, wherein the first component is a separable and the second an inseparable particle; jn being then inserted be- tween the two particles; as, anjnerfcnnen, (from ancrfennen). The inseparable pj-efixes are always unaccented. * To this, however, must be excepted the case of the Prefix m i ^ ; which, in a few instances, allows the augment (^ e to be prefixed : thus, (from mips bcuteii, to misinterpret,) we have, in the Perfect Participle, (^emi^tfUtct. OBSERVATIONS. § 95. § 96. § 97. 395 lifter/ (Sr, 23cr, SBibcr, 9lut>e §95. after, behind ; near, by, over, to make ; in, within ; apart, away, to deprive of; forth, for, on behalf of; (mainly, intensive or evpho nic) ; wrong, erroneously; away, at a loss; against ; apart, asunder ; Simple Prefixes inseparable. Slftevrcbcu, to talk behind (one's back); to slander, ^cfpmir.cn, to come by, i. e. to get, to obtain. (Smvfinben, to iind or feel within, to perceive. (Sntgel)eu, to go away or off; to escape, ^rfldven, to make clear for (one) ; to explain, ©cbetiieu (same as ben fen), to think of. 9)titibeiiteit, to misinterpret. 5i3erf4)[afcn, to sleep away, i. e. lose by sleeping. 933'tberfte(}en, to stand against ; to resist. 3evf4/nett'eu, to cut apart, or in pieces. § 96. Compound Prefixes inseparable. (an + be, to — near) ; Slner Slufei; Sluser 9ln»er SBeauf (an + er, to — for) ; (auf + er, up — for) ; (o.\\^ + er, out — for) ; (an + ser, to — away) ^Inbetreffcu, to hit or touch near to ; to concern. 3liierfennen, to acknowledge ; to own. Slufcvbaucn, to build up for; to erect. 5lu§enra[)len, to choose out for; to elect. Slnwertvauen, to give away in trust; to confide to. (be + auf, near — on or up) ; .^eauftragen, to bring (duty) upon, i. e. to commission. SiJ^ipuev (mi^ + cer, wrong— away); 3}]ipoerftet)cii, to understand wrong, i. e. to mistake. S3orbe (jjov 4- be, before — near) ; SSorbe^alteu, to hold or keep ahead, i. e. to put off; to reserve. § 97. Observations. (1) S3 e has in German the same power which it has in English. It is, therefore, in most cases, better transferred than translated. Its uses will Le easOy learned from examples. Thus, from ^lagen, to moan. S3ef(agen, to Jemoan. (Stteuen, to strow. Sej!reuen, to Sestrow. i^olgen, to follow. Sefolgcu, to follow after, i. e. to obey. Strbeiten, to labor. SSeatbeiten, to labor upon; elaborate. £ad)en, to laugh. S3elad)en, to laugh at. ^liiget, a wing. S3e|i[ugetn, to furnish with wings. ©Ciirf, happiness. SSeglitrfen, to make happy. %xz\, free. S3efreten, to set free. In some instances, it is merely euphonic. 396 OBSERVATIONS. § 97. Stxaft, power. 'X^loh?^ dim-eyed, dull, bashful. :58renncn, to burn, (Sprecben, to speak. (2) @mp and ent Qmp is, probably, only another form of tnt: occurring, however, only in three verbs; (em|)finben, to feel; empfan^en, to receive ; empfeljteii, to recommend ;) and bearing a sense but remotely related to its original. The prime and predominant ]'Ov»'er of e n t is that of indicating separation, departure, privation. In some instances it has the kindred sense of approach or iransi- iion from one point or condition towards another. Examples. ®el;cn, to go. dutgenen, to go away, to get off. Steven, to draw. ©ut^iefieii, to withdraw. ^-Btnbeii, to bind. dutbinben, to unbind. «&aupt, the head. ©utfjaupten, to deprive of head, to behead, dntirdften, to deprive of power, weaken, ©ntblcben, to divest of shame, be bold. (Sntbrennen, to take fire, to kuidle. (Entfpred^en, to answer, or correspond to. @n t is sometimes, also, merely intensive or euphonic: as, entteereu (from let^v empty,) to empty out. (3) (Bx and i?er. (Sv, as a general thing, conveys the idea of getting or gaining for some one, by means of that which is expressed by the word connected with it ; as, e r B i 1 1 e n, to get, or try to get> by begging. It finds its exact opposite in y e x ; which marks what is against or away from some one's interest or benefit ; as, "ozxb'xiizn, to beg off, to decline. The force and use of these particles are best illustrated by examples. ©vBaben, to get or gain by bathing. (S'vjinbeu, to find out for one's self, invent. (Srfteiien, to arise, originate, ©rbauen, to erect, to produce. S^erfagen, to speak against, to deny. S^ermauern, to wall against, stop by wall. SQerfpielen, to play away, to lose by gambling. S3erfiif)ren, to lead away, to seduce. Serfaljen, to oversalt, spoU in salting. Saben, to bathe. ?5inben, to find. §inuntcv, under there. 5)ai)cr, fi'om there hither, i. e. 5)a(;iu, from thither (to) there, /hence. i. e. thither. SBctjcr, from which place hither, 2Bot)ht, from which place thither, i. e. iclience. i. e. ivhiiher. (4) We have no words in English, corresponding exactly in use and force with iyzx and i)\\i ; and therefore, though everywhere in German their force may be fell., it cannot always be expressed by single words, in translation. Hence are they often treated as ex- pletives. § 104. Adverbs formed from verbs. (1) Adverbs are formed from verbs by suffixing to the radical part the termination 1 1 cb. All adverbs so formed, however, are equally employed as adjectives : thus, ©(ciuBItcb (fi-om c^taub-l-eu, to believe), credibly, ©tcvblicb (from ftcvb-|-en, to die), mortally, ^tdgltcb (from flag-j-eu, to lament), lamentably. SRevHid) (from mzx'i-\-z\\, to note; perceive), perceptibly. § 105. Adverbs formed by composition. (1) Besides the classes given above, a numerous list of adverbs in German is produced by the union of various parts of speech. Thus, the word aSeife {mode, manner), combined with nouns, forms a class of adverbs employed chiefly in specifying things indi- 402 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. § 106. vidually or separately: thus, fdirittit?eife, step by step; t^eiltoeife, part by part ; trc^feniretfe, drop by drop ; toCj^cnircife, wave by wave; like waves. SSetfe is also added to adjectives; as, btebifdiemelfe, thievishly ; glficflic&ertoeife, fortunately. (2) Sometimes an adverb and a preposition are united ; examples of which may be found above under the head of adverbs formed from pronouns. (3) Sometimes adverbs are formed by the union or the repetition of prepositions: as, burdiaiio, throughout; thoroughly; burc^ iinb burd\ through and through. (4) Sometimes a noun and a pronoun joined together, serve as an adverb ; as, mdmxfdts, on my side ; bteffeit^, on this side ; atter? bmg0, by all means. (5) Sometimes one adverb is formed from another by the addi- tion of a suffix ; as, rutflhiyy, backwards : sometimes by the union ^ of another adverb ; as, iitmmermel;r, nevermore. (6) Sometimes the several words composing a phrase, are, by being brought into union, made to perform the office of an adverb : thus, furtoa§r (for filr ira^r), verily ; fc:ift (for the obsolete fc ne iji, if it is not), otherwise; else. § 106. Comparison of adverbs. (1) Many adverbs, chiefly, however, those expressive of manner are susceptible of the degrees of comparison. The forms for these are the same in adverbs as in adjectives. (2) It must be observed, however, that, when a comparison^ strictly speaking, is intended, the form of the superlative produced by prefixing a m (See Obs. § 38.), should always be employed ; as, er ]d:,xdbt am fd>^nfte:i, he writes the most beautifully {of all). (3) If, on the other hand, we purpose, not to compare indi-viduals one with another, but merely to denote extreme excellence or emi- nence, there are three ways in which it may properly be done : firsts by using the simple or absolute form of the superlative ; as, er gviipt freiuibridijl:, he greets or salutes in a manner very friendly, very cor- dially ; secondly, by employing auf5 (auf-j-bas) vdih. the accusative, or jum (^u-f-bcnt) with the dative, of the superlative ; as, aufia freunbltdifte, in. a manner very fiiendly ; ^itnt fd^ciiften, in a manner very beautiful ; lastly, by adding to the simple form of the super- lative, the termination e n ^ ; beften^, the best or in the best n?anner ; l}oc&|^en5, at the highest or at the most. TABLE OF THE PREPOSITIONS. § 10*7. § 108. 40J § 107. THE PREPOSITIONS. (1) The prepositions in German, that is, the words employed merely to denote the relations of things, arc commonly classified ac- cording to the cases with which they are construed. Some of them are coQstrued with the genitive only; some with the dative only; some with the accusative only ; and some either with the dative or accusative, according to circumstances. (2) They may also, on a different principle, be divided into two general classes : the Primitive and the Derivative. The primitive prepositions always govern either the dative or the accusative : the derivative prepositions are found, for the most part, in connection with the genitive only. § 108. Table of THE Prepositions. (1) Prepositions construed with (2) Prepositions construed with TF [E :jenitive. THE dative. "(iiilatt/ or D&erl)al!3, 2tu5, S^eBji, %\itr ^rc^, Stumer, i'lufcrl^aUv Unt — iDillen, 93ct, €)b, ©tciyeit, or Unfevn,. Sinnen, bieffeiti5, Uitijeaditet, ©utgegen, ©ammt. .^alb, Ijal&eii, or Uuterl;al£), ©egeuiikr, t)al6er. UmDeit, ©emdp, (Seit, 3nuerl)alb, a3ermittclil, or Scnfcit, or mittcti'l, mi, 33on, jeufcit^, 23ermcc]e, .^raft. 2Gd()rcnb, S^ad), 3u, Sdngg, SSegeii, Saut, Sufclge. Sfldd^fi, Sutotber. (3) Prepositions construed Vvdth the accusative. ij)iird}, £)uue, ^iir, (Srabev, ©egen, or Urn, gen, SSiber. (4) Prepositions construed with THE DATIVE Or ACCUSATIVE. $(n, UeBer, 5{uf, Unter, Jointer, S3or, 3n, Siuifd^en. 9^eben, 404 OBSERVATIONS. § 109. § 110. § 109 Prepositions construed with the genitive. We no\^ give again the prepositions governing the several eases respectively, with their proper detinitions : subjoining, also, some few observations on such of them as seem to require further expla- nation. And first, we mention those construed with the ceniiive. Jir.ftatt, or ftatt, Slufjcviiafb, I^icffctt, or biefj feit^, |>vilben, or t)ah Suner^alb, Senfeit, or jcn; fcito, ,Eraft, Sdng^, (also gov. Dat.) Saut, Irci^,, (also gov. Dat.) instead, without ; out- side, on this side. on account of. vv'ithin; inside, on that side ; beyond, by virtue of. along. according to. above. in spite of. Urn — UmUcu, Uns^eacbtct, Unteviialb, Uufern, Uuti^eit, S^crmittelil, or mittelft, Sermcge, 23df)venb, for the sake of notwithstanding. below ; on the lower side. near ; not fur from. near ; not far from. by means of. by dint of. during. on account of. Sufct^e, (also in consequence gov. Dat.) of. § 110. Observations. (1) -Stnllatt is compounded of an (in) and etatt (jjlace ;) and these components may sometimes be separated : thus, an ici Q3niberg ^tatt, in the brother's stead. In this case the part, @ t a 1 1 , takes its proper character, which is that of a noun. (2) .§al6en, like treo[eii and urn — iriiUen, expresses w?o^ ire. Strict- ly speaking, liowever, fialben seems to point to a motive that is direct, immediate and special', » e g e u indicates an object less definite and more distant; while urn — trtllleit looks to the will, wish or wel- fare of that which is expressed by the genitive. These distinctions, however, are not always regarded even by writers of reputation. (3) «!^alten or Balber is always placed after the noun which it gov- erns : the form, Knlli e u being preferred, when the noun has an article or pronoun before it ; and fnilb e r , when it has not : thus, beo ©clbesS l)alben, for the sake of money ; 33ergnu9eii3 Iialber, for the sake of pleasure. <6al6t'it is often united with the genitive of the personal pronouns; in which case the final letter (r) is omitted and its place OBSERVATIONS. § 111. § 112. 405 i Applied by t; thus, mcmcilVvitbcn, (instead of iiieiucr^alben,) for my sake ; bciiicthalbeii, for thy sake ; )\nuetl)v"ilbeii, for his sake, &c. So> too, it occurs in the compounds bcpl)viH), on account of th^t; irefi I;alb, on account of which : wherein, as in aujjevl^alt), iniierfjalb, ober? I)vilb, iintcrtiaUv the form t) a I b e n is shortened into I) a I b. In the hist four, I) alb has the sense part or side; as, auferljalb, outsicfe, &c. (4) Jfficgcu may either come before or after its noun : as, tregen ber grcpni ©cfabv, on account of the great danger; ftiuer ®efuubi)eit We* gcu, on account of his health. (5) Uni — triUeii is always separated by the genitive which it gov- erns : tlius, um ©cttciS unllen, for God's sake. (6) Uugeaditet may either precede or succeed its noun: as, unge; adnct alter J^iubcruif[e, notAvithstanding all hindrances ; feincs §leipe5 ujtgead^tet, notwithstanding his industry. (7) 23ermoge, by dint or means of indicates physical ability : as, ijcrmcge beo ^leipes, by means of industry. It thus differs from fraft, which points rather to the exercise of moral power: as, !raft meine^ 5tmtci>, by virtue of my office. (8) Sufclge, when it comes after the word which it governs, takes the hitter m the Dative : as, bem 58efef}le jufclge, m consequence of (or pursuant to) the order, (9) Sdng6 and trc^ may, also, govern the Dative. § 111. Prepositions construed with the dative. 5lu^, out; out of. 9^a*, after ; to ; ac- Sluper, without ; outside cording to. of. Sflddift, next ; next to. 58ei, by; near; with. DZeba, together with. Oilmen, within. £)b, over; at. (S'litgegen, towards ; oppo- (Sammt, together with. site to. eeit, since. ©egeuiiber, over against. S3cn, from; of. @emdp. conformably 3u, to, at. with. Buiriber, against ; con- mi, with. trary. §. 112. Observ ations. (1) Stu indicates the place, the source or the material whence any thing is produced ; as, au^ bem >^aufe, out of the house ; aug Siebe, out of love ; au6 dlxiciU ijOii ®oii bie SiBelt gema^t, out of no- thing has God made the world. 406 OB3ERTATIOX3. § 112. (2) 51 u ^ e r differs from auy, in that it denotes situation rather than transition : thus, au5 bem ^^aufe marks motion from or out of tlie house, while aii^er bem -^aiife signifies position in respect to the house ; that is, outside of the house ; abroad : hence comes, also, the signification, besides ; exclusive of; as, ^liemaiib au^er mtr trar ^ugegeu, no one besides, or except me was present. (3) Set shovrs the relation of proximity or identity in respect to persons, places, times, &c. : as, er irc(;nt bei feiiiem Sruber, he resides with his brother ; bet beni ^^aiife, iy or near the house ; bei ber ^dbo^ 4)fung, at the creation ; bei meincr ?(nfiinft, at or t^jjotz my arrival ; bei bem ^tato, in Plato, that is, in the works of Plato. © e i is also ■used in making oath or protest; as, bet ®i:tt; bei meiiier @f;re ; by God ; by, or upon my honor : a use easUy derived from the primary signification of the word. It should be added that the German bei (unlike the English by) is not properly employed to denote the cause, means or instrument of an action : thiis is done by the words burd), i^cn, or mir ; id^ fafvce mit ber Sifcnba^n. (4). 33 t n :t e n is used in denoting a limitation of time ; as, bin; Tien adbt S^agen, within eight days. (5) (5 n t g e g e n always comes after its noun ; and denotes the relation of parties mo-^ing towards one another so as to meet : hence it gets the significations opposite to^ oxer against : thus, ber ^nabe Iduft feiuem SSater entgegen, the boy runs towards, that is, to meet his father ; bem 2Btixbc entgegen, against the wind. (6) @ e g e n 11 b e r marks an opposite position of things ; and like entgegen, comes after its noun ; as, bem -^aafe gegenuber, opposite to, ov fronting the house. (7) 2Jl i t sio-nifies sometimes the relation of union ; sometimes that of instrumentality ; as, er arbettet mit feinem 9]citer, he works with his father ; mit einem ©Zejfer fdnieiben, to cut icitli a knife : some- times, also, it indicates the manner of an action ; as, mit @e"n?a(t; mit Sift. (8) ^ a d\ in all its uses, has its nearest equivalent in the Eng- lish word after ; as, je^n 2Jlinuten nad) mx, ten minutes after four ; ruid) englifd^er 2)^cbe, after the English fasliion ; ber S^lafe nad\ after (that is, following after) your nose ; bem Strcme na*, after (that is, in the direction of) the stream ; ber S3efd>reibimg nad), after (that is, according to) the description; tt*ir gel;en nadi bcrtgtabt, we are going after (that is, in the direction of towards, or to) the city ; bag Sdnjf {ft nad) Slmerifa befttmmt, the ship is bound after (that is, for) Ame- rica, &c. (9) WTien direction towards a person, instead of a place, is indi- TRErOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH TUE ACCUSATIVE. § 113. 407 catcd, J u is employed ; as, id) trcrbc 5 u mcinem 33ater ge'^cn, I shcal] go to my father. Sometimes n a d) is used in connection with 3 u ; as, cr Ucf iividi bev ^tait ju, he ran (literally, after to) towards the city. When it denotes direction with, as in the phrase, bent (Stvcme lui*, following, or going icith the stream, it is put afier the noun wliich it governs : so, also, when it has the kindred sense, according to ; as, mehicr Siteniitncj nad>, according to my opinion. If, ho\vever, in the latter case, a genitive depends on the noun under the govern- ment of the preposition, iiaAi jprecedes ; as, luid) ber ©efdireibuug be3 •edMlIcr, according to Schiller's description. (10) DZebfi and fammt have the same general signification, together with ; but, strictly speaking, differ in this, that fammt not only indicates conjoint, but, also, simultaneous action : thus, Slarcn fammt fcincit (2cf)ncn fctlen i()re .^dnbe auf \t\\i ^§au^t legen, Aaron to- gether with (i. e. simultaneously with) his sons shall lay their hands upon his head. (11) D b is seldom used except in poetry, (12) S3 n marks, the source or origin of a thing, and has the same latitude of signification as its English equivalent from : thus, ber aSiub ire^ct tocii Cjten, the wind blows from the East ; hae @es bid)t ijl i?cn if)m^ that poem is from (by) him. With an or auf fol- lowing, it indicates the extent of a period of time : sen ber erften o^inbkit an, from earliest childhood on ; s?cn femer Sugenb auf, from his youth up. (13) 3 u primarily is a mere sign of transition ; but is made to denote a variety of cognate relations, from a state of motion to a state of rest. Examples best illustrate its use : thus, idi tri(( ^u met;; nem SSatcr gcBen, I will go to my father ; trir rctfen ^u SSaffer nnb ju Sanbe, we travel by land and by water; ju ^ferbe, on horseback; ju §u^e, on foot; ju ^aufe, at home ; 5U jcner Sett, at that timfe; er i)ion is signified, the dative is nscd ; thus, bcv Jliuih Idiift in ten ©vivttMi, the boy runs info (motion iawards) the garden ; bcv Mnabe Iciiift hi bcm ©aiteu, tTie boy runs in (motion within) the garden, This is the general principle ; which will be found, with more or less distinctness, everywhere to prevail in the use of the pre- positions of this class. We subjoin a list of examples. to dwell in or at a place. to write to a friend. he is workinsf on a book. Dat. Ace. Dat. Ace. 5(u cincm Cvte uict)ucn, S(n eincii ^veinib fdneibcn, Qx avbcitct aw chicni 53ucbc, 5Ui etti^ag bcnfeii, Dat. (Fr tft an bcr 5(u^jef)vung ges ftcvfecn, to think on (i. e. turn one^s thoughts towards) something, he died by consumption. Ace. 3* ftc((e ben 3^ifrfi an ble I put the table against {towards) SQaub, the wall. Dat. (Sdnyadi an 33critanbe, weak in understanding. Ace. :Sis5 an ben SlKnib, even to or until evening. Dat. 5lm 2}lLn\3cn unb am 9lBenb, in the morning and in the evening. Dat. 5(uf bem 5;f)urme, on (i. e. resting on) the tower. Ace. -5iuf ben S^uvm, upon (i. e. climbing) the tower. Dat. Shtf bem Saiibe wc~§nen, to live in the country. Ace. 5(uf bag ianh reifen, to travel into the country. Dat. 5(uf ber ^cft, at the post-office. Dat. 5(uf ber (Sdntte, at school. Ace. Stuf eine . whether; if. £)b.^Iciit\ though; although. CbfduMi, though; although. ObwoCiC though; although, DDcr, or. D'vUe, wiihout ; except. £)^iujeadUet, notwithstanding. (Bo, thus; therefore; if. (gonbevu, but. U:ib, and. Uiuiead: tet, n ot withstanding. SSdbveub, whilst. SBa()rnib bem, whilst. aSdtjreub bvt^, w^hilst that. SBeber, neither. SBenn, if; as, SBcil, because. ©enngtctdi, although. SBennfdicn, although. 2Bie, as; when. 3Sietycf)(, though. 2Bc, if. ®ofevn, if; in case that § 118. INTERJECTIONS. (1) Interjections, as the name implies, are commonly thrown into a sentence ; without, however, changing either its structure or its signification. They are merely the signs of strong or sudden emo- tion ; and may be classified according to the nature of the emotion which they indicate: some expressing joy; some sorrow; some surprise, and so on. The list below contains those only that most commonly occur. ad) I alas I of) I o I oh ! o ! af)! ah! ^fui! fy! ei! eigh! p\t\ hist! :^a! ha! toe^e! wo! alas! ^b! ho! ktfa! hurrah! 412 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 119. § 120. lie ba I ho there I jitch^eifal huzza! l}altl hold! ix^c^Ianl well then! 'i)cl{a I holla ! I)ui 1 hoa ! quick ! I)ii[cb I hush ! nch ! lo I leibev I alas I * l}uin I hem I (2) It may be added that other parts of speech and even whole phrases, are often employed as conjunctions, and in parsing are treat- ed as such. 119. SYNTAX. Syntax is that part of Grammar which unfolds the relations and offices of words as arranged and combined in sentences. The essential parts of every sentence are the subject, which is that of which something is affirmed ; and the predicate, wdiich is that which contains the affirmation. The subject is either a noun or that which is the representative or equivalent of a noun ; the predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb in conjunction with some other part or parts of speech. AH other w^ords entering into a sentence, are to be regarded as mere adjuncts. The foUowiug sentences exhibit the subject and the predicate under several varieties of form : Subject. Predicate. God exists. Man is mortal. * To be, contents his natural desire. Throwing the stone was his ciime. Sentences are either simple, that is, contain a single assertion or proposition ; or compound, that is, contain two or more assertions or propositions. Of the various parts of a sentence whether principal or adjunct, we come novv' to speak more in detail; so as to show the relation, agreement, government and arrangement of words in con- struction. § 120. THE ARTICLES. Rule. The article in German, whether definite or indefinite, is generally employed wherever the corresponding article would be used in English. * In the sentence God exists, the verb exists is the predicate : affirming, as it does, existence of the Ahmghty. But in the sentence, man is mortal, mortal- 8tntax of the article. § 120. 413 Observations. This rule is of course founded upon the presumption that the studewt is familira- wi:h the usage of the English in respect to the article. In the specifications that follow, therefore, he is to look only for the points in which the German dijj'ers from the usage of our own language. (1) The Germans insert the definite article : (a) Before words of abstract or universal signification; as, bcr Stlcufd^ ift ftcvblidv man (i. e. every man) is mortal; bag @oIb ift bcl)n; Iwx, gold is ductile ; hai Scbcn ift fiirj, life is short ; hie .'Sugenb [iUn't jiiin ©liiife, virtue leads to happiness : (b) before the names of certain divisions or periods of time : as, ber (Scnittciij, Sunday; berSOZcutag, Monday: bcr S^ejeniBer, December; ber Sdi^uft, August; ber ©onnner, Summer: (c) before certain names {feminines) of countries ; as, btc 'X.xixM, Turkey; bie ©dnreij, Switzerland; bie Sombarbci, Lombardy: (d) before the names of authors, when used to denote their works; as, idi Icfc ben Siffiiig, I am reading Lessing: (e) before the proper names or titles of persons, when used in a way denoting familiarity or inferiority ; as, grille b i e S)Zarie, greet (or remember me to) Mary; fage bem 2utf}cr, baf id) i§n ^u fe^^en Uninfdie, tell Luther, that I wish to see him : also, when connected with, attributive s^diiQcXives: as, bie Heine @o^l)ie, little Sophia : (fj before words (especially proper names of persons) whose gases are not made known either by a change of termination, or by the presence of a preposition; as, ha^ £-e6cn ber ^iirften, the life of princes; bie jjrau beg ©ccvaiee, the wife of Socrates; ber %ao^ ber -i)?adH\ the day of (the) vengeance : (g) before the names of ranks, bodies, or systems of doctrine : as, bas 5|5.ir[am:nt, Parliament; bie Otegterung, government; bie rOZonar^: diie, monarchy; h (x^ Sf)riftentf)um, Christianity : also in such phrases: as, in ber @tabt, in tov;n; in betv^trdje, at church; hie meijten Slenfd^en, most men. (h) before the words (signifying) half and both: as, bie Iialfec (not I;aI6e bie) 3al)l, half the number ; b t e Wx'bv.i (not bctben hk) S3viibcr, both the brothers : (i) before v/ords denoting the limit, within which certain specified, numbers or amounts are confined ; wherein in English, the indefinite article would be used : as, jn^cimal b i e 2Bcdie, twice a week : iiy IS what is affirmed of man ; and the verb (is) is the mere link that connects the subject and the predicate together. It is thence called the copula. § 158. 414 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 121. (2) Note, further, that the German differs from the English in omitting the definite article, — (a) before certain law appellatives, as: Seflagter, {the) defendant; ^Idger, {tJie) plaintiff; 5(pV'f^t^«t {(he) appellant; (Supplicant, {the) petitioner : (b) before certain common expressions such as, in befier Dvbnung, in {the) best order; Ueberbringer btefeg, {the) bearer of this; and cer- tain adjectives and participles treated as nouns; as, evfterer, {tUe^ former ; le|terer, {the) latter ; Befagter, {the) before-said (person) : (c) before certain proper names of places: as, Dftinbien, (the) East Indies ; 2Bcftinbien, {the) West Indies ; and before the names of the Cardinal points: as, Dften, {the) East; SBeften, (//le) West; iSixben, {the) South ; S'lorben, {the) North : (d) before a past participle joined with a noun, which, in English, precedes the participle: as, "bix^ yerlorene ^arabieg, {literally, the lost Paradise) Paradise Lost. (3) Note, again, that the Germans in using certain collective terms preceded by adjectives, employ the indefinite article where the English would use the definite : as, ein f)odituetfer ^;xi^, the (lit. a) most learned Senate; etue I6bttd)e Uni»erfitdt, the {a) honorable Uni- versity. (4) In German, also, the indefinite article stands hefore (not after, as in English,) the words, such, half: thus, ein fcldicr Wlami, (not fcldier ein 2)^ann), such a man ; ein f)alBeg 3abr (not I;atbeg ein 3a§r), half'a year. In questions, direct or indirect, like the following : @inen \riie langen (Spajierritt l)at er gemadU, how long a ride has he taken; it must be noticed that the article stands hefore irie : thus, einen toie langen (a how long) and not, as in English, how long a. (5) The German differs again from the English in not using an article at all in the phrases answering to the English ; a few ; a thou- sand ; a hundred. § 121. THE NOUN. Rule. A noun or pronoun which is the subject of a sentence must be in the nominiiiive case : as, xDer S^cnfdi beiift, ®Qti lenft, man devises, God disposes. 2)ie S3erge bomiern, the mountains thunder. Observations. (1) The subject or nominative in German, s seldom omitted, ex- USE OF THE NOMINATIVE. § 122. § 123. 415 cept in tlic case of the pronouns agreeing with verbs in the second person (singular and plural) of the Imperative : as, Sefe (bii), read ! ©i>()ct unb fviget (.^vv) iijm, go and tell him. See, however, § 136. 2. § 122. Rule. A noun or pronoun which is the "fredicate of a sentence, must be in the nominative case : as, (E"v u\iv elu gvc^a- .^onuj, be was a great king. 5)icfa- jl'nabe \\i .\Iaufmami i]eroorfceii, tiiis boy is become a merchant. 2llcx\iubcv i}ii:^ bev (Sjuop:, Alexander was called the Great. Observations. (1) This rule applies, where the subject and the predicate are connected, as above, by such verbs as fehi, to he ; ivterbeu, to become; (;eipeu, to he called ; bleiOen, to remain, &c. (2) So, also, the rule becomes applicable when any of those verbs which in the active govern two accusatives (§ 132. 2.), are em- ployed passively : as, Siccvo trurbe ber iJviter bees iiaterlaiibesJ genannt, Cicero was called the father of his country ; (Sr ift Slteranbcr getauft VDovben, he has been christened Alexander. From this remark, how- ever, must be excepted the verb I c § r e n : since it has no passive. § 123. Rule. A noun used to limit * the application of another noun signifying a different thing, is put in the genitive ; as, S)cr Sauf bcr funb bicfcg S:f)ceg ; jwei ©lag biefed (2) It should be obsen^ed that the two nouns under this Rule mus-t be of different significations ; for two nouns standing for the same thing, would be in the same case, forming an instance of apjpo- sition. See § 133. (1). (3) The noun in the genitive, that is, the limiling noun, is com- monly said to be governed by the other one. This genitive is either subjective or objective ; subjective, when it denotes that which dees something or lias something : ohjeciive, when it denotes that which suffers something, or which is the object of what is expressed by the governing word. To illustrate this, we have only to take the ex- amples given above : bcr Saiif ber ©cnne, the course of the sun ; bie (Sr§ic(;uiig bcr ^iubev, the education of the children ; where, in the first example, the sun is represented as 'performing or haiing a course, and is consequently subjective ; and, in the second example, the children are represented as being the objects of education, and the word is consequently objective. This objective genitive, it should be added, occurs only after verbal nouns, and chiefly those ending in the suffixes e r, which marks the doer, and u n g, which marks the doing of an action. (4) It seems hardly necessary to observe that under this rule come all words which perform the ojice of nouns ; as, pronouns, ad- jectives used substantively, &.c. ; thus, bie ©iiabe ber ©vr^en, the fa- vor of the great. (5) We say often in English, He is a friend fo, or an enemy to, or a nephew to any one ; where, were these phrases put into German, we might expect the dative to be used. But, in such cases, the Ger- man always employs the Genitive : thus, cr ift ciu ^ehib felue^ SSatcr? lanbcg, he is an enemy of his native country. (6) We say in English, the month r/ August, the city r/ Lon- don, and the like : where the common and the proper name of the same thing are connected by the preposition of The Germans put the two nouns in apposition. See § 133. (2). (7) So, too, in English we say, the fifth of August ; but, in Ger- man, the numeral is put in direct agreement with the name of the month : as, ber fuufte 5tuguft, the fifth (of) August, or August fifih. (8) In place of the genitive, the preposition y o n, followed by, the dative, is, in the following instances, generally used : a. When succeeded by noinis signifving (quality, rank, measure weight, age, distance and J.e like ; as, ciu 2Jlann von l^cljcm ^tanbc. USE OF THE GENITIVE. § 124. § 125. 4l7 a man of high standing ; cin Sd'iff vc\i jivci f;unbert llcniicu, a ship of two hundred tons; eiu ©eandU ton fi'uif '>\iiuni>, a weight of rive pounds ; clii 2)tviuu vcii aditjicj 3vil)vcu, a man of eighty years ; eine Oielfe lUMi brei 2)cei(cn, a journey of three miles; ciu (S":uj(dntcr i^cn ©eburt, an Englishman by birth, &e. b. Wlien followed by nouns denoting the material or substance of which any thing is made : as, eiii SdciKX vcn (£il&er, a cup of sil- ver, i. e. a silver cup ; eiue U^r yen ©clbe, a gold watch, &c. c. When foUovved by nouns whose cases are not indicated by the terminations of declension nor by the presence of the ariicle : as, bcr Sdieiu ten dhiiid'tcit, the appearance of honesty ; eiu 23ater ten fed;>3 o^inberu, a fother of six children ; bte ^cnigin ton (Inglanb, the queen of England ; bie ©reujen i^oii granfrcidv the boundaries of France : bcr 33ii"dicf i^cii jlcnftanj, the bishop of Constance d. When followed by a word indicating the whole, of which the word preceding expresses but a part : as, ehier ton meineu S3efv"inuteiV one of my acquaintances ; ireldier ten fceibeu ? which of the two ? § 124. Rule. A noun limiting the application of an adjective, where in English the relation would be expressed by such words as oforfj-om, is put in the genitive : as, bte meiften ffiertufte fviib ehieS (S'rfa|eo fdliiy, most losses are capable of reparation ; bte Gvbe ijl; tell ber @hk bee <§errn, the earth is full of the goodness of the Lord, Observations. (1) The adjectives comprehended under this rule are such as follow : -^Beburfti^, in want ; needing. Seer, void. SBcnctriivjt, needing; wanting, Sc^, free; rid. 33crs;ii9t, conscious. S}ldd)tti], having; in possession. (Singcbenf, mindful. 9Jcixbe, tired; weary. §af)tg, capable ; susceptible. (^att, satiated ; weary. ^tei), glad, (gd^ulbig, guilty ; indebted. ©ett'Ci^r, aware. S^eil^aft, partaking, ©etvdvtig, wailing; in expecta- Uefcevbrufftg, tired; weary. tion. 53erbddittg, suspicious. ©eUM^, sure; certain. S^cvlufti.j, having lost; deprived of. ®e»c()ut, used to ; in the habit, ^cli, full, ^unbig, having a knowledge; aBevtfv worth; worthy. skilled, -ffiiivbig, worthy- £ebig, empty; void. Oiiitt, rid; free from. 18* 418 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN § 125. § 126. (2) Mcer getoaf/r, gc.rcf'-nt, ic3, miibe, fatt, i?c(( and trertf), the accusative h of ien vLsed: as, er ttarb feinen ^ru^er ^eiTvi'ir, he was aware of (the presence of) Ms brother, i. e. he observed his brother. § 125. A Roim limiting the application put in the genitive : 9(ibren, to mind, or regard. Seburfen, to want. ^egei)ren, to desire. Sraiicben, to use. ©nt&c^ren, to need. Giitrat^eii, to do without. ©rmciiigein, to w-ant, or be wiihout. (S*ctttdl)iien, to mention, ©ebeiifen, to think, or ponder. ©enie^eii, to enjoy. ®e'n)a^ren, to observe. Rule. barren, to wait Sadien, to laugh. -5>pLegen, to foster. (Sdicneu, to spare. (gpctten, to mock. SSerfeblen, to miss, or fail. S3er>5effni, to forget, ©vilireii, to guard. SBatjrae&meti, to observe. 21>alten, to manage. SBarten, to attend to, or mind. OSSERVATIONS. 33cburfen, Bcge^reu, braudien, entBe{)ren, ertya.^nen, geniepen, ^^egeti, fdicnen, i^erfe&Ien, ijergejfen, trai^riiebmsn, trafjren and )i>arteu, take more frequently, in common conversation, the accusative. %Mm, flatten and »x)arteit are more commonly construed with a u f , and lad^en, fpctteu and toalteu with u & e t , before an accusative. % 126. RuLK. The following reflexive verbs, peculiar to them, a word of limitat ©id> amnaf en, to claim. „ aiiTictnieTi, to engage in. „ bebieuciT, to use. „ Befei^oiT, to attend to. „ berleipigen, to a])ply to, „ Bcg^t'Cu, to \-ield up. „ Bentadutgcn, to acquire. „ 6emciiietit, to seize. „ bef*?tben, to acquiesce in. ,, beflnnen, to ponder. „ entjiu^ant, to abstain. take in addition to the pronoun ion in the genitive : 3i6 eiitfelcben, lo dare, or be bold. „ ent5red'>en, to forbear. „ entBatten, to refrain. „ entf±Iagen, to get rid. „ entnimeu, to recollect. „ etbatmcn, to piLy. „ erfredien, to presume. „ ertunetn, to remember. „ evfrifnien, to venture. ., errDeI)rert, to resist. USE OF THE GENITIVE. §127. 419 Sidi frcurn, to rejoice. gctvcftcu, to hope for. ru(:mcii, to boast, fd'^dmen, to be ashnmed. i"iKn-(}tben, to be haughty, uiitevfangeu, to undertake. Sidi untcrtrhifccn, to undertake. „ tcrmefi'en, to presume. „ yerfe()cn, to be aware. „ ire()ren, to resist. „ trcl^evn, to refuse. „ ttunbern, to wonder. Observations. (1) The genitive is in like manner put after the following imper- sonals : I desire, or am pleased with. I pity, or compassionate. I repent, or regret. It is v/ortb while. Go gcluftet nud\ Qs jammert mid\ (§6 reuct mid% Q6 ici)vd fv*, § 12' Rule. The verbs following require aiier them a genitive denoting a iking and an Accusative signifying a persoji. Stuflvigen, to accuse. ^elef»reri, to inform. S5etau6eii, to rob. 55efd/ulbigen, to accuse, (fntbniben, to liberate. (SntUc^cn, to strip, diit^cben, to exempt. (Sntfabcn, to disburden. (Jntfttibeii, to undress. ©nttajTen, to free from. (Jntletigen, to free from. <5ntfc|eU/ to displace. dnixcchntn, to wean. Scsfpredien, to acquit. S)iai)neii, to remind. Uebetfiil^ren, to condct. Ueberfieten, to exempt UeBcr^eugeiT, to convince. SBcrildn^rii, to assure. S3ertrcften, to amuse, or put off ^\^th hope. SBuvblgen, to deem v-orthy. SciBen, to accuse; to charge. ExamvJes. (5r bat mid^ meinc» ©etbes beraubt, he has robbed me of my money. 2)er Q3ifd>cf f)at ben ^rebigcr fciiieg Stmteo eiitfe^t, the bishop has removed the preacher from his office. Observations. (1) The verbs above, when in the passive voice, take for their 7?07??ina^ire the word denoting the person: the genitive of the thing remaining the same : as, er ift eines 93crbred)en^ aiige!lagt toorben, he is accused of a crime. 420 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 128. § 129. § 128. Rule. Nouns denoting the time, place, manner, intent or cause of an ac- tion, are often put absolutely in the geniave and treated as adverbs : as, 2)ei3 2)tcv9eu^ gelje \6> cm5, in the morning I go out. SJian fiicbt iiiii ader Crteii, they seek him everywhere. Set) Inu 23iUeu0 iiuijiigeben, I am \villing to go there. Observations. (1) This adverbial use of the genitive is qui'e common in Ger- man. See § IQl. In order, however, to express the par.ieular j)oint, or the duration of lime, the accusative is generally employed, or a preposition with its proper case ; as, Cul^ rccrte iidd fteu iDicutag aug ber (gtabt gel;en, I shall go out of town next monday. § 129. Rule. A noun or pronoun used to represent the object, in reference TO which an action is done or directed, is put in the dative : as, Sit bcinfe bir, I thank (or am thankful to) you. (5r gefciUt yiclen Scutcii, he pleases many people. ®r ift bem %clt n\Xa^:x\\^t\\, he has escaped from death. Observations. (1) The dative is the case employed to denote the person or the thing, in relation to v/hich the subject of the verb is represented as acting. Compared wdth the accusative, it is the case of the remote object : the accusative being the case of the immediate object. Thus, in the example, \&) fdu'lcb mciuem S3v"iter eiiicn 53vief, I wTote (to) my father a letter, the immediate object is a letter ; whila father, the per- son to whom I wrote, is the remote object. The number of verbs thus taking the accusative with the dative, is quire large. (2) On the principle explained in the preceding observation, may be resolved such cases as the following : eo ti)ut ink kii, it causes me son'ow, or I am sorry; es tinvb mir im <6er5eii rceh tbmi, it will cause pam to me in heart, i. e. it will pain me to the heart, l((eg red't, this circumstance excepted, I fi.nd all right. * The exceptions tire kiU\v.'C';, b^n'Tj'.-u, beflc^cn, beru^cn, befHivren and betvari5)'nt. t In the earlier Germaii, these v/ords of measure or distance were put in the genitive : a.s, eincf emaniie wdt, a span wide. AProsrnox. § 133. § 134. 42,3 § 133. Rule. A noun or pronoun used merely to explain or specify that which is signified by a preceding noun or pronoun, must be in the same case : as, (Jiccro, ein Qvo^n 8iebncr, Cicero, a great orator. 3(}m, ineiuem ®o[)lt{)atcu, to him, my benefactor. Ser dlatl) mciiied ^Brubcr^, bct? 9ied)t^ge(cf|rteu, the advice of my brother, the lav/yer. Observations. (1) The explanatory noun is said to be in apposition with that which it explains : the latter being called the principal term. Be- tween these two, that is, between the principal and the explanatory term, there often intervenes some connective particle. Thus, er t)at fidi aly ®efcl^9c6er aerbieiit gcraadit, he, as a lawgiver, has rendered himself meritorious ; mein 5iad)bar, ndmlidi hex S3auer, my neighbor, namdu, the farmer. This latter mode of specifying (that is, with the word iidraOd)), is far more common in German than in English. (2) The proper names of months, countries, towns, and the like appellatives are put in apposition with their common names ; where, in English, the two words stand connected, for the most part, by the preposition of; as, ber SZonat Siugitft, the month (of) August ; tie ^taH Soiibon, the city (of) London; bie Unii?erfitdt Drforb, the uni- versity (of) Oxford, § 134. THE PRONOUNS. Rule. A pronoun must agree with the noun or pronoun v/hich it repre- sents, in person, number and gender : as, Set Staiin, roeld)er-roetfe ift, the man who is wise. Sie %n\n, voeldie ffcij^ig ift, the woman who is diligent. SaS v^inb, voeldieg Umi ift, the child that is small. Observations. (1) The ncu-er pronoun, e » , is used in a general and indefinite way to represent words of ail gender and numbers : as, e^ ift ber firc,v.iii, ii is the man ; eij ift bie ^rau, it is the ivoman ; e^ ift ba^ Jliub, it is the ciiiU; t$ ftub bie S)^diiner, they are the Tnen, &c. In like manner, also, ofcen are used, the pronouns b a i?, (that); b t e sS, (this) tt) a £?, (what) ; as also the neuter adjective a 1 1 e ^, (all) ; as, ba^ finb meinc 91id}ter, these are my judges. 424 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. (2) When the raitecedent is a personal appellation formed by ona of the diminutive {neuter) terminations, 6.) e n and ( e i ii , the pro- noun instead of being in the neuter, takes generally the gender naturalio ihQ person represented: as, too ift ifir (SoI}iidicn ? 3[t cr (not e6) im ©avteu ? Where is your little son ? Is Tie in the gnrden ? The same remark applies to SBetb (looman) and ^raueiijimmer {lady)* When, however, a child or servant is referred to, the neuter is often employed. (3) A collective noun may in German, as in English, be repre- sented by a pronoun in the plural number: as, tie ©ciftlidifeit trat fiir i(;re -^ed^te fe(;r fcefcr^t, the clergy were very anxious about their rights, (4) The relative in German can never, as in English, be sup- pressed : thus, in English, we say, the letter {lohich) you wrote ; but in German, it must be, ber -^rief, toeld)en bu fdiriebeft. (5X The neuter pronoun e ^ , at the beginning of a sentence, is often merely expletive, and answers to the English word "there" in the like situation : as, e^ liuiv ntemanb i)\zx, there v/as no one here ; e^ fcmmeu Seute, the people are coming. (6) The English forms, he is a friend cf mine ; it is a stable oj ours, &c., can not be literally rendered into German; for there we must say, er ift niein ^^^i^'w^b, he is my friend; or, er ift eincr mchiec T^reunbe, he is one of my friends, &c. (7) The definite article in German is often used, where in Eng- lish a possessive pronoun is required: as, ev ivinfte if)m mit ber <§aub, he beckoned to him with his {the) hand. (8) The datives of the personal pronouns are often in flimiliar style employed in a manner merely expletive: as, id^ Icbe intr Hn dii}dn\imn, I like Rhenish Avine for me, i. e. I prefer Rhenish wine. See § 129. 3. § 135. THE ADJECTIVES. Adjectives, when they 'precede their nouns (expressed or under- stood), agree with them in gender, number and case ; as, 2)ic[e fdioiie 5)vime, this handsome lady. @iii giiticjev xmb gcrcd^ter 23ater, a good and just father. Sien jtrctfren biefe^ S)couv"itL% the twelfih {day) of this month, &c. ^kx ift cin S)Zi^ycrflaab, — ciu rianbgreiflii.ter, here is a misunder- standing, — a palpable {one) . , SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. § 136. 425 Observations. (1) This Rule of course has reference to those adjectives which are used aUribuUveln ; for predicative adjectives, it v^'ill be remem- bered, are not declined. For the several circumstances under which adjectives are varied in declension, consult § 27. § 28., &c. (2) This Rule applies equally to adjectives of all degrees of comparison ; as, tcijeve Q3iic'oer, better books ; ber ):!Z\tt 2Bein, the best wine ; bcsS Ki'teu ®ciiicti, of the best wine, &c. So, too, it ap- plies equally to all classes of adjectives ; as, adjective pronouns, numerals and participles. (3) The word '•'■one,^'' which, in English, so often supplies the place of a preceding noun after an adjective, cannot be translated literally into German : its office being rendered needless in the latter tongue by the terminations of declension. See last example under the Rule. (4) So, also, the English '■'■one's''' is the proper equivalent of the German f e i n, in such cases as the following: gibt eg ettrvis (^blereg, at^ feincn ^-einben ju t»ergebeu ? is any thing more noble than to for- give one's enemies ? (5) When the same adjective is made to refer to several singular nouns differing in gender, it must be repeated vaih each and varied in form accordingly : as, dn gcle^rter Sc()u iinb ei'.ie gc(ef)rte XcdUev, a learned son and a learned daughter. TJie adjectives are, also, often repeated, though the nouns be all of the same gender. § 136. THE VERBS. Rule. A verb agrees with its subject or nominative in number and per- son; as, Seber 5tugcnHi(f ift fcftBar, every moment is precious. S)ie 93dumc fcluhen iin ^rii(;(ing, the trees bloom in spring. Observations. (1) When the subject is the pronoun eg, "b o.^ or b i e g, used in- definitely (See § 134. 1.), the prsdicate, if a noun, determines the number and person of the verb; as, eg fiiib bic ^viicbte ^im6 X^Liuug, these are the frui'S of your actions. (2) In the second person (singular and plural) of the Imperative mood, the pronoun which forms the subject is commonly omitted ; as, azb,ct bin imb fciget Sdiaimi trieber, njcig ii)v fefiet uub ftcret, go and tell John what ye see and hear. (3) When the verb has two or more singular subjects connected *26 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 137. by It n b, it is g-enerally put in the plural ; as, 5af itiib (5iferfud)t [tub fjcftttje Seitcnfcbaftcii, hatred and jealousy are violent passions. (4) When the subject is a collective noun, that is, one conveying the idea of m;iny individufJs taken together as unity, the verb must (generally) be in the singular; as, ba6 engtifdie 33oIf i;at grcpe %xni)dt, the English people have (has) great liberty. In a fev/ cases only, as, ciii ^vtar, a pair ; eiite SJlenge, a number ; em fDu^enb, a dozen, the verb stands in the plural. (5) When a verb has several subjects, and they are cf different persons, the verb agrees with the first rather than the second, and the second rather than the third ; as, bit, hcin Sriiber unb tdi tucllen [pajtereii geljcn, thou, thy brother and I ^\dll go take a walk ; bit imb belli Q3niber ymncgct md, you and your brother avail much. § 137. USE OF THE TENSES. E.ULE. The Present tense properly expresses what exists or is taking place at the time being ; as, bie ii^a'^re Siafifevfcit befd^i^t ben (Sd)iyadien, true valor protects the weak. Observations. (1) The Present in German, as in other languages, is often, in lively narrative, employed in place of the Lnperfect ; as, 2)ie (Somie gef)t (for giui]) luikx, 'i^a ftef)t (for ftanb) ev am Xijcx, k., the sun goes down, while he stands at the door, &c. (2) The Present is not unfrequently used for the Future, when the true time is sufficiently clear from the context ; or when, for the sake of emphasis, a future event is regarded and treated as al- ready certain ; as, 3di veife mcrgeii o.h, I start (i. e. will start) to morrow. 2Gev irel^, iver mcvgeii ii&er iin^ bcfie(}lt, wdio knows who commands (i. e. will command) us to-morrow ? S3alb fe()eu ©ie mid") irieber, soon you (will) see me again. 5)ie6 ©dilcB cvfteigcu twir in btcfcr ^lad't, this castle scale we (i. e. will we scale) this very night. (3) It should be noted that the Present is, moreover, the proper tense for the expression of general or universal truths or proposi- tions ; as, bie ^iio^d fliegeii in bcr 2uft, birds fly in the air. (4) In English we have several forms of the Present tense ; as, / jrraise, I do praise or / am praising. In German there is but one form (id) lobe) for the expression of these several shades of meaningf. USE OF THE TENSES. § 138. § 139. 427 (5) The Present in connection with the adverb fit o n {already) ofien supplies the place of a Perfect ; as, ivir ivdjuen fcbcii fieben 3vi(;ie \)[i\\ already dwell we here (i. e. liave ice dwell) seven years. (6) In English, we say often, " I do walk, I did walk, " and the like : where the verb do (Present and Imperfect) is employed as an auxiliary. This cannot properly be done with the corresponding verb (t I) u n, to do) in German. § 138. Rule. The Imperfect tense is used to express what existed, or was talcing place at some past time indicated by the context : as, id) fcbricb an <£ie, CiU icb ^bxcn 33rief crfiielt, I was writing to you, when I received your letter. Observatioxs. (1) The Imperfect is the historical tense of the Germans. Its proper ofiice is to mark what is incomplete, or going on, v/hile some- thing else is going on. It is the tense adopted by the narrator, who speaks as an eye-witness ; though it may be used by such as have not been eye-witnesses of the events narrated: provided the statement be introduced or accompanied by such expressions as, lie said {\o^o^it er), iLis said, or tliey say (fagt man). When the speaker has not been an eye-witness, the Perfect should be used. (2) From the use of the Imperfect in expressing the continuance of a thing i. e. what was going on at a given time, comes the kindred power which it has, of expressing repeated or customary action : as, ev pfiCQfe ju faijen, he used to say, i. e, was in the habit of saying. (3) The Imperfect in German, like the Present, has but one form; which, according to circumstances, is to be rendered by any one of the ihrez English forms of that tense. 5 cb I o b t e, therefore, is either I praised, did praise, or was praising. % 139. Rule. Ihe Perfect tense is that which represents the being, action or passion, as past and complete at the time being : as, bie (Scbiffe jtnb angefcmmeu, the ships have arrived ; er ift ttovii^e Sffiocbe geftorfcen, he died last week. Observations. (1) The German Perfect, as a general thing, corresponds closely to our Imperfect, when used as an aorist ; that is, when used to ex- press an event simply and absolutely, and without regard to other events or circumstances. Hence often it happens, that where in Eng- 428 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 140. § 141. § 142. lish we use the Imperfect, the Germans employ their Perfect : thus, idi l)a.hc beiuen ^ruber Qc\kxn gefefieu, aber nict)t gefprod)en, I saw your brother yesterday, but did not speak to him. (2) The auxiliary participle (tt)cvben) in the perfect passive, is sometimes omitted. (See § 84, 2.) (3) We may remark here also, that, though in English we have a double form for the Perfect, (thus, I have written and I have been writing) the Germans have but the one. By which of the English forms, therefore, the German Perfect is, in any given case, to be ren- dered, must be determined by the context. § 140. Rule. The Pluperfect tense is used to express what had taken place at some past time denoted by the context: as, DfZadjbem bie ©cnue untergegangen tnar, giiig er iveg, after the sun had gone down, he went off. (5'r^atte tt)df)veub unferer Uuterrebung gefd)Iafen, he had slept during our conversation. § 141. Rule. The _^-rs^ Future tense is employed merely to express what shall or will take place hereafter ; while the second Future is used to denote what shall have occurred at some future period. Observations. (1) The Future tenses, both first and second, have their precise equivalents in the corresponding English tenses and should be used accordingly. (2) When a future action is represented, or is mentioned, as a thing necessary to be done, as in the English phrases, / am to go, he is to have and the like, the German employs a distinct verb ex- jDressive of obligation or necessity : as, id) foil e^ ^abm, I am {shall be obliged) to have it. (Sx fed fpvedieii, &c. § 142. Rule. The Indicative mood is used in affirming or denying that which is conceived to be certain or undoubted ; as, dv iinrb mcrgcu juriidffcmmeii, he will return to-morrow. Observations. (1) Since the proper office of the Indicative is to express reality^ it is employed in all absolute or independent .sentences. Even in USE OF THE MOODS. § 143. 429 ■ conditional sentences, moreover, it is used, if tlie condition is as- sumed as a fad ; as, biit bit rcidv ]o gib inel, art thou rich (i. e. if tliou arc rich), give much. (2) Sometimes the Indicative is employed instead of the Itnpera- ilve, where, that which is enjoined, is treated as something already in progress ; as, b u trlttjl »cr, thou steppest forward, i. e. step (thou) forward. This is regarded as the strongest form of command. § 143. Rule. The Suhjunciive mood is used when that which is expressed by the verb, is conceived to be uncertain, though possible ; as, 3cb i)abc getjovt, 'i}\^^ er bie gcuninfcbte (Stctte erfjalten l)abe, I have heard, that he has obtained the desired situation. Sd) toiiiifdje, 'bd^ er gliicflid) \\>txhz, I wish that he may become happy. Observations. (1) The Subjunctive, from its very nature, stands chiefly in de- pendent clauses ; and, in these appears, under various circumstances. Thus, it is employed : (2) When the design of the speaker is merely to repeal or quote a statement, without vouching for its accuracy ; as, er fagt, ber S3aum 'h\\xi)t, he says, that the tree blossoms ; er melbete mir, hoi'^ er fid) aer^ I;eiratf)et f)at)e, he told me, that he had been married. When, on the contrary, the design of the speaker is to set forth the thing repeated or quoted, as something real and undoubted, the Indicative must be used; as, er iDJd eg nid)t glauben, baf fein ^vubev geftorben ift, he will not believe, that his brother is dead. (3) In like manner, the Subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses, after such verbs as ftoffen, to hope ; furd)ten, to fear ; iuiinfdien, to loish ; tDcUen, to desire; bitten, to ash; ratf)eu, to advise; yerbieten, to forbid ; ermaf)neu, to exhort ; since the event, in such cases, may be supposed to be always more or less uncertain ; as, er fiivd)tet, \)euu e^ raogltd) ii\ive, I would do it, if it were possible ; trenn er I}ier tf are, irtiirbe er bid) befiutt §a6en, if he were here, he would have visited you. (2) When the condition is assumed and treated as a fad, it is expressed, not by the Condiiional, but by the Indicative ; as, bift bu reid), fo gieb yiel, art thou (i. e. ?/'thou art) rich, then give much. (3) Sometimes the ^ erb expressing the condition is merely un- , derstood ; as, id) ()dtte bk ©ad^e anbcrS gcinad)t, I should have done it otherwise (if it had been ooinmittod to mo) ; m fcraer Sag'e i^dtte k^ USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND IMPERATIVE. § 145. 431 ei iiicbt vjctf)vin, (if I had been) in his situation, I would not have done it. (4) Sometimes, in the way of exehamation, the condition is ex- pressed, while that which depends upon it is omitted : in which case the whole expression being of the nature of a wish or petition, is often introduced (in translation) by " O, " " I wish that, " and tlie like : as, Ijatk ich bccb bicfeit 2)Zauii uie gefefjeii ! as, 6, that 1 had never seen this man ! literally, had I never seen this man (how happy I should be) ! ivdve er bed) am ScbtMi I O, that he were yet alive ! (5) The Conditional is frequently employed in questions designed to elicit a negative answer ; as, trnire e^ benii xoaijx ? could it be true ? (it could not be true ;) bu wdreft fo fatfct) getrtefeu ? would you have been so faithless ? (you would not.) (6) Not unfrequently the Conditional of the auxiliaries mogen, biirfen, fclten, fijnnen and toollen, is employed to render an expres- sion less positive, or to give it an air of diffidence ; as, id) ircitte, @te fcctjii'iteteu midi, I could wish (instead of, 1 wish) you would accom- pany me ; id) mcd)tc fd)tyev ju iiBevvebeu fein, I should be hard to be persuaded, or, it would be difficult to persuade me ; biirfte id) ©ieum bag Stefi'er bitUii ? might I (be permitted to) ask you for the knife ? § 145. Rule. The Imperative mood is used in expressing a command, entreaty or exhortation ; as, §iivd)te ®ctt nub e^ve ben ^louivj, fear God and honor the king. Observations. (1) The Imperative is sometimes employed to indicate a condi- tion, on which something is declared to depend ; as, fei ftolj, iiiib in Vrirft wenig 5Cdituiig fiuben, be haughty (i.e. if you be haughty) and you will find little regard. (2) In order to make a request in a manner modest and polite, instead of the Imperative, the Subjunctive of mogen and WoKeu is ofien employed ; as, in \^c(Ieft ftnner nie yevgcffcu, pray, never forget him; mcgen (Sie iriemer gebcnfeii, mny you remember, or remembei me, I prciy. To express a decided command, however, the Indicative is frequently used. See § 1 42. 2. (3) Sometimes, by a peculiar ellipsis, the past Participle is em- ployed in place of the Imperative ; as, nitr iitdit lang gefragt ! do not ask long ! where the full phrase would be, cS Uierbe iiuv nidit lang go; fragt, let it not long be askod ! 2Iit btc 2tr&clt ge^angcn, let them go to their work ! 432 syntax of the verb. § 146. § 146. Rule. The Infiniike mood either with or without the particle ju {to) preceding, is used to represent the being, action or passion, in a manner unlimited: as, Stcvbcu ift DiidUiS, bcch leben unb iiutt fet^nt, bag ift chi Ungtiicf, to die is nothing, yet to live and not to see, that is a misfor- tune indeed. 2)er 2Dunfd) getobt ju iverben, the wish to be praised. Observations. (1) The Infinilive without §u, (to) appears, - a. When, as a verbal substantive (§ 146. 3.), it is made either the subject or the object of a verb: as, ©ebeii ift fclic|er aU ^H)imu, to give is more blessed than to receive; ha6 neunt er avbeiten, that he calls working. b. When it stands alone, as in a dictionary : as, lobeu, to praise ; Iteben, to love. c. After the verbs l^eipen, to bid : as, idh I)ie^ Ifjn gef)cn, I bade him go. I)elfcn, to help : as, er fjilft mir fchveikii, he helps me to write. tcl}veu, * to teach : as, er le^rt ha6 ^inb lefeii, he teaches the child to read, lernen, * to learn : as, tinr levnen tanjen, we learn to dance. ^oren, to hear: as, icb t)6vc fie ftngeii, I hear them sing. fel}en, to see: as, icb fcl)e inn fommeit, I see him come. fiU)lcn, to feel : as, icb fit{)le ben ^nU fcblagen, I feel his pulse beat. finbcn, to find: as, idi fanb ha^ 33udi aiif bem !l'ifdie liegen, I found the book lying on the table. d. After the auxiliaries of mood, mogen, Fonnen, laffen, biirfeu, fc((en, xoclkn and niiiffen, and after lyevben, when employed as an auxiliary in forming the future tense. e. After the verbs following, in certain phrases, Hciben, to remain : as, er hWM ft^en, he continues sitting. faf)ven, to go in a carriage : as, id) faf)ve fpajieven, I ride out for an airing. * Set^ren and lenifii forai exceptions to the observation in the text : admit- ting, as they do sometimes, the particle ^it between them and an Infinitive succeeding The student will note, also, that the Infinitive after all these verbs, is, in English, often best rendered by a participle: as, ei" fiifjlte feiii ^lut (j>il}reii, he felt his blood boiling. USE OF THE INFINITIVE. § 146. 433 Qe^n, to go or walk : as, cv cjcljt bcttcin, he goes begging, ^ l^aben, to have: as, er ijat ^ut vebeii, he has easy talking, i. e. it is easy for him to talk, legen, to lay ; as, id) lege mid) fd)lafen, I lay myself down to sleep, madien, * to make : as, er mad)tc mid) laiftn, he made me laugh, neuncn, to name : as, id) fann ii)n nennen, I can name him. reiteu, to ride : as, ien, to wish, (gid) xui)mzn, to boast. 33erlangcn, to desire. * iDtndien however, cannot, as in English, be used to signify to make or cause by force : thus, to translate the English phrase, 7nake him go out, the Germans say, Ki§ (not nui^e) ibn biiiaiiei^eben The Infinitive without JU comes after tt)iin, only when iiidJtoitU precedes, in the example above. t C^rfeiuicn and befciinen are construed mainly with the preterite of the In- finitive: as, er evfennt, ftc^i geirrt ju ^aben, he acknowledges that he hasbeeti in error. 19 434 STIfTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 147. S3ereucn, to regret. ^rlauben, to permit. *|Sj!cgcii, to be wont. ©eftatten, to allow. ^crtfaBren, to proceed. 3Serbieuen, to deserve. Uuterlafi'eu, to neglect. SBagen, to venture. <^abm, to have. SBlffen, to know. @cin, to be. ^u^m, to be of use. ♦^elfcu, to help. §rcmmen, to avail. SSevmeiben, to avoid. d. After the prepositions c^ne {without) and fiatt or anftafl {in- stead of): as, cijwt ein ©crt ju fayeu, without saying a word; auftatt ju fdircibcn, instead of wTiting. (3) The Infinirive in German, as intimated before, often performs the office of a verbal Substantive. It is then commonly preceded by the neuter of the article, and has all the various cases: as, \:^5 Sugeii Jcbabet bem ^iioiner am metften, lying injures the liar most; icb bin beg @e§en^ miibe, lam weary of walking; jumS'leifen bift bu nidUgefdncft, you are not fit for journeying. (4) The Infinitive active, in German, after certain verbs, as, fein, lafCen, cerbietcn, befcl}Ien, &c. is not unfrequently employed 'passively : thus, la$ \i)\\ rufen, which (literally) means, let him call, may, also, signify, let him he called ; eg i)! fetue 3eit ju ycrliercn, there is no time to lose, or to be lost. (5) The Germans often employ the Indicative or Subjunctive, preceded by ^i^i'^, where, in English, the Infiniiive, preceded by to, is used : as, id) irciB, 'i!0.^ et ber -2>Zanit ift, I know him to be (literally, I know tJial lie is) the man. (6) The Infiniave, in English, preceded by the words how, where, what, ichen, and the like, afcer such verbs as, tell, know, say and teach, cannot be rendered literally into German : the Germans, in such cases, always using the Indicative or Subjunctive of such verbs as fcllen, nfaffeu, fonnen : as, idi triei^, ti^e id) eo tijun mu§, I know how to do it, or (literally) I know how I must do it ; kC)reu Sic mid>, tnad idi fa^eu fell, teach me what to say. For the use of the Infinitive of mcgen, ircUen, fcUen, &ic., in place of the past Participle, See § 74. 3. § 147. THE PARTICIPLES. (1) The Participles, in German, are varied by cases : following the same rules of inflexion as the adjectives. Having the nature of adjectives, the Present in a feic, and the Preterite in many instances, Riadily admit the degTees of comparison. (2) The use of the Participle, as such, ho%veVer, in German, i^ USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. § 148. 435 far more restricted than in Enolish. For, in English, it is commonly used to form a distinct clause ot" a sentence ; and is thus made to indicate the time^ cause or means of effecting that which is expressed in the main clause : thus, we say : Walking (that is, hy or ichen walking) uprightly, we walk surely. This mode of expression can rarely, if ever, be adopted in German ; into which language, if we desire to translate the above sentence, we must say : irenu tvlr auf^ vid}tivj twinbclu, fo iiHiubetu wir ficber, that is, lohen we walk uprightly, we walk surely. (3) So, too, we say in English : Having given him the money, he went away ; but, since there is nothing in German to correspond to this English compound Participle, it would be a gross error to at- tempt to render the sentence literally. Resort must be had, as in the other case, to a different structure : thus, ai^ cr t{}in bag @e(b geijebeu '{)\\.tk, ijiiig er lt>eg, that is, after or when he had given him the money, he went away. In this way must all similar cases be managed : we must employ a verb in each clause and connect the two together by means of suitable conjunctions ; such as, treil, irenn, al^, ba and inbem. § 148. Rule. The Present Participle^ like an attributive adjective, agrees with its noun in gender, number and case ; and may, also, govern the same case as the verb whence it is derived : as, 2)er Ivicbenbe ^viifjliug, the smiling spring. ^ii6Ieube6 ®etranft% cooling drink. 2)ie aUeg beleBeiibe (Sonne, the all animating sun, i. e. the sun that animates all. Observations. (1) This Participle is seldom, if ever, otherwise employed with a noun than in an attributive sense. Its predicative use is found al- most altogether in those words, that have so far lost character as Participles, as to be commonly recognized only as adjectives : as, 9ici^enb, charming. 2)rii(fenb, oppressive. ^vdnfenb, mortifying. ^Itepenb, flowing. (5"innel)menb, captivating, «§inreipenb, overpowering. 2)rin9cnb, pressing. Such a combination, therefore, as, / am reading, we are walkingj and the like, which is so common in English, is wholly inadmissible in Grerm/in ; save in the instance of those Participles that have lost, 436 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLES. § 149. cas just said, their true participial character : as, bie dlott) ijl bringenb, the necessity is pressing. (2) The Present Participle, in connection with the article, is often used substantively : the noun being understood ; as, bev 2e^ feube, the reader, (literally) the (one) reading ; bie ©terbenbe, the dying (female). (3) This Participle, however, cannot in German, as in English, be, by means of an article, turned into an abstract verbal noun. But in order properly to render such phrases as, the reading, the writing, into German, we must use the present of the Infinitive : thus, ba^ Sefen, 'i)at> (Sd)veiben. (4) The Present Participle, as stated in the Rule, may govern the case of its own verb ; but it must be noted that the word so gov- erned, always precedes the Participle : 'ii'X^ un^ oerfolgenbe @efd)t(f, the us pursuing fate, i. e. the fate that pursues us. In some instances, the words are actually united, forming compounds : as, efirliebeub, honor-loving, that is, ambitious ; gefe^gebenb, law-giving, &c. (5) The Present Participle is sometimes used with the power of an Adverb ; that is, to express some circumstance of manner or con- dition : thus, hjctnenb fprad) er ju mir, weeping (i. e. weepingly) he spoke to me ; er fc^te fict) [dbtuetgenb nieber, keeping silent (i. e. si- lently) he sat down. § 149. Rule. The Preterite Participle is not only used in the formation of the compound tenses, but may, also, be construed with nouns, after the manner of Adjectives : as, 3d) f)aBe ^eute ha^ S?ud) cjelcfen, I have read the book to-day. @in geliebtci? ^hxb, a beloved child. ^et S)lann ift gelel)rt, the man is learned. Observations. (1) This Participle, in its character as an Adjective, is far more frequently employed in German than in English. Indeed, many Pre- terites in German, having lost all character as Participles, are now used exclusively as Adjectives. (2) The Preterite, like the Present Participle, is sometimes used in an adverbial manner: thus, ba6 *-Bud) i]^ serlcren gegangen, the book is lost (literally, gone lost). (3) This is especially the case with certain Participles employed with the verb fommen ; as, er fommt gefa^ren, he comes driven, i. e. driving in a carriage ; ev fommt geritteu, he comes ridden, i. e. riding SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. § 150. § 151. 43 Y on horseback ; cr fommt ije|i[cgcii, he comes flying ; ev fommt getaufen, he comes rnnning-, &c. (4) Kindred to this, is its use, when connected with a verb, to express the condition or state of the subject : as, je^t fterb' id) be; tuf)igt, now I die content ; in felne Jitgcub ge()ii(U, trc^t ev ber S3er; Icumbuitg, wrapped in his virtue, he defies calumny. (5) The Preterite Participle usually in connection with the accu- sative, is in some phrases employed absolutely : as, Viz 9lugen gen ^immel gericb tct, his eyes being directed towards heaven ; ben ©ewiun abgercdbnet, the profit being deducted ; biefeu '^^kH au^genommen, this case being excepted. (6) This Participle is sometimes elliptically used for the Impera- tive. (See § 145. 3.) § 150. Rule. The Future Participle is used, when the subject is to be repre- sented as a thing that must or ought to take place : as, @ine ju lobenbe %i) a deed to be (i. e. that ought to be) praised. Observations. (1) What is called the Future Participle in German, is produced by placing ju before the present participle as above. It can be formed from transitive verbs only, and is always to be taken in a passive sense. It is chiefly to be found in the case of compound verbs: thus, ^ccbjue(ivenber -§err, the-highly-to be-honored L e. the honorable. Sir. See Lesson XLII. § 151. THE ADVERBS. Rule. Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives and other adverbs : as, (f r fdhveibt feltcn, he writes seldom. (5r ^Qii ben ©egenftanb scvtrcfflici) bel)anbelt, he has treated the sub- ject admirably. 2)tefeg ©neb ift fcf)t: gut, this book is very good. 6r arbeitet nicbt gem, he w^orks unwillingly. Observations. Almost all adjectives in the absolute form are, in German, em- ployed as Adverbs. See § 102. 3. For remarks on the position of Adverbs in sentences, see the section on the arrangement of words : § 158. 438 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. § 152» § 152. THE PREPOSITIONS. Rule. The Prepositions an|!att, auper^atb, bieffeitS, &c. (See the List § 109.) are construed with the genitive. Observations. (1) When the same Preposition governs several nouns in the same construction, it is put before the iirst only ; as, id) bin son met; net ^eimatf), meinem 33aterlanbe imb meiucn greunben getrcnnt, from my home, my country and my friends, am I separated. (2) For the right use and position of some of the Prepositions, much attention is requu-ed. See the Observations on those con- strued with the genitive : § 110. § 153. Rule. The Prepositions aus?, auper, bet, &c. (See List § 111.) are con- strued with the dative. (See Obs. § 112.) § 154. Rule. The Prepositions burdb, fiir, gegen, &c. (See List § 113.) are con- strued with the accusative. (See Obs. § 114.) § 155. Rule. The Prepositions an, anf, f)niteT, &c. (See List § 115.) govern the dative or accusative : the accusative, when motion or tendency toii'ards is signified, but in the other situations the dative. (See Obs. § 116.) § 156. THE CONJUNCTIONS. Rule. Conjunctions connect words and sentences in construction, and show their mutual relation and dependence ; as, Sctjann unb 3Bi(&eIm gefjen jur (2d)ule, John and William are going to school. 3di faf) eg ; baBcr tretp idi eg, I saw it ; therefore I know it. (5r ift alter o.U idv he is older than I. Observations. (1) Under the general name of Conjunctions in this Rule, must be included all words performing the qgice of Conjunctions, whether USE OF THE CONJUNCTION'S. § 156. 43? properly such or not. Of these connective words th-ee chisses are to be di:jtinguished : 1. those that do not affect the order of the words of a sentence in which they occur (§ 160. 8.) ; 2. those that iiiways remove the copula to the end of the sentence (§ 160. 7.) ; 3. and finally, those that do or do not remove the copula to the end, according as they stand before or afcer the subject (§ 160. 8.). (2) The true force and use of the Conjunctions is best learned from examples ; of which see a large collection in Lesson C. We subjoin, however, a few remarks in explanation of the following : a. 5lber, aUciii, (cufceni. ?tbcv is less adcersative than either of the oihers. It is of.en merely continuative. SlUcin always intro- duces what is contrary to wiiat might be infen-ed from what pre- cedes: as, er ift fe^r flcipig, aliehi er (ernt fef)r wcnig, he is very in- dustrious, but he learns very little. (5cnbern serves to introduce what is contradictory. It is used only when a negative precedes; ntdit ebe(, fonbcru Hc'mmhttjia, not noble, but pusillanimous ; t6 ijl tneber fct)n?ar§, ncd) bvauii, fcubeni gxun, it is neither black nor brown, but green. b. 2)a|, also auf ba^, introduces a clause expressing the end, ob- ject or result: as, iit tin^p, ia^ ev fcmmt, I know that he is coming. This form of expression is more common in German than in English. When ba$ is lefc out, the copula comes immediately after the sub- ject. See Note, page 445. c. 2) cell introduces something unexpected or not properly proceed- ing from the antecedent: as, er ift fe^rretd% imb bat hocb uu'ni^ ijeavkitet, he is very rich, ijet has he worked little. It is sometimes elliptically employed to indicate certainty, entreaty and the like : as, fvi.3en ©ic nir bcdi, tell me, pray. d. 3c, like the definite article in English, is put before compara- tives to denote proportion. It, then, has beftc for its correlative : thus, ie jiii^iger ev ift, befto gete()rter trirb er, i?ie more diligent he is, tlie more learned he becomes. JiDeftc sometimes comes before je : as, ein j^iniftu^ctf ift beftc fd^oncr, jc ycdfonimener eg ift, a work of art is the more beautiful, the more perfect it is. Sometimes je is employed before both comparatives: thus, je mefcr, je teffer, tlie more, the better. Sometimes befto stands before a comparative without je answering to it : as, id> crUHirtete nid^t melncit ^^veuub jii ftnbeii, beftc grower aber trar meiiic j5veiibe, al^ idi \i)\\ faf), I did not expect to find my friend, but the greater was my joy, when I saw him. e. Cb.jleidi, cbfdicn, cbircM, indicate concession. The parts are often separated, especially by monosyllables : such as, id}, tu, er, it. 440 SYNTAX OF THE IXTERJECTIQNS. irir, i6r, fte. Often two or three such little \Yords come between : as. cb er gleidi alt ift, k., although he is old, &c. ; cB idMnid^ gleicb freiie, jc. although I rejoice, &c. / 2c, after such conjunctions : as, trett, al^, ia, trenn, naitbcm, cB- gleid^, cBfd^cn, cbtrcbt n?eim^[eid"^ and irtetrcf^l, introduces the subse- quent clause. This is chiefly the case, when the antecedent clause is long-, Of consists of several members : Ex. 3BeiI btd> ®crt ikS %ik6 Qivoahx trerben lief, fc in -5^temanb fc iretfe aU bu, since God hath given thee to know all this, so (therefore) is no one so wise as thou. , ber i5reube I O the iov ! ©eb mir '. Woe to me 1 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 441 § 158. COLLOCATION OF WORDS. (1) In the arrangement of words in sentences, the German differs widely from the English. Many differences of collocation, accord- ingly, have already been noted and explained in various other parts of this work. But, as every word and member of a sentence in Ger- man, takes its position according to a definite law of arrangement, and cannot, mthout great offense against euphony, be thrown out of its proper place, we subjoin here some general instructions on this topic. (2) The essential parts of every sentence, as already remarked (§ 119.), are the Subject and the Predicate. That which is used (properly some part of the verb of existence, f e i it) to couple the subject and the predicate, is called the Copula. Now, arranging these three parts in their natural order, the subject will come first, the copula next, the predicate last : thus. Subject. Copula. Predicate. ®ie 33tume 11^ fdhon. The flower is beautiful. 5)a^ -^ferb tear ftatf. The horse was strong. (3) \Vlien, as in the case of simple tenses, the copula and the predicate are both contained in a single word, that word holds the place of the copula ; while the place of the predicate either remains vacant, or is occupied by the object of the verb. Examples : Subject. Copula. Predicate. 5)ie 53 hi me hmt. The flower blooms. — mx tefen \^a^ Suet). We read the book. 5Die ©otbaten fediten. — The soldiers fight. — 3d) [et)e biefen Wi^ci)kn. ii^m fciue S^cdUcr geben. (8) \Vlien two perso7ial pronouns form the objects of a sentence, the accusative comes before the dative and the geni.ive. Examples: Sub;', Copula, 1st Olject. 2d Object. Predicate, 2Bir iiel)meu un6 feiner an. @r t^at iii) mir emi?fc(ilen, (9) Adverbs of degree and manner, or nouns governed by pre- positions and serving in the place of adverbs, when they refer ex- clusively to the verb, stand immediately after the object. Examples* SubJ. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. Qv be^anbelt fetueii @egeiiftanb tjovtreffltit. — @r 'i)at feinen ©egenflaub tovtrefftid) Uljanhdt. @r i^at had ®'ilb mit greubeii au^gcgebetu (10) Adverbs of time, and phrases used instead of adverbs of time, commonly come before the object and before adverbs of place. Examples : Subj. Copula. Adverb. Object Predicate. Sd) l}\kbi gefteru euien 53vtef gefduieben. (Sx ift tor bvei S!agen in Scnbcn — augefcmmeiL (11) Adverbs of place, and nouns with prepositions, used as such, generally come immediately before the predicate. Examples: Subj. Copula. Object. Adce-^b. Predicate. 3d) I;aBc eincn 58rief aua 93erlin erfKilten. 3di trcvbe mcinen (Boim nadi -^ari^ fduifen. ttitfe leifleu, to render aid. Unis Sebcu brinae". to deprive of life. u .&ulfefoinnu-it, to come to the aid. S^rofe bieten, to bid defiance. >^\\ 3}iitroi^ cffeu. to dme. B'i 2;bctl lv•ev^elI, to foil to one's part Sovt^c trai^cu, to take care SJath i^cbru, to give advice. Ru ^hunbe iichcn, to perish. @cbor iivbcn, to grant a hearing. 3u ^hunbe rid^fcit. to ruin. ©efabr (oufcn, to run a risk. 3i!8 2Efvf fe^ei!, to execute. Srill ftehcii, to stand still. 3n ^Stanbc briu^fii, to accomplish. Stft ^viUeii, to hold fesU 9lc^t geben, to pay attention. 444 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158, (12) Nouns and pronouns with the prepositions appropriate to the verb employed in the sentence, generally come immediately be- fore the predicate. Examples : 3d[) l^abe ntemal^ iiBer ben ©egenftanb mit t§m gef^jrod^en. 3d) toerbe niemal^ in metnem SeBen jn i^m gefien. When, however, the preposition with its noun is merely used to denote the cause or purpose, &c., of what is expressed by the verb, it stands before the object. Examples : SOBtr ttanfen geftern aug SJZanget an S3ier Staffer. 3d) fonnte ii)m oor ^^reuben fetne 5(ntn)ort geBen. § 159. Inversion. (1) In all the cases preceding, the natural order of the leading parts has been preserved ; that is, the subject first, the copula next, and the predicate last. But for the sake of giving special emphasis to particular words, this order is often inverted. Thus, the real, or logical subject is made emphatic by being put after the copula : the pronoun e i taking its place as a grammatical subject : as, eg T^efct bie ^rei^eit i^re ^a^ne auf, liberty uplifts her standard. When, again, either the copula or the predicate is to be rendered emphatic, they exchange places : thus, (predicate emphatic) fterben miiffcn Side, die must all. The chief places in which the copula receives the stress, are, a. in direct questions ; as, frf)reibt bev 2)lann ? b. in imperatives ; as, fpred)en (Sie mit i^m ; c. in the case of mogen, when used to express a wish ; as, geBe e^ ber -§immel ! d. in cases where surprise (generally with bod)) is to be expressed; as, ift hoi) bie (Btabt tck gcfe^rt ! (2) When, on any one of those words which, in the natural or- der, come between the copula and the predicate, we wish to lay spe- cial emphasis, it must be put either before the other words standing between the copula and the predicate, or else before the subject. In this latter case, however, the subject and the copula exchange places : thus, nnr »cn dblem fann (ShU6 ftammcn ; where the common order would be : (§hU6 !ann mir yon @blcm ftammen. These inversions, however, chiefly occur when principal and subordinate sentences are connected by conjunctions. SENTENCES : rUTXOIl'AL AND RUBORDIXATE. § 160. 445 § 160. Sentences: rinNCiPAL and subordinate. (1) A principal sentence is one that expresses by itself an inde- pendent proposition : thus, It was reported; He deserves; John toils. (2) A suljo/li ; lie sentence is one, that serves as the complement to a principal sentence ; and without which it conveys no complete idea. Thus, in the expressions, It was reported, thai the ioivn ivas taken ; He deserves, thai we should defend him ; John toils, although he is rich : the first, in each case, is the principal and the second the subordinate sentence. (3) In the natural order, the principal precedes the subordinate sentence. But this order is often reversed; in which case the order of the subject and the copula in the principal sentence, is also re- versed. Thus, in the natural order we say, idi ireip, baf er e^ nidit ti)mi faun, / know, that he can not do it. Putting the subordinate sentence first, it will stand: ba^ er e^ nicbt tljun fann, ireif ic^,that he can not do it, know I. (4) When, however, the subordinate sentence comes in after the copula (i. e. before a part only) of the principal sentence, the natural order of the latter remams unchanged : as, id) faub, al^ id) in Scnbcn anfam, mcinen g'^'cunb nldit. (5) In subordinate sentences, the common order of the leading parts, differs from that of principal sentences, in making the copula come last, i. e. in making the copula and the predicate exchange places. Examples : Copula. dr, ireldier mir im -58rief bva*te. He, who to me the letter brought. 2)cr. ben en -^cr^ ^^"1 ift- 5di ircip, \vc id) iijn gefe^en ()aBe. @r fagt, baf er eo nid^t t(;un !ann. (Sr ift arm, tceil er fe§r trdge ift. (6) The subordinate sentence is usually connected with the prin- cipal one by means of some conjunctive word. The conjunctive word so employed, is either a relative pronoun, a relative adverb, or some conjunction proper, expressing cause, condition, purpose, limi- tation or the like. See the examples under the preceding paragi-aph. (7) The conjunctions employed in connecting principal with sub- ordinate sentences, are, a(3, auf ha% Beyor, big, ia, bafern, bamit, baf, * * 2)aB is sometimes omitted ; in which case the copula stands, not at the end, but just as in a principal sentence : thus, er faqt, er finntc fc^rctben. 446 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. bifit»ei(, cf)c, fafli^, je, ]c nadibent, intern, nadibem, nun, cB, oBgteld), oBs fitcn, cbtvclil, fcitbcm, uugcacbtet, UHil)renb, iveil, trenn, f tcenn nidbt, trenn glcidi, rocnn fdu-'u, n?eini aiut, trie, trie audi, trieivcf;!, tt)c, trcfern, obiivar. These nil remove the copula to the end of the sentence. (8) The following are the conjunctive adverbs, which are used to connect subordinate sentences with principal ones, after the manner of real conjunctions : auf erbem, ba^er, baini, atj^banu, barum, bepire^jjen, bc^(;a(b, beiuicd^, beffenungeaditct, niditebeftctveniger, be^gleid)en, befto, eiiievfeits, anbevfeit-5, eublidi, fevuer, fcLjIidi, gleidni'^cf;!, inbeffen, fjernacb, nach()ev, jebcdv inteffeu (inbef), ingleidien, in fo fern, in [oli^eit {]g xodi), !aum, mitliin, m&.i aUein, nid^t mir, nid'it blcp, ncd), nnr, fonft, t^eil^? ti)nUr lUrigeua, iibevbiesS, inclme^.v, irclil, jubem, jtrav. These all re- move the copula to the end of the sentence, when they stand before the subject: when, however, they come after the copula, the natural order of the sentence obtains. (9) SlUeiu, benn, fonbern, ivXii and cbcv always stand at the head of a sentence without influencing the order of the other words. 5l6er and ndmlid) may, also, occupy the first place without changing the position of the other w^ords. (10) Where a mood-auxiliary, or any such verb as takes the in- finitive without ju, occurs together with an other infinitive, the co- pula stands hefore the two infinitives : thus, Jvenn id) eg f;dtte ti)w.x\. mii|Ten jc, not toenn id) ii)m\ ntiiffen {jdtte. IDIOMATIC PHRASES. There are in German, as in other languages, numerous idiomatic phrases. Many of these can not be rendered literally into English without a great sacrifice both of sense and sound. Still their mean- ing and application must be familiar to the student. We give below, therefore, a somewhat extended list : adding, to each, either some equivalent phrase in our own language, or, where it will bear it, a regular translation. In every case, however, it will be highly advan- tageous to the student to put the phrase first in a perfectly literal dress, and then deduce from it, if possible, the thought, which it is employed to convey. This is often a very pleasant as well as profit- able process. t When roenu is left out the subject and copula stand as in a question: thus, roeiin id) e§ i]efcbvitbcu \)ixdi. ic, or (without x>ii\\\\) ^citre tc^ e^'ijefc^rlcbeu, fp njurce ic^ eg 3^nt;u ci,i\K\Q,t babe . IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 447 ?tiiUeii (Sic C'5 uidU fc gcriitij. ?lu tcv *£vadic ift uiditiJ aii^jufe^cn. Sdif's? UiuinvilJe. i3ei fiocffinfttn-er 9?adU. ^ci bev ^Sad^e ift eiu 5(0er. 5)avaiif irt c^ cBcu aiu^c{cc(t. 2)as3 SdMff tav-j ycv ?tufcr. Sa^ vevftcBt fid) ihmi [elbft, or 2)ad iH'rrte[)t fid}. Svt5 93ud) Idpt fid) lefen. Scit^ (d^t fid) fe()en. 2).v5 hat fetne 9(rt. S)a!3 Idpt fidi ni*t fclafen. ©a3 f)aBe id) mir ball) gebad)t. 2)a5 \viixh eiu @nbe rait (gd^recfen. ue^men. ©I'm ijl nidit ju fjelfen. 5)cii ^itrjcrn jiefien. 5)ci- 92ame irill mir nidit beifaUen. 5I)ie --^aare ftaubeu mir ju 53er9e. 2)ic ©riedien fiateu eine (Sdiladit gelicfcrt. fDie ^cnjler ge§en in ben ©arten. Sie 2Saare fiubet feiueit Slbgang. Sie 22aare ftutet ftcirfen 5(bfa|. 2;icfei5 iBud) ift gut vi&gegangeu. CSile mit Scile. Gin dr^^Sdnirfe. (Sin t>cruei)mcr SJlaun. (Siucm ^ferbc bie ©pcreu gebeu. Cxiuem auf beu 2ei6 geljeu. ©inent au bie ^vinb ge(}en. (^ira'u ftcrauefcrbern. Crircu jum D'iarreu f)aben, or jum Scfteu ^abeu. (Sinen anfaBrcn. Do not think so light of it. Tiiere is no fault to be found with it. Upon an uncertainty, i. e at a venture. At the dead of the night. There is a ' but ' (i. e. a difficulty) in the matter. This was the very aim. The vessel rode at anchor. That is a matter of course, i. e. obvious. The book is readable. That looks well ; that will do. That is unbecoming ; unseemly. That cannot be done in a twink- ling. I thought so soon enough. That v/ill end badly. There is no remedy for it. To get the worse of it. The name does not occur to me. My hair stood on end. The Greeks have given a battle. The windows look into the gar- . den. There is no demand for the article. The article finds a ready market. This book has gone off (i. e. sold) well. Slow and sure ; hasten slowly. An arrant knave. A man of rank ; a leading man. To clap spurs to a horse. To attack or assault one. To go to one's aid. To challenge or"call out one. To make a laughing-stock of one. To addi-ess one harshly. 448 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. ©men an feinem ©eburtstage an; fetnben. (Slnen anfjle^en. (Snbtid) ift ]u unter bie >§aube ge? fcmmen. (Jr i|l ncch einmal [c grcf. (§x hat fcin 3]crmogen bnv6gebradU. (Sx pxaijit gern, or (5v fd)neibet gem anf. (5r Idpt eg fid) fef)r angclegen fetn. @t fal^ mid) jiart an. (Bx fiellt [idi nmrtiffenb an. @r ^at fid^ Icggcmad)t. dr i)iiU libd -Oaud, or dr ijl ein fdilcditer 9Sirtl). ©r muptc fdiliun-en. (Bx irei^ ttJeber au$ ncdi ein. @r riedit ben ^raten. (§x ijat fid) hMcn gemadit. (Sr tdf t »icl barauf gcf)en. @r ^at mir yiel Slbbrudi get^aii. (Bx i)at fid) mii feincn ©Idnbigern abgefitnben. (§x I) at 60 fc in ber Strt. @r :^at enblid) fetne Saare an ben SRann geBrad)t. (Sr mad)t e^ gar yii bnnt. (§x ge§t nur barauf ang. dr finbet fid) immer jn rediter 3tnt ein. ©rinnern ©ie mid) baran. @g tt»irb nid)t angel^en. (Bs faun nidit fd^aben. (Bs ift n?cl)l tfern.\it)rt. (B^ fici)t fe(}r baruadi au^. (Bs ift (Sdmbe, ba^ fie ni*t fommen fanu. (Bs ge()t mir nid>tg ab. (Es gef)t bunt ju. (5"5 rci^t in ben 33entet ©etb Idf t nitJbt fd)on auf ®riin. To make a present to one on his birth-day. To quiz one. She has got married at last. He is as tall again. He has run through his fortune. He is fond of talkmg big. He makes it his business, or con- cern. He stared me in the face. He affects ignorance. He has got off. He is a poor manager. He was put to his oath. He is sadly put to it. He smells the rat. He ran away. He spends a great deal of money. He has done me much damage. He has come to terms with his creditors. It is his way. He has found a market at last. He is too bad ; he goes too far. He aims at nothing else. He is always there at the proper time. Put me in mind of it. It will not do. It will not be amiss. It is under lock and key. It looks very much like it. It is a pity that slie cannot come, I want for nothing. These are strange goings on. It costs a great deal of money. Yellow docs not look well upon green. IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 449 3* ^alte ml aiif metne @*tvef^cr. 3di faun ibii ijiit Icibeu. 3d) fvinii mid) n'htt bavciuf bermucii. 3d) fravje nidUi^ baviividv 3di faun ben SJiann nid)t an3[tcf)en. 3d) Ujak c6 ]dbex nid)t. 3di and) ntd)t. 3d) ftnll e«? mit 3f)nen fc i3cnau ntd)t ndmmi. 3d) bin ba()intev gefcmmen. 3d) IvijTe e^ gefien tvie c6 n.n((. 3d) mcdUe bed) irijfen, tra^ er »cr Bat. 3f)m fdUt jcbe ^leinigfeit anf. 3fn*e 9ieben ftimmen nid)t nbevein. 3n S3efd>Iag uef)men. 3ii mir'g hc(b, aU trenn id) ite fd)cn ivgenbtrc gcfef)en l;dtte. 3cbermann mag i()n gnt Iciben. Jlef)ren Sie ]id) nid^t an ifin. ^ein ^^iatt »cr bag 9)ZauI nel^mcn. ^nrj angebunben fein. SJangen Sie ju, meinc v^evten. ^aiTen Sie mid) bafiir fcrgen. SajTcn @ie mid) jnfrieben. Saffen @ie cincn ^(v^t f)clen. Saffen (2ie mvS nid)t nneint? tretben. Soften (2ie bag SidU ang. 2)can bdit eg nberaU fiiv tt?af)r. ^an fagt, cr (icibc fid) umgcbvad)t. !Wan bel)crd)t ung. SD^lein S^cadibar Idpt mir fagcn. 3Jlein SSenranbter fianbelt mit ^^ii-- d^ern. 2JZir nid)tg, bir nid)tg. 9)Zit (Srlaubnif . 9ictf) nnb weif fted)en »on einanbev ab. I make nothing of it. I set a great store by my sister. I like liira well. I cannot recollect it. I do not care for it. I cannot bear the man. I would not do it. Nor I either. I won't stand npon it with you. I have found it out. I let things go as they wWl. I should like to know what he is about. Eveiy little matter catches his at- tention. Their accounts do not agree. To seize (goods). I fancy, I must have seen her somewhere. He is liked by every one. Never mind him. To speak fearlessly. To be irritable. Help yourselves, Gentlemen. Let me alone for that. Let me alone. Send for a physician. Let there be no ditference be- tween us. Put the candle out. It is believed every where. He is said to have destroyed him- self. We are overheard. My neighbor sends me word. My relation deals in cloth. Without much ado ; as easy as possible. By your leave. Red and white present a great contrast. 450 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. ^unbunbbie5it(ei>§afeii.' (Sin Sci^bfjunb oerfclgtc einen jungcn <§afen, ivetdbem cr fdbcn fc^v iia^c wax, ais ekn eiti ditcrer -^afc aii6 bem ©cBiifcbc f^eryerfprang. •^ait, baitte bcr ^unb, bci^ ift ja (L. 44. 4.) cjfeiibarer ©enniui. (Sr lie^ je; r.ni (§ 62 2.) laiifcu iiub fe|te nun biefem nadi (§ 130.). StUeiu fcine Jlrdfte lyaren tchtafje i\tcn gatij erfdicpft ; ba entfam i(im ber .^afe fe^r Icicbt, uiib er er()tett auf btefe -$(vt feinen. Seenblgc evft eine ©aite, ivenn jie amt ncd) }o Umi jit feiit fdieiitt, e^c bu eine anbere anfdngft. 2. 2) c r >-^ i r f d\ 2)er ^ivfdi far) elntl in cinem Haren -Sa6e fein 35i{b. ©a^rti*, fagte cr, id) iibcrtrcffe aKe SBIevc an 5(uftanb unb ^^^tvidit I 2Bie I)crr(i6 ragt bu'o (§ 134. 7.) (JJerocK) cmpor 1 — Scdi meine §upe, ft)le magev unb I)d^nd> I Siamn t^attc cr ba^ (L. 20. 1.) gefagt, fo erblirfte er einen Scraen, ber (§ 65. 2.) auf iijn lodging. Tlit greater (Sdinede trugen i()n fel;!C peradUeten ^siipe In ben ndd'sften 2Balb ; aber pIc|ItdT filelten bie ®e; firdud^e feine brritcn -Corner auf, unb er fcnnte ftdi nid)t loeroiuben (L. 66.). 5^er Scwe crreidUe unb tchkk i^u. (gdid^e bie 5)inge nid^t nadi ber dupern ©ej^alt, fcnbern nadi bem in* nern 2Bertf|e ; fouft n)irit in eft bein Urtl;ei( ^u bereuen Ijabcn. SJieipner. 451 452 READING LESSONS. 3. 3)ev SQvinberer u:ib bag ^rrtidbt. (s'm ©auberer faf) bea DtacbisS (§ 128. 1.) auf fciiicm 2Sege itnitjettson flit ein Swlicbt, gmg ibm gerabe nacb, fam ticm rctten ^fabe ab itnb oer* fan! baburd) in einen ttefeu ©um^f. >§a, ijevwiiufditeg l^rugbtlb I tief er aug, voarum mu^teft bu midi fiierfjer fuljteu ? — 3di bid) gefiil)vt ? ertDie; berte bag Sttlidit; urn 93crjcil)ung, id") yevbiene biefeii 33oriDurf nidit. 2)ii gingft mix ja freitvidig iiad). D^iemaiib als (L. 61.) bu felbft ga& biv hm ^ati) mix ju folgeu. 30'leif ner. 4. ^ e r \T) 1 1 b e 5( )) f e I b a ii ni. 3n ben f)o'f)Ien (Stamm cinc^ voilben 9(vfel6aumeg lic^ fid) ein @*tr>arm SSienen nieber. (Ste fiilitcn i()n mit ben ©did^en if)re£5 -^onigg, unb bcr ^aum irarb fo ftclj barauf, ba^ er aUe anberen S3dume gegen fid) aeradv kte. 2)a rief if)m ein 9lofen[tocf ^u: (Slenber (Stol^ auf geOef^ene @iiptg; feiten ! 3ft beine grud^t bavum toeniger l^erbe ? 3n biefe treibe ben ^onig l^erauf, iuenn bu eg i)ermagft, unh harm eril (L. 93. 1.) tnirb ber 2Jlenfd) bic^ fegnen! 2efH«g. 5. ^er arm SSefpcn trar in einen «§cnigtopf gefrod)en unb lief eg ftd) ba rcof)l fd)mecfen (L. 87. 1.). ^ci) je|t, al6 fte ttieber fcrt wciitm, fonnten jie nidit; benn bie jdf)e @iifigfeit batte §liigel unb^^iipe unbraud)^ bar gemad)t. ^Idglid) jammerten fie nun iiber ifir na^eg @nbe. — Sine einjjige Sefpe fsatte ftd) »crfid)tig am 3tanbe er^atten, jwar (L. 44. 4.) vreniger gcnoffen (L. 91.), aber ftd) aiv^ nid)t gefangen. 3^r hamxt mid), @ditreftern, fpvad) fie, inbem fte fcrt ficg ; aber if)r f)dttet aud) bie (gdiwie? tigfeit ^^6 <§eraugfcmmeng bebenfen fcllcn (§ 74. 3.), ef)e i()r end) fc ticf binein nvigtet. 5)er 2Beg jum fiinbljaften 93erguiigen ifl i?id)t 5)od) befto (L. 31. 6.) fd)toerer fdUt eg (L. 46. 2.), yen ibm fid) Icgjureipen. ®aran benfe man (§143. 7.) server, benn nad^l^er ift eg ju fpdt unb frud)ttcg. 5(Jleipner. KEADING LJiaSO-NS. 453 7. xi^ i c '.i; a u b c u ii b t i e St x d i) e. (S'in mittf)unlluicv itiuibe irarf nadi eiiiev fcbucciyeipcn Saiibe mit naffct: (ivte, iinb ba^ gldujcube ©cficbcv berfclbcu \Dui-bc fdimu^l^ uub fd)lt)arj. "yam bij'i 2)u bod) audi gcu^cvbeu, irie unfer etiier ! \acik eiue alte .Hvdfje f) of) 11 lad) eub ; benn bie ^Bofcii f)abcn c^ nid)|- gern, baf man beffer fciu iuiK, al^ fie, unb fveuen fid) iiber h^n UufaU bev ©utcii. 3Bic ciicr cinev geiitovbeii ? emneberte bie Xaube. ^eineoivcgcg ! id) fd)eiiie iiur fo; id) lueube aber iiidit fo blcibeu I Uub jie blteb audi uid^t fo. <£ie babete, fie reiuigte ]Uh, uub toav iineber ic gldu^cub wcip, ais juwov; abcv bie ^idfje blieb, \v>k \k wax, uub tt)itrbe es? (L. 36. 5.) aud) gebliebcu feiu, tomn fie aud) eiu Saiir laug gebabet unh gc^ni^t ()dtte. ^aitct bie ^'pevjeu uur I'eiu ; gegeu bie 93ei*teumbuug \mxh fd) ou (L. 44. 4.) 9;atl), uub bie Uufd)ulb gef|t am (Bnhc beuuod) gei*ed)tfevtigt uub geldutert f)txi)ox. £o^r. 8. 2) e r @ i u f i e b I e r uub b e r 93 d r. (Bin (Siufieblev f)atk eiueu jungeu ^Sdveu aufgejcgeu uub burd) %uitn, @dildge uub mandie iOHfie i()u fo jaf)m iDie eiucu -^uub gemad)t. Dft bvadUe uuu ber 93dr fciuem @rjtef)er eiu aufcf)utid)eg @tii(f 2BiIb^ret ^eim^ trug -§oIj unb aSaffer fierbei, &ett»ad)te feine «§iitte, !urj, er teiftete ifjm 3>ieufte atler %xt (Sinil lag an eiuem (gommertage ber ©infiebler im @rafe bafiiugeftvecft unb fd)lief. Olebeu i^m fa§ feiu ^dr unb \lo^i)xk bie §{iegen ab, bie fd)aavemreife ben ®rei^ um fd) to dnn ten. S^cvjiiglid) qudlte it)u eiue ; xocijl (L. 44. 4.) je^nmat (§ 60.) i^atte ber 33dr fie fort^ gejagt, uub immer fam fie irieber. Se^t, aU fie fid) abermal^ auf bie @tiru beg il( bid) tocgbleibeu lef)reu ! — 33ei biefen SBorten ergriff er eiucn (Stein, jielte riditig unb jerfd)metterte bie §liege, aber freiltd) aud) mit i^r ben Mcp^ bee Sltten. 2Bdf)le bir feincn eiufdUigen, feinen attjurclten SJ^enfdieu jum ^reunbe ! dmmen belabeu toar, bu fanuft bir abermal eine ©rleiditerung madien. (ix fid mit gleif nieber; aber bie @d)n)dmme faug:teu fid) ooU j er !ounte uid)t toieber empor fommen unb ertranf. 454 READING LESSONS. 5Ber feine 5lrbeit burcb ben (2*aben mue Stnbern ju erleid^tem fud^t, bev fdiabct fid) gerociinlicb [elkr am meifleu, 10. fD i e 91 a cb 1 1 9 a 11 u n b b e r (Si m t» e t. 5)ic DiadUioiaU gin^ einft ciiif Oieifcn uiib jur (L.74. 1.) ©cfcllfdiciftncil^m Yii eiuen ©inipfl mtt. Sie fiovjeu iiber SiCiat imb Q3crg iinb fameu nad) eilidieu S^a'^^eii in eiuen fdunieu 2Balb, in tvcldiem fte fidi niebcrliepeu/'^aum l^vitteu fie fidi auf eiuen *^nfdi Q^yc^t, fo yerfammclte iiili erfamite bciJ vol}cu (2teiuei5 Xitijcnb iiub ya-bcr:: gene .^Ivcifte, fc tcfvcit' idi il)ii lieu ber t?evf)ul!eiibeii (gd^ladc. — 5)arnadi aU bcr .\Cnabe eiii ^iiugling geircrben war, gab i!)m ber Q3atei: ben t^erebcUen (Etein al^ <2iiinbi(b feu besS !Sc6eucrbeu. Siber ber -^ater ua(}m ftiUfdiireigcnb (§ 148.) etne fdion erlofdiene ^ci}te i)cm .^vimiu unh teidite fte bcr S^cd^ter l;tu. (2ie brcniit uidit; ^inb, fagte er, nimm ]k uur. ^a6 ttjat (5'ulalia, unb Tiel;e, bie ^arte, trteipe -^aub unirbe fdimugig unb uni^evfef^eng audi bag ireti^e ©ewanb. Scif man bed) gar nidit yerfid^tig geiiug fein fann, fagte (£u(a(ia oerbvup(tdi, \vi\m man Mcl}Un bcrulirt I 3a xocijl, fpradi ber SBater. 3)u fief)ft mciu ^iub, bap bie ^el)le, roenn fie and) uidit brennt, bcdi fditrdrjt. ^Ilfo ber Umgaug mtt er (§ 62. 3.) anttDortete: fDa5 femnit baher, ba^ idi mcinc 5hi.:;cn t»o6I in W:t ucftme (L. 64. 1.); beuii aiU6 -Scfc fommt burdKbie 8inue jum ^Brjett^ oBer audp bod ®utc. — 2luf hk \xsnUxt ^ra-je, toife er bad wfld^e. 456 READING LESSONS. fagte er : ^ihm 9)lcrgen, e{)e ii) an tie ©efdidfte unb untet bic SOflenfdien gc{)e, vidite idi mcine Siugeiibebacbtfam auf bvei fDinge : (^rftenS (§ 51. 1.) {)ebe icb fie gen (§ 114. 2.) <§tmmel unb erinneve mid% baf meiu -^aui^tgej fdvift unb bag 3tel meineg Scbeng nnb ©trebens bcvt cben fei. 3tt)L'iten5 fenf idi fte jur (Svbe nnb bebenfe, ir>tc trentg dlanm ii) fcebavf, urn einjl mein ®rab bavin ju ftnben. 3)ritteng enblid) fcbau id) um mid) unb be- tvadite bie ''Mniqe berer, benen eg ncd) fd)limmer evgefit, aU mir. S(uf biefe 2Bcife getvofte id:) mid) alleg 2:dh^6 unh lebe mit Selt unb S)^enfd)eu jufvieben in ®ott. Stuerbadiev. 5. 2)te ^orud^ren. ©in Sanbmann ging mit feinem fleinen ©cfine auf ben Strfev Ifiinaug, um ju fe^en, ob bag ^ovn balb veif fei. (Sief), SSater, fagfe ber unerfafjrene .Knabe, tvie aufredit einige ^alme ben ^o^f tragen ! 3)iefe miiffen tt)obl r.edit t)crnef)m fein; bie anbern, bie fid) t)or ii)mn fo tief biirfen, ftnb geiinfj ttiel fd)ted)tev. S)ev 93ater ))p(fte ein ^^aar 9te§ren ah unb fprad) : Xijo^ viditeg ^inb, ba fief) einmall !t)iefe 5(el)re f)ier, bie fid) fo ftolj in bie>§o§c (L. 68. I.) ftrecfte, ift ganj taub unb leer ; biefe aber, bie ftd) fo befd^etben neigte, ift ttoU ber fd^onften .Corner. ^vdgt einer gat ju Ijod) ben .Kopf, re S3af)n boUenbet. 2)ag 5)unfel beg 5(benbg begann fid) iiber bie |ngenb(i*e @rbe ju aerbveiten. 2)er erftgeborene @of)n ber @d)d:pfung ftanb auf einem ^iigel (Sbeng, neben it)m ©toaf), fein (Sd)u|engel unb Q3ei gleiter. (§S waxh immer bunHer unb bunfler ringg um ben ^iigel ; bie ®dmme? rung u^anbette fidi in dladot, unb i)erf)iiUete ten ein buftiger @d)leier hk ^of)en unb Spier. — ®ie Sieber ber 936gel unb bie frol^en iank bet S^fiiere tterftnmmten. ©etbft bie fpietenben £iiftd)en fd)ienen einju^ fdilummern. ?S3aS ift baS ? fragte ber 9Jlenfd) mit teifer (Stimme feinen :^immnfd)en 53eglciter. SKirb bie junge er ^ranfe I'lergap feiner (Sdimerjen, ber 2^rauernbe feineg j^ummerg, bie 9trniut§ if;rer ©orgen. %lUx 9(ugen fd)loffen fid) (§ 86. 4.). 3e|t, nadi ycKenbetcm (S)efd)dft, legte fid) ber roDi)ltf)dtige (Sngel beg (2di(umntcrg iwieber ju feiuent ernfteren 33ruber. „-I3enn bie 2)torgenrotii? eriradit", ricf er mit frc^iidicr Uufd)ulb, „banu pveifen mid} bie 3)^enfdien alg iBren ? in einiger (L. 41. XVU,) (Sntfemimg geblieben, „5ffic-^er be^ aScgo (§ 101.), mein g-reunb ? ^abt 36r @ef*dfte ^u -5^ari5 ? " „3a/' cmi^errete ber Souer; „au6 nic6te idi gem einmal unfem gu;^ ten ^cnig feBen, ber fein ^clt fc jdrtlidi Itebt." :^er ^cnig Iddn^Ite unb fa^U : „3^a^u fann ©tid^ 3lat^ »erben." „3(&er irenit id) nur .toiifte, tr*ekiier eo ift unter ben r'ielen ^cf[ingen, 5ni benen er umgeben fein irrrb." „^aB mli i* eu* fagen : 36r biu-ft nur 5t*tung geben, trel*er izn (§ 58. 8.) §ut auf bem .%rfe teBalten tuirb, wann alk 3lnbem iid^ ebr^ erbietig iverben mtbic^t ^oben." -5Ufc ritten f.e mit einanber in ^^axie i}hmn, unb ^trat (L. 44. IV.) bad 33duertein auf ber red^ten Seife be^ ^cnigo ; benn iras bie Hebe ©infalt, es fei (§ 143, 7.) mit ^ibnir beibe fjaben aKein nod) ben -^ut auf bem .^csfe." O^a (dd)efic bcv Rc):^ u.;c ]:io^t : ,.^(b bin'a (§ 57. 8.). 2Sann 3^r Qmx dinkin in b^n Stall aemiit nvb 'iuer ©efd'dft beforgt haJbi, fc READING LESSONS. 459 Temmt ju mir aiif mciu ^Hc^ ; idi ivill Qnd) bcinn mit eincr Tlittaq^i fuppc aufivavtcii (L. 75. I.) nub (S"ud) ben 2)aupl}iu ^elcjcn." 2. © u ft a y 21 b c I v 1) i n 9i t j a. 9Ui? bev 9vcpe .iitenioi lu-'u 5dnvcbou, ©uftvvo Slbcfpt), Dlicjvi ocfa^erte, tvavb cv iHMn ©ia^iuratc uncl^vevbictii] kliaiibett. 5(1^ et bie Stabt em? t^ieuommcn batte, fav3tc er ^ve§mut(}i^ ^u ben Slb^ecrbneten, n^eldie if;n um aJer^eitiuuos baten : t6 luu-gciJe euei' unanlldnbige» ©etragen gegen mid). Stn- babt rieUeidit aus? guter 9ibfx*t fo ge()anbclt. 5(ud^ unit id> alter uiu cjc^icmcuben D^eben, tr^cldie Ueklgefinnte gegen midi auggeftof en fjaben, um mid) ben Dligaern iierfiaBt ju madden, weiter nidit gebenfen; benn id) Iialte Co unter meiner 3Biirbe, mid) nad) ben Ur^ebern berfetben ju erhinbigen. 3. @ n ft a i^ 5( b c I p f) u n b £ b e r ft © c a t c n. Set namlid)e gvc^e ^onig entiuftete ftdi einmat fefir gegen hen OBerfien <2ca(cn, unb gab iimi, ba jener ftd) eutfdnilbigeu wcllk, eine b^vbc Obxi feige. Sie 3ttditigung irar nm fc empfiublidiev, Jreit man !eine ©eung; t^nung fcrbem fonnte. :2calcn itevrangte baf;er fcgteidi feincn Slbfd^eb unb er^iett ii)n and\ ^U @uftat» nad)f)er .uber ben 3}orfa{( mit fattem ^hite nadibad^te, gcreuete lijn feine «§i^e. ©r fd)icfte nad) (Ecalcn, man mclt-ete il)m aber, bag bicfev (§ 62, 2.) bereito nad) 3)dnemar! abgereifet ivdre, wo er iral)rfdieinlidi iDienfte nelimen umrbe. ©uftap fe^-.tejldi augen^ blicfiidi 5u ^ferbe m\h eilte, UcS yen einigen Sebienten begleitet, gcgeu bie ©rcn^e, ireUte (gdnrebeu yen S^dnemarf fd^eibet. (ix fanb unrflid) ben (§ 120. I.e.) Scatcn, unb fein erfteg 2I3crt irar : „(£ie finb yen mir be; ieibigt trcrben, eg tmtt mir loib (L. 76. II.) ; benn id) fd^d^e Sie f)cd). 3d) bin iibrigeng ()icri)ergefemmcn, um ^ijmn @enugti)uung ^u geben. 9(ufer b^n ©rcn^eu meine5 Dteid^^ ftiib Scatcn unb ©uftay fid) einanber glcidb- <6ier ftnb vvd ^^iftclen imb ^tyei -i>.cgen, tyd()(en Ste yen beiben unb rdd)en <£ie bie 33el£ibigung an mir, tyeun (Sie fcnucn. >2calen, yen ber >§cd)f)er; jigfeit bes .llcuigs inuig geriibrt, fid iijm ^u Su^en (§ 129. 3.), ban!te if)m taufenbmal (§ 50.) fftr bie ©enugt^uung, n^^eld^e er if)m geben lycUte, unb fiigte bie S3itte binju, in feincn 2)ienften flerben ju biirfen. ^a6 i\t mein 9Bunfd), fagtc ber jtcuig, umarmte ben CBerjten iinh erjdBIte felbji bem «§cfe 9t((ey, wai ^trifdien i()m unb (Scalen yergefaHen tyar. 4. @ d) e r 5 unb (^ r n ft. 9Bd()renb eineg ©clnrggmarfd)c3 im ficbenjdfirigen ^riege, ging ^riebrid) ber ©refe cinnut, ungcbufbig fiber ha6 langfame 33orrucfen beg ©cfd}ii$e3, burd) ben (ingtycg p ^npf bergan ; mit if)m ber ©enerols 460 READING LESSONS. lieutenant Oraf ^Stf-mettau. SBdfirenb biefeg i^erbriepltdien ©angeg toan^ belte ben ^cnig, urn ]id) bte 8angeit)eile (L. 91. 4.) ju sjertreiben, bic Suft an, Lim ©rafen, eincn fe()r veligiofen Tlann, eiu itienig ^u necfen. (Sr ertunbK]te ftcb ncicb beffeii 53eidUriatn: in Berlin, c& ficb berfelbe.ncit trcf)l befiubc (L. 60.) uub lic^ einem Stvcm yen (Sdierjvcben unb (gipcttereieii freien taiif. „(Sa\ a)cvi]efidt [iub (§ 58. 1. Note) inel ivi^iger, ale i*, imb an* fe§r toiet gele^rter," emnberte (gdnnettau, ais er enbtidi einniat ^u 2Bcrte fcmmen fciinte. ^.Ucberbieg," fiigte er fiiniu, „finb ^ie audi mcin ^cnig I S)er geiftigc .f ampf ift alfc jwifd^en 3t)nen unb mir in jcbcr Otucffidit ungleidi. 5)enncd) fcnnen ®ie mil* nteinen @lau6eu nidit nefimen. Unb geldnge eg audi ; nun 1 fo {;dtren Sie mir ^lyar unerme^iidi cjefdnabet, afeer jugteich bcdi aud) ]{&> fcl&er nidit unbebeutenb mit." 2)er .tontg btieb fieljen unb ma6te ^rcnte gegcn i^d^mettau, ba» 33li|eit beg Unwittens in ben mdditigen Siugen. — „SS}a3 foK ha^ ijd^m 9Jlcnfteur (gdimettau ?" fagte er. „3d^ fo((te mir fdiaben, trenn idi iijin (§ 57. 7.) feinen ©tauBen nd^me ? 2Bie meint er ha6 ? " 93Zit unerfdnittcrtid^er S^Jude entgcgnete ber ©eneiMl : „(J'W. SJZajcftdt glaubcn jePit ^inm guten Cffiyer an mir '^u Ijahm, unb idi bcffe (Eie irren nid^t. ctcnnten (2ie mir a6er meincn ©lauben nefimen, ba Mtten Sie ein erbdrmlidies 2)ing an mir — ein O^cf^r im 2Binbe, barauf nidit ber min- befte 33erlap tedre, treber Bet SeratBfd^Iagungcn, ncdi in ber (2dilad)t." 2)er ^cnig fdnrieg unb ging eim Seittang im ftiUcn 9Jadiben!en wetter. 2)ami fagte er mit frennblidier <2timme: „(Sage er mir bod) (gdimettau, iyag ift eigentlid) fein ©lauBc ?" „3di glauBe," fagte Sdnncttau frcubig, „an gcttlid^e S3crfe&ung, hk jebeg <§aar auf meinem «6auv>te ^dBIt; an bie gcttlidie drtcfung yen alten meinen ©iinben, unb an ein eirig feligeg SeBen nad) bem S^cbe." „2)ag glauBt i6r irivfiid^ ?" fagte ber J!cnig, „ba^i glauBt er fo redit mit yctier Suyerftitt ?" „3a, tiMBriiaftig, Q\v. Stajeftdt." 3)er Jlcnig fa^te Bcnu'gt Sdimettait'g ^pvinb, brutfte fte Urn ftarf unb fagte: „(S'r ifi ein gfiKftidier 93Zenfdi I" Saitn ging er nad^benfenb tueiter, unh nie, fettjener (gtwnbe, 6at cr igdnnettau'g rcligiofe 5(ufi6ten ycrfpottet. lY. ^cnff^rui^c nttb fiir^e ^etrac^tun^en. 1» S^ur hk (Sonne ift has ©leidmip ®Qike ; fie irirb Bebecft yon ^ch fen, you bem 2)lonbe, ber @rbe, yon berS^^adit; immer fommt fie bod) READING LESSOXS. 461 jobeii mcx^QM aU bn ^e^clb bcs? Iav]c^ r)cn^cr. SBie ? SBcttt i6r ®cit iiidit frur^er aiibctcn, als? tn^^ cr trie im ^Jtcnjcnlanb cfine SBcIfcn fcmmt ? 3. $aut Oiiittcr. 2. iT'iaii muj? btc :JiuieHb ubeu, um fie ju fciinen. iDerfclbe. 3. 3^at^ Qki'ct madit rein ; co ift cine Selbftprebigt. S)erfcl6e. 4. S'ic c'm\ij,c '^ixt, fciiic (§ 135. 4.) ^rciiiett ^u befiau^ten, Beftefjt bariii, iiie ctroa^^ ?(ubcvci? ^u iroUcn, aU man foU ; bann barf man tBun, UMi? man mil. ?3hitfchc[(e. 5. QBie fi-lten cv^vcifcn bis 5)tenfd^en a\i§ Seirf^tfinn bie fcftlid^en Jlni^entlicfe mit t'cilcr, ijci^cv Secle, bie nnr cinma( femmen, nnb nnBe? iin|t, cinen ticfen Stad^et in hii Seele briidEen. 6. (Sin {!utci5 ©eiiMjfen ift beffer al^ jirei Sengcn. (S5 yerje^rt 5)einen .Summer, trie bie Sonne bao ^'16. ^6 ift ein Q3runnen, trenn ^idi bur? iin, ein S-tah, trcnn iT'u ftnfeft, ein ©diirm, irwin j)idi bie Sonne ftid^t, cin OiuftefijTen im iJcbe. <-§tp^'>el. 7. .PJeine yvreuben TaBen, irte -SaneSrcb, imnier dine (Sfel ; grc^e icie Buctevbrcb, ^citi^ mit Gfcl. % ^anl diid)Ux\ 8. -I^er Xricb bed ©CTOifTeno, unb bie innerlidie Sdiamfiaftigfeit »cr bem Q3cfen jinb bie Sdmlengel bed ®uten. — Cijne Xmmtb ift ber S?ienfdi cine eroige Siige. ©cU'evt. 9. ^urd'^te bie Ginfamfeit nidU. Sie ift l)vUTnfog trie bev teine 2)^cnb? htcin, beffen Silberftreifen im $atafte bed ©cttlcfen ficKifd^e ©efpenfter, un^ in ber 6urte bcs ijrcmmen fpielcnbe (S'nget bcs J5immel» abBilben. Sagner. 10. D^imm mit (SBrf.trdit bie ®iBel in hk <6anb, benn fte entfedtt @ot? te? iScrt. SiiTe, bie feinen v^ufirer Batten auf bem gefa£;r»ctlen SDege be^ !2ebene. bie feinen S^rcft fatten in Bitterer ^ctb, nnb feinen ^Beiftanb in ifn-cr (egten Stanbe, benen trar bie -SiBet giiBrer, Srcft unb 33eiftanb. SieBe, bie '<3iBet ijl eine SJlutter, treldie a((e giviuBigen .^inber ndBret unb nillci, Bio lie erreidien ba^ reifere Sitter eincr Boiieren SBelt. >5armo. 11. (5iie :Dn ein @ef*dft unteniimtnft, i^eraBfdume nie, Seine ganje Seeie ^u @ctt, bem Urc|ueU alfeg ©uten, inbriinftig ju ev^eBen, unb ifin um ^eiiianb nnb um Stdrfung Seiner cigenen f6trad'>en ^rdfte bemiitBig an^ufieiien. GamV^e. 12. SSenn Su auf bie (£diau6iii)ne be-^ gefd^dftigen SeBen^ trittil, fo trcKe ni*t gtdnjen, fcnbern nii|en unb gfi'icfUdi fein. SerfelBe. 462 READING LESSONS. 13. ®ie Stnn]\ ift Imq, ha^ Seben furj, ba$ Uvt^eti fcf)toret{g, hk ®e? legenfieit pd)ttg. @6tf;e. 14. (§e Bilbct ein 3^alent ft* in ber (StUTe, (gicb eiii (5f)avaftev iu bent @tront bev 2SeIt. 5)crfcl6e. i5. S^iele^ iriinfcbl fidi bev 2)cenfcb, nnb bccb fecbarf er nnr toenig ; S)enn bic S^acje ftnb fnvj, nub fee[dv:duft bcr ©terblid^cn Sdntffal. ;r)etfet6e. 16. (SinsS red)t ttnffen nnb augiiBen qiU §cf)ere 5Bilbnng aU <§albl)eit im ^nnbertfdttigen (§ 47.). 2)evfelbc. 17. 3)ev gurd)tfame ev[d)rirft »or ber ©efa^r, ber getge in il;r, ber S)lnt§ige nadi i()i\ 3. 5]}anl Olid)ter. 18. 2Ctr I)aben 5lUe fdien i^etreint : leber @lit(flid)e einmal 'ocx SSel^-, jeber UnglitdUdie eininal 'ocx ^^iift. 2)erfelbe. 19. (S{)vfnrd)t befie(;lt bie 3:ugenb and) (L. 63.) im Settlerfleib. (5d)iaer. 20. 3Ber anf ber @rbe cl)ne Seftimmnng lebt, gleicbt einent (£d)iffe auf bem trochten Sanbc ; nnb vocr nidit in has grcf e diai> bet 9Jlenfdif)eit eingreift, ber gteidit ben jinnevncu Xafd)cnni)ren ber ^inber, bk tnoI)l 3ei- ger nnb Bijf^'rbtdttcr, aber feinc medkinifdun ©ingeirteibe fiabcn. Sefffng. 21. 3ur ©rlrerbung einco ©HicfesS gcl^ort %ki^ nnb ©ebtilb, nnb j^nr @r()altnng beffelben gel^brt SlZd^tgnng nnb 93crftitt. Sangfant nnb ©du-itt fitr @du-itt ftcigt man cine iSreppe fjinanf ; aber in einent 5(ugenblicfe fdllt man I}tnab nnb bringt iijnnbcn nnb ©dimerj genng mit auf bie (Srbe. ^ebet. 22. @o geun^ bcr cl)lriedienben 33alfam ab§ngen)innen. ^to^ftccf. 25. 5(nfmerffamfeit anf itnfcre eiitjelnen «§anbfnngett fd)ii|t un^ ttor Uebereitnng, »cr SfJad) ft d)t gegen unfere S3egierben, i)or @leid)gitltigfdt gegen unfere ^ef)Ier. SBielanb. VIEADINO LE!?SONa. 468 26. Urn 0lu(}c an eiiicni fcvneii, fvcuubliclkMi ©eftcibe ju fiubcii, iruip ber Sdnjfcr crft eiiieu .^tamvf init bcu empovteu fficcjen bejlefien. SBurfert. 27. ^aS 2)lovo[cnlidit trecft imr bcii ©d^lafenben, — bie Slrbcit abcr ivccft bie nrdb fd)Iuinmcrubeii ^vdftc bc5 (Svii\iditcii. Serfetbc. 28. SJlandk' ^fi[aiu,e fviuii iiuv auf ciitcr anberu hciidy:n unb jidi er? iHilteu. ®e mand^ev 5)lenfd% StUeiii cvbaCt er jich uidit, burdi 5iubeve jmr beiM;t er. ^Derfetbe. 29. 93itV(e ^cnutuifTc mad"»eu eiiteu Xijdi bcv 53ebaditfam!eit unnct^ig. S^etKedfe. 30. S)ci^ niifeblbarile Slflittel jtdi Stebe ^it eTOerbeii, ift ©cfdUigfeit SBielanb, 31. ®ie 9Je(icjicn ift bas Ie|te 3iel, ttjcfjin ciUe uufere ©ebanfen unb «^§anb{ixngen gef)cn muffciL 9Sei: bteg nc6 nid)t gelevnt f)at, ber ircif nidit^, ber tcnnt iueber fid) fclbjl, nod) ®ctt, unb ifi feiner eu3entlid)en ©tucffeligfeit fdf)ig. Jllcpftocf. 32. Sor aUen S)ingen n?ad)e uber ®id\ baj ~^u nie btc mnere Bn^er? fidU ^u ^Ax fclbcr, bas5 Q3crtrauen aiif @ott unb gure 9Jlenfd^en serlierft! (Scbalb 5)£in (iefdbrte cber ©ebulfe auf 2)eiuer @ttrn S)^i§nrat[) unb 93cr; gwcijl^unij lieft — ]o ift ^iiUs anS. @ebr eft cibtr ift man ini Ungliitf un; gered^t gcgen bie SDtcnfd^cn. 3ebe Heine hv^s Saune, }^b^ Heine Sl^iene t>on ^d(te beutet man auf fi*; manmehtt, jeber fefje esJ ung an, ba^ itnr leiben, unb ireid^e ecu ber S3itte juriid, bie n)tr i()m tbun Bnnten, ». ^nigge- ¥. © e ^ i <^ t e. i. ^ailieb. 2Sic :^errli* leuditet Unb taufenb (Stimmcn Slir bie DIatur ! S(ng bem @ej!rdudi. 28ie gldnjt bie en £) fSrb' unb ©onne, Slu» jcbem BvotiQ, D ©liicf unb 2ufi. ®Bti^. 464 RKADIXG- LESSONS. 2. S i e 3;' ft e i I u n 9 b e r (5 I b ?- Slel^mt Un bte ©elt I rief 3)^u6 yen feinen «§o!^en ^m SD^enfcben 511, ne(imt, fie fcU eiter fein. ©udi fcbenf icb fie jimi (L. 74. 1.) ©rb' uub eio'gen 2er;eu ; 3^ccb tBetlt eiidi briibevli'ii barein. ®a eilt, irag (§ 65. 4.) -§dnbe licit, ]ii) emjuric&ten, @5 regte ficb gefctdfttg Sung unb 2i(t. S)er S((fer»mann griff nadb be^ gelbe^ ^rixditcn, ©er 3unfer btrfcMe bitrd) ben SSalb. S)er ^aufmann nimmt, tea» feine <2peict)er fajfen, ®ev Sl6t voablt fid) ben ebein ginietr*em. JDer ^cntg fperrt bie 58ru(fen imb bie (Strapen, Unb fpridit : bev Si-'^'^ente i]l metn. ©vin^ fpdt, nad^bent bie 2:f;eilung Idngft gefd^e^en, dlai}t ber 5)}cet, er !am ang treiter '^etn'. 2(di ! ba tear ubervilt niditg meftr 5n fe§en, XXnb alley iKitte feiiieit -6errn ! SSe^' mir ! (§ 157. 1.) ? rcbcii iinb tvdimuMi btc ?Jcciifclu'n iml 33en h^ffcvu fi'mftii^cu (L. 36. 6.) S^ageit ; dlad) einem i3liirfliclicu, i^olbcueu 3iel §cffitung auf. (B6 ijl feiii leerer, fdimcidieCnber SBafin, (Sr^eiigt im @el)iriie bed S§oren. 3m «§er§en fimbet eg laut ]i6:i an : 3u was Seffevem ftnb inir geboren. Unb irad bie inueve Stimme fpridit, 2)a5 tdufdit bie l)cffenbe (Seete nid^t (Sd^ilTer. 4. Slnfruf. ?^vifd) anf, mein 33clt I bie S-Iammen|eid)en tand^en ! -§eU and bem D^evben bri6t ber greif)eit Sidit, ^n fcttft ben (Btabi in ^cinbeel^er^en taucben, ^rifdi auf, mein 93clf I bie ^lammenjeidien rand)en ; 2)ie ^aat ift rcif, \i)v (Sdmitter jaubert nid)t ! ^^'aS Bcdifte .^eif, ia^ Se|te lieat im (gd^ttterte. 2)riicf' bir ben 'Specr in'g trene >6ev5 ^inein ; 5^er ^reificit eine ©affe I * toaut bie (Srbe, 2)ein beiitfdied Sanb mit bciuem 33(ute rein. * Triid' bi'r ben Specr in'5 tvmi •^^n'l t)tnein ; ^n grci£)iir etiie @affe! These words are used in allusion to the celebrated Arnold Winkelried, whose heroic death has been so eloquently recorded by Wolfgang Menzel. We ^ve below Menzel's account in liis own words, which may be made, if desi- rable, an additional reading lesson. „'3)a fiauben bie ^auevn, gcviug aii ^a1)l, n\\Qfma)>pnet. meifl nur mit ^cuicn 20* 466 READING LESSONS. Q6 ift fetn ^ricg, »cn bem bte kronen ii?iffen ; @g {ft ein ^veujjug, 'g ift etn JieU'ger ^rieg I dted)t> @itte, 2;itgeub, ©lauben uitb ®en)iffen <§at ber 3:;i)rann au^ betiier 5^ruft gertffen ; (Bxxetk fie mtt beincr ^vei(;eit @ieg I 3)ag SBuifeln beiner @retfe ruft : ,,@ruiacl)e ! " 3)er ^ittte (Sci)utt yevflud)t bte ^iduber&rut, ^te (Sitanbe beiner Sioditer fchreit urn ^acl)e, 2)er SJleudielmerb ber ©ofine fd)reit nad) 33kt. Berbrid) bie ^flugfdmar, laf ben ^Zeif el fallen, 2)ie Seicr ftiU/ben 3Bebftu^t ru^ig fte§'n ! 3}ertaffe beine -^ofe, beine «^&al(en ! — SSor beffcn 5tntti| beine ^afjnen n?aEen, (Sx \mii fein ^oU in 2Saffenniftung fe^'n. 2)enn einen gvopen 5ntar fcKft bn bauen, 3n feiner grei6eit cir-'gcm SJJorgenrotfi ; SJlit beinem @d)Wert foltft bn bie @teine S^auen, 2)er j;em^3et griinbet ftd) anf '^elbentob. iinb 3)?cvi3enfievnen bemaffnet. 51U fie ben unabfebbavcn Sanjenwalb bet S^itttei bevanvittfen fa^en, fanfen fte auf bie Jliue ni'eber unb beteten. SeoiJDib aber be^ fabt ben Seinen, lum ben Sioffen ju ftetgeii, etnen flvojien .galbmcnb ju biiben, m\i fo anf bie (5'tbgeitoffen logjngeben, nm fte eiujufcblie^en. S)ie 33auevn er= ijoUn fid) nnb ftiivmtcn gegen bie 9f?itter an, fvie^tcn ftd) aUx an i^ven langen ^anjen nnb fonnten bie bicbtgcbvangte ^ifenmanb nid)t tvemtcn. 2)a rtef Sltuplb »on SStnfelfieb, mi SSaitev au§ Uutcrn^alben : „3c^ n^ill enc^ eiiie ©affe inacbeit, fcvgt fill' nieiii 3Betb nnb inetne ^ittbev, tvene, Hebe (Sibgenoffen, gebenft mets neS ®ef4)(eci)t§ I" nitb ftitvste mtt xodt au§gebveiteten Slrinen gegeii bie bli^en= bett Speere, fa^tc bevcn fo t>iele, aU er jn evveic^en vevinocbte, bvitdte fie j^ufaina men gegcn feine SBvuft, nnb bielt fte, fterbenb, fo lange fcfi, his jn beiben ©eitcn neben i^m nnb iibev feine Seiche btntreg bte ^Banent in bie Siicfe nn= bvangen, ^eljt bdfen htn 9fitttevn ibvc langen Sanjen nnb fcbttJeven Ofiiiftungen nid)t§ mcbr, fonbevn ittaven ibnen nnr jni* ^aft, 2)te QLknevn bvcingten fid) iin ^eile mitten nntev fie nnb jevfd)mct(evten mit !?ei-3Bncbt ibvev Jtculen unb 3lertc bte ftablevnen .delme nnb .^iivaffe. ^alb bemiicbtigte fief; etn ^antfc^cv ©c^vecfeu bev Ofttttcv ; ber l)«lbe iUIonb tt>itt) au^etuvinber, 2)ie bei ben 5|3fei-ben juvild'ge= blicbenen jtnecbte fcbwangen ftc^ bavanf nnb iagten bayon. 3bre .^evven fonn= ten in ben fd)tt?even Sftiifiitngen unb erfd^opft vom Jlampfe nic^t folgen ; »tele ertranfen im @ee ; bet 3fieft befcblo^ nicbt ju nieicben unb his anf ben le^ten 3Jiann jn fec^ten. SJ^itten nnter i^nen ^vitt «§evjog Seopolb, nnoerjagt vnfeitb : „3cfe tviU ebrlicb mit end) fievben." 2)reimat fanf .§ab6buvg6 58antter, bveimal bob ev e§ twieber boc^ anf; cnblid) fanb ev mit alien feinen ©etreuen ben Xo'b. ^H il)m fielen 656 ©rafen unb 9itttev. READING LESSONS. 46? 2Ba6 tt>emt iljx, 9>labdicu, knivum Hac^i lijx, aCeiBcr, %hx bic bcv ^err bie (Sdnvcrter iiiciit geftd^lt, 2Ceim Vrii- cntjiidt bic jm-jeiiblidien ^,Jci6ev '^intrerfeu in hk ©duiciren ciirev OMulJciv 2)af cud) beg .^amvn'cw fiU)nc aSoUufl fe^It ? 3f|r fount \ci fvof) 511 ©ottes ?Utar treteu ; ^itv 3Gimben Qob er jarte (Scvgfamfett, @at) in6> in euent Iicvjlldien ©cBcteii JDen fd)ouen, veinen tcd\ trie fd^tranfenb ba3 ©titer I „(S'm fknd mit ber mddnigen 2!aR' unb eo fdftt, Unb bac Ungel?eu' r jt|>t una im Stacfen. 3)c* ber bcrt cBen, ber trin^ige <6etb, 2Dr6I ^at er ft6 trefflid^ nd^er geiteKt, 3n fd'aun, trie bie ^ralCeu nn? r-vicfen I " Unb ber Sen trirb gebra^t im »ergitrerten ^au6, 9(n ber Sd^ranfe gecfnet tas -5pfcrtd^en, Unb ber .X^iere ^cnig, er fd^reitet fierang, Unb ik Skitter erfaf t nun 2d>rerfen unb @rau5, Unb feiner rebet ein iScrtd^en. ^c6^ ^ircifelnb iie§t iid^ ber Scn^e Bcfrei'H, Unb recft in ber greiBeit bie ©lieber, ■ Unb fdireitet gefrctt in bie Sd^ranfen l^ereiu, Unb jeigt ber Sft^ns gelraltige 9ieif)'n, Sautgd^nenb, imb ftrecfet nd^ nieber. READING LESSON'S. 47 1 93cm -^vilfou viift *4^ipiti mit bcuncinbem 2aut . „3i)v mainiluten, trcfeigcn ^rietjcr, S)a fdiaut ciii ^ampffpicl, ciii ivfirbige^, fduut, iSer jilt 511 mcfycu mit bicfcm getraut, ,^fn ncnn' icb ben erflcii bcv (Eiegev." Unb eiii SifdH^di, eiii ©turmelii, eiii SJlurven evflingt, 5^umpf iiiir im JBeginuen unb teife. 93alb, nnc tvenii, ftdvfer unb ftdrfer kfcfrnMugt, 9?iit ivcgcuben g'lutben bic 9i>iub5&raut riiigt, (gc faufct\^ luib feraufet'i? im ^reife. Unb fcdiid) empcr tritt ©erfeavb s>om (Stern, S^cr fvcdMte ber fvcdunt ^'^umpcine ; ,,'^cv 33crtvin5 perblcibe bcm .^cnig iinb v6ernx I 5(uf, tan^e bemi, «§c(ieit, teir (vtfTen bir's gem, 6erab pen bem ftd^ern Sllrane I " „@o fei'e I " ]pxid)t ^^Pipin, itnb it* fditeingenb im ^a^ Springt ber ^ur^c, bed) marfig unb fefinig, S3cm 33alfcn fierab auf ttn fanbtgen $Ia|. ,Muf, Sniber Sen, auf, toe^e bie Zaip' ! Stuf, ^cnig, bid} fcrbert eiu ^cnig I " Unb fdndgt ifni mit flayer ^ling' auf ben Sug, Unb erregt i6m ben ©rimm in ber Seele. 2(uf fd^netCt ber Sen, toutf1fd^auernb im ytug, ^cd> bringt, et)' bie Sla^^e, bie jucfenbe, fd^tug, ^a6 (Sdm^ert burdi ben S^ad^en jur ^e§Ie. Unb bai ©lut entftrubelt bem grauftgen ed^Iunb, Unb uber ft* ftiirjt er unb trenbet S^reii, piermal bie 5fugen rcUenb im 3iunb, ^xeU, piermat gei^elt ber (S6tteif bzn @runb, Unb er ftrccft ltd), unb jucft, unb perenbet. yerad'^tenb um — ^ein SJJurreu trarb treiter i^erncmmen. ^. vitrecffup. 472 READING LESSONS. 9. 5( n h ^n ^ x i'l i}lin g. ^n ©oune hex S^atiir ! 2)cit beiuem -Slumenfcrb6cn aSiUfcmmcn auf ber ^lur. (51 ! @t ! ba bill ja roieber ! Hub Bift fo lieb xmb fitoit ! Unb freu'n irir iing fc l^evjlidi, (Sntgeaen bir ^u gcfiiL 5)en!ft aiut lunt an meiii 2)^db*en? @t, Sieber, benfe bed) I $Dcrt ttcBte mid) bag 9)Mbdien, tlnb's^ SJtdbdien Itebt mid) nod). giir'g SO^dbd)en mand)eg 33lumd)en (5rbat idi mir 'oon bit — 3d) fcmm' unb bttte n^ieber, Unb bu ? — bu gibft eg mir. SBiUfcmmen, [dicner bungling ! 5)u 9Bcnne ber dlatnx I SJlit betncnt 33lumenfcrbd)cn 2Bitl!cmmen auf ber %i\ix. (5*iKer. YOCABULARY FOE THE READING LESSONS. ABBREVIATIONS. adj. adjective. j,i. plural. adv. adverb. pre. preposition. art article. prn. pronoun. c. conjunction. V. a. active verb. comp. comparative. v. a. & n. active & neuter verb, / feminine gender. V. aux. auxiliary verb. imp. imperfect tense. V. imp. impersonal verb. int. interjection. V. ir. irregular verb. m. masculine gender. v.n. neuter verb. n. neuter gender. V. r. reflexive verb. V- participle. -?i6'bilben, u a. to figure, repre- sent, copy, draw, describe. 5lbenb, m. -g, pi. -e, evening, (west). 5('BenbiiMnb, m. -ee, -g, pi. -e, even- ing wind (i. e. western wind or breeze). Siber, c. but, however. ?t'bermal or abermaliJ, adv. again, once more, anew. ' 5lb'c|ecrbiiete, m. -n, pi. -n, depu- ty, delegate. 5(l*'i]cfd'icbeii, adj. separated. Slb'^tninuiieii, v. a. ir., imp. getriann , pi. Stetfer, field, acre. 51'cfevgmaun, m. -eg, pi. -leute, husbandman, tiller. Sfbolpf), m. Adolphus. Sleffleiu, n. -g, _pZ. -, little ape. 9(ebn'ltcb!eit,/. -, pi. -en, likeness, resemblance, similarity. §(ebre, /. -, pi. -n, ear. 473 474 m—nin\)p Qln|t— 5lufiD 5(11 and alle, «c?f. gone, all, entirely, ^. angefprocben, to accost, ad- whoUy. dress, speak to, beg, ask. Stitein', adv. alone, only ; -c. but. Stuftanb, m. -eg, -S, station, stand, S(((er, aik, ade^, adj. all, whole, delay, behavior. every, any. Sln'iturmen, v. n. to storm at, as- Sl((mdf)'Itg, adj. and adv. by de- sault, knock at violently. grees, gradually. 5tntlt§, n. -eg, pi -e, face, counte- Stltju, aJv. too, too much. nance. SlFmofen, n. -g, pi. -, alms, cha- ^Inttocxt,/. -, _pZ. -en, answer, rity. I'eply. %U, c. than, but, when, as; aU Stnt'iuovleu, t\ ?z. to answer, reply ebeti, just as. Stn'wenbeu, v. a. to apply, employ, Sllsbalb', adv. immediately, direct- make use of, apply to- ly, presently. Sl^'felbaum, m. -eg, -g, pi -bdume, Sltfc, adv. thus, so ; -c. therefore. apple-tree. ^it, adj. old, ancient, aged. 5(rBeit,/. -, ^Z. -en, work, labor, Slltan', 771. -eg, -g, pi -e, balcony, trouble, pains. platform. Strg, adj. bad, wicked. Slttar, m. -eg, -g, j?Z. -tare, altar. 5trm, adj. poor, indigent Sitter, n. -g, _pZ. -, age, old age. 9lrm, wz. -eg, -g, pi -e, arm. Slmen, m^. amen. S(rmut(;,/ -, poverty, want. 5tn, pre. on, at, by, to, with, up, Slniolb, m. Arnold. about. S(rt,/ -, pi -en, kind, species, Stn'beten, v. a. to adore, worship. race, manner ; auf biefe Strt, in Stnber, ber, bte, 'i)Q.i Stnbere, adj. this manner. other, second, different, next. 2{tt)men, v. a. cf- n. to breathe, 5(nefbc'te,/. -, j)Z. -n, anecdote. respire. Stn'fangen, v. a. ir., imp. ftng an, -9ludi, c. also, too, even. p. angefangen, to begin, com- ?(uf, pre. on, upon, in, at, to, up. mence. Sluf'gel^en, v. n. ir., imp. ging auf, 9(n'j^ef)en, v. a. to implore, entreat, p. aufgegangen, to rise. beseech. 2(uf "f)alten, v. a. ir,, imp. l^ieltauf, Stn'fiUten, v. a. to fill up. p. aufgetjatten, to stop. Stn'gefidit, n. -eg, -g, pi -er, face, Stuf'^eben, v. a. ir., imp. 'i)oh auf, countenance. p. anfgef)oben, to raise up, lift 3lengft'(tdifctt/ -, anxiety, uneasi- up, revoke, give up. ness. 5tuf'^oren, v. n. to cease, discon- Sln'fiinben, an'fiinbigen, v. a. to an- tinue, finish, end. nounce, declare, publish. SIuf'mer!fam!eit,/. -, pi -en, at- Stn'fdianen, v. a. to look at, con- tention. template. Sluf pflan^en, v. a. to plant, mount, 5ln'fe^en, v. a. ir., imp. \ai) an, p. set up. angefel)en, to look at, behold, 3(ufredit, adv. upright, erect. view, perceive. Slufruf, m. -eg, -g, pi -e, calling 2ln'fel}nlid), adj. considerable, emi- up, summons. nent ; -, adv. considerably. 9lnf'ftef)en, v. n. ir., imp. ftanb auf, 5lnfid)t,/. -, pZ. -en, sight, view, p. anfgeftanben, to arise, get up, opinion, prospect. to be open. 9(n'f)jred)en, v. a. ir., imp. fvra(,"t) an, 9(ufit)drtg, adv. upward, upwards. 5(iifir— ©otb 33aK— aScgr 475 SluPiravtcit, v. ??. to wait, attend, serve. 9luf'jic()cn, r. a. «•., iynp. ic(\ auf, ■p. ■Ciii]c\cii\T,ci\, to draw up, bring- up, educate. ^inc\c, n. -es, pj. -n, eye. 5Ui\^cubIici:, ?«. -co, -S, pi -c, twin- klinrr of an eye, moment. Slugcublirf'licb, adj. instantaneous. ?lauf(cin, n.-e,pl.-f little eye- 5lU!?, pre. out, out of, from, on, upon, in ; -, adv. over, out, fin- ished, consumed. S[u!5/tn-citen, r. a. to spread, ex- tend, enlarge, divulge, publish. 5(lli5eilu"lu'^er, adv. asunder. -3lu!5'v3tin-eitet, adj. extensive. Stui5'9ra6en, v- a ir.,imp. gniB au6, p. au^vieijrabcn, to dig out, ex- cavate, untomb. ^lue'nifcn, r. n. ir., imp. ricf auS, p. aus^vjerufen, to call out, cry out, exclaim, proclaim. 9tu0'fel)en, n. ~6, face, appearance. 5luJ3en, adv. out, on the outside, without, abroad. 5Iu^er, pre. cf- c. out of, without, besides, except, unless. Steu'pere (ber, bte, bai3) adj. out- ward, exterior: -, n -n, out- side, appearance, exterior. 2tui5'|lcpeit, V. a. ir., imp, fttep aug, p. au^i;eftc^eiT, to push out, thrust out, expel, utter. Slus'i'iBeiT, r. a. to exercise, prac- tise, execute, perpetrate. 5Iu3'lt)cid)eu, v. a. ir., imp. iridi au5, p. au^c^etoidien, to give way, turn aside, evade, avoid. 2(rt,/. -, pi. 9(erte, ax, hatchet. 23ad\ m. -ea, pi. -23ddie, brook, ri- vulet. S3abeu, v. a. to bathe. ^a^it,/ -, pi. -en, way, road, ca- reer, course. 93arb, adv. soon, early, nearly, al- most. ©alfon, m. -g, pi. -e, balcony. Q3atfam, m. -Q, pi. -e, balm, balsam. S3auncv, m. -^, pi. -, banner. 33viv, m. -en, pi -en, bear. S3avt, m. -eg, -g, pi 33drte, beard. S3viuen, V. a. to build, cultivate, till. S3ancr, m. -g, (-n). ?;Z. -n, pea- sant, ftmner. 33du'evleut, n. -g, pi-, (little) pea- sant. ®aum, m. -eg, -§,pl 93dume, tree, pole beam. ^ebadit'fam, adj. considerate, cir- cumspect. ^^ebadU'famfeit,/. -, circumspec- tion, caution, prudence. S3ebecf'cn, v. a. to cover, shelter, S3eben'fen, v. a. ir., imp. Bebad^te, p. Bebad^t, to consider, reflect upon, mind. 33ebicn'te, m. -n, pi. -n, servant, attendant. S3ebuL-/fen, v. n. ir., i7np. Beburfte, p. Beburft, to need, want. S3een'bti]en, v. a. to end, terminate, finish. ^efe()I, m. -eg, -g, pi -e, com- mand, order, charge. 33efef)'len, v. a. ir., imp. befall, f. befc^Ien, to command, order, charge, desu'e. ^ejte^bern, v. a. to feather. ^efin'ben, v. r. ir., imp. Befanb, p. Befunben, to be; fidi n?cf)(;, to be well. -58efrei'en, v. a. to free, release, de- liver. ^egeg'nen, v. n. to meet, happen, befall, prevent, treat. SBegiev'be,/. -, pi -n, desu-e. 93egiu'nen, v. a. <|- n. ir., imp. Be^ gann, p. Begcnnen, to begin, do, undertake. 33eg(ei'ten, v. a. to accompany, conduct, convoy. Seglei'tev, m. -S, pi -, companion, attendant, follower, guide. SSegra'Ben, v. a. ir., imp. BegruB, p. BegraBen, to bury, inter. 476 S3e^— 23cfc^ sBefc^— SBirf^ SefjviPten, v. a. ir., imp. 6ef)ielt, p. htijaitzn, to keep, retain. Sef)au'i>eln, v. a. to treat, manage, handle, use, bargain for. 53ef)ar'reu, r. n. to continue, re- main, persist in. Sct^aup'teu, r. a. to assert, affirm, maintain, allege. Set, pre. at, near, beside, by, on, upon, to, in; in the presence of. S3elcbten, r. a. cf- n. to confess. Setdn'yciter, ??2. -g, pZ.-ydtcr, con- fessor. Seibc, a^/?'. both, two: feiner ''^qw -n, neither of the two. Si'ina'fte, ad-c. almost, near, nearly, about. Seiftviub, m. -z<%, -^i, aid, assist- ance, succor, assistant. Seflcin'men, adj. anxious, uneasy. Sefrdu^^eii, r. a. to wreath, crown. S5ela'i)cii, x. a. ir., imp. bclub, p. belabcn, to load, charge, bur- den. Selvi'v^ent, r. a. to besiege, beset. Sclci'biv^cn, r. a. to ofiend, insult, injure. r*Sc(ei'bii;(un^,/ -, pi. -cii, offense, injury. Scmdcbhigen, r. r. to take, seize, . take possession of, usurp. S3emev'feiL x. a. to perceive, mark, observe, note. SemcoiV, adj. mossy. 33eratb'fchlai3unyi,/- -, pl.-ni, con- sultation, deliberation. -S3erv^ufdn^ adj. tipsy, intoxicated. 53erc'i:ciT, v. a. to persuade, con- vince. Screits', adv. already. ffiercu'en, r. a. to repent, regret. 53erg, m. -e^, -6, pi. -e, mountain. 23ei\3au', Berc^ciuf, adv. uphill. Serliii', n. Berlin. 53enit', 77?. -cfv -^, pi. -iv vocation, calling. Seri'ili'rcn, v- a. to touch, handle, mention, hint at. Sefcbd mett, r. a. to shame. S3efcbci'bcn, adj. modest, discreet, moderate. Sefd^Iic'fen, v. a. ir., imp. bef^Icp, p. befdilcjifu, to decree, deter- mine, result. Scfdn-dri'fcn, r. a. to confine, limit, bound, restrain, 23c|\tiinu'^eit, v. a. to wing. Sefct'gen, v. a. to take care of, provide, apprehend, fear. 53efie (ber, bie, bao), adj. best. Scfteb/en, r. a. <^ n. ir., imp. be? fianb, p. Beftanbeit, to suffer, be, subsist, endure. 5?^'lteU'uni3, / -, pi -en, order, commission. -Seftim'munv?,/. -, pi. -en, deter- mination, destination, definition. S3efu'dieii, r. a. to visit, see, fre- quent. 53eteu, r. a. & ??. to pray, sav a prayer. Setvait.'ten, v. a. to look upon, be- hold, reflect, consider. Setrad'/tuiig, / -, pi. -en, view, consideration. 53etra'i5en, n. -i, behavior, con- duct, demeanor. 5?ett(er, m. -g, pi. -, beggar. S3ett'tcrfleib, ??. -cy, -s^, pi. -cr, beg- gar's clothes. iBerovidi'en, r. a. to watch, guard. -<3tii\-iff'iieu, r. a. to arm. 5Be'aHii/ren, r. a. to keep, take care of, preserve, guard. -S3eirei.]t', adj. moved, touched. Setrcb'uev, m.-^. pi. -, inhabitant. Seunni'bevn, v a. to admire, wonder. ©eiiniu/beruuq, f. -, admiration. 33lbcl,/.-,^/.-n, Bible. 93tene,/. -, pi. -n, bee. 33ilb, n. -e0, -'%, pi. -er, image, figure. SBiben, r. a. to shape, form. ^BiliMinoj,/. -, pi. -en, culture, ci- vilization, learning, accomplish- ment. SBirfdiett, r. a. to shoot or go a shooting, shoot with a rifle. Q5iS— iBruft SSucf— 3)ab 477 S3i!?, adv. and c. liil, until : bit? an, - ani - ?iu, up to, until to. iBitte, /. - jy/, -it, request, entrea- ty, petition, suit. S3ittcii, V. a. ir., mp. Iwt, p. gcbcj ten, to beg, pray, request, en- treat, solicit, invite. -33itttT, adj. bitter, sharp. 5i3lcibeii, V. n. ir., imp. bHeb, p. ge; blicbcn, to remain, abide, perish. S3lirf, in. -ct^ -6, ^;Z. -e, look, glance, ©lirfeit, r. n. to glance, gleam, view, look. S3liub, adj. blind. S3(itcii, V. n. to lighten, flash. S}^-"^, adv. merely, only. S3liifien, v. n. to bloom, blossom, flourish, ^liiimten, n. -6, pi. -, little flower, floweret. SSlu'iuenfcrbcben, n. -C\ pi -, little flower basket. S3lut, n. -eg, -5, blood. -ii3liitbe,/-,_pZ- -n, blossom, bloom, flower, fficbeu, m. -g, ground, soil, bottom, ^cfe, adj. bad, ill, evil, wicked. ^cg()aft, adj. malicious, wicked. ■S3cte, m. -n, pi -n, messenger- iBctfitaft,/ -, pi. -en, message, embassy, news. 53r."iuKn, v. n. to roar, rush, buzz, ^veclu^n, r. a. cf- n. ir., imp. bracb, p. i^ebrocben, to break, refract, burst, be broken. • Srcit, adj. broad, large, wide- S3renucii, v. a. (^ n., imp. brannte, p. gtbraunt, to burn, scorch. 53ringcn, r. a. ir., imp. BradUe, p. c^^hvai^t, to bring, carry, convey, bear. 93rii(fe,/. -, pi -n, bridge. S3ruber, m. -S, pi ^riibcr, brother. 33rii'berticb,a<:/7".brotherly,fraternaL S3runncn, m. — g, pi -, well, spring, fountain. 23ruft, / -, pi Sviifte, breast, bosom. 93iicicn, V. r. to stoop, bow. ii3iti], 771. -eg, -g, pi -e, bow, shoulder. 53nfcb, m. -eg, 2)1 ffiiifcbc, bush, thicket. Gbaraf'tcr, m. -S, pi (Sfiavafte're, character. Sfjtl'beridi, m. Childeric. 2) a, adv. 4" c. there, then, at that time, when, as, while, because, since. ©abiird)', adv. by this, by that, by it, through it. 2)al)ei', adv. cf- c. thence, from thence, hence, out of that, therefore. 3)a(jin', adv. thither, there, away, down. 2)abin'ter, adv. behind it (that, this), after it. ®dm'merung/. -, twilight, dusk. 5)d'iiemarf, n. Denmark. fDanf, m. -e§, -g, thanks, reward, prize, ^viufbav, adj. thankful, grateful, ©ciufeit, v. a. 4" n. to thank. S)ann, adv. then, thereupon. 2)aran', adv. thereon, thereat, on it, at it, by it. 2)avaiif' , adv. thereon, thereupon, on that, upon it, at that, to that, (it), after that, afierwards, then, nob -fdrauiu-ieii, to leap upon, swing upon, ©aveiii', adv. thereinto, therein, into it ;^ fidi -tf)eilen, to share therein. S^ariii', adv. therein, in that, in this, in it, wherein. ^ariivid''', adv. after that, upon that, for that, for it. 5}arum, adc. around that, for that, for it, therefore. 2)a|3, c. that ; -iiid^t, lest: big- till ^vtijcn', adv. thereof, therefrom 478 ^aj— ^orf 3)Drt— @t^ from it, of it, by it, whereof, off, away ; -jageit, to hasten away. 2)a^u^ adv. thereto, to that, for that, for it, at tliat. Sej^cii, w. -0, pi, -, sword. 5)ciu (bchier, behie, beiuejj), prn- thy. 2)emant (2)tantaut), 771. -en, pL -en, diamond. 2)emnt(),/ -, humility, meekness. 5)e'nuitf)tg, adj. humble, meek. 2)enfen, v. a. cf- n. ir., imp. badite, p. gebad)!, to think (of, upon . . ., an, auf . . .), to mind, re- flect upon. 5)en!fprncb, m. -eg, -6, pi -fpritd^e, sentence, motto, maxim. 2)enn, c. for, then, than. 2)ennod% c' yet, however, never- theless, notwithstanding. ®cr, bte, bag, art. the ; - pTii. this, who, which, that. $J)evb, adj. compact, iirm, solid, stout, strong, sound. 5)evfelbe, biefelbe, baffelbe, prn. the same, he, she, it, that. 2)cftc, adv. the; -beffer, the better, so much the better. S)euten, v. a. to explain, interpret ; -, V. n. to indicate, prognos- ticate. 2)cntfdi, adj. German. ©idit, adj. tight, dense, close, so- hd ; bidit i^ebrdnc;t, closely press- ed, crowded tight. Wiener, m. -g, pi -, servant, waiter. 2)tenft, m. -eg, pi -e, service, of- fice, employment. 2)iefer, biefe, biefcg or bicg, prn. this. 5)ing, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, thing, af- fair, matter. !Dcd), c. yet, however, nevertheless. 5)cnnern, v. n. to thunder, fulmi- nate. 5)crf, n. -eg, pi ^orfer, village. 3)orfIein;. n. -g, pi. -, small vil- lage, hamlet. Sort, adi: there, yonder ; - o6en, there above, up there, ©rdnoien, v. a. to throng, press. 5)raui3fa(, n. -eg,-g, pi -e, calamity. 2)rauf, see barauf. 2)rei, adj. three, ©ringen, v. n. ir , imp. brang, p. gebrnngcn, to crowd, urge, pe- netrate. 5)ru(fen, r. a. to press, squeeze, oppress. 3)u, prn. thou. 2)uftlg, adj. vaporous, fragrant. S^umpf, adj. damp, dull, hollow. 2)uufc(, adj. dark, obscure ; -, n. -g, darkness, obscurity. 2>urd% pre. through, bv, by means of 2)nrd)ftr6'meu, v. n. to stream through. ^'nvdmHiu'bcln, r. n. to wander through, pass through. fDiirfeu, v. n. 4' aux., imp. bnrfte, p. geburft, to be allowed, be permitted, be able, dare. 3)nrften, 2)urftcn, v.' n. a5, prru something, some- what, some, any, a little. ducb, prn. you, to you. @Hcr, euere, euer, prn. vour. dula'Iia,/. Eulalia. (S'wlg, adj. eternal, everlasting. d'lrigfeit,/. -, eternity, everlast- ingness, 'gabel,/ -, pi, -n, fable. gd^lg, adj. able, apt, fit. ga^iie,/ -, pi. -n, colors, stand- art, flag. fallen, v. n. ir., imp. fiel, p. Qti fallen, to fall. gvingen, v. n. ir., imp. fxng, p. ge; fangen, to catch, take, seize. ^avBe,/. -, pi. -n, color. ^uffen, V. a. to seize, comprehend; I', r. to recollect one'sself, re- cover. Saul, adj. idle, lazy. §e*ten, v. n. ir., imp. fccbt, p. gc; fcditen, to fight, fence. §ed)tfpiel, tl -e^, -si, pi -e, tilting- match. 21 Sebcr,/-, pi. -n, feather, plume, pen. i^e^len, v. n. to fail, miss, make a fault, mistake, want, be defi- cient. §e&lev, -g, pi. -, fault, mistake, error. §eig, at//', coward, faint-hearted. S<^in, «(^. fine, nice, delicate. ?5ctiib, adj. cf* adv. hostile, ini- mical. ^einb, m. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, enemy. Seni'be0l)ev§, n. -en6, j)Z. -en, the heart of the enemy. j^clb, n. -eg, -g, pi. -er, field. i^etbbau, 7n. -eg, g, agriculture, tillage. i^enfter, n. -g, _pZ. -, window. ^ern, adj. far, remote, distant. §erne, / -, pi. -n, farness, distance. §eft, adj. cf- adv. fast, solid, stead- fast, steady. i^inbcn, V. a. ir., imp. fanb, p. gc* funben, to find, discover; v. r, ir. to be found, ofter, compre- hend. i5it'nett?ein, iru -eg, -g, pi. -c, vdne of the last year. ^(a*, ai^'. flat, plain, level. ^Iddie,/ pZ. -n, plain, flatness, tract, surface. §tam'menjeidicn, n. -g, pi. -, flame- or fire-signal. ?5teif , m. -eg, diligence, industry. gUege, / -, pi- -n, fly. ^itegen, v. tl ir., imp. Ilog, p. gejlo* gen, to fly. I^liiditig, adj. flying, transient Slug, 772. -eg, -g, ^2. Slu^C/ flight, soaring. Sliigel, m. -g, pi. -, wing. glur, / -, pi. -en, field, plain, floor. S.lup, 7n. -eg, ;?Z. Sluffc, river, stream. Slufftg, o^'- fluid, liquid. glitftern, v. ru to whisper. glutf),/-, ;?Z. -en, flood, tide, high-water. i82 Sclg— t^oi^ Brro^— (Sf]& Srigen, V. a. to obey .; f. n. to fol- low, succeed. gcibern, r. a. to demand, call out, defy, challenge. %cxt, adv. forth, gone off, away. §crt'Hu6en, v. ru to continue blos- soming. §crt'faf)ren,r. n. ir., imp. fii6t fcrt, f. fcrt^efa6ren, to drive of, de- part, continue, go on with. %QXX'^\i^zn, X. 71. ir., imp. ^g fcrt, p. fcrtgefllcgen, to fly away. gcrt'jagen, r. a. cf- n, to drive away, turn away. fycrt'jrcUen, r. n. ir. to intend to go. §rage, /• -, pi -n, question, inter- rogation. ^agen, r. a. cf- n. to ask, hiterro- gate : urn Dtatft -, to consult. §ranfe, m. -n, pi -n, Frank, Fran- conian. granfreicb, n. -a, France. §re±, adj- impudent, bold, saucy, audacious. fyrei, adj. free, independent. greifeeit,/ -, pi -cit, libertv, free- dom, prJ\Tlege. ^rei'heitefa^ne,/. -, pi -n, banner of freedom. §^ilid% adv. certainly, to be sure, indeed- ^emi^ting, m. -?§,-§, pi -e, stran- ger, foreigner. ^uie,/. -, pi -11, joy, joyful- ness, enjoyment, pleasure. ^eii'tenficrer, m. -5, pi -, dis- turber of joy, marfeast. greutig, adj. srlad, jovful, cheer- ful §reiieu, r. r. to rejoice in, be glad. greuub, m. -ec, -5, pi -e, friend. greunblicb, adj. friendly, kind, af- fable, pleasant. gts'^elban, adj. wicked, malicious, ^n?bn*, m. Frederick. §xtfcb, o-iy. fresh, cooi, new : frifdi auf ! cheer up I §^^, ac(j. joyful, glad, happy^ g-ladly. ^o&lid), adj. joyous, joyful, eheer- ^ful. Srcmm, adj. pious, religious. t5Tcm'migfeit,/. -, piety. yrcnt, greiite, /. -, pi -en, -n, front. %nite, fruit, com. t5rud*'ttc5, adj. fruitless, useless. ^xub, adj. ditber, garment, drapery, cloth. ©erocil}', n. -eg, -g, pi -e, horns, bran(!hes, antlers, ©ewtnn', m. -eg, -g, pi -e, gain, profit, price. ©eivii'/nen, v. a. cf" n. ir., imp. ge; umiin, _p. getvonnen, to win, earn, gain, get profit, ©ctoi^', adj. certain, sure, true, steady, constant. @etr»if'fcn, n. -g, conscience, con- sciousness. @eir>c()n'fi6, adj. usual, common, ordinary. ©e.^ic'men, 7;. i7np. to become, be- seem, be fit. ©impel, m. -g, pi. -, chaffinch, simpleton ©itter, n. -g, pi -, trellis, grate, lattice. ©lanj, m. -eg, splendor, lustre, brightness, glance. ©Idnjen, v. n. to glisten, glitter, shine. ®la\xlt, m. -eng, faith, belief, credit. ©laubeii, X. a. to believe, suppose. ©(dulng, adj. believing, faithful. ©teid), adj. c^ adv. like, even, equal, straight, just, immediate- ly, presently. ©leid)en, v. a. & n. ir., imp. glidb, p. gegtidien, to equal, level, re- semble, be like. ©leidi'giiltigfett, /. -, equalness, equivalence, indifference. ©leidimutl;, m. -eg, -g, equanimi- ty, calmness. ®teid)ni^, n. -eg, jd. -e, similitude, parable, allegory, figure. ©lieb, n. -eg, -g, pi -er, limb, member. ©Hid, n. -eg, -g, fortune, happi- ness, ©liidflid), adj. happy, successful, fortunate. ©lii(f'feltgfeit,/. -, happiness, fe- licity. ©clben, adj. golden. ®ott, m. -eg, pi ©otter, God. ©6tttidi,ac//. divine, godly, godlike. ©ottlcg, adj. godless, impious, wicked. ©rab, 71. -eg, -g, pi ©vd6er, grave, tomb, sepulchre. ©raf, m. -en, pi. -en, earl, count. ©rag, 71. -eg, pi ©rdfev, grass. ©ran, adj. gray. ©rang, m. -eg, horror, dread, rub- bish. ©vaufig, adj. creating, horror, dreadful. ©retfeu, v. a. 4* n. ir., imp. grijf, p. gegriffen, to gripe, grasp, seize, lay hold of. ©retg, m. -eg, pi -e, an old man, ©renje, /. -, pi -n, limit, border, bound, boundary, frontier. ©rlmnt — «§a[ ^a^ — ^er 485 ©rimm, 7;z. -c^, -i^, fury, rage, wrath. ® re lieu, r. ??• to bear ill-will against, be angry, ©vcp, odj. c^adc. largo, big, great, ©rc^'miitfuii. adj. magnanimous, generous, ©ruiib, m. -c6, -S, pi ©vunbe, ground, bottom, reason, cause. ©riniDCH, r. a. to found, lay the foundation of, build, establish, ©ri'nieii, r. n. to grow green, flourish. ©liUav, 7n. Gustavus. @ut, adj. cf- adv. good, well, suffi- ciently, pleasant, convenient. ^a, int. ha ! «§acir, n. -ee, -g, pi -e, hair. •^abeii, V. aux. <^ n. ir., imp. t)atk, p. o^cbo.'bt, to have, possess. «.§abern, r. n. to quarrel, browl, squabble. ^alb, adj. half. -^albdcit,/. -, pl-^\x, mediocrity. ^alblaut, adv. in an imder tone. Jpal&mcnb, m. -eg, -g, pi -e, half- moon. ^aile,/. -, pZ. -en, hall, porch. «§ahu, 7n. -ei3, -5, pi -e, stalk, halm. ^vilt, int halt I stop ! ^alten, r. a. c^ ^^- ^^-^ ^^P- ^i^^^' ?'• gelialtcn, to hold, keep, support, contain, estimate, think ; -, v. r. ir. to resist, stand firm, last. <§aub,/. -, pi ^dnbe, hand ^aubcln, V. a. cf n. to act, trade, deal. •■^aiibduu], /. -, pi -en, action, deed, procedure, act. v^aiujen, v. n. ir.., imp. fthicj, p. ge^ &a!igen, to hang, adhere, slick to, attach one's self. .§armleg, adj. without grief, harm- less. ^armcnic',/. -, pi -n, harmony. ^a\i. m. -It, pi -11, hare. -.^d^lidi, adj. ugly, nasty, dirty. ^aucii, V. a. ir., imp. I)ieb, p. qes IjaxKii, to hew, cut, strike, whip. 'Qan^t, n. -ce, -C\ pi ^^dupter, head. ^aupt'gefduift, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, main business. •^au^, n. -eg, pi <^aufer, house. «§au6brcb, 72. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, house- hold-bread. >§ciu6'l)altuiu],/. -, pZ. -en, house- keeping, household-family. ^eBen, v. a. ir., imp. f)ob, p. ge(;o; ben, to lift, heave, raise ; v. r, ir. to rise to swell. -Oeer, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, army. «§eilig, adj. holy, sacred. •^ei'dge, m. cff. -n, pi -n, saint. «§ei'Iigen, v. a. to hallow, sanctify. <§ehn'brnt9eu, v. a. ir., imp. braitte ftetm, p. f)eimgeBradbt, to bring home. ^eimlidi, adj. secret, private. .^etnrld% m. Henry. >Oeif, adj. hot, ardent. <§ci^en, r. a. cf- n. ir., imp. ^te^, p, t]ef)eipen, to name, call, bid, en- join, mean, signify. -.§eitcr, adj. serene, clear, fair, bright, cheerful. <§elb, m. -en, pi -en, hero, cham- pion. <§el'beutcb, m. -eg, -g, heroic death, death of heroes. -§elfen, v. a. <^ n. ir., imp. fsalf, p. geiiclfen, help, assist, save, be good. ^ell, adj. clear, bright, light. «§elm, m. -eg, -g, pi -e, helmet. ^etmhifdi, m. -eg, pi -Imfdic, plume of the helmet, crest. >6emmen, v. a. to stop, hinder. •Oetab', adv. down from, down, downward. •Serab'fpringen, v. n. ir., imp. fvrving {jetvib, p. f)erabgefpvungen, to spring down from. •Serab tan^en, v. n. to dance down from. 486 *^era — ^ert> «§crij — «§i| .^eran'riicfen, v. n. to advance, march on. .^erauf treiben, v. a. ir., imp. tvieb iierauf, p. ^erauf^etrieben, to force or press up. «§erau3''fcmmen, r. 7i. ir., imp. lam &evait», p. ^erau^gefcmmen, to come out. ^eraus'fcbretten, v. n. ir., imp. fdbritt l}nau6, p. f)zxau^z\imttm, to step forth. ^erBe, adj. acerb, sour, eager. •OerBei^ adv. hither, near, on. •^erBei'&rln^en, v. a. ir., imp. brad^te JierBet, p. f)erbeige&ra(*t, to bring forward, produce. '^txhei'txaqm, v. a. ir., imp. frug lierBet, p. fier&etgetragen, to bring or fetch near to. «§ernte'ber, adv. down, downwards. >§ernte^berblicfcn, v. n. to look down upon, ^ernie'bertommen, v. n. ir., imp. !am Iieriiieber, p. f)erniebergefommen, to come down, •^err, m. -en, -n, pi. -en, master, gentleman, lord, sir. .^errliit, adj. magnificent, glorious, .^err'iidifett,/. -, pi. -en, magni- ficence, glory, splendor, ^errfiter, m. -^, pi. -, ruler, go- vernor. .§ev'fel)en, v. n. ir., imp. fafi ^er, p. I)cvgefe{)en, to look hither. «§cr'ftammen, r. n. to descend, come from, derive. ^^enim' fib auen, x. n. to look around, to show. «§erycv'gef)en, v. n. ir., imp. ging feeryct, p. fierttorgegangen, to go forth, proceed, follow. ^cri^ci-'6clen, v. a. to fetch out. ^eroor'fommen, r. n. ir., imp. fam f)erycr, p. ^erttcrgefcmmen, to come forth, appear, •^grijci-'rufen, v. a. ir., imp. tief ^er; »cr, p. f)eri>crgenifen, to call forth, call out. «5er»cr'f»ringen, v. n. ir., imp. fprang ]^er»cr, p. l^erttorgefprungcn, to spring out or forth. ^erfci'treten,r. 72.2V., imp.ixixi ^tn tfcr, p. Ijcrticrgetreten, to step forth, appear. >6ev5, n. -eng, pi. -en, heart. ^er^lidi, adj. hearty, cordial, af- fectionate. »§er^cg, m. -e^, -^, pi. -e, duke. ^ter, adv. here. «§ier^er', adv. hither, here, this way. ^[er£)er'fuf)ren, r. a. to bear or lead hither. ^ter[)er'fcmmen, v. n. ir., imp. l^m fner()er, p. :^ierf)ergefominen, to come hither. >6innnet, m. -§, pi. -, heaven, heavens, sky. «§tminltfdt, adj. heavenly, celestial, •^in, adv. thither, away, gone, lost, on, along. ^inub^ adv. down. >§inab'fa((en, r. n. ir., imp. fiet f)m; oAr p. ^inabgefaUen, to fall down. •Sinauf fteigen, v. n. ir., imp. ftteg tnuanf, p. fjinaufgeftiegen, to st«p or climb up. <§inau3'ge^en, v. n. ir., imp. ging fjinaug, p. f)mau^gegangen, to go out. ^inetn'brutfen, r. a. to press, drive or plunge in. <§mein'retten, v. n. ir., imp. x'lii l^in^ ein, p. ^ineingetitten, to ride into. "^mein'iragen, v. r. to venture in. ^m'nefimen, v. a. ir., imp. na^m t)tn, p. Mngencmmen, to take, receive, .^in'reidien, v. a. to reach, hand ; -, r. n. to suffice. •§in\reg', adv. away, ^iu'irerfen, x. a. ir., imp. trarf ^in, p. f)ingcn?crfen, to throw to, throw down, stat, sketch has- tily. <§tn^u'fugen, x. a. to add to, join, adjoin. ^irf6, m. -t6, pi -e, stag, hart, deer. ^t|e,/. -, heat, hotness, passion. .^od)— 5n 5n— Jtam 487 ^cAy, adj. liigh, lofty, sublime, eminent, great. ^^ocb'ljer^icjfeit,/. -, magnanimiiy, <5cdi'|'ciHi|cn, r. a. to esteem highly. i^cr, m. -it\ -6, pZ. >§cfe, yard, court, farm, manor, re>idence. •i^offen, r. n. to hope, expect. ^^cjfiniiiv^,/. -, pi. -cu, hope, ex- pectation. "Ocf^iiKV j)i. -c-5, -e, pL -e, courtier, courtling. <§ctu% /. -, pi -n, height, high- ness. «§cl)eit, /. -, pi -en, highness, greatness. ^cijl, adj. hollow, concave. ^bljmn, V. a. to scorn, jeer, scoff, mock. ^cf)n'Ividten, v. n, to laugh in scorn, scoff. ^clU,f. -, hell. <§5Uifcb, adj. hellish, infernal. ^cni>5, 771. -f^, -6, honey. ^c'liigtcpf, m. -e6, -6, pi -tc^fe, jar containing honey. ^cren, v. a. cf- n. to hear, hearken. ^crn, n. -e^, -6, pi >6in"ii£r, horn. .^iibfcb, adj. pretty, handsome, fak. ^iic\ti, m. -g, pi -, hillock, hill. ^uf)!i, n. -e^, -g, pd. >§iif)uer, fowl, hen. ^X ^om — Jtunjl ^amtn, n. -eg, -6, pi. -z, chimney, ^ommen, v n. ir., imp. tarn, p. ge* fire-place. fommen, to come, get to, ar- ^ampf, m. -z6, -g, pi ^dm^jfc, rive at, happen. battle, combat, fight. jlouig, m. -eg, -S, pi -c, king, ^amlpfer, m. -g, pi -, combatant, .^ouneu, v. n. ir., imp. tonnU, p. ge^ fighter. fonnt, be able, be permitted, ^aitH^ffpiet, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, prize- know. fight. Mcp^, m. -eg, -g, pi .^o^jfe, head, ^aufntann, m. -eg, -g, pi -leute, ^oru, n. -eg, -g, pi .Corner, grain, merchant. corn, ^aum, adv. scarce, hardly, scar- Jlorndf)re, /—, pZ. -n, corn-ear. cely. iiofllicb, adj. costly, precious, de- Mtd, adj. impudent, bold, hardy, licate. stout. Jlraft, /. -, pi Jlvdfte, force, .Kerflich, adv. boldly, stoutly. power. ^^e(j(e,/. -, pl-n, throat, gorge. ^rdftig, adj. strong, powerful, vi- ^eil, w. -eg, -g, pi -e, wedge. gorous. ^eln (feiner, feine, feineg), adj.prn. ^rdf)e,/ -, pi -n, crow. no, not any, no one, none. ^valle,/. -, pi -n, claw, clutch, ^ci'negmegg, adv. in no wise, by talon. no means, not at all. ^raiit adj. sick, ill, diseased, .^ennen, v. a. ir.., imp. fannte, p. ges ^veig, m. -eg, pi -e, circle, sphere fannt, to know, be acquainted Jlveifen, v. n. to move in a circle, with. turn round, revolve, whirl ^enntnif,/. -, pi -e, knowledge, round. science. .^reuj^ug, m. -eg, -g, pi. -giige^ Mtikff. -, pi -n, chain. crusade. ^eule,/. -, pi -u, club. ^vied)cn, v. n. ir., imp. frod), p. ge- .^inb, n. -eg, -g, pi. -er, child, in- frod)en, to creep, crawl, cringe, fant. fiiwn. ^Inbifch, adj. childish, childlike, ^vieg, m. -eg, -g, pi. -e, war. MaQZ,f.-,pl -n, complaint, la- ^rieger,m. -g,|)Z.-, warrior, cham- mentation. pion. ^lagen, u a. <^ n. to complain, ^rone,/ -, j^Z. -n, crown, coronet. lament, deplore. Mu.i)n, adj. bold, hardy, daring. ^Idglid), adj. lamentable, mourn- Jlummcr, m. -g, sorrow, grief, ful, pitiful. trouble, ^lar, adj. clear, bright, fair, plain, .^iimmern, i'. n. cf- imp. to grieve, evident. afflict, concern, regard ; tt>ag ^teib, n. -eg, -g, pi -er, garment, fiimnicrt mid) bag ? what do 1 dress. care for it ? ^lein, adj. ten, v. n. to shine, light, give light. Sidit, n. -eg, -6, pi -er, light. tMeb, G(^'. dear, beloved, pleasing. Siebe,/ -, love, affection. Sieben, v. a. to love, be fond of, like. ikhex, comp. of licb & gevn, cc^i?. rather, sooner, better. Sieb'lidifeit, /. -, loveliness, ami- ableness, sweetness. Sieb, n. -C0, -g, j^Z. -er, song, air, hymn. Siegen, v. n. ir., imp. lag, p. ge* legen, to lie, consist, lean. 490 m—Wtart SD^arfd^— aWog Soben, v. a. to praise, commend. Sorfen, V. a. <^ n. to call, decoy, b.iir, allure, entice. Scs'9e()en, v. n. ir., imp. ging lc6, p. Icsgegangen, to come off, be- gin, go off ; auf einen -, to at- tack one. 2i-0'rcipen, v. a, ir., imp. rif log, p. locJgeriffen, to tear off, break loose ; -V. r. ir. to disengage one'sself by force. Soo'annbeu, v. a. <^ r. ir., imp. iwanb leg, p. lo^geiKuiiben, to untwist, tear away, disengage one's self. SiJa^c, m. -n, fl. -, lion. i^ucin'fce,/. Lucinda. ^iitfe,/. -, pi. -n, gap, chasm, breach, defect. Jt'iiftdien, n. -i, pi. -, breeze. !i:iige,/, -, pi. -w, lie, untruth, fal- sehood. £uft,/. -, p/. Siijle, pleasure, joy, delight. SJiacbeii, v. a. to make, do, produce. SD^dcbtig, adj. mighty, powerful, potent. 2)Mbcben,7i. -g, pi. -, maid, maiden, girl. . SJlagcr, adj. meager, lean. 2)lagiftrat', m. -eg, -g, pi. -^, ma- gistrate. S)Zaguct', m. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, load- stone, magnet. SJivitlieb, n, -eg, -g, j?/. -er, may- song. S'Zajeftdt',/. -, pi. -en, majesty. 2'Lijeftd'ttfdv adj . majestic, majes- tical. 'SD'Zan, frn. one, they, people, men ; - fagt, they say, people say, it is said. S)(aiulHn-, mand^e, luandieg, prn. many a; mand)e,fZ. many, some, several. SDiaun, m. -eg, -g, pi. 5}Jdnnev, man. SRaunlidv adj. stout, brave. 9)?arf Ig, adj. full of marrow, pithy. SJlarf^all, m. -eg, -g, pZ. ^(xt\^hXit, marshal. SJld'^tguiig,/ -, 'pl. -^\\, modera- tion, temperance. 9Jtaut,?2. -eg, -g, pl. 3}iduler, mouth. 5!}led)a'iiifd% ar^;". mechanical. 3)let}r, ac^". cf* a^^;. more. SDlehi, nteine, mein, j57'w. my, mine. '^n\\i\\,v. a. 6c n. to think, suppose, mean, signify. 2Jieipel, m. -g, _pZ.-, chisel. SJletft, metfteug, aciv. most, mostly. 9JleIbcn, %. a. to mention, announ- ce, tell. SSJlenge,/ -, p/.-n, multitude, great many, great deal, plenty. 9Jlenfd),m. -en, ziZ. -en, man, person. 2)leu^|\tenf)erj, n. -eng, j)Z. -en, heart of man. 2)flenfdif)eit, / -, humanity, man- kind. 9)^enfdilid), adj. human, humane. 2}lerfen, x. a. to marke, note, per- ceive, observe. SD'leffen, i\ a. ir., imp. niaf, p. ge; meffen, to measure, compare; fidi mit einem-, to try one's strength against one. 2Jleu'dulmovb, m. -eg, -g, pl -e, assassination. 2)liene,/ -, pl -n, mien, air, look, countenance. aJlil'biglidi, mildly, charitably. 9}linbeft,a(^".least, smallest, lowest. ^li^brvuut, m. -eg, -g, pl -brdudje, abuse, misuse. SOZipmutl), m. -eg, -g, ill-humor, melancholy, sadness. ^it,pre. with, by, at, on, upon, to. 2>ltt'nef)men, v. a. ir., imp. naijm mit, p. mitgencmnien, to take along with. SD^it'taggfuppe,/. -, pl -n, dinner. 2Jlittcl, n. -g, pl -, middle, mean, means, expedient, remedy. 9Jlitten, adv. in the midst. 2)iogcn, v. n. ir., imp. mcdite, p. ges ' mcdit, to have a niiad, like, wish, be able. gnonb— en, v. a. to revenge, avenge ; -V. r. to revenge one's self, take vengeance. 9f{aclien, m. -^,pl. -, mouth, throat, jaws. Olab, 72. -eg, -g, pl. Sftdber, wheel. 9ianb, m. -eg, -g,^Z. 9?dnber, edge, brim, brink, margin. 9?afcn, m. -g, pl. -, turf, sod, clod. 9^*itl), m. -eg, -g, pl. 9^dt()e, coun- sel, advice, council, court, con- sultation; \i!xi\\ fanu 9^at[) n-ser; ben, that may be done, or it may happen. DlauBen, v. a. to rob, spoil. Olduber, m. -g, pl. -, robber, thief. OMu'bevbrut,/. -, robber-brood, a gang of robbers. Otandien, v. a. t— [Hing 9fllng3— Sanfl 493 JHcdit, n. -Ci5, -?, pi. -c, right, claim , privilege, law, justice. Stcitt'fcvti^eu, r. a. to justify, vin- dicate, exculpate. Siecfe, ?n. -n, pi -ii, giant, hero. Oiccfe'.i, V. a. to stretch, extend, rack. Sict'e,/. -, pi -n, speech, harangue, oration, discourse. SJeben, r. a. cf' n. to speak, talk, discourse. Oie'^ehna^ig, adj. regular ^leijeii, V. a. cf- r. to stii, move, rise. 9leldi, n. -e^, -6, joZ. -e, empire, realm, kingdom. JReidien, r. n. to reach, extend to. Steif, adj. ripe, mature. 9leii)e,/. -,_pZ.-ii, row, range, rank. 9ietn, acf/'. clean, pure, clear. Scei'niv^eu, v. a. to clean, purge, purify. Steife,/ -, pi -n, travel, journey. dieiiznii, adj. travelling; ber 9iei; fenbe, traveller. 9lei^en, r. a. ir., imp.xi^,p. geriffen, to tear, seize, draw ; -v. n. ir. to burst, split, chink. dhimi, V. a. 6f n. ir., imp. xitt, p. gerittcn, to ride, go on horse- ijack. JJieiter, m. -S, pi -, rider. Sleligioii',/. -, pi -en, religion. dldi^ics', adj. religious. Oiemien, r. ji. ir., imp. rannte, p. geraimt, to run, race, course. Sleft, m. -es?, -S, pi -e, rest, re- mainder. Sfieu'miitbig, adj. repentant, re- penting. DlidUen, r. a. direct, arrange, judge, execute, criticize. Dlid^tia, adj. right, exact, just, true. Oiiga, n. Riga. Otigaer, m. -g, pA. -, a native of kiga. Slingen, v. a. cf* n. ir., imp. rang, p. gerungen, to struggle, wrestle, wring. 9ihtg^, adv. around. 9itiig>Jum, ring^umf)er, adv. round, round about, all round. Dtitter, 771. -6, pi -, knight, cheva- lier. 9^c(), adj. raw, crude, rough, rude. dlci)x, 72..-eiJ, -$,pl -r, reed, cane. 9tcUcn, 1-. a. c^ n. to roll, trundle. OIc/foHftcdf, m. -es3, -e, pi. -ftocfp, rose-bush. dlc^, n. -|Te^, fl -ffe, horse, steed. 9tc§(eitt, n. -t>, pi -, little horse. '^zXi), adj. red. D^ucf, 771. -eg, -0, pi. -e, pull, fit, jolt, jerk. Dliicfen, m. -6, pi -, back, ridge. Dliicfiutt,/. -, pi -en, view, re- spect, consideration, regard. Stiicttreg, m. -eg, -3, pi -e, return, way back. Oluf, m- -eg, -g, _pZ. -e, calling, call, cry, clamor. Suufeu, t. a. 4^ 71. ir., imp. rief, j?. gerufen, to call, cry. S^ute,/. -, rest, repo.se. dtu'LHli\\m, n. —5, pi -, pillow. Siubig, ad^'. quiet, tranquil, calm. Otii^ren, r. a. , m. -C3, _/;/. (Sd|e, leap, jump, sentence, period. ©aitgeit, r. a. (^ n. ir., imp. fog, p. gcfo^en, to suck, absorb. @dugltiig (eduglein), m. -e, pl.-i, suckling, baby, babe. feviumij], adj. tarrying, tardy, di- latory, negligent. Caufcit, r. n. to whistle, bluster, rush. arme, swarm, crowd, throng, flight, cluster. iSdnvar^, adj. black, darit, gloomy. (Sdnrdvjcn, v. a. to blacken, black. (Sdiu">ebcn, n. Sweden. ©dnveif, m. -eei, -g, pl. -e, tail, train. @dniHMi(en, v. n. ir., imp. fdiUMeg, p. gefdnriecjen, to be silent, keep silence, silence, stop. (2dnr>ev, adj. heavy, weighty, diffi- cult, hard. ©dvirert, ?2. -e^, -g, pl. -er, sword. i£dnrefter,/. -, pl. -n, sister. @d)ivierti|. adj. hard, difficult. - ©dmnc'riv^feit,/. -, pl. -en, hard- ness, difficulty. (SdniMniien, v. n. ir., imp. f*\nang, p. gefdinnnigen, to swing, vi- brate ; v. r. ir. to swing, leap, soar, rise. — ., imp. fap, p. ge? feffen, to sit, be confined, fit. (Bo, adv. & c. so, thus, in that manner, in such a manner, such, so as, as, if. ©obalb', adv. as soon as. (Boijn, m. -eg, -g, pi. ©ijfine, son. (Boii) (foldiev, fol'd)e, fcild)eg} pr?i. such. ©oKen, V. n. ir. to be obliged, owe, shall, ought. •Soni'mertag, m. -eg, -g, pi -c, summer-day. ©oubevn, c. but. ^cixm,f. -, pi -n. sun. ©onj^, aJu. else, otherwise, in other respects, besides, at other times, formerly. ©o^ljron, m. Sophron. (gorge,/. -, pi. -n, care, concern, solicitude, apprehension. ©orgen, v. n. cf- a. to care for, take care, provide for, fear, appre- hend. (Sorg'fdttig, adj. solicitous, care- ful, diligent. evtvieben, to drive away, chase, expel. 93euntei'ten,r. n. cf- n to tarry, stay, delay, retard. S3cnintu'^evuiig, f. -, wondering, as- tonishment, surprise, admiration. SSerwiinfdU', adj. accursed, detes- table. 93er5el)'ren, r. a. to consume, eat. 93er^ei'()en, v. a. ir., imp. tierjicfi, p. aerjicfien, to pardon, forgive, excuse. 33et5ei'f)uug,/ -, pardon, forgive- ness. Sjerjtveif lung,/ -, despair, despe- ration. Sii't, adj. cf- adv. much, many, a great deal, abundance. aSteUeidht', adj. perhaps, may be, possibly. SScgel, m. -6, pi. 23cgcl, bird, fowl. 93olf, n. -e^, -^, pi 236Ifer, people, nation. ^clWUljxex, m. -g, pi. -, teacher of the people. S3cU, adj. full, filled, complete. 3BoUcii'bcn, V. a. to end, finish, ac- complish. S3oU'faitgen,i;.a. to suckfull, absorb. 93on, pre. of, from, by, on, upon, in. S3or, pre. before, from, of, ago, since. 33orfaU, m. -eg, -g, pi. -fade, case, event, incident, occurrence. Q3cr'fa([en, r, n. ir., imp. jxel tor, p. to crgef alien, to happen, arrive, occur, come to pass. SSorl)cr', adv. before, previously, before-hand. SSorljiu', adv. before, heretofore, a little while ago. 3[)cvnclim, adj. er, n^eld^e, wetee^, prn. who? that, which, what, some. 9Se(fen, v. n. to wither, fade, dry. aBelie,/. -, pi -11, wave, billow, surge. 2Bel[d^Ianb, n. -e^, -g, Italy. aScIt, /. -, pi -eti, world. 22cnben, r, a. <^ n. to turn, di- rect to. SSenig, adj. 4' ^dv. little, few, some. ®enn, adv. cf- c. if, when, when- ever. ®er, prn. who, he who, whoever. ©erben,!-. n. ir., imp. irurbe (rrarb), p. geircrben, to become, grow, be, happen. SSerfen, r. a, cf* ji. ir., imp. warf, p. getDCifen, to throw, cast ; fid) etnem ]u yii^en -, to throw one's self at one's feet. SSerti), 772. -ec\ -s, worth, value, price. SBcfpe,/. -, pi -Ti, wasp. 21>e|en,f. a. to rub, Whet, sharpen. 02ibrtg, adj. loathsome, nauseous. SBie, adv. cf* c. how, as, when, like. SBieber, flf/r, again, anew; -hrm men, to come again, return. SSiege,/. -, pi -n, cradle. SBitb, adj. wild, savage, unculti- vated. SDilbpret, 72- -e^, -^, game. 2BiI[e, 772. -n^, will, mind, purpose. 2I>Utfcm'men, adj. welcome. SSinb, 772. -e^, -6, pi -e, wind, air, ^Dtubsbraitt,/ -, pZ. -brdute, hu-"- ricane, squall of ^\-ind. SDinfcL m. -6, pi -, angle, comer, nook. 3Bhtfelrieb, m. Winkelried. SBinfelit, r. 72. to whine, whimper, moan. 2D in jig, adj, diminutive^ petty, small SBirf— 335ut^ 3a--3uf 503 2Birflid\ adj. actual, real, true. 5li>irtl), w. -zi,-i>, pl.-i, host, land- lord, master of the house. 2BI)Jcn, r. a. cf* n. ir., imp. unifte, jh ijeani^t, to know. iSi^icj, adj. witty, ingenious. ^^c, adv. where. SBcc^e,/.-, pi -n, billow, wave. SScgen, v. n. to wave, fluctuate. ilScber, adv. whence, from what pluce. SBchiii/, adv. whither, what way. SBcbl, adv. well, indeed, probably. SBcM'gefaden, 7z. -g, pleasure, de- light 2Sct;l'rieciienb, adj. fragrant. 2Bcl)I'tI)atcr, 772. -^, _pZ. -, bene- liictor. SBcM^tf)dti9, adj. beneficent, cha- ritable. SScbltlmn, V. n. ir., imp. ff)at it»cf)I, p. wclilget^an, to do well, do good, benefit. SScf'nuug,/. -, fl -en, dw^elling, lodging, residence. S©clfe,/.-, pi. -n, cloud. 2i>cUen, v. a. cf- n. ir. to will, be willing, have a mind, desire, wi^h, want. QIscaKft,/-, delight, bliss. 2i>cnne,/. -, ^Z. -n, delight, plea- sure, bliss. SBcrt, n. -esJ, -€, pi. -e, word. UBcrtdum, n. -6, pi. -, (little) word. 2Bucbt,/ -, weight, burden. aCunbe,/ -, />Z. -n, wound, hurt. aSunfd% 771. -eg, pi. SBiinfdie, wish, desire. SBuufd^eii, r. a. to wish, desire. 2Biirbe,/. - pi. -n, dignity, honor ; bag if: unter meincr 2Gurbe. that is beneath me. ®uTbi^, adj. worthy, deserving. SBurgtein, n. -g, pi. -, radicle. SSiirjreid^ adj. rich in spices, aro- matic, ©utfi'fdiauernb, adj. trembling with rage. 3 3al)e, adj. tough, tenacious, clingy. 3a()(,/ -, pZ. -en, number. Sciblen, r. a. to number, tell, count. 3a^m, adj. tame, domestic ; - nia? dicn, to tame. 3afin, 77?. -eg, -g, ;7Z.3at)ne, tooth. 3art, adj. tender, soft, delicate. 3drtlt*, adj. tender, soft, delicate. 3au'bcTfd^ein, m- -eg, -f>, pi -e, fascinating appearance. 3ciubern, v. n. to loiter, linger, de- lay. 3e'f)ente, m. -n, pi -n, tithe. 3eigen, v. a. to show, point out. 3eiger, m. -g, pi. -, shower, hand. 3eit,/ -, pi. -en, time. 3eit!g, adj. early, timely, ripe. 3crbreM^en, r. a. & n. ir., imp. ^er; brad\ p. ^erbrcdr.cn, to break to pieces, fracture. 3tnfd^mct'tern, v. a. to crash, crush, shatter, dash to pieces. 3euge, m. -n, pi -u, witness. 3eug, 772. Jupiter. 3ief)en, v. a. & n. ir., imp. jog, p. gejcgen, to draw. 3iel, 71. -eg, -g, _pZ. -c, term, limit, aim, scope. 3ielen, r. n. to aim, take one's aim. 3temen, r. imp. to become, be fit, be suitable. 3if'ferblatt, n. -eg, -g, pi -blatter, dial 3innern, adj. tin, pewier, made ol pewter. 3ifd}etn, v. n. to whisper. 3n, pre. & adv. at, by, to, for, in, on ; - Supe, on foot. 3iidi'tigung,/. -, pZ. -en, chastise- ment, correction. 3ucfen, r. a. & n. to draw (with a short quick motion), shrug, shrink. Su'cferbrcb, n. -eg, -g, pi -e, su- gar-bread, sweet biscuit. Sufall, m. -Eg, -g, pi. 3ufdUe; 604 3uf— 3uf Suf— 3t»i chance, accident, adventure ; butdi -, by chance. Sufvie'Den, adj. content, contented, satisfied. 3ug, m. -ej?, -6, pZ. Sug^r train, passage, expedition. Bugleidi', adv. at the same time, at once, together. Suviid'bleiben, v. n. ir., imp. Blieb juviicf, p. juriidfgeblieben, to re- main behind. 3uriicf'rceicben, r. n. ir., imp. trtid) juriicf, j9. jurii(fgetr»iAen, to re- cede, retire, withdraw. Su'rufen, r. a. & n. ir., imp. rief ju, p, jugerufen, to give a call, ac- claim. Bufam'menbriicfen, v. a. to com- press. Su'fe^en, v. n^ ir., imp. fa() ju. p. jugefc^en, to look at, look upon, suffer. 3u'fe()enb & ju'fefienb^, adv. visibly. 3u'»erficbt,/. -, confidence, trust, assurance. 3u»or', adv. before, first, hereto- fore, formerly. 3utt)ei'Ien, adv. sometimes, at times. 3tt>ar, c. certainly, it is true, to be sure, indeed. 3'n?ei, adj. two. 3»eifeln, v. n. to doubt of a thing, question. 3tveig, m. -e^, -6, pi. -e, branch, bough, twig. 3weigen, v. a. to graft. 3ti?ei'fd)neibig, adj. two-edged. 3tr>ifctien, pre. between, among, amongst. ^i%^-^4r /^dj riAR "0 !9'i2 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: Nov. 2006 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drrve Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111